《A Transmigrator’s Story in the Hyuga’s Main Branch》


 1. The Awakening of Hikari Hyuga

    1. The Awakening of Hikari Hyuga


    With a quick movement, a three-year-old boy automatically pushed his upper body up from his cozy bed.


    His name was Hikari Hyuga. He started slowly gasping for air, showing how suddenly he had woken up.


    This wasn''t a normal waking up for him; his Byakugan had turned on by itself, without him even knowing. Around his eyes, veins bulged prominently.


    With keen interest, Hikari began examining his young body, noticing his small hands in a way that felt strange.


    His gaze then shifted to look around the room he found himself in, feeling very surprised.


    Understanding that he was now a child in the ''fantastical'' Naruto world, a ce he only knew from stories, made him feel shocked.


    He then finally epted that this really wasn''t his old life; he had somehow really moved to this universe from his previous life as an adult on Earth. And there was no going back as well.


    ''I finally gained full control of this body... Thank God...'', Over the past three days, his soul from Earth had somehow found its way into this young body, by an inexplicable process beyond his present scientific understanding, and, at first, had been fighting for control with the original soul of the three-year-old boy.


    It was a battle with no clear victor; instead, the two souls merged, giving rise to a new consciousness now also referring to himself as ''Hikari'', which was the name of that child.


    Even in the most vulnerable state, the soul of a three-year-old child from this world matched in power with his adult soul from Earth, making a merger the ''best'' possible oue for the other, Earthly spirit.


    Following that, once merged, this newly fused soul, now also calling himself ''Hikari'', began theplex process of adapting to the child''s chakra and body, along with absorbing all relevant memories. This period of adjustment was far from easy,sting three full days.


    Throughout these days, Hikari existed in a sort of limbo, caught in a deeply ufortable, blurred state of semi-consciousness that could best be described as some bizarrea.


    It was a trying time, marked by confusion and a sense of disorientation as two distinct sets of memories and experiences intertwined. Now, as he finally emerged from this state, Hikari couldn''t help but feel a profound sense of relief.


    The ordeal had ended, and he was now a new being, with the memories of his past life on Earth and his current life as a Hyuga child joined into one.


    ''It seems that I acquired Byakugan during this whole ordeal, and it activated instinctively as soon as I woke up...'', Hikari mused, his gaze wandering over the familiar yet newly intriguing confines of his room.


    As he turned his attention inward, observing his inner organs working in real-time and the intricate web of his chakra pathway systemponents, a sense of wonder washed over him.


    ''Is this what it feels like to have superpowers?'', He thought, a hint of joy threading through his amazement. The sensation was extraordinary, the potent energy and chakra amassing around his eyes granting him abilities far beyond his wildest imaginations.


    Hikari was experiencing a profound shift in perception. The world around him, once ordinary, nowy open and transparent, visible in ways he could never have anticipated. The rity and depth of vision afforded by the Byakugan were astonishing.


    It was as if he had been given the ultimate tools of observation and insight: irvoyance that pierced through walls, a 360-degree vision that left no blind spots, and a telescopic range that could discern details from great distances.


    This newfound perspective was both exhrating and overwhelming. To transition from an ordinary existence on Earth to wielding powers that werepletely ''magical'', in his previous life, and this many of them at the same time, was a shock of the highest order.


    Hikari felt a huge wave of tion as he contemted the extent of his abilities. The world seemed different now, richer, and filled with endless possibilities.


    And there was more to it than just the advanced capabilities of Byakugan. Hikari gradually noticed that everything he experienced felt ''much sharper.''


    Colors around him were more vivid, more pronounced, as if the world had suddenly been painted in a richer palette.


    His mind, too, seemed to process visual information at a speed that was unheard of in his previous life, making it feel as if time itself had slowed down for him.


    This wasn''t just a new ability; it was aplete transformation of his sensory experience, akin to upgrading aputer''s graphics card across a dozen generations in one fell swoop.


    The enhancements extended to his perception of light and shadow as well. Areas of the room that would normally be hidden in shadow or dimly lit were as clear to him as everything else, revealing details that would have otherwise gone unnoticed.


    Simrly, he could adapt to intense levels of light streaming in from the windows without being overwhelmed, his eyes adjusting effortlessly to maintain rity regardless of the lighting conditions.


    Hikari''s gaze then swept across his room, taking in the surroundings that reflected the wealth and status of the Hyuga n, especially of someone of his pedigree within the family - the real member of the ''Main Branch'' family.


    The space was adorned in the feudal style typical of the Hyuga household, yet it boasted a richness that spoke of ancient elegance. The furnishings were of high quality, with ornate designs that married functionality with aesthetic appeal.


    It was also very far beyond what one small child would require in terms of just its size alone.


    His attention then eventually drifted to an image ced near his bed, a portrait of a young couple dressed in Konoha''s standard ''Jonin'' shinobi uniforms, their features unmistakably also Hyuga with their pale eyes and traditional hairstyles.


    These were his parents, as recalled from his integrated memories. However, instead of warmth or happiness, a surge of anger welled up within him at the mere sight of them.


    The poor physical condition of the body he now inhabited¡ªbruised and beaten¡ªand the soul''s profound emotional turmoil and fragmentation that had facilitated his sessful transmigration were, in his ''awakened'' eyes, directly attributable to these two individuals.


    This realization cast a shadow over the room''s elegance, tainting his perception of his new environment with a bitterness that ran deep.


    The physical scars and emotional wounds he bore were a stark contrast to the wealth and prestige his family''s surroundings suggested.


    ''Thankfully, in this strange world, even children have really advanced physical stats, so the damage has been mostly healed by now during these three days I was in aa...,'' Hikari shook his head, diverting his gaze away from the picture as this thought crossed his mind.


    The original soul in this body would never have thought badly of its parents. However, now, with the knowledge of an adult from a previous life, knowing the Naruto story, having a view, on rted matters at hand, from the outside, and a really stronger cognitive ability, for some reason, even than his old form on Earth, not to mention that a three-year-old child, the ''new '' Hikari could only reach one conclusion at present.


    This conclusion led him to feel no positive feelings or opinions towards the body''s recently passed away biological parents. In fact, they were both negative broadly speaking instead.


    At that moment, Hikari also realized this was the first time he could think so clearly since he had been in that limbo state for the past few days. He was amazed at how wonderful it felt to be in control again.


    ''And not only that...'', Hikari thought, ''I feel like my ability to think clearly, process information quickly and in a veryrge capacity,pared to before, remember things, and form new memories is way stronger than it ever was in my past life on Earth or in this body''s memory.''


    These thoughts came to him as he was previously reflecting on the past events and developments, that started unfolding since a few months ago, which had left the original body in such a poor state, and how it all determined his new feelings toward his parents.


    ''Why is this happening? Could it be because two souls have merged into one? Is that also why I was able to activate the Byakugan so early? Are dojutsu, souls, and minds really that closely linked in this world?'', Hikari found himself pondering many things at once, fully using his new mental abilities to theorize and understand many aspects in just a few seconds.


    ''Yet, for this newfound edge to be utilized to its fullest potential, there''s also a necessity for bnce...'', He contemted further, ''It seems that I''ll need to rigorously train my physical energy next to match with the increase in my spiritual energy. Only then can I also, in theory, expand my overall chakra potential pool and harness these abilities to their fullest potential''


    Hikari found that he could recall many details about the Naruto story and universe from his past life''s memory, much more vividly and urately than one might expect, given how little significance the Naruto manga held for him previously and how vaguely marked it was there.


    It seemed to him as though this enhanced memory was a bonus, or a ''buff,'' he received as a time traveler.


    He thought about how some third-rate novels he knew from his past life involved characters getting a ''system'' after they transmigrated into new worlds¡ªsomething he found utterly unappealing.


    To him, the idea of being stuck with a ''system''¡ªa contrived, artificial construct that could dictate his actions and monitor him constantly¡ªwas far from desirable.


    It felt too much like being under someone else''s control, trapped by a set of rules and guidelinesid out by an unknown creator with possibly suspicious intentions.


    Hikari was relieved he didn''t end up with such a ''system.'' Instead, he preferred the natural abilities and knowledge he had, seeing them as far more valuable, freeing, and overall safer.


    Hikari gradually turned his attention to the world beyond his room, noting that it was daylight outside, "It should be afternoon...", He guessed, his gaze drifting across the courtyard visible from his window.


    But then, his sight began to extend even further, a testament to the incredible telescopic ability granted by the Byakugan. His vision pierced through the walls of other buildings, encountering only a handful of people.


    Among them, Hikari spotted several Hyuga with surprised expressions, each bearing the distinctive Cursed Seals on their foreheads, ''They are from the branch family...'', He realized, noting their startled looks directed towards him.


    They whispered among themselves before one hurried off, possibly to inform someone else, eventually moving beyond the current reach of Hikari''s Byakugan.


    As he witnessed this, Hikari quickly pieced together a few exnations for their rushed behavior and possible next actions, from what he had just seen and this body''s memory, even as his mind wandered back to thoughts of his past life on another/dimension.


    In his previous life there, Hikari was just an average man in every sense¡ªlooks, intellect, status, and wealth. This averageness led to a life devoid of serious rtionships, happiness, and pleasures that seemed reserved for those more ''fortunate'' or talented.


    Adding to his struggles, he could only watch helplessly as his parents, the only people who truly cared for him and whom he deeply cared about, sumbed to severe illnesses. His inability to afford better medical care meant he couldn''t extend their lives.


    Tragically, Hikari''s own life mirrored theirs; he too passed away in his early 40s due to a sudden illness and ack of resources tobat it before waking up here a few days ago in that strange manner.


    Determined not to repeat the powerlessness and vulnerabilities of his past life, Hikari vowed to seize control of his destiny in this new world.


    He resolved to amass as much power as possible, ensuring a life filled with pleasure and positivity, making the most of this extraordinary second chance.


    This time, fortune seemed to favor him¡ªhe had been reborn into the Main Branch of the Hyuga n, one of the wealthiest and, more crucially, most powerful shinobi families in the entire Ninja World, a ce ruled by strength and might. He vowed to never squander it.


    This twist of fate gave Hikari a unique advantage and a clear path to fulfill his vows. He recognized the significance of his new status, not just for the material wealth it brought, but for the potential to gain the strength and power he had longed for in his previous life.


    With the abilities of the Hyuga at his disposal and the lessons from his past life etched into his memory, Hikari was more determined than ever to carve out a sessful, fulfilling life for himself¡ªone where he would never again feel helpless or defeated by any circumstances.


    As Hikari finished reflecting on his past life, organizing his thoughts, making promises to himself, and feeling a surge of excitement about his future life, he suddenly shifted to a state of calm.


    His Byakugan detected an older, powerful male figure slowly approaching his room after entering his range of vision. Hikari, nowposed and ready, thought, ''So you are here...''

 2. The Silent Game with the Fifth Elder

    2. The Silent Game with the Fifth Elder


    As the older individual softly slid open the Japanese-style door to Hikari''s room, he stepped inside. Hikari, with his Byakugan activated, quickly took in every detail of the man''s appearance.


    He appeared to be in his mid-forties, which was close but slightly past the prime ''peak'' age for a shinobi in this world, generally considered to be around mid-thirties.


    Hikari knew from his memory already that this man was a father, with three qualified children who had already been married and living on their own in different ces.


    These children now resided in different areas of the Main Branch''s central housing within the stretched-out Hyugapound.


    This man had one of the highest authorities within the Hyuga n, besides the Hyuga Patriarch himself, as he was one of the Hyuga n''s Main Branch''s nine and only Elders.


    His youngest child, already in their mid-teens, was considered an adult by the standards of this world, with the others being in their early and mid-twenties.


    So, alongside his wife, and some Branch Family ''attendants'' she was in charge of, they were the only current inhabitants of thisrge Fifth Elder''s line''s main estate.


    It was located right in the center of the entire Hyuga''spound, just near other Elders'' main estates and in thest circle of housing in front of the Patriarch''s own.


    ''Despite being slightly past his prime, this man is certainly very strong and not to be underestimated. He''s on apletely different levelpared to those branch members I observed earlier...'', Hikari concluded almost instantly after his thorough examination.


    Through the precise vision of his Byakugan, Hikari could see the exceptional level of training and care the man had put into maintaining his body.


    His chakra pathway system was notably well-developed, indicating a significant reservoir of chakra potential that spoke to his prowess as a shinobi.


    Moreover, Hikari noted the man''s overall bearing, which radiated the authority of someone ustomed to wielding great social power within the n.


    Every step he took was measured and deliberate, characteristic of a seasoned professional whose movements were honed to perfection, always ready to jump into action.


    His facial expression was that of a battle-hardened veteran, giving away nothing. In great contrast to the branch family members Hikari had observed before, this man''s demeanor revealed absolutely no weaknesses or emotions, his face as unreadable as a poker yer''s.


    As his feet touched the tatami floor of the room, designed in the ssic Japanese style, his aura was unmistakable. He radiated a sense of strength and authority.


    d in the traditional attire of the Hyuga n, his long hair perfectlyplementing the distinctive white eyes that marked their heritage, the elder''s entrance into the room wasmanding.


    Notably, his forehead was also unmarked, free of the Cursed Seal that members of the Side Branch typically bore, further showing his status within the main family and the n''s hierarchy. Side Branch members were all expected to cover the Cursed Seal at all times.


    ''Takumi Hyuga, the 5th Elder of the Hyuga n, one of the most powerful Elite Jonin in the entire n, if my limited memory serves me right...'', Hikari thought, quickly piecing together and analyzing the identity of the man before him.


    In fact, there was no difference in power or strength between various Elders, they were just historically numerically sorted randomly, and alongside the Patriarch''s line they constituted the so-called Main Branch.


    As he tried to piece together this information, he simultaneously made an effort to rise from hisrge bed, intending to show the proper respect and salute while saying, "Fifth Elder -sama!"


    "It''s alright, Hikari-kun! Don''t get up, just rest, you were pretty hurt before...", Takumi responded with a calm yet firm tone, moving swiftly to Hikari''s side.


    He assisted the young boy with confidence and ease, guiding him back to rest against his pillow and gently but firmly preventing him from rising again with a still calm look on his face.


    On the other hand, after nodding and stopping moving, throughout this interaction, Hikari couldn''t shake the feeling that Takumi''s keen eyes were also evaluating him silently. As the elder drew closer, his gaze seemed particrly drawn to Hikari''s still-active Byakugan.


    Aware that he himself had the potential to someday rise to a position of influence on par with Takumi''s, Hikari nheless recognized the current reality of his situation.


    At just three years old, he was at the very beginning of his journey, and the shadow cast by his parents'' past actions¡ªactions he deemed bizarre and detrimental¡ªalsoplicated his path to getting a great role within the n, such as that of a Third Elder, that should rightfully belong to only him now, in the foreseeable future.


    The extent of this impact and the steps he needed to take to mitigate or reverse its effects remained unclear to him.


    Given these developments, Hikari understood the importance of adhering to the n''s deeply rooted values. In the presence of an elder like Takumi, and within the hierarchical structure of the Hyuga n¡ªa n that ces immense value on tradition, history, manners, and a clear understanding of one''s ce¡ªhe needed to exhibit the utmost respect now.


    Recognizing his current position as akin to that of an infant in the eyes of the n''s leadership, and his lower standing within the n hierarchy, Hikari chose to act like that.


    Such conduct was essential, not just for maintaining harmony now but also forying the groundwork for his future endeavors within the n. Therefore, if the Elder didn''t stop him on time, he would''ve really at least stood up to salute as well. As for bowing to him, it was probably only something that the Side Branch members had to do in the presence of elders.


    Meanwhile, Takumi''s demeanor softened slightly as he still continued to speak, "Hikari-kun, in the future, there''s really no need to greet me with such formality. After all, I am legally your custodian at the moment. And please, feel free to call me Takumi-san, or even Takumi-sensei if you agree to be my student as we talked about before next that is.",


    He suggested, still maintaining a close proximity to Hikari''s bed, well within what could be considered the ''family'' social circle radius Hikari knew about in his past life. Despite the sternness that usually marked his expressions, there was also a noticeably warmer pitch in his voice now for some reason.


    As Hikari quickly processed the events of the past few moments, his mind began to spin with thoughts ''The activation of the Byakugan at my age is probably a much bigger deal than I initially thought. This is a very good development for me...'',


    He analyzed almost instantaneously, soaking up every bit of information like a sponge. This time, his observations weren''t limited to the physical closeness, the tone of voice, or bodynguage; Takumi''s choice of words, especially inparison to their interactions before Hikari''s Byakugan activation, was particrly telling.


    The fact that Takumi added the suffix "-kun" after Hikari''s name, despite being an elder of the n and considering Hikari''s mere three years of age, was nothing short of extraordinary.


    It was exceedingly rare for anyone in their world to address a three-year-old so formally and seriously, which spoke volumes, especially given Takumi''s esteemed status within the n.


    Moreover, the shift from using "-sama" to "-san" about himself suggested a significant change in Takumi''s view of their rtionship. It implied that Hikari''s standing should be considered much higher than before, not yet equal but far removed from the respect typically expected from a child of Hikari''s age towards someone of Takumi''s rank.


    Although the Byakugan enhanced its wielder''s ability to psychoanalyze opponents by observing physiological responses¡ªsuch as increased sweat production, elerated heart rates, and other chemical changes in the body¡ªmaking it difficult for most people to deceive or act in front of a Hyuga, Hikari''s couldn''t use that approach currently, due to obvious reasons, to analyze Takumi, so he applied some broad knowledge from his previous life.


    His Byakugan had only recently awakened, leaving his abilities in a nascent, almost nk state. Furthermore, the majority of the Hyuga, especially elite jonin-level figures like Takumi, have mastered the art of controlling these external indicators.


    Their profound understanding of the Byakugan,bined with an intimate knowledge of their own body''s workings, allows them to regte their physiological reactions meticulously.


    As the conversation unfolded, Takumi continued to inquire about Hikari''s health, disying a semnce of concern that seemed somewhat out of characterpared to their previous interactions.


    Hikari, for his part, assured Takumi that he waspletely fine now, answering each question in turn.


    This exchange, he noted, constituted a significant portion of the total time they had spent together since Hikari had moved into the Hyugaplex a few months ago, following the death of his parents.


    Takumi, as a prominent elder of the n, had numerous responsibilities that kept him away from this housing estate.


    He was deeply involved in managing the Hyuga n''s privatemercial ventures that his own Fifth Elder main line was historically involved, or their own ''share of the pie'' better said.


    Additionally, his duties extended to various roles within the n and possibly even assignments inside of the Konoha administration as well, leaving him little time for personal interactions between them.


    The conversations they had had in the past were brief and marked by a cooler, more distant demeanor from Takumi.


    The main thing Hikari got from those interactions is that he could soon start his training with him after he turned three years old, which Hikaru did around a month ago, but refused to start trying due to some childish reasons.


    And, now, with Hikari being thest surviving member of the Third Elder main line and still just a child, it fell upon Takumi to oversee Hikari''s inheritance and responsibilities as well.


    As their conversation progressed in a following few minutes, Hikari began to get the gist of Takumi''s underlying motives at the beginning of their seemingly casual exchange between an elder and a youngin; To evaluate Hikari''s capabilities for his motives and also his future role within the Hyuga n likely on some kind of ''mission'' from the rest of the higher-ups.


    ''It''s good that he''s so ambitious and risk-taking. At least he won''t stand in the way of me iming my rightful property and status in the future if all goes ording to n...'', He thought, feeling a surge of relief before he suddenly experienced piercing pain in his eyes.

 3. Conversation about The Byakugan

    3. Conversation about The Byakugan


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    As the previous thoughts circted in his mind, Hikari''s expression suddenly changed. A sharp pain pulsed across his eyes, causing his youthful face to contort into a big frown.


    Simultaneously the veins around his eyes receded as the piercing gaze of the dojutsu faded away. His eyes returned to their normal white appearance, characteristic of the Hyuga n.


    Quickly observing the change in Hikari, Takumi responded with a reassuring tone, "Don''t worry, Hikari-kun. You''ve just awakened your Byakugan, and at such a young age, without any kind of training to control these eyes, it''s normal that you''ve overexerted them quickly."


    "You should be able to activate the Byakugan again after some rest. Probablyter today or tomorrow morning after you take a sleep. The difort you''re feeling now will also fade in a few minutes or half an hour at the longest, so you don''t need to worry about that, just hold on and try to limate for simr situations in the future. After all, in our n, it happens a lot.", Takumi continued informing him, alluding to situations of their dojutsu potential overuse.


    "Also, the more you activate it in the future, the better you will instinctively get at efficiently controlling it, as well as using it for longer durations, even without any outside guidance.",


    "But, going to the failure is never good. You should use those eyes in the future as much as possible to improve them, however, you should never go toplete overexertion and failure like today. There are better methods and protocols for strengthening them...",


    Takumi continued speaking for quite a while, after seeing Hikari was silent and eagerly listening to his exnations. It was obvious that he started hinting at something like training him again.


    Takumi patiently dispelled all of Hikari''s concerns in a simple way without withholding any information. Something that reassured Hikari quite well and led him to respond simrly.


    "I understand, Takumi-sensei, thank you for all the rification... And... If your offer is still valid, this junior would like to ask for you to guide me to the right way of using these eyes in the right way, amongst other simr things, in the future as well...", Hikaru unnaturally voiced.


    Hikari finally responded after carefully listening in silence for a while to all that valuable information. He decided that it was best to be direct at this time to connect all the possible sudden changes in his personality to this exact incident that brought him into thisa.


    His voice carried a note of gratitude and slight determination, though a slight frown still lingered on his face due to the previous matter. This confirmed Takumi''s urate guess about the difort that remained even after Hikari had deactivated his Byakugan now.


    Not only that, Hikari felt like his eyes were already seeing multiple sights of the Elder inside the room due to the temporary loss of vision caused by his first official use of his Byakugan.


    After hearing Hikari''s response, Takumi, who had maintained his usual stern andposed demeanor, softened his tone further, indicating another shift in his attitude towards the young Hyuga, "Of course, the offer stands..'', He said, his voice carrying a slight satisfaction.


    "I''ve mentioned before that as soon as you''re ready to begin, we can start your official training, covering various areas you might be interested in rted to our n''s expertise.",


    "Our job as elders is to help grow and support new talents in the Main Branch and the Hyuga n, just like you. Waking up your Byakugan so young is very important, and it would be a big waste for our n if we didn''t help someone with your abilities reach their full potential.


    "If we don''t help someone like you, then who should we help? So, I''ll be the one to officially teach you in the future, Hikari-kun, nice to know you again. You can ask me anything now."


    "Then please, I would like you to tell me more most important information about the Byakugan dojutsu that I awakened, in general, Sensei, that you think would be the most valuable to me both now and overall for my future development...", Hikari immediately replied.


    He recognized that at this moment, it was more beneficial for him to soak up as much knowledge as possible rather than pretend to understand a topic about which he knew very little.


    After all, he was now living in the reality of this world, far removed from the confines of aic book.


    The Naruto series from his previous life might have provided only about 10% of the crucial information about this world in general.


    That was only surface-level knowledge at the end of the day, not only about Byakugan, but everything in general. Good for inspiration, but it wasn''t practicable and actionable on its own.


    Therefore, he wanted to extract as much high-value information from Takumi as possible. And the best way to achieve that would be to just let an expert like him speak about what he thinks is the most important instead of blindly poking and guessing around for a long time.


    Takumi gave a slight nod before beginning his exnation right away, "I won''t talk about what the Byakugan actually is, as you''re probably already familiar with that aspect. Instead, I''ll focus on how to utilize it properly now that you''ve awakened it.


    "It''s extremely rare for someone to awaken the Byakugan at such a young age as yours and without any assistance. Typically, it''s a few yearster in childhood, because children at your age usuallyck the chakra capacity to awaken the Byakugan.",


    "At thatter time, it''s done using specialized n protocols of hand seals and chakra control, under the supervision of n seniors, among other ingredients. That''s another reason why it''s so very rare to be in your situation, and why your Byakugan quickly exhausted itself along with your chakra.",


    "To be frank, it''s because you don''t yet know how to use it properly. But I''ll exin how to do so next and help you work on it over time. Are you following along so far, Hikari-kun?"


    ''So, in theory, this could mean that I also have a really strong innate instinctive chakra control, a good chakra capacity, and a good gic advantage, in order for me to open the Byakugan so early...'',


    Hikari mulled over Takumi''s exnation, thoughtfully considering each word, ''He mentioned it''s extremely rare to awaken the Byakugan at my age, but not unprecedented.'',


    ''From what I recall of the original story, it''s quite possible I might have set a new record. Is that the case, or is he choosing not to disclose this to keep me from bing overconfident in the future?'', Hikari thought all while nodding to Takami, signaling him to continue lecturing.


    Having been born into the Main Branch of the Hyuga n, Hikari had ess to many high-quality, valuable scrolls tailored for children scattered throughout his previous home, where he lived with his parents, ever since he could remember.


    Both of his parents were also real Elite Jonin who often discussed such matters amongst themselves and with him.


    As a result, Hikari had solid foundational knowledge about the Byakugan, its significance as an ancient Kekkei Genkai of their n, the nature of what Kekkei Genkai actually was, various shinobi high-impact knowledge, and the various powers that could be manifested through the Byakugan. This information was already embedded in the memory of his current body.


    With his background knowledge, Hikari was now focused on getting practical tips from Takumi, looking for advice that was right for his own situation in developing the Byakugan.


    He was eager to understand the best ways to train after awakening his Byakugan so young, searching for specific exercises or strategies that would be most helpful to him.


    Having grasped the basics from what Takumi had exined earlier on why he awakened it so young, Hikari was keen to discover what his next training steps should be. He wondered how to use his unique position to better his Byakugan abilities.


    Thus, with a forward-looking attitude and a thirst for practical guidance, Hikari next replied and asked Takumi what the best steps would be for him to further develop his Byakugan, taking into ount his distinct situation of having awakened it at an unusually young age.


    "That''s an excellent question, Hikari-kun. Your first step should be to learn how to intentionally activate and deactivate your Byakugan smoothly. Moving from instinctual use to deliberate control is vital, especially considering your youth and its recent awakening.",


    "Keeping your Byakugan under control is the most crucial part at this stage. Once you''ve mastered this, you can focus on enhancing your Byakugan''s abilities further. I''ll arrange for some scrolls to be brought to you that cover this topic. They''ll guide you on using simple hand seals and chakra control techniques to manage the chakra flow of your Byakugan, as well as doing it from your biologically simpler facial muscle memory side, it''s also in there. It''s all quite straightforward, and you''ll find all the instructions you need in those scrollster.",


    As Takumi shared this guidance, his demeanor remainedposed yet approachable, a bnce that reflected both his status as an elder and his role as a mentor. His voice carried a tone of encouragement as if hinting at his genuine interest in Hikari''s future development.


    However, Hikari still had more questions, "Then, what would be the first step after I''ve mastered activating and deactivating the Byakugan perfectly?",


    He asked, putting on the act of a slightly curious child. He knew he needed to y this part; it was essential for gathering as much information as quickly as possible, allowing him to strategize more effectivelyter when left alone in this room, he nned to waste no time.


    Takumi didn''t seem bothered by Hikari''s question and responded openly, "That next step would be to learn how to use each of the Byakugan''s three main abilities separately, instead of activating them all at once like you just did.",


    "Using long-range vision, irvoyance, and 360-degree vision simultaneously puts a lot of stress on both your eyes and chakra reserves. Remember, you''re still a child, and even we, the strongest shinobi in the Hyuga n, typically use only one of these abilities at a time during battles or simr situations.",


    "This, too, is something thates with practice and chakra control, just like activating and deactivating your Byakugan.",


    "Eventually, you''ll be able to switch between these three ''modes'' of Byakugan functionality with just a quick one-handed seal, or perhaps even without any seals at all, judging by your level of talent. I''ll send you some materials on this process as well so you can start getting familiar with it sooner.",


    Takumi maintained a patient and instructive demeanor, speaking with the rity and precision of a seasoned teacher. And it was as if, his eyes, though usually stern, held a flicker of encouragement, reflecting his confidence in Hikari''s potential to master this quite easily.


    ''Yes, I kind of saw this answering... It''s what I expected. And I need to remember that, no matter how strong my spiritual energy might be, I''m still just a child, and it hasn''t reached its peak yet. So, I must use the Byakugan abilities wisely and efficiently...'',


    Hikari reflected internally. He understood that beyond the overall chakra capacity, the capacity of one''s spiritual energy, or yin release capacity, he theorized, yed a crucial role in the majority of dojutsu techniques, apart from the biological/gic inheritance of the dojutsu as a Kekkei Genkai.


    Therefore, in theory, he could potentially utilize all three Byakugan modes to a greater extent than the rest of the Hyuga n in the future, thanks to the unique function of hisbined soul. However, for the time being, he had to acknowledge his current limitations as a child.


    Hikari was aware that beyond the three main and mostmonly used functionalities of the Byakugan, all Byakugan users also typically gain the ability to see with incredible rity, Hikari suspected that his early awakening and the numerous advantages he possessed might result in a ''purer'' form of the Byakuganpared to other members of the Hyuga n.


    He theorized that this would allow him to observe the world with even greater detail than them in the future which was very useful for various purposes.


    Imagine the advantages when everything bes sharper to the observer: distances be easier to gauge, colors more vivid, and the mind processes visual information at a speed beyond the norm.


    In the thick of a high-intensity battle, especially with capabilities surpassing those of other Hyugas, such enhancements could prove invaluable.


    Consider the strategic edge gained when one can see in low light as if it were daylight, or adjust effortlessly to blinding brightness without hindrance.


    Hikari, with his unique blend of sociological insight from his previous life and the innate observational prowess granted by his Byakugan, felt like he could indeed be a master of psychoanalysis on the battlefield, both political and physical.


    His ability to read and exploit the subtlest cues in an opponent''s demeanor could offer him unparalleled strategic depth, allowing him to anticipate and counter moves before they are even made. Thisbination of psychological acuity and physical skill could set Hikari apart.


    ''Also, if a skillful Byakugan user really pushes how well they can process what they see, they might feel like time is slowing down, letting them catch every detail and react perfectly. That was something my stupid father could do for a while during his battles and that''s why some people even called that he was on par with Sakumo Hatake in reaction speed, because of it.'',


    ''This skill made him one of the strongest in the Hyuga n, maybe the strongest before he died since the Patriarch is pretty old and not at his best anymore. So, If I can also develop this skill because of my very pure Byakugan, and that gic predisposition, to an even greater level, then being as fast as someone like Minato Namikaze, in reaction speed, could definitely happen...'', Hikari thought excitedly while now waiting for Takumi to speak again.


    However, Takumi''s next words took Hikari by surprise, "So, what do you think about that kid who beat you up like this into a ckout? What do you n to do about that?",


    Takumi suddenly asked,pletely changing the subject. His poker face remained unchanged, stern, and unreadable.


    This abrupt shift in conversation, touching on a sensitive topic, caught Hikari off guard a little if he was being honest.

 4. Hikari’s Rejection of the Will of Fire

    4. Hikari¡¯s Rejection of the Will of Fire


    To understand the unique circumstances surrounding Hikari''s recent situation that led to his passing out and strange transmigration, we must delve into the history of the parents of this body, named Yoshiro and Akari Hyuga, who were quite the anomaly within the Hyuga n, and even his entire lineage, which was the Third Elder''s lineage of the Main Branch family.


    Yoshiro, born into the main branch, married Akari, a side branch member, after a childhood matchmaking.


    This kind of union was nothing unusual within the Hyuga n, especially since Akari had great potential and Byakugan ''purity'' was valued above all else by the Main Branch for their lineage''s gic prosperity continuation.


    Therefore, Akari was chosen personally by Yoshiro''s father, the Third Elder at the time, and was approved by the Patriarch due to her exceptional potential. Hence, Akari was lifted from the Cursed Seal jutsu, integrating her into the main branch, right when they finally married.


    Meanwhile, the lineage of the Third Elder was distinct from other main branch families, passionately advocating for Konoha''s "Will of Fire" ideology, often prioritizing the vige''s interests over the n''s, for some reason, since shortly after the founding of Konoha vige.


    There were some rumors, however, that perhaps Hashirama Senju personally saved Hikari''s grandfather, the Third Elder before his father, and the one in this position when Konoha was founded, during the Warring States period during some intense battle.


    And that perhaps that type of thinking leaning toward Konoha''s interest originated inside this lineage at that time.


    Meanwhile, they were the only ones behaving in that way in the entire n since the Side Branch had no courage or power to say anything due to the Cursed Seals on their forehead. How could they care about or have the guts to care about the Konoha or "Will of Fire" then?


    This dedication led to the Third Elder''s main family line being nearly decimated during the First Great Ninja War, fighting for Konoha.


    The main branch, at first, tolerated all of this, seeing it as a means to align closer with Konoha''s central power, and giving a good signal to the rest of the vige, they probably thought, ''Since you asked for it, then you go for it''.


    Yoshiro, however, took this ideology to an even higher ''extreme''. As the first main branch member educated at the Konoha Ninja Academy and a close associate and subordinate of Sakumo Hatake, his dedication to the "Will of Fire" surpassed even that of his predecessors.


    Together with his wife and childhood sweetheart Akari, Yoshiro openly criticized the main branch''s ''discriminatory'' practices against the side branch of the Konoha''s top branch, saying things like "we are all equal citizens of Konoha" always gossiping outside, and at home often advocating for the Hyuga n to contribute more actively to the vige and its military efforts.


    Almost like, he didn''t care about family''s interest at all, but only Third Hokage''s interest.


    Now understanding his parents'' "infamous" history made Hikari less surprised about the rumors and their sudden and quick deaths right after the Second Shinobi World War began a few months ago.


    The talk within the Hyuga n and the whispers he heard about his parents possibly being traitors, used of sharing n secrets with Konoha, started to make sense.


    His father was the previous Third Elder after his grandfather passed away, someone who would know deep n secrets, and Hikari knew it could be it.


    For Hikari, now looking at his situation from an ''outsider''s'' perspective, piecing together his parents'' story wasn''t too difficult;


    He just had to put the timeline in order, use his own opinions and knowledge about the original series and the Hyuga family from his past, various historical books he came across in this body''s memory, recall and think over the rumors he often heard around the Hyugapound, and reflect on the things his parents used to say about Konoha directly to him.


    By doing this, he could better understand their personalities, their indoctrinated beliefs, and the whole situation and best course of action.


    Furthermore, Hikari had zero intention of ever mimicking his parents'' self-destructive actions even slightly. He didn''t see himself as a "foolish tool" as he considered those two to be at the worst and ''simple-minded sheep'' at best.


    Just remembering the deste state of the Third Elder''s estate where he lived before was enough to exin everything.


    In his view, with all the knowledge from his modern past life, the "Will of Fire" seemed more like a brainwashing propaganda tool to keep Hiruzen Sarutobi and his three crony close friends andrades in power rather than some ''revolutionary'' or noble ideology. It was the most basic form of maniption.


    As for the vige, Hikari couldn''t see what Konoha had ever done for him. Everything he had in his life so far came from the Hyuga n. He didn''t share the same outlook as Itachi and Shisui, whom he saw as mentally unstable and bizarre traitors.


    And even if Konoha actually did something to him, he would still choose to value only his own interest in this life, and reach the highest power in this world no matter what it took, and which aliagnce he needed to break.


    The idea of doing it out of respect for his parents'' ideals seemed even more absurd to Hikari. To him, they were the root cause of his current plight.


    As a rightful heir of the Main Branch, he found himself neglected, ostracized, mocked, and bullied by his own n, branded as the son of traitors.


    The assets and resources that should have been his were locked away and controlled by others, leaving him as nothing more than an orphan. Even before their deaths, Hikari''s memories of his parents were sparse, seeing them only every few months as they were constantly away on missions for Konoha, serving the Hokage like a couple of loyal dogs.


    Hikari vividly recalled the loneliness that enveloped the original young soul of this body in the vast Third Elder estate, even before his parents'' deaths. The brief moments of joy when they returned home were always short-lived, as they would soon depart for another mission.


    This cycle repeated itself, leaving Hikari under the care of servants rather than the warm presence of family. The estate, despite its grandeur, felt more like a cage than a home, echoing with the emptiness of his longing for parental affection and a sense of belonging that never truly materialized.


    Hikari still vividly remembered the original body discovering a secret letter from his parents hidden in his room shortly after their passing. Written as a final farewell in the case that they die, they exined that all their actions were for the "greater good" and the "Konoha big family."


    They expressed hopes of "watching over him from above" and urged him to "be a respectable Konoha shinobi like them." The words, meant to beforting, instead felt hollow to the young boy back then.


    Due to their eminent positions, they didn''t even need to talk to Hokage all their lives if didn''t want to, not to mention going on actual shinobi missions, let alone going to dangerous wars.


    As thest living people of a Main Branch elder family, they would be thest in line Hyuga family would send to work for Konoha. As the noblest of the nobles, as the Elder and his wife, it was even considered shameful and ''crazy'' for them to do so by the rest of the nter.


    The notion of the "greater good" they sacrificed so much, for now, seemedpletely abstract and distantpared to the tangible absence and neglect he experienced in his childhood. But, thankfully, he could finally see everything clearly today.


    This was all obvious to him now, and those were all conclusions he reached, even during the three days of his memory and soul fusion and limbo. After all, it was not hard to reach this answer. You just needed to have the most basic modern education and basic intellect.


    Indeed, the original Hikari would have never entertained such thoughts about his parents. Despite the rumors swirling around them and the bullying he faced as a consequence, he held onto a deep love and respect for them unlike the ridicule and negative feelings he had now.


    This unwavering admiration was partly due to the influence of his parents'' views and ideals, which, to a young child, felt like undisputed truths. Children often mirror their parents, adopting their beliefs and attitudes, as they are the first significant sources of information and authority figures in their lives.


    However, the Hikari of now is not the Hikari of the past. The experiences and knowledge from his previous life have reshaped him, granting him a perspective and intelligence that the original Hikaricked.


    After quickly going over everything he knew about his parents in his mind and letting out a mental sigh inwardly, Hikari responded to Takumi''s earlier question,


    "I don''t think much about that guy. He doesn''t matter to me. But since he did that to me, he''s going to face consequences. Now that I''ve awakened the Byakugan first, it shouldn''t be too hard to return the ''favor'' to him soon. We''re both from the Main Branch, so finding him and doing to him what he did to me shouldn''t be an issue, right, sensei?," Hikari''s words carried a tinge of anger that was genuine.


    Despite his decision to approach life with maximum rationality to achieve his goals with the highest probability, Hikari wasn''t devoid of emotions. Hisbined life was marked by real anger, stemming from the challenges he had faced so far in both of hisbined memories.


    The awakening of the Byakugan and the realization of his potential overall had bolstered his self-esteem, instilling in him a newfound sense of pride. Just as he began to envision a future where he stood at the pinnacle, the memory of being overpowered by what he considered a "cannon fodder" five-year-old child was a stark reminder of his vulnerability. This incident now ignited real anger in him, fueling his determination to settle scores as soon as he could.


    However, despite his anger Hikari was deliberate in how he spoke to Takumi, emphasizing his identity as a member of the Main Branch, hoping to signal a shift in the right direction.


    His parents, duringter parts of their short lives, had basically almost shown disdain for the Main Branch, driven by their ideological ''moral'' beliefs, acting as if they were part of the Side Branch themselves.


    So, by aligning himself more openly with the Main Branch in rhetoric, Hikari aimed to improve his standing in the eyes of the other elders, hopefully quickly reim the power and status rightfully his, and integrate more seamlessly within the Main Branch, enjoying the privileges that came with his position.


    But, Hikari was well aware of the challenge ahead. The actions and beliefs of his lineage had left asting impression on the n, one that wouldn''t be easily erased. It would take time.

 5. Getting the Cursed Seal Use Command

    5. Getting the Cursed Seal Use Command


    "Of course, you are both Main Branch members of equal status. It''s fine to respond in kind, or even a bit more, but don''t overdo it. And as your teacher, I need to remind you not to get the wrong impression now that you''ve awakened the Byakugan.",


    "Indeed, the other boy hasn''t activated his yet, so he hasn''t started learning the Gentle Fist taijutsu too. But you should know he began his training two years ago with a professional teacher and has been strengthening his body with physical exercises all this time, unlike you.",


    "He''s likely learned to perfectly create chakra, and perform various chakra control exercises, which would make his chakra pathways more robust and his overall chakra capacityrger than yours, hence also making his body stronger than yours on average.",


    "Yes, you have a chance to win, but it''s not guaranteed, even with the Byakugan. In my opinion, you shouldn''t rush into confrontation. It would be wiser to train with me for a little while before seeking him out. However, the choice is yours to make.",


    While delivering this advice, Takumi maintained aposed and authoritative demeanor, but Hikari could understand from his words that, at least during this moment, he was sincere to him, as his student now, and spoke from the position of his own best interest in mind.


    And he was indeed correct. Children from Konoha''s major ns typically began their shinobi training at the age of 3 nowadays, under more personalized and specialized guidance unlike in the Ninja Academy, especially during periods of heightened tensions and ongoing wars.


    This early start wasn''t necessarily because they were expected to fight in wars immediately but as a precautionary measure to prepare them for any eventuality.


    Simrly, the entrance age for the Ninja Academy had been lowered to an unprecedented 4 years old, reflecting the urgent need for preparedness.


    This meant that children from ns, who often had ess to more advanced knowledge and resources, needed to start their training by the age of 3.


    This was also why Takumi had been emphasizing the importance of beginning Hikari''s training now that he had reached this critical age.


    By the time these n children entered the Ninja Academy¡ªif they chose to attend at all¡ªthey were already well-versed in shinobi theory and had significantly stronger bodies and a better understanding of how to control their chakra, among other skills.


    And could probably knock out a civilian adult with one punch. This disparity highlighted a stark reality: the world of shinobi was not fair, especially for civilians.


    "I''m grateful for your advice, sensei. But don''t worry, as soon as I opened these eyes I noticed how much clearer and faster I can see things. Even if he''s physically stronger, I can probably anticipate and react to his moves much quicker than he can to mine. Plus, I n to catch him by surprise.",


    "If he doesn''t know about my Byakugan, I''ll let him get close, then suddenly activate it and strike first with a sneak attack, taking the initiative so he won''t have a chance to fight back or regain his footing. With the element of surprise and my enhanced vision, I''m confident in my victory...",


    Hikari shared, speaking earnestly this time, revealing his thoughts without reservation. He saw no need to hold back his strategic thinking over a rtively minor matter, confident in the advantages his newly awakened Byakugan provided him.


    "And it''s not like I can''t create new or control chakra to run through my body now. After all, by activating the Byakugan, one automatically learns to create new and maneuver old chakra through the body to the eyes, it is the requirement for awakening it in the first ce I think - or else, it wouldn''t have been possible. I observed this happening to myself, first-hand.",


    "And those same instinctive processes can now be applied by me also to the rest of my body, or the entire chakra pathway system, by a certain degree, as soon as I recover...",


    Hikari continued, borating on his capabilities. His exnation underscored a key aspect of awakening the Byakugan: it wasn''t just about the enhanced vision or the ability to see chakraworks, but it also fundamentally improved his chakra control. That was the Kekkei Genkai.


    Every human possessed chakra, continuously generated by their bodies and circting through their chakra pathway system. Yet, this was just a fraction of the potential chakra an individual could harness.


    Shinobi learned to create additional chakra by consciouslybining their physical and spiritual energies, together known as stamina. Physical energy came from the body''s trillions of cells, while spiritual energy stemmed from the mind''s will and experiences.


    This process of converting stamina into chakra involved unconsciously swirling these energies together. The direction of this swirling¡ªclockwise or counter-clockwise¡ªvaried from person to person.


    Attempting to swirl in the opposite direction could disrupt chakra formation. However, by consciously controlling this swirling in the right direction and focusing on its speed, ninjas could enhance their chakra creation rate.


    For those without the Byakugan Kekkei Genkai, generating this additional chakra was significantly more challenging to master. Yet, Hikari felt confident in his ability to do so with ease, thanks to the Byakugan.


    And also what he wanted to didn''t require intricate chakra control forplex ninjutsu; it was a more fundamental task. He simply wanted to create more chakra within his chakra pathway system first, so there was no need for more sophisticated chakra control skills, focusing instead on harnessing and expanding his chakra reserves for the ''beating'' ahead.


    Like that, the conversation between Hikari and Takumi continued for a few more minutes, focusing on simr topics. Takumi expressed his surprise at Hikari''s advanced knowledge, acknowledging the depth of understanding Hikari had already achieved at such a young age.


    However, the dialogue suddenly took another unexpected turn when Takumi, maintaining his typical unreadable poker face, posed a new question directly to Hikari, "Hikari-kun, I have to ask you something else too... What is your opinion on the Side Branch family of our n?"


    ''So, this is it... Is this the main test question?'', Hikari pondered immediately after Takumi''s question hit the air.


    He knew that this was more than just a casual inquiry; it was the most critical moment of this entire hidden ''examination'' that happened to him today, and it wasn''t just from Takumi but from the perspective of the entire Elder Council or also called the Hyuga Council, the most powerful governing body of the entire n against which not even the Patriarch can act on certain matters. It wasposed of the Patriarch of the Hyuga n in addition to the Elders.


    Now that he had awakened his Byakugan so early and demonstrated significant potential, the n''s higher-ups were undoubtedly keen to decide whether he carried what they might consider the "curse" of his parents'' ideologies. And that would also determine his destiny.


    A ''wrong'' answer could very well lead him to meet the same end as his parents eventually. Even possibly earlier than them due to the ''threat'' in their eyes and the entire Main Branch, that he would be in that case due to his talent. The thought made him shudder internally,


    ''But, if I manage to give the ''right'' answer instead, then this could be the moment that begins to change how they see me, and my entire fate, by possibly improving my status in the eyes of the Council, meaning the entire n, right away. So, I need to handle this very carefully...'',


    "I currently have no special thoughts about them, sensei. The branch family is simply responsible for protecting our main family and the secrets of the Byakugan, while we, the main family, are responsible for developing and keeping the entire n prosperous.",


    Hikari swiftly replied, his tone sincere and straightforward, devoid of any emotional fluctuations. His response was delivered as if reciting a well-known fact, one that had been deeply ingrained in his mind and solidified over time.


    Takumi, however, just nodded inly in response to Hikari''s answer, without any other reaction, and then began to speak, "If that is the case, then you should finally ept thismand of our Hyuga Main Family''s juinjutsu Cursed Seal technique.",


    "Inside there are instructions on how to use it in the future if the need arises, along with guidelines on when and where it''s appropriate to use it. Read and remember everything carefully...",


    As he spoke, Takumi suddenly pulled out an ancient-looking scroll from his traditional clothing, his tone bing more stern than Hikari had ever heard from him before,


    "Remember, you just need to learn this simple seal; it''s a very easy process. I expect you to return this scroll to me tomorrow. Copying this information anywhere else is strictly forbidden."


    Hikari couldn''t help but feel a twinge of disappointment, questioning, ''Does he not trust me even a little, despite my earlier responses?'', But then he reconsidered, realizing, ''No, it''s more likely that information about the Cursed Seal is so taboo and sensitive that even a meremand to activate it, along with basic guidelines, are guarded this fiercely. I can''t even imagine how high the level of secrecy surrounding the creation, nature, and application of the technique itself must be...'',


    Then, upon observing Hikari''s earnest expression and hearing his words ofpliance, Takumi''s demeanor shifted slightly, his tone bing warmer again, "I will send some attendants to bring you those materials I promised earlier.",


    "Along with that, I''ll include some general theoretical shinobi knowledge materials for you to start building a good foundation, as well as some of my personal notes on various subjects. There is also going to be a protocol I will writeter about your physical and chakra training.",


    "There will also be books rted to the development of Hyuga n shinobi specifically. And if you have any other requests or questions about these materials or anything else, you can inform any servant in this mansion. They will notify me, and I wille as soon as possible. Also, when do you want for us to officially start your training in the Gentle Fist taijutsu?"


    "Thank you for such immense help, sensei. However, I''m really sorry to ask for more. But could you also arrange for them to send some simple historical books about our n to meter alongside those other things? After awakening the mystical power of the Byakugan, I''ve suddenly be very interested in this.",


    "We can start training in the Gentle Fist tomorrow at the same time in the afternoon if you are avable. I have some ''business'' to take care of earlier, as we discussed...", Hikari said, maintaining a well-mannered and humble tone while inwardly calcting in a rational manner.


    ''Since I can''t openly ask for sensitive information, these basic ''harmless'' history books might be the best indirect route for me to learn more about the social, political, economic, and other aspects concerning our n''s internal dynamics, its position within Konoha, and the broader situation involving other ns, viges, and the rest of the world. It''s crucial for me to understand this world I''ve found myself in as thoroughly and quickly as possible, to develop informed ns, and not be left in the dark. After all, the real world is significantly different from the simplified, colorful depiction in theic books of my past life on Earth.''


    However, this time, it seemingly actually took Takumi a few seconds to respond back, "Of course, Hikari-kun, it is good to have such an attitude toward our n''s great history. I will arrange for those to be sent as well. Well then, if that''s all, I''ll see you tomorrow afternoon. And good luck with your little ''business,'' I suppose...",


    Takumi said before finally stepping out of Hikari''srge Japanese-style room, filled with light, windows, and sliding doors, heading into the green, lush courtyard outside.


    Meanwhile, even after Takumi had left Hikari''s room and was out of sight, Hikari maintained a ''humble'' and ''childlike'' expression on his face. Yet, as soon as he was alone, his demeanor subtly shifted, a deep indifference shining in his white eyes.


    He finally thought to himself with a touch of irony, ''What a shame, I have to basically beg for things that should have been readily avable to me with a flick of my finger, simply because of my status as the sole heir of a distinguished line of elders if my ursed parents were alive. It seems I can''t even dream of essing the Main House''s advanced techniques or detailed and more secretive Kekkei Genkai information for now.'',


    ''Even getting my hands on the most basic historical texts about our n has be a struggle. I don''t expect to receive any high-level knowledge in the areas he mentioned either. But, it doesn''t matter. Something is better than nothing. And with the newfound intelligence and other circumstances I''ve been granted in this life, I''m confident I can piece together the puzzles from just a few general clues.'',


    ''My ignorant and brainless parents arergely to me for the situation I find myself in. However, the Elder Council and the rest of the Main Branch aren''t innocent in my eyes, either. The entire n has shown little to no kindness towards this original body honestly.'',


    ''Even some members of the Side House, ording to my estimate, may have also yed a role in my parents'' demise, due to envy, hatred, or something like that, despite them being the only people in the entire Main House basically good to them in every way possible and not treating them like ves. I must ultimately rely solely on myself in this world from now.'',


    ''And what about Konoha and the ''great'' Third Hokage my parents held in such high regard? What have they done now that I find myself under constant surveince here, living as if in a prison? Nothing. In fact, if I hadn''t awakened the Byakugan, as time passed and things quieted down, I likely would have met a fate simr to my parents'' in some form or another...'',


    ''Yet, the Elders, the Patriarch, the Main Branch, who previously nned such fate for me, and the entire n could still prove to be of great use to me, offering numerous benefits...",


    ''Besides, it''s not like I have any other option now... Even if I hypothetically wanted to seek refugee in Konoha, it''s clear that they abandoned me despite my parents'' great merits and assistance to them. I would probably die secretly in the hands of Elders before even taking a first step in that direction...'', Hikari reflected, with a calcted coldness to his thoughts.


    Hikari understood that ultimately, the situation he found himself in was a political matter internal to the Hyuga n. His parents, in their naivety, likely failed to grasp this, believing that Konoha, and specifically the Third Hokage, would protect them despite their actions deeply offending the Hyuga n''s higher-ups or even if their potential role as informants was discovered. In reality, they were possibly seen as nothing more than ''useful idiots'' by Hiruzen Sarutobi and his advisors.


    Or perhaps they were aware but chose to stand by their beliefs, willing to face the consequences. Hikari, with his rational mindset, found it difficult toprehend such indoctrinated and brainwashed behavior, even in individuals as closely rted to him as his biological parents. Despite their talents, he viewed their actions as misguided and foolish.


    The fact that among the nine Elder Lines of the Hyuga n, only his parents'' line acted in such a ''deranged'' manner said a lot about the situation. It raised the question: were they the only enlightened ones, and the rest misguided, or was it the other way around? It was clear.


    ''The weekly Elder Council meeting is scheduled for the day after tomorrow, so ideally, I need to deal with that kid early tomorrow morning, and then handle that other matter as well at that time, all to ensure I leave the best possible impression for the uing discussion. It''s crucial to showcase not just my potential as a talented individual but also the right mindset... Tomorrow is going to be quite an interesting day...'', Hikari nned thoughtfully, not giving up.

 6. A Young Hyuga’s Step to Revenge

    6. A Young Hyuga¡¯s Step to Revenge


    After spending all of yesterday since the afternoon diving into the heaps of materials that Takumi promised, including books on improving strength, and ninja skills, and the history texts he asked for, Hikari had a long sleep to properly ''absorb'' all that new information into his long term memory storage inside of his brain''s hippocampus where those were stored.


    That was something he knew from his past life. So, he didn''t read those books and stayed up all night like some might''ve predicted on his first day of transmigration. He also knew that he needed to be at his best vitality and physical state today for the iing sh and thete official beginning of his training. That was why he slept ''all the way'' in like in his previous life.


    He had also sent all the Side Branch servants away the day before, asking them not to bother him with tasks like helping him dress, wash up, clean his room, make his bed, and other simr things, because of his status, in the future. After a while, theyplied with it. That''s why they just left the breakfast outside of his room just now and notified him of it.


    There was no other way, it was not because he cared about those things, and thought that there was anything wrong with that tradition, but simply because he didn''t prefer anyone breaking his focus, his ''flow state'' with external stimuli to his brain, every once in a while, after he started learning something so seriously and absorbing suchrge chunks of new knowledge. And knowledge was power in this world like it also was in Hikari''s past life.


    This morning, after organizing the various books and scrolls scattered all throughout his room unwittingly yesterday toward his small personal study space and sitting area, washing his face, looking in a decorated mirror many timesrger than his current frame was, and touching his childish face, Hikari felt an odd sense about being in this new young physique.


    When Hikari looked at his reflection, he could see how he stood out from the typical Hyuga. His hair was not only short and messy, which was umon, but its color was also notably different. Instead of the usual ck, his hair was a unique dark blue, a rarity within the Hyuga n and the only other hair color present in some members, though still extremely rare.


    This made his appearance very distinctive. Without his characteristic white eyes and the n''s traditional clothing, one might not even peg him as a Hyuga n member at all at first.


    He got those rare features from his parents too, including harmonious and symmetrical facial lines that were already visible even though he was just 3 years old, hinting he''d grow up to be quite handsome. That must have been something he inherited from his parents as well.


    Besides his unique looks, he dressed in blue-themed robes with a haori outfit, standard for the Hyuga n, before he quickly stepped outside of his room toward the exit of this estate.


    Within the vast Hyuga npound, the Fifth Elder''s estate was a ce of pride and tradition, covering four acres. It was located in the innermost ''circle'' of the entirepound.


    The living quarters were spread out, giving each of the Main Branch members potentially living inside and their servants their own space.The Main Branch members hadrge bedrooms with areas to study, while the servants had simpler, yetfortable rooms.


    Additionally, even though no other Main Branch members other than Takumi and Hikari currently used all of those rooms, the entire Estate still looked quite busy due to servants. Those other main rooms were always taken care of even if no one lived inside of them.


    A key part of the estate was its dojo, arge indoor space for training, and the outdoor grounds, designed for practicing the Hyuga''s unique fighting techniques among the trees.


    The Elder''s office, located at the heart of the estate, was the most important spot. It doubled as the Fifth Elder''s home and the central hub for the n''s administrative andmercial activities his lineage was always in charge of.


    Staffed by Side Branch personnel, this office was equipped with all the necessary materials and talent to oversee the various responsibilities the Fifth Elder''s lineage managed on the highest level.


    Although this was the main center, there were additional buildings within the Hyuga npound and throughout Konoha dedicated to specific viges and business-rted tasks.


    There was also a workshop and armory for weapons, traditional bathhouses for rxing, which were of course divided between the areas for the Main Branch and the Side Branch, and storage rooms filled with supplies and food, near the kitchen, making sure the estate nearly always had everything it needed to function.


    The Main Hall, which Hikari presently exited, after leaving his room previously as well, was a big room used for everything from family dinners to important meetings, surrounded by portraits and scrolls of the Hyuga''s history and previous Fifth Lineage''s leaders of the past.


    As you entered or exited the estate, a beautifully kept path led from the estate''s Main Gate to the Main Hall and vice verse. Hikari was now heading for the exit using this exact decorated pathway. It was a pathway decorated with lush and beautiful botanical forms.


    At the very core of the Hyuga npoundy the epicenter of its power, home to the Main Branch families. Encircling the grand estate of the Patriarch, which stood as thergest single structure in the n, were the residences of the 9 Elders.


    These estates formed a protective ''ring'' around the Patriarch''s building, symbolizing the unity and strength of the n''s leadership.


    The Patriarch''s estate was more than just a residential space; it was a ce of significant importance to the entire n. Here, the Patriarch, his family, and their servants resided, but it also served as the venue for the most crucial Elder Council meetings.


    These gatherings, essential for making decisions that shaped the future of the Hyuga n, took ce within its walls. In addition to hosting meetings, the Patriarch''s estate housed various administrative offices, providing a space for entire high-level nning, coboration, and the management of n affairs.


    And this time, Hikari didn''t head towards the Patriarch''s building at the center of thepound, nor did he venture into the more populous areas where the Side Branch primarily resided, outside the ''ring'' of Elder estates.


    Instead, he took a unique path known only to Main Branch members, a route that wove between semi-covered and open spaces, alongside various utility structures, connecting the 9 Elder Estates. His destination was the 7th Elder''s estate, home to the individual who was currently his ''target''.


    Since this route wasn''t very long and hard to navigate, he encountered no need to ask for directions or take a long detour.


    In Hikari''s estimation, each Elder''s estate alone, including that of the 7th Elder, which he was visiting, covered 2 to 5 acres, ensuring sufficient space for both personal and n activities, andthe entire Hyuga n''spound epassed 100,000 to 150,000 square meters, providing enough room for the n''s residences, training areas, and beautiful gardens, among other buildings.


    As Hikari made his way along the path to the 7th Elder''s estate, he encountered numerous members of both the Side and Main Branches.


    They were easily discernable due to the simple fact that Main Branch members usually proudly showcased their ''clean'' foreheads, whereas every Branch Member had it covered in some way, which was an unwritten rule in the n.


    The sight of a 3-year-old child walking alone in this area was very unusual. Side Branch members, upon noticing him, simply passed by without acknowledgment.


    They were only required to formally greetMain Branch members directly ''responsible'' for them, which included descendants from one of the nine elder lineages, as well as the Patriarch and his family.


    Therefore, they had no obligation to greet Hikari, but theirck of greeting didn''t trante to disrespect or disdain due to Hikari''s family reputation, they didn''t have that courage, as he was still a legitimate Main Branch member, at least they couldn''t disrespect him in any way openly. As for what they talked about him behind closed doors, it wasn''t Hikari''s problem.


    On the other hand, Main Branch members, of all ages, were more open with their thoughts. They didn''t hesitate to give Hikari cold looks and even sneer and gossip among themselves.


    Hikari heard bits of what they were saying and saw them pointing their fingers at him. The looks on their faces and how they talked made it clear they were not saying anything nice.


    As Hikari continued on his path, a few of the Main Branch members went beyond just cold looks and whispers; they openly hurled insults at him. These harsh words, directed at a young child, were a stark demonstration of the disdain they held for his family''s reputation.


    And most other older members of the Main Branch treated Hikari harshly in that exact way, however, one individual, Hiroto, a five-year-old who was the closest to Hikari in age within the Main Branch, took things a step further by bing increasingly ''physical'' with him too.


    Given Hikari''s age difference from the rest of the Main Branch, Hiroto was the only one who resorted to such behavior because he was closest to him in the age of the entire main family.


    Initially, his bullying was a mix of verbal insults and minor physical aggression during their asional encounters, asserting his dominance by iming they were just "training and sparring" together. This was backed by two years of training under professional guidance, which Hiroto used to physically overpower Hikari.


    However, the situation escted three days before Hikari''s transmigration. Returning from the cemetery on the monthly anniversary of his parents'' passing, Hikari encountered Hiroto and his entourage of Side Branch members.


    Along with the usual taunts, Hiroto insulted Hikari''s deceased parents. Overwhelmed by emotion and anger, Hikari responded for the first time, standing up to the verbal abuse.


    This reaction infuriated Hiroto, who then physically assaulted Hikari, causing him significant physical and emotional pain.


    Hikari''s new consciousness still remembered how endlessly sad, angry, alone, rejected, and hopeless he was feeling at that time.


    This incident, marking a peak in Hikari''s suffering, created the conditions that facilitated the soul transmigration, bringing a new consciousness into Hikari''s body.


    The attack was a huge shock to him, hurting both his mind and body. This was one of the main reasons why Hikari wanted to get revenge quickly.


    Even though the idea of taking revenge on a ''5-year-old kid'' might not seem right, especially since he was an adult in his past life, the current Hikari didn''t see it that way.


    He didn''t care about age or any other status; in his mind, anyone who crossed him in this life would have to face the consequences and pay, whether they were a kid or not.


    He also understood that kids in this Ninja World were much more advanced than in his previous world, both in how innately smart they were and in what they had experienced and learned. So, he didn''t believe that Hiroto was too young to understand what he was doing.


    Hikari mulled over these thoughts as he finally reached the entrance of the Seventh Estate.

 7. Getting Revenge and Making a Splash

    7. Getting Revenge and Making a Ssh


    However, before the Side Branch guards stationed at the entrance could address him, Hikari, now standing in the expansive open area in front of the Seventh Estate, raised his voice.


    Despite his young age, his call was unexpectedly strong, bolstered by the chakra he had consciously circted through his body at a high frequency,


    "I, Hikari Hyuga, insult the Seventh Lineage itself and every member of it, right here! If you don''t want others to consider you as cowards and weaklings in the future, let the youngest of you Hiroto Hyugae out to meet me in a battle right now and disprove my words.",


    "Or I wille here every day from now on or hunt him down like a rabbit as soon as he leaves thispound in the future. So, Hiroto, you might as welle out right now and save face and show everyone that you are not afraid of me!", Hikari dered, fully aware of the impact of his words.


    In the Hyuga n, where honor and reputation were held in the highest regard, such a direct challenge, especially one that called into question the courage and strength of a lineage, was almost guaranteed to provoke a response.


    By invoking the n''s deep-seated values and publicly challenging Hiroto, Hikari was leveraging the Hyuga''s own traditions against them to force Hiroto''s hand.


    Feeling that his initial promation might not have been enough to stir the desired reaction, Hikari repeated his challenge several more times.


    His persistent cries finally spurred the previously motionless and shocked Side Branch guards into action, sending one of them into the estate, presumably to ry the message.


    In the meantime, a growing crowd of Main Branch members began to converge on the entrance courtyard of the Seventh Estate.


    Drawn by themotion, they watched with amusement and ridicule, gossiping amongst themselves and throwing mocking and insulting remarks in Hikari''s direction. Yet, Hikari stood stoically amid the verbal onught, absorbing their scorn in silence as he awaited Hiroto''s appearance.


    After a few tense minutes, Hikari''s gaze finally fell upon a child approaching with a distinctly arrogant expression and a ''clean'' forehead, a clear indication of his status as a Main Branch member.


    This was Hiroto, leading a group that was an unusual sight: older children and teenagers from the Side Branch trailed behind him. Theposition of the group, with Hiroto at the forefront and his entourage of younger, Side Branch members following, gave a funny feel.


    Hikari, preferring to take the initiative, didn''t wait for Hiroto to speak. Before Hiroto could open his little arrogant mouth, Hikari seized the opportunity tounch the first verbal salvo,


    "Look, everyone, it''s the mighty Hiroto, hiding behind hisckeys like a scared little rabbit and taking minutes to respond! It''s useless, no one can help you today. So,e and show us how brave you are when you''re not ambushing someone when they are in their most vulnerable state. Try doing it again right now, you idiot.", Hikari called out, his voiceced with biting sarcasm that drew the attention of everyone present, his face full of disdain.


    Hiroto''s face, initially marked by arrogance, shifted quickly to surprise, shock, and then anger at Hikari''s bold insult. His little face suddenly turned extremely red, as this was the first time in his life he got to experience such wordsing his way, and from someone he deemed ''trash'' before. Not to mention that Hikari''s personality waspletely opposite in the past.


    Hiroto had always viewed Hikari as a submissive weirdo, an outcast from a lineage already deemed abnormal within the n. Therefore, it took him a few seconds just to "process" this.


    The unexpected attack caught him off guard, silencing him momentarily as he processed the challengeid bare before his followers and the growing crowd. Regaining hisposure, Hiroto''s angry expression hardened, and he stepped forward, with his own retort ready.


    "Am I seeing things, or did that weakling Hikari actually lose his mind after I beat him downst time? No matter the reason, you''re about to get beaten again today, and then every day after, until youe crawling here to this residence and bow for an entire day as your apology. Those words of yours aren''t something you can just throw around because you''ve gone a bit mad...",


    Hiroto scowled, rolling up his sleeves in preparation for a fight, and signaled his followers to stay back as he advanced toward Hikari with quick, determined steps. His eyes were fierce and unforgiving, showing his intent to not just confront Hikari but to punish him very cruelly.


    "Eat this fist, weirdo!", Hiroto shouted, his anger intensifying as he noticed Hikari''s unmoved, stoic, and calcting demeanor. This only fueled his determination to teach Hikari a lesson.


    So, with every step closer, his speed increased, driven by a mix of anger and a desire to assert his dominance. Finally closing the distance with remarkable speed, Hirotounched a quick punch toward Hikari, aiming to connect with force and make his point through action.


    ''This is what I''ve been waiting for!'', Hikari thought, seizing the moment. Just as Hiroto and the onlookers watched in disbelief, Hikari fluidly raised one hand, forming a single-hand seal he had learned just the day before to activate his Byakugan more effectively. The veins around his eyes bulged prominently, signaling the activation of his dojutsu.


    To Hikari, with his Byakugan now fully active, Hiroto''s iing fist, his facial expression, and his body''s movement all seemed to slow down dramatically.


    Recognizing this as his prime opportunity, especially with Hirotopletely off guard and unable to adjust his stance, Hikari surged his chakra throughout his body with the help of his Byakugan inner vision of his internal chakra pathway system.


    He then swiftly moved to sidestep Hiroto''s punch, and before Hiroto could react, Hikari counterattacked,nding a series of quick punches on Hiroto''s jaw and face, and knocking him to the ground.


    Hiroto, caughtpletely by surprise and feeling as if he had stepped into a different world, struggled to stand up again, but Hikari, with the predictive capabilities of the Byakugan, anticipated each attempt and countered effectively, now kicking him in the stomach.


    It was only then that Hiroto started to sessfully mobilize his own chakra in an attempt to defend himself, after realizing his situation and the gravity of it, to fight back against Hikari''s relentless assault.


    However, by that point, Hikari already managed to pin himself down on top of him and realizing that he would lose if Hiroto managed to gather chakra sessfully, began to choke him hard leading to him passing outpletely under the apanying ''gurgling'' sound.


    "Is that Byakugan, oh my God!?,


    "Am I dreaming, someone please wake up!?",


    "At only three years old!?",


    "That damned lineage is truly blessed for someone reason!",


    "What is going to happen next!?",


    The spectators, a mix of Main and Side Branch members who had gathered to witness the confrontation, were taken aback by the sudden turn of events. Murmurs and gasps filled the air as they saw Hiroto, whom many had expected to dominate the fight due to his earlier training and aggressive approach, quickly overpowered and rendered unconscious by Hikari.


    Whispers spread through the crowd, with some expressing shock at Hikari''s unexpected prowess and others specting about the implications of his victory.


    A few of the spectators, particrly those from the Main Branch, appeared unsettled, their faces betraying a mix of concern and reevaluation of Hikari''s ce within the n hierarchy.


    "Hiroto-sama!", However, at this time, Hiroto''s entourage of Side Branch members, who had been watching from a distance, finally realized the gravity of what had urred.


    They rushed to assist the young Hiroto, whoy on the ground, unconscious, his face red and swollen, clothes dirtied from the scuffle.


    However, upon witnessing the Side Branch members rush to Hiroto''s aid, Hikari couldn''t help but secretly grin. Then, raising his voice for all to hear, he dered,


    "Bold of you, preparing to attack a Main Branch member in such numbers and with those fierce looks in your eyes. There''s no helping it; to defend myself, I must activate the Cursed Seal on all of you.",


    With that, Hikari performed another one-handed seal, and under the shocked gazes of everyone present, he invoked the Cursed Seal Command. More than a dozen Side Branch attendants suddenly copsed to the ground, yelling in agony and clutching their foreheads.


    Hikari was acutely aware that activating the Cursed Seal Command on Side Branch members directly serving under different Main Branch lineages, other than your own, was strictly forbidden, except under exceptional circumstances. Thus, he feltpelled to add those words while doing it.


    ''Didn''t you always secretlyugh at me while Hiroto bullied me while hiding behind him? And I''m not one to forget grudges or leave a payback unsettled...'', Hikari mused silently, ''And didn''t my parents always treat your kind with kindness? Yet, how did you repay them..?'',


    ''Out of fear of threats from the Main Branch or envy, you still turned against them, leading to their downfall...'',


    ''It seems being good in this world gets you nowhere. The more you stray from your true ''status'', the more you will pay in the end like my parents.'',


    ''The Main and Side Branches are simply ipatible, contrary to what my parents believed, and they paid for it with their lives...", He reflected as he watched them squirming in pain on the ground.


    This act was not solely about retribution. Hikari recognized the need to demonstrate to the Nine Elders and the rest of the Main Branch that he had fully embraced his role within the Main Branch, distancing himself from his parents'' well-known abnormal ideologies and naivety.


    Activating the Cursed Seals was a clear message of his alignment with Main Branch values and a departure from his parents'' ideals. It was a calcted step to show he had changed, that he was not like his parents. It was another move in climbing the hierarchy of this n.


    His actions were now guided by sheer cold logic; the pain inflicted on others in moments like this held no sway over him.


    Hikari''s only focus had shifted to climbing to the top of the food chain in this troubled world.


    And the prospect of others growing suspicious due to the change in his personality, observable from his actions today, also wasn''t a very significant concern for Hikari.


    He rationalized that anyone would transform the series of events he had endured in recent months, culminating in the traumatic incident three days prior and the awakening of his Byakugan yesterday afternoon.


    It was natural for his previously non-confrontational, naive, and amodating demeanor to evolve into a more assertive, confident, and self-centered personality given his series of experiences.


    This shift would probably be a ''reasonable response'' to the trials he faced in the eyes of others, especially Main Branch members who were always very ''proud'' like that by default.


    Moreover, this Hikari in Konohagakure, while just embodying the soul ''richer'' with another one from a totally different and dimension, now retained the same original memories and the brain as the spiritual of this body also carried before that partial transmigration.


    Consequently, all the subtle, unconscious, ''micro'' habits and behaviors that could make someone suspect something different in him remained unchanged for that exact reason.


    These consistencies helped maintain the continuity of his identity, ensuring that any alterations in his personality could be attributed to his recent experiences rather than arousing suspicions of a deeper, more mysterious change within him like ''transmigration''.


    However, soon, Hikari''s attention was abruptly drawn to another figure¡ªa slightly older boy fiercely charging towards him, his expression seething with anger while he roared loudly.

 8. A Young Genius Defies the Odds

    8. A Young Genius Defies the Odds


    However, Haruto Hyuga, the 7-year-old brother of Hiroto Hyuga and the third youngest member of the entire Main Branch after Hikari and Hiruto themselves, as well as another grandson of the Seventh Elder, didn''t give Hikari a moment to react before he swung his fist in extreme anger as soon as he rushed to the scene from the Seventh Estate in front of him.


    Haruto had rushed over upon seeing his younger brother lying defeated, in that state, on the ground. As heunched his attack, he also hurled insults at Hikari, seemingly undeterred by the sight of Hikari''s activated Byakugan.


    Caught off guard by Haruto''s sudden aggression, Hikari was forced to halt the activation of the Cursed Sealmand he had been using on the other branch members who were still writhing in pain on the ground, saliva dripping from their mouths. Inadvertently, Haruto''s intervention potentially saved quite a lot of their brain cells from more severe damage.


    ''Damn, is this what four years of training amounts topared to just two?'', Hikari thought, a hint of desperation creeping into his mind as he narrowly evaded Haruto''s aggressive onught.


    Despite his ability to still sessfully see, and even predict Haruto''s moves with his Byakugan, Hikari found his body frustratingly unable to keep pace, the four-year age gap between them tranting into a significant disadvantage in terms of physical capabilities,


    ''Fortunately, his rage is clouding his judgment; otherwise, that first punch might have been the end of me even without him having the Byakugan or the Gentle Fist techniques...'', Hikari acknowledged.


    As the initial wave of Haruto''s anger began to subside slightly, his attacks became more calcted and harder for Hikari to evade. Hikari realized that even if he managed to keep dodging, it was only a matter of time before he either made a mistake or exhausted his chakra and physical stamina, given the clear disparities between them.


    Haruto''s superior training and physical prowess allowed him to adapt quickly, narrowing the space between them with swift, targeted strikes designed to corner Hikari and limit his mobility.


    Haruto skillfully mixed feints and direct attacks, aiming to deplete Hikari''s stamina and force errors. Meanwhile, Hikari''s attempts to counter were hampered by his need to constantly evade, making it difficult tounch an effective offensive.


    However, struggling to keep up, Hikari was suddenly taken by surprise when a kick finallynded squarely on his stomach, causing him to instinctively curl up and lean forward.


    Then the immediate threat of another kick aimed at his head filled him with dread, ''This could really mess up my entire skull... No, it could be even worse than that. He doesn''t look like he would stop after just that one kick... So, this could even be theplete end for me...'',


    ''No! I can''t let it end like this. I''m meant to live a life full of control and power this time around... I can''t die here...'', Hikari thought in a panic, his life seemingly shing before his eyes in a moment of despair, reminiscent of thatatose state he had experienced before.


    As Haruto''s foot inched ever closer to his face, Hikari''s extreme unwillingness to ept his fate,bined with fear and a desperate attempt to mobilize everyst bit of his body''s potential for evasion, triggered an extraordinary response within him. Suddenly, a powerful burst of chakra surged through Hikari''s body.


    Typically, the body and mind impose limits on the amount of chakra one can produce at a time, a safeguard against the fatal risks of chakra depletion. To surpass these limits and ess greater chakra reserves, a shinobi must reach a state of ''resolve,'' a breakthrough that allows for controlled expansion of one''s chakra potential ever since that point in life onward.


    Miraculously, Hikari found himself achieving this state of resolve in the face of imminent danger. At merely 3 years old, he managed something that many civilian genin and even n heirs at the age of attending the ninja academy struggle to aplish.


    And in that critical moment, the newfound surge of chakra coursing through his pathways gave Hikari the speed and agility he needed to evade the impending kick.


    Capitalizing on this newfound momentum and opportunity, his Byakugan quickly locked onto a vulnerability in Haruto''s stance¡ªhis bnce resting entirely on one leg.


    With precision, Hikari then delivered a powerful kick to Haruto''s supporting leg, throwing him off bnce. Swiftly, like a predator, Hikari moved behind Haruto, securing him in a guillotine choke hold right away.


    Whispering with a menacing tone, Hikari taunted, "So, you''ll share the same fate as your pathetic brother Hiroto, choked out by my hand. And let this be a warning¡ªthere will be many more ckouts like this for you and your stupid brother in the future. Be prepared.",


    "Now, goodbye, sleep well, you insignificant canon fodder trash. If only you had awakened your Byakugan like me at this ''old'' of age, then perhaps things could have been different",


    "But you''re no genius like me, far from it in fact, you''re just another unimportant ant-like existence.", These chilling words were thest thing Haruto heard as his consciousness faded, his attempts to breathe growing futile, his throat producing all kinds of painful and indistinguishable sounds mirroring the distress his brother had experienced moments prior.


    After tossing Haruto''s unconscious body aside next, Hikari quickly rose back to his feet, his breath heavy, however, this time. The exertion from activating his ''resolve'' and engaging in back-to-back confrontations with two opponents older than his mere 3 years, in session, had pushed him to the brink of his limits.


    ''Lucky thing for me, this waste is far from what one might call a ''genius,'' to put it politely... Failing to awaken the Byakugan by the age of 7, especially without the Cursed Seal to inhibit dojutsu potential, and despite having ess to the inherent bloodline advantages umted through the Main Branch''s gic evolution over generations, can only be seen as very underwhelming at best...'',


    ''But still... Both victories were mainly due to the element of surprise. Had they not underestimated me or been aware of my entire potential capabilities, the oue would have been my defeat with full certainty.'',


    ''It''s clear I need to be stronger quickly to ensure future victories, now that they''re aware of what I''m capable of at this stage...'', Hikari reflected, his gaze still calm, sharp, and analytical now.


    It was not like Hikari didn''t prepare for hypothetically facing the seven-year-old brother, in question, as well this time around. He had also strategically considered that possibility too. Or else, he would''ve obviously waited to train with Takumi for some time before doing this.


    However, aware of the unique connection between spiritual energy and brain function that existed in this world, Hikari, who had effectively fused two souls, knew that he possessed enhanced cognitive abilities currently in this world.


    This fusion likely improved his memory, focus, intelligence, and even most notably- the enhanced motor and chakra control - the most pivotal elements for awakening the ''resolve''.


    Hikari yesterday hypothesized that this advanced level of innate chakra and motor function control, alongside his Byakugan, would increase his likelihood of being able to achieve this breakthrough under pressure, almost giving him something akin to an ''artificial'' help, allowing him to leapfrog many other shinobi, and it was a theory he was willing to test in this battle if necessary.


    And as events unfolded just now, Hikari''s calcted risk paid off. Not only did he exact his revenge, but he also managed to awaken his ''resolve'' much earlier than most could dream of, all under the watchful eyes of the n.


    It was a very good ''reward'' for this kind of ''risk'' percentage, making the overall risk-to-return ratio for this kind of ''chess move'' quite profitable.


    This achievement was very ''timely'' for him now, with the Elder Council meeting, that would determine his fate, happening tomorrow. Awakening both the Byakugan and ''Resolve'' at three years old was ''quite something'' in his opinion.


    That level of talent increased the likelihood of them not only giving up on dealing with him nearly entirely forever but also probably cultivating him instead and giving him many resources back.


    "My grandsons!!!",


    However, just as Hikari was about to sigh in relief and turn back, a loud yell echoed from the depths of the Hyuga npound, from the other side, growing louder and more resonant as it approached his position. A figure soon emerged, old yet exuding quickness and power.

 9. The Confrontation Against a Lineage

    9. The Confrontation Against a Lineage


    However, at the same time, as those shouts rang, another presence suddenly made itself known, approaching the scene quietly from a different direction.


    Like a shadow materializing near Hikari, this figure showed no surprise at the sight before him: two defeated youths and several Side Branch members copsed on the ground,pletely drained. This was Takumi, the Fifth Elder, and Hikari''s appointed ''custodian''.


    By the time the Seventh Elder reached the scene, his gaze fell upon his two grandsons lying on the ground, prompting a look of fierce displeasure and distortion on his face. Takumi, meanwhile, had positioned himself in front of Hikari.


    The Main Branch members, driven by curiosity, had congregated closer, their numbers swelling as the previousmotion unfolded as well.


    The crowd around them grewrger and more notable, with it bing evident that these were not merely random passersby. Many of the n''s strongest jonin had also arrived, drawn by the disturbance.


    It was clear from their focused expressions that they had been monitoring the fights from a distance using their Byakugan and had now joined the gathering to witness the aftermath.


    The revtion that a three-year-old, untrained child had defeated a seven-year-old who had undergone four years of rigorous training sent shockwaves through the assembled crowd.


    While not everyone present was familiar with the concept of ''Resolve,'' the sheer unlikelihood of the featid before them was enough to convince all that they had witnessed something extraordinary, perhaps even historic.


    Conversations about Hikari, previously full of ridicule and mockery, now buzzed with shock, wonder, and amazement. The crowd,posed of both Main and Side Branch members, engaged in passionate discussions about Hikari''s actions.


    Words of disbelief mingled with spective theories on how such an unprecedented victory could have urred, already marking a significant turn in the perception of Hikari''s capabilities and potential within the n.


    "Fifth Elder, what is going on? Were you aware this was going to unfold? Is that why you''ve shown up now? What are you implying by your presence? Are you trying to shield this child?",


    The Seventh Elder, having regained some of hisposure after seeing his grandsons being attended to by following Hyuga Jonin who assured him they were okay, directed his questions and thinly veiled usations at Takumi.


    "I also got notified of what transpired here. This child dared to insult our entire lineage, and yes, while my grandsons may have been defeated fair and square, and he has no authority to discipline members of the Side Branch directly under mymand. These actions alone grant me the right to discipline him.",


    He stated confidently, but his demeanor calmed slightly as he addressed Takumi, who stood kind of protectively in front of Hikari.


    Although the Seventh Elder was inwardly astounded by the events and Hikari''s evident talent, his resentment over the public humiliation of his grandsons overshadowed his shock.


    He clung to the dual grievances of the insult to his lineage and the unwarranted disciplining of Side Branch members as justifications for seeking retribution against Hikari, using these points as leverage in his argument with Takumi right away.


    "Seventh Elder, first and foremost, regardless of his actions today, you alone don''t have the authority to interfere in this child''s rted affairs. You know well that his matters are not for you to decide and judge unterally.",


    "Debating this with me here serves no purpose. If you have grievances, present them at the Elder Council tomorrow. In the meantime, I am responsible for him, and it is my decision that carries weight. I''ll be taking him with me now, so I''d appreciate it if you didn''t obstruct us or create unnecessaryplications.",


    Takumi stated, his tone both calm and assertive. His prime physical condition lent an additionalyer of authority to his presence, contrasting with the Seventh Elder''s age.


    "So, you are going to oppose me, Fifth Elder?", The Seventh Elder questioned, raising his eyebrows in a mix of surprise and challenge.


    "No, are you nning to go against the entire Council, Seventh Elder?", Takumi retorted, refusing to be intimidated or give an inch. His voice was steady, signaling nopromise.


    A tense silence followed their exchange, a silent standoff where neither seemed willing to concede. The air was thick with unspoken threats and the heavy weight of n politics.


    After a moment that stretched between them,den with the potential for deeper conflict, the Seventh Elder sighed, signaling his reluctant surrender.


    "Very well, Fifth Elder. Your point is taken. I will not overstep today. But make no mistake, this incident will not be overlooked. I expect a full discussion at the Elder Council tomorrow. Until then, I will hold my peace. But know this, the actions taken today will have consequences...", He replied while fixing his gaze on Hikari, his toneced with a mixture of resignation and warning.


    The Seventh Elder''s careful choice of words and the intensity of his look toward Hikari suggested a deep-seated concern, yet it was ambiguous whether his admonition was directed solely at Hikari or if Takumi, too, was included in his cautionary statement.


    After delivering his warning, the Seventh Eldermanded his entourage to attend to his grandsons and the Side Branch members still lying on the ground, ensuring they were taken care of and brought back inside.


    He then turned his attention to therge crowd of both Side and Main Branch members that had gathered, signaling that the spectacle hade to an end,


    "The show is over...", He announced firmly, "So, I would appreciate it if everyone vacated the entrance courtyard of my property now.", With that, he, along with his entourage, retreated inside, and the gates were closed behind them.


    After the Seventh Elder and his entourage retreated, Takumi turned to Hikari, "We''ll talkter. Let''s head back to my estate now...", He suggested, a hint of seriousness in his tone.


    Hikari simply nodded in response, still processing the aftermath of the confrontations.


    At the same time, the adrenaline rush slowly subsided and his entire body ached, he was keenly aware of his chakra levels.


    Thanks to his meticulous chakra control, he had sessfully avoided nearing chakra exhaustion.


    As they walked away, Hikari cast a final nce at the closed gates of the Seventh Estate.


    ''Having one lineage against me is preferable to having the entire Council and Main Branch against me like before. The events of today will now ripple through the n, as soon as all those people leave, showcasing my potential to the fullest...'',


    He contemted with a sense of calcted optimism, ''So, tomorrow''s Council meeting is unlikely to proceed as the Seventh Elder hopes. Far from being punished, this could very well officially mark the beginning of my rise...'',


    As for Takumi appearing here to protect him from the Seventh Elder - that was also a part of his n. Otherwise he wouldn''t have exined this situation to the man so clearly yesterday.

 10. Deeper Knowledge of the Byakugan

    10. Deeper Knowledge of the Byakugan


    A few hours after returning home, as Hikari walked towards the dojo where he and Takumi were set to begin their first training session, he couldn''t help but reflect on the inherent advantages that shinobi hailing from major ns held over their ''sad'' civilian counterparts.


    His recovery process, facilitated by a few extra ''soldier'' and chakra medical pills to rejuvenate his physical state and replenish his chakra levels respectively, along with a herb bath prepared in his personal bathroom, inside of his room, to relieve his fatigue¡ªcourtesy of Takumi''s instructions to the servants¡ªhad Hikari feeling nearly revitalized after his earlier intense, nearly ''life and death'' level of exertions.


    And it didn''t end there because Takumi also promised that this would be his daily routine from now on to supplement his training like every other main branch member also enjoyed.


    This rapid recovery regimen underscored for Hikari the disparities in resources and support systems avable to n shinobi versus those essible to civilian shinobi.


    By leveraging just these three recovery methods¡ªeach employed in moderate, safe doses¡ªa shinobi from a prominent n could feasibly train two to three times more efficiently in both ninjutsu and taijutsu, as well as in other chakra-reliant disciplines,pared to their civilian peers.


    Moreover, this intensified training regimen was not only more effective but also considerably morefortable, enabling n shinobi to achieveparable or superior results without the same level of strain or difort experienced by those without such resources.


    However, to be more precise, not every shinobi n boasts the same wealth and resources as the Hyuga n¡ªindeed, the vast majority do not. Furthermore, not every child born into a ninja n is considered part of its ''core'' or inner circle or simrly ''highly talented'' and thus would not receive the level of training and resources avable to someone like Hikari now.


    Hikari soon arrived at one of the estate''s dojos, a spacious training area that boasted both indoor and outdoor sections, symbolic of the Fifth Elder''s estate''s grandeur.


    This particr dojo was one of many within thepound, each designed to cater to different aspects of shinobi training, from taijutsu to ninjutsu and beyond.


    The architecture harmoniously blended traditional design with the functional needs of a modern shinobi, featuring high ceilings for aerial maneuvers, durable flooring to withstand rigorous training, andrge sliding doors that opened to a serene outdoor area.


    The outdoor area itself was a meticulously maintained space, with gravel paths leading to various training grounds, each surrounded by lush greenery and tranquil water features that contributed to a calming atmosphere.


    After ensuring Hikari''s readiness and physical state, Takumi shifted the conversation toward the main agenda of their meeting, "Hikari-kun, before we dive into today''s training, which will introduce you to the core fighting technique of our n nearly everything else is built upon¡ªthe Gentle Fist¡ªI need to ensure you''re fully versed in our Kekkei Genkai, the Byakugan...",


    "It''s crucial to understand that the Gentle Fist style is intricately linked with the Byakugan''s capabilities. Without a deep understanding of our dojutsu, mastering the Gentle Fist would be impossible...", Takumi exined, "So, first, show me your Byakugan clearly right now..."


    "Yes, sensei!", Hikari responded eagerly. Without hesitation, he activated his Byakugan after quickly using a specific one-handed seal. It only took him three seconds in total to open it.


    As the dojutsu came to life, Hikari''s eyes underwent a big change. Veins near his temples bulged prominently, whereas his pupils and irises changed into being somewhat ''sharper''.


    "Great speed, Hikari-kun! And this is just after opening those eyes yesterday. I believe that soon you won''t even need the hand-seal and will be able to activate it quicker, perhaps nearly instantaneously. You truly have remarkable talent. Now, tell me, how far can you see right now?",


    Takumi spoke, his tone rich with appreciation. This time, he didn''t hold back any praise. Given Hikari''s evident achievements and the rapid adaptation to his Byakugan, withholdingpliments would have seemed odd.


    "Thank you, sensei, let me see...", Hikari focused harder, pushing his Byakugan to its limits as he surveyed the expanse of the estate. After a moment, he shared, "I think it''s around 50 meters right now, but I could probably push that to double if I really tried. Though, I worry it might strain my eyesight too much...",


    Hikari was honest in his response, knowing he had to show off his skills while also being careful not to push himself too hard. Takumi nodded, taking a moment to think over Hikari''s words before offering further guidance.


    "Alright, now try again to look as far as you can while also fully using your 360-vision from the beginning. And let me know what you find out...", Takumi suggested, as if he wanted to teach him some fact in this way next. Hikari just nodded and then tried to do as he was told.


    However, just as Hikari attempted to follow Takumi''s instruction, a sharp pain shot through his eyes mere seconds into the attempt. Surprised and unable to continue, he quickly ceased his effort, realizing the difficulty of simultaneously extending his vision and utilizing the 360-degree capability, "My eyes suddenly hurt a lot, sensei. It felt like there was some kind of a block in trying to use my eyes further, so I had to stop after just a few meters. I''m sorry.",


    "You''ve made a wise decision to stop, Hikari-kun. I suspect you already grasp why this urred. It''s incredibly challenging to utilize several of the Byakugan''s main abilities simultaneously. Your earlier estimate of a 50-meter range without straining your eyesight wasn''t entirely urate. The reason you reached that distance is that we''re in a densely constructed area of the Hyugapound, filled with walls and human-made constructions.",


    "This environment required you to use your irvoyance in conjunction with your long-distance vision nearly the entire time. But, if we were in an open field, with no obstructions to your sight, you could potentially extend your telescopic vision up to three times further...", Takumi exined, offering insight into theplexities and limitations of the Byakugan.


    "That''s precisely why most Byakugan users in our n choose to specialize and focus their training on one of the three main abilities. Attempting to master all three simultaneously would lead to excessive chakra consumption and eye strain, to the point where they wouldn''t achieve significant mastery in any of them. It''s eptable to mix these abilities asionally, but it''s essential to choose one as your primary focus. Given your talent in all three areas, the choice of which to specialize in falls entirely to your personal preference," Takumi borated.


    "You have the option to specialize in irvoyance, enhancing your ability to see in detail through obstacles and within covered objects. Alternatively, you could focus on refining your 360-degree vision, enabling you to perceive your surroundings with greater rity in every direction. Or, you might prefer to develop your long-range vision, which allows for broader, albeit less detailed, observation across vast distances. Thistter skill is particrly valued among our n''s auxiliary and support shinobi, mostly chunin and special jonin. But, their unique capabilities make them indispensable for their reconnaissance and support roles.",


    "On the other hand, our n''sbatants, including Jonin and ''Elite Jonin'' like myself, often prioritize 360-degree vision for enhanced situational awareness and defense during closebat. irvoyance is another focus, especially useful for identifying and targeting an opponent''s chakra points and internal organs with better precision. Each path offers its own advantages and strategic applications in battle. The choice depends on how you envision your role within the n and on the battlefield...", Takumi exined,ying out the options.


    Hikari, meanwhile, suddenly began pondering deeply, for a few moments, after hearing Takumi''s exnation, about the distinctions in Byakugan abilities among n members, reflecting on Hinata''s and Neji''s respective proficiencies as depicted in the original story.


    Hinata was renowned for her exceptional telescopic vision, capable of extending up to a kilometer as a genin, and further expanding her range significantly as she maturedter.


    In contrast, Neji, despite not matching Hinata''s huge range, instead excelled in the irvoyance of his close-range vision, particrly in identifying human chakra points well, a skill that highlighted his mastery of the Gentle Fist from a young age leaving Hinata in his shadow in the eyes of Hiashi, the Patriarch, and most other characters at that time.


    This validated Takumi''s words even more in Hikari''s mind about ''support'' and ''main'' roles within the n. And Hiashi and other elders certainly weren''t happy about the sessor being a ''supporting'' one at that time. Therefore the following plots regarding Hinata and Hanabi were also logical.


    Furthermore, this contrast also led Hikari to now contemte the possibility of an inherent, gic predisposition towards excelling in specific aspects of the Byakugan''s capabilities between different Hyugas.


    ''So, does this mean there''s not only a focus chosen during one''s training but also an innate gic factor determining which of the three abilities one might excel in?'', Hikari pondered.


    However, Takumi''s observation that Hikari showed talent in all three areas, after the previous short ''check-up'' suggested that his potential limitations in mastering all three were not innate but only rted to his current level of chakra, spiritual energy, eyesight, and learning ability.


    Nevertheless, confident in his potential for growth in all three of these areas, Hikari began to seriously consider a bold approach, ''Then maybe I should aim to enhance all three abilities, not concurrently use them, but to develop each more to have them avable in my skillset...?''

 11. The Degree of Hyuga Clan’s Power

    11. The Degree of Hyuga n¡¯s Power


    Then, after Hikari mentioned that he would take some time to decide which of the three paths to focus on more in the future, Takumi''s demeanor shifted to a more serious tone.


    He began to share with Hikari several important facts about the Byakugan that Hikari hadn''t known or was only vaguely aware of, both from his past life''s knowledge and his current life''s experiences.


    Takumi exined that there was a strict rule against activating the Byakugan within Konoha vige itself, except within the confines of the Hyugapound.


    This rule was established by mutual agreement during the founding of Konoha. The concern was that the Hyuga n, being located close to important buildings like the Hokage''s office and other npounds, could inadvertently uncover sensitive information or vite the privacy of vigers, including potentially observing individuals beneath their clothes.


    Such surveince was deemed uneptable by the rest of the vige, leading to the prohibition of Byakugan use outside the Hyugapound without explicit permission from Konoha''s authorities, except under special circumstances such as a vige-wide emergency. Viting this agreement would lead to severe consequences.


    Furthermore, Takumi revealed that around the Hyuga n''s extensivepound, a powerful spiritual barrier had been erected, supplemented with special minerals. This barrier was under the direct supervision of Konoha''s Barrier Team, ensuring that members of the Hyuga n could not use their Byakugan to peer outside of Konoha from within theirpound.


    Not just surrounding thepound, but also within it, many simr barriers have been erected, like around the Fifth Elder''s residence. This barrier served to prevent any other members of the Hyuga n from peering inside, ensuring ayer of privacy and security.


    Hikari also learned that the much-discussed, so-called ''blind spot'' in the 360-degree vision of the Byakugan was not as significant a weakness as he had thought. Interestingly, this limitation was predominantly applicable to members of the Side Branch of the Hyuga n.


    And nowadays it is often employed tactically by the Side Branch members on the battlefield, serving more as a means to mislead opponents into underestimating the Byakugan user.


    This strategic use of the blind spot could be leveraged to bait enemies in the direction that was already predicted, drawing them into a false sense of security before springing a trap.


    As Hikari''s curiosity grew, he began to ask Takumi a series of questions, to which Takumi was willing to provide detailed answers, helping Hikari clear up many important doubts.


    Given that Hikari hadn''t been able to directly engage with all the relevant materials Takumi had previously provided him before, as he could with a living expert of the highest order within the Hyuga n, he was eager to acquire a moreprehensive understanding now.


    Through their conversation, Hikari came to realize a significant misconception from his previous life: the notion that the Hyuga n was ''foolish'' for not utilizing ninjutsu, genjutsu, and other techniques was entirely unfounded.


    Contrary to this belief, the Hyuga did not solely rely on the Gentle Fist technique, it was just the basis of their overall skillset, but many individual members were also proficient in ninjutsu, genjutsu, medical jutsu, and even fuinjutsu (sealing techniques).


    In fact, a significant portion of Konoha''s most skilled medical experts were Hyuga n members. Their Byakugan and proficiency in the Gentle Fist made them exceptionally talented in medical fields for several reasons.


    Firstly, the Hyuga''s ability to see the chakra pathways and points within the body with their Byakugan provided them with unique insights into the human anatomy, allowing for more precise and effective medical treatment. This internal vision enabled them to diagnose conditions and injuries with a level of detail that was unmatched by other medical ninja.


    Secondly, their mastery of the Gentle Fist allowed them to manipte the body''s chakra system directly. Some Hyuga medics could use this knowledge to stimte the healing process, even in the heat of battle, by enhancing chakra and blood flow within their own bodies or their patients''.


    This capability to kickstart the body''s natural healing mechanisms and improve overall vitality made the Hyuga invaluable on the battlefield and in medical facilities alike.


    This, coupled with their roles in reconnaissance and intelligence gathering, arguably positioned the Hyuga n as even more valuable for Konoha overall than the Uchiha n who were more frontal fighters, which also increased the varying toward them in the eyes of the rest of the vige.


    The Byakugan''s ability to see vast distances and through obstacles made Hyuga members key assets in surveince and information collection, contributing significantly to the vige''s strategic capabilities.


    This understanding underscored why the Hyuga n held a position in Konohaparable to that of the Uchiha n. Unlike the Uchihas, who were more overt and, at times, perceived as arrogant about their prowess, the Hyugas preferred to maintain a low profile, quietly consolidating their strength.


    They didn''t boast about their capabilities; instead, they were the backbone of the vige''s support and auxiliary functions. This approach not only secured them wealth and power on par with the Uchiha n but also earned them a more favorable reputation for their versatility and reliability within the vige.


    Regarding interrogating prisoners or gathering intelligence from enemies, simr to how the Uchiha n might use their Sharingan, the Hyuga n could achieveparable results.


    Their advanced observational skills, enhanced by the Byakugan, allow them to notice the smallest changes in a person''s body and mental state by observing their chakra flow.


    This ability to see subtle shifts gives them an edge in extracting information or understanding an enemy''s intentions, making the Hyuga''s techniques just as effective for intelligence gathering as those of the Uchiha.


    The misconceptions ofizens from his previous life got even more amusing to Hikari, especially after learning that the Hyuga n was also exceptionally skilled even in genjutsu itself, not on the level of the Uchica n, by they were way ahead of nearly everyone else.


    In fact, the n boasted numerous genjutsu experts, with some nsmen specializing in this area alone achieving the level of Elite Jonin just through that.


    The Fifth Elder, Takumi, who stood before him, served as a prime example. In his past life, Hikari might have doubted such a im, but after checking it multiple times, he became convinced. This elder, along with his entire Fifth Lineage, excelled in genjutsu, making it their main area of higher-level expertise after mastering the Gentle Fist taijutsu techniques too.


    The unique abilities of the Byakugan, such as irvoyance, long-distance vision, and 360-degree perception, naturallyplemented the use of genjutsu.


    These capabilities allowed Hyuga shinobi to cast illusions on their opponents suddenly and from great distances, and positions from which they didn''t expect it, while also leveraging their insight into the opponent''s chakra flow.


    Additionally, their adeptness in manipting Yin chakra within an opponent''s chakra system could enhance the effectiveness and duration of their illusions, making them more potent and difficult to counter.


    Indeed, Hikari realized that the Hyuga n had developed numerous unique, strong genjutsu techniques over the hundreds of years, designed to leverage the unique capabilities of their Byakugan and to integrate seamlessly with the foundational Gentle Fist main techniques.


    This realization led him to hypothesize that the reason many of these advanced techniques were not mentioned in the original stories was due to their being closely guarded secrets of the Main Branch.


    He believed that these techniques were learned only by Takumi, the n leader, the other Elders, and their lineages. This meant that the most powerful moves of the Hyuga n were hidden from the Side Branch members who often fought in battles.


    These Side Branch members might know basic ways to channel a little of their Yin genjutsu chakra in their Gentle Fist attacks if they were exceptionally lucky or talented to learn that on their own, but they didn''t have ess to the more advanced techniques. And this is not only the case with genjutsu techniques, but many other techniques as well.


    Furthermore, Hikari also knew that the Hyuga n wasn''t just good at using genjutsu; they were also really hard to trick with it. Thanks to their Byakugan, they could see when someone was about to use genjutsu on them by noticing changes in that person''s chakra.


    Plus, Hyuga n members who were good at controlling their chakra could break free from genjutsu, on their own, easily.


    And not only that, Hikari also confirmed that some Jonin and Elite Jonin of the Hyuga n could use their Byakugan to see weak points in an enemy''s ninjutsu attacks.


    So, besides being skilled at using and defending against genjutsu, the Hyuga n also had an edge in dealing with various ninjutsu like Shadow Clones and others, including various chakra nature transformation ninjutsu techniques.


    Their ability to observe chakra made it easy for them to spot the difference between a clone and a real person.


    With this insight, they could either easily break through these attacks or counter them effectively using their Gentle Fist technique.


    Splitting, deflecting, and outright destroying elemental ninjutsu attacks also wasn''t impossible for them.


    Takumi brought up these points as he began to shift the conversation towards finally starting to teach Hikari more about the Gentle Fist next.

 12. The Basics of the Gentle Fist Style

    12. The Basics of the Gentle Fist Style


    As Hikari stood before Takumi, the Fifth Elder began, his voice stern andmanding, setting the stage for a crucial lesson in the Hyuga n''s martial arts.


    "The Gentle Fist isn''t just a style of fighting; it''s a precise method to incapacitate or even kill an opponent by targeting parts of their chakra pathway system...",


    Takumi exined, his gaze fixed on Hikari as if to gauge his reaction.


    Hikari, maintaining his role as the eager-to-learn child, nodded respectfully.


    "And with the Byakugan''s vision, we can see that entire chakra system allowing for that...", Takumi continued, "Tell me, Hikari-kun, do you understand why this gives us an advantage?"


    "Yes, sensei...", Hikari replied, his voice steady, "Because we can see the chakra pathways and the 361 chakra points so clearly, we can target them extremely precisely unlike anyone else in the shinobi world, causing internal damage that can''t be easily defended against."


    Takumi nodded slightly, acknowledging Hikari''s correct answer, "Exactly. Our strikes are not brute force but calcted intrusions of chakra into an opponent''s body. A single well-ced strike can be lethal. Do you know why?"


    Hikari, maintaining his respectful demeanor, replied confidently, "Because the entire chakra pathway system of the human body is intimately directly intertwined with every organ, muscle, vessel, and cell. By disturbing the enemy''s own chakra flow with our own chakra, it could hurt their inner organs in that way indirectly."


    "Precisely...", Takumi affirmed before deciding to go even deeper, "The Gentle Fist technique is a refined art. We focus our chakra into our hands and release it in a precise burst directly into the opponent''s chakra pathways upon contact. This forceful intrusion of foreign chakra causes significant damage to the cells connected to these pathways, leading to internal injuries."


    "This method is particrly effective against the internal organs. They are vulnerable because, unlike muscles that can be strengthened, organs cannot be trained to resist damage. A well-ced strike can cause pain, internal bleeding, or even disrupt an organ''s function enough to incapacitate or fatally wound someone. So, you should mainly focus on that.",


    Takumi''s expression grew more serious if that were possible, "But if you can''t get the organs sessfully, don''t worry. Our techniques can also damage nerve endings, burst blood vessels, and bruise muscles with even a ncing blow, so no matter where you hit, it will cause damage.",


    "Our techniques also allow us to strike with precision, bypassing armor and clothing. But the true mastery of the Gentle Fist lies in the ability to close chakra points. This requires not just the Byakugan''s sight but exceptional skill and control. Each point closed can significantly impact an enemy''s ability to use chakra."


    Hikari absorbed every word, outwardly the picture of a diligent student soaking in wisdom.


    Takumi regarded Hikari for a moment longer, then turned to the center of the dojo, "Let''s begin with the basics. The foundation of all you will learn starts with how to focus chakra on your palms at first, but ideally with your fingers as well as you get more proficient in it over time. Pay close attention."


    Takumi stood before Hikari in the dojo, his posture rigid and his expression stern. Despite his stern demeanor, there was a faint hint of approval in his eyes.


    Hikari, on his part, maintained the facade of a respectful and curious child, though, beneath the surface, his mind was as cold and calcting as ever, driven by a desire for power.


    "Now, shall we finally begin your training in the ''Gentle Fist''?", Takumi announced, his voice filled with a seriousness that demanded attention,


    "Andstly, remember again. This is not just a fighting style. It is the embodiment of our n''s power and heritage. You must not only learn its techniques but understand its essence."


    Hikari nodded, his eyes wide with a child''s curiosity, yet his mind always raced, absorbing every word.


    Takumi continued, demonstrating a stance that was both rxed and ready, "Observe."


    With a swift motion, he executed a series of pam strikes into the air, each movement precise and controlled.


    Takumi then turned to Hikari, his gaze sharp, "Show me your stance."


    Hikari, still ying the part of the eager student, took up the stance as best he could mimic. Takumi corrected his posture with quick, efficient movements, each touch firm yet devoid of any gentleness.


    "Good. Now, strike...", Takumimanded, stepping back to give Hikari space.


    Hikari executed the strikes, his movements were clumsypared to Takumi''s but filled with a determination unseen in most children his age.


    "Again...", Takumi instructed, and the cycle repeated. With each strike, Hikari''s form improved, driven by his unyielding will to master the technique and, with it, gain the power he so desired.


    He knew that the crux of this ability was embedding these exquisite moves into his muscle memory. It was not physicality-based like the Strong Fist was, this was purely the technical version of taijutsu art.


    Meanwhile, Takumi stopped him once again and performed another move. He gestured for Hikari to follow his gaze as he shifted into a defensive stance, demonstrating the fluidity and readiness that the Byakugan''s vision afforded him.


    "With the Byakugan''s all-seeing vision, we are aware of attacks from any direction, enabling us to evade or counter with unmatched precision. This omnidirectional awareness is crucial for maintaining control over the battlefield."


    "I''m going to show you the basic Gentle Fist stances and movements we start beginners with, focusing mainly on palm strikes. Watch closely and mimic my movements. It''s important to memorize each stance, attack, and movement.",


    "You''ll practice these daily, and I''ll be there to guide and correct you until you''ve perfected them. Once you''ve mastered the basics, we''ll move on to more precise movements that involve using your fingers and advanced Gentle Fist techniques.",


    Takumi stood at the center of the dojo, his presencemanding even in the quiet space. He motioned for Hikari to watch carefully as he prepared to demonstrate the foundational techniques of the Gentle Fist.


    He began with slow, deliberate movements, each palm strike flowing seamlessly into the next. Takumi demonstrated a series ofbinations, starting with basic forward thrusts, side strikes, and defensive maneuvers, all executed with precision.


    His hands seemed to barely touch the air, yet the power behind each movement was palpable, even to an onlooker.


    Afterpleting the sequence, Takumi turned to Hikari, "Now, you try. Remember, it''s not about speed or power at this stage. Focus on form and precision."


    Hikari stepped into the designated spot, mimicking the stance Takumi had shown. He started thebinations, his movements hesitant at first as he tried to recall the sequence of strikes and positions.


    With each repetition, however, his confidence grew, and the movements began to flow more naturally.


    Takumi watched closely, interjecting with corrections when needed, "Straighten your back more... Focus your chakra at the point of impact... Remember to keep your vision broad; don''t fixate on a single point."


    The hour passed in a cycle of demonstration, practice, and correction. Hikari repeated thebinations over and over, each time with increasing uracy and understanding of the techniques. The session was rigorous, demanding Hikari''s full attention and effort, but it was also illuminating, offering him a glimpse into the depth and power of the Gentle Fist style.

 13. Finishing the First Training Session

    13. Finishing the First Training Session


    Takumi offered a slight nod of approval, acknowledging Hikari''s natural aptitude, "You''re showing great potential once again...", He admitted, his tone carrying a hint of praise yet remaining grounded,


    "But remember, these movements are akin to an empty dance without the ability to actually channel and project chakra from your palms first. Remember? That''s the essence of our Gentle Fist¡ªto use your chakra to directly affect your opponent''s chakra pathway system."


    He paused to demonstrate, focusing his chakra on his palm, making it visible to the naked eye, "Watch closely with your Byakugan harder now...", He instructed Hikari. As Takumi''s chakra red, it served as a vivid example of the control and power a skilled Hyuga could wield.


    "A true practitioner of the Byakugan isn''t limited to just palms and fingers; they can extend chakra from any point in their body...", Takumi exined, emphasizing the versatility and surprise element this skill offered both in offense and defense, "This ability is fundamental for surprise attacks and protecting oneself.",


    He then shifted his stance, showcasing the seamless integration of chakra control with the physical movements he had just taught,


    "What you''ve learned today is the first foundationalyer of the Gentle Fist. Another step is mastering the projection of your chakra. This style isn''t just about striking; it''s about how you engage your chakra pathway system to interact with and disrupt your opponent''s instead."


    Takumi''s gaze met Hikari''s, serious and expectant, "After you return to your room, focus on this aspect of your training. Learning to urately eject chakra from your body is crucial. It''s what transforms these movements from mere forms into the powerful techniques that define the Gentle Fist."


    However, to Takumi''s surprise, after closely observing the elder''s demonstration of chakra control and ejection, Hikari''s focus intensified.


    His Byakugan red with concentration, beads of sweat forming on his forehead as he concentrated deeply. Under Takumi''s watchful and somewhat astonished gaze, Hikari lifted his palm upward.


    Gradually, he began to gather chakra there, visibly concentrating it more and more until a small, me-like aura became visible, hovering just above his skin.


    The room fell into stunned silence as Takumi witnessed this disy of raw talent and control from such a young student. It was an unexpected demonstration of Hikari''s capability, one that went beyond mere potential.


    Hikari, as if basking in his achievement, suddenly, let a victorious smile spread across his face, the kind of pure, childlike joy at mastering a new skill. Then, with a cheeky grin aimed at Takumi, he said, "Don''t worry, sensei, I will be careful to practice this aspect as wellter..."


    Takumi, momentarily silenced by the disy, soon found his voice, a mix of astonishment and admiration coloring his tone, "You''re good...", He acknowledged, the surprise evident in his voice.


    "Just by observing me once, you''ve managed to aplish this? Very well, now that you''ve mastered this step, you should proceed with the other chakra control exercises I provided in those materials yesterday. Just follow the instructions outlined there; I believe you won''t require my assistance in that regard at all seeing how smart you are."


    The realization of Hikari''s innate talent prompted Takumi to adjust his training n on the spot, "Given your evident aptitude...", He continued with a genuine interest this time, "I''ve decided to introduce you to the third fundamental block of Gentle Fist training today you are also going to practice at home. You''re ready to begin working on it sooner than I anticipated."


    "The third fundamental ingredient involves incrementally increasing your body''s overall speed by directing chakra from your pathways to your muscles. This must be done in small doses...", He exined, emphasizing the importance of control.


    "Overdoing it could lead to excessive force, disrupting the precision of your Gentle Fist strikes. This technique is, therefore, mostly applied to the leg muscles, enhancing your mobility rather than the strength of your hand strikes. It enables us to close the distance to our opponents more swiftly,pensating for the Gentle Fist''s inherent closebat limitation. Watch closely.",


    With that, Takumi prepared to demonstrate, his demeanor shifting to one of focused intent. Hikari''s Byakugan activated, not wanting to miss a moment of the disy.


    Takumi then began to move around the dojo with astonishing speed, each step propelled by a subtle surge of chakra to his legs.


    To Hikari''s eyes, Takumi almost seemed to blur, moving like a shadow that danced from one end of the space to the other.


    Yet, despite the speed, Takumi''s palm strikes remained precise and controlled. He demonstrated how to approach an imaginary opponent, closing the distance rapidly before delivering a series of Gentle Fist strikes. Each movement was fluid, a testament to years of practice and mastery.


    As Hikari observed Takumi''s demonstration with his Byakugan fully activated, he barely kept pace with the elder''s movements. Yet, it was the preliminary glimpse into how Takumi harnessed and directed chakra into his leg muscles that truly captivated him.


    This insight into Takumi''s technique was a revtion to Hikari, expanding his understanding of the Hyuga n''s capabilities and the potential applications of their Kekkei Genkai.


    The notion that the Hyuga could achieve a continuous, lower-intensity version of the Body Flicker Jutsu through precise internal chakra control was astonishing.


    Hikari realized that the Byakugan''s ability to provide an internal view of one''s chakra pathway system and muscles could simplifyplex techniques that required intricate chakra control, making them more essible to Hyuga practitionerspared to shinobi like Minato Namikaze or Shisui Uchiha.


    Hikari mused on the possibilities this technique offered, both inbat and strategic retreats, ''If not for the need to maintain the rhythm of the Gentle Fist in legs too, some Hyuga might have earned the moniker associated with the Body Flicker Technique instead...'',


    ''It will be very easy for me to learn that technique fully in the future for potential escape scenarios. Sure enough, real life is different from fiction. The Hyuga n was indeed massively underestimated...'',Hikari once againmented at the ignorance of some people.


    Following the demonstration, Takumi addressed the still-dazed Hikari, offering further guidance for his independent practice,


    "You''re free to work on this speed-enhancing technique on your own, but proceed with caution", Takumi advised, underscoring the importance of safety in solo training sessions.


    "Our morning sessions will focus only on refining your Gentle Fist movements. It''s crucial to get your stances and strikes exactly right into your muscle memory, and I''ll be there to correct any mistakes and improve your form over time. The other two things you can do yourself basically at home.", Takumi exined, setting the agenda for their ongoing training.


    After all, he was a very busy individual, and chakra control was usually a much simpler process to train at and relied more on time, whereas Gentle Fist movements relied more on experience and finesses that required the assistance of a senior Hyuga member to pass it.


    With their n for theing days established, they agreed to reconvene again the next morning to continue Hikari''s training.


    Takumi offered a nod of approval, recognizing Hikari''s dedication and eagerness to learn.


    "See you tomorrow, Hikari-kun. Remember, patience and diligence are your allies in mastering the Gentle Fist..", He said, imparting a final piece of wisdom before parting.

 14. Working Hard and Night Pondering

    14. Working Hard and Night Pondering


    Once back in thefort of his living space, Hikari settled into the expansive room designated for his use.


    After indulging in yet another opulent meal, a luxury afforded only to those of the Hyuga Main Branch, rich in proteins and meticulously designed to enhance both physical strength and chakra reserves gradually,


    Hikari found himself surrounded by scrolls and paper materials that spanned the length and breadth of Hyuga n techniques, he felt a sense of determination take over.


    He took a moment to absorb the quiet around him, allowing the day''s lessons and insights to fully sink in before turning his attention to nning.


    Pulling a sheet of paper toward him along with an ink brush, Hikari began to strategize his short-term training routine.


    The room, filled with the soft rustling of paper and the faint scent of ink, became a sanctuary of focus and ambition.


    He decided that his days would start with the Gentle Fist training with Takumi. This session was going to get longer as his body got more used to the routines and he learned new techniques.


    Takumi had mentioned the importance of doing this first thing in the morning. That way, Hikari would be fresh, and full of energy, and his chakra levels would be at their peak after a good night''s sleep.


    After wrapping up the morning session with Takumi, Hikari nned to take a short break. This wasn''t just about resting his body but also about letting his mind absorb everything he''d learned.


    Once he felt ready, he would move on to practicing chakra control. He knew this part of his training wasn''t as physically demanding, so it could be done directly soon after that hard training, but it was just as crucial.


    Hikari knew mastering chakra wasn''t just about showing off big moves. It was about the small details: controlling how long and how much chakra he could push out from different areas and chakra points of his body. This skill was key for his Gentle Fist techniques to work.


    To get better at this, Hikari couldn''t just stick to the basics like tree climbing or water walking that most ninja kids in Konoha did. He needed something extra, something to push him further. That''s why, following Takumi''s advice, he got a set of "Chakra Bncing Stones."


    These weren''t just any stones. They were special, small enough to fit on the back of his hand or the tip of his finger, and they needed a steady flow of chakra to keep them bnced. And they could be ced at any chakra point or area of his body if they were bigger-sized ones.


    Using these stones, Hikari had to constantly change how much chakra he used to keep them constantly steady. And that wasn''t easy. It meant he had to get really good at controlling his chakra, understanding how it flowed through his body, and adjusting it on the fly many times.


    After giving his body some time to recover from the intense morning training and chakra control exercises, Hikari would be ready to dive into the next part of his daily routine, the physical training.


    The Hyuga n had a set protocol for physical conditioning that all young members followed, but Hikari had a few tricks up his sleeve from his previous life that he nned to integrate into this training regimen.


    For example, yoga, Hikari thought would help with flexibility and better breathing capacity for oxygen intake. Poses like a warrior and the downward dog would improve his movements inbat. For strength, he''d do push-ups, squats, and lunges to build muscle for stronger hits.


    Endurance woulde from running and shadowboxing. This would keep him going longer in fights and sharpen his strikes. Core bnce exercises like nks would help keep him stable in fights, making it harder for opponents to knock him off bnce. And to jump higher, he''d do box jumps and skip rope, making his legs stronger for quick movements and dodges.


    Then, afterpleting his physical training, Hikari would take advantage of medical baths and pills provided by the Hyuga n to speed up his recovery.


    These traditional remedies, rich in herbs known for their healing properties, would help soothe his muscles and replenish his energy faster than usual.


    Then, as evening approached and his body felt rejuvenated, Hikari would shift his focus to mental and spiritual development. He would dedicate next time to reading, delving into the vast collection of scrolls and books avable to him.


    That would not only expand his knowledge but would also help him umte spiritual energy. It was a well-known fact.


    As the day wound down and Hikari finished his nning, reading, and all of the previous steps, he finished nning and wrote on a scroll earlier today, he turned his attention to one of the most critical aspects of his training regimen: exercising his Byakugan, his biggest gift.


    He needed to do this only after he finished reading everything he wanted to read for the day due to obvious reasons.


    This practice involved various exercises designed to push the limits of his Byakugan''s range, rity, and the precision of his chakra point targeting.


    He would start by focusing on distant objects, gradually increasing the distance as much as possible, to expand his telescopic vision.


    Then, he would shift to practicing his 360-degree vision, trying to capture as much detail in his surroundings as he could, improving his spatial awareness.


    These nightly sessions would not only strengthen his Byakugan but also deepen his connection to his dojutsu, making him more attuned to its nuances and future potential.


    Hikari knew that mastering his Byakugan was key to unlocking new levels of power and abilities that would set him apart from other people in this world.


    After these rigorous exercises, Hikari began to meditate, allowing his eyes and body to rest and recover from the strain.


    This meditation helped him consolidate the day''s learnings and experiences, preparing him mentally and physically for the next day''s challenges.


    Meditation would also be a crucial part of his evening routine. Hikari wouldbine meditation practices from his past life with the techniques rmended in the Hyuga n''s meditation protocols. That would also calm him down just in time to go to sleep at night.


    As darkness enveloped the vige, Hikari concluded his day''s rigorous training schedule. He found himself seated on the wooden floor of his room, gazing out towards the tranquil night that unfolded across his private courtyard.


    Beyond, the imposing silhouette of the Hokage mountain loomed, bathed in the soft glow of the moonlight, with stars twinkling like distant, watchful eyes in the clear night sky. The scene was peaceful, almost serene, offering a stark contrast to the whirlwind of activities that filled his day.


    In this quiet moment, the reality of his situation began to truly sink in for Hikari. He had crossed the boundary between worlds, leaving behind everything familiar to embark on a life in a world that, until recently, had existed only in stories.


    As the second day in this new reality drew to a close, he couldn''t help but reflect on his solitary journey.


    Despite his cold, calcting nature and a disposition that leaned towards ruthlessness, Hikari wasn''t immune to the sense of istion that his unique circumstances fostered.


    However, solitude was not a stranger to him; it had been a constantpanion in his previous life as well. Yet, the loneliness he might have felt was overshadowed by the oddity of his new existence.


    The moon that hung overhead, a celestial body he knew to be an artificial creation housing a sealed entity, served as a stark reminder of the strangeness of this world.


    The knowledge that he alone possessed about the true nature of the moon, among other secrets of this world, addedyers to his sense of detachment.


    Yet, it also fortified his resolve to navigate this world with the same cold, strategic approach that had defined him.


    As Hikari''s gaze met the moonlit sky, his thoughts ventured toward the possible paths to personal power he could take in the future.


    Amidst this contemtion, fundamentally, a profound sense of thankfulness washed over him. He recognized the rarity of his birthright, being part of a lineage gically directly connected to those celestial beings, the ''Otsutsuki n''.


    This connection wasn''t just a matter of pride; it was a significant advantage in a world where one''s innate qualifications and bloodline often dictated their potential and end-ce in life.


    The Byakugan, Hikari''s inherited Kekkei Genkai, held a significance that transcended typical bloodline abilities. That''s why Hikari ced such a high emphasis on specifically training it.


    Unlike strange ''gic mutation'' type Kekkei Genkai, manifesting identally thanks to specific unique environmental circumstances for some individuals in history and then getting passed on to their offspring, or other unique developments, like Jugo''s n for example.


    Also, unlike more ''elemental'' Kekkei Genkai, which emerged through the innovative merging of two distinct chakra natures by some talented ordinary shinobi in the past, resulting in new elements then passed down gically to their descendants - The Byakugan stood apart.


    The Byakugan wasn''t birthed from human circumstances or ingenuity. Instead, it represented a far more esteemed heritage, one not from human hands but directly from celestial origins.


    And it wasn''t just about Byakugan, it was also about the more advantageousDNA of Hyuga n members fundamentally.


    Nevertheless, possessing even an ''elemental'' Kekkei Genkai, a product of human creativity and chakra maniption, significantly elevates inheritor above the civilian shinobi at least hundreds of times in terms of potential, and also puts them way above the n shinobi from ns that merely transmit unique, secret techniques, such as the Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, and others.


    However, the Byakugan was of a different caliber altogether, a direct heirloom from the extraterrestrial beings who were the ones who even introduced chakra to this world.


    This realization filled Hikari with a deep sense of fortune, knowing he was among the descendants of Kaguya Otsutsuki¡ªpart of an elite lineage that included the six families that included Senju, Uzumaki, Hyuga, Uchiha, Kaguya, and Toneri''s n living on that Moon.


    This lineage wasn''t merely about possessing a formidable power; it was about the potential to ascend to unprecedented levels of strength, to the revered ''Six Paths'' level.


    Achieving such a pinnacle of power, was Hikari''s ''dream'', because it could transform one from being a mere pawn of fate to a master of one''s destiny in Hikari''s opinion.


    Had he been born a civilian, it would''ve been at least hundreds of times more difficult for Hikari to achieve his dreams, or even fully impossible. So, he was truly thankful for that.


    Even someone as highly intelligent and power-hungry as Orochimaru, who was always pushing the boundaries of what it meant to be a shinobi, struggled to surpass his ''human limitations'' in the original story.


    Despite his unique advantage from exploring the Ryuichi Cave, he still couldn''t break free from being ''just a human'' with an ''ordinary strong'' power level. This fact made Hikari realize how daunting the challenge was for everyone else who didn''t have the Otsutski DNA traces in them nearly the entire poption of this.


    Take Might Guy, for example. He only touched that legendary power level for a brief moment, risking his life in the process, and even then, he barely scratched the surface of the Six Paths level for a few minutes.


    And Kakashi also temporarily achieved such heights only through the borrowed power of the Otsutsuki''s Sharingan.


    This all highlighted to Hikari the sheer difficulty of reaching such a pinnacle of strength without the gic advantage of Otsutsuki DNA. The stark deterministic reality of this world was not lost on him.


    However, inheriting one of those six legendary gic legacies doesn''t automatically guarantee prominence or ultimate power¡ªit merely ces one at the starting line of a vast and challenging arena.


    Achieving the exalted Six Paths level remains an endeavor as hard as climbing the heavens. This reality was illustrated clearly within the Hyuga n, where despite the prestigious Byakugan, many members fall into mediocrity, blending into the background as mere footnotes in shinobi history.


    And that phenomenon wasn''t unique to the Hyuga; the nearplete disappearances of the Senju, Uzumaki, Uchiha, Kaguya, and Toneri ns in the original story revealed it all the best.


    Possessing immense power often invites envy, fear, and greed, leading to downfall and destruction from both within and without in this world.


    Therefore, Hikari''s gratitude for his Hyuga lineage over the others stems not only from the bloodline''s inherent potential for the future but also from the n''s strategic low profile.


    Unlike the Uchiha, whose prominence and assertiveness led to their catastrophic and embarrassing demise, the Hyuga''s survival strategy has been one of discretion and restraint.


    In this world, where the line between survival and annihtion is as thin as the edge of a kunai, Hikari recognizes the wisdom in Hyuga''s approach, especially given the alternative.

 15. Thoughts About Hyuga vs Uchiha

    15. Thoughts About Hyuga vs Uchiha


    And Hikari wasn''t just relieved to be born into the Hyuga n because he avoided the kind of extermination he would have faced if he had been reborn into the Uchiha n for example.


    He also believes that, in terms of their current strength and potential, at this point in time, the Hyuga n is on par with the Uchiha n. This is contrary to the popr belief held by readers in Hikari''s previous life, who generally viewed the Uchiha as the stronger of the two.


    After everything he learned in these few days, Hikari now considered the Byakugan to be a far more valuable dojutsu than the One-Tomoe Sharingan, and even more powerful in terms of pure vision and insight than even any higher version of the Sharingan in existence.


    Sharingan''s mastery of insight and vision differed from the Byakugan''s in that it primarily involved ''superpower-like'' pattern recognition and memory recollection of observed patterns.


    This is why, historically, the Uchiha n leaned heavily on skills like shinobi weapon throwing, kenjutsu, and, most importantly, ninjutsu, even developing strong affinities for fire, mainly, and lightning, secondary, releases over time.


    Their vision facilitated the easy copying and learning of ninjutsu over generations, leading them to develop fighting skill sets around it, unlike the Hyuga, who, with their internal and 360-degree vision, honed the Gentle Fist technique and mainly used ninjutsu as a supplementary skill.


    Therefore, while the Uchihas might not have had as diverse a range of visual abilities as the Byakugan, their unique talent allowed them to excel across variousbat disciplines, truly mastering ninjutsu on a way higher level.


    However, without the second gift from the Sharingan¡ªa heightened affinity for Yin Release, which was rted to genjutsu¡ªthe Uchiha would still have been outmatched by the Hyuga.


    With this enhanced capability for genjutsu, the Uchiha became the strongest users of such techniques in the world, surpassing the Hyuga in this domain by far. So, only with their prowess in both ninjutsu and genjutsu could the Uchiha be on equal footing with the Hyuga.


    That exact affinity for Yin Release and genjutsu was also why they got famous for being able to control ''Tailed Beats''.


    In fact, Hikari ssified the Sharingan more as a vehicle of ''Yin Release'' affinity altogether rather than cing it in the same category as the Byakugan in terms of eyesight ''buffs''.


    The requirement of experiencing strong emotional pressures to awaken the Sharingan spoke volumes to its true nature, aligning it more closely with Yin Release and spiritual elements rather than the eyesight and biological aspects characteristic of the Byakugan.


    The clearest example of how the Byakugan is more ''biological'' and the Sharingan more ''spiritual'' can be seen in how easily the Byakugan was transnted to a non-n member, Ao, in the original story.


    Ao could activate and deactivate the Byakugan at will and use it with minimal chakra expenditure, almost as if he were a native Hyuga.


    In contrast, the Sharingan, when transnted into non-Uchiha like Kakashi, proved to be much more challenging to use. It couldn''t be turned off at will, controlled easily, and it drained significant amounts of chakra and caused fatigue, which limited Kakashi''s potential.


    This difference in usability led the Uchiha n to not ce any special jutsu to safeguard their eyes, unlike the Hyuga. The Uchiha likely felt secure in the knowledge that the Sharingan''s demanding nature made it almost impossible for non-Uchiha shinobi to use it.


    Meanwhile, back on topic, Hikari believed that the two and three tomoe stages of the Sharingan should be considered more ''valuable'' and stronger than the Byakugan, a departure from the assessment of the one-tomoe stage.


    This belief stemmed from the fact that advancing to the two and three tomoe Sharingan not only retained the previous stages'' advantages but also significantly boosted the user''s spiritual energy.


    This increase in spiritual energy, in turn, expanded the user''s overall chakra capacity. Since spiritual energy is typically more challenging to cultivate and oftengs behind physical energy in development, users were previously unable to convert all their physical energy into chakra efficiently.


    However, the Sharingan''s enhancement of spiritual energy bridged this gap, allowing for a more effective conversion and utilization of chakra.


    Consequently, users of the two and three-tomoe Sharingan generally possessed greater strength than the average Byakugan wielder. The presence of a three tomoe Sharingan nearly guaranteed the status of an Elite Jonin, while two tomoe were synonymous with Jonin level, and one tomoe indicated a Special Jonin.


    In contrast, possessing the Byakugan did not automatically confer a Jonin ranking; many Byakugan users in the Hyuga n were Chunin. Even among those who reached Jonin level, the Byakugan often designated them to more supportive rather than frontlinebat roles.


    But, getting to the two and three tomoe levels of the Sharingan was really tough, while most of the Hyuga n, about three out of four people, could unlock the Byakugan. So, this kept the two ns pretty much even in terms of power.


    The fact that not many Uchiha could reach the higher levels of their Sharingan meant that its full power was rare. Meanwhile, because so many Hyugas could use the Byakugan, their strength was more spread out across the n. So, this still kept the two ns ''bnced''.


    However, in Hikari''s mind, what really made a difference in how strong the two ns seemed was the existence of the Mangekyo Sharingan. Just waking up with this power could bring someone to a ''Kage-level'' automatically with all those special overpowered abilities and the boost in chakra.


    The Hyuga n could match the Uchiha at the lower levels, and even at the very top levels, Hikari thought that the Tenseigan and Rinnegan were equally strong. But it was those higher middle stages where the Uchiha n had an edge and more potential.


    Yet, Hikari was convinced there had to be some hidden reason why the Hyuga didn''t have a way to take the Byakugan to a higher level in a simr way. It just didn''t make sense to him that such a possibility wouldn''t exist.


    Hikari already figured out that the Cursed Seals yed a part in this mystery. He now knew firsthand that the Curse Mark reduced the Byakugan''s powers in the Side Branch members.


    But this raised another question: Why hadn''t anyone from the Main Branch managed to evolve their Byakugan to higher levels, simr to the Mangekyo Sharingan?


    The existence of the Curse Seal raised two significant questions for Hikari. The first was about its true purpose. It was clear to him that its use extended beyond merely protecting the Byakugan.


    If protection was the sole reason, there wouldn''t be a need for such a harsh measure as the brain destructionmand embedded within the seal. This led Hikari to believe that the development of the Curse Seal was prompted by circumstances or threats that required such an extreme response, not just the fear of the Byakugan falling into the wrong hands.


    The second mystery that puzzled him was why no one from the Main Branch had ever unlocked further abilities of the Byakugan, akin to the Mangekyo Sharingan''s evolution.


    This is why Hikari was convinced that there must be multiple shocking secrets buried in the history of his n. He was determined to uncover these secrets over time. He believed that understanding these hidden aspects of his n''s past might reveal the potential for the Byakugan''s evolution, or at least exin why such an evolution hadn''t urred yet.


    In fact, Hikari came to realize that there might not even be an evolution akin to the Mangekyo Sharingan for the Byakugan. Instead of having distinct, binary visual transformations, the Byakugan''s powery in its ''purity'' and the potential for incremental improvement.


    This understanding led Hikari to focus intensely on training his Byakugan, hoping to gradually unlock new abilities over time.


    He entertained the hope that perhaps, with enough dedication and refinement of his dojutsu''s purity, some new powers could manifest, possibly even suddenly overnight.


    However, during the period when Hikari was born, there were no Mangekyo Sharingan holders in the Uchiha n, unlike the decades before or after the original story. This unique situation meant that the Hyuga and Uchiha ns could genuinely be considered of simr strength.


    Yet, the Uchiha, proud as they were, would never admit to this parity. Meanwhile, the Hyuga preferred to stay out of the limelight, adopting a strategic policy of keeping a low profile. As a result, this bnce of power wasn''t widely recognized among the general popce.


    And this assessment didn''t even take into ount the possibility of the Hyuga n harboring more hidden secrets or ''weapons'', something Hikari theorized.


    If his theory held true, then no one outside the few people ced at the top of the Hyuga n truly knew the full extent of theirprehensive power in the Ninja World.


    Regarding sociological factors that might influence the overall strength of the two ns, both had their share of internal issues.


    The Uchiha n, with its deep emotional ties to the Sharingan, experienced civil strife and internal conflicts throughout history, including notable divisions into ''doves'' and ''hawks'' in recent decades and the civil war during Madara''s defection.


    These ideological splits often led to tension and discord within the n, impacting its unity and, by extension, its overall strength.


    On the other hand, the Hyuga n faced a different set of issues stemming from the division into Main and Side Branches which happened for some more tangible, mysterious reason in Hikari''s spection.


    Over time, the Main Branch became somewhatcent, indulging in the privileges andforts that came with their status.


    This indulgence led to a loss of the rigorous discipline and drive that might have propelled them to greater heights of power.


    Conversely, members of the Side Branch often felt demoralized and oppressed, burdened by the Curse Seal, and aware that no matter how hard they trained, they would never be able to rise to the top of the n hierarchy.


    This resulted in ack of motivation to push themselves to their limits. Meanwhile, the Main Branchcked motivation for a different reason¡ªthey already had everything they needed and saw little reason to strive for more.


    Thisck of a ''middle ground'' between the driven and thecent further exacerbated the n''s internal issues, affecting its potential to grow stronger as a unified force as well.


    This all also doesn''t consider that the Hyuga n didn''t have powerful Indra and Ashura reincarnations every few generations that gave rise to many overpowered individuals inside of the Senju and Uchiha ns that made them considerably stronger than the Hyuga n during the Warring States period for example, thest two being ''demigods'' like Hashirama and Madara just a few decades ago and also probably the two strongest reincarnations.

 16. Future Paths For Strength Growth

    16. Future Paths For Strength Growth


    Nevertheless, Hikari''s thoughts eventually returned to the immediate reality. All those grand ideas about reaching unprecedented levels of power and unveiling the secrets of this world meant nothing to him now.


    Right now, he was barely more than a ''powerful baby'' in this world, with his fate soon to be deliberated at the Hyuga Council meeting the next morning, so he had no luxury to think about anything else anymore.


    At this juncture, he had virtually no power to influence whatever decisions were to be made about him.


    He was just feeling grateful that if the oue of tomorrow''s meeting turned positive, then he would truly feel like he had a very lucky transmigrationpared to the 99% of other possibilities.


    With a deep sigh, Hikari remained on the traditional Hyuga wooden nk, gazing out into the surrealndscape of the night, contemting his next moves and the immediate future that awaited him.


    ''Knowledge means progress. I need to always be learning more in order to keep advancing ''levels''. The information Takumi gave me will soon not be enough after I''ve gone through it.'',


    ''But, if that meeting goes well, he''s likely to keep providing me with even more information in the future. Unfortunately, the Hyuga n doesn''t have something akin to a shared library...'',


    ''Instead, each Main Lineage keeps its collection, probably filled with a lot of the same information and techniques. Considering the n has been around for nearly a thousand years, it would make sense for knowledge to have spread easily by now alongside some unique stuff. My own lineage''s inheritance is, however, not in my hands...'', Hikari thought.


    Gazing at the grand Hokage rock in the distance, illuminated by the night, Hikari pondered his situation, ''Thinking about going to and trying to learn something at the Ninja Academy...'',


    ''Well, I''m not out of my mind...'', He reflected silently, ''How can a ce that''s only been around for a few decades stand up to the thousand years of knowledge our n has built?'',


    ''The majority of our elders were older than that institution. For civilians, Konoha''s Academy might be the only way out, but for us n kids, it''s not really about learning. It''s all political games and making connections And most n heirs don''t go there at all. At most only a few selected ones go there every year out of the total pool for political reasons and to give a little ''face'' to the Hokage.'',


    He continued his thought, ''However, I''d be foolish to try and sign up there now, especially after my parents already did what they did. Signing up for the Academy might as well be signing my death certificate...'', This thought lingered in Hikari''s mind as he took in the sight of the Hokage rock.


    ''Still, with Konoha''s civilian poption vastly outnumbering those of the ns, in theory, the Ninja Academy should excel in teaching various civilian subjects like geography, history, maths, and others...'', Hikari considered, his eyes still fixed on the distant Hokage rock.


    ''It''s a pity, though, that we don''t live in a world where those civilian topics hold the upper hand. Instead, power and strength dictate the order of things. And when ites to that, the ns are unmatched. And those civilian subjects taught at the Ninja Academy, I probably have tens of times better grasp due to my previous life on Earth and modern education...'',


    ''As for the practical skills they teach at the Academy, it''s pretty much just some basic taijutsu moves and how to break out of simple genjutsu. Then there are those three ''crappy'' E-level, ''optical-illusion'', ninjutsu techniques: Clone, Transformation, and Substitution. They''re only useful if you aim to be cannon fodder in battle, sacrificing your life for Konoha, at best.'',


    ''Not many in the Hyuga n waste their time on such basics. And when ites to nature transformation techniques, dreaming about learning those at the Academy is just that¡ªa dream. After all, if such advanced skills were taught openly, how could Hiruzen use the promise of teaching higher-level jutsu as leverage to coerce you into taking on missions?'',


    ''Offering those C-rank techniques as rewards for risking your life is part of how he keeps shinobi in line...'', Hikari thought, his critique of the Academy''s curriculum reflecting a deeper understanding of the vige''s dynamics and the maniption at y within its leadership.


    ''Well, I guess they do teach some basics like kunai and shuriken throwing, and how to use ninja tools, which isn''t totally useless...'', Hikari thought, ''But, how much money do regr folks actually have to keep buying things like smoke bombs, and especially those fuinjutsu-created explosive tags? Those are things also reserved for n shinobi to use again as well.'',


    ''Plus, even sword fighting, or kenjutsu, is also pretty much reserved only for ninja ns. I remember Hayate, Gekko, and the Uchiha shinobi families. They are all top-notch with swords. Getting good at using a sword isn''t easy; it takes learning from generations of family know-how. And wire strings? Who was famous for using those again? Right, Sasuke Uchiha.'',


    ''We Hyuga n also have our favorite weapons, which are arrows, used mostly by some auxiliary members of our n...'', Hikari also totally discarded this to use weapons to improve his strength at this time. After all, he is not Hatake, then maybe he would''ve considered it.


    ''And things don''t get any better after graduation sadly for Konoha''s civilian-born Hiruzen''s fodder. Landing a Jonin instructor like the Konoha 12 did is more of a fairy tale than reality. Unless youe from a prominent background, which around 95% of Academy goers don''t, in my estimates...'',


    ''Then your ''instructor''¡ªor better said, ''team leader''¡ªis likely just a Chunin who got slightly luckier than the rest. Getting someone capable of teaching you something valuable? That''s down to sheer luck and fate by then...'', Hikari''s thoughts trailed off, filled with skepticism.


    He pondered how the original author of this world managed to depict such stark inequalities in an extremely idealistic narrative, presenting it as if it were a fairy tale when the real state was far from it.


    To make things even moreughable and ironic, those talented or well-off kids from the Konoha 12, wearing their shy outfits, with colorful appearances, got to hang out in a fancy, modern building right in the center of the vige, close to where the Hokage works.


    Meanwhile, Hikari had nowe to realize a much grimmer truth that wasn''t shown in the story everyone knew. All around Konoha, there were loads of smaller, shabbier ces called just ''teaching facilities''.


    These were hidden away in less noticeable parts of the vige. They were nothing like the fancy central building and were where thousands of ordinary vige kids were trained. These kids were pretty much just being prepared to be used up in battles for the sake of Konoha''s higher-ups. Forgotten by nearly everyone, their stories were never told in the main series.


    ''Let''s not dwell on that anymore. I need to think about what I''m going to do in the near future, on top of my current training, to be as strong as possible, fast. And I need to figure out which skills I should focus on getting next... I hope my Byakugan unlocks some, more powerful ''extra ''ability down the line, especially after all my training with it. It''s supposed to be pretty ''pure'', definitely more so than Hinata''s or Neji''s, by all ounts.'',


    ''And those full Otsutsuki members in the original stories had way more powerful tricks up their sleeves with their Byakugan, like Kaguya, who could even read minds. Seems like the Hyuga n''s gics have gotten pretty diluted over time...'', Hikari thought as he stood up to walk his courtyard to think better and stimte his brain growth factors more.


    "Secondly, it''s a big advantage that I''ve got ess to all these original Hyuga techniques, assuming everything goes ording to n. And having an Elite Jonin to personally guide me for the next few years? That''s invaluable. I won''t have to start from scratch, trying to invent new ninjutsu on my own, learning only from my trials and errors, which could take decades.",


    The night enveloped him, the moon casting long shadows that danced across the ground with his every step. The traditional Hyuga architecture surrounding him, with its elegant lines and serene beauty, contrasted with the storm of ambition and determination brewing within.


    ''It''s a shame I don''t have any Yin Release jutsu to experiment with right now. The more I could connect with the Yin Release itself, and be familiar and skilled in it, the better I might be able to enhance my dojutsu abilities. That''s another thing that''ll have to wait. I guess it''ll be a few years at the earliest before I can even start to learn those advanced genjutsu techniques from the Main Branch.'',


    The stillness of the night seemed to reflect his moment of contemtion, a silent partner to his aspirations and frustrations. The moon overhead, partially hidden by passing clouds, cast a dim light over the courtyard, adding to the ambiance of anticipation and the longing for growth.


    ''The idea of trying to open the Eight Inner Gates using my Byakugan''s internal vision and Gentle Fist is just ridiculous, something thatizens from my past life came up with...'',


    ''Honestly, if it was such a great and smart move, you''d think someone from the Hyuga n would have already done it. And if it worked, the whole n would be using it by now, maybe even taking over Konoha or something.


    ''However, it doesn''t fit with Gentle Fist at all; it''s much more suited to Strong Fist, just like Tsunade''s ''Chakra Enhancement'' for example which was even less suited. Plus, we Hyugas just don''t have the physical resilience needed to handle that kind of strain for useful durations during longer periods of time.'',


    ''We inherited our ''eyes'' from Hamura, not his incredible ''body.'' The Senju n, with their robust physiques, would be a lot better match for something like the Eight Gates. Might Duy and Might Guy, though, were exceptions with their extraordinarily tough bodies, which is why they could master such a technique out of tens of thousands of shinobi in Konoha''s history.'',


    His steps were measured, a physical manifestation of his inner contemtion, as he moved with the grace and precision characteristic of a Hyuga. Each step was deliberate, echoing softly against the stone pathway that wound through the carefully manicured garden. The asional rustle of leaves in the gentle night breeze was the only sound that apanied his solitary figure.


    ''Medical jutsu is definitely on my list to learn in theing years. It''s probably one of the most useful skills you can have in this world. Luckily, there are plenty of high-level medical experts right here in thepound, and thanks to my status, learning from them shouldn''t be too difficult.'',


    ''Then there''s fuinjutsu. I''ve got a feeling that''s going to be incredibly useful to meter on, so I should start diving into that sooner rather thanter, also in a few years. The n should have a few experts in that area as well...'',


    ''Regarding ninjutsu... That should also be considered only after I''ve mastered the Gentle Fist techniques up to a certain level. Initially, I should follow my innate chakra affinity attributes and learn techniques suited to them...'',


    ''Aplishing that from within the n won''t be difficult. However, everything I''ve thought of so far requires gradually gaining more and more approval from the Main Branch. So, nothing will happen quickly and easily, I need to fight hard...'',


    As Hikari reflected on the path ahead, he understood the challenges thaty in gaining the Main Branch''s recognition and approval. And the beginning of that would be tomorrow.


    Everything would be clearer for Hikari tomorrow, after the Hyuga Council meeting where his fate would be decided. With these thoughts heavy on his mind, he realized that there was little more he could do tonight. So, deciding to call it a night, he made his way back to his room from the tranquil courtyard that had been hispanion in contemtion.

 17. The Hyuga Council Meeting Begins

    17. The Hyuga Council Meeting Begins


    After their second session of Gentle Fist martial arts training, Takumi, the Fifth Elder of the Hyuga n, apanied by his attendants, was making his way toward the Patriarch''s building.


    They had just left his own Fifth Estate, stepping onto the prestigious pathways that connected the various Elder Estates to the Patriarch Estate within thepound.


    The hallways and pathways were designed in the traditional Hyuga style, with elegant architecture that spoke of the n''s long and storied history.


    The path was lined with ornate decorations and symbols significant to the Hyuga, reflecting the n''s pride and heritage.


    Prestigious and well-maintained, the route through thepound showcased the power and status of the Main Branch.


    Takumi, embodying the quintessential main branch member, walked with a proud and confident stride.


    He was traditional, stern, and stoic, yet calcting, fully aware, and appreciative of the power and prestige his position within the Main Branch afforded him.


    As he walked, Takumi''s thoughts drifted to the training session with Hikari. He was impressed by the young boy''s potential, noting how at just three years old, Hikari showed promise that could be described as the strongest in the n''s history.


    With the uing Hyuga Council meeting on his mind, Takumi decided to advocate for Hikari.


    He saw in the boy an opportunity not just for Hikari''s growth but for his own political power in the decades toe.


    Investing in Hikari at such an early stage could be the key to solidifying his own position within the n''s hierarchy.


    Gaining Takumi''s approval was no easy feat, yet Hikari had already managed to do so, marking him as a unique talent within the n, one that Takumi was now fullymitted to supporting.


    As Takumi approached the Patriarch''s estate, the grandeur of the building became increasingly evident.


    This illustrious estate wasn''t just a home; it served as thergest single hub for the n''s administrative work, making it the heart of the Hyuga''s power.


    The architecture was majestic, with towering pirs and expansive courtyards that were meticulously maintained to reflect the n''s prestige and heritage.


    The estate''s security was tight, with highly skilled guards stationed at strategic points around the perimeter, their keen eyes missing nothing.


    The building itself was adorned with symbols and carvings significant to the Hyuga, including depictions of the Byakugan, which served as a reminder of the n''s unique abilities and proud history.


    As Takumi arrived, he noticed the other eight Elders also making their way towards the building, each apanied by their own attendants.


    They used secret paths that connected their own estates to the Patriarch''s building, paths known only to those of high standing within the n.


    This weekly gathering of the Elders was a tradition, a time when decisions were made, disputes were settled, and the future of the n was shaped.


    The atmosphere was charged with anticipation as the heart of the Hyuga''s power officially came together.


    Despite their stern expressions and stoic demeanor, there was an unspoken understanding among them of the importance of these meetings.


    Today, like every week, they would deliberate on matters crucial to the welfare and advancement of the Hyuga n, each Elder prepared to argue fiercely for their views and interests.


    Yet, beneath the surface, there was a sense of unity and purpose, a sharedmitment to the n''s legacy and to its future prosperity.


    As each Elder arrived in front of the Patriarch''s estate, they exchanged polite greetings, meticulously maintaining the decorum expected of their positions.


    They were careful to present a united front, especially in front of their Side Branch attendants, embodying the Hyuga n''s values of calmness,posure, politeness, and nobility.


    Even Takumi and the Seventh Elder, who had engaged in a heated verbal exchange just the day before, greeted each other with polite nods as if the disagreement had never urred.


    This disy of courtesy underscored the importance of stability and harmony within the n, particrly in such public settings.


    Together with their attendants, the Elders proceeded inside the grand Patriarch''s Estate, guided by the Patriarch''s own attendants.


    They navigated through the building''s intricate wooden corridors, reminiscent of abyrinth until they arrived at a secluded, ceremonial room designed for their gathering.


    The room was traditional in every sense, with tatami mats covering the floor and arge table set in the center, around which they would all sit in the customary Japanese-style posture.


    Now, with the Patriarch, eight main branch Elders also assembled, ten people in total filled the room, each taking their ce with deliberate care.


    The setting was intimate, yet the air was charged with the gravity of the asion.


    Around the table, eight Elders, each with their unique features, still shared a familial resemnce indicative of the Hyuga n.


    Their attire varied slightly, reflecting personal tastes but always adhering to the traditional style and colors that signified their status within the Main Branch.


    Some bore more ornate essories, symbols of their achievements and roles within the n, while others opted for a more understated elegance.


    Hirayoshi Hyuga, the Patriarch of the n, settled into his ce at the head of the table and now signaled the beginning of the meeting with aposed nod.


    Hiyaroshi, with his long, meticulously tied-back hair that was nearly entirely gray by this point, radiated an aura of wisdom and authority.


    His traditional Hyuga robes were pristine, embroidered with the n''s symbols, signifying his esteemed position.


    "Let usmence...", He stated, his voice carrying the weight of authority and tradition. The room immediately fell into an attentive silence.


    Hiyaroshi began outlining the current state of the n''s various business endeavors immediately.


    The discussion was methodical, with each Elder contributing updates on trade, investments, and partnerships that the Hyuga n maintained within Konoha and beyond.


    Next, the conversation shifted to "potential disputes within and with outside." Hiyaroshi facilitated the discussion, ensuring that any internal conflicts were addressed with wisdom and fairness.


    "We must also consider our rtions with other ns and the Hokage''s group...", He continued, stressing the importance of diplomacy in maintaining the n''s esteemed position within the vige.


    The meeting then turned to "administrative stuff," with Elders sharing reports on the n''s internal management, resource allocation, and the well-being of its members. It was clear that maintaining a smoothly running n was a priority for everyone present.


    And finally, Hiyaroshi guided the discussion towards the Hyuga''s contributions to the vige''s defense, specifically mentioning the "Hyuga Border Surveince Division."


    However, as the discussion on formal and routine matters began to wind down, a palpable tension filled the room, hinting at the anticipation building among the Elders.


    It was as if the air itself grew denser, charged with the collective focus of those present, all bracing for the topic they knew was imminent.


    This wasn''t just any Hyuga Council gathering; it was set to be one of the most important meetings in recent memory.


    Despite their age and the many council meetings they had attended over the years, each Elder felt a surge of strong feelings and even excitement at the prospect of discussing this next agenda item.


    Noticing the shift in atmosphere and recognizing that the moment to transition had arrived, Patriarch Hiyaroshi sighed, a rare disy of emotion that underscored the significance of what was toe,


    "The routine part of today''s meeting is hence over I dere...", He announced, his voice steady yet imbued with a gravity that underscored the importance of their next discussion.


    "The next item is one of two particrly urgent matters prepared for today, and the first one concerns Hikari Hyuga, and the second is about the shinobi world war we are currently going through. However, after analyzing it, it is better for us to actuallybine this discussion...",


    At the mention of Hikari''s name, the Elders began to stir, their usualposure giving way to a mix of restlessness, excitement, and a spectrum of other emotions.


    It was clear that Hikari, a mere three-year-old, had sparked a level of interest and debate rarely seen within the stoic confines of the Hyuga Council.


    Chairs shifted, and quiet murmurs filled the room as the Elders prepared themselves to delve into a discussion that could very well shape the future trajectory of the Hyuga n.

 18. The Start of Discussion About Hikari

    18. The Start of Discussion About Hikari


    "During the period of thest few months after we ''dealt with'' the Third Elder and his wife, the boy''s parents, we initially couldn''t reach a consensus regarding his fate. Thus, it was decided to move the matter to ater date, allowing us to periodically review his development at weekly meetings such as this.",


    As Patriarch Hiyaroshi Hyuga spoke, his presencemanded attention, not only through his words but also through his distinguished appearance. His aged yet sharp features were illuminated by the dim light of the room, casting soft shadows that entuated the wisdom etched into his face.


    "In the interim, the boy was ced under the close surveince of the Fifth Elder. Given that he is the most recent addition among us and the youngest, he was eager to prove his worth and contribute meaningfully to the Council.",


    "However, a significant development has since urred. The boy has independently activated his Byakugan at just three years of age, marking a record-setting moment in the extensive history of our n. Fifth Elder, I believe everyone here is keen to hear your perspective first. What do you think of the boy now?",


    As he discussed the fate of young Hikari, those eyes revealed a mixture of solemnity and anticipation. His hands, which rested gently on the table before him, asionally moved with deliberate gestures that underscored the importance of his words.


    His demeanor was one of calm control, yet there was an underlying excitement¡ªa rare crack in his usually stoic exterior¡ªas he broached the topic of Hikari''s unprecedented achievement. This subtle shift in his expression hinted at the significance of the moment, not just for Hiyaroshi but for the entire Hyuga n.


    There was no other way, Hikari''s achievement in awakening his Byakugan at just three years old was shocking to everyone. The Patriarch, his son Hiashi, and their ancestors all unlocked their Byakugan at five years old, and that was with special training.


    Before Hikari, the youngest anyone in the n had managed to awaken their Byakugan was four years old, and that was a n member who became a strong Kage-level shinobi during the middle-Warring States period, thest one in Hyuga''s history.


    Usually, kids from the main branch of the family unlock their Byakugan at six to seven years old, and those from the side branch around nine to ten years old.


    Waking up the Byakugan so early, especially without any help, was a big deal. It''s well known and documented in the Hyuga n that the sooner you unlock your Byakugan, the stronger you and your Byakugan are expected to beter in life.


    "I understand, Patriarch...", Takumi began, his voice steady yet carrying a palpable sense of significance, "I will try to exin the situation. I''m sure you are all well aware of the incident involving Hikari and the Seventh Elder''s grandson. Yes, after the altercation in which Hikari was notably bested by Hiroto, the young boy, strangely, fell into aa for three days.",


    Takumi paused for a moment, ensuring he had the full attention of the council members, "We observed significant disturbances in his chakrawork throughout this period, with a trend of gradually calming down over time.",


    "It returned to apletely normal state on the third day of hisa, coinciding with the moment he awoke with his Byakugan unconsciously activated, as observed by my attendants who were tasked with monitoring his condition at all times.",


    He carefully chose his words, aware of the gravity of what he was about to propose, "It is said that significant emotional disturbances can elerate the opening of the Byakugan.",


    "Though not to the extent observed with the Sharingan among the Uchihas, it still does happen. However, considering Hikari was only three years old, his body might not have been fully capable of operating the Byakugan easily, which could exin the three-day period needed to stabilize in thatatose state.",


    "Indeed, it is unheard of for anyone in our n''s history to awaken the Byakugan at merely three years of age, leaving us without prior cases forparison. Nheless, considering the notable bloodline talent that the Seventh Lineage has disyed in recent decades, especially his father and mother I believe this to be the most likely exnation. The emotional shock Hikari experienced, particrly after returning from his parents'' cemetery, might''ve elerated his Byakugan''s awakening.",


    After listening to Takumi''s eloquent exnation, a wave of agreement washed over the council members. Their faces, usually reserved and stoic, softened with expressions of assent, and nods of approval circled the room.


    The initial skepticism that had clouded the atmosphere gave way to a budding excitement. The realization that Hikari''s activation of the Byakugan was not a cause for concern, but rather a groundbreaking event, began to fully sink in.


    For the first time, the Elders collectively acknowledged the magnitude of what had urred. The reality that they were witnessing history in the making during their own lifetimes ignited a sense of excitement and pride.


    Among the faces of agreement and excitement, one stood out starkly. The Seventh Elder''s expression was a mix of annoyance and hesitation, especially noticeable after Takumi mentioned the incident involving his grandson.


    The mention of his grandson''s actions seemed to strike a nerve, and his difort was palpable to those paying attention.


    It dawned on him, perhaps a bit toote, that Takumi''s quick reference to the altercation might have been strategic, preempting anyints he might have had about how Hikari, upon awakening with the Byakugan, had also bested his grandson.


    "Your speech was great, Fifth Elder...", The Patriarchmended, his voice carrying a note of approval that filled the ceremonial room with a sense of gravitas,


    "Please continue with recounting everything that happened in regards to that boyter on and what do you think about it...", He encouraged, indicating that the discussion on Hikari and his remarkable capabilities was far from over.


    "I arrived as soon as I was notified by my attendants and confirmed it again with my own eyes. The boy had really awakened his Byakugan...", Takumi continued, recounting his firsthand experience with Hikari post-awakening,


    "As I engaged in conversation with him, I noted a marked change in his demeanor. He seemed much more polite and attuned to our n''s traditions than before, a subtlety that did not escape my notice, despite the stark contrast with his parents'' attitudes.",


    Takumi took a moment to reflect, ensuring he urately conveyed the nuances of Hikari''s transformation, "Over time, in our subsequent interactions, the differences in his personality became more pronounced."


    "There was a newfound pride in him, perhaps a result of his Byakugan awakening, yet he retained a sense of humility, reserve, and discipline that was present before.",


    "The most striking change, however, was in his intellectual brightness. It was as if the awakening, or maybe the ordeal he underwent at the hands of Seventh''s Grandson, sparked a significant growth in his cognitive abilities. He seemed far more ambitious and eager to learn.",


    Pausing, Takumi considered how to best articte the shift towards what he perceived as a Main Branch personality,


    "Hikari has be more aligned with the typical Main Branch traits, a stark deviation from the inclinations of his parents. He faced his bully without hesitation, a departure from his previously non-confrontational nature.",


    "His willingness to learn and adhere to hard training protocol, inside of his room when left alone, has been noted by my attendants.",


    "Remarkably, he epted the Cursed Seal Command with ease, showing no signs of viewing the practice as ''cruel,'' a stark contrast to what I imagine his parents would have advised.",


    "This is, of course, all before the actual confrontation with the Seventh Elder''s grandson..."

 19. The Time for a Decision Has Come

    19. The Time for a Decision Has Come


    "In that confrontation, where Hikari faced off against one two-year-older and one four-year-older opponent, both of whom had received formal training unlike him, he demonstrated exceptionalbat intelligence...", Takumi borated, his voice filled with a mixture of admiration and incredulity.


    "I''m sure most of you are already acquainted with the details of this event, so I''ll spare you the retelling. However, I want to highlight how, in that moment, he also awakened a ''resolve'' entirely on his own.",


    Takumi''s gaze swept across the room, capturing the council''s attention, "What you may not know is that shortly after recovering from that encounter, Hikari managed to learn chakra extraction, producing a small chakra ''me'' on his palm after watching me perform it just once.",


    "His Byakugan''s range extends to 50 meters, an impressive feat, and all other metrics rted to his Byakugan are off the charts for someone awakening it for the first time, especially considering his minimal training and his young age.",


    The Fifth Elder paused, allowing the significance of his words to resonate with the council, "His talent in the Gentle Fist technique is also unparalleled in my experience. In my opinion, the boy is a natural-born genius, surpassing any we have seen before in terms of bloodline, talent, intelligence, and personality.",


    "Therefore, I truly believe that, with our full support, Hikari has the potential to elevate the Hyuga n to new heights, achieving a level of strengthparable to legends like Madara Uchiha and Hashirama Senju. Those figures stand apart from the rest of us, but Hikari possesses the potential to inscribe the Hyuga n''s surname into the annals of such figures.",


    As Takumi concluded his passionate endorsement of Hikari, a ripple of reactions swept through the room.


    The other Elders, initially captivated by Takumi''s ount, began to murmur among themselves, their expressions a mixture of surprise, contemtion, and in some cases, undisguised excitement.


    The prospect of nurturing a talent potentially as monumental as Hikari''s seemed to energize the council, sparking visions of a future where the Hyuga n could ascend to unprecedented prestige and power.


    As Takumi spoke, the Seventh Elder''s expression underwent a visible transformation. Initially marked by skepticism and a lingering annoyance from the mention of his grandson, his features gradually tightened, reflecting a growing difort.


    By the time Takumi finished, the Seventh Elder''s face had be a canvas of conflicting emotions. The more Takumi praised Hikari''s value and potential, the harder it seemed for the Seventh Elder to conceal his displeasure.


    It was clear that the prospect of Hikari¡ªa child from a lineage he viewed with disdain, especially after the incident with his grandson¡ªreceiving such high praise and expectations was a bitter pill to swallow.


    However, despite the Seventh Elder''s visible agitation, the overall mood in the room leaned toward optimism. The other Elders, recognizing the rarity and value of Hikari''s abilities, seemed inclined to side with Takumi''s assessment.


    Conversations sparked around the room, with many expressing a willingness to support Hikari''s development and to consider the implications of his talents for the n''s future strategies.


    The Seventh Elder, feeling increasingly isted in his opposition, struggled topose a rebuttal. The acknowledgment of Hikari''s potential by his peers, coupled with the Patriarch''s earlier expressions of interest, left him in a precarious position.


    He realized that any opposition he voiced against supporting Hikari could be seen as personal vendetta rather than a concern for the n''s welfare, potentially undermining his credibility within the Council.


    The Seventh Elder, amidst a growing consensus around Hikari''s potential, knew he needed to voice his concerns, yet he understood the importance of basing his opposition on objective facts rather than personal grievances.


    Clearing his throat, he carefully chose his words, aiming to sway his peers with logic, "While the boy''s talents are undeniable...", He began, his voice tinged with a measured skepticism,


    "We must consider the broader implications of his upbringing. How are we to train him, knowing his parents''... let us say, unique perspectives? Once he bes powerful enough, might he not seek to liberate Side Branch members, echoing the fairy-tale ideologies of his parents?",


    However, even as he spoke, realization dawned upon him, and a flicker of regret crossed his face. He recalled how Hikari, unlike his parents, had already activated the Cursed Seal Command against his own Side Branch members for their supposed minor ''transgressions'' yesterday. This acknowledgment undermined his initial argument, forcing him to quickly pivot,


    "Furthermore...", He hastily added, attempting to salvage his stance, "There''s the risk that Hikari could betray our n to the Hokage, following in the footsteps of his parents. How can we ensure his loyalty remains with the Hyuga?",


    The room fell into a tense silence following his words. The other Elders exchanged nces, weighing the Seventh Elder''s points. Despite his attempt to present a rational argument, the shift in his reasoning did not go unnoticed.


    However, despite the initial resistance to the Seventh Elder''s concerns, his second point about the potential for Hikari to follow in his parent''s footsteps and prioritize allegiance to the Hokage over the n did resonate with some members of the council.


    The boy''s parents had indeed gone to extreme lengths to integrate themselves into Konoha and align closely with the Hokage''s faction, to the extent that they seemed more like subordinates to Hiruzen Sarutobi than loyal members of the Hyuga n.


    This historical context lent a certain gravity to the Seventh Elder''s warnings,pelling the council to consider the matter more seriously.


    Nevertheless, before Takumi could respond to the evolving discussion, Patriarch Hiyaroshi interjected, his tone reflecting a deep conviction in Hikari''s potential.


    It was evident he had fully embraced the notion of Hikari''s exceptional capabilities and the need for a strategic approach to his upbringing within the n,


    "So, that''s precisely why we won''t give him everything in one go in terms of resources, techniques, positions, etc. Instead, we will do it gradually, increasing his privileges as we be more confident in his loyalty. This measured approach will not only secure his allegiance but also foster his trust, reliance, and pride in being a Hyuga n member.",


    The Patriarch''s words carried the weight of experience and authority, quieting the room as everyone absorbed his n, "After all, he is just a three-year-old child at the end of the day. I have every confidence in Takumi''s ability to instill the correct values in him over time...",


    "Let''s agree to this: we observe Hikari until he turns 12 before bestowing upon him all the benefits and status due to him as the heir of his lineage, including making him the Third Elder at that time, as he should be. This will almost certainly ensure his integration and loyalty after receiving so much from us.",


    The Patriarch''s proposal struck a bnce between caution and optimism, addressing the Seventh Elder''s concerns while still acknowledging Hikari''s unprecedented promise.


    It was a n that aimed to maximize Hikari''s potential for the n''s benefit while mitigating the risks associated with his unique background and the actions of his parents.


    "Patriarch, I apologize, but I feelpelled to remind everyone of another crucial fact...", The Seventh Elder interjected, his voice carrying a hint of underlying concern, "Will Hikari forgive us for what we did to his parents? Can he truly forgive our n? There''s a possibility that he might harbor a grudge. And if that''s the case, what guarantees do we have that upon achieving his full potential, he won''t seek retribution rather than elevate us to greater heights? What if, instead of being our n''s salvation, he bes its executioner?"

 20. Hikari’s Status Getting Restored

    20. Hikari¡¯s Status Getting Restored


    The Second Elder''s voice cut through the tension, offering a perspective that shifted the focus of the conversation, "That is a point worthy of consideration...", He acknowledged, addressing the Seventh Elder''s concerns with a note of pragmatism.


    "However, let us remember, the n did not officially harm his parents, they pretty much-sought death on their own. They were among the first to volunteer for the battlefield at the onset of the Second Shinobi World War for no reason.",


    "If not for the dozens of Side Branch members we assigned to always protect them, they would have fallen many times over. It''s true that this time, we decided to have those protectors secretly withdraw during a mission against Iwagakure shinobi, leading to their untimely demise, after sensitive information from Council meetings started being leaked to the Hokage in regards to the Hyugas'' mobilization negotiations with the vige.",


    He paused, allowing the gravity of his words to sink in before continuing, "Rather than holding the n ountable, it''s possible that Hikari might, over time,e to question his parents'' choices.",


    "They left him behind, driven to the battlefield, bewitched Hiruzen, Homura, and Koharu and the ideals of the Ninja Academy, ultimately orphaning their child. Given the shift in Hikari''s demeanor that the Fifth has reported, along with Fifth Elder''s thoughtful guidance, I believe the boy maye to view his parents'' actions more critically.",


    The Second Elder''sments helped steer the conversation back in favor of supporting Hikari, especially after the Seventh Elder''s concerns had made them hesitant for a moment.


    Even before Hikari emerged as the most significant talent in the Hyuga n''s history, the council struggled with the decision of whether to take drastic action against him.


    Deciding to ''deal with'' Hikari, in a simr manner as with his parents, was a big deal because it meant doing something the Hyuga hadn''t done in hundreds of years: potentially ending one of the Ten Main Branch lineages since Hikari was itsst member.


    This was tough for the Hyuga, a family that cared about keeping things steady and in harmony, respecting traditions and history, and following what their ancestors taught.


    The decision wasplicated by the situation with Hikari''s parents. Initially, some might have thought that they directly gave away n secrets to the Hokage.


    But after thinking it over, the elders realized the truth might be different. Hikari''s parents treated everyone equally, even the Side Branch members, and probably talked about sensitive stuff without realizing who was listening.


    Some of those Side Branch members likely ended up sharing these secrets, maybe because they were pressured or tempted by Danzo Shimura and his newly established ''dirty'' organization.


    The crucial detail here was that the Curse Mark, while effective in ensuring loyalty, did not extend to a ''Tongue Seal'', leaving a loophole for information to be extracted.


    "I think the best way to proceed would be to vote on this matter. Let''s vote on the previous n I mentioned. Let''s start with you, First Elder. Do you agree...", With these words, the Patriarch initiated the voting process, aiming to reach a consensus on how to move forward with Hikari''s future within the Hyuga n.


    As the vote proceeded, each Elder voiced their stance, with the room filled with a palpable sense of anticipation. The process was methodical, each Elder was given a moment to contemte the full weight of their decision before casting their vote.


    In the end, the vote was overwhelmingly in favor of the Patriarch''s n, a testament to the council''s trust in his wisdom and leadership. The only dissenting voices were those of the Seventh Elder and his closest ally, the Eighth Elder.


    The overwhelming majority in favor of supporting Hikari''s development was rooted in clear, pragmatic reasoning. For the Elders, the immediate gain of dividing the Third Lineage''smercial interests and rights¡ªa mere 10% increase in power for each of their lineages¡ªpaled inparison to the potential long-term benefits of allowing Hikari to reach his full potential.


    They recognized that Hikari''s extraordinary talents could elevate the Hyuga n to unprecedented levels of wealth and influence, far exceeding the short-term gains from seizing his lineage''s assets.


    Furthermore, the decision reflected a deeper understanding and empathy toward theplexities of leadership and the possibility of error. Many Elders, as parents and grandparents themselves, considered the potential for their descendants to stray from the n''s expectations like Hikari''s parents.


    The thought of entire lineages facing extinction due to the actions of a few prompted a morepassionate and lenient approach. They recognized the importance of maintaining n unity and harmony above all, opting for a path that allowed for redemption and growth.


    Additionally, there was a concern about the perception of the Side Branch members. The Elders were keenly aware of the delicate bnce between the Main and Side Branches.


    The extinction of an entire Main Branch lineage could potentially embolden the Side Branch, disrupting the n''s internal harmony, and making them ''gloat''.


    Whereas, Hikari''s recent actions also demonstrated a shift towards the traditional Main Branch values of control and authority over the Side Branch.


    This alignment with Main Branch principles, especiallying from a lineage that had historically been sympathetic to the Side Branch fell really ''beneficial'' to the rest of them. And it made them sure it would make Side Branch more ''obedient'' in the future, now that even theirst ''sympathizers'' within the main branch transformed.


    "So it is decided. My n will be implemented from now on...", The Patriarch stated, his voice resonating with finality, marking the end of the discussion and the beginning of a new chapter for Hikari and the Hyuga n, "Fifth Elder, you will continue to be responsible for him and report back to us asionally on his progress and development.",


    The Patriarch then turned his attention to the rest of the Elders, his gaze firm yet imbued with a sense of collective responsibility, "Furthermore, I would like to ask everyone here to instruct your lineage members to cease any harsh treatment towards Hikari, effective immediately and indefinitely.",


    "Such measures were previously tolerated to instill in him a lesson about distancing himself from his parents'' choices, and it appears to have been sessful. Continuing down this path could only be detrimental from here on out.",


    He paused for a moment, allowing his words to sink in, ensuring that the gravity of his directive was fully understood, "Should you witness any behavior that disregards this directive, even after your warnings, it is imperative that you take appropriate actions to discipline those responsible within your lineages. We don''t want ''others'' to gloat anymore."


    "From now on, that boy will be cultivated by the entire n with all our strength. He will be a pir we will all unite behind and the one to bring us through troubled times...", The Patriarch dered, his voice imbued with a sense of certainty and foresight.


    In his final remarks, the Patriarch shared his leadership philosophy, a blend of pragmatism and visionary thinking. "As a leader, it has always been my duty to weigh the risk against the reward in every decision we make.",


    "While there remains a risk, albeit small, that Hikari could turn against the n, bringing negative consequences, this risk is vastly outweighed by the potential benefits his growth and development could bring. The ''reward'' of nurturing his talents and integrating him into our future ns is nearly limitless.",


    His words captured the essence of the council''s resolution to support Hikari, encapsting the calcted gamble they were willing to take for the betterment of the n.The Patriarch''s acknowledgment of the risks involved served to underline the depth of theirmitment; they were not entering into this decision blindly but with a full understanding.


    The Seventh Elder, having constantly voiced his concerns and opposition, sat quietly as the Patriarch delivered his final verdict on the matter of Hikari.


    While the overwhelming support for the boy''s development within the n was clear, the Seventh Elder''s expression was aplex mix of resignation and contemtion.


    He had raised valid points, driven by genuine concern for the n''s future, yet the decision had been made, favoring a path of potential over precaution.


    However, despite his eventual eptance of the council''s decision regarding Hikari, the Seventh Elder felt a need to address a personal grievance, seeking some form of retribution to preserve his own ''face'' or honor within the n.


    Therefore, with a measured tone, indicating his intention toply yet not fully concede, he spoke, "I will respect this collective decision today...", He began, ensuring his acknowledgment of the council''s authority was clear,


    "However, there is still another matter to discuss about the boy. After all, yesterday, he insulted my entire lineage openly in front of everyone and also used the Cursed Seal Command on my own followers. So, I demand that he gets punished in some way at least..."


    However, at this critical juncture, Takumi intervened, his gaze sharp as he addressed the Seventh Elder directly, "He insulted your lineage, but did you overlook how your grandsons first bullied him and beat him severely? They also insulted his lineage and parents multiple times. Where is the punishment for their actions..?", Takumi''s tone was firm, his question rhetorical yet pointed, challenging the Seventh Elder''s demands for retribution.


    "Yes, he used the Cursed Seal Command on those Side Branch members under yourmand, but let''s not forget they disrespected him repeatedly in the past as well.", Takumi continued, his words underscored by a sense of fairness and justice.


    "Moreover, you seem to overlook a crucial aspect. Prodigies of historical significance often receive more ''leeway'' within every n due to their potential impact. And frankly, such talents are infinitely more valuable than your two grandsons who, at best, can be described as average.",


    Takumi''s forthrightness, bordering on disrespect, underscored his conviction. His unwavering stare at the Seventh Elder conveyed the seriousness of his rebuttal, "There''s no reason to antagonize a boy of such rare talent over incidents involving children who have yet to prove their worth to the n.",


    The atmosphere in the room became charged as a tense silent standoff ensued between Takumi and the Seventh Elder. Takumi, at the age of 45, held a unique position within the council.


    Not only was he the closest to his prime among those present, but his strength and aura were surpassed only by the Patriarch himself, making him a formidable presence in any debate or confrontation.


    As the only other individual in the room who could im Elite Jonin-level strength, Takumi''s physical prowess lent an additionalyer of authority to his words.


    The Patriarch, a venerable figure within the n, had once been considered Quasi-Kage level before age necessitated his fall to the level of an Elite Jonin at best.


    This rarefied level of skill set him apart, yet age had inevitably tempered his physical capabilities, as it had for the other Elders.


    While all the Elders had been Elite Jonins in their youth, the passage of time had reduced their average strength to that of a Jonin.


    In the Hyuga n, the position of Elder was passed on based on experience and wisdom rather than physical strength alone as it was a managerial position in essence.


    Consequently, each Elder had younger, physically capable Elite Jonins, in their lineage, while themselves relying on their expertise and strategic thinking to guide the n.


    However, Takumi''s rtive youth among the council members gave him a distinct advantage, not just in terms of physical strength but also in the vitality and intensity he brought to the council.


    His father''s early demise had thrust him into a position of responsibility sooner than most, and he had risen to the challenge with a vigor that was unmatched among his peers.


    The absence of any gray hair among his locks was a subtle but constant reminder of the generational shift he represented.


    The tension in the room, palpable during the standoff between Takumi and the Seventh Elder, began to dissipate as the Patriarch intervened once more, his voice and demeanor bringing a calming influence back to the council''s proceedings,


    "Given that this was his first transgression, Hikari should not be punished, I think there is no need to vote on this...", He dered, effectively navigating the delicate situation to give a face to both Takumi and the Seventh Elder.


    The Seventh Elder, despite his visible disappointment at the oue, recognized the significance of the Patriarch''s stance. It was a telling moment, revealing the extent to which the n''s leadership was rallying behind Hikari.


    With the matter of Hikari''s behavior resolved, the Patriarch nodded and then smoothly transitioned the council''s focus to another pressing issue, "Now, let us address the second urgent matter rted to the Second Shinobi World War...", He announced, signaling a shift.

 21. The Second Shinobi World War

    21. The Second Shinobi World War


    "The situation is getting worse now. Sunagakure and Iwagakure have fully involved themselves in a war against Konoha, centering around the vige of Amegakure...", The Patriarch reported, his voice carrying the weight of the concerning developments on the broader shinobi world stage.


    Due to the widening economic gap caused by the imbnce of economic development among countries, the power of vige militants in various countries has risen sharply.


    These militants, under the guise of advocating for fairer privileges and opportunities, have increasingly resorted to the use of force as a means to expand their influence and plunder resources.


    This shift in strategy has led to a destabilization of the previously stable situation, after the First Shinobi World War, with conflicts between countries gradually escting as each seeks to protect its interests and assert its dominance, leading to the Second Shinobi World War.


    As the Second Ninja War kicked off, the Kingdom of Rain, stuck right in the middle of the big three - the Earth, Wind, and Fire nations - turned into the main hotspot for fighting.


    Being smack dab in the middle made it a key ce that everybody wanted to control. This spot wasn''t just another battlefield; it was crucial for any nation looking to get the upper hand in the war.


    "Considering how the situation keeps getting worse, it looks like the Hokage can''t wait any longer. He wants to wrap up the mobilization talks for our n. The terms theyid outst time are staying the same...", The Patriarch exined.


    "It seems we have no choice but to agree. After all, if Konoha loses this war, it will spell trouble for us too, and they''ve promised us substantial marypensation. They''re asking for about 45% of our shinobi force and 30% of our n''s Jonin. However, they are saying that at least half of these people need to be actual fighters, not just supportive roles.",


    "This is pushing the limits of what we canfortably manage. If they asked for even a few more Jonin, we''d be forced to send members from the Main Branch, which simply cannot happen...", The First Eldermented, his tone a mix of resignation and pragmatism.


    But, the next words carried a hint of sarcasm, "It seems Danzo Shimura has been quite thorough in getting our intelligence...", It was a clear hint to the previous topic of discussion.


    The silver lining in the negotiations was that there was no demand for Elite Jonins to be sent to the front lines. Given that all Elite Jonins in the Hyuga n were from the Main Branch, and about 70% of the standard Jonins as well, this was a significant relief. The distribution of Special Jonins was more bnced, with an even split between the Main and Side Branches.


    The realization of how precisely Danzo Shimura had managed to gather information about their forces and their bottom cast a pall over everyone in the room. Faces darkened with concern and frustration.


    "I also think it''s the right move to agree for now. But, the real issue is what happens after this war ends. What if they start expecting us to always contribute this much to Konoha''s regr forces and ordinary missions in the future if this warsts for long, and it bes a new ''reality'', not to mention that probably some time ''after'' the war, it still won''t be over, right?",


    "By this time, from this raging war, the whole shinobi world already probably definitively realized that Hashirama Senju''s dream of eternal peace is just that¡ªa dream. There''s always going to be another new war after a few decades of peace. In such a world, hoping to return to how things were before is nothing more than a fantasy. Heightened tensions will stay.",


    "And what if, in some future conflict, they bump up those mobilization percentages again, actually making us send Main Branch members to fight for the first time? That could lead to us losing members and even risking our Byakugan secrets getting out... This isn''t looking good for us either way...", The Ninth Elder expressed, clearly frustrated by the predicament.


    His concern highlighted a deeper strategic worry for the Hyuga n. Agreeing to the current demands set a precedent that could alter the n''s role and expectations within Konoha permanently over time.


    "And let''s not overlook the fact that this fundinges from the Daimyo''s increased permanent budget for Konoha, due to the war. The Hokage is paying us out of this.",


    "He''s not offering us any concessions or longer-term benefits in terms ofmercial interests within the vige or more influential administrative roles. It appears those perks are still reserved exclusively for the four families in their faction...", Another Elder chimed in, adding anotheryer ofplexity to the discussion.


    "And it''s not like we''re in desperate need of cash at the moment. What we really need is more influence within the vige to secure our long-term prosperity. Yet, it seems all the new influence, administrative positions, andmercial ventures are being funneled mainly toward the Hokage and his three advisors'' faction.",


    "They''ve even started encroaching on the interests of other smaller ninja ns and the Uchiha n. Who''s to say they won''t start doing the same to us after a while...", Another Elder voiced, deepening the council''s concerns.


    "And not only that, we shouldn''t just be looking at this specific proposal, but at the bigger picture. Ever since Konoha was founded, there''s been a constant push for more and more of our n shinobi to fight for the vige. Initially, it seemed like a good deal; we earned more money through missions and such.",


    "But now, it''s just too much. We''re giving up too much of our trained human capital for cash we don''t really need. If theypensated us with more influence, maybe it would be worth it, but that hasn''t happened. We''re still sitting on the same level of influence and holding the same positions we secured when the vige was first established, decades ago...", The Second Elder pointed out, expanding the council''s concern.


    "My take is also that we should agree this time to buy more time in order for Hikari to fully rise, but let''s make it thest time we just go along with what the Hokage''s Office wants like this. We need a big shift in how we deal with the vige. Up till now, we''ve kept a low profile, always appeasing, staying neutral, not really pushing back, which made us fit into the vige more smoothly than the Uchiha n did, drawing less attention from the Hokage''s circle...",


    "But it''s obvious now that even this approach hasn''t stopped us from slowly losing our grip to the Hokage''s faction and losing rtive power more and more. Plus, we will also have the capital to speak up and fight for our interests more in the future - Hikari Hyuga...", Takumi dered, his voice ringing with conviction making everyone else suddenly think about it.


    "Also, let''s not forget the sinister way Hiruzen has influenced the boy''s parents, turning them into hisckeys, starting from their time in his Ninja Academy, when they were the most ''vulnerable'', and gradually continuing over the years. And how brazen Danzo Shimura was in directly moving against our nsmen to steal our internal intelligence this time around.",


    "Under Hiruzen, the Ninja Academy that Tobirama Senju established has be a factory producing loyal soldiers for his faction. Our past approach might not have been the best.",


    "We''vecked a Kage-level shinobi since the founding of Konoha, which has made us less assertive. But who''s to say Hikari won''t reach that level, or even surpass Hiruzen and his disciples? We need to bide our time and invest everything we have in Hikari until he''s fully grown...", Another Elder chimed in, echoing Takumi''s sentiments after some deliberation.


    As the council members pondered the Elder''s remarks, their thoughts turned to the Ninja Academy''s role within Konoha. Initially, many within the Hyuga n, and indeed other ns, hadn''t seen the Academy as a significant threat to their influence, believing that true power would continue to reside within the ns, even with the Academy''s founding due to their pride and knowing history.


    However, they were not entirely right and they underestimated Tobirama''s genius. Therefore, now they recognized that while the ns still produced the majority of Elite Jonins and about half of the ordinary Jonins, the dynamic had shifted considerably at the lower ranks.


    Civilian-trained shinobi from the Academy hade to dominate these levels. Although individually weaker, these shinobi were numerous, numbering in the thousands, effectively diluting the ns'' dominance and shifting power towards the centralized vige governance that Tobirama Senju had envisioned and his prot¨¦g¨¦, Hiruzen Sarutobi, actively developed, with the help of his three former teammates and Tobirama''s other students under a carefully designed grand strategy that took every n in Konoha by surprise when it was toote.


    For example, the shift happening due to the Ninja Academy gaining steam was not initially seen as entirely negative. Many ns believed that, although they might lose some rtive power, the burden of constant warfare would lessen, with the bulk of fighting falling to these civilian ''cannon fodder.''


    However, this perception has been upended by the outbreak of the Second Shinobi World War. The reality that even these vast numbers of Academy-trained shinobi were not enough to prevent the ns from being heavily leaned on once again highlighted a miscalction in the ns'' initial assessments. So, essentially they lost a big chunk of their rtive power to the vige for ''nothing''.

 22. The Greatest Strategic Shift of Hyuga

    22. The Greatest Strategic Shift of Hyuga


    "I''m at most at fault here. As the Patriarch, I didn''t see through Tobirama''s real genius and the darker motives behind his ns soon enough. This oversight has led us to our current predicament...", The Patriarch confessed, his toneden with regret,


    "The signs were also there when Tobirama effectively dissolved his own Senju n into the civilian popce, advising them to change their surnames, marry freely, and pursue their lives outside of the n structure. This move drastically raised the gic potential of Konoha''s civilian poption by a lot. Though the full impact is yet to be realised, the early signs are unmistakable.",


    "Take, for example, Minato Namikaze, an early prot¨¦g¨¦ of Jiraiya, one of Hiruzen''s disciples. They already knew about him and approached him deliberately recently, through Jiraiya, while he''s still in the Academy. He''s a perfect example of this ''mixed'' heritage and is being fast-tracked by the Hokage''s faction.",


    "The next generation of Jonins will likely be even more dominated by these ''hybrid'' civilians, boasting enhanced chakra reserves, stronger physical attributes, way more nature chakra affinities than they had previously, and other gic advantages as the Senju lineage bes entirely woven into the vige''s civilian fabric.",


    The room fell silent as the council absorbed the Patriarch''s words. There was a mix of emotions visible among the Elders¡ªshock at the realization of Tobirama''s long-term strategy and ruthlessness toward his own n that raised him, a slight respect for the cunning with which he pursued his and his brother''s ideals of ''unified'' vige, the ''Will of Fire'' and ''one-family'', and concern for what this meant for their own n''s positions in Konoha in the future.


    That''s precisely why Tobirama aimed to elevate ns like the Sarutobi, Shimura, Utatane, and Mitokado. These groups were objectively weaker than the mighty Uchiha, Hyuga, and other dominant ns known for their formidable power.


    By bolstering these less powerful ns early on, Tobirama sought to unify the vige further. The logic was clear: it would be simpler to control these four ns than to deal with the might of ns like the Hyuga and Uchiha. This approach was meant to bnce power within Konoha, ensuring no single n could threaten the vige''s stability.


    "However, what Tobirama perhaps didn''t foresee was the extent of cronyism that would follow under Hiruzen and his advisors. It seems they''ve taken Tobirama''s strategy but twisted it for their own ends, amassing wealth, power, and influence not for his ideas, but for their personal gain...", Another Elder pointed out, his words tinged with disillusionment.


    "You''re not alone in this, Patriarch; we''ve all made mistakes. It seems almost like fate has gifted us with Hikari at just the right moment. Without someone as uniquely talented as him, I''m not sure how we could stand against the Hokage''s faction, which has grown so strong and now includes the Nara, Yamanaka, and Akimichi ns on their side.",


    "This leaves us, along with the Aburame and Inuzuka, in the ''neutral'' camp we currently lead, while Hiruzen''s faction continues to undermine the Uchiha''s interests...", Another Elder reflected, deepening the council''s analysis of their situation.


    He continued, "As for the Uchiha, we''ve stayed out of their conflict with Konoha since they''ve served as a sort of ''shield'' for us. They were the ones in the Hokage''s faction''s crosshairs, and the noble ''boogymen'', in the eyes of civilians, thankfully not us, since the founding of this vige, sparing us that ''attention'' even though we both shared a dojutsu kekkei genkai.",


    "But a ''shield'' only works if it''s still standing. From what we can see, it looks like they might move to eliminate the Uchiha npletely in a few decades timeframe. And if that happens, there''s a good chance we''ll be next right after then.",


    "This leaves us with two choices: we either ept a significant loss of our power and capitte like Nara, Yamanaka, and Akimichi, but end up with a wayrger loss of power than them, on both rtive and absolute terms, due to our current way higher ''starting strength and the level of vignce that the Hokage''s group has toward us, or we fight and risk losing everything. Before, we might have chosen the safer route, but with Hikari Hyuga emerging, if we support his rise, we might have a fighting chance when the timees.",


    For this Elder, the recent founding of the ''Root'' organization under Danzo Shimura, with apparent approval from Hiruzen Sarutobi, was a ring warning sign. It suggested a more sinister agenda from Konoha''s leadership, possibly aimed at undermining or even eliminating powerful ns that resisted totalpliance with the vige''s directives in the long term.


    Danzo''s asionalments about wanting to recruit Hyuga members,bined with his known fascination with the Uchiha''s dojutsu abilities, painted a troubling picture for the future of all major ns with unique, powerful bloodline abilities.


    The realization of Danzo''s interest in bloodline abilities, especially in the context of his known obsession with the Uchiha, was a wake-up call for him. It underscored the severity of the position the Hyuga and Uchiha ns found themselves in.


    The Elder foresaw a scenario where both ns could face existential threats from the vige leadership, in the uing decades, with the Uchiha likely being the first target due to their more hostile rtionship with Konoha''s authorities, followed by the Hyuga at that time too.


    Such a prospect raised the stakes significantly for the Hyuga n. The potential abolition of the ancient Cursed Seal practice, even if they capitted to vige demands in the future, underscored the existential nature of the threat they faced.


    Tobirama and Hiruzen vited many founding agreements with the ns of Konoha, but this move¡ªestablishing Root¡ªwas truly the sign that made this elder realize the existential threat facing the Hyuga and other powerful ns within the vige.


    The deliberate creation of an organization designed to operate in the shadows, with the potential and will to recruit, or even coerce, members of powerful ns like the Hyuga into its ranks, was a stark deviation from the original ideals upon which Konoha was founded.


    "What should we do, should we start secretly helping the Uchiha then? But those guys are so proud, it''s doubtful whether they even realize the existential risk they''re facing now, or if they''d be willing to ept help from others, especially our n, with whom they''ve had a negative andpetitive rtionship throughout history...", Another Elder pondered aloud.


    "No, that would alert the vige about the shift of our policy too early. We need to focus on raising Hikari as much as possible first, then start to resist and fight against the Hokage''s group for our interests more aggressively...",


    "We should just focus on Hikari now. If we do something politically earlier, then it could be counterproductive to his potential for full and safe growth...", Takumi responded immediately.


    "Okay, gentlemen, I believe our discussion ising to a close. After listening to all your valuable inputs, I suggest the following course of action. We will not intervene on behalf of the Uchiha. We''ll maintain our current approach of appeasement toward the vige leadership unless circumstances drastically change.",


    "However, our mindset this time is different. Instead of viewing this as a long-term strategy, we''re essentially ''buying time'', focusing on nurturing Hikari until he reaches his full potential, that is the first part of our new long-term strategy.",


    "This will then empower us to assert ourselves more boldly and protect our interests within Konoha, in the future, which is the second part of our new strategy...", The Patriarch outlined, synthesizing the council''s deliberations into a clear n.


    He continued, "It''s also very likely that the Hokage and other vige leaders are already aware of Hikari''s exceptional abilities as we have seen how easily they could obtain that kind of information now, after all, it all happened so openly back there yesterday, everyone in the n now knows about it. So, instead of trying to hide his talents and arousing further suspicion, we should openly acknowledge that we are raising a very prodigious talent.",


    "However, we should still refrain from discussing the full extent of his ''upper limit'' that we''ve theorized here, let''s leave that part more ambiguous. Also, by making Hikari''s genius public knowledge, we not only counter any underhanded moves by the Hokage''s faction but also elevate our n''s standing in the eyes of other families, bothrge and small, as well as the civilian poption. It''s better if everyone knew about it instead, not just Hokage''s faction''s higher-ups alone, boosting our reputation and solidifying our position within the vige.",


    With the Patriarch''s nid out, it was time for the council to formally vote on the course of action. One by one, the Elders expressed their agreement, casting their votes in favor of the Patriarch''s resolution, reaching a full consensus this time.


    As the meeting came to a close and the Elders began to file out, a collective understanding of the meeting''s gravity lingered in the air.


    Their decision to ce Hikari at the forefront of their strategy was significant, marking a pivotal moment for the future of their n.


    Thoughts varied among the Elders as they contemted their next steps. Some were already considering the practical aspects of supporting Hikari''s development, recognizing his importance not just as a talented individual but as a beacon of hope for the Hyuga n.


    However, what resonated most deeply with the Elders as they departed was the significant shift in strategic doctrine they had just unanimously agreed upon¡ªa first in the n''s history.


    This change underscored the grave nature of the threat posed by the Hokage''s group and the immense potential they saw in Hikari.


    The Hyuga n''s tradition of staying out of the spotlight, a practice dating back even before Konoha''s founding, was rooted in a cautious strategy.


    Unlike the Uchiha and Senju ns, who often found themselves at the forefront of shinobi affairs, the Hyugas preferred a more reserved stance.


    This approach was not born out of ack of ambition or strength but was a deliberate choice influenced by deep-seated historical secrets.


    These secrets, known fully only to the Patriarch and a few senior Elders vaguely, shaped the n''s cautious engagement with the world around them for hundreds of years until today.

 23. Learning Advanced Clan’s Techniques

    23. Learning Advanced n¡¯s Techniques


    On a bright sunny morning, the serene atmosphere of the Hyuga n''s training and garden courtyard was punctuated by the sound of gentle footsteps and the rustle of leaves.


    Hikari, now a 6-year-old, was preparing to spar with Takumi, the Fifth Elder, who at 48 retained his youthful vigor, his hair still a deep ck, embodying the standard Hyuga appearance.


    As they faced each other within the courtyard, both stood at the ready, within the ranges of their "Eight Trigrams," a distance they had measured with practiced ease.


    Without a word, both Hikari and Takumi assumed the stance of the "Eight Trigrams Sixty-Four Palms," a fundamental yet advanced technique that was a testament to Hikari''s exceptional progress.


    The air around them seemed to vibrate with anticipation as theyunched into the dance ofbat unique to their n.


    Their palms moved with precision, each strike aiming to outmaneuver and deflect the other''s, while their fingers, agile and sharp, sought weaknesses in their opponent''s defense. The courtyard echoed with the sound of their controlled breathing and the swift movements of their hands, a ballet of power and discipline that exemplified the Hyuga fighting style.


    Despite the intensity of the spar, it was evident that Takumi held the upper hand. His experience and mastery over the Hyuga techniques gave him an edge that Hikari, despite his prodigious talent, could not yet ovee. The elder''s moves were a blend of wisdom and strength, honed over decades, making it clear why he was a respected figure within the n.


    Eventually, Takumi emerged as the victor, his final strike a gentle yet firm tap against Hikari''s shoulder, signaling the end of their spar. Hikari, though bested, showed no signs of disappointment.


    "It can finally be said that you''ve mastered this technique, Hikari-kun...", Takumi, with a rare, soft smile breaking through his usually stern demeanor, acknowledged Hikari''s achievement.


    The shift in his expression from the rigid Elder of the Main Branch to a more approachable mentor reflected the significance of this moment. He added, "Only now can it truly be said that you''ve be a real Hyuga Main Branch member...",


    "Moreover, you''ve just set another record, there has been no one in our history who managed to master this move at an earlier age than you presently.",


    He was referring to Hikari''s adept execution of the Eight Trigrams: Sixty-Four Palms, a defining skill of their lineage.


    The Eight Trigrams: Sixty-Four Palms technique, a hallmark of the Hyuga fighting style, demands not just physical prowess but also a deep connection with the Byakugan''s unique capabilities.


    By envisioning themselves at the center of an Eight Trigrams symbol, the Hyuga can unleash a precise flurry of strikes within the symbol''s boundary, targeting sixty-four specific tenketsu points in their opponent''s body. This effectively blocks the flow of chakra, rendering the opponent unable to move and symbolizing the true power of a Hyuga Main Branch member.


    "It was all thanks to your guidance and the n''s generous support, sensei...", Hikari responded, his tone humble and disciplined, yet tinged with a childlike inability to fully conceal his pride.


    This mixture of respect and subtle pride was the demeanor he often presented outwardly, embodying the disciplined and respectful image expected of him within the n outside.


    However, beneath this exteriory a different reality. Hikari''s inner world was driven not by humility or pride in his achievements thus far but by a very calcting and ambitious core.


    For someone with his aspirations¡ªto climb to the very pinnacle of the ''food chain'' of this world within the shinobi world¡ªmastering the Eight Trigrams: Sixty-Four Palms at such a young age was merely a stepping stone amongst a dozen others, not a significant milestone.


    "No, Hikari, it was thanks to your talent and hard work...", Takumiplimented him once more before shifting the conversation to the future,


    "Now that you have finally mastered this technique, I can begin teaching you the Eight Trigrams: Rotation, another secret technique of our Main Branch. This technique is widespread among us. Mastering these two techniques, one offensive and one defensive gives you the potential to automatically reach Jonin level strength in the future as given."


    "At the moment before the Hyuga is struck by an attack, they emit chakra from all of their body''s tenketsu to block it. They then spin rapidly, repelling the attack and anything else in the vicinity away and creating a protective shield for as long as they continue to spin.",


    "The greater the force of an attack, the greater the force with which it''s repelled. True masters of this technique can repel attackers from several feet away and do so with such force that it plows the ground around them, cratering the terrain. And true masters can activate this technique tremendously fast, almost instinctively. Now observe this closely, Hikari-kun...",


    Takumi centered himself, his posture steady and calm. Then, with an explosive burst of chakra from every tenketsu point in his body, he began to spin.


    The garden around them seemed to respond to Takumi''s chakra, leaves and loose earth swirling as if caught in a sudden whirlwind.


    The elder''s body became a blur, spinning with incredible speed, emitting a visible shield of chakra that radiated outward.


    As he continued to spin, the force generated by the rotation repelled debris and even caused the ground to crater slightly around him, showcasing the technique''s defensive and offensive capabilities.


    Hikari watched, his eyes wide with both admiration and the keen focus of a student absorbing every detail.


    As Takumi gradually slowed his spin and came to a stop, the air settled, and the garden fell silent once more.


    The cratered ground around him served as a testament to the technique''s power, and his calm demeanor in the aftermath showcased the discipline and focus that true mastery demanded.


    "This technique...", Takumi began, regaining his usualposure, "Requires not just physical strength but a deep, instinctual connection to your chakra and the ability to react in an instant. Masteryes with time and relentless practice. But given your talent and dedication, Hikari, I have no doubt you''ll soon enough master this technique as well...",


    "You have been showing remarkable progress in using your ''Chakra Bncing Stones'' for the past three years and have also fully learned the ''Eight Trigrams: Vacuum Palm,'' which is a much simpler technique using the same fundamentals as the ''Rotation.''",


    "So, you are already well familiar with ejecting your chakra from your tenketsu points and controlling that chakra, meaning this won''t be too challenging for you. You''re not in unfamiliar territory; what the Vacuum Palm does with your arm''s tenketsu points, Rotation does with all of your body''s tenketsu points.",


    "You just need time to master this too. So, I n to teach you another, private technique of my lineage at the same to fully utilize all of your time and potential. It''s rted to that Yin Release genjutsu stuff you asked me about a few years back. Are you ready to also put that into practice?", Takumi suddenly asked, a smile on his face indicating his readiness to share even more of his knowledge freely.


    Hikari was momentarily surprised by Takumi''s generous offer, however, then he remembered how the attitudes of the entire Main Branch toward him had shifted since the Elder Council meeting three years ago. It seemed everyone now secretly, truly viewed him as a g they all rallied behind¡ªa symbol of hope and future strength for the Hyuga n. And, Takumi was the biggest example of that, and also currently Hikari''s biggest supporter in the n.


    However, Hikari was under no illusion about the nature of rtionships within the Main Branch, the n, and the world atrge. True feelings were rare and what really mattered were deals where both sides got something they wanted from each other.


    This was especially true among those in high positions within the Hyuga n, like Takumi. Hikari recognized that Takumi''s extensive support and guidance were also likely driven by his potential as an investment; the expectation was that once Hikari achieved great strength and prestige within the n and the vige, he would, in turn, support Takumi and his Fifth Elder Lineage get more influence, power, and provide them with greater protection if necessary.


    But, being aware of this didn''t bother Hikari at all. He also didn''t let feelings guide him and preferred to see things in terms of benefits and losses, just like Takumi. This made him ready to work with Takumi, knowing that while he was getting help now as a fledgling young genius of the n, he''d be expected to return the favor when he was grown and more powerful.


    Hikari epted this way of things without any issues. He respected Takumi for the guidance and saw their rtionship as a two-way street, where both sides would eventually benefit.


    "Thank you so much, Sensei! I can''t wait to learn more from you. I''m really grateful for all the time and effort you''ve put into continuing to teach me...", Hikari replied, his voice brimming with a light enthusiasm and gratitude.


    His eyes sparkled with the hidden excitement of a child who had just been promised a new gift, his posture respectful and appreciative in the traditional manner taught within the n.


    However, inwardly, Hikari was already adjusting his morning training schedule in light of this new development.


    In fact, from the moment he transitioned from the palm-style Gentle Fist to the more advanced finger-style Gentle Fist three years earlier, he had developed a rigorous, individual, morning post-training regimen.


    Every morning, after his session with Takumi, Hikari would stay back in the dojo, dedicating himself to practicing with custom-made targets designed for tenketsu mapping at the start.


    The finger-style Gentle Fist taijutsu represented a significant advancement over the basic palm style predominantly taught to beginners and children within the n.


    To get good at this advanced style, Hikari had to learn ''Chakra Point Awareness'' to know all the locations of the 361 chakra points in the human body by heart, also figuring out the best ones to hit to mess up an opponent''s chakra flow at all times, just after a quick Byakugan observation, on his potential, to do it at the fastest speeds possible and not waste any time.


    He aimed to know this as well as he knew how to walk or drink water, making it something he could do without even thinking.


    Additionally, Hikari had incorporated training with wooden dummies into his routine to further refine his speed and precision.


    He focused on rapid strikes, aiming to improve his speed by practicing quick, consecutive hits. This aspect of his training was crucial, as executing the 64 strikes of the Eight Trigrams techniques demanded both swiftness and fluidity.


    Precision training was another keyponent, with drills designed to enhance his uracy. He would use leaves, small objects, or designated points on training dummies as targets, honing his ability to strike with pinpoint uracy.


    During the past few years, Hikari also mastered the Vacuum st, a technique that, contrary to what he had believed in his past life, is actually one of the most basic abilities of the Hyuga n. This technique is not exclusive to the Main Branch but is also taught to members of the branch families, simr to the Eight Trigrams 16 Palms.


    The Vacuum st is a versatile technique that involves umting chakra within the body and then releasing it from the hands in a powerful burst. This can either be used as a single, concentrated blow for closebat or as a ranged attack that fires a shockwave of chakra to disrupt the air and target an opponent''s vitals from a distance.


    While the Vacuum st offers a significant offensive capability, especially in terms of flexibility and range, itcks the precision damage that the Finger-Style Gentle Fist can inflict upon an opponent''s chakrawork during close encounters.


    The more precise Eight Trigrams 32 and 64 Palms techniques offer the Main Branch members a significant advantage in closebat, making the less urate Vacuum Palm less appealing for use at close range.


    However, for Side Branch members who might not receive direct instruction in the more advanced 32 and 64 Palms techniques, the Vacuum Palm serves as a valuable technique.


    While it''s umon for Side Branch members to learn the 32 and 64 Palms through mere observation¡ªin fact, still happens, as some of the more talented Side Branch have learned the 32 Palm through history from observation, never the 64 Palms, however,¡ªthe 16 Palms variant, they were officially instructed in, is the mostmonly mastered by their members.


    For the Main Branch, the primary utility of the Vacuum Palm lies in its ability to address long-rangebat scenarios.


    Given the Hyuga n''s emphasis on close-quartersbat, the Vacuum Palm offers a strategic option to engage opponents from a distance, filling a gap in their otherwise melee-focused arsenal.


    This ability to project force over a distance allows Main Branch members to control the battlefield more effectively, keeping adversaries at bay or softening them up before closing in for more precise strikes.


    Some powerful Elite Jonins from the Main Branch have taken the Vacuum Palm to even greater heights, developing the skill to unleash multiple such sts in rapid session.


    This advanced application of the technique can overwhelm opponents with a barrage of forceful chakra waves, showcasing the power and versatility of the Hyuga n''s techniques.


    In fact, Hikari also learned during his research that thest ''early Kage-level'' shinobi of the Hyuga n, hailing from the Patriarch''s lineage during thete Warring States period, developed an even more unique technique that no one has managed to master since then.


    This technique involved using their fingers in a small, pointed thrust to barrage the enemy''s chakra points from a distance.


    It marked the first time the Eight Trigrams Finger Style was directly applied to long-rangebat, bridging the gap between the Hyuga n''s traditionally close-quartersbat techniques and the need for versatility in the range of engagement.


    That individual was the only one in the entire Hyuga n''s history who could perform the legendary Eight Trigrams 128-Palms only theorized about before and after then. Hikari thought this meant he probably had the ''purest'' Byakugan in the recorded history he managed to get his hands on before the information got cut, even better than Hinata''s. And he figured that he must have been really good at chakra control innately along with that too.

 24. The First Contact with ‘Gen-Taijutsu’

    24. The First Contact with ¡®Gen-Taijutsu¡¯


    "I will now demonstrate to you the principle of my lineage''s unique technique that blends genjutsu with our traditional Hyuga n framework. It could even be dubbed as the only such practice in the whole world, even as an entirely new category of jutsu called "gen-taijutsu". It is all the same fundamental principle that can be applied in two different styles, just like the Gentle Fist itself...",


    "You can use it openly and quickly in one strong burst with a palm strike, or gradually over time, by incorporating it into your finger styles so your opponent doesn''t suspect anything. It depends on the battle situation and your battle tactics. Watch closely; I will demonstrate it to you now...",


    Takumi positioned himself with a calm demeanor, his focus intensifying as he prepared to unveil the intricacies of a technique that bridged the worlds of taijutsu and genjutsu.


    He began with the Eight Trigrams: Phantom Mirage Strike. With a deliberate, precise palm strike aimed at an imaginary opponent, Takumi illustrated how the strike catalyzed the genjutsu, channeling a subtle burst of chakra intricately woven into the victim''s chakra pathways. Due to using the Yin Release nature transformation in that chakra as well, it looked quite different from ordinary bluish chakra, it had a considerably darker shade in it.


    "As you can see...", Takumi exined, maintaining his palm strike posture, "The strike itself doesn''t disrupt the chakra flow in the traditional sense or try to damage the opponent, it is much more subtle. Instead, it introduces a genjutsuced, Yin Release chakra into the opponent''s system. Depending on my intention, the illusion can range from a paralyzing memory to disorienting their sense of direction, or even creating phantom attackers...",


    Takumi then shifted to demonstrate the Eight Trigrams: Shadow Whisper Assault, engaging in a fluid motion that mimicked a series of swift, precise strikes aimed at specific points in the air before him, "Each touch...", He continued, "nts a seed of genjutsu within the opponent''s chakra system. These seeds grow, fed by the natural flow of chakra, blooming into illusions that canpletely disorient or deceive the opponent.",


    Throughout the demonstration, Takumi''s Byakugan was activated, highlighting the essential role of their kekkei genkai in executing these techniques, "The effectiveness of these attacks is significantly enhanced by our Byakugan''s precise targeting ability, making it nearly impossible for the opponent to realize they''ve been ensnared in a genjutsu."


    "You have already requested me to provide you with some ways to practice the Yin Release chakra refinement and control methods a few years ago and have been practicing it for some reason. What I gave you is the exact building block of chakra that I use for this style as well.",


    "So, you essentially just need to learn how to match that kind of chakra into your attacks in the heat of battle, create it quickly, and subtly, and introduce it into your opponent''s system. Now, extract that chakra in front of me to evaluate it and see if it''s good enough...", Takumi instructed, his expression serious and focused.


    Hikari nodded and closed his eyes for a moment, gathering his focus. With a deep breath, he then began to concentrate on the core of his chakra system, drawing upon the Yin Release chakra he had been practicing diligently over the years.


    Slowly, Hikari extended his hands in front of him, palms facing up. He visualized the chakra within him, refining it with the techniques Takumi had taught him, aiming to produce the specific quality of chakra necessary for the genjutsu-infused attacks.


    As he concentrated, a faint glow began to emanate from his palms. It was a visible sign of the chakra he was channeling, refining, and controlling to match the requirements Takumi had outlined.


    Takumi watched intently, observing the quality of the chakra that Hikari produced. The elder''s eyes, enhanced by the Byakugan, could see not just the chakra''s visible glow but its deeper qualities. He was looking for the subtle nuances that would make it effective for the genjutsu techniques he had demonstrated.


    While creating that kind of chakra, Hikari recollected everything he knew about it. Whereas the five elements are created by changing the characteristics of chakra, Yin and Yang Releases are created by altering theirposition.


    Chakra was traditionally made by mixing together physical energy and spiritual energy in equal proportions to fuel ninjutsu. Therefore, by varying the ratio of these energies, a different kind of chakra could be produced altogether.


    Yin Release involved chakra that wasprised of two parts spiritual energy to one part physical energy. It governed imagination and the maniption of the spirit, creating form out of nothingness to give shape to the formless.


    Genjutsu was a prime example of Yin Release, as it employed the yin chakra to manipte the chakra flow within the target''s cerebral nervous system. This maniption allowed the user to control the five senses and alter perceptions, creating illusions of all kinds.


    Conversely, Yang Release was characterized by chakra that contained two parts physical energy to one part spiritual energy. It governed vitality and the maniption of the body, infusing life into the lifeless.


    Medical ninjutsu exemplified the Yang Release, as it used yang chakra to stimte the body''s natural healing processes. When channeled into a target''s cells, it could significantly elerate the healing of injuries.


    Already a few years ago, Hikari had approached Takumi with a request to learn how to create the basic Yin Release chakra. As he became more familiar with Yin Release, growing more in touch and attuned to it and developing a stronger affinity for it, Hikari believed it could also enhance his dojutsu performance.


    He understood that while the Byakugan''s functionality was mostly biological, tangible, and optics, it also operated, to some extent on the pre-programmed use of Yin Release chakra.


    This was totally opposite from the Sharingan''s mechanisms, which were way more focused on Yin Release and less on biology instead, but significant for Hikari to improve nheless.


    Hikari was always convinced that expanding his understanding and control over Yin Release could potentially unlock more advanced abilities within his Byakugan. He knew that in a world dominated by bloodline powers, where basic ninjutsu could be almost ineffective against opponents wielding overpowered innate abilities, enhancing his dojutsu was critical.


    "This looks very good, Hikari-kun. It seems that you''ve practiced this more than I initially thought on your own. Well, it''s always beneficial to have more aces up your sleeve instead of relying on just one thing. Tell me, what did you imagine while creating this Yin chakra...", Takumi said, nodding approvingly after a moment of silent contemtion as if he were pondering something deeply.


    He genuinely didn''t understand why Hikari had dedicated so much effort to this practice, but he assumed it was because the boy had heard of his own renown in utilizing such techniques. Hikari, after all, despite not being from his direct lineage, was his formal student, and Takumi reasoned that Hikari wanted to be well-prepared to learn his techniques early on.


    "Thank you, sensei. I imagined this chakra to cause you to lose your sense of direction after traveling through your cerebral nervous system...", Hikari responded. He already understood that this ''gen-taijutsu'' style, which blends genjutsu with taijutsu, primarily also relied on visualizing effects and creating them from nothing, also a hallmark of all Yin Release jutsu.


    However, since it was supposed to be executed subtly and in the heat of battle, mastering it to be performed without the use of hand seals was crucial before it could be effectively brought into realbat scenarios.


    Hikari, who had dedicated nearly three years to practicing this and who already possessed exceptional chakra control, had grasped how to perform it without any need for hand seals.


    ''This is probably not everything Takumi has under his sleeves. To match his reputation, I feel like he also knows some other applications of this philosophy, probably long-ranged in nature. Either way, from this alone, I can learn a lot on my own... I can at least integrate it into my Vacuum Palm sts, even if he doesn''t n to teach me more in the future...'',


    Hikari analyzed internally, specting about Takumi''s reasons for not divulging more. He considered that Takumi might have withheld those advanced teachings of that because it was too early for Hikari to learn them, or perhaps he wanted to protect his lineage''s secrets.

 25. Shape Transformation and Yin Release

    25. Shape Transformation and Yin Release


    After concluding their morning training session and setting follow-up ns, Hikari retreated to his private quarters, which, though unchanged in structure over the past three years, now housed an expanded collection of papers, books, scrolls, and various other sources of knowledge.


    His ess to these materials had significantly increased now that his standing within the Main Branch had been not only restored but elevated, thanks to his undeniable talents.


    Having taken a moment to rest and reflect on the insights gained from the day''s training, Hikari proceeded with his routine chakra control and physical exercises, adhering to the regimen he had followed diligently for the past three years.


    Amidst this disciplined routine, Hikari enjoyed the privileges afforded by his enhanced status within the n, including luxurious medical rejuvenating baths and pills that aided in his recovery and boosted his physical capabilities, as well as rich and nutritious meals designed to optimize his physical condition.


    These benefits were not just marks of his elevated position but crucialponents of his training, enabling him to maintain peak condition and continue pushing the boundaries.


    Finally, it was time for Hikari to retreat to his personal sanctuary within his quarters¡ªa spacious sitting and learning area that served as his mini library.


    Here, surrounded by the vast knowledge umted by the Hyuga n and beyond, Hikari dedicated himself to study and contemtion.


    This was not merely an academic exercise but a crucial aspect of his training, as the acquisition of new knowledge and the deepening of his understanding also served to enhance his spiritual energy potential.


    In this space, Hikari focused on strategizing his next steps and absorbing new information that could further his power. This process of learning was integral to his development as a shinobi, enabling him to continuously evolve and adapt his approach tobat and strategy.


    ''It seems that now there''s a window left for my post-training routine after Takumi leaves every morning. I think it might be a good time to start practicing my chakra shape transformation proficiency, which is, in fact, just another, more advanced and difficult version of chakra control...'', Hikari mused to himself.


    Prompted by this thought, he suddenly took up an ink and pen and began jotting down something on a piece of paper.


    Hikari understood that what was mostmonly referred to as ''chakra control'' in the ninja world pertained to the ''internal'' aspect, which is essentially about how adeptly a ninja can regte the production of chakra within their body.


    However, once this chakra is extended ''outside'' of the body, manipting it further in its purest form is known as ''shape transformation''.


    And the ''Rotation'' Hikari was about to start learning seriously was centered around that exact concept of chakra shape transformation. Quickly recognizing the opportunity to deepen his mastery, Hikari decided to incorporate this practice into his regimen immediately.


    ''But how exactly should I train at this? Should I just rotate it in small steps with varying intensities, durations, and ces, to try and eventually get better at it... Or should I draw on some principles from the Rasengan, and spin it in multiple directions... No! That''spletely contrary to the nature of the ''Rotation''. I''d better stick to the basics...'', Hikari''s thoughts raced as he pondered the best approach to mastering the technique the fastest as possible.


    ''It is impossible to integrate Rasengan defensively as Rotation because that kind of chaotic form would only hurt me in the end. Instead, I better train Rotation to achieve the quickest activating speed possible. So, I should focus on training the speed at which my chakra gets extracted and rotates out of my body every day during that session too.'',


    ''Also, what wasn''t shown in my previous life, but what I know now, is that the rotation doesn''t need to be that strong and chakra-expensive every time you use it. Instead, you could perform many other weaker ''mini rotations'' starting from different parts of your body in istion to deal with weaker attacks and preserve the chakra. I should work on thatponent too...'', As he walked through his room, surrounded by the tranquility and simplicity of its traditional decor, Hikari''s mind was alive with endless insights and ideas.


    ''Furthermore, integrating my Yin Release ''affinity'' chakra training into that post-training routine would be beneficial, especially now that I''ve begun officially learning the unique technique from Takumi that relies on it. The space for that has also just opened up in my new schedule...'', Hikari contemted, settling back down to write this addition into his n.


    ''As for the five chakra nature releases elements, it was as expected, I have an affinity only for one of them like everyone in this world has at least, including the civilians, which in my case is wind.'',


    ''It is certainly true that the Hyuga, who focus mostly on the Gentle Fist taijutsu and derivative techniques, had no time to practice elemental ninjutsu or to pass it onto the gic pool more like the Uchiha, Sarutobi, or Senju n. The Senju n being a n which practiced all ninjutsu to the maximum to utilize their natural gifts of huge chakra reserves...'', Hikari reflected next.


    It had been a few years since Hikari had requested the so-called ''Chakra Induction Paper'' from Takumi and discovered his affinity for the wind only.


    Learning his natural affinity didn''t mean he was incapable of mastering the other four elemental nature transformations; however, it meant that learning them would be significantly more challenging for him, and the results might not be as potent as if he had a natural affinity for those elements from the beginning or potent as of other ''affinity holders''.


    Recognizing this, Hikari decided to steer his focus away from the other elements. Given the praises he had received from the experts within the Main Branch for his prowess in Hyuga n techniques,


    He concluded it was more strategic to hone the skills where he already showed considerable talent and potential, meaning focusing on strengths and avoiding weaknesses, at least now.


    Hikari''s parents had also not branched out into developing elemental chakra abilities. They concentrated on mastering the Hyuga n''s specialized techniques. His father used his above-average Byakugan vision to improve his reaction times in fights, while his mother, although also a legitimate Elite Jonin level like his father, took a slightly different route.


    Akari was skilled in Hyuga techniques but also learned medical jutsu ''on the side'', allowing her to heal others and even herself sessfully during battles which was very rare even in the Hyuga n. Thisbination of Byakugan, Gentle Fist, and medical knowledge made her particrly effective in a support role, yet capable inbat, only slightly weaker than Yoshiro.


    Both were recognized as Elite Jonin and were well-known in Konoha and beyond before their deaths. Their reputations were such that they were noted in the Bingo Books with significant bounties, known not just for being basically the only Main Branch members daring to undertake missions outside the vige, having their Byakugan ''free for taking'' but also for their significantbat abilities.


    Although strangely, they managed to self-destruct their eyes before they died and hence saved the n from big trouble.


    They even acquired what Hikari considered embarrassing nicknames, such as "The Healing Fist" for his mother and "Sharp Eye" for his father.


    Hikari acknowledged the strengths and achievements of his parents, though his respect was more for their abilities and aplishments than for them as individuals.


    Their approach, focusing deeply on their strengths rather than spreading their efforts thinly over many skills, served as a practical example for Hikari.

 26. The New Plans for the Future Abilities

    26. The New ns for the Future Abilities


    As soon as Hikari discovered his chakra affinity was wind, he began to periodically focus on this area whenever he could afford to take time away from his daily, more critical, near-term training routines.


    But, asionally, he even dedicated entire days solely to enhancing his connection with the wind element whenever he could.


    He understood, both from Takumi''s advice and his intuition, the importance of bing intimately familiar with the wind element before attempting to learn any specific jutsu that utilized it.


    This approach was aboutying a solid foundation, making it easier for him to pick up and master wind-element ninjutsu down the line.


    Hikari recognized that by building a stronger connection with the wind element initially, he would be able to learn subsequent wind jutsu much more efficiently, achieving better results in less time.


    This systematic approach meant dying the immediate gratification of learning shy jutsu but promised a more profound mastery and understanding of wind techniques in the long run.


    The strategy was to focus on the elemental affinity itself, understanding its properties, behaviors, and how it interacted with the chakra.


    By immersing himself in the essence of wind, Hikari aimed to make this element an extension of his will, allowing for a more intuitive and effective application of wind-based ninjutsu.


    Though this meant he would start learning specific wind jutsuter than if he had dived straight into them, Hikari was confident that this foundational work would pay off.


    He anticipated that once he began focusing on particr techniques, his enhanced affinity and deeper understanding of the wind would allow him to master them more quickly and effectively.


    This long-term vision underscored Hikari''s patient and strategic approach to his shinobi training, emphasizing the importance of a strong foundation over immediate gains, ensuring that his mastery over the wind would be unmatched when the time came.


    So, Hikari began with straightforward exercises aimed at creating, molding, and projecting wind chakra beyond his body.


    He started with simple actions like using his chakra to move leaves or lightweight objects, progressively advancing to modifying the flow of wind around him.


    Recognizing the intrinsic link between wind and breath, he engaged in controlled breathing exercises to refine his chakra control and strengthen his connection to the wind element.


    Hikari sought out Wind Release experts within the n, keen on observing their techniques for generating and employing wind chakra.


    He paid close attention to the nuances of their jutsu¡ªtheir sounds, visuals, and even the scent.


    He asked these experts to apply their techniques on him lightly, allowing him to ''feel'' the wind and gain a deeper understanding of its dynamics.


    While training or meditating in a windy area would have been ideal for immersing himself in his element, Hikari was cautious not to leave the npound where those areas would be present, like on top of the Hokage''s Mountain.


    He wanted to avoid any misinterpretation that might suggest he was distancing himself from the Hyuga n, especially considering his parents'' history and the potential attention from the Hokage.


    Instead, Hikari found alternative means to engage with the wind within the safety of his n''s domain.


    Thanks to his burgeoning reputation and status as a main branch member, many Wind Release specialists within the n were willing to assist him in his endeavors.


    It was clear that, aside from a genuine interest in aiding his development, there was also an underlying motivation for these experts to align themselves with someone of Hikari''s promise.


    After a period of dedicated practice and once he felt sufficiently attuned to the wind element, Hikari recently started to even experiment with generating small gusts and using wind chakra to enhance his attacks, slicing through objects with newfound precision.


    Although the n possessed many C and even B-rank Wind Release jutsu, Hikari showed little interest in them. His ambitiony in a more innovative direction: to fuse his Wind Release chakra directly with the shape transformation of the Hyuga n''s unique Rotation technique.


    He recognized the potential synergy between the two, envisioning how incorporating wind could enhance the Rotation''s attack speed, offensive damage potential, range, and defense.


    This was a groundbreaking idea, aiming to elevate a traditional Hyuga technique into something far more powerful and versatile.


    However, Hikari was under no illusions about the difficulty of this endeavor. Integrating Wind Release with the precise chakra control and rotational movement of the Hyuga Rotation would be aplex and challenging task.


    He had spent three years just to be intimately familiar with the wind element, and he anticipated needing at least three more years of dedicated, hard practice to sessfullybine these two aspects of his chakra.


    Hikari was aware that Minato Namikaze, in the original narrative, had embarked on a simr venture, attempting to infuse his shape transformation jutsu Rasengan with Wind Release chakra.


    However, despite his genius, Minato ultimately didn''t seed, passing away before seeing the fruition of this ambitious endeavor.


    However, Hikari believed that the Hyuga Rotation, in its essence, was a much simpler conceptpared to the Rasengan.


    Theoretically, this simplicity should make the integration of Wind Release into the Rotation a more achievable goal.


    Moreover, Hikari harbored a strong confidence in his abilities, not considering his talent any less significant than that of Minato Namikaze.


    This self-assurance wasn''t born from arrogance but from a deep understanding of his strengths and capabilities.


    Hikari had also already essentially mastered the technique of enhancing his Vacuum Palm sts with wind chakra, an endeavor that proved more intuitive than he initially thought.


    The Vacuum Palm technique already involved a maniption of the wind, channeling one''s chakra into the air in front of the user and thrusting the palms forward to project a forceful st.


    By substituting ordinary chakra with wind release chakra, Hikari found that the jutsu not only became easier to execute but also more effective.


    The first time he infused wind chakra into the Vacuum Palm, following his mastery of the base technique, Hikari executed it correctly. This sess was a testament to his deepening understanding and control of wind chakra.


    ''As for fusing wind chakra into my 64 palms, it wouldn''t aplish anything. It would just make the chakra I eject more evasive, making it harder to urately poke the tenketsu points with the right dose for it to work as it should.'',


    ''There''s a reason why this is a taijutsu-only technique and not a ninjutsu technique first and foremost, and why no Hyuga, I saw until now, ever does it...'', Hikari suddenly realized.


    ''The same is true with Rotation. After observing this technique being used by various specialists over thest few months, they all never attempted to fuse it with any elements because it simply would not work.'',


    ''Instead, it could backfire on their own bodies, make the technique''s starting speed slower, and overall reduce the spinning speed, hence also decreasing its offensive and defensive capabilities.'',


    ''By my estimates, only the Wind Release is suitable to be used alongside it. For one, it already utilizes the concept of outside air/wind around you once you spin your chakra and body around as a part of its original mechanic.'',


    ''So adding more of your wind chakra into the mix wouldn''t hurt; it would just make it stronger in its potential ''from the inside''. I will call the technique Wind Style: Rotation; it would probably just double its range if used wisely and prudently, while also increasing its speed, offensive, and defensive potential.'',


    ''So from Hiashi''s maximum 5 meters in the original, it could grow to at least 10 immediately, in radius from my body as the center, and from then depending on how my chakra develops.'',


    ''I''m sure this was also done by thatst Kage-level shinobi of our n as well, however, the appearance of it is the same as the original Rotation, so it was maybe lost in history, or that person didn''t want to admit it, but that kind of range and power surely wasn''t just an ordinary rotation.'',


    Noting thest few of his thoughts and ns on the paper in front of him, Hikari finalized the new daily routine for power development. This carefully crafted schedule reflected his strategic approach to training, bncing the refinement of existing skills with the exploration of innovative techniques.


    Hikari then slowly transitioned to the ''knowledge acquisition'' portion of his day, this time selecting only some semi-advanced books on medical jutsu and fuinjutsu.


    Over thest few years, his physical training had seen significant improvements, paralleled by his exhaustive reading of virtually all the books avable to him on the mechanics of chakra and jutsu, as well as the social sciences and humanities of his world.


    Given his background from a modern Earth, the feudalistic-level knowledge of his current world did not pose much of a challenge to understand.


    Instead, what had upied most of his time in terms of theoretical knowledge acquisition were the beginning to intermediate books about medical jutsu and fuinjutsu.


    That was what was entirely unfamiliar to him beforehand, and what he focused most of his ''theoretical'' attention on during the day.


    He understood the value of these fields of expertise, recognizing them as the closest equivalents to the ''natural sciences'' in his world.


    Medical Jutsu, with its profound applications for healing and potentially altering physiological states, offered a breadth of knowledge that went beyond simple first aid, delving into the intricacies of the body''s chakra system.


    It was very important, no, it was actually, the only way to understand the supernatural bio-mechanics of human bodies in this strange world.


    Simrly, fuinjutsu ¡ª the art of sealing ¡ª provided insights into the containment and maniption of chakra in ways that could be both defensive and offensive, offering strategic advantages that were unparalleled in other areas of study.


    This field extended even further, touching upon the unique physicalws of this world, distinct from the ones Hikari knew in his previous life.


    The symbols and patterns used in fuinjutsu weren''t mere decorations but abstract representations created by humans to grasp and apply the fundamental forces of nature.


    Thus, fuinjutsu, and by extension, all Jutsu Shiki (spell forms) that fuinjutsu used,id the foundation for also understanding extraordinary space-time ninjutsu such as Summoning, Reverse Summoning, and the Flying Raijin technique, amongst others.


    For Hikari, mastering these disciplines was not only just about expanding his capabilities; it was also about deepening his understanding of the world''s underlying principles, which was beneficial for all kinds of reasons.


    Thanks to theprehensive notes and resources left behind by his mother, which Hikari eventually managed to obtain from Takumi, he became quite skilled in medical jutsu in practical terms as well.


    He would often practice on his own in his courtyard, using various fish and small animals as subjects in his spare time.


    Leveraging his Byakugan''s precise vision and the Gentle Fist''s delicate chakra maniption ability, Hikari gradually learned how to urately and gently direct his chakra to mend minor injuries.


    He was confident that, with continued practice and time, he could achieve the same level of proficiency as his mother, healing his own wounds in the midst of battle using the Gentle Fist, Byakugan, and the Yang Release.


    Furthermore, mastering the use of Yang Release chakra, which is integral to medical jutsu, proved to be within Hikari''s grasp.


    Unlike elemental affinities that some shinobi naturally have an easier or harder time learning, the creation of the Yin or Yang Release chakra does not depend on such affinities.


    Instead, it hinges on the shinobi''s control over their chakra¡ªa domain where Hikari had be exceptionally proficient.


    This expertise in chakra control meant that learning to utilize Yang Release chakra for healing purposes was not as challenging for Hikari as it might have been for others less skilled in manipting their chakra.


    Therefore, although medical jutsu wasn''t Hikari''s primary area of focus, he achieved a respectable level of proficiency in it, both in practical application and theoretical understanding.


    His background from a previous life, enriched with modern medical concepts, contributed significantly to his advanced grasp of theoretical knowledge in this field.


    This foundation allowed him to adapt and apply these principles to the medical jutsu practices of his current world, even reaching an intermediate level in terms of practical application.


    This unique blend of past knowledge and current learning enabled Hikari to approach medical jutsu from a different perspective, enhancing his ability to understand and perform medical techniques more effectively than might have been expected.


    His ability tobine modern medical insights with the chakra-based healing methods of the ninja world gave him an edge, making him adept at diagnosing and treating injuries in ways that bridged two worlds of medical practice.


    He found himself at a simr level in fuinjutsu, initially finding it easy thanks to the decent math proficiency level he had in his past life, that fuinjutsu of this world was quite simr, yet, recently, he encountered a bottleneck in this area as well, struggling to break through to the ''advanced'' practical levels in both medical jutsu and fuinjutsu.


    Recognizing the need for expert guidance to progress further, Hikari decided to seek out specialized training avable within the Hyuga npound.


    These specialized facilities were known to offer in-depth training programs led by masters in their respective fields, catering to shinobi who aspired to excel beyond basic proficiency.


    After submitting his application and undergoing the initial assessments, Hikari''s dedication and existing skill level impressed the instructors.


    They recognized his potential and the depth of his foundational knowledge, which set him apart from typical applicants.


    Consequently, Hikari was epted into their advanced sses for both medical jutsu and fuinjutsu.


    However, you have to note that despite Hikari''s proficiency and intermediate practical level in both medical jutsu and fuinjutsu, he was aware that this did not equate to possessing specific techniques in these disciplines.


    It was clear to him that someone with even a single powerful technique in either area could potentially be more useful in specific situations than he was, despite his broader skill set.


    In terms of medical jutsu, Hikari wasn''t looking to expand his repertoire with offensive techniques aimed at manipting opponents'' bodies.


    His primary interesty in self-healing capabilities duringbat, a need directly addressed by his mother''s notes. Among these, a technique seemingly dubbed the "Gentle Fist of Healing" caught his attention.


    This technique, tailored to his Hyuga heritage and leveraging the Gentle Fist''s chakra maniption principles for healing, was exactly what Hikari sought.


    It offered a reliable fallback should he sustain injuries, aligning perfectly with his strategic approach tobat without diverging into the offensive domain of medical jutsu.


    As for fuinjutsu, Hikari''s ambitions were simrly focused. He was not after the legendary andplex sealing techniques associated with the Uzumaki n, which were both out of his current reach and misaligned with his goals.


    Basic sealing techniques that could offer strategic advantages in battle or safeguard important items were his target.


    Regarding the highly coveted Jutsu Shiki for space-time maniption, such as the Flying Raijin, Hikari recognized the immense dedication and unique ''space-time'' affinity required for such techniques.


    Though intrigued by the concept, he realistically assessed his current priorities and path. Stealing such a jutsu from the Hokage''s office, aside from being a monumental challenge, would divert him from other, more immediately beneficial avenues of strengthening.


    By the time he could potentially ess such a technique, he anticipated being far stronger through other means and possiblycking the decades of dedicated practice needed to master it.


    Therefore, Hikari''s engagement with these two disciplines was driven by a desire to deepen his understanding of the world''s mechanics¡ªa goal he hadrgely achieved¡ªand to find small practical applications for this knowledge.


    To fulfill this second objective, what he needed now were opportunities for guided practice under the tutge of professionals, which would streamline his learning process and save valuable time.


    This is precisely the opportunity presented by the specialized training facilities for medical jutsu and fuinjutsu within the Hyuga npound. By joining these advanced sses, Hikari aims to bridge the gap between his broad theoretical knowledge and its practical application.

 27. Unlocking the Evolution of The Byakugan

    27. Unlocking the Evolution of The Byakugan


    .


    .


    .


    As the evening hues painted the sky and the day''s reading activities came to a close, Hikari transitioned from the intellectual pursuit of knowledge to a more introspective practice.


    He moved to the edge of the wooden nk extending from his room, overlooking the serene courtyard that had witnessed countless hours of his diligent training.


    There, in a moment of tranquility, he positioned himself with legs crossed, settling into a meditative pose that had be a recent addition to his routine.


    Unlike his usual meditation, this time, he activated his Byakugan, an unusual practice he had begun to explore.


    The decision to meditate with his Byakugan activated was driven by intriguing, unusual experiences he had started to encounter.


    During recent training sessions focused on enhancing his Byakugan''s capabilities, Hikari noticed the emergence of strange, otherworldly patterns and lines that transcended his regr, tangible vision.


    These swirling waves of motion, barely perceptible and existing on the fringe of the visible spectrum, captivated him. They seemed to hint at dimensions and aspects of chakra and the world that were elusive and profoundlyplex.


    Intrigued by these phenomena, Hikari sought to delve deeper into these experiences. By meditating with his Byakugan active, he aimed to attune his mind and spirit more closely to these mysterious patterns, to understand and possibly unravel the secrets they held.


    This practice represented a bold experiment, merging the physical enhancement of his dojutsu with the spiritual focus of meditation to ess new levels of perception.


    As Hikari focused, the world around him took on a different aspect. The familiar surroundings of his courtyard, with its meticulously arranged stones and carefully tended nts, faded into the background as he concentrated on the ethereal patterns that danced at the edge of his perception.


    The experience was disorienting yet exhrating, offering glimpses into the intricate web of chakra that interwove the fabric of the world.


    This meditation, with the Byakugan''s prating gaze, became a journey into uncharted territories of understanding.


    Hikari was not just seeking to enhance his visual prowess but to connect with the deeper, more fundamental aspects of chakra and reality.


    As Hikari delved deeper into his meditation, his consciousness expanding under the keen gaze of his Byakugan, he began to discern patterns within the swirling, enigmatic waves that had captured his curiosity.


    The movements, initially perceived as mere random fluctuations, started to coalesce into a rhythm, echoing the natural world''s ebb and flow around him.


    The realization dawned slowly, an epiphany born from the intersection of his enhanced perception and his deepening understanding of chakra and its manifestations.


    The patterns he observed, so distinct yet elusive, bore a striking resemnce to descriptions he had encountered in ancient texts and scrolls ¡ª descriptions of natural energy, the raw, potent force that permeated the world, essible to those who could attune themselves to its frequency.


    This energy, fundamental and powerful, was the basis for senjutsu, a field of study that melded chakra with the natural energies of the world to achieve heightened states of power and awareness.


    In this moment of profound insight, Hikari connected the dots between the strange phenomena observed through his Byakugan and the theoretical knowledge of natural energy and senjutsu.


    The swirling waves and patterns he had noticed weren''t mere visual anomalies; they were glimpses of natural energy itself, made visible through the unique capabilities of his Byakugan and his focused meditation.


    Excitement surged through him as he realized the potential implications of his discovery. The ability to perceive, even if vaguely, the currents of natural energy opened up new possibilities for exploration and power.


    "It seems that I really hit the jackpot...", Hikari mused, his mind racing with the exhration of discovery.


    For the first time since his transmigration into this world, he felt an overwhelming surge of excitement, so intense that it manifested in an audibleugh, rare for someone as disciplined and focused as him,


    "It seems that the ability my dojutsu led me to was this one... I couldn''t have asked for any better! It seems that fate favors me, Hikari Hyuga!",


    Though the visions of natural energy were temporary and sporadic, presenting themselves as nothing more than faint, translucent patterns and waves, the potential they represented was vast,


    "Although I can''t do anything with these kinds of extremely ''sparse'' and ''weak'' kinds of visions, if I manage to improve my ability to perceive these strange translucent patterns and waves on a more continuous and heightened basis, in the future, from the same kind of training, then I could interact with it with my own body and chakra sessfully...", He contemted with growing determination.


    The possibilities that unfolded before him were limitless. By honing his unique ability to perceive natural energy more clearly and consistently, Hikari could embark on a path to mastering senjutsu, tapping into powers that went far beyond the conventional techniques of the ninja world.


    This realization marked a pivotal moment in his journey, a beacon that illuminated his path to greatness.


    "All the hard training finally paid off!", He thought, a sense of achievement and anticipation filling him.


    The prospect of integrating natural energy with his own chakra and techniques opened up new avenues for growth and power, promising a future where he could transcend the limits of traditional shinobi abilities.


    It was not that Hikari had never considered the possibility of learning senjutsu before. Yet, the prospect had always seemed too far-fetched, more like a lofty dream than an achievable goal.


    The known methods of acquiring senjutsu involved locations shrouded in mystery and legend: the Ryuchi Cave, Mount Myoboku, and Shikkotsu Forest. These ces were not found but rather seemed to select their visitors based on enigmatic criteria resembling fate.


    Stories of individuals being chosen¡ªOrochimaru receiving a white snakeskin at his parents'' graves, Jiraiya being ''identally'' summoned to Mount Myoboku during a botched Reverse Summoning, and the Senju''s spected ties with Shikkotsu Forest¡ªhighlighted the elusive nature of these senjutsu training grounds.


    Initially, Hikari had resigned himself to the idea of waiting at least a decade, umting scientific knowledge about this world, before attempting to do some kinds of experiments with Jugo''s n''s DNA, hoping to artificially induce the capacity to draw in natural energy for senjutsu.


    Yet, the unexpected development of his Byakugan offering glimpses of natural energy changed everything.


    Now, Hikari realized that a direct path to interfacing with natural energy might already be within his grasp, bypassing the need for secretive locations or experimental procedures.


    The keyy in further refining his Byakugan''s capabilities, enhancing its sensitivity to the subtle flows of natural energy that pervaded the world.


    If he could train his dojutsu to see this energy more clearly and consistently, he might be able to interact with it directly, harnessing it for senjutsu without needing to seek out those suspicious ''animals'' or their hidden domains,


    "Could I even use ''that'' approach for utilizing natural energy then...?", He suddenly got a bright idea. His mind raced, his horizons expanded greatly thanks to this sudden revtion.

 28. Natural Energy and Senjutsu Potential

    28. Natural Energy and Senjutsu Potential


    ''This revtion also seems to confirm some of my previous theories about this world in general. Other individuals, from the past, and possibly present, also likely managed to acquire senjutsu abilities without any actual connections to those three ''Holy'' ces...'',


    ''The key was in extensive meditation all along. Yet, my Byakugan probably shortcut what would have been many, many decades of needed daily meditation for someone else before they could finally perceive this elusive natural energy...'',


    This insight led Hikari to a deeper appreciation for the unique advantage his Byakugan offered in his pursuit of higher power.


    Two years ago, after delving into the historical records of this world, particrly those predating the Warring States period and the establishment of ninjutsu and the shinobi system, Hikari came to a realization that hinted at a broader spectrum of power.


    His study,bined with the canonical information from his previous life, pointed towards the existence of a different system of power. Central to this realization were the samurai and various monks, who predated shinobi and persisted alongside them.


    These warriors and ascetics were the predominant forces in the world before the advent of chakra. And what else was present before the chakra? Natural energy.


    Natural energy was the energy derived from the fundamental elements of the world: the air that nketed the, the water that flowed through its rivers and oceans, and the earth that formed its vastndscapes.


    This energy existed ubiquitously, permeating every corner of the globe and endlessly circting through the environment. It was an ever-present force, seamlessly woven into the fabric of nature itself, influencing ecosystems and the''s myriad forms of life.


    Hikari hypothesized, drawing parallels with fantasy elements from his previous life, that monks and samurai wielded unique sets of powers derived from intense internal focus and spiritual alignment with nature.


    Through decades of meditation, they might have been capable of perceiving natural energy and utilizing it to enhance their swordsmanship and martial prowess, increasing the power and range of their attacks.


    Furthermore, once chakra was introduced into this world, it was conceivable that these ancient warriors learned tobine this newfound energy with the natural energy they were already attuned to, giving rise to early forms of senjutsu.


    What interested Hikari the most was not the Sage Mode, given that he recognized his physical limitations and chakra reserves were not on par with those who could easily harness such power.


    The legendary bodies of the Senju or Uzumaki ns, known for inheriting the "body" of the Sage of the Six Paths, were well-suited to manage the influx and bnce of natural energy within their bodies.


    Hikari mused that perhaps if he had inherited the "body" of Hamura Otsutsuki, like Toneri''s n on the Moon or the descendants of Kaguya, he might have had a better chance.


    However, the legacy of the Hyuga was different; they inherited the "eyes" of Hamura, focusing on spiritual and visual prowess, simr to how the Uchiha inherited the "eyes" of Hagoromo.


    This lineage predisposed them more towards visual and spiritual feats rather than the physical robustness and vitality required for Sage Mode.


    Nevertheless, Hikari saw a different pathway open before him: the practice of simple senjutsu, the technique of infusing one''s own jutsu, rather than their body, with natural energy, to improve their potential, or even using simply taijutsu moves of the Hyuga n alongside it.


    Hikari envisioned a method where the natural energy would never need to directly merge with his body''s internal chakra pathway system at all, avoiding the potential dangers of harm or petrification that could ur from an imbnce.


    Instead, if he could enhance his Byakugan''s ability to perceive natural energy with enough rity and detail, he could then precisely manipte his own chakra externally, with his expetinoal chakra control andunch his attacks in ways that actually interacted with the natural energy around him afterward to bring the potency of his attacks to a new dimension.


    This would allow him to envelop his techniques with ayer of natural energy without it ever infiltrating his body, thereby circumventing the risks associated with traditional Sage Mode.


    In Hikari''s envisioned application of senjutsu, it would be his adversaries who would have to contend with the potent negative side-effects of natural energy, especially if his Gentle Fist managed to deliver such energy ''inside'' of them.


    The techniques he would develop, mixed with and coated in the raw power of the natural world, could have effects beyond sheer physical force, potentially carrying the destabilizing properties of natural energy to his foes, turning them into stone, and carrying a great deal of disturbance.


    "It seems that, sometime in the future, it would be beneficial to visit either the Land of Iron or some Ninja Monk temples. I feel like I could gain some practical insights from them and speed up my learning process...", Hikari mused, contemting his next steps.


    The Land of Iron, with its samurai who might have ancient knowledge of integrating natural energy into their swordsmanship, and the Ninja Monk temples, with their deep spiritual practices possibly connected to natural energy, seemed like promising sources of knowledge that could aid his quest.


    "It''s unfortunate, but based on my current ability to perceive that kind of energy, and considering how much my vision has improved up to now, it looks like it will take at least another six years to develop my vision to a level that would allow me to implement many of the techniques I have in mind...",


    "And then, it would be wise to find some shortcuts to develop those techniques as quickly as possible after my vision has matured. So, locating those ces would be beneficial...",


    Hikari recognized the value of seeking external guidance and knowledge toplement his self-driven efforts. Visiting ces steeped in the tradition of harnessing natural energy, whether through the disciplined lifestyle of the samurai or the spiritual practices of the monks, could provide him with the unique insights needed to refine his techniques and apply them more effectively. At that time, they would be forced to ''help'' him willingly or unwillingly.


    At this time, Hikari also realized another thing. Originally choosing to focus on taijutsu rather than ninjutsu proved to be a ''well-done'' move for him in the light of this evening discovery.


    It was because his theorized approach, which he termed "external precision detailed blending," involved externallybining his chakra-based attacks with natural energy.


    This method allowed him to carefully enhance his taijutsu moves outside without the need to internalize the natural energy first, thereby sidestepping the significant risks thate with internal maniption as highlighted many times in the original series by various characters.


    However, had Hikari been a fighter inclined more towards ninjutsu instead, he would have likely been forced to take theplex task of integrating natural energy directly into his body''s inner chakra system first in order to blend it with his physical and spiritual energies, meaning his own chakra, there, if he truly wanted to use senjutsu with his abilities at all.


    This necessity stemmed from the difficulty of externally manipting natural energy for ninjutsu techniquespared to taijutsu techniques Hikari was familiar with from Hyugas.


    For instance, attempting to externally wrap arge-scale ninjutsu like some ''fire dragon'' with natural energy, after it would have been already executed outside and distant from the user, posed significant challenges.


    The technique''s size and the distance it would have covered from the caster, in an instant it wasunched outside, would certainly have made it aplex task and beyond the reach of simple close-range chakra maniption, therefore, without much possibility for sess.


    But, the needed internal mixture of natural energy, instead, with one''s own chakra could then lead to petrification if not properly managed, a danger also magnified during high-intensity and various battle scenarios when focus and concentration, for chakra control, got divided.


    As the sky deepened into shades of twilight, Hikari returned to calm and focused and continued his meditation delving deeper into the realm of what he now knew was the natural energy with the aid of his Byakugan.


    He moved with the natural rhythm of the world around him, trying to synchronize his chakra with the elusive patterns of natural energy he sought to understand and harness.


    This unique meditative session stretched on, with Hikari fully immersed in the experience, pushing the limits of his perception.


    However, after some time, a slight difort began to manifest, a subtle signal from his Byakugan that it was time to conclude the session.


    Recognizing this indication, Hikari gently closed his eyes, allowing the visual prowess of his Byakugan to fade as he brought the meditation to a close.


    With a deep, grounding breath, he acknowledged the progress made and the limitations respected, rising from his seated position with a sense of aplishment and understanding.


    As night fully enveloped the courtyard, Hikari retreated back inside his room, the peaceful and productive session leaving him in a state of deep contemtion.


    Moving to hisrge adult bed, he settled in for the night, the day''s experiences and insights weaving through his thoughts as he drifted off to sleep.

 29. Arriving to the Patriarch’s Residence

    29. Arriving to the Patriarch¡¯s Residence


    Another morning swiftly arrived, and afterpleting his morning chores, engaging in a training session with Takumi, and following through with his new post-training ritual, Hikari moved on to his chakra control and physical exercises.


    He allowed himself a brief period of recovery, albeit on a somewhat rushed schedule. Before he knew it, lunchtime and the afternoon had approached.


    Realizing the day was moving quickly, Hikari dressed in slightly more formal robes, opting for dark blue colors that he favored, and prepared for a significant asion.


    He had received an invitation to visit the Patriarch''s Estate, a summons delivered through Takumi earlier that morning. This invitation was the reason behind the urgency in Hikari''s routine today.


    As Hikari made his way to the Patriarch''s Estate, his thoughts drifted towards the Patriarch himself. This wasn''t the first time he had been invited over for lunch, so he was well-acquainted with the path and felt no nervousness about the meeting.


    In fact, Takumi, along with his wife who resided in the Seventh Estate with Hikari, extended an invitation to Hikari to join them for lunch, typically on the weekends, and Hikari often apanied them.


    Walking through the pathways primarily used by the Main Branch and its attendants, Hikari reflected on how different his journey feltpared to three years ago. Back then, as he walked through simr hallways and paths, he was met with scorn, mockery, and ridicule. Insults were thrown his way, and the disdain in the eyes of others was palpable.


    This time, however, the atmosphere was markedly different. Regardless of age, everyone he passed looked at him with kindness in their eyes, as if he were their son, grandson, or a precious treasure.


    People greeted him warmly as "Hikari-kun," inquiring about his well-being, and his training progress, and confirming if he was off to see the Patriarch again.


    Offers of help were freely given, coupled with expressions of curiosity, care, respect, affection, and even envy. The disdain that once colored their interactions was nowhere to be found.


    This shift in treatment was a direct result of Hikari''s burgeoning talent and the Council''s decision urging the n to change their approach towards him.


    Instead of continuing the previous treatment, the n was now instructed to nurture and support him with all their might.


    The recognition of his potential and the official endorsement of his importance to the n had transformed how he was perceived by his peers and elders alike.


    Arriving at the grand facade of the illustrious building, Hikari was met by Side Branch members stationed at the door. Despite his young age of six, they addressed him with a respectful "Hikari-sama," acknowledging his status and potential within the n. Their demeanor towards him was respectful, a sign of the high regard in which he was now held.


    The Side Branch members attentively led him inside while informing him, "The Patriarch has been expecting you, alongside young master Hiashi."


    As Hikari nodded and was promptly escorted through the estate, his thoughts drifted to Hiashi, who was now 18 years old. He also considered Hiashi''s twin brother, Hizashi, who Hikari suspected might also be present at the lunch, like during theirst few meetings together but wasn''t mentioned by the attendants due to obvious reasons.


    In reality, after Hiruto and Haruto Hyuga, who were now 8 and 10 years old respectively, Hiashi and Hizashi were one of the closest to Hikari in age within the Main Branch.


    The Patriarch often paired Hiashi and Hizashi with Hikari in the hope of fostering a stronger bond among them. The Patriarch''s decision was influenced by Hikari''s exceptional maturity, which overshadowed his mere six years.


    Despite his young age, Hikari demonstrated a level of understanding andposure that surpassed those of many of his older peers.


    Also following that pivotal Hyuga Council meeting which affirmed Hikari''s restored status within the n, the dynamic between him and the younger Hyugas, Hiroto and Haruto, took another turn.


    Initially, their grandfather, the Seventh Elder, had explicitly forbidden them from antagonizing Hikari any further.


    This prohibition was a direct consequence of the council''s discussion that day to restore his status and stand behind him collectively.


    However, once things regarding Hikari finally calmed down, and the brothers were allowed to issue a formal challenge to him, the situation was notably different than thest time again.


    Hikari had not only embraced his training unlike before but had excelled, even mastering the Eight Trigrams 16-Palms already by that point.


    This put him at a significant advantage. When the brothers, with Haruto even activating his Byakugan by that time, initiated their challenge, they were utterly unprepared for Hikari''s strength once again.


    Hikari, remembering their past actions and his promise of retribution, effortlessly defeated them. He not only humiliated them inbat but also fulfilled his vow to choke them out once more.


    This decisive victory served multiple purposes for him: it reinforced Hikari''s burgeoning reputation as a prodigy within the n, deterred Hiroto and Haruto from contemting further challenges out of a newfound extreme fear, and symbolized the capittion of the Seventh Elder''s lineage in the face of Hikari''s undeniable talent.


    Over the past few years, Hikari also hadn''t made any visits to his parents'' graves located in Konoha''s Cemetery. The emotional connection to his parents had dimmed to a point where he felt indifferent towards them.


    For Hikari, there was nopelling reason to pay respects at the cemetery, especially considering the potential risks involved.


    He understood that such a visit could be misunderstood by the n, stirring unnecessary suspicion or concern about his loyalties once again.


    Moreover, visiting the cemetery could unintentionally signal to the Third Hokage and the vige''s leadership that he was vulnerable or seeking a connection outside the Hyuga n.


    This could lead to unwanted attention, including the possibility of Anbu operatives being dispatched to ''escort'' him for a meeting with the Hokage. Such a scenario was fraught with risks, as it might not only be an attempt to sway him towards serving Konoha''s interests ''more directly'' but could also escte to more coercive measures if he seemed resistant.


    As Hikari stepped into the living room of the Patriarch''s personal residence, he found himself in a space that reflected the elegance and tradition of the Hyuga n.


    The room was spacious and immactely kept, with polished wooden floors that gleamed under the soft light filtering through the paper screen windows.


    Traditional Japanese scroll paintings adorned the walls, depicting serenendscapes and powerful dragons, symbols of strength and wisdom that resonated with the Hyuga''s values.


    In the center of the room, a low, polished wooden table was set upon tatami mats, around which the Patriarch, Hiashi, and Hizashi were already seated, Patriarch''s wife already passed away a few years back.


    The furnishings were minimalist yet sophisticated, with cushioned seating arranged around the table forfort during their meal.


    Delicate vases holding simple, elegant flower arrangements provided a touch of color and life to the room, while carefully ced incense burners filled the air with a subtle, calming fragrance. The Patriarch nodded to the Side Branch attendants and they all stepped away.


    The Patriarch''s soft smile and warm greeting set a rxed tone as Hikari entered the living room, "Hikari-kun, you are finally here, please sit down. Let''s enjoy our meal first; it will soon be finished."


    Hiashi, with a weing smile, chimed in, "Hello, Hikari-kun, how are you doing?", In contrast to the others, Hizashi made an effort to rise and greet Hikari more formally before being gently encouraged by Hikari to remain seated, "Please sit down, Hizashi-senpai, I will join you at the table right away."


    Hikari then addressed the table with a polite and fluid greeting, "Lord Patriarch, young patriarch, good afternoon, how have you all been?", He found his ce at the low wooden table and settled into the traditional sitting position on the tatami mats.


    His behavior reflected not only his respect for Hyuga traditions and the n''s hierarchy but also his understanding of the delicate dynamics within the family, especially concerning Hizashi.


    Hikari made a conscious effort to address Hizashi with the respectful "-senpai" honorific, acknowledging him politely despite Hizashi being only six years his senior and a member of the Side Branch, unlike Hikari from the Main Branch.


    Hikari understood the unique circumstances surrounding Hizashi well; although he was born into the Patriarch''s lineage, a direct line of the Main Branch, fate and n traditions had designated him as a Side Branch member, instead,plete with the Cursed Seal marking.


    However, despite these externalbels and the burdens they carried, Hizashi was still regarded as a genuine family member by his father, Hirayoshi the Patriarch, and his twin brother, Hiashi, the heir apparent to the Patriarch position, in Hikari''s past observation.


    The hierarchies of the Hyuga n tradition necessitated a public adherence to the roles prescribed by one''s branch status, creating a necessary distance in formal settings.


    However, within the privacy of the family home, such distinctions faded, allowing for a semnce of normal family interactions, including shared meals and other domestic activities.


    Therefore, Hikari''s kind way of treating Hizashi wasn''t just about being nice. He hoped it would make a good impression on the Patriarch and Hiashi themselves.


    By showing respect to Hizashi, Hikari was showing that he understood and cared about the family''splicated situation.


    He thought this might help him get on even better terms with the Patriarch''s line. And it seemed to have worked, so far, judging by their increasingly warmed-up rtionship.


    Hikari had long understood the reasons behind Hizashi being branded with the Cursed Seal. It boiled down to his being an identical twin born just minutes after Hiashi.


    This situation presented potentialplications for n session that could be neatly avoided by designating one twin as a Branch member.


    The concern was that Hizashi, being the younger and identical twin, might challenge Hiashi''s position as the heir due to him being unwilling and indignant in the future.


    After all, he was the younger brother, that was true, but just for a few meager seconds younger.


    Moreover, their identical gic makeup meant their chakraworks could be indistinguishable, raising the possibility of one posing as the other with no definitive way to tell them apart.


    It would be a really bad situation to have rted to one n''s main Patriarch position.


    The decision to brand Hizashi with the Curse Mark and assign him to the Branch family was a preemptive move to sidestep these potential issues.


    And Hikari recognized that such a decision likely came under considerable pressure from other elders within the n.


    It was hard to imagine any father willingly imposing such a harsh fate on his child simply because of the timing of his birth, to prevent theoretical future disputes.


    The choice to mark Hizashi was probably driven by the elders'' insistence, a move to safeguard the n''s stability and session line.


    Understanding this, Hikari saw the special treatment Hizashi received from his father, Hiyaroshi the Patriarch, and his brother Hiashi not just as acts of love but also of remorse.


    Both Hiyaroshi and Hiashi were likely trying topensate for the injustice Hizashi faced due to the n''s rigid traditions and the elders'' demands.

 30. A Lunch Together with The Patriarch

    30. A Lunch Together with The Patriarch


    As Hikari took his seat, the conversation flowed easily, covering a range of subjects but mainly focusing on Hikari''s recent training progress, how he was feeling recently, his potential immediate needs, and his ns.


    The atmosphere was cordial, indicative of a very intimate gathering, albeit one with significant implications given the status of those involved.


    After enjoying the lunch, which was served promptly and savored by all, there was a hush in the conversation.


    It was then that the Patriarch, with a tone of genuine interest and perhaps a hint of excitement, addressed Hikari with a soft tone.


    "I heard that you mastered the ''64-palms'' from the Fifth Elder...?", The Patriarch inquired, his eyes keenly observing Hikari for his response. This question was not casual small talk; it was a recognition of Hikari''s growing prowess and his potential impact on the n''s future.


    "Yes, under the careful guidance of Sir Fifth Elder and the help of the n''s resources, I managed to be fairly proficient in that technique...", Hikari replied, his tone humble yet confident.


    Hizashi seemed a little stunned after hearing about Hikari''s achievement, unlike Hiashi, who appeared ready with his praise at this time,


    "It''s a big deal, Hikari-kun, and it speaks mostly to your talent, smarts, and effort. I only got the hang of the ''64-palms'' when I was 12...," Hiashi said this with genuine warmth as if showing that he was truly happy for Hikari.


    There was no hint of jealousy or resentment that you might expect from someone who''s next in line to lead the n, from the Patriarch''s Lineage, and found out a younger n member, from another Main Branch Lineage, mastered a critical technique six years before he did so.


    However, Hiashi''s present reaction could be traced back to a profound conversation he had with his father, the Patriarch, just the day before after the Patriarch got notified about Hikari''s achievements from the Fifth Elder.


    During that father-son discussion, Hiashi learned in great detail about several critical issues facing the Hyuga n, including the delicate bnce of power between their n and Konoha vige, and other ns as well, and the shifts in the Hokage''s stance towards the said ns too, particrly the Hyuga as well.


    That conversation had been a revtion, fully opening Hiashi''s eyes to the broader challenges and responsibilities that came with his role as the future Patriarch, for the first time. All cards wereid in front of him, for the first time, by his father, who had been reluctant to fully involve him in the highest decision-making of the n until that time.


    Moreover, Hiashi had been also made initially aware of another, and most important, stunning secret about the n vaguely, that only Patriarchs and future Patriarchs of their lineage get to know about, a revtion that had reshaped his perspective on Hikari''s talents and the future of the Hyuga n. A n he was the most proud of and loved, with all of his heart, in his life, and for which and its future he was ready to sacrifice his own life at any point in time.


    That newfound knowledgepletely assured him that even if things got out of control, his own position and their Patriarch lineage could never actually be in jeopardy, even by someone of Hikari''s potential and future personal strength level, due to another revtion.


    This newfound,prehensive understanding helped him see Hikari currently not as a rival or a threat, to his position as the future legitimate Patriarch, but as a valuable asset to the n, someone whose exceptional future abilities could y a crucial role in navigating theplex politicalndscape they were facing and who was crucial part of the new strategy.


    With this insight, Hiashi fully embraced his father''s advice to support and value Hikari in the futurepletely, recognizing the importance of unity and coboration within the n to ensure their collective strength and survival, especially regarding Hikari, who in his father''s words, would be the second pir of the Hyuga n alongside him, the new Patriarch.


    Such high valuation again affirmed his resolution to have a good rtionship with and treat Hikari well in the future, more so as his main partner in the n than just another nsman.


    While the warmth and enthusiasm from Hiashi and the Patriarch took Hikari by surprise, it set his mind racing with thoughts, ''They seem genuinely pleased with what I''ve aplished.'',


    ''But, why? Aren''t they worried that since my talents overshadowed Hisashi''s by this margin, I might want Hisashi''s spot in the future, given how strong I''m bing? No, they''re too savvy and grounded in reality to overlook such implications, especially this old Patriarch.'',


    ''Instead, they must feel secure in their positions and confident they can keep any ambitions I might have in check, for some reason... Fascinating... This n has even more depth and mysteries than I previously thought...'',


    ''If they keep supporting me like they are now, I see no reason to disrupt the current line of session and status quo. However, on the other hand, I''m definitely going to dig deeper into these secrets, and uncover them, one way or another...'', These thoughts raced through Hikari''s mind, though he kept up a guise of child''s innocence and modesty on the outside.


    Internally, Hikari was busy piecing together his next moves. He understood the importance of aligning himself closely with the Patriarch''s lineage, recognizing their significant influence within the Hyuga n - the highest individual say than all the other Main Branch lineages.


    However, beyond that, Hikari also saw an opportunity to be near the n''s core, to uncover theyers of mysteries he sensed were guarded closely by the Patriarch''s Lineage alone.


    Hikari had long pondered the resilience and enduring power of this exact same Patriarch''s Lineage throughout the Hyuga n''s history shown in the historical records he read before.


    His studies of their past only deepened the mystery until now when he began to grasp the edges of an answer. It appeared that the lineage''s unshakeable position and its ability to maintain leadership over centuries against the nine other different Main Branch lineages of Elders, at the same time, might indeed stem from possessing a true, tangible secret power, unlike the others.


    Additionally, while the Patriarch did not wield absolute authority within the n¡ªacting instead as ''the first among equals'' among the ten Elder Lineages of the Main Branch¡ªtheir lineage''s dominance was perhaps anchored so deeply not merely due to tradition but also from this "hidden power" perhaps.


    The Hyuga n''s governance was structured around a council system, with the Patriarch presiding as both the head and the facilitator of the council''s discussions and organizational logistics.


    This setup mandated that significant decisions required a collective consensus among the Elders, adhering to a straightforward majority-vote mechanism. In these critical votes, the Patriarch''s voice carried the same weight as any other Elder, with just a single vote to his name.


    For some day-to-day operations, while the Patriarch had the autonomy to make executive decisions, even many of these routine matters were typically brought before the Elders'' weekly meetings for their advisory input.


    Furthermore, the Patriarch''s Lineage yed a pivotal role in representing the Hyuga externally, bing the primary interface with other ns and vige authorities.


    Intriguingly, unlike the other Main Branch lineages, which might choose sessors based on merit, the Patriarch''s Lineage adhered to strict primogeniture, bestowing leadership on the firstborn son.


    Hikari now spected that this rigid approach to session was deliberately designed to minimize disputes and ensure stability, which was especially important for this lineage due to that same critical matter.


    As their conversation continued, the discussion, somewhat unexpectedly, shifted toward the Hyuga n''s variousmercial ventures, administrative tasks, and broader operations.


    Hikari, drawing upon his extensive modern knowledge from Earth before his transmigration, contributed to the conversation with insights that demonstrated a surprisingly sophisticated understanding of these topics.


    His grasp on matters usually reserved for seasoned n members did not go unnoticed, eliciting another round of admiration from all three present.


    However, Hikari managed to maintain a bnce between humility and a modest sense of pride. He purposefully showed that ability in hopes of solidifying his standing in the eyes of the n''s leadership even more, showcasing the depth of his intellect and the breadth of his potential contributions to the Hyuga n''s future.


    While Hikari engaged enthusiastically in the conversation, sharing his insights, he consciously held back the bulk of his revolutionary ideas and strategies.


    He had a treasure trove of knowledge from his previous life that could potentially transform the Hyuga n''smercial and administrative efficiencies.


    Yet, he chose not toy all his cards on the table during this discussion with the Patriarch and his sons. Hikari had bigger ns.


    He reasoned that unveiling his full suite of ideas before he officially assumed the role of the Third Elder¡ªa position that was rightfully his by birth¡ªwould be premature.


    Hikari envisioned first applying these innovations to bolster the operations and standing of his lineage within the n.


    He believed in enhancing his lineage''s prosperity and influence as a priority, demonstrating a blend of self-interest and strategic foresight.


    After all, at his core, Hikari was someone who meticulously calcted his moves, always aiming to maximize benefits for himself before extending his advantages to the broader n.


    The knowledge he shared today was merely the tip of the iceberg, basic insights from his past life. In contrast, he had already mapped out detailed, actionable ns to significantly boost his lineage''s financial returns and elevate its influence.


    Instead, Hikari''s strategic reveal of his knowledge during this conversation was a calcted move, designed to further enhance his standing in the Patriarch''s eyes.


    By demonstrating a high level of understanding and insight into the n''s operations without unveiling the full extent of his revolutionary ideas, he aimed to position himself as both capable and intelligent, yet still hinting at a deeper potential yet to be unlocked.


    This tactic was part of Hikari''s broader strategy to solidify his reputation and value within the n, particrly with the Patriarch, ensuring that when the time came for him to assume his rightful ce as the Third Elder, he would already be viewed as a highly esteemed and indispensable member of the Hyuga n.


    And Hikari''s decision to share just a glimpse of his profound knowledge paid off sooner than expected. The Patriarch, perhaps impressed by Hikari''s demonstration of advanced insight or his remarkable mastery of the ''64-Palm'' technique at such a young age, made an unexpected announcement.


    He expressed his intention to advocate at the next Hyuga Council meeting for Hikari to begin his immersion into the business and administrative operations of the Third Lineage, currently overseen by Takumi, earlier than originally nned.


    This early introduction, before officially taking on the role of the Third Elder at the age of 12, was designed to help Hikari familiarize himself with the inner workings of his lineage''s affairs, build rapport with its members, and ensure a seamless transition into future leadership.


    Hikari, seemingly prepared for such an opportunity, responded with a mix of gratitude and enthusiasm. He thanked the Patriarch with a respectful politeness, infused with a genuine sense of appreciation.


    His response, brimming with the eagerness of youth to take on new challenges and prove his worth, was exactly what one might expect from someone of his age and position. Yet, beneath this facade of innocence, Hikari fully recognized the strategic significance of this.

 31. Gentle Step: Twin Lion Fist Technique

    31. Gentle Step: Twin Lion Fist Technique


    As the lively discussion came to a close, the Patriarch shifted the mood with a sudden but gentlemand directed at Hiashi and Hizashi,


    "Hiashi, Hizashi, please make your way to the main dojo and wait for us there. We shall join you shortly for a shared training session.", His voice, though firm, carried an undercurrent of familial warmth, making it clear that his request was not up for debate.


    Both young Hyugas understood the importance of obeying their father''s wishes without dy. With a nod of agreement, Hiashi replied, "Understood. We''ll prepare for training."


    Once Hiashi and Hizashi had exited, leaving Hikari and the Patriarch in the privacy of the spacious room, a palpable sense of seriousness enveloped the space.


    The Patriarch''s gaze upon Hikari softened slightly, indicating the shift from a n leader addressing his members to a mentor preparing to impart wisdom to his prot¨¦g¨¦.


    "Hikari-kun, can I ce my trust in you and how do you feel about our n?", The patriarch asked suddenly.


    Caught slightly off guard by the suddenness of the question, Hikari took a moment to collect his thoughts before responding, ''It seems that it is still a taboo topic for him to mention the vige in front of him, so he tested me in this way...?''


    "Lord Patriarch...", Hikari began, his tone respectful and earnest, "You can ce your trust in me. I am fullymitted to our n and its prosperity. My feelings towards the Hyuga n are of deep respect and a strong sense of duty. I understand the responsibilities thate with my position and potential, and I am ready to meet those challenges for the betterment of our n. I understand that there exist both rights and obligations when you are a part of a shinobi n. I''m fortunate enough to enjoy the tremendous attention, care, and resources from the n, so I n to also repay the n and give myself to the fullest in the future!"


    The Patriarch listened intently, searching Hikari''s expression for the sincerity behind his words. After a moment of silence that seemed to stretch between them, he finally nodded, a slight smile breaking through his usually stoic demeanor.


    "That is good to hear, Hikari-kun. Your talents and achievements have not gone unnoticed, and neither has your loyalty. The path ahead will not be easy, and it will require more than just skill¡ªit will require wisdom,passion for our kin, and a deep understanding of what it means to be a Hyuga.",


    Leaning forward, the Patriarch''s gaze fixed more intently on Hikari, "The n is at a pivotal moment, and in theing years, we will face challenges that will test us in ways we have not been tested before. Your role in navigating these challenges will be crucial. I hope you will continue to grow, not just in strength but in character, and help lead the Hyuga into a prosperous future.",


    "Yet, it is through strength that you can offer the greatest aid to our n. In a world where power prevails, it would be a disservice to let your remarkable abilities be stifled by trivial cross-lineage barriers of our branch.",


    "Thus, I''ve decided to entrust you with a high-level technique, exclusive to our Patriarch''s lineage, a technique not yet fully mastered even by Hiashi. This is the Gentle Step: Twin Lion Fist¡ªa legacy of our ancestors. I trust that you will grasp its essence swiftly and exceed my expectations once more. Watch closely now...",


    The Patriarch positioned himself with ample space in the living room, his posture shifting to one that denoted both concentration and readiness, "The Gentle Step: Twin Lion Fist is more than just a technique; it is a symbol of our lineage''s courage and strength...", He began, his voice steady and imbued with a sense of pride.


    As he spoke, he slowly channeled his chakra, his hands beginning to glow with an ethereal blue light. The air around them seemed to thrum with energy, a tangible manifestation of the Patriarch''s control and power,


    "This techniquebines precise chakra control with the Hyuga''s gentle fist taijutsu, allowing the user to create two lion-shaped bursts of chakra around their hands," he exined.


    With a sudden burst of speed, the Patriarch moved, his hands darting forward in a series of intricate motions that mimicked the ferocity and grace of a lion''s pounce.


    The blue chakra around his hands intensified, coalescing into the distinct form ofrge twin lions, their ethereal roars almost audible in the charged atmosphere.


    "This technique allows for powerful strikes that can prate even the strongest defenses, targeting the chakra system directly and causing significant internal damage, sealing multiple tenketsu points they touch, at the same time, all the while draining your foes of their own freely circting chakra reserves, absorbing it with ''lion bites'' and then transferring it to your own chakra pathway system afterward.",


    The Patriarch continued his demonstration with a wless disy of technique and power, "But be warned, it requires mastery over your chakra and a deep understanding of the Gentle Fist art. It is not easy to transfer and introduce an enemy''s chakra into your system.",


    "This technique could be said to be the pinnace of the Hyuga n''s arts in terms of difficulty and power. It is also unique only to our Patriarch''s Lineage. You are the first person ''from the outside'' who got the opportunity to learn it. Therefore, please don''t spread it to anyone else."


    The Patriarch then carefully pulled out a special scroll from inside his robes and handed it to Hikari, "This scroll contains everything you need to know about the Gentle Step: Twin Lion Fist. I''ve put together all the details for you. I''ll be checking in on your progress now and then when we meet again like today. But, also, don''t be reserved, if you have any questions, you can alwayse and ask me directly. I also trust you''ll keep this information safe, this scroll is now your responsibility Hikari-kun...",


    He said, giving Hikari a rare, slightly warm look that Hikari couldn''t quite interpret. Whether this warmth stemmed from genuine sentiment or was a calcted gesture, Hikari could not ascertain. Nheless, he quickly epted the scroll after the deepest bow of respect and gratitude, fervently promising, "Thank you, Lord Patriarch. I assure you, I will not let you or our n down...", His voice steady with determination and honor as well as a little ''touched''.


    Yet, deep within his thoughts, Hikari pondered, ''If he''s shared this technique with me so willingly, it suggests the Patriarch''s lineage likely possesses others, some possibly even more formidable techniques. Their renowned status isn''t unfounded... Hiashi''s Quasi-Kage level strength, shown in the original, the only such of the entire Hyuga n wasn''t for nothing. It seems that at least in their individual strength, every Patriarch is at least on a Quasi-Kage level. It is just that this gentleman got too old now, so his skills regressed.'',


    ''From what I''ve pieced together, their more potent arsenal might well involve at least one more advanced ''chakra absorption'' technique, but with a far greater power, possibly extending to the technique''s range, area of effect, and overall utilization of chakra... Yet, just like Takumi, it''s clear that those from the Main Branch Lineage keep their most crucial techniques close to their chest, away from anyone outside their direct lineage, myself included. The likelihood of them sharing their ultimate techniques with me seems slim...''

 32. Sparring Session – Hiashi and Hizashi

    32. Sparring Session ¨C Hiashi and Hizashi


    Shortly thereafter, the Patriarch and Hikari made their way to the dojo, where Hiashi and Hizashi awaited their arrival, already prepared for the training session ahead.


    The dojo itself, a spacious hall adorned with the Hyuga n''s insignias and equipped with training mats and mirrors along the walls, served as a testament to the n''s dedication to martial prowess.


    The soft rustle of the tatami mats underfoot whispered of countless hours of rigorous training that had taken ce within these walls.


    "Today, we''ll focus on refining our Gentle Fist techniques...", The Patriarch announced, his voice echoing slightly in therge space, "Hiashi, Hizashi, I want you to practice the basic strikes and blocks. Hikari, I''d like to see your progress with the 64-Palms."


    Hiashi and Hizashi nodded, moving to one side of the dojo to begin their exercises, their movements synchronized and fluid, a reflection of their deep-rooted understanding of the Hyuga''s fighting style.


    Meanwhile, Hikari prepared himself, centering his chakra and focusing his mind on the task at hand.


    Under the watchful eyes of the Patriarch, Hikari began demonstrating the 64-Palms technique, his movements a blur of precision and speed.


    Each strike was aimed with pinpoint uracy, targeting imaginary chakra points in the air before him.


    The demonstration wasn''t just a disy of physical skill but also an exhibition of his deep understanding of the Hyuga''s taijutsu and chakra control.


    As Hikari concluded his demonstration, the Patriarch nodded in approval, his gaze acknowledging the young Hyuga''s talent and dedication.


    "Very well done, Hikari-kun. Your mastery of the technique at such a young age speaks volumes of your potential...'', Hemended, offering a rare smile that conveyed both pride and expectation.


    "Yet, what do you think of a sparring session? Hikari-kun, would you be willing to spar with Hizashi first, followed by Hiashi?", Suggested the Patriarch, proposing a hands-on practice.


    Hikari and Hizashi both agreed and then positioned themselves in the center of the dojo, their postures a testament to their training and heritage.


    With a respectful martial arts salute¡ªan acknowledgment of both theirpetition and their bond as n members¡ªtheymenced their spar under the curious eyes of Hiashi and the Patriarch by opening their Byakugan at the same time.


    Hikari, even at his young age, demonstrated remarkable prowess and agility, weaving through Hizashi''s defenses with a fluidity that belied his years. Hizashi, for his part, fought valiantly, his skill evident despite the bloodline limitations ced on him by the Cursed Mark.


    As the match progressed, it became clear that Hikari''s training and ess to more advanced techniques gave him an edge.


    Hizashi, restricted in both Byakugan potential and knowledge due to his status within the Side Branch, fought with the ''32 Palms''¡ªthe extent of the Gentle Fist technique he managed to figure out on his own without any official guidance as such thing was forbidden to him by nws.


    So, despite his determination the disparity in their abilities and opportunities was getting evident.


    The oue, though somewhat expected, was met with mixed emotions. Hikari, respectful in victory, extended a hand to help Hizashi to his feet.


    The Patriarch and Hiashi watched closely, the former with a thoughtful expression, perhaps pondering the implications of the n''s traditions, and thetter with a sense of brotherly concern and surprise at Hikari''s victory.


    This spar, while a disy of skill and dedication, also underscored theplexities and divisions within the Hyuga n¡ªbetween the potential allowed to flourish and the potential restrained, between the pathsid out by birthright, and those altered by fate.


    Despite Hizashi''s reputation as a prominent up-anding talent within the Side Branch, which he hadn''t seen in many years, he found himself now bested by Hikari for the first time in their asional sparring sessions.


    Though Hizashi had the overwhelming advantage of age, the oue reflected the constraints ced upon him by his status within the n.


    While Hizashi processed the mix of emotions stemming from this defeat, Hikari offered words of constion and encouragement, as even he understood how damaging it could be to be defeated by someone so young, so speaking with a sincerity that surprised even himself.


    "Hizashi-senpai, don''t be too discouraged...", Hikari whispered, lending a hand to help him rise, "I understand that your Byakugan excels in long-distance vision, right? Focus on that strength and carve out your unique path.",


    "The absence of ess to existing techniques doesn''t preclude the possibility of creating your own. I''m confident you''ll transcend these barriers and emerge as a formidable and elite shinobi of our n. I have faith in you...",


    This encouragement came from Hikari''s heart, inspired by Hizashi''s difficult position simr to his own before transmigration here. As for whether Hizashi would take this advice to heart and manage to change his original strength level from the original series, and escape from his destiny, Hikari couldn''t be sure. But at that moment, he truly hoped his words would give Hizashi the push he needed to ovee his innate limitations of fate and rise above it.


    At that moment, Hiashi''s gaze towards Hikari got even kinder than before, now possibly seeing him not just as a fellow n member, full of potential but as someone truly close to him.


    This shift was brought about after observing how Hikari handled the sparring session with his brother ¡ª treating Hizashi with care and respect, despite the gap in their branch statuses, and even offering a hand to help him up after their bout without any pretense alongside some words of consolidation that he couldn''t hear but were sincere judging by the expression on both of their faces.


    The Patriarch, meanwhile, caught off guard by what he overheard thanks to his sharp hearing, gave Hikari a look filled with a mix of surprise and newfound respect.


    It was unexpected for him to witness Hikari offering such mature and insightful advice to Hizashi, echoing sentiments he himself held and often expressed.


    This moment seemed to deepen the Patriarch''s appreciation for Hikari, recognizing in him qualities that went beyond mere talent and potential, hinting at a depth of character that wasmendable and rare.


    As Hikari and Hiashi squared off, the air in the dojo seemed to thicken with anticipation. Both Hyuga heirs stood ready, Byakugan activated to its fullest, each assuming the formidable Eight Trigrams 64-Palms stance.


    The duel unfolded with intense exchanges, eachbatant showcasing the pinnacle of Hyuga taijutsu. Every strike, every deflection, was executed with utmost skill, making it impossible to predict the oue.


    As the fight dragged on, Hiashi''s naturally more developed body and chakra due to age and fighting experience began to tip the scales. Despite the ferocity of Hikari''s assault, Hiashi managed his energy more effectively, allowing him to endure the exhaustive battle, and strike decisively when the opportunity presented itself.


    In the end, it was Hiashi who emerged victorious, though not without effort and visible exhaustion. The shock was evident in his eyes ¡ª he had not anticipated such a level of challenge from Hikari, due to his age, despite him also being from the Main Branch family.


    Hizashi, having returned to the sidelines after his own bout with Hikari, watched in disbelief as his brother was pushed so hard.


    The Patriarch, observing the match with a discerning eye, was slightly surprised by the oue, but his reaction was more reservedpared to the astonishment shown by Hiashi and Hizashi.


    After their intense sparring session, Hikari and Hiashi exchanged a few respectful words, acknowledging each other''s strengths and the hard-fought battle they had just endured, even bumping fists together in a friendly manner.


    And eventually, after the entire training session inside the dojo finished for the day they all parted ways in a respectful and traditional, but sincerely must closer manner than before.


    Hikari soon also took his leave from the Patriarch''s residence, contemting the day''s events and his own capabilities at the present date.


    On his way home, Hikari couldn''t help but reflect on his performance. He recognized Hiashi''s strength as akin to that of a peak Chunin, while he himself possessed the strength of an early Chunin.


    Therefore he reasoned that Hiashi probably purposefully didn''t use some of the strongest techniques, from his lineage, like the ''Twin Lion Fist'' against him this time around due to the vast difference in age, he only used basic Gentle Fist.


    No official team from Konoha has been dispatched to test him and evaluate Hikari''s abilities by this point in time.


    Given the unique structure and needs of each n within Konoha, it wasmon for arge chunk of n shinobi to focus solely on internal security and the preservation of their n''s lifeblood, never officially partaking in vige missions, Anbu, or other simr organizations.


    To facilitate this bnce, Konoha developed a system wherein special shinobi teams were dispatched to ns to evaluate the skills of n members who chose this path. This evaluation process was designed to assess each individual''s abilities and assign them an appropriate shinobi rank, ensuring that their strength was formally recognized by Konoha.


    The agreement between Konoha and its ns, allowing special shinobi teams to evaluate n members who focused on internal security, served a dual purpose.


    For Konoha, it was a strategic move that allowed the vige leadership, particrly the Hokage, to maintain an updated and detailed understanding of the strengths and capabilities within each n.


    This was crucial for preparing and nning in times of war, ensuring that Konoha could effectively mobilize its forces and utilize the unique abilities of its diverse ns.


    On the other side, the ns agreed to this arrangement as it provided formal recognition of their members'' skills and contributions, even if those members chose not to participate in standard vige missions.


    This recognition was significant, albeit less valuable than the information the Hokage gained regarding the ns'' potential forbat and defense.


    Nevertheless, thispromise was established during the founding of Konoha, rooted in a mutual understanding of its importance for the vige''s collective security.


    No n dared to misrepresent their capabilities or withhold information about their members, as doing so could jeopardize their standing within Konoha and potentially lead to consequences if discovered.


    This system of evaluation and recognition thus reinforced the delicate bnce of trust and cooperation that underpinned the rtionship between Konoha and its ns.


    Hikari, though still too young to be part of this evaluation process, was acutely aware of its implications. Understanding that the Hokage''s interest in this system was more about gathering intelligence than rewarding the ns, Hikari saw it as another facet of theplex dynamics within Konoha.


    This insight into how power and information were managed within the vige added anotheryer to his understanding of the world he lived in and the role he was to y within it.

 33. Feeling The Side Branch’s Situation

    33. Feeling The Side Branch¡¯s Situation


    As Hikari transitioned from the Main Branch''s residential area, known for its grandeur and prestige, to multiple timesrger but less illustrious Side Branch residential area within the Hyugapound, the shift was obvious.


    The Main Branch homes, characterized by their grand architecture and spotless gardens, stood as a testament to the members'' elite status within the n.


    These buildings, with their imposing presence, were meticulously maintained, embodying the pride and distinction of the Main Branch lineage.


    Venturing further, the environment transformed as Hikari entered the Side Branch domain. Here, the residences were modest and densely packed, a contrast to the spacious elegance of the Main Branch.


    This area buzzed with activity, a vibrantmunity pulse that was absent in the more reserved Main Branch quarters.


    As Hikari walked through thepound, his distinctive features and attire drew attention.


    Despite the passage of three years, his appearance was notably consistent with his younger self, marked by the same striking short, messy blue hair that seemed to catch the light in a unique way, and his white eyes that held a depth beyond his years.


    His growth was evident not just in stature but in the poise with which he carried himself.


    Now, donned in formal dark blue robes, his attire elevated his presence, blending the traditional elegance of the Hyuga with a touch of his personal style.


    The robes, carefully chosen for the previous asion, signified his increasing importance within the n and his adherence to its customs, while also hinting at his unique identity within the traditional framework.


    As Hikari walked through the densely popted areas of the Side Branch toward his destination, his passage sparked a mix of surprise and reverence among its residents.


    The sight of him, a Main Branch member with an ''unmarked'' forehead, navigating thenes of the Side Branch, was not amon urrence.


    Then the realization that this young figure, devoid of the Cursed Seal, was none other than Hikari Hyuga caused a stir among those he passed by.


    Recognizing him, some children ying in the area hastily cleared a path, under the warnings of their parents, while adults and youngsters alike paused to offer salutations, addressing him with a respectful "Hikari-sama."


    This level of deference was not solely due to his lineage or his clean forehead; it stemmed from the growing awareness of Hikari''s distinct stance within the n dynamics.


    Unlike his parents, who were known for their advocacy for the Side Branch members, Hikari had also demonstrated his willingness to employ the Cursed Seal Command, marking a departure from his parents'' legacy.


    This action,bined with his undeniable talent, created aplex mixture of fear and respect towards him.


    In the eyes of many within the Side Branch, Hikari''s current status and power were now only overshadowed by Hiashi, the heir apparent to the patriarchal title and the ''face'' of the n''s future.


    As the designated future Third Elder, Hikari''s rapid ascent was also boosted by unprecedented support from the Elder Council and the Main Branch, whovished him with resources and privileges to ensure his sess while promoting him as a genius of historical significance inside the n.


    As Hikari made his way toward the ''Hyuga Medical Research Institute'' for his advanced medical jutsu sses, for the first time, he walked through the busy streets within thepound''s Side Branch area where that faculty was established in the first ce.


    The Side Branch members living here were different from those Hikari encountered within the Main Branch living spaces, where they mostly served as servants, attendants, or workers for the various Main Lineage estates and their businesses directly. The majority of them led fully civilian lives, many without even activating their Byakugan.


    However, there were also still some trained ''bodyguards'' affiliated with the Main Lineages residing within the Main Branch areas as well. Their family served various specific Main Linages for generations. They were the only two groups living there in Hikari''s perception.


    Hikari was also mostly familiar with those two groups of Side Branch members until today when he ventured this deeply into the Side Branch members'' own majority living area.


    It was different here, as here, the Side Branch members, unlike the servants and attendants in the Main Branch quarters, lived with significantly more independence and ''dignity in his opinion. This section of the n was poptedrgely by trained fighters and shinobi in supporting roles, all of whom had activated their Byakugan and had some advanced skills.


    Many among them also served in various capacities within the vige, reflecting their broader contribution to both the n and Konoha. This contribution awarded them a degree of autonomy and ''respect'' not afforded to their counterparts in domestic servitude under the Main Branch families, due to their higher ''value'' and the need of the Hyuga n to consider Konoha''s face at least a little bit while dealing with them, recently more and more so too.


    The trained members of the Side Branch were vital to the n''s martial strength and the vige''s defenses, which naturally elevated their status and granted them more freedom. They were not subject to the stringent punishments meted out for minor errors by the Main Branch ''masters''. But, it still didn''t mean they werepletely spared from it either.


    And not only the Cursed Seal activation but also the existence of private n ''prisons'' and the implementation of internal nws for disciplining members were aspects of n autonomy that Konoha''s leadership couldn''t easily influence or challenge.


    Each major n, including the Hyuga, had developed its own set of rules and penalties to deal with internal matters, ensuring that discipline and order were maintained within their ranks without external interference.


    This system allowed ns to enforce their traditions and standards, handling everything from minor infractions to more serious offenses in ways that reflected their unique values and histories.


    The Side Branch members who had betrayed Hikari''s parents faced such a strict punishment within the n''s private prison. This action sent a clear message about the consequences of disloyalty and betrayal toward the Main Branch.


    During this time, Hikari observed the nuanced atmosphere within the Side Branch area, noticeably affected by the nearing end of the Second Shinobi World War.


    Many Side Branch shinobi were returning home, bearing the scars and disabilities of war. It was unprecedented in the n''s history for such a significant portion of the Side Branch members, nearly half of them, to participate in the war, while the Main Branch members remained safely within thepound, not required to join the fight at any point of the war.


    This disparity created a subtle tension in the air as Hikari, a Main Branch member, passed through the area. Despite theck of overt disrespect¡ªno Side Branch member would dare show such insubordination¡ªtheir inner feelings were nheless perceptible to Hikari.


    His ability to read microexpressions allowed him to detect the undercurrents of discontent and perhaps a sense of injustice among the Side Branch members, who bore the physical costs of war while the Main Branch remained fully untouched by its direct consequences.


    Moreover, the financialpensation provided to the Hyuga n by Konoha and the Daimyo for sending troops into the war primarily benefitted the Main Branch.


    The Hyuga Council, consisting of Main Branch Elders who oversaw the n''s budget and finances, received the lion''s share of thispensation, despite not contributing personnel to the war effort.


    This disparity extended to peacetime operations as well; the Council took a significant portion of the earnings from missionspleted by Side Branch members.


    The procedure was such that mission sries were first sent to the Council from the Hokage''s office, allowing them to take their cut before passing the remainder to the Side Branch members who performed the missions.


    However, Hikari actually saw nothing wrong with the practice of the Main Branch controlling the n''s finances and decision-making, viewing it as justified since the n''s bloodline, resources, and training all elevated the Side Branch members, allowing them to be valuable shinobi, receiving considerable higher payouts than civilian shinobi for example.


    They also enjoyed the n''s protection and many other hidden social services within the n premises thate exactly from that joint n''s budget and weren''t obvious at first.


    He reasoned that the n''s investment in their development warranted a return through mission payouts and warpensations, which actually the Main Branch just happened to manage for some reason.


    However, even if it was not managed in that manner, the joint n budget would still need to exists like in all other major n''s in the Konoha due to obvious reasons. And it existed in fact, and it was also closely managed by their versions of Elder Councils and Patriarchs.


    In Hikari''s eyes, the distinction between Main and Side Branches was also likely a product of some secret historical agreements, suggesting that the current system was established for a reason, possibly for the n''s overall benefit.


    Otherwise, logically thinking, how could the main and side branch distinction evene about in the Hyuga n, if not some collective decision for such a system being made during historical times due to some strange mystery?


    After all, no one would brand themselves with that mark on the forehead willingly for some reason, the ancestors of the Side Branch must''ve also agreed to such practices in the past.

 34. The Hyuga Medical Research Institute

    34. The Hyuga Medical Research Institute


    As Hikari arrived at his destination, the ''Hyuga Medical Research Institute'' stood in front of him, marking a significant spot amid the Side Branch living area''s daily hustle and bustle.


    The location of the institute in the heart of the Side Branch area was no ident; it was a strategic choice, reflective of the Side Branch members'' dominance in the various roles of what would fall under the collective umbre of supporting and auxiliary-type shinobi force.


    The buildingbined the traditional Hyuga style with the practical needs of a medical center. Its entrance was highlighted by the n''s symbol, gracefully carved into the dark wood, showing the institute''s key role in the n''s health and wellness as well as research.


    Though not asrge or definitely fancy as some of the buildings in the Main Branch, the institute carried an air of quiet dignity. Its design includedrge windows to let in plenty of sunlight, making the inside feel weing and warm. The roof''s design reminded one of old temples adding a touch of sacredness appropriate for a ce aimed at healing and research.


    Around the building, meticulously kept gardens provided a serene backdrop, with medicinal herbs and nts interwoven into thendscape.


    This not only beautified the area but also served a practical purpose, as these nts were often used in the treatments and studies conducted within the institute.


    However, despite its serene surroundings and the diligent upkeep of its medicinal gardens, the air was heavy with the weight of the war''s toll on its people. The influx of those needing care added a sense of urgency to the daily workings of the institute.


    Side Branch members, bearing the physical and emotional scars of battle, entered in the hope of healing and support. Their presence, marked by bandages, support limbs, and the quiet strength with which they carried their wounds, painted a vivid picture of the war''s impact on the n during this period.


    The staff of the institute, consisting of medical ninjas and researchers, moved with a heightened sense of purpose, their faces set in concentration as they navigated the challenges of treatingplex injuries.


    Their dedication was evident in the way they tended to each patient, striving to provide not just physical healing but also emotional support, acknowledging the profound effects of war.


    Inside the ''Hyuga Medical Research Institute'', Hikari was set to attend a specialized workshop, one he had eagerly signed up for. This wasn''t just any ss; it was a focused study group dedicated to the art of healing battlefield injuries swiftly and efficiently.


    The scope of this training was deliberately narrow, concentrating on injuries that were severe but not to the extent that they required long-term or slow medical attention.


    These were wounds that could be realistically addressed in the heat of battle, allowing shinobi to return to action with minimal downtime, perfect for Hikari''s needs.


    Hikari''s motivation for joining was mainly about equipping himself with the knowledge to protect himself more effectively when the time came to join such battles in the future. He understood that the ability to quickly heal could be the difference between his victory and defeat, and even life and death. It was only one of the specialized programs offered here.


    As Hikari stepped into the building next, his arrival didn''t go unnoticed. Under the surprised gazes of many within the facility, he moved with a calm and noble-like demeanor that belied his young age.


    At just 6 years old, a Main Branch member wandering alone through this bastion of medical excellence was an umon sight. Yet, Hikari carried himself with an assurance thatmanded respect, his focus undeterred by the attention he attracted.


    The interior of the institute was soon revealed to him, segmented into specialized areas each dedicated to a different aspect of medical jutsu guidance and practical shinobi healthcare.


    There was an area focused on the study and cultivation of medicinal herbs and another devoted to pharmacological research, where Hyuga scientists and medical ninjas worked on developing new medicines and antidotes.


    Another significant section functioned as the Hyuga n''s own mini-hospital. This area was equipped to handle a wide range of injuries and ailments, allowing the n to treat many of its members without needing to seek assistance from Konoha''s main medical facilities.


    It was a testament to the institute''s capabilities that it was considered the second-best medical center in Konoha. Indeed, outside of the legendary, recently-crowned Sannin Tsunade''s own expertise, there was hardly a better ce in the vige for medical care.


    Recognizing the value of their services, the Hyuga n even extended their medical assistance to other ns, sending their skilled practitioners to treat those in need at their respective headquarters.


    Hikari''s exploration also revealed that the workshop he was about to join was just one among many advanced programs offered by the institute. Each program was designed to specialize in different facets of medical-shinobi-rted matters, catering to a wide range of interests.


    Among these, the practice and perfection of Chakra Scalpel Techniques also stood out, although Hikari wasn''t very interested in it. This area was dedicated to practitioners who honed their abilities to use chakra as a precise surgical tool.


    The training involved not just mastering the technique but also learning to minimize chakra consumption to promote efficient healing.


    This particr workshop took ce in a specialized surgical department, equipped with advanced equipment that facilitated a real-world application of these delicate surgeries, pushing the boundaries of medical ninjutsu in practical, life-saving scenarios.


    Anotherpartment focused on the Medical Genjutsu Application. Here, ninja medics were trained in the nuanced use of genjutsu for medical purposes, including pain management, and patient sedation, and as an integralponent of all psychological treatment strategies.


    This innovative approach demonstrated the n''s understanding and application of genjutsu beyond traditionalbat scenarios, showcasing a creative melding of ninjutsu disciplines for healing.


    Additionally, the institute ced a strong emphasis on ''Research and Innovation'', particrly among its more advanced students. This initiative encouraged the development of new medical techniques and remedies, with a special focus on leveraging the unique capabilities of the Byakugan.


    This area of study aimed not only to advance the n''s medical prowess but also to explore the full potential of their kekkei genkai in medical applications. The Byakugan, known for its extensive visual and perceptual abilities, offered untapped possibilities in diagnosing and treating illnesses, potentially revolutionizing medical ninjutsu.


    Amidst the bustling activity and the focused endeavors of the institute''s inhabitants, Hikari''s presence was an unusual yet intriguing anomaly. The fact that someone so young, from the esteemed Main Branch, had chosen to immerse himself in such rigorous and specialized training spoke volumes about his character and his ambitions.


    As Hikari Hyuga made his way into therge room designated for the advanced workshop on emergency battlefield healing, the atmosphere was charged with a focused intensity. This particr session, centered on quickly managing injuries on the battlefield, was of special interest to Hikari.


    The room was already filled with individuals, all of whom were significantly older than Hikari, who was just a 6-year-old. They were seated around the space, which was designed to facilitate both observation from experts and practical application.


    The room itself was expansive and well-equipped, with medical practice dummies arranged at intervals, each apanied by a set of medical tools and scrolls.


    Tables and benches were organized in ayout that allowed everyone a clear view of the demonstration area at the front, where instructors would showcase techniques and conduct simtions.


    Charts and diagrams detailing human anatomy and chakra points adorned the walls, serving as educational aids.


    Hikari''s entrance into this space was a moment of mild disruption, not due to anymotion but because of the recognition that followed him. Despite his youth, he was the sole Main Branch member among a group entirelyposed of older-than-him Side Branch members.


    Under other circumstances, a child of his age might have seemed misced among seasoned practitioners dedicated to mastering such a critical aspect of shinobi medicine.


    However, Hikari was no ordinary child; he was already known within the n as a prodigious talent, his dedication to advancing his skills evident in his choice to attend this workshop.


    As he walked in, the room''s upants turned their attention towards him. Realizing who he was, several immediately stood up, their actions a blend of surprise and deep respect. "Hikari-sama," they greeted him, using an honorific that acknowledged both his status within the Main Branch and the exceptional promise he held as a future leader and protector of the n.


    This respect was not merely due to his lineage but was a direct acknowledgment of his unique abilities and the maturity he disyed by choosing to engage in such advanced training at a young age.


    Hikari responded with a quiet nod, an acknowledgment of their greetings but also a signal of his desire to focus on the day''s lessons.


    Despite the differences in age and branch affiliation, his presence brought a unifying respect for the pursuit of knowledge and skill.


    As he found his seat among them, the room settled back into an anticipative silence, ready tomence with the workshop.


    Hikari understood that it was truly unusual for someone from the Main Branch, especially a kid his age, to dive deep into medical training.


    That''s why the real respect he got from everyone in the room didn''t surprise him. He knew he earned his spot in this advanced ss through hard work, not just because of who he was.


    Hikari had to demonstrate not just a theoretical understanding but a practical mastery of several key ninja skills.


    To get into this ss, Hikari had to pass tough tests. He needed to show he was really good at using Yang Release, which is important for healing quickly.


    His Byakugan had to be sharp enough to see very small details inside the body, which is super important for medical stuff.


    He also had to be great at controlling his chakra and know the Gentle Fist technique well. These skills were all must-haves to join this advanced training.


    Securing a ce in this advanced lecture series, therefore, was a clear indicator of Hikari''s exceptional abilities despite his tender age. He once again proved his reputation as a genius.


    As Hikari''s gaze wandered around the room, it paused, drawn to a girl who was also looking his way. She was slightly older than him, with medium-length, somewhat messy brown hair that fell to her small shoulders.


    Her light eyes, a hallmark of the Hyuga, looked back at him curiously. Her bangs were a bit longer than usual, draping over her forehead in a way that Hikari guessed was meant to conceal the Cursed Seal, a sign of her being a Side Branch member unlike himself.


    She was dressed in simple white robes, echoing the traditional Hyuga style, yet there was something about her appearance that stood out to Hikari. Her features were delicate and well-formed, showing a quiet grace even at her young age.


    The reason Hikari found himself looking at her a bit longer, in the first ce, was because she was the only one close to his age in the entire room. Everyone else was at least in their teens, making these two the youngest participants in the workshop.


    ''She has to be exceptionally talented to be epted into this ss while being so young...'', Hikari thought before retracting his gaze and just nodding toward her politely. After all, he did stare for too long, so he showed some manners.

 35. Hinome Hyuga and Hikari’s Observation

    35. Hinome Hyuga and Hikari¡¯s Observation


    Meanwhile, the anticipation in the room built, and the door opened once more to admit the official instructor of the workshop, apanied by her assistants.


    The instructor, a well-respected figure with an air of authority and deep knowledge of medical ninjutsu, stepped forward confidently.


    Her assistants, equally proficient, followed closely, wheeling in several carts. On these carts were human-like dolls, meticulously designed for medical practice, each equipped to simte various internal injuries and conditions for practical application.


    The room''s atmosphere shifted towards a more intense focus as the instructor began to speak. She introduced herself briefly but moved quickly onto the essence of the workshop: the practical application of battlefield healing techniques.


    As she outlined the day''s objectives, her assistants distributed the practice dolls among the participants, ensuring each had the tools needed for hands-on learning.


    The instructor exined the variety of internal problems that the participants would be working on. These ranged from internal bleeding and organ damage to moreplex issues like chakra pathway disruptions. She emphasized the importance of precision, control, and quick decision-making, skills that were critical for effective healing on the battlefield.


    As the exnations transitioned into practical demonstrations, everyone in the room activated their Byakugan. The distinctive veins around their eyes bulged as they concentrated, their gazes prating the practice dolls in front of them.


    The Byakugan''s unique ability to see through objects allowed them to observe the simted internal injuries, making it possible to apply their healing techniques more urately.


    The room was filled with quiet intensity as participants, guided by the instructor and her assistants, began to work on the dolls.


    They practiced directing their chakra with precision to heal the simted injuries, replicating the conditions they might face in an actual battle scenario.


    The instructor moved among them, offering advice, correcting techniques, and asionally demonstrating the correct way to address particrly tricky problems.


    This hands-on session was not just about learning new techniques; it was an opportunity for everyone, including Hikari, to refine their skills, enhance their understanding of medical ninjutsu, and prepare themselves for the realities of healing under pressure.


    The focused silence was asionally broken by soft murmurs of discussion or the instructor''s voice, but the prevailing atmosphere was one of deep concentration and the shared goal of mastering these life-saving skills.


    As Hikari focused on his own exercise, practicing precise chakra control and application on the practice doll, his Byakugan inadvertently swept across the room. His gazended on the girl he had noticed earlier.


    She was deeply engrossed in her task, her concentration palpable even from a distance. However, what caught Hikari''s attention was not her focus but the extraordinary chakra concentration and exertion around her Byakugan.


    ''It is very unusual for someone of this age to have such a powerful Byakugan... No, it is rare for Side Branch members to open it at this age at all... I guess she is probably around 8 years old since it is basically unheard of for Side Branch members, even geniuses to open it earlier, and her stature tells me that...'',


    ''Interesting... It is no wonder she got into this ss. But why medicine... Or is her Byakugan gically somewhat predisposed to be good at medical matters outside of other fighting or auxiliary roles...?", Hikari analyzed silently, his curiosity piqued.


    Meanwhile, the session moved forward with the participants deeply engrossed in their tasks, the room filled with a concentrated silence broken only by the asional guidance from the instructor or an assistant.


    Hikari, along with others, practiced various healing techniques on the human-like dolls, each simted injury providing a new challenge and learning opportunity.


    As the exercises grew moreplex, Hikari''s proficiency and understanding deepened, his Byakugan aiding him in visualizing and addressing the internal issues with precision.


    The girl, too, seemed to excel in her exercises, her focus unwavering as she skillfully maneuvered her chakra to heal the simted injuries.


    Her evident talent and dedication did not go unnoticed by the instructor, who offered her praise and encouragement, further highlighting her exceptional abilities.


    As the session neared its end, the participants began to wrap up their final exercises. The instructor gathered everyone for a closing discussion, summarizing the day''s lessons and emphasizing the importance of continuous practice and study.


    She congratted the group on their hard work and progress, encouraging them to apply what they had learned in real-world scenarios and to never stop seeking knowledge and improvement in their medical ninjutsu skills.


    As the day''s lessons wrapped up and the crowd began to filter out of the room, Hikari, amidst nning his departure, subtly caught a fleeting nce from the girl once again.


    As participants dispersed, with many heading towards additional sses offered within the expansive confines of the ''Hyuga Medical Research Institute'', Hikari noticed the girl preparing to join another lesson.


    Motivated by an inexplicable urge, he opted to secretly follow her progress from a distance instead of heading home.


    Positioning himself on a terrace close to her next ss, Hikari couldn''t fully understand why he feltpelled to observe her further.


    His deep interest in the Byakugan''s varied potential abilities¡ªhis drive toprehend his Kekkei Genkai more intimately¡ªseemed to guide his actions.


    The girl''s next session was notably more advanced than their earlier workshop, delving into the management of serious injuries and conditions requiring long-term care.


    His intrigue didn''t end with that ss. Hikari discovered she was enrolled in yet another, even more, advanced session.


    This course covered advanced Byakugan diagnostics, scientific research and development, and pharmacological mastery, areas that demanded a high level of expertise and understanding.


    Shocked by her participation in such a sophisticated ss, Hikari moved closer, drawn by a desire to witness her performance firsthand.


    From his closer vantage point, Hikari could see the girl''s Byakugan in action, its performance unwavering even after hours of intense use. This observation left him increasingly impressed.


    Her ability to maintain such a strong and effective use of her Byakugan, especially across varied and advanced medical fields, spoke volumes about her talent and dedication.


    After the final, most advanced lesson concluded, and the participants began to disperse, including the girl who remained oblivious to Hikari''s observation the entire time, Hikari made his move.


    The day had taken its toll on her, evident in her sore eyes and visible mental fatigue, yet she had remained dedicated throughout.


    As the room emptied, save for the instructors and the head professor handling the aftermath of the session, Hikari slid the door open and stepped inside like it was the most natural thing in the world.

 36. Hinome’s Value for Hikari’s Aspirations

    36. Hinome¡¯s Value for Hikari¡¯s Aspirations


    The professor, along with his assistants, seemed unphased by Hikari''s sudden appearance. It was clear they had been aware of his presence all along.


    "Greetings, young master, Hikari. You were observing our ss for quite some time very diligently. We are honored. But, are you interested in anyone specifically here, or are you considering enrolling here as well...?",


    The professor inquired, acknowledging Hikari''s extended observation politely while also signaling his respect and that it didn''t matter.


    The fact that Hikari had been noticed by nearly everyone in the room, despite their focus on variousplex tasks, underscored the impossibility of remaining unseen by anyone actively using their Byakugan, especially those at a certain level of proficiency.


    Yet, they had chosen not to call attention to him, respecting his identity and perhaps his reasons for being there.


    What intrigued Hikari the most, however, was that the girl, despite her advanced utilization of the Byakugan and the impressive control she had demonstrated throughout the day, was among the few who hadn''t noticed him at all. This discrepancy piqued his curiosity about her and her eyes to its limits.


    "Mr. Professor, you should have probably noticed that I''ve observed that girl for the entire time. Let''s be frank. I''m intrigued by her talents and eyes. Can you tell me all the information you know about her and what is her Byakugan''s specialty?", Hikari didn''t beat around the bush, his curiosity getting the better of him.


    Despite the vast age gap between him and the professor and his young age of just six years, Hikarimunicated from a position of equality, his demeanor noble, calm, andposed.


    The professor, recognizing the seriousness of Hikari''s inquiry and respecting his genuine interest, nodded slightly before responding, "Indeed, young master Hikari, your interest in her talents is well ced.",


    "She is a remarkable student, disying a level of proficiency with her Byakugan and medical ninjutsu that is rare for her age. Her name is Hinome. Like you, she has shown an exceptional talent that surpasses the expectations of our n at such a young age.", He replied honestly.


    "I understood most of what you said myself already. I''m asking you, is there anything even more specific and unique about her, especially her Byakugan, that you found out? After all, out of the entire room, she was amongst a few who didn''t notice me at all.",


    "What I''m asking you is, does her Byakugan''s ''specialty'' indeed live in only one area, so that''s why she didn''t notice me? Why did you all praise her when she connected her vision to these advanced microscopes...",


    Hikari continued, his inquiry taking on a more precise focus. As he spoke, his eyes wandered around the room, taking in the advanced equipment that facilitated the study and application of medical research and development, a testament to the surprising technological sophistication of this world Hikari already had a few spections about from his extensive readings of history.


    Hikari theorized that this was all connected to chakra, people got more intelligent, due to chakra, leading to the rising technological level, however, chakra also caused various wars.


    So, even though the technological level has risen considerably since the introduction of chakra, wars always prevented the world from rising from a sociological and political perspective too in a coherent manner of Hikari''s past life, leaving it in this unique and strange limbo that was hard to understand to someone who experienced living in Hikari''s past world.


    The professor listened intently, understanding the depth of Hikari''s question. With a thoughtful nod, he began to borate, "Ah, I see where your interest lies. Yes, Hinome''s Byakugan does exhibit a unique specialization.",


    "It''s quite rare, even within our n known for the diversity of abilities the Byakugan can manifest. Her focus and control allow her to engage in extremely detailed and micro-level medical analysis, something that traditional Byakugan users might not focus on developing to such an extent."


    He paused, choosing his words carefully, "This specialization, while providing her with unparalleled abilities in medical diagnosis and treatment, especially whenbined with advanced medical equipment like microscopes, doese with its trade-offs.",


    "Her concentration on micro-level details means her macro-level perception, such as noticing an entire room''s upants, might not be as instinctively broad as other Byakugan users. It''s not that she couldn''t notice you; her focus was simply directed elsewhere, honing in on the specific details relevant to her medical studies and practice.",


    The professor''s exnation shed light on Hinome''s unique gift and its implications, "The praise she received when she connected her vision with the advanced microscopes was due to her ability to integrate her Byakugan''s capabilities with our equipment, pushing the boundaries of what we previously thought possible in medical ninjutsu.",


    "This synergy between her kekkei genkai and our technology opens new avenues for research and treatment, representing a significant advancement in our field."


    "Ahh, so that''s it, I understand it now. Her own Byakugan is for some reason gically predisposed to act as some kind of a microscope on its own already, it is very good for small-scale vision. So once you connected and fused her vision with those advanced microscopes, you could achieve an even deeper level of vision than previously avable.",


    "Thanks for rifying this. It seems that the Hyuga n has tremendous talent at this time. Please keep your eye on her and help her develop her skills. You will have big support from me in the future...",


    Hikari concluded, a genuine smile gracing his face as he looked at the professor with a newfound ''kindness'' in his eyes.


    It was clear that this revtion had sparked something within him, a recognition of a valuable asset to his future ns.


    The professor, sensing the significance of Hikari''s interest and the potential it held for his research group, nodded in agreement, also feeling extremely lucky to get Hikari''s support at this time out of the blue.


    After all, this was the support of an already designated future Third Elder of the n. And unless some extremely strange development urred, a few yearster the matter would certainly materialize formally.


    "Certainly, young master Hikari. We are well aware of her potential and aremitted to nurturing her talents. Your interest and support are greatly appreciated. It''s heartening to see such unity and foresight within our n, especially from our younger members in positions."


    After exchanging a few more pleasantries with the professor, who was visibly thrilled to have his support andvished him with praises Hikari noticed he left the institute for real this time.


    As he did, he realized that his extended stay to observe Hinome had caused him to miss his scheduled fuinjutsu lessons for the day.


    Undisturbed by this turn of events, Hikari made his way back to the Main Branch area, heading home. Yet, his thoughts lingered on Hinome and the unique capabilities of her Byakugan he identally discovered today.


    His previous excitement about Hinome''s talent almost mirrored the exhration he felt upon discovering his own Byakugan''s specialty in observing natural energy yesterday. So, Hikari believed luck was on his side, drawing parallels between his eyes ''specialties'' and Hinome''s.


    He spected that while his Byakugan''s specialization could potentially elevate him even to the peak of the Kage level, at its best-case scenario, Hinome''s abilities might indirectly,theoretically enable him to break through, even further, to the Six Paths level, or better said y a huge part in that ''fate-defying'' quest, at the best case scenario as well.


    Hikari understood the magnitude of this potential breakthrough. From his knowledge, and even considering the various fanfictions he had read in a previous life, advancing to the ''Six Paths'' level always necessitated fundamental alterations at the bloodline, meaning cellr, and gic levels.


    There was no other direction. He always knew he would have to face that from the moment he was reborn into this world and truly realized his highest desired targets.


    To reach that level you need to change the fundamental ''hardware'' of your own body, as updating your ''software'', aka learning new jutsu, simply would not be enough anymore.


    Without such modifications, achieving that level of power seemedpletely unattainable to the realistic and almost fatalistic Hikari. He thought about these exact topics day and night in the past, as it was his prime driving motivation in life, and that is the only conclusion he got.


    However, despite Hikari''s daring ambitions and his willingness to challenge fate by even experimenting with his own body, he remained a rational and clear-headed individual.


    He approached his bold ideas with a practical mindset, understanding the enormity of the task ahead. Hikari was well aware that achieving his goals would require not only a deep scientific literacy but also time to gather the necessary resources, develop Hinome''s microscopic vision, and allow her scientific practical skills to mature, among other things. Hikari felt like she was the only assistant qualified to help him achieve his goals in the future.


    Therefore, years of preparations, gathering all the necessary ingredients, and waiting for other factors to align would, at a minimum, take another decade before he could even start to n more seriously about achieving a gic bloodline breakthrough akin to the desired closer to Otsutsuki ancestral level state, meaning, trying to ascend to the Six Paths level.


    Taking everything into ount, Hinome''s appearances just elerated his previous ns. But, for now, even the development of the theorized senjutsu-rted abilities that could theoretically elevate him to Kage level seemed distant and vague, not to mention ahead.


    Hikari remained grounded in the present, recognizing the long journey ahead and the need for patience and meticulous nning. He understood that rushing or acting impulsively could lead to failure or, worse, catastrophic consequences. leading to the copse of his dreams or even death. Not only from a failed experiment but from the rising vignce of other yers.


    Thus, Hikari did not n to take any immediate serious steps regarding Hinome or their potential coboration. Instead, he focused on keeping an eye on her,ying the groundwork, acquiring knowledge, and enhancing his current abilities while keeping tabs on the future.


    His approach was one of cautious optimism, tempered by the understanding that true power and breakthroughse from diligent study, careful experimentation, and the willingness to wait for the right moment to act. He knew that he couldn''t afford even a single misstep here.

 37. Chaotic Situation at the Medical Institute

    37. Chaotic Situation at the Medical Institute


    A month had swiftly passed, marked by the diligent continuation of Hikari''s training regimen. On this particr day, afterpleting his nned training activities, Hikari made his way to the Hyuga Medical Research Institute, where he had been attending a specialized ss over the past month.


    The routine of the ss had be a familiar part of his daily life, blending seamlessly with his ambitious training schedule.


    Yet, amidst the standard procedures of the day, Hikari''s attention was drawn to Hinome, who seemed noticeably less vibrant than usual.


    Hinome appeared visibly worn down; her usually alert eyes were now tinged with redness and framed by dark circles, suggesting fatigue and perhaps the burden of stress.


    Observing her closely, Hikari surmised that the recent conclusion of the Second Shinobi World War might be at the root of her exhaustion.


    The war''s end had brought back many nsmen to the vige, a significant number of them bearing the scars of battle. Consequently, the Hyuga Medical Research Institute found itself at the forefront of the effort to provide care for these returning warriors.


    With the influx of injured nsmen, the institute faced a pressing challenge: a shortage of personnel capable of managing the sudden increase in patients needing medical attention.


    In response to this critical situation, the institute had called upon those attending its sses, including students like Hinome, to assist the full-time hospital staff in treating patients.


    As the session concluded, Hinome, along with some of her ssmates, moved on to their next ss focused on healing more serious injuries that required longer healing times. Hikari, however, had a different agenda.


    He secretly approached the professor of the third ss, in a different part of the building next, the one dedicated to research and diagnostics, seeking to discuss Hinome''s progress. His interest in her development was driven by the unique capabilities of her Byakugan and its potential applications in his ns.


    To Hikari''s surprise, the conversation took an unexpected turn. The professor revealed that due to the institute''s decision to leverage Hinome''s talents in the second ss for treating real patients, she had been left with insufficient focus and energy for the third ss.


    This situation had hindered her ability to further refine her scientific skills and Byakugan''s microscopic vision, aspects Hikari deemed very critical for his long-term objectives.


    Hikari was very displeased with this revtion. This totally went against his own ns for Hinome''s development.


    Determined to address this issue, Hikari informed the professor that he intended to speak with the director of the institute directly.


    However, just as Hikari stopped outside the director''s office, he suddenly heard noisesing from somewhere else in the building.


    Quickly using his Byakugan to see what was going on, his face turned serious when he finally located the source of trouble. Without wasting a moment, he took off at top speed towards themotion.


    ***


    A few minutes before Hikari sensed the trouble, Hinome found herself in a challenging situation inside the medical institute. What was supposed to be a regr ss turned into an urgent call to action.


    Due to a shortage of medical personnel, Hinome and her fellow ssmates were pressed into service, joining the ranks of full-time medical shinobi and doctors to care for the injured returning from the war.


    Despite being an orphan of the war herself and being promised fairpensation for her efforts, Hinome hadn''t anticipated the heavy burden this responsibility would ce on her.


    Over the past few days, she had pushed herself to the limit, using her Byakugan''s special microscopic vision to treat various injuries.


    This constant strain led to visible signs of exhaustion¡ªher eyes were slightly reddish from overuse, her hair was messier than usual, and her overall appearance looked worn.


    She was in the middle of treating another Hyuga shinobi for an internal chakra injury, a task for which her unique vision proved incredibly useful.


    Her ability had caught the attention of the more seasoned professionals, who, recognizing its value, had increasingly relied on her to assist with various patients, unwilling to let her take a break.


    Just as she was adjusting to the rhythm of this intense workload, some assistant doctor approached her with a serious expression.


    He informed her that there was a special patient in need of her unique skills. This request,ing amidst her already taxing schedule, added a newyer of pressure.


    As Hinome and the other assistant doctor made their way to see the so-called ''urgent'' patient, Hinome''s initial sense of urgency faded when she realized the situation was far from the dire emergency she had braced herself for.


    Instead, they were met with a 14-year-old girl from the Main Branch, who had seemingly insisted on receiving immediate treatment for a minor sprain¡ªan injury she sustained during training.


    The girl appeared indifferent to the reality that the institute was currently overwhelmed with severely injured patients returning from the war.


    Her insistence on prioritizing her rtively minor injury over those in more critical condition struck Hinome as particrly selfish.


    The seasoned doctors swamped with the care of these more severe cases, had delegated the task to Hinome, believing her unique microscopic vision would be well-suited to identifying and treating the subtle intricacies of tendon injuries.


    While Hinome acknowledged the practicality of this decision, it did little to temper her growing frustration and resentment.


    Hinome''s disdain for the Main Branch had deepened in recent times, fueled by the loss of her parents¡ªmedical chunin who had perished in the war.


    She harbored a growing bitterness towards the elite jonin and jonin of the Main Branch, who, in her eyes, had avoided the dangers of the frontline, sending weaker and auxiliary Side Branch members in their stead.


    This practice, which seemed to treat Side Branch members as expendable, made Hinome''s grief for her parents even more acute,pounding her sense of injustice and istion.


    Faced with the task of treating the Main Branch girl, Hinome felt her anger simmering beneath the surface.


    The injustice of the situation, where her parents were sent to war due to the hierarchical structures within the n that favored Main Branch members, weighed heavily on her.


    If those with greaterbat prowess from the Main Branch had been deployed, perhaps her parents, and others like them, would not have been forced into such perilous positions.


    Despite these turbulent emotions, Hinome knew she had to suppress her feelings andply with the directive.


    The hierarchical nature of the Hyuga n left her little choice but to bow her head and follow orders, even when they came from those she viewed with disdain.


    "What are you all people crazy? What happened to your medical ethics? You want this little girl to treat me? Are you out of your mind?",


    The 14-year-old girl from the Main Branch named Akemi, surrounded by her Side Branch personal attendants, didn''t hold back her displeasure as she frowned and yelled loudly at Hinome and the assistant doctor who had brought her over.


    Her voice echoed through therge hall, filled with injured people from the war, drawing unwanted attention to the whole situation.


    Her outburst was typical of the pride and arrogance often associated with members of the Main Branch, especially those who had grown ustomed to being prioritized within the n.


    To her, the idea of being treated by someone as young as Hinome, particrly in such a high-pressure and chaotic environment, was uneptable. In her view, her status as a Main Branch member warranted the attention of a more experienced medical ninja no matter the timing.


    The girl''s public disy of indignation put Hinome in an even more difficult position. Not only was she grappling with her reservations and fatigue from overwork, but she now faced the added challenge of dealing with a snobbish patient who openly questioned herpetence and worth based solely on her age and looked like certainly wouldn''t be easy to deal with.


    The assistant doctor, caught off guard by the girl''s reaction, looked between Hinome and the irate patient, uncertain how to defuse the situation without escting tensions further.


    The hall, already heavy with the pain and fatigue of war''s aftermath, grew tense as other patients and medical staff turned their attention to the unfolding drama, already boiling from the anger inside due to the girl''s bratty behavior inside the hall full of really seriously injured and disabled people who just returned from the war this girl couldn''t possibly even imagine.


    However, despite the tense atmosphere, the medical assistant, through abination of constant persuasion and humility, finally managed to convince the Main Branch girl to ept Hinome''s treatment.


    The assistant emphasized Hinome''s exceptional talents and skills as a medical ninja, and how she was not just an ordinary medical ninja.


    Reluctantly, the girl agreed, though the atmosphere remained charged with her earlier outburst still hanging in the air.


    Hinome, for her part, had to suppress her feelings of disdain. She knew that at this point, she didn''t have any personal choice in the matter to disagree.


    With quiet resolve, Hinome approached the girl and crouched on the ground in front of her to assess and treat the sprained tendon.


    This act, while seemingly subservient, underscored the professionalism and dedication Hinome brought to her medical duties.


    Despite the humiliating posture she was forced to adopt, Hinome focused on the task at hand, applying her specialized Byakugan vision and medical knowledge to address the injury with the precision and care it required.


    However, the toll of the past few days'' relentless workload began to show. Hinome''s eyes, pushed to their limits over and over again, and her concentration, stretched thin by the constant demand for her unique skills, led to an unforeseenplication.


    While meticulously working on resolving some of the internal tendon clots with her Byakugan''s microscopic vision, it suddenly malfunctioned. Instead of healing, Hinome inadvertently aggravated the injury further.


    This mistake caused Akemi to experience a sudden, sharp pain. Reacting instinctively to the pain, Akemi yelled out and, in a sh of anger and reflex, stood up on her other leg and delivered a harsh p across Hinome''s face. Hinome was caught off guard, tumbling back onto the ground from the force of the blow.


    This incident immediately escted tensions within the room. Themotion drew the attention of everyone present, and the indignation among the Side Branch members, who had witnessed the scene unfold, reached a boiling point.


    The act of a Main Branch member physically assaulting Hinome, a young and dedicated medical ninja from the Side Branch who was already under immense pressure treating many of the more serious cases amongst themselves diligently during the past few days, struck a nerve.


    It also highlighted the deep-seated divisions and resentments within the Hyuga n, bringing them to the surface in a very public and confrontational manner this time around.


    For the Side Branch members present, this was an affront not only to Hinome but to all of them, igniting a collective outrage at the unfairness and injustice of the whole situation.


    Hinome, now on the ground, tried to process the sudden turn of events. The physical pain from the p was overshadowed by a mix of shock, embarrassment, and a deepening sense of injustice.


    Meanwhile, at this moment, Akemi''s actions and words escted the situation further. Far from showing any remorse for her reaction, she adopted a snobbish and aggrieved tone, as if she were the one wronged.


    "I see all of your expressions, bastards. You probably don''t think that my injury was very serious and needed to be taken care of at this time, right? Wrong. It is serious if I say that it is serious. It seems that you need to understand your ce better as members of the Side Branch. Look at what will happen to this little girl you all care so much now...", Her words dripped with entitlement and disdain, a clear reflection of the deep-seated prejudices.


    Her face twisted into a cruel sneer, and to the shock of everyone present, Akemi took another, even more drastic step.


    She activated the Cursed Seal Command on Hinome, who was already vulnerable on the ground.


    The sudden activation caused Hinome to writhe in agony, an act that sent a chilling message to everyone in the hall.


    Akemi had aplete disregard for the sacrifices and injuries suffered by the Side Branch members during the war.


    In her eyes, the natural order of things ced Main Branch members above their Side Branch counterparts, regardless of thetter''s contributions or sacrifices.


    Her actions were meant to quash any sense of rising dissent or resentment, enforcing a harsh lesson on the importance of submission and acknowledgment of Main-Branch supremacy during all times and ces, even ''special'' ones like today.


    Since activating the Cursed Seal Command on nearly a hundred Side Branch members inside the n would be a disastrous move both politically and logistically, Akemi saw Hinome as a means to make an example.


    Therefore, the decision to target Hinome wasn''t solely driven by the slight medical error that caused her temporary pain.


    From the moment Akemi entered the hall, she perceived hidden looks and expressions of resentment from nearly every Side Branch member present, including Hinome, probably caused by her presence there during this time.


    To Akemi, this undercurrent of dissatisfaction represented a direct challenge to the established hierarchy of the n¡ªa challenge she felt pelled'' to ''quash'' decisively as the Main Branch member.


    By choosing to enforce the Cursed Seal on Hinome, Akemi aimed to remind every Side Branch member of their ''ce'' within the n''s deeply ingrained social structure.


    "Stop what you are doing right now!", However, suddenly, themand, thoughing from the slightly childish voice of the 6-year-old Hikari, carried an unexpected weight.


    As he arrived on the scene, his presence immediatelymanded attention. Despite his young age, there was something about the frosty expression on his face and the aura he exuded that made many in the room feel intimidated.


    Hikari walked towards Akemi with resolute steps, his hands ced behind his back in a manner that subtly suggested he held a higher social standing than her.


    Akemi, taken aback by Hikari''s forceful entrance and themand in his voice, momentarily paused. The room, already tense from the confrontation and the painful spectacle of Hinome''s suffering under the Cursed Seal Command, now awaited Hikari''s next move.

 38. Another Challenge within The Main Branch

    38. Another Challenge within The Main Branch


    "Did you get the permission of your parents or your grandfather, the Fourth Elder, beforeing to run wild here like this? First, this is a hospital and a learning institution. It is not a ce where some useless ''vase'' like you can run amok.",


    "Since they said that they have no medical experts ready to spare for you and send you to the Fourth Estate, then you just should ept that rationally, instead of going all the way here to cause trouble with your stupid brain...",


    Hikari''s voice was cold and emotionless as he delivered his rebuke, his gaze fixed on Akemi with expressionless eyes.


    Akemi, upon recognizing the identity of the young speaker before her, instinctively ceased the use of the Cursed Seal Command on Hinome.


    The realization dawned on her that she was confronting Hikari, the future Third Elder, also known as the highest talent in the Hyuga n''s history.


    His potential and status were recognized and pushed by the entire Main Branch in a joint resolution, and even her grandfather and parents had repeatedly warned her to try and build the best possible rtionship with him and not to provoke him under any circumstances.


    The sudden halt in Akemi''s actions brought a wave of relief that swept through the room, palpably lifting the heavy atmosphere that had settled over the assembled crowd.


    Hinome, still on the ground and recovering from the acute pain inflicted by the Cursed Seal, turned her gaze weakly toward Hikari.


    In that moment of vulnerability, recognition dawned on her, this was not just any ssmate stepping in to defend her, but also the boy whose parents had once been heroes on the battlefield, heroes who had saved her own parents in a time of dire need during the start of the previous war, before both sets of parents also tragically lost their lives a few years ago.


    ''He''s truly kind just like his parents and doesn''t discriminate between branches...'', Hinome thought to herself, a wave of gratitude washing over her.


    Despite the humiliation and the physical pain she had endured, Hikari''s intervention had allowed her to salvage a sliver of dignity from the ordeal.


    After a moment of silence, during which Akemi managed to gather herposure, her wounded pride and offense at Hikari''s sharp rebuke stirred her to respond.


    Despite acknowledging Hikari''s higher status than her own, Akemi''s deeply ingrained sense of superiority as a Main Branch member wouldn''t allow her to remain silent.


    After a bit, Akemi managed to calm down and, feeling insulted by Hikari''s harsh words and being called a ''useless vase'' and essentially implied that she was ''stupid'', decided to speak up. Her pride as a Main Branch member wouldn''t let her stay quiet.


    "Okay, okay, it looks like Hikari-kun really ''likes'' the Side Branch, just like his family before him... I won''t make a scene in front of our ''legendary talent'' today, I''ll let it go this time. But you shouldn''t just throw insults around for no reason...",


    She shot back, implying that Hikari was wrong to defend Hinome, the girl on the ground, especially against another Main Branch member like herself.


    She also suggested that Hikari was being too idealistic, just like his parents, despite him having used the Cursed Seal Command against some Side Branch members before, which had made people in the Main Branch think differently of him.


    Overall, Akemi''s words were a mix of backing down and still poking at Hikari. After all, a part of her statement was vaguely aimed at trying to iste him from the rest of the Main Branch.


    "No, I''m not defending her because she is a Side Branch member, but because she is a very important talent already picked up and cultivated by me in secret. So, you essentially just attacked one of my people. And who said you can go just like that? Do you think attacking my people was this easy?",


    "I''m officially challenging you right now, and if you want to prove that you are not a vase and that calling you a vase was an insult instead of an objective fact, then ept this challenge from me, an 8 year younger boy than you, and fight openly right now...", Hikari''s voice was firm, his intention clear as he took a step closer to Akemi, his expression deadly serious.


    Hikari spoke truthfully; his concern wasn''t rooted in the mere fact that a Side Branch member was being punished, but in the potential harm to Hinome''s unique talent, particrly her eyes, which he deemed crucial for his future ns.


    The reckless use of the Cursed Seal Command, which was probably connected to her eyes in some way or another, stirred a deep, sudden anger in him, prompting his decision to confront and teach Akemi a lesson.


    However, Hikari believed that the rest of the higher-ups of the Main Branch, upon reflection, would see the wisdom in his current actions.


    The aftermath of the war had left many in the Side Branch grieving from losing family members or suffering from injuries after barelying back alive themselves.


    Hikari knew that the Fourth Elder, Akemi''s grandfather, had understood this delicate bnce.


    His silent eptance of theck of immediate medical attention for his granddaughter, who was slightly injured during training, in favor of many seriously injured members of the Side Branch, was a testament to a broader vision of the n''s higher-ups.


    There was no ce for childishness there.The Elders of the Hyuga n were all wise and strategic, not given to wasteful or sadistic uses of the Cursed Seal Command.


    Its activation was a serious matter, it didn''t happen ''every day'', and the purpose of using it isn''t so openly stated in front of everyone as Akemi did. If she wanted to teach them a lesson like she said, then it should not be done so openly,pletely stating your purpose upfront.


    In that way, you would only drive more hidden resentment against the Main Branch and resoluteness, and unity amongst the Side Branch themselves, instead of targeted broad fear.


    The way Akemi used the Cursed Seal Command was everything it shouldn''t be. It was rash, public, and excessive, unlike the careful and discreet way it''s usually handled by the senior Main Branch members, also in the right doses, after a period of calcted risk to reward.


    Hikari thought this mistake showed a big gap in what Akemi had learned about leadership and strategy from those before her. In his view, her actions showed she hadn''t been taught to think about the bigger picture or how her decisions affect the whole n.


    This was a lesson missed by her elders, and now it was causing problems. So, in Hikari''s opinion, they should even be thankful to him now that he was about to teach her a lesson in humility and life.


    Hinome, still on the ground and recovering from the pain of the Cursed Seal, listened with a mixture of shock and awe as Hikari stood up to Akemi on her behalf.


    His words, clear and authoritative, cut through the tension in the room. Hinome had never expected anyone, let alone Hikari¡ªa Main Branch member and someone she respected for his talent and integrity¡ªto defend her so openly and boldly right now.


    Additionally, as she listened to Hikari''s bold defense and challenge, her surprise was magnified by the revtion that she was considered one of "his people."


    This statement left her puzzled and curious. Why would Hikari, a member of the Main Branch and known for his exceptional talent, consider her, a Side Branch member, to be under his protection?


    The concept was foreign to her, given the n''s strict division and the usual indifference the Main Branch showed towards the Side Branch members.


    Her mind raced with questions. What interest could Hikari possibly have in her? Was it purely because of her medical ninjutsu abilities, or was there more to his actions than met the eye?


    The thought that Hikari had been secretly observing and valuing her progress was both ttering and bewildering. Until this moment, Hinome had feltrgely invisible within the n, her contributions unnoticed by the Main Branch.


    "Talent, haha? What kind of ''big talent'' could that little girl have after being so clumsy and failing to treat even the most basic injury for me? And what are you doing here in the first ce? Don''t tell me you are here for this girl, and you developed some childish feeling between you, haha...?",


    Akemi''sughter cut through the tension, her words dripping with sarcasm as she mocked Hikari. Her reaction made it clear she wasn''t taking his challenge or his defense of Hinome seriously.


    However, Akemi''s response, which Hikari found foolish, only irritated him further on the inside. Despite this, he maintained hisposure and replied with a calm and icy exterior,


    "Okay, then since you don''t seem to ept my challenge, you are dismissed from here. And don''t make me see you around here again. I won''t wait for you to formally agree to my challenge to teach you a lesson at that time.",


    "Also, from now on, I want everyone here to spread the word that Akemi of the Main Fourth Lineage is a useless vase, who can only go against defenseless individuals with Cursed Seal Commands, not even her power, and chooses to deflect when facing the prospect of going against me, an 8-year-old younger genius from the Main Branch...",


    As he moved past Akemi toward Hinome''s position, his gestures exaggeratedly ''ejecting'' her from the scene, his action clearly asserting dismissingpletely and establishing authority over Akemo not leaving her any face, something that was truly rare and provocative among their branch. It was obvious that he just wanted her to formally ept the fight or strike first.


    Akemi''s initial amusement vanished instantly, reced by a re of anger at Hikari''s biting words. The dismissive tone, the challenge to herpetence, and the public humiliation ignited a fire within her.


    Her pride as a Main Branch member and her personal dignity had been called into question, and the suggestion that she was a ''useless vase'' was more than she could bear in silence.


    Her face reddened, a mix of anger and defiance shing in her eyes as she retorted, "Fine! I ept your challenge, Hikari. But don''t you dare regret itter! You think you can just insult me and get away with it? I''ll show you that I''m not someone to be dismissed so lightly.",


    Akemi''s voice carried a sharp edge, her words heavy with the promise of retribution. At that moment, any semnce ofposure was reced by a need to defend her honor and prove herself against Hikari''s usations and keep ''face''. The idea of backing down was no longer an option; epting the challenge was the only way to restore her standing back.

 39. Another Victory On The Record for Hikari

    39. Another Victory On The Record for Hikari


    After receiving Akemi''s formal eptance of his challenge, Hikari didn''t waste a moment. So with a faint nod acknowledging her agreement, and opening his Byakugan,


    He immediately sprang into action with his small frame, stunning everyone present near the scene and causing them to move away quickly from the two.


    Hinome was now positioned right behind him, however, and also watched him in shock and awe, and a concerned expression on her face.


    Positioning himself in a practiced stance, Hikari prepared to unleash his unique adaptation of amon Hyuga n technique, which he had named the ''Wind Vacuum st Salvo''.


    Executing this technique involved channeling his refined Wind Release chakra throughout his entire upper body.


    With precise control, Hikari thrust his palms forward,unching a bombardment of pressurized Wind Release chakra.


    This wasn''t just a simple release of energy; the technique harnessed the wind picked up from the air, amplifying its force as it raced towards its target.


    Hikari knew he had to start strong because being 8 years younger than Akemi was a big deal. He wasn''t sure how this fight would go since a lot depended on how talented among the Main Branch Akemi was. He didn''t have enough information about her level of training.


    Akemi''s eyes widened in surprise when she saw Hikari use a technique she recognized but with a unique twist.


    Caught off guard and facing the wide st radius of the technique, she had no choice but to push her Byakugan to its limits, all the while ignoring the pain from her current injury.


    She still had full mobility, as the injury wasn''t allthat serious, albeit it was somewhat painful to fight for her now.


    She quickly used the Gentle Fist technique, a fundamental Hyugabat style, to break apart the iing chakra and prevent it from hitting her.


    This move required her to exert more effort than she had anticipated, especially to counter such a powerful and unexpected attack.


    While Akemi was busy defending against the Wind Vacuum st Salvo, Hikari didn''t waste any time. He moved in close to her, attempting tond a hit.


    Akemi managed to block him, but Hikari''s swift actions gave him a slight advantage in their exchange.


    From a distance, Hinome watched the confrontation with a mix of shock and admiration. The sight of Hikari, who was two years younger than her, engaging in such a high-level battle with Akemi, was unlike anything she had ever witnessed.


    The fluid movements, the precise use of chakra, and the strategic execution of techniques left her awestruck.


    As the battle between Hikari and Akemi unfolded with both attempting to seal each other''s tenketsu points, it became clear that Akemi was starting to gain the upper hand.


    The Side Branch members and Hinome watched anxiously as the exchange of Gentle Fist techniques progressed.


    Despite Hikari''s skill and determination, the eight-year difference in their ages, along with disparities in body stature, chakra volume, and skill proficiency, began to tilt the fight in Akemi''s favor. The bout, stretching over a few intense minutes, seemed to push Hikari to his limits.


    However, suddenly, just as Akemi''s next attack was poised to hit Hikari, and perhaps finish him off, it inexplicably stopped, freezing her motion just inches from him.


    Seizing this, Hikari gathered all his strength and speed, channeling his Wind Release chakra into the most powerful palm strike he could manage.


    The strikended squarely on Akemi''s chest, impacting her organs with such force that it sent her flying back several meters.


    Her eyes widened in shock as she coughed up blood, finally crashing into a wall and falling unconscious.


    Hikari, panting heavily from the exertion, felt a wave of relief wash over him. The momentary pause in Akemi''s attack, which had provided him the opening he needed, was not mere chance.


    Hikari had previously discreetly utilized Yin Release chakra, slowly during the exchange, a method he started learning from Takumi, in its most basic form.


    This subtle application was intended to disrupt Akemi''s cognitive functions eventually, creating a brief window of vulnerability.


    As Akemiy unconscious, the onlookers, including the Side Branch members and Hinome, were left in awe of the fight''s dramatic conclusion.


    As Akemi''s attendants rushed to her aid, probably carrying her back home for recovery, Hikari took a moment to reflect on the battle.


    It had been a swift but intense sh, and in the few seconds following its conclusion, he considered what had transpired.


    ''This was much harder to use in battles than I thought. It seems that I have a long way to go before getting closer to Takumi''s level... This time I was lucky that this girl looked like she virtually had no serious fighting experience, and that''s why I managed to trick her with that primitive form. And she should also be on the more mediocre side of the talent among the Main Branch. She is a middle Chunin at most, whereas I am thete Chunin at most now...'',


    Hikari didn''t enter the battle recklessly; his recent progress in strength had given him confidence in his ability to at least match, if not best, an opponent like her.


    Knowing he was significantly younger, he understood that even a draw would not tarnish his reputation. However, Hikari had aimed for a decisive victory, not just for the sake of winning, but to make asting impression on Hinome, who had been observing the entire event.


    As the dust settled and Akemi was taken away, everyone around breathed a sigh of relief. From what Hikari could tell, the actions he took today might have temporarily eased some of the tension and resentment these Side Branch members felt towards the Main Branch, stirred up by Akemi''s behavior.


    Over centuries, the Side Branch members had, through generations of indoctrination, graduallye to ept their subordinate identity within the Hyuga n, with some even developing a kind of ''Stockholm Syndrome''¡ªa psychological bond with their oppressors.


    As a result, those among the Side Branch who harbored inward resentment towards the Main Branch were exceedingly rare.


    However, the recent war and its aftermath had subtly shifted these dynamics, creating an undercurrent of discontent that had not been as pronounced before.


    And Akemi''s decision to use the Cursed Seal Command, especially at such a sensitive time, was, in Hikari''s view, not just a personal error in judgment but also a broad strategic blunder.


    It underscored ack of understanding of the current mood among the Side Branch members and a disregard for the potential consequences of her actions on the n''s internal harmony and unity.


    In Hikari''s opinion, the Cursed Seal was supposed to and meant to be used to make the n more hierarchical and unified, not the opposite.


    However, Hikari''s focus wasn''t on the broader n dynamics at that moment, nor was it on the reactions of the other Side Branch members and relived tension. His attention was solely on Hinome, who had managed to stand up, though still appearing weak from the ordeal.


    Under the surprised gaze of those around, Hikari approached Hinome with a concern that hadn''t been evident in his demeanor up until that point,


    "Do you need my support? Can you walk on your own? Let''s go somewhere and talk. You are probably curious about why I''ve said that I''ve been watching and supporting you. Let''s go...", He said, his voice carrying a mix ofmand and ''genuine'' concern.


    Hinome, still feeling the aftershocks of the confrontation, the pain from the Cursed Seal, and now the unexpected defense from Hikari, found herself at a loss for words. Despite the turmoil, Hikari''s offer to talk and exin his actions sparked a curiosity in her. Her response was soft, a reflection of her current state, "No, I can walk alone. I will follow you..."


    Hikari nodded in understanding and led the way to a secluded terrace nearby, which he had spotted with his Byakugan. The terrace, equipped with benches, would provide Hinome a ce to sit down and rest.


    The walk to the terrace was silent, filled with unspoken questions and anticipations about the conversation toe.


    Upon arriving, Hinome gratefully took a seat on one of the benches, her posture reflecting the physical and emotional toll the day had taken on her.


    Hikari, meanwhile, remained standing for a moment, scanning the area with his Byakugan to ensure privacy and security before joining her.

 40. The First Conversation With Hinome

    40. The First Conversation With Hinome


    "Are you feeling better now?", Hikari asked, surprisingly not diving straight into the reasons behind his previous actions.


    "Yeah, I''m better now, Hikari... sama... Thank you for your concern. And also thank you for helping me this time. And I am sorry I had to bother you in such a way...", Hinome responded, her voiceced with a mix of relief and apology.


    "It''s good that you''re feeling better. However, you should also rest up at home for a few days. Also, there''s no need to say thank you for all of this. Instead, if you truly feel thankful, I have some ideas about ways for you to repay my help if you are up for it...", Hikari replied directly.


    Hinome, feeling a mix of eagerness to reciprocate Hikari''s assistance and confusion about how she could be of help to someone of his status and strength, replied with a touch of uncertainty, "I would be d to help you, Hikari-sama, just say if there is anything I can do."


    "I won''t beat around the bush then. First, it''s true that I really noticed your talent quite a while ago, and I''ve been secretly keeping tabs on your progress. I''ve even discussed with your professor in the third ss various ways I could support you. I noticed your talent a month ago during our first meeting when I joined that ss we saw each other in for the first time.",


    "I''m mostly fascinated by your unique Byakugan vision ability of microscopic nature. I think I will need your help in the future when I officially be the Third Elder of the n. You are crucial for some of my very important ns.",


    "You might not realize it, but your unique ability is truly precious, and allowing it to develop fully would benefit not just me and my lineage, but the entire n...", Hikari spoke with sincerity and directness that underscored the importance.


    ''So, is that why the professor and his team were so polite to me and gave so much attention to my matters during those scientific workshops...'',


    ''I didn''t expect to be kept in the dark like this... But it doesn''t feel bad...'', Hinome found herself pondering after hearing Hikari''s straightforward exnation.


    Choosing to trust Hikari felt natural to Hinome, especially since the professor had also often mentioned how rare and valuable her ability was for the scientific field in general. Being kept in the dark about Hikari''s involvement didn''t bother her as much as she would have thought.


    "Then what expectations do you exactly have for me?", Hinome asked, her curiosity piqued by Hikari''s acknowledgment of her talent and his stated intentions.


    "Nothing special, for now, you just stay under the guidance of that professor and raise your scientific proficiency level. That area will be key in how you can help me. As for other medical jutsu areas, use them only as secondary interests.",


    "Believe me, there are many talented medical ninjas in this n and the vige, however, there are not many who are experts in scientific research.",


    "If you''re eager to help your n and help as many people as possible in the future, then it makes sense to focus on this field. I will talk to the director of this institute, who is rted to the Sixth Elder, to ensure you''re allowed to develop fully and to prevent situations like today from happening again. I will also pay for all your expenses...",


    "When I officially be the Third Elder in six years, if your skills are up for the task, you are going to be my main assistant. And your sry at that time won''t be under the director of this institute.",


    "I n to open my own scientific researchb at that time for the collective betterment of our n and, to be honest, also to try and improve my own ability through some daring and bold ideas I have...",


    Hikari added, outlining a future that not only included Hinome in a pivotal role but also detailed his ambition for leveraging scientific research to advance the n and himself.


    Hinome was a little surprised by Hikari''s statement, especially the part about her future sry not being under the director of this institute.


    She knew the director was the brother of the Sixth Elder and was recognized as one of the wealthiest members of the entire n.


    The notion that her financialpensation would bepetitive with, or even surpass, that of someone of such high status within the Hyuga n showed the serious investment Hikari was willing to make in her and her abilities.


    After her parents died, fulfilling their wishes for her to live well became Hinome''s primary motivation.


    Leveraging her early exposure to medical knowledge and the unique microscopic vision of her Byakugan, she ambitiously enrolled in all three advanced workshops offered at the institute.


    Hinome was already nning for her future livelihood, mindful of the time when the vige and n''s mary support, extended to her as an orphan of war heroes, would cease.


    Hikari''s offer, therefore, arrived at a pivotal moment for Hinome. His words, charged with sincerity and the evident respect he had for her abilities, resonated deeply with her.


    The respect she felt was further cemented by her parents'' positive remarks about Hikari''s parents, his act of saving her today, and the mention of a high sry.


    Even if the eventualpensation didn''t reach the lofty figures Hikari hinted at, it would still be very high judging by Hikari''s future status.


    This, coupled with Hikari''s evident belief in her potential, made her more easily agree to his proposal.


    The suggestion to prioritize scientific research over direct medical jutsu and healing wasn''t as big a leap for Hinome as it might have been before the recent events.


    The pressure she faced in thest few days after being pressured to heal that many people, one after another, day after day, leading to her fragile and fatigued state, culminating in the attack by the Main Branch girl, had left a profound impact on her.


    Also, the tragic fate of her parents as medical ninjas who lost their lives on the frontline deeply influenced Hinome''s perspective on her future role within the n and the wider ninja world.


    This personal history had imbued her with a strong desire to help others, a hallmark of her pursuit of medical knowledge.


    However, it also served as a clear reminder of the dangers and sacrifices inherent in the life of a medical ninja actively engaged inbat situations.


    Hikari''s proposal offered apelling alternative that aligned with her evolving outlook. By focusing on bing a scientific professional, Hinome saw a path where she could contribute significantly to the well-being of others without exposing herself to dangers.


    However, just before Hinome could voice her agreement, Hikari began to speak again. He realized that beingpletely upfront about what her future role entailed was crucial.


    It was better for her to understand everything upfront rather than be surprisedter on.


    Hikari also recognized that enhancing her skills was only part of the preparation; shaping her mindset and outlook on life was equally important.


    The path ahead, involving certain experiments and research needed to achieve his goals, might not always align with conventional ''moral codes'' mildly put.


    Hikari valued results and believed that achieving his objectives might require actions that others could view as morally ambiguous.


    He saw power as the ultimate means to happiness and safety and expected Hinome, as his future first and main assistant, to share or at least understand his perspective. Therefore, Hikari''s next shift in demeanor brought a sudden gravity to the conversation.

 41. Revealing The Dark Nature of The World

    41. Revealing The Dark Nature of The World


    "Think about it more carefully. I want to be honest with you. If you agree to work with me in the future, some of the steps or experiments we might need to take for some of my nned research certainly might go against the medical ethics of you or your parents, for example, and against the general societal norms.",


    "However, I want to remind you again that I didn''t save you out of my kindness today, or that I didn''t have anything better to do. I saved you because of your potential and value for my ns. If you disagree, then you are irrelevant to me, and who will save you in the future if such a situation happens again?",


    "Could that girl, or some other Main Branch member, randomly target you again for a slight mistake? What would happen to your brain at that time if the Cursed Seal Comman stayed activated for much longer? I''m not saying all this to be mean but to make you understand that power is everything in this world.",


    As Hikari spoke these words, his demeanor was calm yet intense, his gaze fixed on Hinome with unwavering seriousness.


    Hikari''s expression softened slightly when mentioning the potential dangers Hinome could face without his protection, not out of pity, but as a stark reminder of the harsh realities of their world.


    "And if you promise to follow me from now on, I promise that I will help you get more power and not find yourself in such a situation ever again, and rise to the top of the ninja world alongside me.",


    "Think everything through. You have to rely only on yourself in this world at the end of the day. And on our joint research journey, we will share the information toward power needed for that goal together.",


    However, when he talked about the potential vitions of medical ethics and societal norms, his eyes betrayed a flicker of resolve, indicating his willingness to push boundaries for the sake of greater achievements.


    This was not a decision he took lightly, but a calcted risk he believed was necessary for progress and power. His words were spoken with a conviction that resonated in the quiet of their secluded meeting spot.


    It was a moment of honesty, with Hikariying bare the challenges and rewards thaty ahead, should she choose to join him.


    As Hinome listened to Hikari, she thought deeply about what he was saying. Hikari''s straight talk made her see that maybe seeking power and strength, even if it meant bending some rules, wasn''t such a bad idea.


    What had happened to her parents, who were sent to the front lines and died, without any say in the matter, not controlling their own destinies simr to what also happened to her today and recently, which she was also powerless to resist, made her question the beliefs she grew up with¡ªabout always doing good and helping others without expecting anything in return using her medical knowledge.


    Since the loss of her parents, Hinome had learned to fend for herself. Hikari''s insistence on self-reliance also resonated with her life lessons deeply.


    So, when Hikari finished speaking, Hinome paused to gather her thoughts before responding. Her voice was firmer now, a sign of her newfound resolve.


    "I''ve thought about it...", She said, "I see what you''re saying, and the risks involved. But after everything I went through when and after losing my parents, I see that sticking to the old ways isn''t enough. If being with you means I won''t be helpless again, then I''m in. I''m ready to follow you and learn from you as well...",


    While dering this, she felt that it wasn''t just agreeing to work with Hikari, but that she was also choosing a new path that promised her strength, independence, and the chance to make a difference in a new way. She felt like it was worth it.


    Meanwhile, Hinome''s curiosity about Hikari also grew as she listened to him. How could a boy of just six years speak with such maturity about life, power, and breaking societal norms?


    His ns were far-reaching, his understanding of the world seemingly beyond his years.


    As she watched him speak, his white eyes cold and indifferent to the world around them, she couldn''t help but wonder about the journey that had brought him to this point.


    Hikari''s parents were known for theirpassion and dedication to selflessly helping others, quite the opposite of the path Hikari was now choosing.


    Then, she recalled the rumors that had circted within the n about three years ago, shortly after the tragic loss of his parents. Hikari had beenbeled the son of traitors, subjected to the n''s disdain and istion.


    ''So, maybe that''s what changed him...'', She thought. The realization that Hikari had been forced to confront such harsh realities at a young age provided some context for the drastic shift in his worldview.


    This reflection led Hinome to a personal epiphany. If Hikari could step away from his parents'' ideals and carve his own path from such a young age, then why couldn''t she? She cherished her parents and their teachings, but the desire to forge her own future, on her terms, grew stronger within her.


    ''Yes... I''m endlessly grateful and I love my parents, but I want to go on my own path in the future...'', Hinome resolved, her gaze fixed on the young boy before her. Despite being two years her junior, Hikari exuded an aura of maturity and inherent nobility that belied his age.


    Meanwhile, Hikari, inwardly quite pleased with Hinome''s response, felt relieved. He had anticipated that convincing her to adopt some of his perspectives and perhaps "darken" her outlook on life would be a challenging task.


    He had thought that even getting her to ept his support might be difficult. From his past observations of her, Hikari had pegged Hinome as the quintessential introvert, and in his experience, introverts were often the most resistant to stepping outside theirfort zones.


    What Hikari hadn''t considered, however, was the significant role his parents'' legacy yed in shaping Hinome''s initial impression of him.


    Unbeknownst to him, the positive image Hinome held of Hikari was deeply influenced by the actions of his parents, who had once saved her own.


    This prior connectionid a foundation of trust and goodwill that made Hinome more open to Hikari''s proposal than he had anticipated.


    However, suddenly deciding to provide Hinome with even more incentive, Hikari leaned in closer, capitalizing on primal human desires like ''greed'' and ''envy'' and better standing within their social hierarchy.


    As their faces drew near, Hinome felt a jolt of surprise. Then, in a voice barely above a whisper and tinged with the weight of a taboo subject, Hikari addressed the topic,


    "In fact, it is not without the realm of possibility for us to get rid of this for you...", He hinted, his eyes briefly darting to the forehead seal hidden beneath her bangs,


    "A decade from now... I feel like I might be able to help you do something about that if you remain eager in your studies and cooperate with me well until then...",


    Hikari concluded, his wordsden with the promise of freedom from the n''s oppressive mark.


    He knew that the mere mention of potentially removing the Cursed Seal spoke directly to a hidden desire for equality and autonomy that lived within every Side Branch member. By introducing this prospect, Hikari not only heightened Hinome''s motivation to align with him but also subtly underscored the depth of the connection that he sought to make with her.


    However, after retreating back to his original position following his whispered proposition, Hikari was taken aback to see Hinome blushing. It took him a moment to understand why, leading to a surprising realization,


    ''It seems that this girl thought about... That way to get rid of the Cursed Seal inside the n...'', The thought crossed Hikari''s mind that Hinome might be considering the traditional and only known method within the Hyuga n for a Side Branch member to be freed from the Cursed Seal¡ªmarriage into the Main Branch... With him in this case...


    Following such a union, if the Patriarch allowed it in the first ce, then he would also set up a top-secret ritual to remove the Cursed Mark for the member of the Main Branch family.


    Hikari had, in the past, attributed the practice of Main Branch members marrying into the Side Branch as a means to circumvent the consequences of inbreeding, a matter of practical and gic importance to the Hyuga n.


    The rationale behind this practice was clear: by selecting Side Branch members with the most desirable kekkei genkai gics and the highest Byakugan "purity," the Main Branch could mitigate the risks of gic defects that might arise from too close interbreeding.


    This strategic pairing not only safeguarded the n''s health but also ensured the continuation of its most powerful traits keeping the Main Branch''s gics ahead of the Side Branch forever.


    With the Hyuga n epassing roughly a thousand members across both branches, the selection process for these unions was vast, providing a wider gic pool from which to choose than only from inside the Main Branch.


    There were only about 100 Main Branch members at any given time¡ªapproximately 10 from each lineage¡ªto engage in such unions. This limitation was also strictly enforced to maintain the delicate bnce between the Main and Side Branches and to preserve the n''s hierarchical structure.


    Therefore, those personal unions with the Side Branch were the only logical choice. It was a ten times bigger gic pool to choose from, therefore the risk of gic defects was quite lowered by that point.


    Furthermore, to diversify the gene pool and minimize inbreeding problems even more, the Side Branch itself was asionally allowed to marry talented civilians, thereby integrating new blood into the n.


    This process required the explicit approval of the Patriarch, who was actively involved in such matters. Far from being a mere formality, the Patriarch yed a proactive role, constantly on the lookout for civilians with potential talents that could benefit the n. The focus was on individuals who had no affiliations with other ns and who had ''clear'' backgrounds.


    These civilians, once brought into the fold through marriage, did not be full Side Branch members, with Cursed Seals, but their offspring did. This fact, however, did not dissuade many from pursuing this path. The allure of the benefits provided by the n, coupled with the increased chances of survival and prosperity under the Hyuga name, was apelling incentive.


    Such practices were not unique to the Hyuga n. Other major shinobi ns, including the Uchiha, engaged in simr strategies to ensure the vitality and strength of their lineages. These measures were essential to prevent gic defects and maintain the health and capabilities of the n members.


    While Hikari pondered how to rify the misunderstanding without causing further embarrassment, Hinome''s bangs slid further down, concealing her eyes as she slumped slightly on the bench.


    The blush of embarrassment didn''t fade from her face, instead, it seemed to deepen as she grappled with her own thoughts, ''A decadeter... that''s around the age people consider for marriage, isn''t it? Oh no... Does Hikari-sama think... is he suggesting something like that to me?'',


    Her mind raced, tying together Hikari''s words with the traditional way the Cursed Seal could be removed, leading to her misinterpretation that Hikari might be hinting at a future marriage proposal.


    This thought sent waves of shock and confusion through her, as she tried to make sense of the situation while dealing with the embarrassment of her assumption.


    After a moment of contemtion, Hikari let out a sigh and once more leaned in closer to Hinome, mindful of the sensitivity of the information he was about to share.


    His proximity caused Hinome''s blush to intensify, yet the need for discretion made it necessary, "Ahem... What I meant was not... that traditional method... There is another way...", He rified.

 42. Recruiting Hinome for The Future Plans

    42. Recruiting Hinome for The Future ns


    "In the future, once I''ve gained sufficient strength and political influence within the n, I n to implement some reforms. To be brief, these reforms would allow talented individuals like you to be freed from your Cursed Seal without necessarily bing full Main Branch members, with all of our rights, something the other Elders might not agree to even then.",


    "Instead, you would represent a ''new ss'' within the n. This wouldn''t ce you squarely in either the Main or Side Branches, but you''d be free of the Cursed Mark that''s limiting your Byakugan''s potential. And that is also important for our ns regarding the research stuff by the way. And most importantly, it would also grant you freedom...", Hikari exined hastily.


    Meanwhile, inwardly Hikari considered that even if Hinome and her useful Byakugan hadn''t been part of the equation, he would still have pursued his n to reform the Hyuga n.


    His goal was to enhance the n''s overall strength, recognizing that the stronger the n became, the more solid his own position in the vige and the world in general and support in terms of resources and everything else would be. Hikari understood the crucial importance of having a powerful backing. He felt firsthand just how important it was thest few years.


    His rationale for the reforms was clear: by allowing the talents within the Side Branch to fully develop and flourish, the Hyuga n as a whole would grow stronger. For too long, the potential of Side Branch members had been stifled, their motivation dampened by the oppressive reality of being branded as ''ves''.


    By proposing a way to eliminate the Cursed Seal without eroding the power of the Main Branch, Hikari aimed to inspire these talented individuals, giving them goals to aspire to and the freedom to pursue those goals with vigor, making them way stronger than they would''ve been otherwise and giving the n new ''elites''.


    This innovative "new ss" within the n was also designed to be apromise that would appease Main Branch members by not diminishing their status or authority.


    Hikari believed that this approach would not cause significant upheaval within the n. After all, it would likely affect only a few exceptionally talented individuals in each generation, without drastically altering the established boundaries and traditions of the Hyuga n.


    By carefully bncing the needs and aspirations of both branches, Hikari''s n sought to foster unity and drive within the n, promoting a culture where talent and effort were recognized and rewarded.


    This, he believed, was the key to ensuring the Hyuga n''s continued dominance and sess in the shinobi world.


    Regarding the idea ofpletely "freeing" all Side Branch members from the Cursed Seal, Hikari found itughable.


    He thought that he couldn''t possibly be a ''Jesus-like'', ''saint-type'' figure even bigger than Naruto, since even he, despite the promise in the original series and how he was portrayed, after bing Hokage, in that sequel, still didn''t abolish the practice for some reason.


    Hikari also knew that removing the Cursed Seal entirely could jeopardize the resources, status, and power structure that supported his training and his position within the n.


    More so, Hikari pondered the unintended consequences of such an action. With the Cursed Seal gone, there was no telling whether some Side Branch members, liberated after centuries of subjugation, might seek retribution against the Main Branch members, including Hikari himself.


    The practice of the Cursed Seal, deeply ingrained in the n''s history, had created a long-standing divide. Removing it abruptly could lead to unrest and vendettas, destabilizing the n from within.


    Hikari''s approach was more calcted. He aimed for a reform that would empower talented Side Branch members withoutpletely upending the existing n structure.


    By introducing a "new ss," he sought to minimize the potential for chaos while still addressing some of the ''inefficiencies'' present in the current system.


    This strategy was about finding a bnce¡ªimproving the n''s overall strength and cohesion without igniting internal conflict that could tear it apart.


    Meanwhile, realizing her misunderstanding about Hikari''s intentions, Hinome felt a rush of mixed emotions.


    The initial shock and embarrassment that came from misinterpreting his hint about the Cursed Seal gave way to a sense of relief but also a bit of awkwardness.


    The thought that she had jumped to conclusions about marriage, of all things, made her cheeks warm with a blush that refused to fade.


    Once Hikari rified his actual n¡ªintroducing reforms to create a new ss within the n without the need for marriage¡ªHinome couldn''t help but feel slightly foolish for her assumption.


    Yet, there was also a growing respect for Hikari''s foresight and his careful consideration of the n''s future and her role in it.


    Hinome''s embarrassment at her mistake quickly became overshadowed by her intrigue in Hikari''s proposal.


    It was a moment she saw in Hikari not just a n member with ambitious ns but as a natural-born ''visionary leader'' and ''genius'' who could steer the Hyuga toward a more inclusive and dynamic future.


    Hikari''s proposal ignited a profound desire within her, unlocking thoughts and aspirations that she had previously deemed untouchable.


    The idea of a life beyond the confines of the Cursed Seal¡ªwhich some in the Side Branch somberly referred to as "the birdcage seal"¡ªsuddenly seemed within reach.


    This Cursed Seal, a symbol of suppression and control, had long cast a shadow over the lives of Side Branch members, dictating their position within the n and limiting their potential.


    The thought of being freed from this "birdcage" represented one of the deepest, most fervent wishes of those born into the Side Branch, a wish so profound and sensitive that it was barely acknowledged even in private thoughts.


    Hikari''s promise, or even the mere suggestion, of finding a path to such freedom was revolutionary for Hinome. It transformed her understanding of what was possible.


    The sudden personal ambition and rush of desires Hinome experienced became even more poignant in light of the day''s events.


    The activation of the Cursed Seal and the pain it inflicted upon her for the first time, all because of a minor medical mistake made by a Main Branch member, intensified her longing for freedom.


    In this moment of vulnerability and revtion, Hikari now emerged in Hinome''s eyes not just as a visionary with a bold n but as a savior, a source of hope in a world that had seemed determined to limit her.


    His proposal offered a way out, a chance to escape the "birdcage" that had defined her existence and to pursue a life of her choosing, free from the constraints imposed by her birthright.


    Observing the unmistakable glint of aspiration in Hinome''s eyes and the subtle cues in her expressions and movements, Hikari couldn''t help but feel a sense of satisfaction.


    To him, it appeared that his ability to influence and guide others was proving exceptionally effective.


    From their very first conversation, he had managed to secure a talented and dedicated follower, carefully crafting his words to ensure Hinome woulde to see him as an indispensable ally and leader.


    Each statement Hikari made was meticulously nned, aiming to foster a sense of reliance on him.


    Hikari''s decision to delve into the Hyuga n''s more taboo subjects during this initial meeting with Hinome was also strategic.


    He understood that the humiliation Hinome had faced just now created a unique opportunity for influence, so he changed some ns regarding her and acted on that opportunity, way earlier than previously nned, and, hence, elerated his entire strategy regarding her.


    In the aftermath of such a distressing experience, where her vulnerabilities wereid bare, Hinome was more open to a reassessment of her beliefs and, consequently, more receptive to Hikari''s ideas.


    Yet, despite the calcted nature of his approach, Hikari''s promises were genuine. He intended to deliver on his promises, but his support was conditional, and extended to those who could contribute to his objectives.


    In the harsh reality of their world, where interests often dictated everything, Hikari saw no room for naive sentiments.


    His experiences had taught him that tangible benefits and the fulfillment of desires were far bigger motivators than abstract notions of loyalty or duty.


    With this in mind, Hikari resolved to leverage ''desires'' as a key strategy in attracting and securing the allegiance of future followers.


    This pragmatic, albeit maniptive, approach reflected Hikari''s understanding of human nature and the dynamics of power.


    By aligning others'' ambitions with his own, he aimed to build a coalition of individuals driven by mutual benefit and shared goals.


    However, Hikari genuinely believed in the principles he shared with Hinome, viewing himself not just as manipting her but as enlightening her to the world''s harsh realities.


    He saw his actions as opening her eyes, helping her understand and navigate theplexities of their society. To Hikari, this was more than strategy; it was mentorship.


    He shared his vision with Hinome, aiming to empower her, showing her a path beyond the limitations of the Cursed Seal and the Side Branch''s constraints and moral constraints.


    In doing so, Hikari felt he was guiding Hinome toward realizing her potential in a world where power and knowledge could set her free.


    "Since you''ve agreed to join my ns when the timees, aside from your studies here, I''m going to assign you another task. You''ll be practicing some special methods I''ve developed to enhance your Byakugan''s capabilities, aiming for an even more refined microscopic vision.",


    "This is crucial for the research we''ll undertake. Interestingly, part of our future research will also focus on advancing our n''s dojutsu, pushing our bloodline to evolve beyond its current limits once we''ve maximized the potential of those exercises.",


    "It''s about transcending the inherent limitations our bodies are born with, in a way, evolving our bloodline...", Hikari detailed his ns with a clear sense of direction. As Hinome listened, her demeanor reflected intense curiosity and keen intelligence.


    Hikari, aware of her sharp mind from the information he had gathered, knew that the prospect of contributing to such groundbreaking research would captivate her.


    The idea of not only improving her own abilities but also potentially ying a role in advancing the Hyuga bloodline itself was a powerful motivator.


    Her eyes sparkled with interest as Hikari continued to introduce to her various concepts and some scientific hypotheses he had of his own.


    She wasn''t just a passive listener; Hinome began to contribute her own thoughts and questions, turning their discussion into a vibrant exchange of ideas.


    Their conversation flowed naturally, with Hikari introducing a concept and Hinome responding with her thoughts, leading to further discussion and asionally to spirited debate.


    This dynamic interaction highlighted their mutual respect intellect and their shared passion for discovery and innovation.


    As they discussed Hikari''s ideas about evolving the Hyuga bloodline and transcending its current limitations, Hinome felt a surge of excitement at the prospect of being part of such groundbreaking work.


    Hinome was intrigued by Hikari''s unconventional approaches and the breadth of his vision. His ideas sparked new lines of thought for her, broadening her understanding of what might be possible in their field of research.


    After their engaging conversation, Hikari proceeded to share the specific Byakugan exercise protocols he had developed. He handed Hinome some of his notes, which detailed the exercises and their intended effects on enhancing the Byakugan''s capabilities.


    Furthermore, Hikari introduced Hinome to the concept of Yin Release, exining its subtle connection to Byakugan''s output.


    He demonstrated how to generate Yin Release chakra and incorporate it into their exercises, supplementing the demonstration with additional notes for her to study.


    Recognizing the importance of consistent practice and mastery, they agreed to meet daily right after their first ss on the institute''s terrace.


    This arrangement would allow Hikari to guide Hinome through the exercises, ensuring she understood and performed them correctly.


    The goal was for Hinome to be proficient enough to continue the exercises on her own at home, furthering her development independently.


    As they concluded their meeting, there was a sense of purpose and anticipation between them.


    They hadid the groundwork for a coborative journey that promised to unlock new potentials within Hinome and, by extension, contribute to Hikari''s broader ambitions.


    With ns in ce, they parted ways, each absorbed in thoughts about the possibilities thaty ahead.


    Hinome left with a mix of excitement and determination, her mind buzzing with the new knowledge and the challenge of mastering the exercises Hikari had shared. Meanwhile, Hikari felt a sense of satisfaction in having found a willing and capable partner in Hinome.


    Their daily meetings on the terrace would not only be a time for training but also an opportunity to deepen their mutual understanding and further their shared goals.

 43. The End of The Second Shinobi World War

    43. The End of The Second Shinobi World War


    After wrapping up his conversation with Hinome, Hikari made his way to meet with the director of the medical institute, a prominent figure from the Hyuga n''s fourth main lineage.


    Their discussion was productive, with the director assuring Hikari that Hinome would receive additional support and oversight to prevent any future incidents like the one she recently endured.


    They also touched upon Hinome''s educational trajectory, ensuring that it would align closely with Hikari''s ambitions for her.


    To secure the director''s support, Hikari offered him a favor¡ªa gesture of goodwill to be reciprocated in the future when Hikari''s influence within the n had fully matured.


    Recognizing the potential benefits of aligning with a rising star in the n, the director was more than willing to amodate Hikari''s requests.


    It highlighted the keen interest of the n''s elders and other influential figures in forging a positive rtionship with him, anticipating his ascent to a significant leadership position.


    After his sessful meeting with the director, Hikari hurried off to his advanced practical fuinjutsu ss, arriving just in time.


    The ''Fuinjutsu Hyuga Center'', where this specialized branch of ninja arts was also taught to the Hyuga n, was situated within the Side Branch residential area.


    Unlike the imposing and elegant structuresmonly found in the Main Branch''s quarters, this building had a more modest but functional appearance.


    Its design emphasized utility over grandeur, with sturdy wooden architecture and ayout that facilitated focused study and practice.


    The entrance was marked by arge, engraved symbol of the Hyuga n, signifying the importance of fuinjutsu knowledge even within the more utilitarian spaces of the n''s domain.


    Inside, the fuinjutsu center was equipped with various rooms and halls designed for both theoretical learning and practical application of sealing techniques.


    Hikari''s ss took ce in one of the practical rooms, where individuals could practice their skills on special scrolls and sealing materials provided by the institute.


    During the ss, Hikari focused intently on the intricate patterns and forms that formed the basis of advanced fuinjutsu.


    He practiced inscribing seals with precise chakra control, demonstrating his proficiency and keen understanding of thisplex ninja art.


    The lesson covered several advanced techniques, including chakra flow maniption and the creation of temporary binding seals, which required both theoretical knowledge and practical skills.


    Once the ss concluded, Hikari gathered his materials and exited the building, his mind still partially absorbed in the techniques he had practiced.


    As Hikari made his way back to his residence in the Main Branch area, his thoughts turned to the wealth and power inherent to major shinobi ns like the Hyuga.


    It struck him as particrly impressive that the Hyuga n, not widely recognized for its fuinjutsu expertise, still maintained its own dedicated fuinjutsu learning center and division.


    This facility, although smaller and less popted than the n''s renowned medical division, stood as a testament to the broad educational resources and opportunities avable within the n.


    This reflection led Hikari to appreciate the significant advantages that came with being part of a prominent shinobi family.


    As Hikari walked around, his mind wandered to the more profound reasons behind his interest in fuinjutsu. He had long recognized that, apart from altering his own "body hardware" to mimic the Otsutsuki, there existed another pathway to achieving the monumental ''Six Paths'' level of power within their world.


    This alternative involved harnessing external, potent sources of chakra, the most important form of energy of this world, such as the Tailed Beasts, or potentially other yet undiscovered reserves, and sealing them for personal use¡ªa task most effectively aplished through the art of fuinjutsu.


    Determined not to put all his eggs in one basket, Hikari hadmitted to gaining at least foundational knowledge in fuinjutsu from a young age.


    This skill set could serve as a backup if his primary n to evolve his body fell short, or it couldplement and enhance his abilities should his initial strategy seed.


    Nheless, Hikari recognized that this second approach presented considerable challenges.


    Acquiring such powerful chakra sources typically meant confronting dozens of opponents of Kage-level strength or beyond, due to the sensitive, and highly sought-after nature of the Tailed Beasts.


    For this reason, Hikari viewed the second method of achieving Six Paths power through fuinjutsu and chakra sealing as a more arduous and risky path.


    It wasn''t his preferred strategy for ascending to Six Paths status. Instead, he saw it as a potential avenue to explore only after reaching such a level through his primary means of body evolution.


    Achieving Six Paths power would then provide him with the necessary strength and capabilities to pursue these external chakra sources with a realistic chance of sess.


    Hikari''s contemtions were abruptly brought back to the present as he navigated through the densest part of the Side Branch residential area on his way to the Main Branch.


    Despite the official end of the Second Shinobi World War a few days prior¡ªa conflict that even concluded on terms favorable to Konoha¡ªthe mood was far from celebratory.


    The streets, usually bustling with activity, carried a somber undertone. Many families in the Side Branch had borne the brunt of the war''s casualties and injuries, and the relief of peace was overshadowed by grief and loss.


    Hikari could sense the collective sorrow and frustration emanating from the people around him.


    The joy that might have been expected with the war''s end was muted, reced by a reflective and somewhat deste sentiment.


    The reality of war''s aftermath was starkly evident here, in the heart of the Side Branchmunity, where the cost of the n''s contributions to the war effort was most acutely felt.


    Upon entering the Main Branch area, Hikari immediately noticed that, despite its separation from the broader world''s conflicts, it too was enveloped in a subtle, somber atmosphere.


    This mood, he understood, stemmed from a different cause than the grief pervading the Side Branch.


    The Main Branch, with its deeper political involvement and connections, was acutely aware of the broader implications of the war''s end.


    The conclusion of the Second Shinobi World War on terms most favorable to Konoha wasrgely attributed to the efforts of certain elite individuals closely aligned with the Hokage''s faction.


    This faction had long sought to diminish the influence of powerful shinobi ns, including the Hyuga.


    While the war''s oue solidified Konoha''s status as the most powerful Ninja Vige, once again,


    It also signaled a potential shift in power dynamics within the vige that could threaten the traditional authority and autonomy of ns like the Hyuga.


    Members of the Main Branch, attuned to these political undercurrents, recognized that the post-war era might usher in changes that would challenge their longstanding positions of influence.


    The war''s end, therefore, was not an unequivocal cause for celebration within the Main Branch. Instead, it was a reminder of the evolving politicalndscape and the need to navigate this new reality carefully.


    For instance, the renown of Hiruzen Sarutobi, the current Third Hokage, reached his peak during this period.


    Known for his mastery over numerous Konoha''s secret techniques, all five chakra natures, and numerousbination jutsus, Hiruzen earned the moniker "God of Shinobi" through his active and impactful participation in the war.


    His reputation was further solidified when he fought to a standstill against the legendary Hanzo the Smander, also called the ''Demigod'' who had audaciously dered war against nearly all five great shinobi viges simultaneously and even repelled him in battle.


    Beyond hisbat prowess, Hiruzen also demonstrated exceptional strategic and tactical skills.


    His influence extended to reshaping team dynamics within Konoha, advocating for innovative small team formations and strategies that emphasized versatility and cooperation.


    All of those individual achievements left many within the Hyuga n and other prominent families quite uneasy for obvious reasons.


    In Hikari''s assessment, Hiruzen Sarutobi truly merited the "God of Shinobi" title for his era, especially considering his ability to confront Hanzo the Smander on equal footing¡ªa feat unmatched by any other shinobi of the time openly on the side of the shinobi viges.


    While the de might have echoed the honor once bestowed upon the legendary Hashirama Senju, known for his unparalleled strength and also referred to as the "God of Shinobi," Hikari believed Hiruzen''s achievements and contributions during his tenure warranted recognition.


    Despite the reservations he had about the use of the same title for two shinobi of markedly different capacities, with Hashirama being several levels above Hiruzen, obviously a little shamelessly promoted by the Hokage''s faction itself, Hikari acknowledged Hiruzen as one of the two strongest shinobi of his generation.


    In his view, while Hiruzen, alongside Hanzo, might not reach the mythical levels of power possessed by figures like Hashirama and Madara Uchiha, his prowess, leadership, and strategic genius ced him at the pinnacle of shinobi excellence in the current age.


    Hikari''s estimation of Hiruzen''s and Hanzo''s strength and their ce in the hierarchy of shinobi power was informed by the stories and ounts he had absorbed over the years.


    Beyond Hiruzen, the shinobi ns of Konoha and other viges had more figures to be wary of: Hiruzen''s three disciples, who had recently been elevated to "legendary" status.


    This de came directly from Hanzo the Smander himself, after they survived an encounter with him that would have spelled certain death for lesser shinobi.


    Impressed by their valor and prowess, Hanzo dubbed them the "Sannin" as a mark of respect for their abilities and courage, choosing to spare their lives for reasons that remained a subject of spection.


    The theories for the reasons behind Hanzo''s decision were varied andplex within the n. Some theorized that he spared them to maintain some level of respect or diplomatic bnce with Hiruzen, with whom he had previously engaged inbat, to maintain some stability or peace.


    Others spected that sparing them was a strategic move, possibly to conserve his forces or as a gesture to acknowledge Hiruzen''s power indirectly.


    The least likely, yet still mentioned possibility, was that Hanzo saw something particrly promising in the trio and chose to let them live out of a rare, perhaps even misced, sense of admiration or respect.


    Among the Sannin, Tsunade''s medical prowess and advocacy for medical professionals being present in every shinobi team formation also resonated particrly strongly throughout the entire ninja world.


    Her groundbreaking contributions to medical ninjutsu and her ability to heal wounds that were considered fatal by others set a new standard for medical care within the shinobimunities. Her expertise in dealing with various kinds of poisons was also widely spread.


    Tsunade''s innovations not only saved countless lives on the battlefield but also advanced the field of medical ninjutsu in ways that would benefit future generations of ninja.


    Meanwhile, during the same period that Tsunade''s medical expertise was bing widely known, Danzo Shimura was carving out his own distinct, though far more ominous, reputation in the ninja world.


    Known as the ''Darkness of the Shinobi World,'' Danzo and his secretive organization, Root, began to emerge into the broader consciousness of the shinobimunities.


    Root, operating under Danzo''s strict and shadowy leadership, was characterized by its unwaveringmitment to the protection and advancement of Konoha, often employing methods that were ethically questionable or outright reprehensible.


    Danzo himself, possessing strength that could be ssified as Quasi-Kage level, was feared not just for hisbat capabilities but also for his sinister, strategic mind. His ability to n several steps ahead, coupled with a willingness to sacrifice anything or anyone for what he perceived as the greater good of the vige, made him a formidable and controversial figure.


    The actions of Danzo and Root during the war¡ªranging from assassination missions to espionage and even maniption of political situations within and outside Konoha¡ªsolidified their reputation.


    While some viewed Danzo as a necessary evil, a protector operating in the shadows to ensure Konoha''s survival, others saw him and his organization as a dangerous embodiment of the moralpromises that the shinobi system could engender.


    As Hikari continued his journey back to the Main Branch, he further contemted the current hierarchy of strength within Konoha''s most notable shinobi. He estimated Hiruzen Sarutobi''s strength to be at thete Kage level.


    Regarding the Sannin¡ªTsunade, Jiraiya, and Orochimaru¡ªHikari believed that, although they had not yet reached their peak, each possessed strength that could be ssified as early Kage level.

 44. The Current Situation Inside The Konoha

    44. The Current Situation Inside The Konoha


    Amid the notable figures, from Konoha''s side, whose reputations were solidified during the war, Sakumo Hatake emerged as a formidable shinobi, earning the moniker "White Fang" due to his unparalleled skills in kenjutsu.


    His unique fighting style and extraordinary feats on the battlefield made him a legend across the shinobi world.


    Hikari''s evaluation of Sakumo''s strength ced him on par with Hiruzen Sarutobi, both assessed as being at the Late Kage level.


    However, Sakumo''s reputation within Konoha didn''t quite match up to his true capabilities. Hikari understood that this discrepancy was due to the Hokage''s faction actively downying Sakumo''s achievements.


    By controlling the narrative within the vige and assigning him to less critical missions, they ensured Hiruzen remained the most celebrated figure, limiting Sakumo''s recognition to his duel and defeat of just two Elite Jonin from Sunagakure, Sasori''s parents, and Chiyo''s son and daughter inw, quite below Sakumo''s true capability.


    This strategic sidelining of Sakumo shed light on the lengths to which Hiruzen and his faction would go to maintain their hold on power, influence, and fame.


    Sakumo''s tragic end, his suicide, which was previously a bewildering act, now made sense to Hikari. It was a typical illustration of the dark underbelly of vige politics, where even the most talented shinobi could be sacrificed on the altar of power dynamics of seemingly ''positive'' and celebrated ''characters'' in Hikari''s past life.


    However, this was the real world, not an idealistic fairy tale, that readers of the story from his past life were familiar with.


    Sakumo''s independence and remarkable rise to power, relying solely on his skills and his n''s hidden techniques, made him a difficult figure for the Hokage''s faction to assimte.


    Unlike the Sannin or Minato Namikaze, who were nurtured within the folds of the Hokage''s faction from their youth, Sakumo represented a formidable force that had emerged outside of their direct influence.


    Given that Sakumo Hatake belonged to a generation younger than Hiruzen Sarutobi, he naturally emerged as a strong candidate for the position of the next Hokage after Hiruzen''s tenure.


    However, Hikari recognized that Hiruzen''s faction, driven by a desire to cling to power, would never entertain the idea of Sakumo assuming such a pivotal role.


    Their preference leaned towards Orochimaru, Hiruzen''s most talented and favored disciple, for the next Hokage, even though Orochimaru was, in reality, not as strong as Sakumo.


    Orochimaru''s perceived controbility, owing to his lesser strength and his close ties with Hiruzen''s faction, made him a more appealing choice to them.


    Orochimaru, being directly under Hiruzen''s guidance, was seen as someone who could be easily influenced and kept within the fold of their power structure. In contrast, Sakumo''s independence and formidable capabilities posed a threat to their continued dominance.


    Hikari spected that these political dynamics and the systematic undermining of Sakumo''s contributions and potential ultimately contributed to the tragic course of events leading to Sakumo''s demise.


    If the original story''s timeline were to hold, Sakumo''s suicide would ur a few years down the line, a direct fallout from the intense pressures and istion imposed by the vige''s leadership and their relentless pursuit of power.


    Hikari spected that it was likely members of Hiruzen''s faction, including his two civilian advisors and Danzo, who initiated the damaging rumors about Sakumo abandoning a mission to save hisrades.


    This tactic was possibly employed when it became evident that Orochimaru''s standing within the vige couldn''tpete with Sakumo''s burgeoning reputation as a suitable candidate for Hokage.


    In Hikari''s analysis, the notion that a shinobi of Sakumo''s caliber would face universal condemnation for prioritizing the lives of fellowrades over a mission didn''t align with the intrinsic values of the shinobi world.


    Shinobi of Sakumo''s strength and capabilities were exceedingly rare and highly valued across all viges, making the bacsh against him for such a decision seem disproportionate and orchestrated.


    The immediate and widespread vilification of Sakumo for his actions seemed unlikely without a concerted effort to tarnish his reputation.


    However, Hikari also reasoned that while Hiruzen''s faction intended to merely discredit Sakumo and sideline him from the Hokage session, they hadn''t foreseen the devastating personal impact their actions would have.


    Sakumo''s suicide was an unforeseen consequence, one that likely took even his detractors by surprise. This tragic oue not only robbed Konoha of one of its most formidable shinobi but also marked a turning point in the vige''s fortunes.


    Hikari firmly believed that a shinobi of Sakumo Hatake''s exceptional skill and insight would have been acutely aware of the machinations against him love time.


    It seemed imusible to Hikari that Sakumo wouldn''t have recognized the deliberate efforts to undermine his reputation and the orchestrated nature of the rumors that led to his ostracization.


    Therefore, Hikari surmised that Sakumo''s decision to end his life was not merely an act of despair but also one of defiance and retribution against those who sought to discredit him.


    Feeling disillusioned and betrayed by the very vige he had devoted his life to protecting Sakumo''s suicide could be interpreted as his final stand against the political scheming that sought to diminish him. In taking his own life, Sakumo not only removed himself from the toxic environment that had turned against him but also left Konoha significantly weaker on the eve of the potential next shinobi world war.


    Upon realizing the full extent of Sakumo Hatake''s ordeal and its implications, Hikari began to strategize on how to leverage this situation to weaken the Hokage''s faction and, in doing so, create more breathing room for the Hyuga n to expand its influence within the vige.


    He saw an opportunity not just for the n but also for himself to gain political leverage from the fallout of any damage inflicted upon Hiruzen''s faction.


    Knowing that his own parents had been close acquaintances of Sakumo, often undertaking missions together, in the past, and even serving under hismand at the onset of the Second Shinobi World War, Hikari recognized a personal connection that could be utilized to his advantage. Their camaraderie and shared experiences provided a foundation upon which Hikari could build his n.


    Hikari envisioned a scenario where, instead of sumbing to the pressures and taking his own life, Sakumo could be persuaded to take a stand that would simultaneously expose the machinations of the Hokage''s faction and bolster the position of the Hyuga n.


    Such a move would require careful nning and maniption of the existing sentiments within the vige, turning the tragedy of Sakumo''s intended fate into a strategic advantage for those opposed to Hiruzen''s faction.


    This ambitious n, however, was not something that could be enacted immediately. Hikari was prepared to y the long game,ying the groundwork for his strategy to unfold over the years, and act when the opportunity arrives.


    However, unlike the rest of the Main Branch Elder, Hikari perceived that still, despite the current challenges, the long-term outlook for Konoha, and specifically for those opposed to the Hokage''s faction, wasn''t nearly as bleak.


    Hikari recognized that even without directly leveraging Sakumo Hatake as a weapon against the Hokage''s faction, the faction''s power was likely to wane over time due to various internal and external pressures.


    This decline was not solely dependent on any one individual''s actions but was a broader trend influenced by several key factors and events within and outside of the vige.


    He recognized that the vige''s strength, both in terms of its leadership and its notable shinobi, was on a decline, a trend that would inevitably continue based on the progression of events in the original story.


    This decline would inadvertently create openings for the Hyuga n and others to gain political ground - if they were smart enough and listened to him at that time that was.


    The aftermath of the Second Shinobi World War revealed vulnerabilities within Konoha''s ranks. Tsunade, deeply affected by personal losses, especially after the death of her lover Dan Kato during the recent war, developed a phobia of blood that rendered her virtually ''useless'' on the battlefield.


    Jiraiya, having spent much of his time in Amegakure and focusing on deciphering ''suspicious'' Toad Immortal''s prophecies, had little direct involvement with the vige, choosing instead to establish awork of informants.


    Orochimaru''s ambitions lead him increasingly to lean towards personal power and immortality, spurred by the death of his disciple Nawaki Senju, slightly before the Second Ninja World War,


    Leading him down a path of questionable ethics and detachment from the vige''s overall well-being, while doing questionable moves for his research that were potentially politically very risky.


    Moreover, both Hiruzen and Danzo were aging, with their physical prowess and, in Hiruzen''s case, his strategic and intellectual acumen, showing signs of decline.


    The shift in Hiruzen''s reputation from the "God of Shinobi" to the "Professor" underscored the trend of his personal strength declining, over the years, the best.


    After all, Danzo and Hiruzen would already be in their forties during the Third Great Shinobi War for example, certainly at least a level below their peak like today.


    Sakumo''s passing further weakened Konoha''s standing, signaling to other viges that Konoha was bing increasingly vulnerable¡ªa perception that would precipitate the Third Shinobi World War, during which Konoha resorted to even deploying newly graduated Academy students to the front lines due to theck of power and the trend of decline.


    Beyond the erosion of physical strength, Hiruzen''s prolonged tenure in power was marred by increasing corruption and poor decision-making.


    Danzo''s actions became more audacious, creating a political climate ripe for challenge. Hikari saw this period of turmoil and transition as an opportunity to strategically position the Hyuga n and himself for greater influence within the vige.


    The potential vacuum created by these developments underscored the critical role Minato Namikaze would y in shaping Konoha''s future.


    Without his full rise, Konoha''s standing in the ninja world could have faced severe repercussions, and questionable status in the future.


    Hikari understood that this tumultuous period represented a strategic opportunity to realign power structures within the vige.


    By anticipating these shifts and positioning himself ordingly, Hikari aimed to navigate the Hyuga n through the politicalndscape, exploiting weaknesses in the Hokage''s faction to enhance the n''s stature and secure a more favorable position for himself and his allies.


    As Hikari pondered over the ascent of Minato Namikaze and the tales circting within the Hyuga Main Branch about him, he couldn''t help but let out a smirk, followed by a chuckle.


    Minato, still a genin but immensely famous within the vige due to Hiruzen''s faction''s efforts to tout him as a ''civilian'' prodigy never seen before, was bing emblematic of a new wave of shinobi.


    This generation, which blended Senju lineage with civilian blood, was gradually emerging from the Academy, each batch seemingly stronger than thest, of which Minato was the strongest individually.


    Hikari thought deeply about Minato Namikaze''s abilities. Mastering near-perfect Sage Mode wasn''t something just anyone could do; it required unique body traits and lots of chakra, which ordinary people didn''t have.


    Then, there''s Minato''s incredible feat of fighting the strongest Tailed Beast, Kurama, and Obito at the same time. He managed to defeat Obito, split Kurama''s chakra, and seal it into Naruto and himself.


    This raised questions for Hikari: Where did Minato get such vast chakra reserves to do all that, and to continuously use high-level, high-ss jutsus during his battles in general?


    Moreover, the lineage of Ashura''s reincarnations was historically entirely within the Senju n alone just as the Indra reincarnations were inside the Uchiha n alone. Thest known reincarnation of Ashura was Naruto.


    Since the Uzumaki n is only distantly rted to the Senju, Hikari spected that it made more sense if Minato had a more direct connection to the Senju n, hence Ashura. This would also mean Naruto had more Senju blood in him.


    It also aligned well with the fact that Senju started changing their surnames, marrying civilians like ''crazy'', under the policy of Tobirama, leading to them dissipating in only one or two generations. Considering all of these points, Hikari was almost fully convinced Minato had some Senju DNA.


    Yet, what amused Hikari the most were the heroic tales and rumors of Minato rescuing Kushina Uzumaki, Konoha''s new Jinchuriki, from Kumogakure''s spies just recently.


    Considering the feats clearly aplished by the Kumogakure shinobi; Prating Konoha, capturing Kushina Uzumaki, the vige''s most important asset, and then nearly escaping with her, even exiting the vige perimeters and entering the forest outside, sessfully,


    It seemed thenpletely illogical that they could be so easily bested by one genin, fresh from the Academy, even one as talented as Minato.


    This apparent contradiction suggested to Hikar that, while these Kumogakure shinobi were skilled enough to infiltrate the vige and execute their mission, they might not have been particrly formidable opponents.


    However, this then raised another, the most important question: if they were not especially strong, how were they able to carry out such aplex operation sessfully in the first ce?


    The answer likelyy in the maniption of events from within Konoha itself. The ease with which Minato defeated these supposedly capable shinobi hinted at a setup that was orchestrated by Hiruzen and his faction. It was all a clear screenwriting, making of a movie.


    It seems probable that these Kumogakure operatives were allowed, perhaps even facilitated, to kidnap Kushina, creating an opportunity for Minato to y the ''hero saving a beauty'' in a carefully staged rescue.


    This scenario, seemingly lifted from the pages of a scripted drama, was likely engineered to enhance Minato''s reputation as a ''hero'' within the vige and further bind Kushina to the Hokage''s faction by weaving a narrative of heroism and romantic destiny between the two, possibly even inspired by their rtionship and indicate spying over them during the times they were together at the Academy.


    By engineering such a situation, Hiruzen''s faction achieved multiple objectives: Kushina, feeling indebted to Minato, would naturally grow closer to him, thereby ensuring that the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki remained under the influence of the Hokage''s faction, Minato was part of, and the vige in general.


    Simrly, Minato''s new attachment to Kushina would subject him to indefinite political machinations of Konoha''s leadership, given her politically sensitive status as a Jinchuriki.


    His all actions and decisions would be henceforth needed to align with the expectations and directives of Hokage and his circle if he didn''t want to jeopardize his romantic rtionship with Kushina due to her politically sensitive identity as the vige''s Nine-Tails Jinchuriki.


    Hikari found the entire setup so absurdly overyed that it brought him toughter, marveling at the extent to which Hiruzen''s faction would stoop to weave such a tale.


    It was, in his eyes, a testament to their desperation to maintain and expand their power, resorting to concocting a love story between children that doubled as a political maneuver.


    However, arriving at his home, Hikari shifted his focus from theplex web of vige politics to the more immediate task at hand¡ªthe rest of his daily routines.


    Despite the intrigue and the long-term strategies he had begun to devise, he was aware that his direct involvement in vige politics was still a few years away.


    His immediate priority was to strengthen himself physically and mentally, preparing for the day he would step into the political arena as part of his broader ns. This period of preparation was crucial. It was a time to build the foundation upon which his future rests.

 45. The Five Years Later and New Techniques

    45. The Five Years Later and New Techniques


    Five years had passed since the Second Shinobi World War, and now 11-year-old Hikari Hyuga was slowly waking up in his elegant room still within the Seventh Elder''s estate.


    Hikari''s mornings still always started with a dedication to training, a necessity he believed was crucial in this world.


    Yet, the nature of his training evolved over the years. Rising from hisrge bed, he moved through the room''s wooden floor to reach the familiar courtyard, a space that had be a significant part of his daily life.


    Hikari had slowly be deeply connected to this world, his memories of his previous life on Earth fading into the background.


    The courtyard, with its perfect bnce of beauty and tradition, was where he tirelessly worked on his skills increasingly embracing his identity as a Hyuga and Main Branch member.


    Over time, Hikari''s training sessions with Takumi came to an end. Hikari had grown significantly in strength and experience, reaching a point where Takumi had little more to offer.


    Furthermore, Takumi had already fully imparted the two fundamental, specialized tai-genjutsu techniques to Hikari, who had mastered them with remarkable proficiency.


    ording to Takumi, teaching Hikari more advanced techniques from his lineage would hinder Hikari''s growth as a shinobi. This advice came after Takumi learned of Hikari''s unique ideas for further development.


    Takumi believed that for Hikari to truly flourish, he needed to leverage these innovative concepts and chart his course.


    Immediately afterpleting his morning chores, Hikari began his day with light stretches reminiscent of the Gentle Fist style.


    These movements were fluid and precise, serving as a warm-up for the more intricate techniques toe.


    With his Byakugan activated, he transitioned seamlessly into executing a series of Gentle Fist techniques, stances, and movements.


    Each motion was carried out with meticulous attention to detail, reflecting the depth of his training and dedication to the art.


    Despite these being fundamental skills, Hikari understood the importance of practicing them daily.


    To neglect these basics would be to allow the foundation of his skillset to weaken, something he could not afford.


    Thus, he moved through the stances and techniques with a disciplined focus, ensuring each was performed to perfection.


    This practice took ce in his courtyard sh garden, a tranquil and inspiring setting that had witnessed countless hours of dedication.


    The early morning air was cool and fresh, filled with the quiet sounds of nature waking.


    As Hikari moved, the sun began its ascent, slowly illuminating the garden with a warm, golden light. The gentle rays filtered through the leaves, casting a soft glow over the scene.


    Despite having mastered the foundational techniques of the Gentle Fist, including the recently fully mastered Twin Lion Fists, Rotation, and Wind Release: Rotation, Hikari now faced the challenge of integrating his new personal unique jutsu ideas into his repertoire.


    The techniques he aspired to master wereplex, requiring a deep understanding of both the Hyuga''s traditional methods and the innovative application of Wind Release chakra.


    By creating a small, dense sphere of chakra that rotated at extremely high speed, encapsted by Wind Release chakra, Hikari would be able tounch it towards a target or area, where upon impact and after some time, it would explode into a full-sized Rotation.


    That move he dubbed the "Wind Release: Celestial Rotation Sphere" embodied a fusion of offense and defense, extending the Hyuga''s closebat prowess to striking targets afar.


    Also, it could even act as a sudden shield against attacks or projectilesing your way, stopping them somewhere at the distant midpoint.


    This made it especially useful in fights where staying away from the enemy was key.


    The technique held a distinct difference from the "Rasengan", which is known for its chakra rotating in multiple directions to create a sort of chaotic, centrifugal force, making it a much simpler technique in its essence.


    Moreover, whenparing his technique to the Rasenshuriken, whichpresses the Rasengan''s multi-directional spin into a throwable form that explodes upon impact, Hikari''s technique takes a different approach.


    It doesn''t harness the chaotic spinning in multiple directions but focuses on the power of rotation in one direction.


    This nuanced difference meant that while his technique might not match the raw force found at the core of the Rasengan or the destructive expanse of the Rasenshuriken, it offered a strategic versatility fitting Hikari''sbat style and chakra reserves.


    As Hikari practiced the motions in his courtyard, the depth of focus required for this technique was palpable.


    For now, he could only envision the technique''s potential, practicing the motions and focusing his chakra in the hopes of one day bringing the ''Wind Release: Celestial Rotation Sphere'' to fruition.


    Each movement was a step toward bridging the gap between concept and reality, requiring a seamless blend of chakra shape and nature transformations, precise chakra tenketsu point ejection mastery, chakra control, and the precision of the Gentle Fist''s motor movements.


    Therefore, eyes closed, each morning he would stand still, focusing deeply, attempting to synchronize the flow of his chakra with the subtle currents of the morning breeze that swirled around him.


    Following this, Hikari faced the challenge of initiating a miniature Rotation in his palm. This required not just mental focus but a physicalmand over his chakra, directing it topress and spin in a highly concentrated form.


    Day by day, he practiced this motion, his palm outstretched, as he sought to coax the chakra into the beginnings of a sphere.


    Sometimes, a faint movement in the air around his hand was the only indication of progress, yet the sphere itself proved elusive, a constant reminder of the skill''s demanding nature.


    In his heart, Hikari held onto the vision of what was toe: theunching of the sphere, guiding its path with wind chakra, and the moment of its explosive impact. These future sesses were beacons in the distance, guiding his present efforts.


    Simrly, the second envisioned technique, the Wind Release: Armor of the Heavenly Spin posed its own set of challenges.


    This technique aimed to wrap the user in a continuous, protectiveyer of spinning wind chakra, reacting instinctively to threats.


    It was an ambitious blending of offense and defense, demanding not just mastery over chakra flow but an innate connection between the user''s will and the chakra itself.


    As Hikari moved through his forms, he imagined the protective armor forming around him, feeling the hypothetical rush of wind as it spun in harmony with his movements.


    The concept of an armor that acted independently, yet in perfect unison with his intentions, was fascinating but daunting.


    Each step, each breath, brought him closer to understanding the subtle intery of forces required to make this technique a reality.


    The initial step involved enveloping his body in Wind Release chakra, setting it into a gentle rotation. This rotation needed to be subtle, a mere whisper of movement that wouldn''t distract him or drain his resources duringbat.


    In the calm of the courtyard, Hikari attempted to cloak himself in a veil of wind chakra. The goal was to achieve a continuous, soft rotation that melded seamlessly with his body''s natural chakra flow.


    He focused on maintaining a light, an almost imperceptibleyer of spinning chakra, one that would not demand his constant attention yet remained ready to spring into action at a moment''s notice.


    The next phase of the technique¡ªsynchronizing this rotation with his chakra pathway system¡ªloomed ahead as a challenge he had yet to tackle.


    This synchronization would allow the armor to instinctively react to any disruption in chakra flow, such as that caused by an iing attack.


    Hikari envisioned how the armor would detect an assault and respond by rapidly elerating the rotation at the point of impact, creating a barrier capable of deflecting or neutralizing the threat.


    However, the overarching reason Hikari delved deeply into developing those two new unique techniques was his discovery concerning ''chakra potency'' during his extensive research.


    Chakra potency referred to the amount of chakra one could utilize in a brief period. It was essentially about how much of one''s chakra reserves could be employed for a single jutsu, akin to measuring "how fast you could run" rather than "how long."


    This concept stood in contrast to ''chakra reserves,'' which dealt with the total amount of chakra avable within an individual''s body for performing jutsu.


    Chakra reserves were about endurance, akin to "how long you could run before you passed out," not how intensively you could exert yourself at any given moment.


    That''s precisely why the Uchiha n could unleash such potent Fire Release techniques despite not having asrge chakra pools as the Senju.


    They could utilize more of their chakra for a single jutsu than their overall reserves might suggest, enabling them, at times, to match the Senju in short-term confrontations.


    This characteristic was demonstrated repeatedly by various members of the Uchiha n in the original series.


    Gically, the Uchiha were predisposed to have a higher chakra potency, which is the capability to use their chakra more effectively in a concentrated manner, whereas ns like the Senju and Uzumaki were known for theirrger "chakra reserves," or the overall amount of chakra they could draw upon.


    Hikari quickly recognized that his own Hyuga n represented the other side of this dichotomy, stemming from Hamura Otsutsuki, just as the Uchiha descended from Hagoromo Otsutsuki.


    This meant that the Hyuga also possessed a naturally higher chakra potency rather than extensive chakra reserves.


    Understanding this, Hikari saw the value in incorporating elemental chakra releases into his repertoire.


    Such techniques would allow him to expend arge amount of chakra in the short term when necessary, leveraging his n''s innate chakra potency to its fullest potential.


    This realization opened up new possibilities for Hikari''s development, guiding him toward strategies that aligned with his n''s unique strengths.


    This understanding of chakra potency versus chakra reserves exined why, at his peak performance, Hikari''s strongest Wind Release: Rotation attacks could achieve a devastatingly wide range of motion extending over 10 meters in radius already and even more in the future.


    His innate ability to concentrate a significant amount of chakra into a single technique allowed him to amplify the power and scope of his attacks beyond the average limitations of his chakra pool.


    Then returning to the rationale behind Hikari''s decision to incorporate various Wind Release moves into his arsenal next stemmed from the logistical challenges of maximizing his chakra potency through Gentle Fist taijutsu alone.


    In the heat of battle, where rapid responses were crucial, trying to manually eject suchrge ''chunks'' of his avable chakra through Gentle Fist taijutsu alone would be impractical, if not impossible.


    Wind Release, on the other hand, offered a more efficient and effective way to leverage his peak chakra potency.


    It allowed for a faster way to convert his chakra potency into sheer power that the Wind Release still provided faster as it used much less created energy, in general, to produce the simrly devastating results on the battlefield as his ordinary chakra ejections in higher quantities.

 46. Beginning of Hikari’s Rise to The Limelight

    46. Beginning of Hikari¡¯s Rise to The Limelight


    After wrapping up his entire morning training session, which ended with a rigorous set of physical exercises designed to improve his strength, speed, and endurance among others, Hikari stepped outside the residence.


    Hikari then made his way to the Patriarch''s residence for another lunch, a sense of anticipation stirring within him.


    For reasons he couldn''t quite articte, he felt that this visit would be significant.


    Adorned in traditional Hyuga-style robes, their dark blue hue mirroring the color of his hair, he moved with a sense of purpose.


    At 11 years old, his youthful face had begun to shed its childlike roundness, taking on sharper, more defined features.


    His bright Hyuga eyes, vibrant and full of determination, hinted at the handsome young man he would be.


    His rigorous training regimen and nutrition had not only honed his skills but also shaped his physical appearance.


    Standing tall among his peers, Hikari''s frame and height were noticeably more developed for someone his age.


    This physical maturity,bined with the elegant traditional robes he wore, lent him an air of dignity and promise beyond his years.


    Over the years, not only had Hikari''s physical stature improved, but the internal structure of his chakra pathways had also undergone significant development.


    His stic-like chakra vessels had be more robust, enhancing his capacity to store and manage greater amounts of chakra.


    This physiological evolution contributed to a notable increase in his ''base stats,'' rendering him considerably stronger in physical terms than he was five years prior.


    In the shinobi world, while every individual possesses circting chakra naturally, the ability to generate additional chakra for jutsu involves harnessing a mix of spiritual and physical energies.


    Relying solely on the chakra already present within the body is risky; depleting one''s chakra reservespletely can lead to death.


    However, the process of continuously generating new chakra can gradually expand the chakra vessels, allowing for increased storage capacity.


    This expansion acts as a foundation for the body, enhancing its overall strength through the constant flow of energy within the chakra coils.


    As a result, even the base physical attributes, such as speed and power, could see substantial improvements.


    That was an underlying principle that exined how civilians, with dedicated training and effort, could ascend to the ranks of chunin and even jonin if they developed some special jutsu on their own.


    By consistently generating and refining new chakra, they effectively ''exercise'' their chakra pathways, akin to strengthening a muscle.


    Over time, this practice leads to an expanded capacity for chakra storage, which, in turn, elevates their base physical capabilities.


    Consequently, these enhanced individuals be valuable assets to their respective ninja viges, capable of serving in various capacities, from frontlinebat to support roles, effectively acting as ''enhanced humans-cannon fodder'' in the expansive and dangerous world of shinobi.


    A whileter, after arriving there and just nodding toward the guards, Hikari was immediately led in, as if he were a usual guest there.


    Soon, he found himself in the main living room, where the Patriarch, Hiashi, and Hizashi, were already present.


    "Greetings, Patriarch-sama, Hiashi-san, Hizashi-senpai...", Over time, he had grown morefortable with them and now addressed them in a way that showed both respect and familiarity.


    They all called him "Hikari-kun" in return, a sign of their affection and recognition of his ce in the n.


    Then, Hikari sat down to eat, moving in a way that showed he was used to these gatherings. The meal was traditional, with dishes that they all enjoyed, and the atmosphere was formal yetfortable.


    As they started eating, their conversation touched on various topics, including what was happening in the n and the vige, showing how much Hikari was now a part of these important discussions.


    As lunch progressed, the conversation took a more serious turn when they began discussing recent unsettling rumors about Danzo''s actions, brought by the Patriarch himself.


    It was proven that Danzo had started to forcibly recruit young members from the Aburame and Inuzuka ns¡ªtwo of their closest allies within the vige.


    This was happening under what seemed to be a silent approval from the entire Hokage''s faction.


    Danzo had already beforehand managed to recruit some members from the Nara, Yamanaka, and Akimichi ns.


    Hikari, absorbing the gravity of the situation, responded, "Those kinds of moves spell trouble...", The room fell into a thoughtful silence as they considered the implications.


    He then continued, drawing connections to their own situation, "These actions are definitely also aimed at us, the Hyuga n. We''re likely to be the next ones pressured into sending our members into the Root.",


    "With the Uchiha and Root already openly at odds, involving numerous altercations between their Police Force and Root operatives, it''s clear we may find ourselves in a difficult position.",


    Hikari''s analysis deepened as he considered the broader implications, "Danzo has already crossed the Uchiha n off for elimination; he doesn''t hope to recruit them.",


    "But, he would probably still try to recruit someone from our n. We''ve always been flexible to the Hokage''s faction, and our Byakugan would be quite useful for Danzo''s organization."


    The Patriarch, then, after a moment of heavy silence, turned his gaze towards Hikari. With a deep sigh that seemed to carry the weight of the n''s future, he asked,


    "Then are you ready, Hikari-kun? Are you ready to finally step into the limelight and ept your destined role and responsibility for the n?"


    The sudden question wasn''t just a query; it was a call to action. It came at a moment when the Patriarch recognized that the confrontation with the Hokage''s faction could no longer be avoided.


    The situation had escted, crossing a critical threshold. For years, the Hyuga n had maintained a posture of submission towards the Hokage''s faction, a strategic move designed to ensure Hikari could grow and reach his potential safely.


    This strategy was part of arger n, envisioning Hikari as a central figure in the n''s future strength and autonomy.


    However, Danzo''s recent actions, especially his intentions to recruit Hyuga members into Root, in the near time represented a tant vition of every possible ''red line'' for them.


    The Patriarch and the others could only imagine the horrors that awaited any nsmen sent to Root¡ªhical experiments, the imposition of Danzo''s own version of cursed seals, or even attempts to break through the Hyuga''s own cursed seal.


    Further concessions to the Hokage''s faction, and by extension to Danzo, were out of the question. The stakes were too high, and the n''s integrity and autonomy were on the line.


    In asking Hikari if he was ready to step forward, the Patriarch was seeking to gauge not just Hikari''s readiness but his resolve, strength, and willingness to take on a central role in the n''s response to these external pressures.


    It was a pivotal moment for Hikari, a transition from the protective shadows of training and development into the forefront of n leadership and resistance against those who sought to undermine or control them.


    This wasn''t merely a question of readiness for battle; it was about readiness to lead, to make difficult decisions, and to represent the Hyuga n''s interests in increasinglyplex political and martialndscapes.


    For Hikari, the Patriarch''s question signified the end of one chapter of his life and the beginning of another, far more challenging and crucial for the future of his n.


    Hikari met the Patriarch''s gaze with a resolute expression, his bright Hyuga eyes reflecting a depth of determination,


    "Yes, I''m ready, Patriarch-sama!", He replied confidently. In his voice, there was an undeniable strength and a readiness to embrace the responsibilities thaty ahead.


    Hikari understood the gravity of the moment and what was being asked of him. He recognized that his journey within the safety of the n''s walls had reached a turning point.


    "I feel like I''ve learned all that I can within the confines of our home. Staying in this fort zone,'' protected by the n, won''t allow me to grow further...",


    Hikari continued, his words resonating with a sense of maturity and insight, "It''s time for me to step out, to use what I''ve learned, and to repay the n for all the training and resources they''ve invested in me..."


    Patriarch''s response carried a tone of approval, yet it was underscored by the gravity of the challenges thaty ahead, "I understand, Hikari-kun. The Hyuga n is indeed fortunate to have nurtured someone of your caliber.",


    "However, I must also personally gauge the extent of your strength then, to ensure you are truly ready to assume a leading role within our n.",


    "Prepare yourself mentally for now, for this will be unlike any of our previous sparring sessions. We will both need to exert our full strength...", He replied, his gaze serious.


    "However, I also want to see how you have grown in terms of insight during this time and if you arepletely ready for that step. So, what do you propose we do next about this?",


    The Patriarch continued hisst question hanging in the air like a challenge, clearly evaluating Hikari''s readiness not just in strength but in wisdom and leadership as well.


    ''So, it is finally this time? It seems that everything I did during thest five years in terms of training andmercial involvement didn''t go unnoticed. It seems that the Patriarch is truly considering lifting all bans on me, and allowing me to be the true Third Elder earlier...'',


    Hikari momentarily thought, his blood boiling with excitement and a thirst for power. The prospect of bing the Third Elder officially a whole year earlier than initially nned, and having all restrictionspletely lifted was exhrating.


    This change would be an opportunity to elerate many of his ns, preparing more effectively for the tumultuous times thaty ahead for the vige and the wider world.


    Every second counted, and with the full authority and resources that came with the position of Third Elder, Hikari could make significant strides in increasing the probability of sess.


    Hikari took a moment to gather his thoughts as he understood the importance of the question, "To address the immediate threat from Danzo and ensure the safety of our n members, we should first strengthen our internal security and surveince to guard against any attempts at coercion or abduction.",


    "Additionally, we should open discreet channels ofmunication with other ns who share our concerns, potentially forming alliances that could offer mutual support againstmon threats...", Hikari proposed, his voice steady and confident.


    "In terms of our next steps...", Hikari continued, pausing for a moment to ensure his ideas were clearly articted, "I suggest we not only reinforce and elevate our alliances with the Aburame and Inuzuka ns to a new level but also initiate new partnerships with smaller shinobi families.",


    "This would include ns like the Hatake, Gekko, Yuhi, Sumi, and others, ranked in order of their strength. These ns have faced significant challenges from the Hokage''s faction influence in both the political andmercial spheres, not to mention the aggressive recruitment efforts and other pressures from Danzo''s Root organization...", He continued.


    He took a breath, his thoughts well-organized and his demeanor calm yet assertive, "It''s crucial, however, that we, the Hyuga n, take a leadership role in this emerging alliance.",


    "Our strength is unmatched, and I believe we possess a superior blend of strategic insight and intellectual resources. By leading, we can ensure a united front that is both effective and cohesive in resisting the encroachments we all face or are about to face.", Hikari finished.


    The Patriarch nodded openly in approval and satisfaction at Hikari''s suggestions. It was true that simr ideas had been floated in the Elder''s Council before,


    But they had alwayse from Elders who were decades older, seasoned by years of experience and deep involvement in the n''s politics.


    The remarkable thing about Hikari''s proposal was that he, at merely 11 years old and without prior knowledge of those discussions, had independently arrived at a simr conclusion.

 47. The New ‘Alliance Coordinator’ of The Clan

    47. The New ¡®Alliance Coordinator¡¯ of The n


    In Hikari''s mind, forming alliances with those ns in the direct line of fire from the Hokage''s faction was not just strategic; it seemed likemon sense.


    Unlike the Yamanaka, Akimichi, and Nara ns, which had been subdued intopliance and assimted by being given some status inside the Hokage''s faction itself,


    These smaller ns were actively being targeted by them for neutralization and extinction, in various forms, making them natural allies to someone like the Hyuga n currently.


    Despite their numbers being fewer and their influence not as extensive, due inrge part to the Hokage''s faction''s long-standing practice of talent poaching since the vige''s founding, these ns retained significant value, at least at the present date.


    They possessed unique hidden techniques that not only set them apart from ordinary civilians but also provided them with capabilities far beyond the average shinobi''s reach.


    For example, the Hatake n was renowned for its hidden kenjutsu techniques, which were rumored to rival even those found in the Land of Iron¡ªa testament to their skill and effectiveness in battle.


    The Gekko n, though less known, had its own formidable kenjutsu that had been passed down through generations.


    The Yuhi n''s mastery of genjutsu offered strategic advantages that could shift the tide of any encounter, while the Sumi n''s unique Yang Release ink techniques presented innovative and unpredictable ways to engage inbat.


    Moreover, beyond the ns mentioned, there were others not highlighted in the original series, yet they yed a significant role within the vige''s total avable Jonin popce.


    Aware of the eventual fate of these ns from his knowledge of the original series timeline, Hikari understood the gravity of the situation they faced.


    He knew that, in the future, these diverse and skilled ns would be neutralized by Konoha, their unique identities diluted to the point where they were barely distinguishable from Konoha''s civilians.


    This assimtion into the Hokage''s faction, particrly through the indoctrination of younger generations by the Ninja Academy, signaled a loss of autonomy.


    Also, the older generation, those who still held a deep respect for their n''s independence and traditions, would slowly pass away, leaving behind a legacy at risk of being forgotten.


    Hikari also thought that there might have been considerable foul y involved, actions taken to deliberately undermine these ns'' autonomy, and overall numbers, and erode their influence within the vige.


    In the end, Hikari surmised that their hidden techniques were also stolen and leaked over time. As the older generation died of natural causes or some ''suspicious'' circumstances,younger generations were absorbed into Konoha''s broader shinobi force, including the Anbu and particrly Danzo''s Root,


    The cohesive, collective n mechanisms and autonomy that had sustained these ns for centuries were dismantled all under the ideology of ''unitary Konoha'', the ''Will of Fire'', the ''equality of all citizens'' which was Tobirama''s main political ideology, and Hiruzen''s faction''s various power-seeking ambitions.


    However, Hikari wasn''t finished. He ventured further, introducing an idea that took everyone at the table by surprise, "However, there''s another potential ally, one even more significant than those smaller ns¡ªthe Uchiha n. Targeted not because of their weakness like those smaller ns were, by instead being targeted due to fear of their power and potential.",


    "As the main target of the Hokage''s faction, theirmercial interests have been heavilypromised already by various elements within the Hokage''s faction, and the power of their Police Force is being steadily undermined by the Anbu. In my view, forming an equal partnership with the Uchiha could be pivotal...", He proposed,ying out a strategic vision.


    As the conversation unfolded, Hiashi and Hizashi listened intently, their expressions a mix of contemtion and intrigue. Hikari''s presence and influence over thest few years had notably shifted their perspectives and aspirations for the n.


    Hiashi, traditionally a figure of stoic leadership and measured ambition, found his visions for the Hyuga''s future expanding in response to Hikari''s insights and proposals.


    There was a newfound spark of ambition in his demeanor, inspired by the potential he saw in Hikari ¡ª as a catalyst for the n''s evolution.


    Hikari''s bold strategy of forming alliances, particrly the surprising suggestion to partner with the Uchiha, resonated with Hiashi.


    It represented a departure from the more conservative strategies of the past, aligning with his growing desire to secure a more prominent and autonomous position for the Hyuga within Konoha.


    Hikari''s ambition and strategic acumen were infectious, prompting Hiashi to consider possibilities he might have dismissed before.


    Hizashi, on the other hand, had undergone a transformation on his own. Historically, his views had been shaped by theplexities of life in the Branch House, marked by a mix of loyalty and underlying resentment towards the Main House.


    However, witnessing Hikari''s dedication to the n as a whole, alongside his efforts to bridge gaps and envision a united future, alongside his good treatment of him, had softened Hizashi''s outlook.


    He found himself more positive about the n''s direction and the potential for genuine unity between the Main and Branch Houses.


    Hikari''s proposals for external alliances highlighted a path to strengthening the n from within, fostering a sense of collective purpose that transcended internal divisions.


    This shift in perspective was significant, as Hizashi began to see the n''s future not just through the lens of house divisions but as a cohesive entity with shared goals and threats.


    "Hikari-kun, your suggestions are indeed insightful and hold great promise for the future of our n. However, implementing them, particrly when considering individuals of Sakumo Hatake''s stature and the entirety of the Uchiha n, presents its challenges. The Uchiha, as you''re aware, have always maintained a certain... pride and autonomy that could make negotiationsplex, to put it mildest way possible...", The Patriarch analyzed thoughtfully.


    "Patriarch-sama, I believe that there''s no need for concern...", Hikari assured with a calm confidence that belied his years,


    "Over the past few years, I''ve taken the initiative to foster a closer rtionship with Sakumo Hatake. As you''re aware from my reports, I''ve approached him as a junior, leveraging the existing ties between him and myte parents.",


    "My goal has been to understand him better¡ªhis personality, his values, and his perspective on the vige''s dynamics. During our interactions, I''ve subtly introduced concepts and ideas that align with our vision, gauging his receptiveness.",


    "Sakumo-san, given his remarkable abilities and his standing as a likely candidate for the next Hokage, has been under significant scrutiny and pressure from the Hokage''s faction over the years...",


    "In essence...", Hikari concluded, "Now with the right effort and timing from our n, most optimally done by me, especially in response to the newfound rising aggressive moves by the Hokage''s faction, I believe we can count on Sakumo Hatake¡ªand by extension, the Hatake n as valuable allies...", Hikari replied with a confident tone, while inwardly musing.


    Hikari''s efforts to forge a connection with Sakumo Hatake weren''t impulsive but part of a well-considered strategy, one that had received the nod of approval from the vige''s higher echelons.


    This initiative, which he had proposed and undertaken a few years back, involved visiting Sakumo as a junior and the son of acquaintances.


    Upon his return, Hikari faithfully reported his findings and efforts, which significantly bolstered his standing within the Elder Council.


    This endeavor not only showcased Hikari''s diplomatic skills and strategic thinking but also highlighted the level of trust and responsibility the n had started to ce in him.


    Unlike before, when his movements might have been more restricted, the n now allowed him to leave Konoha freely for such missions. Although these permissions came with the provision of heavy protection units, it was clear this was not just about ensuring his safety.


    "And as for the Uchiha n...", Hikari continued at this time, thoughtfully weighing his next words, "It''s imperative that we at least attempt to initiatemunication and propose an alliance. Securing their cooperation could significantly bolster our position. And, should they choose not to align with us, it didn''t ''cost'' us anything to try at least..."


    "Then all the responsibility for these endeavors will rest with you, Hikari-kun...", The Patriarch dered, a slight smile gracing his features, signaling a blend of approval and anticipation.


    "Should you also demonstrate the requisite personal strength in our forting duel, I will also advocate for your advancement to the position of the Third Elder at the earliest opportunity as I promised.",


    "However, also, I intend to entrust you, and the Third Lineage that will be under your care, with a new and important administrative role within our n, during that time as well, if the proposal gets epted that is.",


    "You should serve as our n''s new ''Alliance Coordinator,'' spearheading a new division under the control of your lineage. This role will entail the nurturing and fortification of our alliances with other prominent ns and groups within Konoha, making sure we all support each other and cooperate well in the future...", He finished,ying out a significant path forward for him.


    Hikari felt a surge of surprise at the Patriarch''s announcement. This role, usually reserved for those of the Patriarch''s Lineage itself, was now being handed to him, ''The Patriarch finally trusts mepletely now, after everything I''ve done to show my loyalty to the n over the years. It''s all starting to pay off...'', Hikari thought to himself feeling ted and optimistic.


    Hikari responded to the Patriarch''s words with heartfelt sincerity, as if fully embracing the trust and responsibility ced upon him, "I ept, and I''m ready to do what''s necessary for our n...", He said, hismitment unwavering. Shortly thereafter, they all rose from the table, the weight of the conversation lingering in the air as they made their way outside.


    The specialized training area within the Patriarch''s estate awaited them, a vast space designed to amodate a duel of significant intensity.


    This was no ordinary sparring ground but one equipped to handle the most powerful techniques of the Hyuga n.


    The training area was meticulously designed to resemble natural terrain,plete with some artificial hills, valleys, and a variety of other features that addedyers ofplexity to anybat scenario.


    Rocks and trees were strategically ced throughout the area, offering both obstacles and cover. The varying elevation provided by the artificial hills tested agility and strategic positioning, demanding a higher level of awareness and control.


    As Hikari stood in the expansive, intricately designed personal training area, he couldn''t help but feel a renewed sense of surprise at the wealth and scale of the Hyuga n''s resources.

 48. The Serious Battle Against The Patriarch

    48. The Serious Battle Against The Patriarch


    "Be careful, Hikari-kun!", Came the encouraging words, filled with a hint of caution.


    "I will give it my all, Patriarch-sama!," Hikari responded with unwavering determination.


    After exchanging brief martial greetings, a sign of respect and readiness, the duel began under the attentive gaze of Hiashi and Hizashi.


    The twobatants activated their Byakugan, marking themencement of a duel that was as much about skill as it was about generational legacy¡ªa venerable, gray-haired elder pitted against a promising youth of merely 11 years.


    Initially, their movements were measured, a dance of Gentle Fist taijutsu that saw them weaving and parrying, their hands in constant motion.


    Hikari''s more advanced ''slow-motion'' like Byakugan''s higher processing speed parried with Patriarch''s more than half a century of experience in these arts.


    This early phase of the duel was about understanding, an exchange where both sought to gauge the other''s strategy and response. They aimed for each other''s hands, targeting the tenketsu points with precision, a testament to their mastery of the Hyuga''s fighting style.


    Suddenly, during their exchange, the Patriarch''s expression shifted to a knowing smile, "The Fifth Elder''s techniques, Hikari-kun? Such moves won''t find sess against me...", He remarked, a note of amusement in his voice.


    It was a pivotal moment; as their hands connected, Hikari attempted to inject a surge of Yin Release chakra into the Patriarch''s hand chakra pathway system to then discreetly travel and touch upon his central nervous system as well.


    Yet, the Patriarch, anticipating such maneuvers, effortlessly countered, pushing the Yin Release chakra back through their point of contact, sending it coursing back into Hikari''s own hand chakra vessels. This deft counter highlighted the depth of his understanding.


    Realizing Hikari''s astonishment at the swift counter, the Patriarch decided to share a piece of wisdom that Hikari hadn''t been privy to before,


    "You seem surprised, Hikari-kun. Let me share something with you then; over the years, my Byakugan has developed a unique capability. It''s not just the rity of vision or the ability to see chakra pathways, but a deeper, more refined understanding of chakra as energy itself too, meaning your cumtive chakra signature.",


    "This special trait allows me to discern and identify the unique chakra patterns of individuals, and even the specific nature of the chakra release they are manipting, creating, and from which point of their body are they doing it.",


    "Even guessing the technique someone is preparing to use isn''t that hard for me to guess way earlier...", He exined, his tone reflecting both pride and a willingness to educate.


    He further borated, "This means, while I may not have the ability to ''see'' emotions through chakra as some from the Uzumaki n could, I can very precisely detect the specific types of chakra you''re working with, such as your attempt to utilize Yin Release against me just now. It''s an innate gift parried with decades of experience of observing various patterns, now allowing me to see beyond the surface to the subtleties within a person''s chakra system."


    Hikari nodded, the surprise at the Patriarch''s unique Byakugan ability lingering within him, but he quickly refocused as the duel escted. At a signal from the Patriarch, they both adopted a stance indicative of a move to more advanced techniques.


    With palms extended, they simultaneously unleashed the Vacuum Palm technique, a signature move within the Hyuga arsenal designed to strike an opponent from a distance with concentrated chakra.


    Hikari, confident in his Wind Release-enhanced Vacuum Palms, expected his attack to have the upper hand. However, to his astonishment, the Patriarch''s seemingly weaker Vacuum Palms not only met his attack head-on but began to overpower it.


    The realization of impending possible impact triggered Hikari to instinctively initiate a Rotation, creating a swirling shield of chakra around him to deflect the iing attack.


    Inwardly, Hikari marveled, ''Could it be that he already anticipated and pinpointed weaknesses in my attack before it was fullyunched? And even manipted his Vacuum Palms to exploit the most vulnerable points of mine in mid-air? This level of experience and precision is astounding... It also suggests his Byakugan''s power is far beyond the ordinary.''


    As their Vacuum Palms collided, the force of the confrontation sent ripples through the air, disturbing the tranquility of the training ground.


    The nearby trees shook, some of the smaller vegetation getting uprooted while dust and debris were thrown into the air, creating a haze around the dueling area.


    The terrain itself bore witness to the intensity of their battle, with the ground near their point of impact cratering slightly under the pressure, leaving a tangible mark of their sh.


    As Hikari''s Rotation came to a halt, leaving the ground beneath them cratered from the force, the Patriarch had already maneuvered behind him, ready to exploit what seemed like a moment of vulnerability.


    However, just as he prepared to deliver a strike from behind, he found himself caught off guard by a sudden, rapid assault.


    From the back of Hikari''s position, transparent, high-speed projectile beams, akin tosers, shot out. This innovative technique, a fusion of Hikari''s ordinary Hyuga tenketsu chakra ejection method and Wind Release, created a barrier of swift, cutting sts of energy.


    While the Patriarch had anticipated the incorporation of Wind Release with his unique vision, the sheer velocity of the attack was beyond his expectations. This was his first encounter with such a technique at this speed, leading him to momentarily reassess his strategy and abandon his n to attack from that angle, thus missing a potentially decisive opportunity.


    Adapting swiftly to the unexpected turn of events, the Patriarch chose a direct approach for his next attack, channeling his chakra into the formidable Twin Lion Fists, a technique renowned for its destructive potential.


    This head-on assault was met with equal determination by Hikari, who, utilizing his unique Byakugan ability that allowed him to perceive movements in what seemed like slow motion, quicklyposed himself and mirrored the Patriarch''s stance, his own huge, blue Twin Lion Fists manifesting to meet the challenge.


    As they shed, an intense battle of attrition ensued, with each trying to overpower the other by absorbing chakra and aiming to ''mass-seal'' the tenketsu points, a tactic that could decisively tip the scales in this closely matched duel.


    The Patriarch leveraged his advanced vision, which allowed him to anticipate movements and counter them effectively, relying on his deep understanding of the chakra''s flow and patterns. In contrast, Hikari''s reliance on his enhanced ''slow-motion'' perception gave him the ability to process and react to the Patriarch''s moves with astonishing precision and speed.


    Amidst this intense exchange, the Patriarch found a moment to express his admiration for Hikari''s skillful application of the Twin Lion Fists, a technique he himself had taught the young shinobi.


    "Hikari-kun, your mastery of the Twin Lion Fists, especially so early on, ismendable. And the way you''ve harnessed your Byakugan''s capabilities in battle is truly impressive...", He praised, acknowledging not just the technique''s execution but the strategic depth with which Hikari had integrated it into hisbat style.


    However, just then the Patriarch''s experienced eyes detected a significant shift in Hikari''s chakra; the young Hyuga was amassing a considerable amount of chakra, converting it into Wind Release for what promised to be a formidable attack.


    Recognizing the imminent threat from Hikari''s small body, and deciding to try and stop it on time, the Patriarch suddenly changed his face and made a decisive move to counter it, by stealing and absorbing the majority of the boy''s chakra, by invoking his and his lineage''s most potent technique - Eight Trigrams: Celestial Dragon Seal.


    Channeling a massive surge of chakra throughout his body, the Patriarch focused his energy on his palms. The air around them seemed to tremble with the gathering power of ''blue'' and ''white'' chakra energies.


    In a breathtaking disy, an enormous serpentine dragon,posed of dense, white chakra, took form, its presence dominating the battlefield with an aura of sheer might and precision.


    With a swift motion, the Patriarch unleashed the dragon towards Hikari. Despite the present short distance between them, the dragon closed the gap in mere moments, its form undting with lifelike agility as it bore down on its target in a sh of bright, white, light.


    The dragon, a manifestation of the Patriarch''s will, aimed to "bite" into Hikari, initiating a rapid chakra absorption effect upon contact.


    As the celestial dragon enveloped Hikari, its fangs sought to pierce his chakrawork, aiming to seal his tenketsu points and disrupt his ability to muster chakra for jutsu.


    The immediate effect was a powerful absorption of Hikari''s amassed chakra, siphoning it away at an rming rate and funneling it back to the Patriarch.


    This not only halted Hikari''s preparation for his next move but also revitalized the Patriarch, bolstering his chakra reserves for the continuation of their duel.


    This scene, set against the backdrop of the specialized training area, now bore the marks of their epic confrontation.


    The terrain around them, already scarred from their previous exchanges, vibrated with the energy of the Patriarch''s technique.


    The ground beneath Hikari''s feet cratered further under the force of the chakra dragon''s impact, a physical testament to the technique''s power.


    Confronted with the overwhelming force of the devastating attack, Hikari was pushed to his limits. The realization hit him with rity amidst the battle''s chaos, ''So this is the pinnacle of the Hyuga n''s techniques... I''mpletely immobilized.'',


    ''The majority of my upper body''s tenketsu points are sealed, and my chakra is being drained at an rming rate... I need to act, or I''m defeated...'', This moment of crisis ignited a spark within Hikari, driving him to tap into the depths of his resilience.


    With no option left and the pressure mounting, Hikari resorted to the only viable counterattack he had left.


    Relying on the exceptional chakra control skills honed over eight years of diligent practice, which also allowed him to eject chakra from any part of his body, Hikari focused his efforts on his lower body. Drawing upon every ounce of chakra he could muster, he initiated a desperate bid for freedom.


    Utilizing the natural wind currents swirling around the battleground, with his deliberate chakra shape transformation maniptions, Hikari amplified the power of his technique without directly strengthening it with his Wind Release chakra too, as there was no time.


    From his feet, arge blue and sharp Rotation burst forth, expanding rapidly to form a protective barrier with a 5-meter radius.


    This fierce whirlwind of chakra and wind shed with the celestial dragon, dispelling it with force and creating a shockwave that rippled through the training grounds.


    The intensity of Hikari''s counter forced the Patriarch to leap away, a tactical retreat to evade the unexpected retaliation.


    The ground where Hikari stood bore the marks of his desperate struggle, with the terrain around him visibly altered by the collision of their formidable techniques.


    Vegetation was shredded, and dust was thrown into the air, creating a hazy veil that momentarily obscured the view.

 49. The Draw Against The Hyuga Patriarch

    49. The Draw Against The Hyuga Patriarch


    Seizing this brief window of opportunity created by his daring counterattack, Hikari was acutely aware that the Patriarch had momentarily gained the upper hand by absorbing a substantial portion of his entire upper body''s freely circting chakra.


    In a critical bid to level the ying field again quickly and seize this ''breathing space'', Hikari tapped into his deep knowledge of medical ninjutsu, Gentle Fist-like chakra control fundamentals, and the precise internal vision provided by his Byakugan and training of it.


    With remarkable speed and finesse, he began the intricate process of gently unsealing the tenketsu points across his upper body from the inside.


    This required an exceptional level of chakra control and an intimate understanding of the body''s chakra vessels and coils, skills Hikari had honed over years of dedicated practice.


    Simultaneously, as his hands came back into action, Hikari employed Yang Release to infuse those same inner chakra vessels with renewed vigor, to heal them and ''boost'' their short-term chakra energy intake at the same time.


    This not only hastened their ability to replenish chakra from his cells but also revitalized his ability to generate and manipte it effectively next.


    The use of Yang Release in this manner was a strategic move, aimed at restoring hisbat capabilities as swiftly as possible under the circumstances.


    This dual approach¡ªunsealing his tenketsu points while rejuvenating his chakra reserves¡ªunderscored Hikari''s innovative spirit and his mastery over a wide range of shinobi arts.


    The effectiveness of Hikari''s tactics was evident in the renewed energy that coursed through him, allowing him to prepare for the next phase of the duel.


    As the dust from their intense sh began to settle, the Patriarch, with his Byakugan fully activated, widened his eyes in astonishment at the sight before him.


    Witnessing Hikari''s adept maniption of his chakra to gently unseal his tenketsu points from within his chakra pathway system itself, along with his innovative use of Yang Release to revitalize those same pathways, left the elder deeply impressed. It was an approach and a form of resilience he had never seen before, prompting him to voice his admiration.


    "Hikari-kun, your abilities, and the extensive arsenal you possess are both truly remarkable... You have reached the peak among Hyuga in terms of ingenuity...", The Patriarch eximed.


    "This is beyond anything I''ve expected. To think you''d recover so adeptly after such a huge setback. It''s clear you possess a deep mastery and innovative mind that sets you apart.",


    Hispliments were not just words of praise but an acknowledgment of Hikari''s exceptional talent, ingenuity, and spirit. Even with his wisdom, he was taken aback.


    The Patriarch had indeed believed the duel was nearing its conclusion after sessfully stealing a significant amount of Hikari''s chakra and sealing so many of his tenketsu points.


    He had truly not anticipated such a swift and resourceful recovery, showcasing Hikari''s unwavering determination and his mastery over his abilities. The Patriarch then realized that even in his old age, there were still many things he hadn''t seen that some Hyuga could do.


    "There is no reason to continue this duel then; we are probably evenly matched already...", With those words, the Patriarch suddenly deactivated his Byakugan, signaling the end of their intense exchange. His fighting stance rxed as he approached Hikari, a warm smile spreading across his face.


    He recognized that the purpose of their confrontation was not to determine a victor but to gauge Hikari''s readiness to assume greater responsibilities within the n.


    Hikari''s disy of resilience, innovation, and mastery over his techniques had evidently surpassed the Patriarch''s expectations, proving that he was more than prepared for the challenges thaty ahead.


    Meanwhile, Hikari couldn''t help but reassess the Patriarch''s abilities as soon as they concluded their duel, a thoughtful analysis running through his mind,


    ''The Patriarch truly operates at the Elite Jonin level, much like myself, despite nearing his seventies. It''s evident that his advanced Byakugan vision and wealth of experiencepensate for any decline in physical prowess he may have faced with age. Yet, my approach to engaging him with Yin Release, at that time, was a misstep, due to theck of information about his Byakugan...'', He pondered, his thoughts methodical and analytical.


    Hikari realized that a more effective strategy might have been to leverage his unique Juinjutsu and Gentle Fist tenketsu sealingbination.


    Meaning, that using literal juinjutsu markings to ''seal'' the opponent''s tenketsu points with them, as well, afterward, not just pushing and pressing it out with his Gentle Fist. It involved doing it both, instead, of creating a much harder set of problems for the target to deal with.


    Unlike his previous attempts, which heavily relied on direct chakra maniption, these techniques, rooted in intricate symbols, presented a different challenge¡ªone probably invisible to the Patriarch''s Byakugan direct chakra energy vision niche in his opinion.


    ''Such an approach might have taken the Patriarch by surprise, offering me a tactical advantage previously unexplored... Then who knows how different it might''ve ended...'',


    He concluded internally, his mind already running through possible scenarios and oues.


    The technique Hikari contemted employing against the Patriarch was the culmination of his extensive research and mastery in fuinjutsu.


    After bringing his knowledge and skills in thisplex field to what he deemed an ''adequate'' level, Hikari didn''t stop there.


    Leveraging the fundamental principles, symbols, and forms he had mastered, he ventured into the intricate world of juinjutsu. It was here that a spark of creativity led him to develop and learn such a groundbreaking idea of fusing the juinjutsu with the Gentle Fist and dojutsu.


    Having reached significant milestones in both fuinjutsu and medical ninjutsu, now ready to employ them in battles, as showcased here, Hikari began to shift hister-day focus as well.


    His afternoons, previously dedicated to the meticulous study and practice of fuinjutsu and medical ninjutsu, were now upied with a different kind of strategizing.


    Hikari turned his attention to the practical implementation ofmercial activities within the n, specifically those that could benefit his lineage.


    This shift was not just about broadening his skill set but also preparing for a significant transition in his life and career within the Hyuga n¡ªformally taking over as an elder.


    Meanwhile, as the duel between Hikari and the Patriarch unfolded, Hiashi and Hizashi watched intently, their reactions a mix of concern for their father and their younger friend, pride for their n, and ultimately, admiration.


    Initially, both brothers were tense, understanding the gravity of the test Hikari faced.


    However, as the duel progressed, Hiashi and Hizashi''s initial concern for Hikari''s welfare gradually gave way to respect and admiration.


    The conclusion of the duel, marked by their father''s acknowledgment of Hikari''s abilities and the deration of their match as evenly matched, brought a sense of relief and satisfaction to both Hiashi and Hizashi.


    The Patriarch''s decision to end the duel and his words of praise confirmed their hopes and beliefs in Hikari''s capabilities.


    Hiashi and Hizashi were not entirely taken aback by Hikari''s impressive disy of skill during the duel with their father, the Patriarch.


    This wasn''t their first time witnessing Hikari''s capabilities; they had both sparred with him previously, although those encounters were conducted less thoughtfully.


    These sessions intended more as training exercises than true tests of resolve, had already given them glimpses into Hikari''s potential and the breadth of his abilities.


    "Patriarch-sama, your mastery, vision, and strategic depth are also truly unparalleled...", Hikari began, his voice steady and sincere, ''paying back'' thepliment, "Facing you inbat has not only been an immense honor but a profound learning experience for me. Your techniques, especially thest one, truly showcased the power of our n...",


    Aware of the importance of aligning with key figures within the Hyuga n, Hikari understood that building a rapport with the Patriarch was crucial.


    This gesture of respect was not just about paying homage to the elder''s skills; it was a calcted step towards fostering a beneficial rtionship, recognizing the Patriarch''s influential position within the n.


    Hikari knew that always currying favor and establishing closeness with the n''s leader could y a significant role in his future within the Hyuga, especially concerning many secrets he intuitively acknowledged that only the Patriarch himself was probably aware.


    As the heartfelt exchange between Hikari and the Patriarch concluded, Hiashi and Hizashi made their way towards them, stepping onto the scene of the destroyed battleground. The area, bearing the marks of the intense duel, served as a vivid backdrop to the moment.


    Hiashi, with a thoughtful expression, surveyed the damage around them¡ªa testament to the ferocity and skill disyed in the duel.


    His gaze then shifted to Hikari and the Patriarch, a slight smile forming as he witnessed the mutual respect and understanding shared between the generations.


    It was a moment that filled him with pride, not only in Hikari''s demonstrated abilities but also in the depth of the n''s traditions and the continuity of its legacy.


    Hizashi, standing beside Hiashi, shared in the sentiment, his eyes reflecting a mix of admiration and contemtion. The sight of the Patriarch acknowledging Hikari''s prowess and potential underscored for him the n''s strength and the promising future ahead.


    As Hikari watched Hiashi and Hizashi express their genuine happiness and pride, he began to reflect more deeply on their roles and potential within the Hyuga n. Observing Hiashi, now 21 and at the peak of his physical development, but stillcking in terms of wisdom and spiritual energy, making him at least 10 years below his overall peak, Hikari recognized the significant strides Hiashi had made, partly spurred by Hikari''s influence and encouragement.


    In Hikari''s eyes, Hiashi had not only reached but mastered his arsenal of techniques, from the original series, far earlier than might have been expected.


    This included the formidable ''Twin Lion Fist'', marking him as Elite Jonin-level¡ªa testament to his dedication and potential. Yet, despite these achievements, Hikari noted a gap; Hiashi hadn''t yet mastered that advanced technique that his father employed against Hikari.


    This pivotal skill, in Hikari''s estimation, was a benchmark for reaching the Quasi-Kage level, a status epitomized by their father at his peak a few decades back.


    Hikari''s observations extended to Hizashi as well, noting the unique strides he had made under Hikari''s influence in recent years.


    Hizashi''s efforts to expand his capabilities and explore new developments within the Hyuga n technique framework weremendable, demonstrating hismitment to his personal growth and the n''s advancement.


    Yet, Hikari understood the limitations imposed by the Cursed Seal, a burden that significantly constrained Hizashi''s potential to ascend within the n''s powerhouses.


    Currently, Hizashi''s prowess positioned him around the level of an ordinary Jonin and his highest potential to be around the Elite Jonin level as well, beyond that, it was impossible due to the Cursed Seal effects on his bloodline.


    ''Maybe Hizashi is another good target for the lifting of the Cursed Seal, alongside Hinome, in the future, due to his potential. But that is at least a few years away before I could propose that n with confidence...'', Hikari mused internally.


    After the deeply insightful and revealing duel, the atmosphere between Hikari, the Patriarch, Hiashi, and Hizashi was one of warm camaraderie and mutual respect. They exchanged farewells, each acknowledging the significance of the day''s events and the insights gained.


    As Hikari made his way back to his residence within the Main Branch living area, the interactions he encountered along the way marked a notable shift in his standing in the n.


    Members of the Main Branch, who crossed paths with Hikari, now all respectfully addressed him with an attentive "young master," a title that signified more than mere respect for his abilities.


    This change underscored a recognition of Hikari''s burgeoning role in the n''s leadership and decision-making processes. It was a clear acknowledgment of his talent, strength, and potential, but also of his increasing influence at the highest levels of n governance.


    This newfound status ced Hikari in a unique position within the Hyuga hierarchy, second only to the Patriarch and his designated sessor, Hiashi, who was often referred to as the Young Patriarch.


    As Hikari navigated his way through the familiar paths of the Main Branch, the respectful acknowledgments from n members soon became a backdrop to his deeper reflections.


    ustomed to his rising status within the n, Hikari''s thoughts instead turned inward, focusing on the insights gleaned from his duel with the Patriarch and contemting his own strength and future.


    Hikari acknowledged his exceptional talent, considering himself potentially the most gifted individual of his age in the history of Konoha, surpassing even the likes of Kakashi and Itachi in terms of strength at this specific age point in life.


    This was not a thought born from arrogance but rather a recognition of his unique position and the breadth of his abilities, honed by rigorous training, strategic thinking, and innovative approaches to shinobi arts.


    Yet, Hikari was also keenly aware of the evolving nature of talent and strength. He anticipated that by the age of 13, also an important point in time when in his life around which the Third Shinobi World War would start, despite his prodigious abilities, he might only reach early Kage level at best.


    He reflected on Itachi, who at the same age had already awakened his Mangekyo Sharingan, positioning him at a simr, if not probably superior, level of power, in the original story.


    There was also Shisui who awakened his Mangekyo even much earlier than Itachi and that made it hard to say to which extent he could use it at such a young age and about his level.


    Furthermore, the legendary figures of Madara and Hashirama, though their exact strengths at his age were unknown, likely presented aparable or even greater level of prowess, however, that was before the founding of Konoha.


    These thoughts did not dampen Hikari''s spirit; instead, they fueled his determination to push his limits and continue his growth. As he continued his walk, Hikari''s resolve only solidified.

 50. Officially Becoming The New Third Elder

    50. Officially Bing The New Third Elder


    A few dayster, the entire Hyuga n was still abuzz with yesterday''s announcement: Hikari Hyuga, from the Third Lineage of the Main Branch, was officially confirmed to be the new Third Elder.


    This decision, unanimously agreed upon by all the members of the Hyuga Council, marked a historic moment, appointing Hikari as the youngest Elder of all time, at just 11 years old. His rapid rise was a clear testament to his exceptional talent, strength, strategy, and maturity.


    The unanimous support from the Elders, with no voiced opposition, highlighted the confidence they had in Hikari''s abilities and potential to contribute to the n''s governance.


    The wider n, both from the Main and Side Branches, mirrored this sentiment, acknowledging Hikari''s new position and the implications it held for the n''s future.


    As the morning of the inauguration arrived, the atmosphere within the part of the Patriarch''s residence designated for the Hyuga Council meetings was charged with a mix of solemnity and anticipation.


    This private ceremony, set to formally induct Hikari into his new role, was attended only by the council''s members, including the Patriarch and the other Eight Elders.


    The council room, typically a space for deliberation and decision-making, was prepared for the ceremony with a sense of reverence for the asion.


    The Elders and the Patriarch gathered, ready to witness and participate in this significant event, understanding its historical importance and the promise it held for ushering in a new chapter for the Hyuga n under Hikari''s emerging leadership.


    At the center of the room stood an ancient pedestal, upon whichy the Hyuga n Oath Scroll¡ªan artifact inscribed with vows that each Elder was bound to uphold.


    These vows were a solemn pledge to protect the n, foster its growth, and uphold its values and traditions.


    The air was heavy with the weight of history, each Elder a link in the unbroken chain stretching back through generations.


    The ceremonymenced with the Patriarch addressing the assembly, his voice resonant, articting the significance of the moment and the qualities that had elevated Hikari to this esteemed position at such a young age.


    "Today, we stand witness to a historic moment...", He began, "As we wee into our ranks a shinobi of unparalleled talent and wisdom beyond his years. Hikari Hyuga embodies the future of our n, and in him, we ce our trust and hope."


    Hikari, standing before the council and the Oath Scroll, was then invited to recite the Elders'' Oath.


    His voice, steady and clear, resonated through the room as he vowed to serve the n with honor, to lead with wisdom, and to dedicate his strength to the prosperity and protection of the Hyuga.


    The Elders, listening intently, nodded in approval, their faces reflecting a mix of pride and solemnity.


    Following the recitation, the Patriarch stepped forward, cing his hand on Hikari''s shoulder in a gesture of eptance and blessing,


    "With this oath, you are now bound to the Hyuga as its Third Elder. May your actions reflect the honor of this title and contribute to the glory of our n."


    The ceremony concluded with a moment of silence, allowing the gravity of Hikari''s vows to permeate the consciousness of all present.


    This was followed by a series of brief conversations among the Elders, each offering Hikari words of wisdom, encouragement, and pledges of support.


    These exchanges, while formal, were tinged with genuine warmth and camaraderie, reflecting the collectivemitment to the n''s future and Hikari''s role in shaping it.


    As the ceremony drew to a close, the room, once filled with the solemnity of tradition and the weight of oaths, gradually lightened, the Elders dispersing with a sense of renewed purpose, pride, and unity.


    Hikari, now officially the Third Elder, stood among them not just as a young shinobi of exceptional promise but as a symbol of the n''s strength and its forward-looking vision.


    After the inauguration ceremony''s formalities had concluded, Hikari caught the eye of the Patriarch, who beckoned him with a look that spoke volumes.


    It was an expression marked by seriousness, signaling that what was to follow was of paramount importance.


    Hikari, driven by curiosity acknowledged the gesture and prepared to follow the Patriarch into a deeper part of his residence rarely seen by others.


    They traversed the familiar yet solemn hallways of the Patriarch''s home, each turn taking them deeper into another, more secluded section reserved for matters of great sensitivity.


    As Hikari followed the Patriarch to a seemingly mysterious location within his residence full of curiosity, his mind was already racing with the implications of his new role within the Hyuga n. The position of the Third Elder carried with it significant authority and he was informed of all of that just now fully.


    First and foremost, Hikari realized he now held one of the ten critical votes in the Hyuga Council, granting him a direct say in the n''s most crucial decisions. This power was not just symbolic; it was a tangible representation of his newfound influence within the n''s governance.


    Additionally, Hikari pondered the personal changes his new role would bring. He could now move to the Third Estate, historically associated with his lineage but left quite ''lifeless'' until this point.


    Residing in the Fifth Estate alongside Takumi and his personnel had been a matter of circumstance, but now he was poised to assume his rightful ce within the n''s spatial hierarchy.


    More than just a shift in residence, Hikari was now inplete control of his lineage''smercial operations and budget.


    This control extended to overseeing ounting documents and managing personnel directly employed at the Third Estate and in external operations, including servants,mercial workers, and even civilians involved in Hyuga n industries outside thepound.


    Another crucial aspect of his ascension was the formal acquisition of all of his lineage''s potential records or techniques, which, although previously imparted to him by Takumi, were now officially under his stewardship.


    With this new role came a higher status within the n; members were now required to address him as Third Elder-sama, a title thatmanded respect and acknowledged his elevated position in the n hierarchy.


    However, Hikari was acutely aware of the challenges thaty ahead. His lineage had not been popr among the other Elders, especially concerning administrative and broader roles within Konoha, having been slowly stripped of such responsibilities over time.


    Yet, with his ascension, it was agreed that his lineage would finally be given their first administrative role. The newly granted Alliance Coordinator status, allowing him to form a team and division focused on external coordination with other ns and his new mission.

 51. The Secret Chamber of The Hyuga Clan

    51. The Secret Chamber of The Hyuga n


    As Hikari and the Patriarch navigated through the intricatework of hidden passages within the depths of the residence, they encountered severalyers of protective chakra barriers.


    These barriers were ingeniously designed, not only to prevent unauthorized entry but also to shield the room from any form of external sensing or Byakugan''s surveince.


    Upon entering the chamber, Hikari was met with a sight that was both awe-inspiring and to some possibly ''unnerving''.


    The room, an amalgamation of ancient heritage and advanced preservation methods, housed countless sealed and meticulously preserved Byakugan eyes of past Hyuga generations.


    The Patriarch, observing Hikari''s reaction, began to speak of the room''s purpose with a solemnity befitting its significance,


    "This knowledge is beyond the reach of ordinary n members and even those well-read on n lore like you. It is a privilege and responsibility of the Elders alone...", He exined, his voice echoing slightly in the hallowed space.


    He moved with a deliberate grace, indicative of the deep respect he held for the chamber and its contents. As he spoke, he gestured towards the preserved Byakugan, highlighting the advanced preservation techniques employed.


    "Each Elder lineage contributes to this collection, safeguarding the strongest Byakugan among their deceased, utilizing a method known only to my lineage. It''s a critical duty of the Patriarch to protect this treasure.",


    The preservation methods themselves were a marvel of shinobi ingenuity, blending ancient sealing techniques with modern technologies.


    Specialized sealing scrolls and chakra-infused containment units maintained the integrity of the Byakugan, ensuring they remained potent and intact through generations.


    This system, a testament to the Hyuga n''s technological and chakra-based advancements, underscored the importance of the Byakugan not just as a kekkei genkai but as a cornerstone of the n''s identity and strength. Hikari was truly stunned at this time.


    "In rare cases...", The Patriarch continued, his demeanor reflecting the secrecy of the matter, "An Elder may choose a pair of these high-purity Byakugan to rece those of a lineage member whose eyes have not awakened or do not meet the Main Branch''s standards."


    As Hikari took in the room more fully, he was struck by its vastness and the palpable sense of history it contained.


    The chamber, expansive in size, seemed to stretch out beyond the immediate reach of the dim, ambient lighting, suggesting that it extended even further into the hidden depths of the Patriarch''s residence.


    The sheer scale of the space hinted at its capacity to hold not just decades but centuries worth of the Hyuga n''s legacy, possibly dating back to the deep Warring States period.


    Despite the outward curiosity and wonder on Hikari''s face as he absorbed the sights of the ancient chamber, inwardly, his mind raced with intrigue and a burning desire to uncover the deeper secrets of the Hyuga n.


    Though tempted to activate his Byakugan for a closer inspection, he restrained himself, wary of arousing suspicion or betraying his intense fascination with the chamber''s mysteries.


    Hikari''s keen understanding of fuinjutsu and the scientific principles of this world led him to specte that the preserved Byakugan were not merely stored for potential transntation.


    He sensed that these eyes were part of arger, moreplex system¡ªcontinuously channeling chakra toward an unknown destination or purpose. This realization sparked a flurry of thoughts in Hikari''s mind.


    The preservation of these eyes was likely contributing to a powerful reservoir of energy, intricately linked to the gic legacy and residual chakra of countless Hyuga ancestors.


    This chamber, Hikari hypothesized, was not just a tomb of the past but a cornerstone of the Patriarch''s lineage''s strength.


    The continuous flow of chakra from these preserved Byakugan,bined with the gic material they contained, might be fueling a secret mechanism or vessel¡ªa source of immense power that could be tapped into by the Patriarch in times of dire need.


    The existence of the Cursed Seals, long a contentious aspect of the n''s history, suddenly took on new meaning in Hikari''s analysis.


    Perhaps these seals served a dual purpose: not only maintaining order within the n but also acting as conduits, possibly having a mand'' ingrained of channeling the chakra of Side Branch members to augment this hidden reservoir of gic material in times of critical need, finalizing an intricate fusion.


    The implications of such a system were profound, suggesting a level of preparedness for existential threats that the n might have faced in its ancient history.


    Hikari found himself at the precipice of understanding¡ªrealizing that the secrets he was beginning to unravel were tied to the very essence of the Hyuga''s strength and survival.


    As he stood in the chamber, surrounded by the silent testimony of generations, Hikari was more determined than ever to delve deeper into the mysteries of his n.


    Hikari''s revtions within the secret chamber reshaped his understanding of the Hyuga n''s true might.


    The n, often perceived through the lens of its visible strengths and the prowess of the Byakugan, harbored secrets that could potentially redefine its standing within the broader shinobi world.


    Specting on the magnitude of power the Patriarch could potentially unleash through this ancient system, Hikari found himself at a loss. The scope and implications were beyond his current ability to fully specte.


    Conscious of the need to mask his internal storm of thoughts and maintain the facade of an uninformed neer to the n''s deeper mysteries, Hikari steered the conversation back to more general topics rted to the n''s governance and traditions.


    He skillfully navigated the discussion, keeping his tone light and inquisitive, all the while maintaining the ''clueless'' persona he had adopted upon entering the room.


    This careful bnce allowed him to continue gathering insights without revealing the depth of his understanding or the intensity of his curiosity.


    Eventually, the time came for their meeting to conclude. The Patriarch, signaling the end of their time together in the chamber.


    With a final look around the chamber, taking in once more the sealed Byakugan that represented both the n''s legacy and its hidden strength, Hikari followed the Patriarch out of the room.


    They navigated back through the secret pathways and protective chakra barriers, emerging once again into the more familiar parts of the residence.


    Hikari then soon stepped away from the entire residence, his mind aze with the secrets he had been just privy to and the role he would y in the future of the Hyuga n.

 52. Relocating and Commercial Strategies

    52. Relocating and Commercial Strategies


    As soon as Hikari stepped out of the Patriarch''s Estate, he was met with a palpable shift in the atmosphere.


    The respect and reverence from the n members he encountered were markedly more pronounced than before.


    Their bows were deeper, their gazes more deferential, and the title they used to address him¡ª"Third Elder-sama"¡ªcarried a weight that underscored the significance of his new seat.


    Embracing his new role, Hikari made his way to the Fifth Estate, where Takumi, his mentor and ''childhood'' caregiver, already awaited him outside of his residence to say their official goodbyes and simr words.


    "Hikari...", Takumi greeted, his voice carrying a blend of respect and familiarity that had defined their rtionship over the years.


    "Takumi-sensei...", Hikari responded, acknowledging the subtle shift in how Takumi addressed him.


    Gone was the ''-kun'' suffix, a change that reflected Hikari''s elevated status within the n, now being in the same position as Takumi, however, some warmth and closeness still remained as seen by how Takumi called him by his name without any hesitation right away.


    The atmosphere between them was markedly different from the formal setting of the earlier ceremony. Here, in the more intimate surroundings of the Fifth Estate, Takumi took the opportunity to offer his congrattions, something the protocol of the official event hadn''t allowed, "Congrattions, Hikari. Your new position is well deserved...", Takumi said, his usual stern demeanor softening slightly to convey his genuine pride in Hikari''s achievements.


    Hikari sensed the sincerity in Takumi''s words and felt a surge of gratitude. Over the years, their rtionship had evolved significantly. What began as a calcted mentorship, with Takumi viewing Hikari as a promising investment, and Hikari viewing Takumi as a temporary ''shelter'', had grown into a somewhat moreplex genuine bond to some extent. Takumi''s stern and reserved nature had always made him a challenging figure to read, but his consistent guidance and other kinds of help had been instrumental in Hikari''s development.


    "I already ordered for all your stuff to be moved to the Third Estate, and I also ordered all of my avable personnel to go there and join your personnel in helping you move in there and reorganize the Estate in a way that you would like next...", Takumi spoke, his actions reflected a level of care that went beyond mere duty; it was a gesture of solidarity and support for him.


    "You also know that you cane here at any time if there is anything you need, right, Hikari?", Takumi continued, reinforcing the open door he had always offered to Hikari.


    "As for other things, just follow your own mind. You are even more intelligent than me, to be honest, there is no need to hesitate about anything...", Those words were a clear signal that Takumi saw Hikari not just as a student or prot¨¦g¨¦ but as a fully-fledged leader on his own.


    "So, I''m not worried about how you''ll fare in your new position, just be careful when you venture outside thepound, please. You know why...", The caution in Takumi''s voice hinted at theplexities and dangers that came with Hikari''s elevated status in the vige.


    "And if you need any help, I''m willing to even personally move on your request...", Takumi''s offer of personal assistance was a significant gesture, underscoring the depth of hismitment to Hikari''s sess and well-being both for the n''s future and due to their close rtionship.


    Hikari found himself momentarily taken aback by the depth of Takumi''s dedication. It wasn''t just the material support of organizing his move to the Third Estate or the offer of ongoing assistance; it was the genuine concern for his welfare that resonated deeply with Hikari.


    At that moment, moved by Takumi''smitment, Hikari silently vowed to ensure Takumi''s wellbeing in the future as much as possible, as long as it aligned with his overarching goals¡ªamitment he deemed highly feasible given their shared interests and mutual respect.


    Internally, Hikari also paid homage to Takumi''s prowess. He was acutely aware of the strength that Takumi possessed, which ranked him among the strongest figures within the n, alongside figures like the Patriarch, Hiashi, and now Hikari himself, his top 4 estimates.


    Takumi''s reliance on spiritual energy and Yin Release, for his most advanced techniques, truly set him apart.


    It made it so that his skillset was less dependent on brute physical strength than for an average shinobi.


    That means that even as Takumi entered his first years of fifties, his capabilities remainedrgely unaffected.


    After exchanging a few more sincere words of farewell with Takumi, Hikari went on his way toward the Third Estate.


    This marked a significant change, as he had spent thest eight years in the Fifth Estate under Takumi''s mentorship.


    Now, with his new role as Third Elder, he was ready to take on the responsibilities and start managing the logistics of his lineage''s estate.


    The walk there was filled with anticipation for the changes ahead and a readiness to embrace his new duties.


    Upon reaching the front of his Third Estate, Hikari took a moment to survey the scene before him. The estate,parable in size to Takumi''s Fifth Estate and those of the other Elder lineages, buzzed with activity.


    As Takumi had promised, personnel were bustling about, engaged in moving belongings, cleaning, and attending to various tasks.


    Alongside them, Hikari''s new servants, some of whom had been waiting in the estate for his arrival over the past eight years, while others had just been appointed by the Patriarch, all showed him the utmost respect and saluted him upon his arrival.


    Observing the estate more closely, Hikari noted that despite its simr size, it appeared more barren and slightly neglectedpared to the residences of the other Elders, but that was about to be changed from then.


    Stepping into the Third Estate, Hikari couldn''t help but feel a sense of satisfaction. The vast space was now his tomand, which was quite beneficial to some of his follow-up ns.


    As he moved through the estate, inspecting each room, the courtyard, and the expansive areas within, he was met with respect and salutes from the busy personnel and servants.


    As Hikari assessed the estate''s current condition, his mind was already racing with ns for its transformation.


    His first order of business was to establish the diplomatic division he had been granted permission to form.


    Furthermore, Hikari nned to relocate allmercial activities rted to his lineage to the Third Estate like other elders.


    This move would also symbolize the Third Estate''s revival as a key hub of activity and influence within the n.


    Hikari was confident that the transition and the reorganization of the Third Estate, alongside the integration of his lineage''smercial operations, would be smooth and swift.


    His involvement in these operations over the past few years had not only familiarized him with the intricacies of the business but also earned him considerable respect from managers and workers alike.


    His innovative approaches and strategic improvements had significantly revitalized his lineage''smercial activities, rejuvenation and bringing them on par with, if not surpassing, those managed by other elder lineages, even before his official ascension to Elder status.


    This groundworkid by Hikari meant that most of the personnel were already aligned with his vision and methods.


    They respected his leadership and were likely to be cooperative and efficient in implementing the changes he nned.


    Hikari anticipated that with a few days of focused effort, the necessary adjustments and enhancements to the estate and its operations could be aplished seamlessly.


    The innovative policies and business strategies that Hikari introduced, which were influenced by his unique knowledge from a past life, had not gone unnoticed by the other Elders within the Hyuga n.


    Observing the sess and efficiency brought about by Hikari''s methods, several Elders began to adopt simr tactics within their own lineage''s operations.


    This collective shift towards more modern and effective management practices significantly enhanced the n''smercial ventures, leading to a notable increase in prosperity. It all made the Hyuga n now officially the wealthiest shinobi n within Konoha and the world.


    The sweeping sess and modernization of the Hyuga n''smercial operations,rgely influenced by Hikari''s innovative approaches, certainly also yed arge role in the Elders'' rtively straightforward decision to appoint him as a full-on Elder at such a young age.


    However, this rise in prominence and wealth also brought with it a heightened wariness from the Hokage''s faction.


    Focusing on areas where his lineage had traditionally been involved, Hikari decided to concentrate on Real Estate and Housing Services, Training Facilities and Dojos, and Entertainment and Leisure.


    Although there were many other sectors that the other lineages had been involved in that could also apply some of the same principles as he did in his own.


    Leveraging his knowledge from a past life, he sought to revolutionize these sectors with innovative approaches and efficiency improvements in order to make more profitable investments, acquire the best value assets, and generate the most profits, and he did it.


    For example, among many of the things he did a few of them were that Hikari applied principles of supply and demand to adjust offerings based on market needs, ensuring his businesses were always aligned with current trends and requirements.


    He also utilized economic forecasting to anticipate shifts in the shinobi world that could affect his operations, allowing him to stay ahead ofpetitors.


    He embraced strategic nning and SWOT analysis to identify opportunities for growth and areas needing improvement.


    Lean management techniques were adopted to streamline operations, reduce waste, and improve overall efficiency across all ventures.


    Hikari was also strategic and discerning, focusing on areas with the highest potential for return. He understood the importance of portfolio diversification, spreading investments across different sectors to mitigate risks associated with the vtile shinobi economy.


    He introduced budgeting practices that allowed for more effective allocation of resources, ensuring financial stability and sustainability.


    Cost-benefit analysis became a standard procedure before any new investment, ensuring that resources were only put into ventures with a clear path to profitability.


    Sales and marketing strategies were modernized to include segmentation and targeting, allowing Hikari''s businesses to tailor their offerings to specific segments of the Konoha poption and beyond.


    Promotional strategies were refined to create more impactful campaigns that resonated with their intended audiences.


    Hikari focused on talent acquisition and development, creating an environment that attracted and retained top talent by offeringpetitivepensation, opportunities for advancement, and a workce culture that valued innovation and teamwork.


    By harnessing his past-life knowledge and carefully adapting it to the context of his world, Hikari set new standards for excellence and innovation within his lineage''s businesses.


    All of those strategies were revolutionary in a setting like Konoha, where the norm was an economy driven by the interests of a few, operating under a crony "rent-seeking" model rather than a straightforward free-market system.


    In this environment, the economdscape was dominated by powerful shinobi ns, leaving small-time civilian merchants struggling to survive and stifling opportunities for upward economic mobility.


    If ordinary civilians dared to challenge this established order, they would find themselves targeted by threats from these influential ns, with no protection from the Hokage.


    This issue was particrly acute under the leadership of Hiruzen and his advisors, whose ns¡ªthe Sarutobi, Shimura, Utanane, and Mitokade¡ªwere the primary beneficiaries of this insr economy.


    They monopolized key administrative and governance roles, enabling their own business interests to thrive through advantageous public contracts and regtions, thus cementing their wealth and power in such an unbnced economic framework.


    Nevertheless, Konoha''s essence as a military-focused society, where financial gain was predominantly through shinobi and mercenary kind of means, implied that the necessity for a shift towards free-market capitalism was not paramount.


    With all of this understanding, Hikari, leveraging his sophisticated business insights and knowledge from his previous life on Earth, early on recognized the futility of attempting to secure arger "share of the pie" for his Hyuga n within Konoha''s tightly controlled economy, which was firmly in the hands of the Hokage''s faction.


    Instead, he chose to "expand the pie" for his lineage and n by introducing innovative business concepts and ideas, aiming to transform the economic system from within.

 53. The Next Steps for Hinome’s Research

    53. The Next Steps for Hinome¡¯s Research


    A few dayster, after finishing his pre-afternoon daily training and with the major tasks of setting up his industries under centralized control of some of his new estate''s buildings, and the new diplomatic divisionpletely set up already, Hikari took a moment to step back from the whirlwind of duties that had consumed him since assuming his role as Third Elder.


    His responsibilities had kept him from meeting Hinome for a week¡ªa dy that was unusual for him, given the importance he ced on their coboration.


    Dressed in his refined dark blue robes, nowplemented by a haori that marked his status, Hikari presented a picture of Hyuga nobility as he prepared to leave his refurbished estate.


    Apanied by a carefully selected personal entourage of bodyguards and attendants from the Side Branch, Hikari moved with deliberate steps towards the Side Branch living area next.


    His destination was the Hyuga Medical Research Center, where he would usually go and find Hinome.


    Navigating the streets of the Side Branch living area with his imposing entourage, Hikarimanded attention and respect.


    The presence of his bodyguards and the significance of his attire marked him as a figure of considerable importance within the n.


    As they made their way to the Hyuga Medical and Research Center, the crowd parted in acknowledgment, their salutes a sign of reverence.


    Upon reaching the institute, Hikari didn''t hesitate and went in as he was quite familiar with the ce.


    The corridors of the institute were filled with the hustle and bustle of researchers and medical professionals, but Hikari''s presence seemed to bring a momentary calm, as people paused to acknowledge him.


    Hinome had wrapped up her education at the institute quite a while back and, despite being young, now led her own research department. It wasn''t long before Hikari located her room.


    Hinome was deeply engrossed in her work, a testament to her dedication and the reason behind her rapid rise within the institute.


    When Hinome caught sight of Hikari''s figure, her face lit up with a slight warmth and happiness, a spontaneous reaction to seeing a long-time coborator and friend, as she walked over.


    However, the sight of his entourage and the realization of his new, elevated status made her pause, introducing a moment of uncertainty.


    She hesitated, unsure how to address him now, caught between the formalities required by his new title and their familiar way of interacting.


    Noticing her unease, Hikari couldn''t help but smile a bit to ease the tension and bridge the gap that his new position might have created between them.


    "No need to be hesitant, Hinome, call me by my name only just like before...", He said softly.


    There was no other reason, in scientific research and medical ninjutsu, she was already above him a long time ago and was the crucial and most fundamentally valuable part of his ns. Therefore, Hikari was always the most polite to her.


    Thanks to the long-term focus and protection she enjoyed from Hikari concerning her, Hinome now appeared much more confident than before, unlike many of the ordinary Side Branch members.


    She was also already considered the biggest genius in the scientific field that the Hyuga n had so far, now also leading her research team here, making her quite more self-assured in that way than before.


    Even many members of the Main Branch, she encountered now, aware of her close ties with Hikari, treated her with a level of politeness that was umon.


    At 13, two years Hikari''s senior now, Hinome was entering a new phase of her life, with the onset of puberty beginning to reveal some of her womanly characteristics, and promising great potential in those areas as well once she fully developed in the future.


    Her appearance was still marked by her shoulder-length dark brown messy-looking hair and the standard Hyuga n eyes with a pretty and symmetrical face. She still had the same heavy bangs covering her Cursed Seal marking. Her attire was mostly white-like and resembled that of a researcher.


    "I''ve already talked with the director and the Sixth Elder; it''s time for you and your research team to move into my estate next, as we agreed upon. I''ve arranged for people to move everything there...", Hikari announced. His words were a clear indication of the ns he had in ce for Hinome and her team.


    Over the years, Hinome incorporated only a select few individuals into her team that would eventually be Hikari''s own research group.


    All of them were carefully vetted by him, and were now transferred to his lineage as well, although most of them still wouldn''t be informed about what kind of work they nned to do, they would do some general research help and remain unaware. Everything else would only be done and known to the two of them.


    Meanwhile, Hinome gave a nod toward his words, her outward expression steady, yet inside, she harbored a hint of shyness about the impending move.


    Transitioning from her modest Side Branch home, which her deceased parents left to her, to now about to be residing in Hikari''s expansive Elder-level estate, alongside him, marked a significant change despite the vast space of the estate, it was still living alongside a boy in her mind.


    However, despite the initial apprehension, she felt a growing sense of anticipation and positivity about the move.


    Hinome realized that being closer to Hikari would allow her more frequent interactions and discussions with him about many different things, something she valued highly and often missed when he was busy before.


    She considered, ''This is probably because I''ll be able to talk to Hikari more often once I start living and conducting my research there, unlike before... That''s what I feel so... Excited...'',


    Hikari''s unique ability to grasp the nuances of her work and his keen interest in the fields she was also exploring made him an invaluable ally and confidant.


    ''After all, Hikari is the only one in the n who truly understands my research and the areas I''m passionate about and is a friend to me. He always seems so mature for his age, providing me with a strong sense of security and invaluable advice...'', Hinome reflected silently.


    Then as Hikari and Hinome soon stepped out of the building together, the bodyguards and attendants swiftly formed a protective circle around them.


    Their easy conversation andughter, shared in close proximity, drew curious and envious nces from the Side Branch members who witnessed the scene both inside the institute and out on the streets.


    The sight of Hikari, a figure of such prominence within the Main Branch, so openly engaging with Hinome, a member of the Side Branch, sparked whispers and spection about the nature of their rtionship.


    Hinome, initially animated by the positive interaction with Hikari, after a week of not seeing him, couldn''t help but blush as she became fully aware of the attention their walk and she herself were attracting.


    The murmurs and gossip among the onlookers grew louder, fueled by envy and curiosity about her apparent ''good fortune'' to be so favorably regarded by someone of Hikari''s status.


    Observing this, Hikari sighed softly and then gave a discreetmand to his entourage. They promptly took action, gently but firmly moving the onlookers away and creating a barrier between them and the whispering crowd.


    Once Hinome regained herposure, their conversation shifted to a more professional topic. They discussed the equipment Hikari had acquired through the n''s secret channels, equipment that was due to arrive shortly.


    This new gear was essential for their next steps, as the relocation of Hinome''s research to Hikari''s personal residence marked a significant turning point.


    With the move, they anticipated the opportunity to advance their research in ways previously constrained by the public setting of the Hyuga Medical Research Center.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari and Hinome transitioned from the Side Branch to the Main Branch residential area, the atmosphere shifted once again.


    Despite the sparser poption here, their presence quickly became the center of attention.


    Word had spread fast about the Third Elder escorting an unfamiliar young girl of simr age as him to his estate a few days after he also previously moved in, sparking curiosity and spection among the Main Branch members, and increasing their numbers on the streets.


    Unlike in the Side Branch area, Hikari''s attendants found it more challenging to manage the onlookers and gossipers here, given the higher status of the observers.


    This shift in atmosphere led to an awkward pause in their conversation. Hinome, then amidst the whispers and spective nces, found herself blushing once again.


    The murmurs around them grew, filled with spection, ''Who is this young woman?'', ''Why is she standing so close to the Third Elder-sama and talking so intimately?'', ''Could this be the newdy of the Third Lineage?'',


    Each guess and whisper got more outrageous than thest one, causing Hinome to blush harder and harder after identally overhearing some of them.


    Her reaction was subtle, marked by a quietness and a gentle fidgeting of her hands, with her head down, a stark contrast to the escting gossip around them.


    "Let''s walk faster then...", Hikari suggested, a hint of helplessness crossing his features as he nced around.


    Hinome, still caught in a daze from the whirlwind of attention and spection, and absent-minded simply nodded in agreement.


    Without another word, they quickened their pace, moving through the Main Branch residential area toward the Third Estate.


    As they approached the Third Estate, Hinome couldn''t hide her astonishment at its grandeur and sheer size, which, in her eyes, seemed to surpass even that of the Hyuga n''s Medical and Research Center.


    The estate stood as a testament to the prestige and responsibility that came with Hikari''s new position, its expansive grounds and imposing architecture reflecting the significance of the Third Elder within the n.


    Her initial reaction was one of awe, taking in the meticulously maintained gardens that led to the main residence.


    Hikari, noticing Hinome''s stunned expression, offered a reassuring smile. Understanding the importance of making her feel wee and at ease in this new environment, he gently led her through the entrance.

 54. Hinome Moving to Hikari’s Third Estate

    54. Hinome Moving to Hikari¡¯s Third Estate


    Later that day, after Hinome had time to settle into her designated living space within the Third Estate, and the afternoon had given way to the early evening, they reconvened.


    This time, their meeting ce was one of the estate''s spacious training fields, a serene spot that contrasted with the flurry of activities that had marked their day.


    "How have you settled in?", Hikari inquired, his voice carrying a genuine concern for herfort and adaptation to the new environment.


    "It''s all right...", Hinome replied, her response brief yet carrying an undertone of appreciation for the efforts made to amodate her.


    The simplicity of her answer belied the significant change she was undergoing, adapting not just to a new physical space but also to those strange implications she heard earlier today.


    "That''s great... You are my most important and closest partner so far in this n, and you know that...",


    "As my chief assistant, it''s not only your research skills that matter. Growing stronger and being able to protect yourself is crucial too...", Hikari began, his tone underscored by the seriousness of his words.


    "Here''s a collection of some advanced Wind Release and Lightning Release ninjutsu that I''vepiled from within the n during these days. You must master these techniques now. After ascending to this position, it wasn''t that hard for me to get them, so don''t worry...",


    Hikari''smitment to Hinome''s safety and development was evident, "I know I''m also not an expert in these types of ninjutsu, so I''ve arranged for specialists toe and train you.",


    "They''re experts in their fields, and they''ll start working with you asionally from tomorrow...", He continued, revealing his proactive approach to ensuring Hinome had all the resources she needed to grow, not just intellectually, but as a shinobi as well.


    Hinome epted the sealing scrolls containing the ninjutsu techniques from Hikari, a wave of gratitude washing over her.


    She felt a profound sense of appreciation, recognizing the lengths to which Hikari went to ensure her safety and development.


    For Hinome, Hikari''s significance in her life transcended the professional realm. While Hikari might view her as a vital partner in their shared endeavors, to Hinome, he was the most important person in her life.


    His actions¡ªprotecting her, supporting her, and fostering her growth¡ªhighlighted a level of care that no one else had shown since her parents passed away. This realization deepened her respect and affection for him, further solidifying the unique bond she shared with him.


    A few years earlier, Hikari had taken the initiative to determine Hinome''s chakra affinities, which revealed her unique twin affinities for wind and lightning release.


    Since that discovery, he had dedicated himself to nurturing those affinities, sharing with her the methods and practices he had used to enhance his own wind release capabilities earlier.


    Over time, Hikari introduced Hinome to a variety of lower-level jutsu, focusing on C and D ranks, to build a solid foundation and gradually increase her mastery over her affinities.


    "Come on, show me your progress in our n''s advanced techniques...", Hikari''s voice broke through the air, a hint of a smile ying on his lips as he assumed a Gentle Fist stance opposite Hinome.


    Hinome nodded in acknowledgment and mirrored his stance, her expression a mix of concentration and determination.


    Then sheunched into her attack. She executed the ''64-Palms'' with precision, her movements a blur as she moved from one strike to the next.


    This was followed by the ''Vacuum Palms'', sending a forceful burst of chakra towards Hikari, who expertly dodged, his smile widening in approval.


    Lastly, she performed the ''Rotation'', creating a protective barrier of chakra around herself, a technique that required a deep understanding of one''s chakra flow and control.


    Each technique Hinome disyed was a testament to Hikari''s meticulous teaching and her innate intelligence and adaptability. The sess of her execution confirmed that their training sessions had been fruitful, showcasing a level of mastery that was impressive, especially considering her Side Branch origins.


    Hikari''s decision to teach Hinome these advanced techniques, traditionally reserved for Main Branch members, was a bold move. However, he was unfazed by the potential controversy.


    His status as Third Elder now afforded him a certain level of autonomy and authority, and he was prepared to leverage it to support Hinome''s development.


    In his view, Hinome''s mastery of these techniques could be justified by her observational learning during their shared training sessions, a usible exnation that would likely quell any significant objections.


    Of course, Takumi''s and Patriarch''s techniques weren''t taught to her, as they were more personal to their lineages.


    Hikari considered Hinome to be invaluable, primarily because of the deep trust he had in her. This trust was rooted in their history, starting from when Hinome was very young and vulnerable, and was nurtured by Hikari''s continuous guidance and care ever since then.


    He believed these years of constant support and his ''influencing'' made the likelihood of her betraying him very slim.


    Not to mention that her significance to him was also further amplified by her exceptional abilities in research and her unique Byakugan microscopic vision, which were critical for achieving his objectives. That was why, he was determined to ensure her safety at all costs.


    Hinome''s prowess in medical ninjutsu, augmented by her specialized microscopic Byakugan vision, had allowed her to excel in some areas even beyond Hikari, particrly in self-healing.


    This skill set ced her performance around the Special Jonin level, quite unusual for a Side Branch member of her age.


    During this spar, Hinome also demonstrated not only her mastery of conventional techniques but also her innovative approach tobat.


    She had developed unique techniques that leveraged her medical ninjutsu affinity and Gentle Fist training in offensive capacities, such as chakra pathway severances and clotting.


    By using her Yang Release, she could also induce cellr overgrowth in her opponents, an effective way to incapacitate them.


    However, she didn''t get a chance to use this against Hikari, due to the difference in strength.


    After offering Hinome numerous pointers throughout their spar, they eventually concluded their short session.


    Hikari, with a smile of approval,plimented Hinome on her progress, acknowledging the strides she had made in her training,


    "You are developing your strength quite well, Hinome...", He remarked, his words carrying a tone of genuine praise and satisfaction.


    "However, I feel that Hinome would truly experience a great breakthrough in strength only after focusing on sessfully mixing those two nature release affinities of yours together and creating your own unique, entirely new pseudo-Kekkei Genkai elemental release from the mix, as we discussed before...", Hikari suddenly added.


    In the past few years, Hikari had shifted his research focus mostly towards a deeper understanding of chakra as an energy source after learning basically everything else there was to learn about this world over the years.


    That was why he also now knew so much about stuff like ''chakra potency'' and the development and growth of the inner chakra pathway system, among other aspects.


    This extensive research had equipped him with a profound knowledge base, which he was eager to share with Hinome, especially given her unique talents, insights, and abilities.


    Hikari proposed that Hinome could achieve unprecedented growth bybining her Wind and Lightning affinities to forge a new elemental nature release unique to only her.


    This innovative approach, leveraging her distinct Byakugan ''micro'' vision and her prowess in cutting-edge research, held the promise of creating something truly exceptional that could redefine her capabilities and offer surprise advantages over all of her potential enemies.


    "I read over the literature regarding that, and I felt that it is truly possible, but extremely hard to achieve. However, I also feel that I have to do this for myself if I want to gain a foothold in this cutthroat world like you always say...",


    Hinome, still catching her breath and a bit sweaty from their duel, now dressed in more formal white robes styled for female Hyuga members, but of a more noble kind of origin, sent to her by Hikari himself through his servants, expressed her determination. The conviction in her voice and the resolve on her face underscored the depth of hermitment.


    Over the years, Hinome''s desire for knowledge and power had grown, fueled by the insights she shared with Hikari about the realities of their world.


    However, this desire was not entirely just about personal ambition; it was also driven by her wish to remain valuable to Hikari, to ensure she never became a liability or irrelevant to him.


    The thought of a future without Hikari''s presence, guidance, and support was unimaginable to her, highlighting the profound impact he had on her life and aspirations.


    Confidence brimmed within Hinome, bolstered by the knowledge of Hikari''s own daring achievements.


    She believed in her capacity to create this new elemental release, seeing it as a challenge within her reach, especially given the innovative breakthroughs Hikari himself had aplished.


    However, after suddenly seeing Hinome''s determined expression, which he found unexpectedly ''endearing'', Hikari couldn''t help but smile, and in a rare departure from his usual demeanor, and in a moment of uncharacteristic spontaneity,


    He stepped forward and affectionately ruffled her hair, an act of encouragement and approval for her bold words and the confidence she just disyed. This gentle gesture left her hair even more tousled than before.


    Caught off guard by his own actions, Hikari then stared at his hand, as if it belonged to someone else, his mind racing with thoughts that shed with his typical cold and calcted approach.


    Hinome''s reaction was one of sheer surprise; her face flushed with a deep red, her usually neat and dense bangs now disarrayed, inadvertently revealing the faint, ominous mark of the Side Branch beneath.


    Hikari was momentarily taken aback by his impulsiveness, reflecting, ''It seems that after bing an Elder, I''ve be looser and bolder than before. What was I doing? I can''t afford to waste time and focus on such matters; I need to bepletely focused on my goals...'',


    This introspection led Hikari to recognize that his recent rise in status might have loosened the reins on his suppressed instincts, particrly his subtle and strange affection for Hinome, a realization that caught him by surprise.


    At that moment, Hikari acknowledged theplexity of his feelings rted to Hinome, thankfully still in their ''infancy'',recognizing them as a potential huge distraction from his ambitions and the strength he sought to achieve.


    Despite the warmth of the interaction, he resolved to firmly reign in these initial impulses, believing that such vulnerabilities could not be afforded in his quest for power and influence, especially not while he was still this rtively ''weak'' inparison to many potential threats.


    Unbeknownst to Hikari, however, Hinome was watching him closely at this time, her gaze hidden beneath her disheveled bangs. The unexpected warmth of his gesture left her with a racing heart, her cheeks flushed even more deeply from the brief but impactful contact.


    Yet, as she witnessed Hikari''s immediate shift towards regret for his previous action, a twinge of disappointment flickered within her entire being.


    However, Hinome''s keen observation also led to a pivotal realization. As she saw Hikari grapple with his actions, her initial disappointment gave way to a deeper understanding.


    She also recognized theplexity of her own feelings towards him now, feelings that had evolved and were now finally openly realized by her.


    And she also sensed a mirror of those emotions faintly in Hikari too¡ªalbeit restrained by the ambitions that weighed heavily on him and possible hidden fears.


    ''So that is it... I finally understand those feelings slightly... And also his feelings for me are somewhat simr... It is just that his ambitions probably prevent them from growing more and prevent him from being more open to facing them.'',


    ''Then I also won''t be the one to distract him, and will silently grow in strength and assist him more, in various ways, until that day finally arrives in the future...'', This epiphany brought a sincere smile to Hinome''s face next, even as they stood together in an awkward silence.

 55. The First Touch With the Natural Energy

    55. The First Touch With the Natural Energy


    After their parting, Hikari made his way back to the main building of the Third Estate, which now served as his home.


    The estate, grand in scale and rich in Hyuga tradition, embodied the prestige of his new position.


    As he entered, the familiar yet imposing architecture of the main building stood as a testament to the lineage''s history and power.


    The building was a harmonious blend of traditional Hyuga aesthetic and modern shinobi functionality, with spacious halls and rooms designed for both living and training.


    Hikari''s thoughts lingered on Hinome, her determination, and the unique bond they shared, even as he ascended to the roof of the building.


    The rooftop offered an expansive view of Konoha, with its bustling streets in the distance and the Hokage Monument close to thepound.


    This sight, coupled with the cool evening air, provided a moment of reflection and solitude.


    Settling into a seated position at this vantage point, Hikari began to focus on calming his mind from those previous matters amongst other ''impurities''.


    He employed a breathing technique designed to steady his heart rate and clear his thoughts, a necessary precursor to the next phase of his routine.


    The tranquility of the scene, with the sprawling vige below bathed in the hues of the setting sun, served as the perfect backdrop for this practice.


    With his mind and body aligned, Hikari prepared to delve into a crucial part of his daily regimen: spiritual meditationbined with Byakugan dojutsu training and the cultivation of his ability to see and interact with natural energy.


    As Hikari continued to refine his unique Byakugan ability to perceive natural energy, the once vague outlines began to rify, though not yet to the extent that he could utilize this energy inbat or training.


    Each day, he patiently worked to deepen his connection with the natural energy currents that flowed around him, these transparent, nature-like forces that remained just beyond fullprehension.


    His approach involved gently merging his chakra with the natural energy, attempting to establish a connection that would, over time, be strong enough for practical use.


    Hikari''s goal was not merely to observe but to mold this elusive and unique energy of this universe together with his own chakra, integrating it into his techniques and enhancing his power further.


    However, even establishing the slightest connection proved challenging. The process was gradual, requiring patience and a deep, intuitive understanding of both his chakra and the natural energy that surrounded him.


    This endeavor was akin to reaching out into a vast, unseen world, trying to grasp something intangible and elusive.


    Despite the difficulties, Hikari''s dedication never wavered. He pushed the boundaries of what was considered ''normal,'' each day, focusing intensely,


    Exerting his Byakugan beyond conventional limits, and making hundreds of thousands of attempts to forge a connection between his inner chakra and the elusive patterns of natural invisible energy around him over the years.


    Hikari''s relentless pursuit, marked by his extraordinary concentration and the sheer volume of his attempts, underscored hismitment to breaking new ground in shinobi arts.


    This journey was solitary and demanding, pushing Hikari to the limits of his abilities and even his sanity.


    Yet, it was driven by the belief that connecting with natural energy could elevate his skills to unprecedented levels.


    However, eventually, just before Hikari settled into the routine of his evening, an unprecedented breakthrough urred.


    For the first time, suddenly he managed to grasp a connection between his chakra and the natural energy surrounding him.


    This moment was fleeting, yet unmistakably real¡ªa significant first step toward mastering a skill that had eluded him for so long.


    The sensation of finally connecting his chakra with the natural energy sent a wave of ecstatic relief and excitement through him.


    It was a moment of validation for all the relentless efforts, the countless attempts that had led to this point, Hikari even had an urge to cry.


    Hikari found himself caught in a whirlwind of euphoria and disbelief, marveling at the sensation that coursed through him as his chakra mingled with the natural energy.


    This achievement prompted Hikari to reflect on the recent changes in his life. He pondered whether this sess was, in part, due to the internal shift that came with his ascent to the position of Third Elder.


    The responsibilities and recognition that apanied his new role had, paradoxically, led to a loosening of some of his mental pressures.


    Or was it all perhaps because he was truly beginning to ept his identity as a real part of this world after the eight years already passed since his transmigration here, more and more, finalizingpletely now after getting that role?


    Just as this newfound status had inadvertently encouraged him to express his affection for Hinome more openly, it seemed to have also granted him a deeper sense of internal peace.


    This rxation of his mental barriers, he spected, might have contributed to making this connection possible.


    Hikari contemted the idea that his position and the confidence it brought had permeated his subconscious, allowing him to approach his training with a more open and rxed mindset.


    This mental state, free from the weight of proving himself and now finally fully epted within the n after 8 long years of calcting and living under a constant, yet subtle tension, might have been the key to achieving what had been just out of reach for 5 years.


    The realization that his psychological state could have such a profound impact on his shinobi skills was enlightening.


    It suggested that his journey to mastering natural energy was not just a physical challenge but a deeply mental and spiritual one as well.


    As hey down to sleep, with his eyes still pulsating from the day''s efforts, Hikari felt a renewed sense of purpose and optimism.


    The breakthrough of the evening was a reminder that growth oftenes from unexpected ces, and sometimes, easing the pressure on oneself can open the door to new possibilities.


    This lesson, learned in the training field, promised to influence not just his approach to mastering natural energy, but also his leadership and personal growth moving forward.

 56. The Start Of Cellular Research With Hinome

    56. The Start Of Cellr Research With Hinome


    The next morning, buoyed by the high spirits from his breakthrough, Hikaripleted his pre-afternoon training with ease.


    It wasn''t long after when one of his attendants approached him with news that brightened his mood further¡ªthe newly procured expensive equipment he and Hinome had been eagerly awaiting had secretly arrived at thepound during the night.


    It had also already been delivered to Hinome''s research room within the residence by now.


    Acknowledging the update with a nod, Hikari made his way to the newly established main research room, curious and excited to see the new tools that would push their work forward.


    Upon entering, he found Hinome already there, deeply engrossed in examining the equipment ''from head to toe'' in detail.


    She was d in her white research coat and using other simr necessities like masks and gloves. Alongside her were a few members of her research team, all of them focused on the newly arrived tools.


    Without needing any explicit instruction, after seeing him, they all saluted and addressed him respectfully after which they quickly gathered their notes and materials, making their way out of the room.


    Their departure was orderly and swift, leaving Hikari and Hinome alone amid the array of new equipment that filled the space.


    The equipment that arrived was specifically designed to advance cellr research, a field that required precision, delicacy, and a deep understanding of biological processes.


    Among the various tools and devices, there were sophisticated cell extractors, designed for the delicate task of isting cells without damaging them.


    Additionally, there were incubators, providing the perfect environment for cell cultivation and multiplication, mimicking the conditions necessary for growth outside the human body.


    There were only a few pieces of such technology in the current shinobi world, made by a few special engineers, different equipment, and parts from all around the world, making it nearly impossible for anyone who was not of Hikari''s current status and wealth to acquire them.


    And it involved Hikari keeping tabs on them and following it all even months before he became the Third Elder in preparation.


    The centerpiece of the new equipment, however, was a set of human-sized tanks. These tanks were designed with versatility in mind, capable of holding entire human bodies for advanced research and experimentation if the need arose in the future or something unexpected happened during their cellr multiplication phase requiring future analysis.


    As Hikari and Hinome went over each piece of equipment, their interactions remained strictly professional, tactfully avoiding any mention of the personal moment they had shared the day before. Their focus was on the specifications, functions, and quality of the tools before them.


    They discussed the potential applications and how each device could be integrated into their current research projects, particrly how they could be used in conjunction with Hinome''s unique microscopic Byakugan vision.


    Hinome''s ability, which had recently advanced to reach the cellr vision level, whenbined with the advanced microscopes that were part of the equipment, opened up new possibilities for their research.


    These microscopes could magnify her vision further, allowing for unprecedented detail in their study of cells and their structures.


    The scene in the research room was one of intense concentration and mutual respect for each other''s high expertise.


    As they moved from one piece of equipment to the next, there was a palpable sense of excitement about the potential these tools represented.


    "For now, your focus should be on extracting and then sessfully multiplying the cells of those chakra-infused mice...", Hikari directed, his tone serious yet encouraging,


    "I believe it''s still premature to proceed with human experimentation at least for a few years. However, our ultimate goal is clear ¨C the sessful transntation of foreign cells from individuals with desired characteristics into our own bodies."


    Hinome nodded, her expression determined, "I understand. The first step is mastering the process with the mice. By ensuring we can control cell growth and replication in them, we''reying the groundwork for moreplex procedures."


    "And with those tanks, we can move towardsrger-scale experiments. Initially for the mice, ensuring we can monitor and adjust the environment to suit the needs of different cell types."


    Hikari nodded, "Right. And the advanced microscopes,bined with your Byakugan, will give us a rare insight into the process at a cellr level. Observing how chakra influences cell behavior in real-time will be invaluable."


    "Our approach...", Hinome continued, "Will be methodical. We''ll document each variation in the process, analyzing how different chakra natures affect cell viability and growth. This data will be crucial when we eventually transition to human cells."


    Hikari nodded and concluded, "Once we''ve perfected the technique with mice, we''ll have a solid foundation for moving on to the next phase with humans. Your unique ability to see at the cellr level will be key in identifying and selecting the ideal cells for transntation.",


    "However, it''s important to remember that all of these efforts, while groundbreaking, cannot fully substitute for actual gic research...", Hikari added thoughtfully,


    "True transformation of our bloodlines and destinies hinges on our understanding and maniption at the gic level. So, alongside this work, you should continue to refine your vision and explore that domain as well.",


    Hikari was well aware that gic research was almost non-existent in their world, in a slight contrast to the cellr-level insights they could piece together from scattered sources over months of diligent searching, their vision, and n''s and Konoha''s inte medical records.


    "The cellr work we''re undertaking is crucial as the first step, the building block, and a less favorable alternative if needed, but unlocking the secrets of gics could offer us the keys to fundamentally altering our bloodlines, enabling us to potentially bypass all kinds of natural limitations..."


    Hinome absorbed his words, understanding the immense challenge and opportunity they represented,


    "So, I''ll dedicate part of my research to developing techniques for gic analysis and maniption. My Byakugan''s ability to see at a microscopic level could also be crucial in identifying gic markers and alterations in the future when it gets even more powerful."


    Hikari and Hinome were setting their sights on discoveries that could redefine the very essence of shinobi capabilities, guided by a blend of Hikari''s knowledge from another world and the unique powers of Hinome''s eyes.


    Soon after imparting these thoughts and setting the stage for the ambitious path ahead, Hikari excused himself from the room, leaving Hinome to her work.


    His departure was a silent acknowledgment of his trust in her abilities and her dedication to their shared goals. Hinome, now alone with the equipment and her thoughts, felt a surge of motivation fueled by the enormity of the task ahead and the confidence ced in her by Hikari.


    She inwardly vowed to not disappoint him and in the future, and with her research, to create a reality in which the two of them could truly break through their natural confines and truly be open with one another, in this kind of troubled and dangerous world, without any fear for their future, and unexpected oues, that were always on Hikari''s mind since a young age, for some reason, in her observation and her deep silent understanding of him over the years.

 57. Venturing Outside the Clan Compound

    57. Venturing Outside the n Compound


    One monthter, Hikari was making his way through Konoha. He was crossing one of the vige''s bridges over the Naka River, which generally split the area where the medium andrge ns, of various sizes and influence, including the Hyuga, lived from where everyone else stayed. The lengthy river flowed gently through Konoha, its waters clear and serene.


    Crossing it led Hikari into the Hot Springs District, a lively area known for its warm, steaming baths and weing atmosphere. His next destination was the Hatake n''s residence, as they currently lived in the more ''civilian'' part of the vige, unlike the Aburame and Inuzuka.


    As the Hyuga n''s newly appointed ''Alliance Coordinator,'' Hikari was currently, finally formally stepping into that pivotal role now, his mission was to strengthen the bonds between his n and their traditional allies alongside forming entirely new alliances.


    The streets here were filled with the sounds ofughter and conversation, offering a stark contrast to the more reserved areas of the vige, as the Hyuga npound usually was.


    While walking, Hikari reflected on his previous meetings with the heads of the Inuzuka and Aburame ns that just concluded. They were his first ''targets'' for today, and the meetings with themsted for a few hours.


    Despite being quite young, due to his position as the Third Elder and Alliance Coordinator of the Hyuga n, the meetings were conducted with the gravity, diplomacy, and respect expected to be given for someone of his role, so, he met with both heads of the two ns.


    Both n heads, Tsume Inuzuka and Shibi Aburame, now in their early twenties and newly appointed, but with personal strengths already reaching into the Elite Jonin level territory, shared their concerns with Hikari, particrly about Danzo''s aggressive tactics to recruit¡ªor more urately, poach¡ªyoung talent from their ns for his Root organization with and sometimes even without the consent of the two ns, but there was nothing they could do.


    After all, the Hokage''s faction was out of the reach of their ability to fight against. During these discussions, Hikari conveyed the Hyuga n''s shared rm over Danzo''s actions and extended a promise of support to both ns in resisting such encroachments in the future.


    Yet, Hikari was acutely aware of the underlying dynamics at y. By timing their offer of support just right after the deed was already done, the Hyuga n could then position themselves as indispensable allies to both the Inuzuka and Aburame ns going forward.


    This strategic move was designed to increase their dependence on the Hyuga, thereby strengthening the Hyuga n''s influence and ensuring that these ns would be more closely tied to them moving forward.


    Due to his prominent role and high status within the Hyuga n, Hikari was currently guarded by an entourage of 15 ordinary Jonin-level bodyguards, all hailing from the n''s Side Branch, as seen by their covered foreheads.


    These bodyguards formed a protective circle around him as they moved, their faces set in vignt and serious expressions, their demeanor machine-like in their focus and efficiency.


    Meanwhile, Elite Jonin of the Hyuga n typically all hailed from the various Main Branch lineages directly, so they were of a higher status and they were usually needed to remain within the n''s domain during all times, safeguarding it against any potential threats.


    And there were not many of them, to begin with, probably not more than one or two dozen in the entire n, in Hikari''s impression. They were typically really close in bloodline to Elders.


    This all meant that, despite Hikari''s significant position, Elite Jonins were still not avable to apany and protect him when he went outside the n''s immediate vicinity like today.


    The reason for the current number of Jonin apanying Hikari wasn''t just a reflection of their avability within the n but also a strategic decision to avoid sending the wrong message to Konoha atrge.


    Deploying toorge of a protective ring could suggest that the Hyuga n harbored a deep-seated mistrust of the vige. Such a disy could inadvertently alienate the n from the rest of Konoha, a scenario the Hyugas were keen to avoid, even though they really harbored deep mistrust for it atrge now.


    This careful bnce of protection and perception was a calcted move, ying into theplex politics of vige life. The Hyuga n, while protective of its best prodigy, was mindful of the broader implications of their actions. They aimed to protect Hikari effectively without casting any shadows on their loyalty and trust in the vige''s security measures.


    However, the presence of the bodyguards wasn''t without justification. A few years back, during Hikari''s initial visits to Sakumo Hatake, the Anbu frequently intercepted him, urging him to meet with the Hokage for some reason.


    Hikari consistently refused, asserting that he was under no obligation toply with Hokage''s requests for a meeting. He wasn''t part of Konoha''s standard shinobi force, nor did he serve in any of Konoha''s administrative bodies.


    Instead, he was a member of the Hyuga n''s Main Branch, and he argued that the Hokage had no direct authority over him in any way and cities the Konoha''s founding agreements.


    Initially, the Anbu''s approaches were polite, but their interactions grew tense over time, as Hikari''s rejected them over and over again, culminating in a standoff with Hikari''s Jonin bodyguards at one time before they backed off for good.


    After these confrontations, the Anbu ceased their attempts to coerce Hikari into meeting with the Hokage probably so that the old man could try and indoctrinate or test his mindset, potential, or strength in some sneaky way.


    Hikari''s steadfast refusal to meet him had even more obvious reasons, concerns for his own safety, for the safety of his own time and brain cells, and it was also a stance supported by the Hyuga Council.


    So, he directed the Anbu to convey a message to the Hokage every time: any officialmunication with him should be routed through the Hyuga Patriarch first as he was just following the internal n rules that the Patriarch established for his conduct outside.


    As Hikari and his entourage of bodyguards navigated the streets of Konoha, they drew the curious gazes of civilians.


    Hikari, in his traditional Hyuga-style dark blue robes,plemented with a Haori, presented an image of nobility and calm authority. His attire, rich in the n''s heritage, set him apart, highlighting his status within the Hyuga and his distinct role in the vige''s tapestry despite his young age, in fact, it made him even more ''important-looking'' to everyone passing by.


    His bodyguards, simrly, were not d in the Konoha Jonin uniforms but wore uniforms that echoed the Hyuga style.


    This choice of attire served as a visual statement of their allegiance to the n first and foremost, reinforcing the notion of unity and distinct identity among the Hyuga members.


    Civilians watched with a mixture of respect, intrigue, and a slight unease as this formidable procession passed. Some whispered among themselves, specting on the nature of Hikari''s visit or the implications of such a visible show of n solidarity within the vige.


    Children paused in their y to stare, while shopkeepers and passersby momentarily halted their activities to take in the sight.


    Hikari, for his part, maintained aposed demeanor, his focus forward. His appearance and the silent, protective circle formed by his bodyguards conveyed a sense of purpose and determination, leaving asting impression on those who witnessed their quick passage.


    As Hikari made his way through Konoha, overhearing some of the nderous rumors about Sakumo Hatake, that emerged during thest few days, he found it intriguing, a fascinating study of how easily public opinion could be swayed by the narrative spun by those in power.


    His observation of the vigers'' quickness to condemn Sakumo based on rumors served as a confirmation of the gullibility and malleability of the masses, also present in his past life.


    The ability of the Hokage''s faction to manipte public perception to such arge degree highlighted an aspect of power dynamics within Konoha that Hikari, ever the pragmatist, recognized as a truly valuable area.


    Hikari''s understanding of the advantages that came with controlling the narrative and public opinion was sharpened by his knowledge from a modern-era past life.


    Yet, Hikari was under no illusion about the dynamics of power in this world. He recognized that, despite the potential leverage offered by ''soft power'' through narrative control, it was ''hard power''¡ªthe sheer force of elite shinobi strength and ability¡ªthat ultimately held sway in their society.


    The dominance of elite personal force over the public sentiment of broader masses was a fundamental truth of the shinobi world, one that the Hokage''s faction seemed to forget.


    He long understood that the mistreatment and alienation of a shinobi as powerful as Sakumo by the vige''s leadership could be a critical mistake¡ªone that Hikari could exploit next.


    By positioning himself as an ally to Sakumo in the wake of the Hokage faction''s blunders, he envisioned turning one of Konoha''s most formidable warriors against those who had sought to undermine him.


    The Hokage faction''s failure to recognize all of this, in his view, would be their downfall, especially as he worked to align Sakumo''s considerable abilities with his own ambitions.

 58. A Talk and Alliance with Sakumo Hatake

    58. A Talk and Alliance with Sakumo Hatake


    After navigating the streets of Konoha for a while, Hikari, nked by his entourage of bodyguards, reached his destination.


    The journey through the vige, under the curious and sometimes astonished gazes of the citizens, culminated in front of the Hatake n''s residence.


    Thispound, less populous than in its heydays and now housing Sakumo along with just a few dozen other nsmen, presented a quiet but dignified front.


    The Hatake n''s residence was marked by its understated elegance. The main house, constructed in a traditional style, featured gracefully sloping roofs and wooden beams, exemplifying ssic shinobi architecture.


    Surrounding the structure was a modestly sized garden, meticulously kept, with various nts that added tranquility to thepound.


    A sturdy gate stood at the entrance, signifying both wee and warning. It led to a stone path that meandered through the garden, guiding visitors towards the main building.


    Here and there, practice dummies and weapon racks hinted at the martial prowess of the n''s members, even in reduced numbers.


    Hikari approached the main building, after signaling his entourage to remain standing back, his presencemanding yet respectful.


    An old man, who appeared to be a caretaker or perhaps a retired n member, was sitting serenely in front of it.


    Pausing before the elder, Hikari addressed him with a formal tone, "I''m here to see Sakumo-sama, is he avable?",


    His voice carried a blend of respect and purpose, signaling the importance of his visit.


    Recognizing Hikari from his previous visits, the old man stood up with a simrly respectful nod, "Wait here, I will go and check with the n head himself...", He informed Hikari, adding a note of concern,


    "He has not been feeling quite well recently, so please understand...," With that, the man departed, leaving the understanding Hikari alone as he made his way to consult with the n head.


    After a short while, the old man returned, his expression neutral but carrying an implicit invitation.


    "You may go ahead...", He told Hikari, indicating that Sakumo was willing to receive him despite his recent withdrawal from the world and mental state in general due to the recent rumours surrounding him.


    The old man''s demeanor suggested a mix of reverence for Sakumo''s status within the n and concern for his well-being.


    Hikari made his way through the quiet hallway of the Hatake residence, each step bringing him closer to the darkened room where Sakumo resided.


    As he reached the sliding door that separated him from the n head, he noticed it was slightly ajar, opening onto a courtyard that allowed a stream of sunlight to spill into the otherwise dim space.


    Sakumo, seated in a position that allowed him to gaze out into the courtyard, turned his attention towards the door as Hikari appeared.


    He managed a smile, a warm greeting that contrasted with the solemn atmosphere surrounding him, "Hikari-kun...", He acknowledged with a nod, his voice not appearing that much strange.


    Hikari thought to himself, ''He''s masking it quite well... No wonder no one in the original story, neither Kakashi nor the other nsmen, managed to figure out what was going through his head right now and what he wanted to do to himself...''


    "Sakumo-san...", Hikari started, "I''ve kept hearing about some troubling rumorstely more and more, and it made me want toe and talk to you directly, to hear your side of things and see how you''re really doing.'',


    "I hope I''m not bothering you bying here like this...", He said, making sure his words were sincere and respectful.


    "Rumors...", Sakumo smiled slightly, "I''ve learned to ept that theye with the territory of being who I am in this vige. But I assure you, I''m managing as well as one can in situations like these."


    His demeanor, the calmness in his voice, and the poise with which he carried himself all contributed to an impression of wellness.


    Meanwhile, Hikari quickly processed the information, connecting the dots in his mind,


    ''Having really no friends to begin with, due to jealousy and suppression from the Hokage''s faction, and being introverted by nature, on top of masking his real mind this well, it''s truly expected for no one to understand him...'', Hikari reflected.


    Soon after, Hikari and Sakumo found themselves sitting outside in the courtyard, enjoying some tea together.


    Then after a bit more of casual conversation, the atmosphere shifted as Hikari''s expression grew more serious. Setting down his teacup, he looked directly at Sakumo with a gravity that matched his words.


    "Sakumo-san, I hope you don''t mind me being forthright with you. It''s clear to me, and likely to you as well, that the rumors circting about you haven''t just sprung up on their own.",


    "They seem too pointed, too widespread to be mere vige gossip. I''m younger, I know, and I hope that doesn''t lessen the weight of my words, but I have some thoughts on the matter that I''d like to share with you if you''re willing to hear me out...",


    Hikari said, his tone respectful yet underscored with a sincere desire to discuss the issue at hand openly.


    Sakumo was a bit surprised to hear what Hikari wanted to say, but he kept his usual calm and serious look while saying, "Please do continue, Hikari-kun, no need to be so reserved. I value your opinion quite well...",


    He knew Hikari as a friendly and talented youngster, the child of two shinobi colleagues he once knew well.


    These were people who had served with him and sadly didn''t make it through the Second Shinobi World War, something that weighed heavily on Sakumo since he was their leader at the time.


    He had always seen Hikari, who started visiting him a few years back, as a nice, polite young man, quite ambitious and different from his parents in many ways.


    Sakumo thought about how Hikari seemed to value his own survival more, a trait that might have saved him from the tragic fate of his parents.


    He realized that the negative rumors about himself might be because people saw him as too gentle or easygoing, someone who wouldn''t push back against criticism or tough situations.


    "Let me speak inly and with total honesty then...", Hikari began, his voice steady and sincere, "I find it hard to believe that anyone could staypletely unaffected in the face of such onugh. I just believe that you''re exceptionally skilled at concealing your true feelings.",


    "And despite the perceptions, others may have of you, I also believe that even the strongest and kindest among us reach a point where they can no longer just stand by and not retaliate against those who haveunched such targeted, malicious psychological attacks against them...",


    "And I believe that, after giving it some thought, I''vee up with an idea on how you can retaliate against them withoutpromising your principles or your loyalty to the vige...", Hikari continued, his tone suggesting a blend of strategic thinking and ''genuine'' concern for Sakumo''s predicament.


    "Hikari-kun... I appreciate your concerns, but I''m really fine. I''ve gotten used to it...", Sakumo sighed, a note of resignation in his voice as he responded to Hikari''s earnest proposal.


    "No, Sakumo-san, I don''t believe you''re as fine as you say. Nor do I think you''ve resigned yourself to the current state of affairs. You''ve scarcely left this residence in thest month, if at all. It''s clear to me that you''re struggling, perhaps even feeling depressed.",


    "Suppressing your true feelings and thoughts will only make things harder for you in the long run. So, please, just hear me out on my proposal. Then you can judge for yourself whether it holds any merit or not...", Hikari pressed on, his tone mixing concern with a gentle insistence.


    "In fact, have you started having some extreme thoughts, perhaps?", Hikari ventured further, his voiceced with a cautious concern.


    At Hikari''s probing question, Sakumo was genuinely taken aback, his usualposed demeanor momentarily slipping as his eyes widened slightly in surprise.


    Hikari''s urate guess had struck a chord, revealing a hiddenyer of turmoil within him.


    Indeed, the relentless pressure, the whispers of condemnation, and the istion had begun to erode Sakumo''s resilience, leading him to entertain thoughts that were once unthinkable.


    ''Could it truly be as Hikari-kun said, do I have depression? Did my mental state really get that affected already...'', Sakumo found himself pondering, the question echoing in his mind.


    For so long, he had been a bastion of strength and resolve, a figure others looked up to. The notion that he, Sakumo Hatake, could be suffering from depression, that his unyielding spirit could be faltering under the weight of his circumstances, was both startling and illuminating.


    Seeing Sakumo''s moment of vulnerability, Hikari didn''t pause, choosing to press on with his point, aiming to guide Sakumo''s perspective even more.


    "Sakumo-san, the fault doesn''t lie with you. It''s unjust to me yourself to such an extent, to let those thoughts consume you. The real fault lies with those who stirred the public against you, who may have even manipted those you chose to save into speaking out against you a few days ago.", Hikari spoke with conviction.


    "It''s crucial to distinguish between the roles people y and who they truly are beneath those titles. Respect for their positions doesn''t require eptance of their actions, especially when those actions are driven by malice. Being in a position of power doesn''t grant anyone infallibility or moral superiority.",


    "Even the title of Hokage is not preordained or reserved for a select few by divine right. It''s a position that signifies leadership and responsibility, one that can be attained by anyone dedicated to the well-being of the vige, including you...", Hikari continued, his words deliberate and empowering.


    "Those who misuse their authority, who leverage it for personal power grabs, they''re the ones at fault. Their positions don''t shield them from ountability, nor do they grant them the right to manipte and harm others without consequence. Remember, power in the vige is about service and protection, not coercion or suppression...", Hikari concluded.


    Hikari''s decision to visit Sakumo today was the result of careful consideration, pinpointing this moment as the most critical juncture for intervention.


    He sensed that Sakumo was on the cusp of piecing together the origins of his plight, recognizing the forces at y behind the scenes.


    However, this period of realization also posed a significant risk; if Hikari dyed his visit any longer, Sakumo might have spiraled further into despair or, in the worst case,pletely ended his own life like in the original story.


    The situation had be increasingly dire, especially as those Sakumo had once saved began to turn against him, likely influenced by the maniptions of the Hokage''s faction.


    This betrayal by his former teammates added another hugeyer to Sakumo''s already existing predicament, and Hikari, aware of the delicate timing and not knowing the precise dates from the original story''s timeline of this period regarding the actual suicide realization of Sakumo, felt the urgency to act right away.


    He understood that waiting was no longer an option; the stakes were too high, and the window for effectively reaching out to Sakumo and redirecting his path was rapidly closing.


    Additionally, Hikari felt that he could help change Sakumo''s mind about his original decision sessfully because he knew that Sakumo''s choice to end his life was also filled with doubts from the start.


    He knew that his decision was made amidst huge uncertainty and was likely a choice that teetered on the edge of indecision.


    That was because, from the original story, Hikari knew that Sakumo''s soul ended up in Purgatory after his suicide, and that realm was reserved for souls burdened with extreme regrets and unresolved attachments to the living world.


    This knowledge gave Hikari a crucial insight: Sakumo''s choice was not made with a sense of sharp resolution but rather as ast resort by someone who still harbored deep connections and unfulfilled aspirations.


    It suggested that Sakumo''s spirit was not at peace, gued by thoughts of what could have been and the impact of his actions on those he left behind, particrly his son, Kakashi.


    Understanding this, Hikari believed that if he could provide Sakumo with a semnce of hope and a sense of purpose, and a different perspective in general, it might be enough to tip the scales.


    By reaching out at this pivotal moment, Hikari aimed to inject a level of rity and support into Sakumo''s troubled thoughts, offering him a lifeline out of the despair that threatened to consume him.


    Just like in the original story, if someone had truly seen the depth of Sakumo''s inner pain, they might have been able to pull him back from the brink. Unfortunately, back then, no one did. However, Hikari noticed it now.


    Capturing Sakumo''s attention, Hikari pressed on, "The vige belongs to you just as much as it does to anyone in the Hokage''s circle. And you didn''t harm the vige''s interests in any real sense. Think about it¡ªhad someone close to the Hokage done the same, would there be such an uproar?",


    "You''re being targeted because you''re seen as a formidable variable, a potential Hokage who operates beyond their direct influence. Their actions are driven by a desire for power, not the vige''s well-being."


    "Why sumb to their narrative? Challenge them, not as representatives of the vige, but as individuals driven by their own selfish motives, and indirectly improve the entire vige in this way as well.",


    "So, I''m putting forward a formal proposal: consider running for the position of Jonin Commander of the vige, and our Hyuga n will support you. It''s time to stop being on the defensive, constantly repelled by their maneuvers. Use that role not just to counter their influence, but to foster positive change within Konoha too.", Hikari concluded with conviction.


    Sakumo, visibly taken by Hikari''s passionate speech, showed a spark of interest that hadn''t been there before. It was clear that the young man''s words had struck a chord, offering a new perspective on Sakumo''s dire situation.


    Yet, despite the sense of agreement that seemed to resonate within him, Sakumo expressed his reservations with a thoughtful expression.


    "You''ve got some really good points, Hikari-kun, and you''re truly wise beyond your years...", Sakumo said, showing a mix of surprise and agreement for Hikari''s philosophy fundamentally.


    "I haven''t thought about it all like that fully before, and you make a lot of sense. But, to be honest, the idea of running for Jonin Commander seems pretty far-fetched to me. With all these rumors floating around and how people see me now, it feels like I don''t stand much of a chance, even if your n supports me. I''m sorry, but I think the odds are against me..."


    "Well, it''s not just my n that will back you. If you''re on board, and if the second part of my n unfolds as I''ve envisioned, we''re aiming to position you as the informal leader of a new faction within the vige.",


    "Think of it as a ''small ns'' faction,'' which would include ns like your own Hatake n. I''m sure you''re well aware of the pressures small ns in Konoha are facing, given the challenges your n has encountered...", Hikari exined,ying out a broader strategy.


    After hearing this, Sakumo''s surprise at Hikari''s further exnation grew once again, and as he mulled over his words some more, his admiration for Hikari''s strategic mind grew even more. Then the more Sakumo considered the logic and potential impact of assembling an informal "small ns'' faction," the more he recognized the true brilliance of Hikari''s vision.


    Being the leader of the Hatake n himself, Sakumo was intimately familiar with the challenges and pressures small ns faced under the governance of Konoha''s leaders.


    His n, once numerous and influential, had dwindled significantly in size and strength since its inception into the vige many times over.


    Sakumo had witnessed firsthand how the policies and practices of the Hokage''s faction had led to the dilution of his n''s power.


    The systematic poaching of members, the indoctrination of young shinobi in the Academy, and the encouragement of marriages outside the n to civilians were some of the strategies that were imnted by all Hokages.


    This realization had only crystallized for Sakumo in light of his own recent experiences, leading him to reassess his once positive perception of the vige''s leadershippletely.


    As Sakumo reflected on Hikari''s n, he began to see the potential for genuine change. This wasn''t just about restoring his own reputation or securing a position of influence; it was about helping the small ns to foster a more equitable and inclusive vige governance.


    Hikari''s satisfaction grew as he observed Sakumo''s ''amazed'' reaction, his strategy slowly unfolding as nned. He had carefully considered Sakumo''s probabilisticmitment to his n and his inherently selfless character in crafting his approach as well.


    By appealing to Sakumo''s desire to protect his n and improve the vige''s politicalndscape for everyone else, Hikari aimed to motivate him not only from a ce of personal gain but for the ''greater good'' as well.


    He was even preparing to bring up Kakashi and his future as well but now realized that there would be no reason for that, as Sakumo already practically agreed, just doubting the feasibility of their n.


    Hikari understood that in the original timeline, the Hatake n effectively vanished, leaving Kakashi, who never questioned anything and blindly served the Hokage''s faction his entire life despite their actions, as its sole representative.


    From Hikari''s perspective, the uing Third Shinobi World War might have been the period during which the Hatake n was systematically dismantled. This would have been done quietly, removing a n capable of producing shinobi with Sakumo''s level of power, thereby eliminating what the Hokage''s faction perceived as a significant future risk to their control.

 59. Numbers Game: Hikari’s Electoral Strategy

    59. Numbers Game: Hikari¡¯s Electoral Strategy


    Sakumo nodded, absorbing the depth of Hikari''s n now fully, "Yes, I see your point. With the support of your Hyuga n and my own involvement, rallying the other smaller shinobi ns in the vige might indeed be very feasible. However, even with all of them on the boat, I''m still concerned about whether we would have enough numbers to secure a majority in the Jonin Council vote...",


    "And it will be pretty hard to convince that many civilians to hypothetically vote for me, those recent rumors are one thing, but civilians are also traditionally very leaning toward the Hokage''s faction...", He said, now reflecting only on the logistical challenges of their goal and expressing no other disapproval.


    "I''ve done the numbers on this, and you''re right Sakumo-san. Relying solely on our alliance, it''s going to be a tough call to rally enough Jonin behind you. And trying to sway the civilian poption is an uphill battle given the Hokage''s influence and the perks he can offer too...",


    "But there''s one group you''ve overlooked, a group even more sidelined than the smaller ns¡ªthe Uchiha n. They''re arguably the most marginalized group in the vige right now. If we manage to get their support for your bid as Jonin Commander, and in exchange, promise to them that you to use that position to support them more and work towards politically reintegrating them into the vige''s fabric further in the future, they might just be willing to join our cause as well this time around...", Hikari finally outlined his entire strategy this time.


    Hikari had indeed roughly done the math required for their n to seed. He understood that the Jonin Council, which votes for the next Jonin Commander or the head of the Jonin Council,prised approximately 500 members.


    To be considered a candidate in the election, one needed at least 50 votes, and the nominee with the highest tally would ultimately secure the position.


    Within this body, the Hyuga n boasted 100 members in the Jonin Council alone, a significant but not decisive contingent. It was worth noting that this number represented only about half of the Hyuga''s Jonin-level shinobi.


    The others, despite holding Jonin ranks, were not part of the Jonin Council. This was primarily because they hadn''t participated in missions contributing directly to the vige''s shinobi efforts, choosing instead to focus on being permanently stationed within the n, this group is mainly from the Main Branch as well.


    "But isn''t your n traditionally seen as rivals to the Uchiha? Would they really agree to coborate with us on this?", Sakumo asked, voicing a concern that naturally arose from the historical tension between the Hyuga and Uchiha ns.


    "In reality, the rivalry between our ns isn''t as intense as people make it out to be, Sakumo-san. There haven''t been any wars or significant conflicts with the Uchiha since the vige was founded, and even before then, certainly nothing on the scale of the Uchiha''s past with the Senju. I believe the idea of our rivalry has beenrgely amplified by the Hokage''s faction, who stand to gain the most from keeping our ns at odds with one another...",


    "The other Elders of my n have all also recognized this maniption, and that''s a major reason why they''re open to aligning with the Uchiha now. Aside from the ''normal''petitive spirit stemming from our simr Kekkei Genkai and dojutsu, there aren''t deep-seated grievances or conflicting interests between us...",


    "The real hurdle instead might be the overall Uchiha''s reputation for arrogance and their tendency to iste themselves, but given the pressure they''ve faced from the Hokage''s faction, I''m optimistic. I doubt the Uchiha Elders are blind to the benefits of our proposal, especially in light of their current situation.",


    "They''re likely keen on reintegrating more closely with the vige, at this time, and aren''tpletely gone into the n ''instion'' philosophy. With your involvement, Sakumo-san, and the support of other smaller ns, we have a strong case to make. I believe the Uchiha will see the wisdom in joining forces regarding this matter...", Hikariid out his true analysis.


    Sakumo listened intently, processing Hikari''s perspective on the matter. After a moment of reflection, his expression softened, signaling aplete shift in his initial skepticism as well.


    "You make apelling argument overall, Hikari-kun. I must admit, I''ve been viewing the situation through the lens of old perceptions and rivalries just now...", Sakumo conceded, "If the Hyuga and Uchiha ns can also set aside past differences, real or exaggerated, for the greater good of the vige, then perhaps there is hope for genuine change on a broad level.",


    "Uniting our forces could also be the key to averting potential great future conflicts within the vige, stemming from the injustices faced by the Uchiha and the smaller ns. Their growing grievances, if left unaddressed, could destabilize Konoha and ''explode'' sometime in the future.",


    "If we manage to politically address and resolve these issues, however, it would mark a significant achievement for the vige''s future stability and strength. Such a coalition could truly safeguard the vige''s long-term prosperity and harmony...", Sakumo reflected.


    Then clearly suddenly reinvigorated by the conversation and the possibility of making a significant impact, Sakumo found himself unknowingly stepping away from the shadow of his recent troublespletely.


    The rumors and negative thoughts that had once weighed heavily on him seemed less oppressive as he considered the potential for real change within the vige he loved.


    Therefore, a newfound enthusiasm evident in his demeanor and a spark of passion lighting up his face, Sakumo leaned into the discussion, genuinely curious and hopeful about their potential chances of sess.


    "So, are you sure that with the Uchiha also on board, we would have enough numbers...?", He inquired fully ''bought in'', his voice carrying a mix of optimism and a desire for reassurance.


    His question stemmed from a ce of genuine curiosity. Politics had never been his main arena; he was a shinobi at heart, more ustomed to the straightforwardness of missions than the intricate dance of vige politics.


    "The math works out in our favor, Sakumo-san. Honestly, I was as surprised as you might be when I went through the numbers with the help of the n''s intelligence. I bet the Hokage''s faction would be quite caught off guard too.


    "And that''s why we must keep our strategy tightly under wraps until election day to prevent any unforeseen moves from their side. They''ve proven time and again how insidious they can be...", Hikari shared his voice carrying a tone of strategic caution.


    "Let mey out the numbers for you: the Uchiha n contributes about 100 members to the Jonin Council, the same as my n. If they''re all on board and cast their votes, we''d only need around 50 more to secure a win.",


    "The smaller ns, when their numbers are pooled together, have about 75 members in the Council. This means, that if we manage to get everyone to vote, we''ll have more than enough to win the majority. It''s all about unity and coordination at this point.", Hikari exinedying out the arithmetic of their n with rity.


    Hikari''s calctions were not made lightly. Initially, he had assumed that securing additional votes from civilian Jonin through covert incentives might be necessary to ensure victory in the election.


    However, a thorough consultation with the Hyuga Patriarch and a review of the n''s intelligence resources led him to a surprising conclusion: such measures were unnecessary.


    This revtion not only reinforced the strength of their strategy but also highlighted the intrinsic power and influence wielded by the Hyuga and Uchiha ns within the vige.


    The fact that both ns had about half of their Jonin force not even participating in the Jonin Council spoke volumes about their untapped potential.


    It underscored a significant aspect of Konoha''s shinobi hierarchy¡ªdespite the apparent dominance of the Hokage Faction, there existed formidable pockets of power, represented by the Hyuga and Uchiha, that could dramatically alter the vige''s politicalndscape when mobilized.


    This insight was a revtion to Hikari, also emphasizing the parity between the Hyuga and Uchiha ns in terms of their capacity to influence vige affairs if they joined together.


    Meanwhile, Hikari also got further detailed intelligence assessment regarding the representation of other notable ns within Konoha''s Jonin Council when researching this.


    Thisprehensive analysis provided him with a clearer picture of the politicalndscape and the rtive power levels of various important shinobi ns within the vige as well.


    The Yamanaka, Akimichi, and Nara ns, each had an average representation of about 25 members within the Jonin Council for example.


    On the other hand, the Aburame, Inuzuka, Shimura, and Sarutobi ns had roughly half that number, with an average of around 12 members each in the Jonin Council.


    Hikari''s analytical approach also extended even beyond just the Jonin Council''s membership counts; he delved into the broader power dynamics and the distribution of elite-level shinobi across the vige.


    He now had some kind of statistical representation inside of his head of various power dynamics of the ns and vige after getting that Elder-level intelligence estimation after bing one himself recently.


    His investigation revealed a fascinating insight:bined, the Hyuga and Uchiha nsmanded an impressive 40% of the vige''s entire elite Jonin pool, with both of them having half of that share at the standalone levels.


    This figure also included not only those Jonin within the Jonin Council but also those in specialized units like the Anbu, but that analysis also included the substantial Jonin force that Uchiha and Hyuga ns had but that constantly stayed within the npounds.


    Hikari also found that alongside the Hyuga and Uchiha, considered the vige''s foremost ns, the Yamanaka, Akimichi, and Nara¡ªalso ssified among therger ns¡ª, collectively held about 55% of the vige''s Jonin forces.


    Adding the medium-sized ns to the mix, including the Sarutobi, Shimura, Inuzuka, and Aburame, this percentage rose to around 65%.


    Furthermore, when considering the smaller ns like the Hatake, the total share of Jonin hailing from all shinobi ns astonishingly reached 80% of the vige''s entire Jonin force.


    This analysis truly highlighted the significant advantage shinobi from established ns had over those born to civilian families.


    In such an environment, only the most fortunate, talented, and intellectually gifted civilian shinobi could break through to im a share of the remaining 20% of Jonin positions.


    Reflecting on these newfound insights, Hikari again felt a profound sense of gratitude for his n affiliation.


    Otherwise, being reborn as a civilian for example, then it would truly have ended even before it began for him in his overall transmigration journey in this kind of low social mobility world.

 60. Sakumo Hatake’s Astonishing Power

    60. Sakumo Hatake¡¯s Astonishing Power


    After discussing more of the intricacies of theirplete strategy in depth, from top to bottom, Hikari suddenly shifted the conversation towards a different kind of engagement.


    Eager to gauge his own progress and understand the benchmark set by one of the world''s current strongest shinobi of this era, he respectfully requested a friendly spar with Sakumo.


    It was an opportunity to measure himself against a true powerhouse, to see where he stood on the spectrum of strength within the shinobi world during this moment of time, and how someone of Elite Jonin level of strength fared against someone like Sakumo in general.


    Sakumo, rejuvenated by their conversation and the potential path forward they''d outlined, readily epted Hikari''s request. The prospect of a friendly spar seemed to further lift his spirits, adding a lightness to his mood that had been absent earlier. With a smile that spoke of his renewed vigor, he positioned himself opposite Hikari in the courtyard, ready to engage.


    As they faced off, the air between them crackled with anticipation. Hikari, serious and focused, regarded Sakumo with high respect due to a shinobi of his caliber and career.


    Sakumo''s smile, however, hinted at the joy he found in the simplicity of a spar against a friendly and trusted junior whom he had quite a high opinion of after the previous conversation, a stark contrast to the weighty political discussions that had preceded.


    "Hikari-kun, please don''t take offense at my decision to forego using my sword in our spar today. My swordsmanship, which focuses on swift, decisive strikes meant to quickly conclude battles, poses a significant risk in a friendly match. It''s not that I doubt your abilities, but at this juncture, engaging you with full force in that style could be perilous.",


    "However, I believe that in a few years, you''ll be fully prepared to face such a challenge head-on and all-out then. Until that point, I hope you understand my caution and ept it. Let''s look forward to a spar where we can both unleash our full strength in the future...",


    Sakumo said, maintaining a serious demeanor yet softening his words with understanding and a sincere look of encouragement on his kind-looking face, quite standard for him.


    "Sakumo-san, I''m not offended at all, as I''m quite aware of my current limits myself. You exining all of this directly is already giving me a lot of respect, which I''m not sure I deserve at this point. Let''s get started then, I hope that you at least won''t hold back now in a state even without your sword as well...", Hikari responded, his voice carrying a mix of respect and anticipation. He knew that this spar would be a great source of information on many things.


    As soon as Sakumo gave the nod to begin, Hikari activated his Byakugan, pouring chakra into it to enhance its capabilities to the fullest.


    He understood that to track Sakumo''s movements, he''d need every advantage his dojutsu could offer. Yet, even with his Byakugan''s power, and its innate talent in perceiving things in ''slow-motion'', Hikari was taken aback by Sakumo''s sheer speed.


    By the time he registered Sakumo''s initial movement, the elder shinobi was already closing the distance between them rapidly with just one initial foot movement and ''push'' at the start of the motion.


    In response, Hikari summoned the chakra to his hands, forming the Twin Lion Fist. He recognized that against Sakumo''s swift advances, precision attacks were less likely tond.


    The broad, sweeping nature of the Twin Lion Fist would be his best chance at catching Sakumo.


    But Sakumo, ever the adept fighter, altered his path with another mere touch to the ground, circling behind Hikari like a shadow.


    Reacting on instinct, Hikari then initiated the Rotation. But Sakumo, leveraging his mastery of chakra control and his profound understanding ofbat tactics, found an opening.


    As Hikari''s Rotation came to an end, Sakumo emerged from the ground up, his chakra-enhanced hand gently pressing against Hikari''s neck ¡ª a silent deration of victory.


    Hikari, still catching his breath from the quick session of events, turned to Sakumo with a mix of awe and confusion, "How did you...?", He began, genuinely puzzled by the techniques Sakumo employed to circumvent his defenses.


    The moment Hikari initiated his Rotation, expecting to create an imprable barrier around himself, Sakumo vanished from his enhanced field of vision¡ªa feat that left Hikari stunned.


    "Sakumo-san, when my Rotation started, you werepletely out of my sight. Then, you reappeared from beneath, as if the earth itself was just another path for you...", Hikari said, his voiceced with shock and curiosity.


    Sakumo chuckled at Hikari''s astonishment, before moving his hand back anding in front of Hikari again, a lightness in his voice that contrasted the seriousness of their quick spar.


    "Actually, what you witnessed is part of my expertise. My primary skill lies in concealing my presence in various ways, which sets the stage for my second specialty: ending confrontations with minimal strikes...", He shared, his exnation shining a light on the depth of his shinobi artistry.


    "What I did just now...", Sakumo continued, "Was utilize the cover provided by the wind generated from your Rotation technique.",


    "I seamlessly merged myself with it, then quickly submerged into the earth, using my chakra for concealment in various fashions thate with experience, bing one with it without causing any disturbance. I waited there, beneath the surface, for your technique toplete its course.",


    "Once it did, I emerged behind you. This method of concealment, along with my kenjutsu, forms the cornerstone of my reputation as a formidable shinobi. And earth and wind are not even the only things I get very experienced in concealing myself in. For our n''s kenjutsu, concealment is a kind of a prerequisite if you want to be sessful in it, due to its nature."


    Hikari absorbed Sakumo''s exnation, the initial shock gradually giving way to deep admiration and contemtion, "That''s incredible, Sakumo-san...",


    Hikari finally responded, his tone reflecting both respect and a newfound understanding of the level ofplexity that even the seemingly ''simplest'' shinobi principles like basic stealth capabilities and theories could be brought on by the most experienced shinobi like Sakumo.


    Meanwhile, Hikari couldn''t help but acknowledge the deep level of trust Sakumo had ced in him by sharing such critical aspects of his abilities, in the midst of his next speech, ''For him to disclose these intricacies behind his exceptional speed, secrets, and taboos that most shinobi would guard extremely closely speaks volumes...'', Hikari quickly thought, noticing the significance of what Sakumo had revealed and the bond it implied between them already.


    "Your ability to seamlessly integrate with your environment, to the point of bing virtually undetectable, even to the Byakugan, speaks volumes about your mastery...", Hikari praised.


    Sakumo offered a modest smile at Hikari''s praise, downying his own achievements with the wisdom of a seasoned shinobi.


    "Hikari-kun, your words honor me, but what you''ve witnessed today isrgely a matter of experience ¡ª something you''re still acquiring. The quick conclusion of our spar stems from your unfamiliarity with confronting opponents of my level, not ack of skill on your part or theck of performance of your dojutsu.",


    "When you activated your Rotation, you were somewhat prepared to track my movements, yet a portion of your focus was scattered, not fully attuned to detecting shifts in the environment that I could exploit...", Sakumo exined gently.


    "With your Byakugan, you possess the capability to detect even the subtlest shifts, including someone moving through the earth, as I did. It''s just a matter of honing and increasing your attention to the area beneath you at all times during battles against opponents of my level...", Sakumo responded, his tone both encouraging and instructive.


    "Traversing the earth with chakra stealthily isn''t just a specialty of mine; it''s a skill that many high-level shinobi develop over time and one you can master as well. It''s essential to remain fully present and focused, especially when utilizing your dojutsu...", Sakumo concluded.


    "Thank you for the insight, Sakumo-san. Your advice is invaluable. If I may, though, I''m curious about another aspect of your abilities¡ªyour extraordinary, almost ''otherworldy'' to me, kind of speed. One of the strengths of my Byakugan is its ability to perceive actions at such a rate that movements seem almost to slow down, allowing me to react ordingly.",


    "Yet, during our spar just now, your speed was such that I couldn''t even fully register your approach until you were nearly upon me. How do you achieve that level of speed, where even the Byakugan''s advanced perception struggles to keep up?",


    Hikari inquired, seeking to understand the nuances behind Sakumo''s exceptional agility and speed, which seemed to challenge even the heightened capabilities of his dojutsu.


    Sakumo let out a chuckle before delving into an exnation that shed light on his remarkable speed, "Ah, I see where your curiosity stems from. Speed is another prerequisite of our n''s kenjutsu technique.",


    "Besides the basic Body Flicker technique that many shinobi utilize, I incorporate Lightning Release to enhance the speed of my leg movements. Additionally, I use Wind Release not only to further propel myself forward but also to create a covering veil around me, which serves the dual purpose of masking my approachter if needed and aiding in my attack...",


    He paused for a moment, allowing Hikari to absorb the information before continuing, "There''s also the ancient Samurai Step technique I''ve adapted to my style ¡ª it''s all about precision in movement, I also used it for my second step during my rush against you just now. Additionally, over the years, I''ve also trained to instantly open and close the First Gate, which gives a significant boost to my speed during my first step without sacrificing my control or precision. Thisbination of techniques enables me to achieve such incredible velocities."


    Sakumo smiled, acknowledging Hikari''s keen interest, "And that''s why your ability to react to me at all also impressed me. Many shinobi, even those stronger than you now in general, often resort to different tactics when facing me, as reacting directly to my speed can be challenging, honestly, they don''t even manage to see me at all during battle, so they give that up and focus on countering me in other ways.",


    "So, Your ability to even attempt a response ismendable and speaks volumes of your potential. It''s a rare quality, one that you should continue to refine and build upon.",


    His words were both an exnation of his own abilities and an encouragement for Hikari.


    The revtion of Sakumo''splex integration of techniques left Hikari profoundly astounded, ''To think of theplexity involved in harmoniously blending so many diverse principles into a singr, unparalleled technique of movement, and to achieve such mastery rtively early in life, in his early thirties...'',


    Hikari pondered internally, his true admiration for Sakumo deepening, ''It''s no wonder he''s considered a powerhouse, surpassing even the Sannin officially and the Third Hokage now unofficially too in sheerbat prowess in my opinion. He may even be the ''first'' in the entire world...'',


    ''The continuous cautious and fearful stance they''ve taken towards him makes perfect sense now. Given Sakumo''s current capabilities, one can only specte about the heights he might have reached had he continued to evolve, unhindered, while still in his prime, in the original series. This can''t bepletely idental in my opinion, I''m now interested in the Hatake n too. It''s impossible for any ordinary n to produce a shinobi of this caliber, there are probably some secrets there to dig about their history, I''ll have to go into researching itter.'',


    ''With such extraordinary speed as his foundation, there are few within the shinobi world who could stand as his equal. So this is what an Elite Jonin against a Late Kage level shinobi fight amounts to...'',


    ''And when factoring in the probably simrly earth-shattering kenjutsu of his... it''s nearly unimaginable the level of threat he could pose to even the most formidable opponents.'',


    This insight into Sakumo''s abilities not only intensified Hikari''s respect for the legendary shinobi before him but also prompted a reevaluation of his understanding of the potential within this world.


    It was a humbling moment for Hikari, one that expanded his perception of what was achievable by ''natives'' of this world, and that was without any ''special bloodlines''.


    ''Yet, this underscores a crucial truth: regardless of one''s personal might, there''s a threshold of power beyond even the Kage level that must be crossed to stand alone against some politically powerful individuals like the Hokage and even that can''t help you in the mental battles within oneself against your inner demons.'',


    ''Therefore, despite his legendary strength, Sakumo''s story in the original timeline ended inplete tragedy. Now, having altered his path already to some extent, I''m curious to see the effects this will have. What changes will Sakumo''s continued existence bring to this world...?'', Hikari reflected, intrigued by the possibilities his intervention might''ve unlocked.

 61. The Hatake and Hyuga’s Unified Mission

    61. The Hatake and Hyuga¡¯s Unified Mission


    As their conversation shifted back to other topics, Sakumo and Hikari began to make their way out of the Hatake n residence.


    Their path took them between the residence itself and thepound gates.


    It was in this rxed atmosphere that they noticed a young figure approaching from the opposite direction.


    There, making his way back from his training, was a six-year-old Kakashi. His youthful, determined stride and the unmistakable spiky, silver hair, even at such a young age, marked him as unmistakably a Hatake.


    "Father... Hikari-san..." Kakashi''s voice, steady andposed, broke thefortable silence between Sakumo and Hikari. His eyes, sharp and observant even at such a young age, shifted between the two.


    Kakashi had encountered Hikari once before during a previous visit to his home. Sakumo had always spoken in glowing terms about Hikari''s exceptional abilities, suggesting that Kakashi could learn much from him.


    On that asion, Sakumo had even arranged a spar between the young Chunin and Hikari, aiming to temper Kakashi''s burgeoning pride and expose him to the broader spectrum of shinobi talent, especially in terms of those thate from the big ns that Kakashi wasn''t truly exposed to before in the right way.


    Despite Kakashi''s prodigious achievements¡ªbeing the youngest to hold the titles of Chunin, Genin, and Academy graduate in Konoha''s history¡ªHikari had bested him effortlessly with a single move.


    That encounter had left a profound impression on Kakashi, challenging his early notions of strength and skill. It was a humbling experience, one that seeded a deep respect for Hikari within him.


    As he stood there, acknowledging both his father and Hikari, the memory of their previous encounter and the lessons learned lingered in his young mind, shaping his understanding.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari also observed young Kakashi, he pondered over his future trajectory. Hikari''s willingness to offer guidance and foster a positive rtionship with Kakashi wasn''t merely out of respect for Sakumo; it was rooted in the knowledge of the significant role Kakashi would y in the future.


    Recognized as a potent force within the Hokage''s faction, Hikari saw the importance of influencing Kakashi early on, aiming to prevent him from bing a mere tool of the vige leadership, as was his fate in the original timeline, and be more aligned with his ns for the vige and the world in general.


    Hikari also reflected on how the Sharingan, while a famous symbol of Kakashi''s strength, in the original series, ultimately hindered his true potential by focusing his talents on copying various, thousand ''mid-tier'' superficial techniques rather than developing his own inherent capabilities that could truly flip the table and be useful against the true peak-level shinobi that would appear in the future.


    His ability to be one of the few non-Uchiha people in history to use the Sharingan to such a level only showed his amazing chakra reserves that he squandered away in Hikari''s opinion, and it wasn''t anything positive, after all, it was a foreign power, that would always ''cost'' him more than it would cost other real Uchiha, always skewing the risk to reward ratio for its use.


    The Sharingan''s constant chakra consumption and the shift in focus away from Sakumo''s and the Hatake n''s inherent strengths, which he was probably gically predisposed to, underscored for Hikari the missed opportunities in Kakashi''s development since he got that Sharingan at a young age in the first ce, that ''retarded'' his shinobi potential ever since.


    He believed that without the burden of the Sharingan, Kakashi could have harnessed his vast chakra reserves, which was clearly shown after he lost the Sharingan in the original series, more efficiently potentially even leading to innovations like the ''Purple Lightning'' sooner and building a foundation of power that was truly his own, not foreign, from the way younger age.


    This belief only deepened Hikari''s interest in the Hatake n. Recognizing Kakashi''s innate potential and huge chakra reserves, he nned to delve deeper into their n''s secrets and strengths through Sakumo in the future, when they developed their rtionship even more.


    Sakumo and Hikari exchanged brief greetings with Kakashi, both of them conveying warmth yet an air of urgency about the tasks ahead.


    They mentioned they had important matters to attend to, subtly signaling the end of their encounter with the young ninja.


    As they departed, Kakashi watched their backs, a sense of weight lifting from him, though he couldn''t pinpoint why.


    He sensed a change in his father, a shift towards a more positive demeanor that was both puzzling andforting.


    This noticeable difference in Sakumo stirred curiosity and a faint hope within Kakashi, leaving him to ponder as he made his way back into the residence.


    The brief interaction, though fleeting, hinted at transformative currents flowing through the lives of the Hatake family, sparked by Hikari''s influence and the unfolding ns thaty ahead for all of them.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari and Sakumo stepped through the gates, Sakumo cast a mild smile towards Hikari, remarking on the evident support from his n,


    "It seems your n holds you in very high regard, Hikari-kun...", He observed, his gaze briefly sweeping over the 15 Jonin from the Hyuga n who apanied Hikari, now forming a protective nk around them both.


    After saying this, Sakumo''s thoughts momentarily drifted to Hikari''s parents. He chose not to voice these reflections, but a contemtive mood had settled over him.


    ''Perhaps there''s wisdom in Hikari-kun''s approach to this world....'' Sakumo considered the fate of Hikari''s parents, recognizing that a simr path might have led Hikari to a premature end, not to mention having this kind of treatment within his n.


    This moment of introspection brought Sakumo to a realization about his own life and choices. Influenced by his recent conversations with Hikari, he began to understand the importance of discerning between serving the broader interests of the vige and being manipted by those in power for their own gains.


    Sakumo acknowledged, perhaps for the first time with such rity, that adopting a measure of self-preservation was not only prudent but necessary in a world as fraught with peril and maniption as theirs.


    This acknowledgment was a sign of growth, a silent admission that survival and serving one''s own interests first were a prerequisite to effecting any real change within the vige.


    In this moment, Sakumo felt a newfound maturity, a deeper understanding that true service to the vige meant staying alive to fight another day, rather than sumbing to the tragic ends met by so many, including Hikari''s parents and nearly himself.


    "Indeed, the Hyuga n has shown me considerable support until now. But, now that I also officially hold the position of Third Elder, such arrangements are to be expected...",


    Hikari responded his tone light, "Let''s make our way to the Gekko n first then, Sakumo-san...", He added, signaling the start of their coborative mission.


    Together, Hikari and Sakumo set out toward the Gekko n''s quarters, intentionally choosing it as their inaugural visit due to its proximity.


    It was also important that they appear together in public at least one time, to make the matter of their alliances more official to other potential targets for recruiting this time now.


    It was a crucial first step in their broader campaign to forge a united front. After they engaged with the Gekko n, they nned to continue their outreach efforts separately, maximizing their impact across the vige.


    Concurrently, the Hyuga n would officially extend thiswork of alliances through directmunication, sending representatives to convey their unified stance and invitations to join their cause to the other smaller ns, or through letters.

 62. Coalitions and Clans: Shaping Konoha’s Future

    62. Coalitions and ns: Shaping Konoha¡¯s Future


    A whileter, as Hikari made his way back to the Hyuga n residence, crossing the famous Naka River once again, his presence alongside his Hyuga entourage drew curious and stunned nces from the vigers and passing shinobi of Konoha the same as thest time.


    Their visit to the Gekko n had been a significant step forward, and in theing days, their n to solidify a coalition and its next steps with other smaller ns was set to unfold.


    The sight of him walking with Sakumo earlier with his entourage, and their identities appearing so intimately, also given the swirl of rumors and Sakumo''s recent reclusiveness, had undoubtedly sparked a wave of whispers and spection throughout the vige.


    As he navigated through the streets of the vige, Hikari was acutely aware of the ripples their actions were creating now, especially in the eyes of the Hokage''s faction leadership.


    His thoughts returned to the sessful discussion they had with the patriarch of the Gekko n. The Gekko n leader, like many leaders of the smaller ns in Konoha, possessed the strength akin to a standard Jonin only.


    However, the agreement they reached sessfully and quickly was a pivotal one: the formation of a new, albeit unofficial, faction within Konoha.


    This faction, led by Sakumo Hatake, would serve as a collective of the smaller ns, banding together to amplify their voice and influence within the vige.


    The Hyuga n, through Hikari, would extend its support to this new faction, bringing along allies like the Aburame and Inuzuka ns.


    The n was for Hikari and Sakumo to act as the unofficial representatives of this burgeoning alliance, bridging the gap between the smaller ns and the more prominent families like the Hyuga.


    The next crucial step involved reaching out to the Uchiha n, a move that held the potential to truly cement the new coalition''s strength and influence.


    Hikari and Sakumo intended to approach the Uchiha n once the smaller n faction was firmly established, hoping to secure their participation and identify a representative who would represent their interests within this new alliance too.


    However, this matter regarding the Uchiha n would instead have to be done in secret instead, in order to be able tounch that ''surprise attack'' during the next Jonin Council meeting sessfully, unlike the other steps that he and Sakumo did rtively openly.


    In their alliance with the Gekko n, Hikari personally and the Hyuga n extended their support beyond mere political maneuvering into themercial realm as well. And that would be also offered to the other smaller ns in the following days.


    In Hikari and other Hyuga Elders'' opinions, it was a very simple process in nature, the stronger those smaller ns got, the stronger the Hyuga n got too both were allies.


    Recognizing the importance of economic strength in bolstering the n''s overall power and independence, theymitted to providing the Gekko n with a wealth of resources.


    This support included sharing innovative business strategies, offering financial assistance through loans and investments, and facilitating new business opportunities to enhance the Gekko n''s standing in Konoha''spetitivemercialndscape.


    The target of these efforts was to counterbnce the influence wielded by the Hokage''s faction in the economic sector, particrly the Homura and Mitokado ns, which not only led themercial interests of the Hokage''s faction but also held the biggest quantity of the significant low and mid-level administrative positions within the vige governance overall.


    By empowering the Gekko n and other smaller ns economically, Hikari aimed to create a more leveled ying field, reducing the disproportionate influence of the Hokage''s faction over Konoha''smercial and political arenas, allowing those smaller ns to fight for what they already lost in the past to that same monstrous faction that swallowed nearly all of Konoha. However, while themercial support provided a tangible means of strengthening, navigating the vige''s administrative hierarchy posed a more formidable challenge for now.


    The entrenched positions of power within the Hokage''s administration were difficult to contest directly. However, the strategy to elect Sakumo Hatake as the new Jonin Commander represented a critical step towards prating the administrative stronghold.


    Hikari''s contemtive journey came to a pause as he eventually arrived at the entrance of the Hyuga n''spound. The familiar sight of the towering gates and the guards stationed at the entrance brought a moment of transition, from the strategic musings of his mind back to the present reality. Stepping through the gates, Hikari was greeted with the respectful nods of the n members, a subtle acknowledgment of his ever-rising status.


    ***


    A few dayster, standing on the grand terrace of the Hyuga Patriarch''s estate, Hikari and the Patriarch shared a moment of strategic contemtion, "So, almost all the small ns are with us now? But we''re keeping Sakumo-san''s candidacy quiet until just before the Jonin Council meeting?", Hikari sought confirmation, absorbing the updates from the Patriarch.


    "Yes, the Hokage is starting to worry about our actions, but I doubt he can grasp the full scope of our strategy in time...", The Patriarch responded, a hint of satisfaction in his voice and pride almost written on his face as he looked at Hikari who was much shorter than him.


    "Indeed, who would''ve imagined the Hyuga and Uchihaing together like this? It''s almost unheard of, given our usual low profile and the Uchiha''s known pride and istion...", Hikari added with a light smile.


    "Ha, Hiruzen will be in for quite the shock when he realizes what he''s missed and sees that there are still those in the vige ready to stand up against his faction. But Hikari-kun, we owe a lot of this breakthrough to your close rtionship with Sakumo and your innovative thinking and nning regarding this entire matter in general...", The Patriarch acknowledged, appreciation evident in his tone.


    "Don''t give me all the credit, Patriarch-sama. This n is unfolding smoothly mainly because of our n''s resources and the full support of the Hyuga Council. This time, it was also the n that managed to reach out to the Uchiha, in such a covert kind of manner, not me...",


    Hikari humbly deflected, acknowledging the collective effort behind their strategic moves.


    And as he mentioned the Hyuga n''s outreach and coboration with the Uchiha, his gaze naturally drifted toward the Uchihapound that was quite visible from their current ce.


    Situated across the Naka River, from where the Hyuga Compound was, it stood prominently and was of simr size as the Hyuga npound or now defunct Senju npound.


    Unlike the more secluded Hyuga estate, the Uchiha''s grounds were slightly closer to the heart of the vige, adjacent to the Konoha Police Force Headquarters which they oversaw.


    Beyond the Uchihapound, the Hokage''s Building loomed, a central hub for Konoha''s administrative operations housing most of the civilian administrative departments. To the right of this horizontal residential and political panorama, the majestic Hokage Rock stood.


    However, Hikari was well aware of why the Hyuga n was positioned on the outskirts of Konoha, further away from the Uchiha n, and right on its borders.


    It was all intrinsically linked to the critical role the Hyuga yed in vige security through the "Hyuga Border Surveince Division."


    This division, while not asrge as the Police Force run by the Uchiha, was also very vital for Konoha''s defense and intelligence.


    The main building of the organization was simrly adjacent to the Hyuga living area as well.


    Through that organization, the Hyuga n leveraged their Byakugan''s unique capabilities to serve as Konoha''s eyes, monitoring for any threats or unusual activities around the vige''s perimeter.


    This division wasn''t just about keeping an eye out; it was an integral part of Konoha''s early warning system, alerting the vige to potential dangers before they could even escte.


    Their responsibilities also included conducting reconnaissance missions, outside of Konoha, to gather intelligence on potential threats, ensuring Konoha remained ahead of any potential adversaries.


    Moreover, the division worked in close coordination with both the ANBU, for covert operations, and the Military Police, contributing to ayered defense strategy that protected Konoha from both external threats and internal issues.


    Hikari admired how seamlessly the Hyuga n had woven their unique strengths into the fabric of Konoha''s defense, marking them as an indispensable part of the vige''s interests.


    The Border Surveince Division was primarily staffed by Byakugan users who specialized in long-distance vision and it was therefore obviously predominantlyprised of more supporting-like Side Branch members.


    Despite this, the head of the division was still nominally the Patriarch himself, a member of the Main Branch. Hikari himself had never visited the division. His Lineage, traditionally, did not y a part in its management.


    The Patriarch, looking thoughtful, turned to Hikari and began, "Ah yes, there''s something else we need to talk about, about the Uchiha n now that you brought them up. Once we''re all through with the secret voting for the Jonin Council, we''re going to try and elevate our rtionship and startmunicating more openly in the future, after all, we aren''t breaking anyws, and this seems to be truly necessary after I thought about it some more recently...",


    "You know, sending letters back and forth or using other more covert ways to chat isn''t that great. It''s hard to get our points across that way, it''s isn''t a very precise and efficient format as a human-to-human interaction could be, especially if you are responsible for that part."


    He paused for a moment, then continued, "So, as the guy in charge of making alliances for our n, you''ll start meeting with someone from the Uchiha n with also a simr role probably as soon as possible to improve our overallmunication and information flow.",


    "This is to help us start getting along better and make sure this new alliance we have goes smoothly from now in continuity. After all, we haven''t been close to the Uchiha before, in fact, our rtions were quite cool, so it''s a big step for both of us if we want to seed.",


    His voice carried a sense of importance, underlining the critical nature of Hikari''s uing role in nurturing the fragile alliance with the Uchiha n as soon as the voting there finished.

 63. Meeting Kiyomi Uchiha For The First Time

    63. Meeting Kiyomi Uchiha For The First Time


    Just a few days after Sakumo Hatake''s, the new uncrowned leader of the "small n alliance", unexpected victory as the Jonin Commander and his impactful political speech there targeting the Hokage''s faction whilst clearing his name directly, news of his win, backed by the support of both the Hyuga and Uchiha ns among others, spread rapidly, stunning all of Konoha.


    In the aftermath, Hikari, now masked and cloaked, was navigating the rugged terrain of the massive mountain behind Konoha. This wasn''t just any mountain; it was a surprisingly colossal natural structure, almost half the size of Konoha itself, featuring the carved faces of previous Hokages only partially.


    More importantly, it acted as a strategic barrier, located directly behind the Hokage''s Building, other crucial administrative buildings, and Uchiha and Hyuga ns, providing a formidableyer of security to the vige''s rear.


    Hikari''s journey took him to the mountain''s left side, whichy directly behind the Hyuga npound and adjacent to the Hyuga Border Surveince Division.


    This division, tasked with the vital role of monitoring Konoha''s borders for any signs of intrusion, yed a key part in ensuring the overall safety and secrecy of this operation.


    They had thoroughly secured the meeting area, also patrolling discreetly to prevent any unauthorized eavesdropping now, all unbeknownst to the Hokage or the rest of Konoha.


    As Hikari traversed the mountain, he kept his Byakugan active, scanning for the person he was supposed to meet with at those precise coordinates the two ns agreed upon before, and any potential threats.


    It wasn''t long before he detected another cloaked figure making their way towards him from the direction of the Uchihapound, which was also connected at the vige''s rear to this entire mountain just like the Hyuga n, albeit from the other side, navigating through the mountain''s high passageways.


    Positioned on the mountain''s edge, opposite from the Konoha side and overlooking the vast, green expanses of the Land of Fire, Hikari prepared for the encounter.


    His initial confusion arose when, through the distinct rity of his Byakugan, he identified the approaching individual as a thirteen-year-old girl.


    This revtion momentarily puzzled him; it was an unexpected choice for a representative of the Uchiha n.


    Yet, Hikari''s inherent pragmatism quickly dismissed any reservations. After all, his youth, being merely 11 years old, didn''t prevent him from undertaking significant responsibilities within his n.


    If the Uchiha n deemed her fit to represent them, Hikari was ready to proceed without any prejudice.


    As they finally approached each other on the secluded side of the mountain, away from the prying eyes of Konoha and surrounded by the tranquil beauty of the forest below, they both removed their masks.


    As they stood across from each other, the girl''s presence struck Hikari with an unexpected sense of intrigue. Her long, straight ck hair flowed gracefully, framing a face that held the distinctive onyx eyes characteristic of the Uchiha n.


    Her slightly bulging slim figure was still subtly outlined by the ck cloak she wore, also hinting at the agility and strength hidden beneath. Despite her young age, she carried herself with an air of confidence and maturity, traits that spoke of her upbringing within the Uchiha n.


    "Good to finally meet you face-to-face, Hikari-san. I''ve heard much about you and your role within the Hyuga n. My name is Kiyomi Uchiha, and my grandfather is the Great Elder Setsuna. Let''s ensure our talk today will mark the beginning of a significant expansion in the recent alliance of our two ns, shall we?", Kiyomi said seriously while also observing him.


    "It''s great to finally meet you, Kiyomi-san. I''ve heard about you too to some extent, and of course, about your respected grandfather. How was your journey here?", Hikari inquired, offering a smile that didn''t quite reach his eyes, as he finished sizing her up discreetly.


    Meanwhile, internally, he had already pieced together her affiliation with the hawk faction of the Uchiha n, known for its radical views. Her grandfather, Setsuna, was a prominent figure within this faction, serving as its leader and standing as the Great Elder of the Uchiha n a position of immense influence only surpassed by the Patriarch maybe in the past.


    But recently, due to the rise of Hawks'' power inside the n, it was hard to say anymore. So, Hikari realized that his own identity and background were not in any way higher than hers in this meeting.


    Additionally, in Hikari''s perspective, Kiyomi was probably also being groomed as the future leader of that hawk faction.


    His mention of knowing her "to some extent" also stemmed from the contrast between his openly known status within the Hyuga n and wider Konoha and Kiyomi''s more concealed role in the Uchiha n.


    Given the Uchiha''s heightened scrutiny within Konoha, some vague details about Kiyomi''s activities and identity were closely guarded, known only to a select few higher-ups like Hikari after he became the Third Elder.


    This secrecy also sparked Hikari''s curiosity about her capabilities as a shinobi, especially since she was not featured in the original story.


    He spected that, in the original timeline, she might have been eliminated by the Hokage''s faction during the lead-up to the Third Shinobi World War.


    Observing her earlier with his Byakugan, Hikari could tell that her strength was exceptional for her age, further intriguing him about the role she could y in the altered course of events already.


    Hikari''s thoughts also became clear as he understood why the meeting was set up this way, ''It makes sense now. I''m also seen as the future of the Hyuga n, someone who will lead the next generation. So, the Uchiha n must have picked someone just as talented and with a simr background to meet with me...'',


    Meanwhile, Kiyomi''s gaze was piercing, reflecting the intensity of her convictions as she addressed Hikari, "While I acknowledge the significance of our meeting, Hikari-san, let''s not dance around pleasantries. We''re here because our ns, and indeed Konoha, stand at a pivotal juncture.",


    She stepped closer, embodying the authority and strategic mind she was known for, "Our ns have historically upheld Konoha with their unique strengths, but the vige''s current path concerns me.",


    "Our alliance must not simply be a continuation of past practices but a strategic partnership that propels us towards a future where our ns do not merely survive barely but thrive."


    Kiyomi''s tone softened slightly, a testament to her loyalty and the depth of hermitment to her n''s cause, "You, Hikari-san, represent the Hyuga''s future, as I do for the Uchiha. Our shared ambition can forge a path not just for our ns but for Konoha''s evolution into a vige that respects and fears ourbined strength."


    She paused, allowing her words to resonate, her fierce pride in her Uchiha heritage and the hawk faction''s mission clear, "Let us be clear about our intentions today. I seek an alliance that redefines power dynamics within Konoha, one where our ns are not secondary to the whims of its current leadership anymore.",


    As they stood facing each other, at a close distance now, Kiyomi''s analytical mind was also at work, piecing together the enigma that was Hikari Hyuga as she looked at him directly.


    However inwardly, she wasn''t as mission-driven as she portrayed to him just now, she was more so curious about Hikari, the Third Elder of the Hyuga n, the youngest in history, himself, nearly the same as she was focused on this meeting''s formal political objectives.


    Her grandfather, whom she revered for his wisdom and guidance after the early loss of her parents, had always spoken of Hikari, standing in front, in terms that bordered on reverence.


    It puzzled her initially; Hikari was a figure shrouded in mystery, seldom seen outside the Hyugapound, yet he was a subject of significant conversation within her family.


    Her grandfather''s insights shed some light on this curiosity just after this meeting was decided on. He had observed a transformation within the Hyuga n, a shift in their age-old strategies and dynamics, all orbiting around Hikari''s emergence as a prodigious talent.


    This young Hyuga wasn''t just another member of his n; he was a catalyst for change, rallying the Hyuga around him as their brightest beacon in a long time. He was also reputed to be of incredible intelligence since a young age and a business ''wizard'' never seen before.


    It was this very transformation that her grandfather hoped to replicate within the Uchiha n through Kiyomi before, envisioning her as a unifying force that could bridge the longstanding divide between the ''hawks'' and ''doves'', along with the various sub-lineages within their n.


    However, despite Kiyomi''s exceptional skills and fierce dedication, her grandfather had candidly expressed his belief that she did not match Hikari''s unparalleled talent yesterday.


    This admission, while a rare acknowledgment of her limitations, only fueled Kiyomi''s ambition and her inherent pride. She couldn''t ept the notion that anyone, especially someone from the younger generation, could really surpass her in talent.


    Thus, she scrutinized Hikari with a critical eye, her inner arrogance not allowing her to easily concede to her grandfather''s assessment. Despite the high praise from her elder, she sought to find ws, to understand the source and the validity of Hikari''s reputed genius.

 64. Accepting Fighting Challenge From Kiyomi

    64. epting Fighting Challenge From Kiyomi


    Meanwhile, hearing Kiyomi''s direct and ambitious opening and approach, Hikari felt a flicker of appreciation inwardly,


    ''So she''s straightforward and has her eyes on bigger goals, not just the usual conceited and biased talk I expected from an Uchiha.'',


    ''It seems the Uchiha are looking for more than just a simple joint defensive pact of strategic deterrence against Hokage''s Faction. They want to regain their lost rights additionally and won''t hesitate to cooperate for that goal.'',


    ''This aligns perfectly with what I''ve been nning for the future as well...'', He thought, reassured by the realization.


    Hikari also pondered the depth ofmitment Kiyomi and her grandfather held for their n, appreciating their ability to set aside their faction''s deeply rooted personal pride against other ns in such a crucial moment so swiftly.


    ''Indeed, the Uchiha n and their radical faction especially are often misinterpreted...'', He pondered, ''What outsidersbel as ''hate'' or ''extremism'' is, in their eyes, a profound love for their kin. I can see the rationale behind that perspective... It is just that they were probably given no other exit but to rebel, unlike like this time thanks to my actions and changes...'',


    Hikari''s mind then raced further, connecting dots and deciphering why the Uchiha''s participation in their coalition flowed so seamlessly,


    ''Moreover, for the ''Doves'' there, this development probably symbolizes a historic leap towards integrating the Uchiha more fully into Konoha''s societal and political fabric. It''s a move towards eptance and unity, something they''ve always wanted for their n to have as much safety as possible.'',


    ''On the other hand, the Hawks also probably view this as an opportunity to reim their n''s rights and to take a stand against the Hokage''s faction, a direct action aligning perfectly with their more confrontational stance and ideology of fighting actively instead of being passive.'',


    Hikari realized that this alliance offered something to both factions within the Uchiha n, making it a unique proposition that could unite them under amon cause, ''This really is a win-win situation for both factions then.'',


    ''So, she is probably supported by everyone in the Uchiha n. By representing her n today, she might actually be bridging the gap between the Doves and Hawks, embodying a unity that''s been absent in the Uchiha for too long.'',


    He then considered the role of the Uchiha n''s Patriarch Fugaku and his line, and their supporters, within the n, often seen as the ''third'' broader faction within the n, and often seen as the moderating force within the n, bncing the more extreme views of the Doves and Hawks,


    ''The Patriarch''s line, acting as the neutral arbiters, would likely view this alliance as a strategic move that doesn''t contradict their overarching aim of maintaining n unity and promoting its interests within Konoha. Instead, it would go in positive directions for both.'',


    ''This doesn''t go against their policies; in fact, it might even support their goals by providing a tform for the Uchiha to assert themselves as a key yer in vige politics while patching up some internal strife.'',


    Before the meeting, Hikari had thoroughly reviewed the privileged intelligence gathered by the Hyuga n on the Uchiha''s internal and external challenges in general in great detail.


    This information, known only to the elders of the Hyuga, painted aplex picture of the Uchiha n''s recent struggles within Konoha.


    The vige''s leadership had systematically undermined the Uchiha, from stripping away theirmercial interests and speaking rights to isting them socially and politically.


    The constant encroachment on the Uchiha Police Force''s jurisdiction and power in favor of the Anbu, directly controlled by Hiruzen, along with the recent establishment of Root under Danzo, was the biggest blow out of them all and pushed the Uchiha over the edge in terms of their feelings for the vige due to the marginalizations.


    These actions had a profound impact on the Uchiha, driving a wedge not only between the n and the vige''s leadership but also within the n itself.


    The Hawks faction, advocating a more confrontational stance against these perceived injustices, found fertile ground for their ideology.


    Led by the Great Elder Setsuna, a proponent of decisive action against the vige''s encroachments, the Hawks had gained significant influence, rallying those who felt betrayed by Konoha''s leadership.


    Understanding this, Hikari recognized the delicate bnce of power within the Uchiha n. The more moderate Doves, once influential voices for integration and cooperation with Konoha''s leadership, found themselves sidelined.


    Their decline in influence coincided with the rise of the Hawks, making it increasingly difficult for the Doves and the neutral Patriarch''s line, led by Fugaku Uchiha, to counterbnce the Hawks'' growing power.


    This internal power struggle within the Uchiha n had reached a critical juncture. For Fugaku and the moderate elements within the n to maintain any semnce of influence, they needed to do something, or more precisely fight back against Konoha in some way or another or the entire n would be really taken over by the Hawks faction in the future.


    The history of the Uchiha n, as Hikari understood it, was also a testament to the unpredictable shifts and flows of power and perception.


    Following the founding of Konoha, in the aftermath of Madara Uchiha''s failed rebellion and defeat against Hashirama Senju, the hawkish elements within the Uchiha experienced a significant loss of influence.


    Despite most of them not joining Madara in his rebellion, including a younger Great Elder Setsuna, as those who had already died a long time ago, the faction''s reputation plummeted.


    This was due to the broader n''s association with Madara''s defeat and the perceived failure of their aggressive policies against the vige''s ethos of unity under Hashirama and the leadership of the Doves, symbolized by the rise of Kagami Uchiha in strength and reputations, a ''false'' figure ofpromise and cooperation with Konoha''s leadership.


    However, as time went on, Madara''s dark prophecies about the vige eventually turning against the Uchiha, which were initially dismissed by the n, began to take on a chilling resonance over the decades.


    The gradual truth of Madara''s words, vindicated by the vige''s actions against the Uchiha¡ªfrom marginalization to the usurpation of their authority¡ªlent credibility and power to the more radical faction within the n.


    The Great Elder Setsuna, having known Madara personally, embodied this shift, his long life witnessing a dramatic reversal from disgrace to influence as the vige''s policies increasingly seemed to validate Madara''s forewarnings.


    This historical perspective brought Hikari to a contemtion of the ironic twists of fate. In a rtively short span, the moderate Dove faction, which had once heralded an era of cooperation and peace with Konoha, would give rise to prodigies like Itachi and Shisui.


    These individuals, despite their unparalleled talents and intentions for peace, would inadvertently precipitate the n towards its tragic epilogue, ying into the very extinction Madara had predicted, manipted by the machinations of Konoha''s leadership.


    Hikari marveled at the cyclical nature of history within the Uchiha n, where the once discredited views of the Hawks found vindication in the vige''s actions, only for the subsequent generation of less numerous and ''counted out'' moderates, bearing the hope of reconciliation and peace, to unwittingly march towards a preordained final tragedy.


    Meanwhile, outwardly, Kiyomi''s demeanor shifted palpably, the weight of n politics momentarily lifting from her shoulders. A yful smirk danced across her lips, her eyes sparkling with apetitive zeal that hadn''t been evident in their discussion thus far as she watched him finish contemting, cutting him off before he could respond back to her.


    "Before we dive deeper into our discussion, Hikari-san, I have a small, somewhat personal request...", She said, her voice lighter,ced with an almost teasing amusement, "I''d like us to spar, right here.",


    "You see, I haven''t really had the chance to test my skills against a peer opponent close to my age and reputed to be of simr strength. And I''ll confess, your reputation has piqued my curiosity. And you see, by the way, this how we, the Uchiha, typically like to construct our rtions with others... Therefore, I hope that you won''t mind and this won''t offend you."


    Her confidence was unshaken, her pride in her abilities clear, and herpetitive nature surfaced unabashedly at his time.


    This challenge, thrown down almost yfully, contrasted starkly with the serious, strategic thinker she had presented moments before in the eyes of Hikari, who also anticipated it.


    Hikari''s response was more measured, but his smile hinted at an understanding of her after hearing her and going back to present from his thoughts,


    "I see where you''reing from, Kiyomi-san. The Uchiha n''s emphasis on strength is well-known, and it''s only natural for you to seek an understanding of the dynamics between us, especially considering our potential future interactions. It''s sensible...",


    He acknowledged, noting their secluded location beyond Konoha and its sensory barriers as an ideal setting, "I agree to your request. It seems we''re in a perfect ce, free from unwanted observation."


    Internally, Hikari was not surprised by Kiyomi''s challenge; it was almost expected, ''So, ites down to this...'', He thought, ''A battle to gauge my capabilities and talents...'', He pondered the deeper implications of her request, knowing that there may be more to it other than her own personality type and feelings of curiosity and her wanting to prove herself.


    ''This was also probably influenced by her role within the Uchiha and her current mission today. She''s not just seeking to understand my abilities now but also the potential the entire Hyuga n possesses because of me for the future under the orders of her higher-ups...'',


    However, Hikari was also quick to see the advantage for him in Kiyomi''s challenge. He knew that if he managed to defeat her effortlessly right now, it would not only prove his strength and talent but also significantly bolster his and the Hyuga n''s entire negotiating power with the Uchiha in the future passively. Winning easily would leave a strong impression on the Uchiha, ensuring they took him and his n more seriously in all future discussions.


    "Then, please be careful, Hikari-kun... I''m about to start...", Kiyomi announced, her smile widening briefly at Hikari''sposed, unsurprised reaction, almost as if he had anticipated this challenge from the outset and his confident demeanor, unconsciously treating her as a non-threat in her view.


    There was a flicker of excitement in her eyes, a spark ignited by the prospect of disrupting his serene, controlled demeanor, ''Let''s see how long that calmsts...'', She mused internally, her yful smirk morphing into a focused, determined expression as she prepared to move.

 65. Duel of Dojutsu: Sharingan vs. Byakugan

    65. Duel of Dojutsu: Sharingan vs. Byakugan


    As soon as the words left her mouth, Kiyomi wasted no time in escting the confrontation in silent focus.


    Her two tomoe Sharingan ignited, the ck of her almond eyes swirling into the deep red of focused determination now.


    With a swift motion, she reached into her robes, drawing a handful of shuriken, her specialty.


    The metallic glint of the throwing stars barely caught the light before they were hurtling toward Hikari, slicing through the air with deadly precision.


    This initial salvo was a ssic Uchiha tactic¡ªswift, direct, and testing the waters of her opponent''s capabilities.


    Kiyomi watched closely, her Sharingan not just a tool for attack but for observation, keen to catch every nuance of Hikari''s next response. Hikari, for his part, was fully aware of the shuriken''s trajectory the moment they left Kiyomi''s hands.


    His Byakugan offered him a rity of vision far beyond the ordinary, allowing him to perceive not just the shuriken but the subtle shifts in Kiyomi''s stance and chakra flow.


    Hikari took the challenge head-on, moving towards Kiyomi while expertly navigating through the barrage of shurikens with what seemed like ultimate ease.


    The Hyuga''s fighting style thrived on proximity, leveraging their Gentle Fist technique, which required getting close to the opponent. As he advanced, a slight curve yed upon his lips,


    "Two-tomoe Sharingan at this age? Not bad...", He praised, his voice carrying a tone of approval even as he dodged another wave of shurikens with what seemed like effortless grace.


    He understood that the girl was sure to open thest, third stage of ordinary Sharingan, and at least be an Elite Jonin in the future, and Uchiha Elite Jonins were generally much stronger than ordinary Elite Jonins for example, cing her weight higher in his eyes once again.


    His Byakugan was a formidable tool, providing him with a visual acuity that turned the intendedplex onught full of Sharingan''s pattern-domain mastery into a ballet of predictability.


    The world around him slowed, each shuriken''s path clear as daylight, allowing him to anticipate their trajectories and Kiyomi''s intended maniptions attempting to confuse him.


    For example, Kiyomi''s attempts to collide the shurikens in mid-air, changing their directions in a disy of Uchiha''s adept control, was impressive, and often could even be critical against some non-Uchiha shinobi.


    However, against Hikari''s Byakugan, the small tactic unfolded in slow motion. His heightened perception wasn''t just about tracking movement¡ªit allowed him an expanded temporal window to react, almost as if time itself dted around him, allowing him to figure the directions out with his ''ordinary'' logical reasoning even without theplex pattern-recognition motor skills the Uchiha nsmen possessed, allowed him to ''solve'' them out.


    This didn''t justpensate for hisck of Sharingan; it provided a different spectrum of insight, one that tranted theplex patterns of Kiyomi''s attack into a solvable puzzle.


    On the other side, Kiyomi''s confidence wavered for a moment, her mind racing with questions and doubts, ''How is this possible? What is his secret? Is his Byakugan that gically atypical on the stronger performance side from the rest of the Hyuga too...?'',


    She pondered, even as she continued her assault. Her prowess with shuriken, honed through relentless practice from a young age, had always been her strong point and second nature.


    Combined with the predictive capabilities of her two-tomoe Sharingan and the endless arsenal of throwing patterns those eyes had recorded and she had in her possession now, her attacks became a storm few could navigate, making her strikes virtually unpredictable.


    As Hikari gracefully dodged the relentless waves of shurikens, drawing nearer with each step Kiyomi couldn''t help but ''note down'' this development mentally in her ''Hikari Hyuga folder''.


    To most opponents, this barrage would be quite overwhelming, forcing them to either evade the entire area of her attackspletely or brute force with their own attack. Yet, Hikari navigated through it with such ease, showing her that this was his pure dojutsu capability.


    Nheless, as the gap between them closed, Kiyomi recognized the opportunity to shift the dynamics of the duel,


    ''The distance is just right...'', She thought, locking eyes with him firmly in an attempt to ensnare him with her Sharingan''s genjutsu.


    But Hikari was not unprepared. His Byakugan had been focused on Kiyomi''s eyes from the beginning.


    As Kiyomi''s Sharingan red with the intent to cast the genjutsu, Hikari was already fortifying his chakra pathway system.


    With exceptional control over his inner chakra flow, he bolstered his defenses, effectively neutralizing the iing Yin Release chakra before it could even begin to weave its web internally.


    "That was quite a weak Yin Release, Kiyomi-san...", Hemented, his tone neither mocking nor boastful, but matter-of-fact, "And even with a three-tomoe Sharingan, overpowering me with a genjutsu would prove futile...",


    He added, his confidence stemming not from arrogance but from a deep understanding of the Yin Release and his Byakugan. Hikari''s mastery over his chakra and internal defenses was also rare, making him virtually immune to the mental maniptions genjutsu offered.


    A fine bead of sweat appeared on Kiyomi''s forehead as she grappled with the ease at which Hikari had neutralized her genjutsu. With him closing the distance quickly, she understood the peril she was in.


    The close-quartersbat favored the Hyuga, and being within reach of Hikari''s Gentle Fist could spell defeat for her.


    Realizing that her attempts at genjutsu and shurikenjutsu had fallen short, Kiyomi decided to shift her strategy to ninjutsu, tapping into the Uchiha n''s renowned affinity for Fire Release.


    She chose a jutsu not just for its power but for its symbolic resonance within her n¡ªthe Great Fireball Technique. This technique, emblematic of the Uchiha''s might, was her best bet to create distance between her and Hikari and potentially turn the tide of their friendly battle.


    Kiyomi executed the Great Fireball Technique wlessly, sending a massive ball of fire roaring towards Hikari. Yet, to her surprise, Hikari didn''t retreat. Instead, he continued advancing, his expression calm, almost casual, as if he were merely facing a mild inconvenience rather than a devastating attack characteristic of the Uchiha n.


    As the fireball neared, Hikari prepared to counter. He extended his right hand, performing a precise chopping motion.


    Through the chakra points in his hand, he expelled the chakra, weaving Wind Release into his ''shing'' counterattack.


    Thisbination created a force strong enough to split the oing fireball in two.


    Hikari''s use of his Byakugan was critical at this moment. It allowed him to perceive the fireball''s trajectory and the best point of intervention in what seemed like slow motion.


    He was also ready to use the Hyuga''s defensive Rotation technique if any mes came too close in his sharp vision but his initial counter was so effective that it became unnecessary.


    Meanwhile, despite her Great Fireball Technique not hitting its mark, Kiyomi leveraged the moment to put some distance between herself and Hikari again. The fireball, though split, left its mark on the terrain around them.


    The mountainous battle area bore the scars of their confrontation; scorched earth and smoldering vegetation outlined the path of the divided fireball, a testament to the technique''s power and to Hikari''s skill in neutralizing it.


    Without hesitation, Kiyomi began weaving hand signs for another Fire Release technique. Acknowledging that subtlety had its limits against Hikari, she decided to unleash her full chakra potency.


    She opted for her unique take on the Fire Release: Phoenix Sage Fire Technique. Kiyomi''s mastery over shurikenjutsu allowed her to infuse the technique with a tactical edge, sending ming shurikens arcing toward Hikari from all directions.


    Her aim was to overwhelm him, forcing him to deploy his Rotation defense, thereby exposing him to a follow-up attack once the defensive technique''s brief ''cooldown'' left him vulnerable.


    However, Kiyomi''s strategy was met with yet another surprise. Hikari didn''t resort to the Rotation as she anticipated. Instead, he conjured a pair of giant blue lions from his chakra, which roared to life around his arms.


    With precise movements, guided by his Byakugan''s unparalleled vision, Hikari maneuvered the twin lions to intercept the iing semirge fiery shurikens.


    The chakra lions ''ate away'' at the shurikens'' chakra, also nullifying their momentum physically and therefore extinguishing their effectiveness fully before they could reach him.


    Kiyomi watched, her eyes wide with disbelief, as Hikari dismantled her attack with a technique she hadn''t anticipated at all.


    The sight of the chakra lions, both majestic and formidable, dealing with her unique technique so efficiently, forced her to confront the depth of Hikari''s abilities once again.


    As Hikari closed the distance between them once more, Kiyomi knew it was time to deploy her most potent technique yet, the Fire Release: Scarlet Fang Overdrive.


    This technique was her ace, capable ofunching a barrage of medium-sized fireballs that harbored high explosive potential.


    Upon nearing their target, these fireballs would fragment into smaller, swifter projectiles, making them a nightmare to dodge or counter due to their explosive-splitting mechanism. It was an A-level technique, the pinnacle of her offensive capabilities.


    With determination, Kiyomi unleashed the jutsu, watching as the fireballs tore through the air toward Hikari.

 66. Retreat and Reflect: Kiyomi’s Realization

    66. Retreat and Reflect: Kiyomi¡¯s Realization


    Yet, her anticipation turned to astonishment when Hikari countered with a Rotation of unprecedented magnitude.


    The defensive dome expanded to a 10-meter radius, its fierce and sharp nature effortlessly neutralizing her attack.


    The sheer size, speed, and intensity of the Rotation were unlike anything she had seen, leading her to a startling conclusion with the aid of her Sharingan: this was no ordinary Rotation.


    Hikari had infused it with Wind Release as well, enhancing its defensive capabilities beyond standard measures.


    Realizing the breadth of Hikari''s strength level, Kiyomi made a split-second decision to retreat and regroup within the mountainous terrain, hoping to devise a new strategy.


    However, her escape was thwarted by wind-like projectiles that sealed off her potential exit routes, a clear demonstration of Hikari''s control over the battlefield from beginning to end.


    With Hikari''s voice carrying through the distance, as he calmly approached, dering the conclusion of their spar, "I think that we have a clear winner, Kiyomi-san, there is no point in continuing this exchange...",


    As Hikari approached, the aftermath of their intense exchange visible in therge scorched crater that nowy behind them, Kiyomi let out a sigh.


    Her face, usually marked by youthful symmetry and vitality, now bore signs of fatigue and dimming confidence, sweat tracing the contours of her skin. She looked up at Hikari, a mixture of respect and realization in her eyes.


    "It''s my first time seeing, or even hearing about, the Rotation being infused with Wind Release like that. Among all Hyugas, you''re probably the only one capable of such a feat, especially at such a young age.",


    "Your reputation and the esteem in which the Hyuga n holds you are truly well-founded. You are indeed a genius, Hikari-san...", She conceded, her voice carrying a weight of acknowledgment and defeat.


    As a proud member of the Uchiha n, and with such a high pedigree within the n itself, epting defeat wasn''t easy for Kiyomi, but she recognized the value of acknowledging Hikari''s superiority in their duel.


    Defeat, she understood, was a bitter but necessary teacher. Instead of denying the oue, she chose to face it head-on, seeing it as a challenge to grow, refine her skills, and return stronger and turn defeat into victory.


    In her heart, Kiyomi made a vow to work harder, to push her limits further, and to one day challenge Hikari again, not just to reim her honor as a Uchiha but to test her growth and resolve against a formidable opponent.


    "You are quite talented and strong for our age group too, Kiyomi-san...", Hikari began, his tone genuine as he closed the distance between them.


    "And the way you objectively admitted defeat, putting aside your pride, speaks volumes. I really respect that about you...", He continued, his mild smile conveying his sincerity, "So, I''d like to offer you some advice, and I hope you won''t take offense. I believe it might help you."


    "Instead of focusing so much on shurikenjutsu and ninjutsu, like Fire Release, perhaps you should focus more on your eyes¡ªyour Sharingan. Your dojutsu and bloodline are what truly sets you apart in this shinobi world.",


    "While other skills are important, they have their limits. If you really want to surpass those limits, tapping into the potential of your bloodline, which is a unique gift, might be the key. That''s part of my secret too...",


    Hikari''s bright natural eyes held a sudden mysterious glint as he looked at her and spoke this part, while he chuckled a little.


    He realized that this girl in front of him was worth building a good rtionship and working'' with for his future ns, from either her background, personality, or talent standpoint, so he gave her this sincere advice, and it was up to her to take it or not.


    Kiyomi found herself momentarily surprised by Hikari''s soft demeanor, particrly after his win, which he seemingly regarded as no more than a minor detail rather than a significant triumph.


    His approachcked any hint of arrogance; instead, there was a peculiar sparkle in his pale eyes and a curious chuckle as he discussed the importance of bloodlines and dojutsu.


    This unexpected behavior and the sincere advice he offered left Kiyomi deep in thought, pondering the implications of his words, their true meaning, and the evident depth behind his casual exterior.


    ''Bloodline... Then, is the Hyuga bloodline stronger than we previously thought...'', Kiyomi found herself ruminating over Hikari''sments, her focus eventually narrowing on the suggestion that his remarkable abilities stemmed in part from his bloodline''s strength.


    This realization prompted a significant shift in her perspective. Like many Uchihas, Kiyomi had always believed in the inherent superiority of her n, viewing the Uchiha as unmatched among shinobi ns, regardless if they possessed their inherent bloodline prowess or not.


    Yet, witnessing Hikari''s capabilities¡ªa prodigy from a n they had underestimated and even looked down upon¡ªwas an eye-opening experience for her. It challenged the long-held belief in ''Uchiha supremacy'' that she had been raised on.


    ''Could it be that the Hyuga are stronger than we thought? That maybe, just maybe, we''re not the supreme, unchallenged pinnacle of shinobi ns...?'', These thoughts swirled in Kiyomi''s mind, unsettling yet invigorating.


    It was a stark awakening, confronting the notion that the Uchiha might not possess the strongest bloodline and that she, despite being highly praised, might not be the paramount genius she was touted to be by everyone in her surroundings before.


    The reality now ''pped her in the face'' in a sense, making her doubt her whole life slightly from the beginning.


    This,bined with the recent shifts in power dynamics within Konoha, where the Uchiha seemed to be losing influence while the Hyuga''s stature grew, addedyers ofplexity to her understanding of the shinobi world.


    However, after the initial shock and introspection, Kiyomi found her equilibrium. Recognizing the importance of facing reality with objectivity, she resolved to work tirelessly to elevate her strength, defeat the young Hyuga, in front of others, in the future, and restore her n''s first ce in Konoha and beyond.


    Though she had been nurtured on the ts of the importance and the nature of ''Uchiha supremacy'', Kiyomi understood that acknowledging the present facts was crucial for actually restoring them to that position and then keeping them sitting there in the objective reality.


    "Your advice... it''s given me a lot to think about...", She admitted, her voice steady, reflecting the tumult of realization and determination within, "I''ve always been proud of our Uchiha bloodline and believed in its supremacy. But today, seeing you, a Hyuga, demonstrating such power and versatility... It''s clear I''ve underestimated the potential of others, including your n."


    Kiyomi''s gaze met Hikari''s, a spark of renewed ambition shining in her eyes, "Thank you for the honest feedback. It''s a rare thing to receive such guidance, especially from someone outside one''s own n. I''ll take your advice to heart and see where it leads me. And maybe, in doing so, I can bridge the gap between our abilities and challenge you again on more equal footing."


    Kiyomi''s smile, small but genuine, was a clear sign of her newfound respect and intrigue for Hikari. As she observed him, a thought crossed her mind,


    ''What an interesting guy... I have a feeling he''s going to cause quite a stir in this vige as he matures... But thankfully, he''s on our side, not Konoha''s. Karma serves them right. Who would''ve thought a Hyuga would be the one tounch all of this against them...'',


    This internal musing reflected not just her appreciation for Hikari''s talents and potential but also her anticipation of the future changes he might bring about within Konoha.


    His calm demeanor, coupled with his traditional and noble appearance, set him apart in Kiyomi''s eyes as someone destined for greatness, a figure who could indeed disrupt the status quo in ways the vige couldn''t yet foresee. Her smile, while subtle, wasden with excitement.

 67. Unity and Division Under Hidden Leaves

    67. Unity and Division Under Hidden Leaves


    In the heart of Konohagakure, within the warm, inviting confines of one of the Akimichi family''s renowned restaurants, known across the vige for its exquisite oriental-style barbecue, sat four young men.


    Minato Namikaze, with his bright blond hair and striking blue eyes, carried an aura of warmth and leadership. Beside him, Inoichi Yamanaka''s long, blond hair and thoughtful gaze spoke of a mind always at work.


    Shikaku Nara, with his sharp features and dark, ponytailed hair, exuded a strategic calm, while Choza Akimichi''s robust frame and fierce yet friendly expression mirrored the strength and loyalty of his n.


    The atmosphere around their table was currently charged with camaraderie andughter, a private world amidst the bustling establishment. They were deep in conversation, topics flowing as freely as the drinks on their table.


    At the center of this jovial gathering was Minato, whose spirits seemed even higher than usual, if that were possible.


    His infectious enthusiasm and radiant smile had a way of lighting up the room, drawing even more warmth into the already intimate setting.


    Inoichi, Shikaku, and Choza, each a significant figure in their own right, were also bing increasingly animated, theirughter growing louder with each sip of alcohol.


    The gathering had a special significance that evening; it was in honor of Shikaku Nara''s recent appointment as the official First Assistant to the Third Hokage.


    As the night wore on and the effects of the alcohol began to lower their inhibitions, the atmosphere at the table subtly shifted.


    The underlying tension that had been masked by celebration and camaraderie slowly surfaced, brought into the open by Choza Akimichi.


    With the sincerity that alcohol often brings, Choza broke the guise of festivity to address the elephant in the room, his voice carrying a mix of frustration and disappointment for his friend, "Damn, I still have a bitter taste in my mouth. It was obvious that the position of the Jonin Commander was already in Shikaku''s bag, yet it went away at thest moment..."


    "Shshh, Choza, don''t say it like that...", Inoichi''s voice cut through the thick atmosphere,ced with caution as he quickly nced around the restaurant.


    His eyes scanned the surroundings for any unintended listeners, but he soon exhaled in relief, noticing that the once-busy restaurant had dwindled to just them and a few Akimichi n employees busy with closing tasks under the previous casual nces from Choza.


    "If you put it that way, it sounds like Shikaku''s appointment to the position was rigged, which could stir unnecessary controversy, especially given the current sensitive political climate...", Inoichi advised, his voice carrying a note of concern.


    Although Inoichi shared Choza''s frustration over his friend not securing the Jonin Commander position, his approach was more analytical, especially in such a public setting, even in a state of some intoxication.


    "Inoichi is right, Choza. We have to be careful about what we say, even here among friends...", Shikaku chimed in, his voice tempered with the weariness of recent events.


    "And let''s not view it all as a loss. I did be the First Assistant today. It''s a recognition of my contributions to the vige, even if it''s not the Jonin Commander position we hoped for...",


    He then massaged his temples, a clear sign of exhaustion from his official first day working under the Third Hokage.


    The role had him buried in bureaucratic tasks and sorting through piles of paperwork¡ªfar from the strategic military nning that would have yed to his strengths as the Jonin Commander, a position that would have spared him from the tedium of manual work and allowed him to fully utilize his tactical acumen.


    Moreover, the recent political upheavals within the vige weighed heavily on him, still fresh and unsettling.


    Recognizing the collective sense of disappointment among his friends, Shikaku sought to temper their feelings, even as he grappled with his own mixed emotions about the path his career had taken.


    "That said, there''s a valuable lesson in this for all of us, especially for you, Minato...", Shikaku continued, his tone shifting towards something more reflective, and his face bing serious and focused,


    "We shouldn''t take anything for granted until it''s truly ours. Life has a way of surprising us, and nothing is set in stone. This understanding will be crucial for you, Minato, given your ambitious goal of bing the Hokage...", His gaze now firmly on Minato with earnestness.


    "I get what you''re saying, Shikaku, and please believe me, I''m fullymitted to my ambitions. I won''t let anything stop me from bing the next Hokage...", Minato responded, his face mirroring Shikaku''s seriousness for a moment.


    Then, softening his tone, he added, "As for Shikaku''s situation... I really hope none of you holds any resentment towards Sakumo-sama. After all, he''s a respected hero of our vige, and he earned his position fair and square. At the end of the day, we''re all part of the same vige... Let''s stay positive..."


    "You''re right, Minato. No one can question Sakumo-sama''s abilities or his contributions to the vige. He also secured the position through a fair vote...", Shikaku acknowledged, offering a small smile in response, "In the end, what''s best for the vige as a whole outweighs any individual ambitions I might have...",


    While Shikaku''s words conveyed agreement and understanding, aligning with the spirit of unity Minato emphasized, a part of him still wrestled with the oue.


    Beneath the surface, Shikaku''s eptance was not as wholehearted as he presented just now. Yet, he bore no ill will towards Minato for his remarks, fully recognizing Minato''s innate leadership qualities and his unyielding dedication to the collective interests of the entire vige.


    He understood that Minato''s unwavering loyalty extended to both the entire Konoha and his close loved people, like friends or family, and that devotion inspired everyone around him.


    Moreover, he understood that Minato might not have the full picture regarding all the intricacies of what had transpired.


    However, Shikaku, with his shrewd mind, couldn''t ignore the undercurrents he had observed.


    As Inoichi had hinted earlier, and as all three of them were vaguely, painfully aware, the process for selecting the Jonin Commander was really ''manipted'' from the start, swayed by the Third Hokage''s faction¡ªa faction to which their ns had pledged allegiancepletely.


    Therefore, this wasn''t merely about a personal loss for Shikaku himself but also represented a broader political setback for the Nara n and the entire unofficial Hokage''s faction group.


    Shikaku''s understanding of the situation was grounded in years of political maneuvering and expectations set by the vige''s leadership dynamics.


    The Jonin Commander position was, in many ways, considered a legacy of the Nara n, a nod to their long-standing allegiance with the Third Hokage''s faction.


    This tradition had historical precedence, with the previous Jonin Commander also hailing from the Nara n.


    Shikaku, expected to follow in these footsteps, had dedicated years to ensuring his suitability for the role, not through the best personal strength among all the Jonin, but through his intellectual contributions to Konoha.


    His efforts were extensive and impactful. Shikaku had been instrumental in enhancing Konoha''s secret strategic warfare documents, and his academic articles on shinobi formations and tactics had be essential readings within the vige.


    Despite not being the strongest Jonin in terms ofbat, his strategic intellect and contributions were deemed invaluable, positioning him as the nearly undisputed sessor to the Jonin Commander title.


    With the support of their faction and the influence they wielded among many civilian shinobi, Shikaku''s appointment seemed assured, a mere formality awaiting confirmation.


    The old Jonin Commander of the Nara n eventually had to retire recently due to advanced age, and a new election needed to be held, which was just like some ''etiquette'' and ''protocol'' in impressions of higher-ups of their faction and the Nara n, however, no one expected such an ''outsider'' to suddenly enter the picture at the right ce'' and ''at the right time''.


    The emergence of Sakumo Hatake as a contender was a curveball no one had anticipated. Recently marred by rumors and facing a significant decline in public esteem, Sakumo''s candidacy was at first viewed with skepticism during the previous Jonin Council meeting.


    Yet, in a stunning turn of events, he managed to unite a coalition of smaller shinobi ns along with the traditionally rival Uchiha and Hyuga ns.


    This alliance, seemingly inconceivable due to the deep-rooted enmity between the Uchiha and Hyuga, represented a significant shift in vige politics.


    Sakumo''s unexpected victory at the polls, leveraging the Jonin Council''s written rules to his advantage, was a clear indication of changing tides within Konoha''s power structures very unfavorable to all the people sitting at the table currently, even Minato, no matter if he realized it or not like the rest of them.


    "Minato, you know I usually see eye to eye with you, but this time, I have my reservations about Sakumo-sama...", Choza said, his voice a notch lower as the alcohol took its toll, making his words flow more freely yet with a hint of caution.


    "I can''t help but feel like he''s been influenced by the Uchiha and Hyuga ns somehow...", His statement trailed off into a murmur, reflecting a mix of concern and suspicion.


    "Didn''t you catch his speech? It wasced with subtle digs at those closely aligned with the Third Hokage¡ªour group included¡ªand perhaps even at the Hokage-sama himself...",


    "That doesn''t sound like the Sakumo-sama we knew; the one who always carried himself with politeness and respect. It''s as if he''s under some sort of spell...", Choza continued, pausing to wipe his mouth, a gesture punctuating his unease.


    "Even if that''s true, Choza, you should still hold back a bit. We just talked about being careful with what we say...", Inoichi interjected, his voice carrying a mixture of fatigue and caution.


    However, the atmosphere still rxed slightly as Inoichi noted thest of the restaurant''s employees exit, closing the doors behind them, leaving only their group in the cozy, dimly lit space, so Inoichi didn''t protest Choza''s behavior too hard.


    Nheless, Inoichi, despite his call for caution, knew there was more to the situation with Sakumo than met the eye. He understood the subtle conflicts and moves made against Sakumo by their - Third Hokage''s faction.


    Catching Shikaku''s eye, he shared a look that said they both knew the real story behind Sakumo''s change in attitude towards their group and the Hokage.


    Minato, meanwhile, also secretly noticed the knowing look exchanged between Inoichi and Shikaku, letting out a quiet sigh before speaking up,


    "I''m not out of the loop, you know. I''m pretty aware of the tensions... But honestly, right now, I feel like my hands are tied. That''s part of why I''m so set on bing the Hokage. I want to create a ce where all of us, including Sakumo, the Hyuga, the Uchiha¡ªeveryone¡ªcan live together in peace. It might sound a bit naive, but it''s a dream I''m willing to chase with everything I''ve got tirelessly...", He said, punctuating his resolve with a swig from his drink.


    "Minato, if that''s your goal, you''ll have to be stronger than anyone could possibly imagine...", Shikaku added, his tone serious, reflecting not skepticism but a deep-seated belief in his friend''s potential.


    He knew everything about Minato''s immense talent from a young age, after all, they were only one year apart in age and were closest among friends.


    "Given the current state of things, bridging all those differences is going to be a monumental task...", There was no hint of mockery in his voice; Shikaku genuinely believed in Minato.


    It was just that, from his perspective and rational analysis, Minato''s ideals often seemed a bit too lofty. Yet, despite this, his faith in Minato''s abilities and intentions was still unwavering.


    If it had been Shikaku''s father¡ªthe patriarch of the Nara n¡ªsitting at the table, he might have advised Minato to prioritize the political interests of their circle over openly speaking up for figures like Sakumo, the Hyuga, and the Uchiha, their ''enemies'' during such a politically charged period.


    However, Shikaku''s bond with Minato wasn''t built on the foundations of a political alliance. His friendship with Minato had grown beyond such confines, fueled by genuine respect and camaraderie.


    Over time, drawn in by Minato''s charismatic nature, Shikaku, along with Choza and Inoichi, hade to see him not just as arade but as a true friend.


    Their support for Minato''s ambition to be the next Hokage transcended political strategy; it was rooted in deep personal nature and their shared experiences as childhood friends.


    Within their tight-knit group, Minato had emerged as an informal leader, guiding them not only by his strength, talent, and vige political lineage but through his vision and character, making their allegiance to him all the more profound and personal.


    "Yes, Minato, achieving your dream of bing Hokage is one thing, but to realize those grand visions for the vige, you''ll need considerable personal strength to back it up...",


    Inoichi interjected, his advice veiled yet clear. He subtly suggested that merely holding the title of Hokage wouldn''t suffice if Minato couldn''tmand respect through his own power.


    Without it, even as Hokage, he risked being overshadowed or manipted by the vige''s established powers, like the Third Hokage and his advisors.


    Inoichi held a deep respect for his n''s strategic decisions, especially their consistent alignment with the Third Hokage''s leadership.


    Yet, he didn''t see his personal support for Minato''s ambition to be the next Hokage as a betrayal of those alignments. In his view, leadership transitions were a natural part of life and governance.


    The Third Hokage, no matter how venerable, would eventually need to pass on the mantle due to the inevitable march of time.


    Inoichi saw his endorsement of Minato not as opposition to the current Hokage but as forward-thinking, preparing for the future well-being of the vige and his friend''s dreams.


    This perspective allowed him to reconcile his n''s political stance with his personal belief in Minato''s vision and potential to lead Konoha into a new era.


    Shinsuke Sarutobi, the current semi-hidden ''Anbu Commander'' of the vige, for example as the eldest son of the Third Hokage, had also yed a significant role in the lives of Choza, Inoichi, and Shikaku, the future decided-on patriarchs of their ns, from a young age.


    His position as their shinobi instructor was a strategic decision, fostered by the alliances within their coalition.


    This connection meant that their loyalty to the Third Hokage and his administration was deep-rooted; none of them would consider acting against the Hokage''s wishes or his leadership, as long as he chose to remain in office.


    Yet, with the Third Hokage reaching the age of 40 this year, there was an unspoken acknowledgment among them of the inevitable need to look toward the more distant future.


    Minato, at 18 and just a year their junior, embodied this future. Despite their respect and ties to the current Hokage, they couldn''t ignore the shifting tides and the natural progression.


    Minato, meanwhile, sensing the underlying concern from his friends about his capabilities and the immense responsibility thaty ahead, responded with reassuring confidence.


    "Don''t worry, everyone, I''m well aware of the stakes. I haven''t neglected my training; in fact, I''ve been continuously honing my skills. And I have a feeling that in the next few years, I''ll achieve breakthroughs in my strength that will further surprise everyone¡ªin a good way, of course. All my efforts are aimed at the betterment of our vige...", He said, his smile carrying a hint of mystery and unwavering determination.

 68. The Inner Circle: Debating Konoha’s Future

    68. The Inner Circle: Debating Konoha¡¯s Future


    On another day, within the expansive Hokage Building that towers at the heart of Konoha, a meeting of great importance took ce.


    This building, thergest in the vige, not only connected to the secretive chambers within the Hokage Rock but also served as the central hub for administrative activities.


    In one of its more ornate rooms, which offered a panoramic view of the vige below and was bathed in bright, natural light, Hiruzen Sarutobi sat in discussion with his advisors.


    Joining him were Danzo Shimura, Koharu Utanane, and Homura Mitokado, all key figures in the governance of Konoha, in one way or another.


    Hiruzen Sarutobi carried the dignified presence of a leader seasoned by experience yet untouched by age. His dark hair, peppered with early hints of gray, framed a face marked by wisdom.


    Danzo Shimura bore a sterner countenance, with sharp features and an intense gaze that hinted at the depth of his strategic mind, his hair short and disciplined as his demeanor.


    Koharu Utatane''s appearance was characterized by her elegant, yet authoritative aura, Homura Mitokado, sharing the same age as his three friends, meanwhile, presented a schrly appearance with his sses and neatlybed hair, conveying confidence.


    After jointly, carefully reviewing the internal documents provided by the Anbu once again, which nowy spread out on the table before them, Hiruzen let out a heavy sigh and broke the silence first,


    "What''s your take on this? It seems there''s little in the way of new intelligence. Sakumo Hatake''s interactions have been minimal, with the only notable, ''suspicious'' contact that could be of interest being Hikari Hyuga throughout this period and even before then.",


    "Furthermore, our intelligence from the Hyuga n has dwindled significantly and now nearly entirely gone dry, suggesting that we''ve also been probably receiving possibly misleading information from them for quite some time.",


    "It''s bing increasingly difficult to discern fact from fiction regarding this n. Yet, it''s evident from what transpired recently that the Hyuga n ys a central role in all these developments...", Hiruzen shared his thoughts, analyzing the situation with a critical eye.


    Danzo, ever the proponent of a more stringent approach, seized the moment to voice his longstanding viewpoint, "The Hyuga n''s maneuvers are clearly at the heart of these recent events. I''ve mentioned before, Hiruzen, that allowing my Root division to oversee surveince of these ns might have prevented this situation. The Anbu you control, this time around, has unfortunately not met the challenge objectively...", He stated, his tone reflecting both criticism and a veiled assertion of his belief in the superiority of his methods.


    "While Anbu''s performance might have beencking his time around, it''s unfair toy the me solely at Hiruzen''s feet, Danzo. The truth is, the Hyuga n has likely been deceiving not just us but generations before us, including our teacher, possibly even since the vige''s foundation.",


    "It''s bing clear that they hold far more secrets and ambitions than they''ve let on on the outside. Their potential for danger could very well rival that of the Uchiha n, and they are clearly much more shrewd than them, so that''s what worries me the most about this new development...", Koharu stated, her expression marked by a mix of resolve and concern.


    "Indeed, Danzo, it''s not as though you had any forewarning about the Hyuga n''s unusual activities to suggest you could''ve handled it better than Hiruzen yourself. Over the past couple of days, I''ve been poring over every piece of historical record on the Hyuga I could find. My gut tells me there''s something significant we''ve all missed about their n''s history¡ªa piece of the puzzle that''s eluded not just Konoha but even the other major ns of the Warring States period. Now''s the time for us to stand united and address this situation with everything we''ve got, not argue...", Homura added, lending his voice to the conversation.


    Danzo, however, still expressed his dissatisfaction with a sharp click of his tongue, "The Anbu''s conclusions and actions are still wed, in my view, the mistakes didn''t stop...",


    "Just look at this so-called '' intelligence''. How can they ce so much emphasis on that 11-year-old boy, called Hikari Hyuga? What significant role could he possibly y at his age?",


    "It''s far more likely that he''s merely being used by those cunning and duplicitous elders of the Hyuga n, rather than being a key yer himself. I firmly believe that the Hyuga n''s recent actions aren''t a sudden shift prompted by Hikari''s emergence as a so-called prodigy.",


    "This is part of a deeper, long-standing strategy they''ve been quietly nurturing¡ªstaying under the radar to blindside us or for some other ulterior motive we''ve yet to uncover or to catch us off-guard like a few days ago once they deem it is the right time. It''s a ssic n grand strategy, not the oversimplified narrative that an 11-year-old boy is behind it all.",


    "They''re likely using the boy as a diversion, to sow confusion among us and to covertly forge a connection with Sakumo through him. That''s the real extent of his involvement in my opinion and judging bymon sense...", Danzo asserted, his frustration evident as he gestured dismissively at the documents on the table that highlighted Hikari''s movements.


    Upon hearing Danzo''s sharp critique, Koharu and Homura opted for silence, their quiet possibly indicating a partial agreement with his analysis.


    Hiruzen, however, found himself caught in a familiar cycle of contemtion and concern as he observed the exchange among his advisors.


    He understood the function of Danzo''s Root organization, founded not long ago as a counterpart to the Anbu but with a focus skewed towards espionage, sabotage, and operations that often skirted moral boundaries, especially beyond the vige''s borders.


    Danzo''s eagerness to critique the Anbu''s shorings seemed to Hiruzen like an opportune moment for Danzo to vie for more influence and resources for Root and power for himself.


    Yet, Hiruzen''s attention returned to the documents sprawled before him, particrly the analysis emphasizing Hikari Hyuga''s involvement.


    The Hokage harbored doubts about the young Hyuga''s exaggerated role as presented by the Anbu. It was clear to him that the real machinations came from within the Hyuga n''s senior ranks.


    They had orchestrated the rallying and ''bewitching'' of Sakumo Hatake and various smaller ns, reaching out to the Uchiha, who were naturally inclined to oppose the current vige hierarchy as well.


    Hiruzen recognized the elder Hyuga figures, like the n''s current old Patriarch¡ªa man of considerable wisdom and experience¡ªas the true architects behind these developments.


    "Whatever has happened is in the past; there''s no point in dwelling on it, Danzo. And as Koharu and Homura have implied, I''m skeptical that anyone could have handled this situation much better under the circumstances.",


    "Let''s not forget, that it wasrgely upon your advice and under your guidance that we initiated those rumors about Sakumo and sought to iste him. And what did it lead to? Can you see now that assigning me is futile? We are all in this together. It''s time to put aside the question of fault and focus on our next steps...", Hiruzen said, his tone firm and his gaze sharpening as he addressed Danzo at this time.


    Despite their longstanding friendship and theplex dynamics of their rtionship, Hiruzen maintained a significant advantage over Danzo. Physically and mentally still rtively near the peak of his abilities, Hiruzen wielded considerable influence, ensuring that, despite Danzo''s ambitions and maneuvers for greater power, the bnce of control remained firmly in his hands.


    Danzo''s power currently, while not insignificant, was ultimately circumscribed by his utility to Hiruzen and the broader interests of the vige. Hiruzen valued Danzo''s contributions and recognized the importance of having someone with Danzo''s particr skills and perspective.


    However, he was careful to ensure that Danzo''s reach did not extend beyond what was beneficial for Konoha''s stability and prosperity, and beyond his own position and power.

 69. The Next Moves of The Hokage’s Faction

    69. The Next Moves of The Hokage¡¯s Faction


    "Firstly, I trust you all already understand the impracticality of taking any direct action against individuals like Sakumo Hatake or young Hikari Hyuga at this time. Their positions within the vige''s overall framework now, coupled with the sheer force and a team we would need to employ to confront them, make any covert operation exceedingly difficult.",


    "Moreover, considering the current tensions within the broader shinobi world and the looming threat of another world war on the horizon, such actions could only make it worse for the overall vige interests...",


    Hiruzen exined while mainly sending a few nces in Danzo''s direction while speaking.


    Danzo, known for his aggressive and upromising approach, surprisingly concurred without hesitation, nodding in acknowledgment, "It''s self-evident, Hiruzen. Sakumo Hatake''s strength is well-recognized, and Hikari Hyuga enjoys the full protection of his entire n.",


    "Beyond theplexities of taking action against them, their support will also be crucial in the war that looms on the horizon. My intelligence sources indicate that tensions are escting.",


    "Skirmishes between the major nations and smaller neighboring states are bing more frequent, the big nations themselves getting weaker hence more wolfish and more militant in their policies signaling a potential for these conflicts to escte and eventually draw all of the major viges into a full-scale war amongst themselves in a few years time...", Danzo admitted. His agreement underscored the gravity of the situation and the external pressure.


    "However, it is good that you started considering that kind of option more seriously, Hiruzen. Sakumo''s continued existence poses a direct threat to us¡ªit''s be a matter of him or us. Right and wrong aside, if we don''t address the Sakumo situation decisively, he could very well spell our collective downfall.",


    "He''s already seized such an invaluable, critical position from under us. What''s to stop him from aiming for the Hokage title next, even potentially seeking to usurp you, Hiruzen? Sooner orter, we''ll have to confront this, it is just a matter of the most optimal timing at this point...", Danzo said, his expression darkening at the mention of Sakumo, a clear sign of his deep-seated animosity and the perceived threat Sakumo represented to their positions.


    Danzo continued, slightly shifting his focus but maintaining his strategic perspective, "Regarding Hikari Hyuga, I think we''re giving him too much credit as an individual threat.",


    "He doesn''tpare to Sakumo in terms of immediate danger, he is nowhere near that level. It''s the political maneuverings of his entire n that we should be wary of, much like with the entire Uchiha n.",


    "Yes, the boy certainly exhibits a remarkable talent for someone from the Hyuga n especially, but we mustn''t lose sight of the broader context, in terms of both the powerhouses of the entire vige, that we have on our ''side'', and the history of that n.",


    "Historically, no Hyuga has surpassed what might be considered early Kage-level strength, and only one person ever achieved that level as well. Even the most formidable among them, in each generation, typically the n leaders themselves, hasn''t posed a significant threat beyond the Quasi-Kage level. Their capabilities do not fundamentally endanger our position...",


    Danzo articted, emphasizing a broader view that prioritized the political dynamics of entire n actions over the capabilities of an individual, however talented they might be.


    "Regarding the rumors of his exceptional ''intelligence'' as well, it''s difficult to ascertain their authenticity. For all we know, these could be strategic exaggerations by the Hyuga Elders to enhance his perceived value or to throw us off from other things. Yet, while he really does appear to possess a notable aptitude formerce and business, such skills are not directly threatening in a society governed by shinobi prowess.",


    "Moreover, regardless of hismercial sesses, the Hyuga n''s slightly rising revenues can''t even begin topare to the financial influence we wield. Our control over the vige''s executive and legitive mechanisms ensures our cemented superior position in terms of both business valuations and financial resources...",


    Danzo remarked, scrutinizing the impact of Hikari Hyuga''s talents on their strategic position with a blend of skepticism and analytical rigor, dismissing the potential threat his abilities might pose to their established power.


    ''Though a part of me would relish the chance to move against him just for the arrogance he disys as if he were some sort of untouchable, ''prince'' above everyone else in the vige our teacher built equally for everyone. It is however pity that my organization is still in its infancy, and the timing isn''t right...'',


    Danzo mused internally, reflecting on his externalmentary about the boy. His irritation with Hikari''s attitude towards the vige, evident since the boy''s early years, continued to fester. It was as if he ''didn''t take the vige seriously'' with all of their hand extensions toward him being ignored or outright rejected.


    However, the practicalities of the situation held him back. Root had only recently begun to gain momentum, sessfully recruiting notable talents from across the major shinobi ns, however, with the notable exceptions of the Hyuga and Uchiha, much to Danzo''s annoyance.


    The support for Root''s expansion from Hiruzen and the two other advisors was indeed a strategic move, anticipating the need for another strong and covert outside-focused global force in the face of a potentialrge-scale conflict.


    This expansion was deemed crucial, not just for their faction''s power grab but for the entire vige''s readiness for the impending war.


    "Acting against them before the onset of the war couldpromise our position should the external threats escte to a point where we require the support of everyone, including their faction. However, the dynamics could shift during the conflict.",


    "Depending on how the situation evolves, we might find an opportunity to address the Sakumo issue, either through political means or more ''direct'' methods. If not, we may need to bide our time until after the war concludes.",


    "For now, it would be prudent to halt any actions against the Uchiha n as well. Given their current alignment with both Sakumo''s and the Hyuga''s factions, it''s likely they''ve established some form of mutual ''defense'' agreement.",


    "Besides, we''ve already significantly undermined Uchiha''s position. It might be wise to pause and continue our long-term policy toward them after the dust settles...", Homura interjected, his strategic foresight the evident as always.


    Ever since the era of their teacher, Tobirama Senju, there had been a subtle, gradual strategy akin to a ''boiling-the-frog'' approach, established and directed towards the Uchiha n.


    From the outset, Tobirama had conceded leadership of the Police Force to the Uchiha, a move perceived by some as a double-edged sword. This position ced the Uchiha in direct oversight ofw enforcement, exposing them to resentment and animosity from those they policed and incarcerated effectively isting them from the vige''s overallmunity.


    However, the Uchiha, valuing power over poprity, seemed indifferent to these sentiments, prizing their authority and autonomy above the need for social eptance.


    They were a very asocial n in nature and all that ostracization didn''t bother them much if they had power. In fact, they even preferred it that way, thinking of them as being a cut above everyone else.


    However, this dynamic underwent a significant shift under Hiruzen''s leadership, with the advisors ying a pivotal role. They began to systematically redirect significant cases from the Police Force to the Anbu, effectively diminishing the Uchiha''s role in handling minor civilian disputes and low-level shinobi infractions. Meanwhile, Anbu took on more critical security tasks, such as dealing with Jonin-level betrayals and foreign espionage activities.


    Moreover, a policy was established early in the vige''s foundation stipting that any arrest of a Police Force member by Anbu (and vice versa) required the Hokage''s approval.


    Given the Hokage''s oversight of Anbu, this policy invariably skewed power dynamics in favor of Anbu, particrly during Hiruzen''s tenure, as it was during this time that masks were torn off and Hiruzen began to openly exercise those loopholes purposefully put inw by Tobirama.


    In recent times, particrly during thest few years, the Konoha Military Police Force, predominantly overseen by the Uchiha n, saw a significant decline in its influence and operational capacity, rendering it, in many respects, a ''toothless force'' to Hokage''s Faction.


    Their activities werergely confined to routine patrolling, conducting investigations into low-profile cases, maintaining order among both shinobi and civilians, managing a detention facility for those arrested, doing manual trials, and ensuring adherence to vigews overall.


    These tasks, while essential,cked the prestige and visibility of higher-profile missions that Hiruzen rerouted to Anbu thanks to other loopholes inw purposefully ced by Tobirama and thanks to Uchiha''s losing power in proportion to Hokage''s Faction and getting more and more isted, without allies, falling essentially in some kind of a negative endless loophole od degradation of their power. However, that was evidently about to pause or change now.


    The shift became more pronounced with the Anbu taking precedence in handling any high-stakes, publicized security matters. Under the direction of Hiruzen''s son, Shinsuke Sarutobi, the Anbu also developed secret cells throughout the vige, further encroaching on the jurisdiction and traditional responsibilities of the Military Police in the most obvious sense.

 70. The Prelude to The Third Great Ninja War

    70. The Prelude to The Third Great Ninja War


    "The vige now finds itself essentially ''divided in two,'' with our faction and theirs standing on opposite sides following Sakumo''s speech. This level of division is unprecedented in the history of Konoha. Madara''s rebellion was a significant event, but it was the action of an individual, not a widespread political and social schism like what we''re facing here today.",


    "It''s clear that something has gone terribly wrong during our time, straying far from the vision our teacher had and the path he set forth. We four must shoulder some of the responsibility for this divergence. That''s why it''s imperative that we work harder than ever to bridge this deep internal divide.",


    "Should we seed, we will have aplished something truly historic for Konoha, achieving the unity our teacher envisioned. However, Sakumo, the Hyuga, and the Uchiha currently pose the greatest challenges to this goal. Once we ''navigate these obstacles'', the medium and smaller ns, following them currently, will inevitably ''align'' with us instead...", Koharu analyzed thoughtfully.


    "However, what we can take sce in, amidst this situation, is our sessful consolidation of strength and strategic positioning against them, thanks inrge part to thete formation of their alliance.",


    "But, this has been our collective achievement, with your leadership, Hiruzen, ying a pivotal role. We''ve effectively taken control of the vige''s administrative framework, epassing its various branches outside of the two exceptions led by Hyuga and Uchiha.",


    "The medical system thrives under Tsunade''s influence and her enduring legacy, while the education system and several intelligence divisions, notably those led by the Yamanaka, are under our sway. The Anbu acts as a direct extension of your authority, Hiruzen, and under Danzo, Root is swiftly expanding its reach.",


    "Economically, we hold a superior stance as well, bolstered by enduring contacts and rtionships with the Daimyo, thanks to the efforts of the Utanane and Mito ns. Our financial resources outstrip those of any opposition, giving us a significant advantage...",


    "With all these elements in our favor, we stand a strong chance of oveing any opposition we face and truly unify the vige as our legacy...", Koharu borated calmly, highlighting the strategic advantages and theprehensive control they maintained across various sectors.


    "You''re correct, Koharu. And there''s another aspect you haven''t mentioned: we still hold the majority in the Ninja Council despite the recent opposition. This means that if, or rather when, the next shinobi world war breaks out against the other major viges, they won''t be able to resist the Hokage''s and Daimyo''s orders to mobilize inrge numbers for the war...",


    "And then once engaged in war, we can strategically deploy members of the Hyuga and Uchiha ns to the front lines, ensuring they bear the brunt of the conflict first. This could significantly diminish their strength...",


    Homura added coldly, his tone taking on a darker edge as he outlined a strategy that leveraged the uing conflict as a means to indirectly weaken their internal opposition.


    Theposition of the Ninja n''s Council was a reflection of the vige''s major ns: Uchiha, Hyuga, Nara, Akimichi, Yamanaka, Aburame, Inuzuka, Sarutobi, and Shimura.


    Despite the open defiance they now faced from their opposition, their faction ¡ªprising the Sarutobi, Shimura, Nara, Akimichi, and Yamanaka ns ¡ª maintained a slim majority with a 5 vs 4 advantage on the council.


    "The Ninja n Council was essentially a glorified tform for dialogue among Konoha''s major shinobi ns, for a long time now, Homura. Instead of, in part, allowing them to present a united front on matters concerning their collective interests to the Hokage and vige leadership, it served as another way for our interest group to ''smi slice'' those hostile or natural shinobi ns gradually over time.",


    "Something akin to negotiations onpensations for wartime service and other n-specific issues wasn''t a topic of discussion for a long time. Instead, in practice, the Council has long been an ineffective body. The Uchiha have often stood as the sole dissenters against our policies, but with ns like the Hyuga, Inuzuka, and Aburame maintaining a low profile and always giving concessions, the Uchiha n was forced to obey us as well.",


    "Not to mention how Hiruzen and I, as heads of the Sarutobi and Shimura ns, respectively, reinforce this alignment even further. Essentially, the council''s potential to influence vige policy has been minimal, serving more as a formal gathering than a real seat of power...",


    "This organization has strayed from its intended purpose and logic behind its founding for decades. The reality is, that those four ns won''t simply fall in line with us now because we hold a majority. Just as we wouldn''t conform to their wishes if the roles were reversed... Now that those four have broken out of their shells, it is basically useless to try using it against them again. Instead, I think that they will have to join the war for other reasons this time."


    Danzo rified, providing a pragmatic overview of the Council''s role and the dynamics within it, which further emphasized the control their faction had over the broader vige politics.


    The foundational mission of the Ninja n Council was to uphold the essentialws of the vige that governed the interactions and business of the ns, resolve disputes through legal means, manage their rtions, and legite new rules rted only to those nine ns.


    This was intended to function somewhat akin to a regtory cartel, ensuring that if any n deviated from established norms, it would be collectively reined in by the others. However, this ideal was far removed from the council''s actual operation, which disyed a marked bias against the Uchiha n, and to a lesser extent, the Hyuga, Inuzuka, and Aburame ns.


    This imbnce led to a council that, instead of acting as an impartial governing body, became a vehicle for the interests of the Hokage''s Faction and its allied ns. Laws and regtions were applied unevenly, protecting the interests of the dominant ns while marginalizing others. Over time, the council ceased to fulfill its intended role of equitable governance and dispute resolution, effectively bing an echo chamber for a select few.


    "My point is, if we want Homura''s strategic direction to work, we''ll need to find alternative methods topel them to join inrge numbers. But don''t worry, there are ways to achieve this. We could adopt a carrot-and-stick approach, leveraging both incentives and the threat of consequences. Additionally, applying pressure through the Daimyo and public opinion are other options as well...", Danzo concluded.


    "No, Danzo, it''s even moreplicated than that. They''ve positioned themselves quite well this time around, probably deliberately too. The crux of the matter lies with the Jonin Commander position and their considerable Jonin forces.",


    "During wartime, the Jonin Council wields substantial power, as Jonin forms the backbone of the vige''s military strength, elevating their status to the highest level. At the vige''s inception, the Council was endowed with significant authority in times of war and made it challenging even for the Hokage to interfere in their operations and established jurisdiction.",


    "That was the case until we managed to assert control years back, but now, with Sakumo Hatake''s emergence and the formation of their faction, the Council might return to its original intent, once again, operating more independently from my influence going forward...", Hiruzen interjected, his voice carrying a note of concern.


    "In these few days following the election''s oue, I''ve delved into researching potentialws and regtions of that institution that Sakumo and them might try and use to our disadvantage and their advantage in the future, and the outlook is troubling to say at least.",


    "It appears that during the foundational phase of our vige''s institutional framework many decades ago, Tobirama-sensei, their sole creator, may have been overly optimistic about the pace at which the civilian Jonin poption would evolve and the distribution of the Council''s membership by affiliation and type would as well.",


    "He seemingly did not foresee a scenario where a coalition, particrly one spearheaded by the Hyuga and Uchiha ns, could assert such control as we''ve witnessed recently...", Hiruzen mused, his tone reflective.


    Rising to stand on the terrace, pipe in hand, he gazed out over Konoha bathed in sunlight, his face marked by a growing weariness. The peaceful vista belied the storm of concerns swirling in his mind.


    "Tobirama-sensei harbored reservations about the influence ofrge shinobi ns, and now, it seems, his worst apprehensions have manifested into reality...", He contemted aloud.


    "All of this highlights where their greatest advantage over us lies. The reality is, we won''t be able to manipte their deployment into the most dangerous battlefronts, nor can we downy the contributions of their elites in the eyes of the vige as we might have in the past...", Hiruzen admitted, his voice carrying an unusual note of openness. In a moment ofmenting, he set aside his usual ''sanctimonious'' facade, openly expressing his concerns.


    "As I reflect on recent developments, I can''t shake the feeling that the Hyuga n might have been orchestrating this from the shadows for a long time. Only now do I grasp exactly why that went for that position specifically and wooed all those small ns, and the magnitude of the oversight wemitted and what we''ve truly lost by relinquishing that position stupidly.",


    "When we initially seized control of it in the past through ''brute pressure'', we assumed the matter settled and turned the organization into our yground. We failed to amend any of the hidden, original statutes that were left visible, statutes that could be turned against us...",


    "Now, those veryws could be twisted in many ways and serve as weapons for Sakumo, the Uchiha, and the Hyuga to exploit, leveraging ''the rule ofw'' to our detriment, using ''moral'' attacks against us and whatnot even during the times of peace, where it had less power.",


    "They could even be capable of rallying all those civilian Jonin, traditionally supporting us there always, to their cause asionally, after all, originally every Jonin truly did get less power per capita than it was established during the vige founding during my reign...",


    "Consequently, overthrowing Sakumo from his position has be an impossible task precisely for that reason..", Hiruzen spoke, his demeanor a mixture of regret and rity.


    As he articted these thoughts, Hiruzen paced slowly across the room, hands sped behind his back, asionally stopping to gaze out the window or to thoughtfully tap the side of his pipe.


    Each movement seemed to punctuate his contemtion, silent rage, regret, and dissatisfaction toward the Hyuga and Uchiha ns and the man known as the "White Fang".


    "Darn, we''ve all underestimated the Hyuga... Hold on, wasn''t that organization supposed to y that big part in determining the new Hokage originally as well?", Danzo''s initial outburst of frustration, marked by his fist hitting the table, swiftly transformed into a moment of huge realization.


    Rising abruptly, a mixture of shock and apprehension washed over him, only to be met by the sight of Koharu''s and Homura''s faces, frozen in a simr revtion. Hiruzen, with a nod, confirmed their worst fears, his expression etched with a resigned dejection as if knew it.


    "Yes, it''s true, Danzo. But there''s no need to panic to that extent. As long as I remain in office and avoid any significant missteps, things should remain under control. However, this does mean I cannot consider stepping down until we''ve resolved the issue with Sakumo, at the very least. If we wish to ensure the transition of power to a candidate aligned with our interests, it''s imperative that I stay on as the current Hokage for the foreseeable future...,"


    Hiruzen spoke with a voice infused with determination, echoing a renewed fighting spirit and vigor. The importance of personally approving his sessor as the next Hokage weighed heavily on him, as any alternative path threatened not just the cessation of his legacy but potentially his very existence, given the numerous internal adversaries he had garnered over his tenure.


    Hiruzen understood that hismand extended over a formidable force,prising not only the shinobi below Jonin rank but also the Anbu and a majority of civilian Jonin, among many others.


    These were individuals with whom he had fostered personal connections, guiding their development and awarding them various jutsus throughout their shinobi careers.


    Thiswork represented a considerable strength, potentially greater than that of the opposition. However, he was acutely aware that such force, while significant, would be rendered futile in the face of the impending war.


    Resorting to internal conflict would only devastate Konoha, leading to heavy casualties and leaving them vulnerable to external threats. Other viges would not hesitate to take advantage of their weakened state.


    Thus, Hiruzen recognized that the solution did not lie in leveraging his majority force against the opposition. The stakes were too high, and the potential fallout too great to the extent that it would be the end of their faction as well, not just the other side. The problem needed a smart approach, one that relied on intellect and cunning rather than sheer military might.


    Therefore, almost as if musing aloud to himself, Hiruzen pondered, "Our path forward involves outmaneuvering them through strategicpromise. The Jonin Council wields considerable influence in wartime, yet our faction maintains a strong presence within it.",


    "Leveraging our resources and standing, we could sway many of the smaller n Jonins who sided with them in the recent vote. This way, during the forting shinobi world war, while we''ll consider their perspectives, they''ll also have to amodate ours.",


    "It bes a strategic game, where cunning and foresight prevail. Our objective should be to ensure they bear the brunt of the war''s casualties and secure minimal glory on the battlefield. This requires meticulous nning, almost on the level as if we''re strategizing against the other four great ninja viges in anticipation of the broader conflict ahead...",


    Hiruzen concluded, pivoting back to face hispanions.His expression was one of unwavering determination, marked by a resolve his friends hadn''t seen in a long while, his eyes alight with a discerning, almost perilous, sharpness.

 71. Two Years Later and Hinome’s Breakthrough

    71. Two Years Later and Hinome¡¯s Breakthrough


    Another two years had swiftly passed by, and thirteen-year-old Hikari Hyuga stood casually outside one medical trial room''s imposing ss wall inside of his personalrge residence while ncing inside expressionless.


    Inside, now fifteen-year-old Hinome Hyuga, d in the emblematic white medical coat of a researcher, was meticulously observing a total of five Side Branch members they previously performed certain experiments on.


    Hinome, with her analytical gaze, moved from one n member to the next one, taking biological samples, employing an array of medical equipment for inspections, and conducting interviews with cold professionalism.


    As thest of the subjects left the room, Hinome began to review the amassed paper data, her eyes scanning for patterns and anomalies with a scientist''s rigor. It was then, in this moment of focus, that Hikari stepped inside, his entrance silent but his presence undeniable.


    "Hikari... After this final check-up and assessment, it can be said that our patented procedure is truly empirically proven to work now...", Hinome began, her voice echoing with a blend of triumph and seriousness.


    "This small group of Side Branch members truly didn''t experience any significant side effects and truly epted those various foreign cell types into their bodies and assimted them almost perfectly. These individuals all physically and mentally limated well since thest procedure of the series was performed a month ago.",


    As Hinome turned around to face Hikari, her previous stern and analytical look of indifference softened, and became more gentle unconsciously.


    "I''m relieved now. This is truly a great achievement, Hinome; you should be proud of yourself. You are probably the only one currently in the world capable of performing that kind of procedure. Next... it is just about finding the right kind of ''material'' for transntation then, and it is my job...",


    Hikari''s words trailed off slightly as he allowed himself a small, sincere smile, a rare urrence for him.


    He then took a seat opposite Hinome, indicating his readiness to delve into the details of her final assessment. His attention turned towards the data thaty between them, as he read it.


    Over thest year especially, Hikari, thanks to his status and rtionship with the Patriarch, got the green light to run some secret tests on many Side Branch members under his care.


    Hinome was mainly in charge of these experiments. Hikari helped out as much as he could, but his understanding of the science stuff was pretty basic inparison to her as Hinome, on the other hand, was all about science and medicine.


    She didn''t get distracted by other things like Hikari, who had a lot on his te. However, that didn''t mean Hikari didn''t grasp some key concepts allowing him to understand fundamental key concepts from her research.


    At the start, things didn''t go smoothly. Some of the Side Branch members got hurt, and there were even a few who didn''t make it. Scary injuries and weird changes were happening to people. But Hinome and Hikari didn''t give up.


    They kept looking at what went wrong each time and learned from it. Hinome worked hard to make the experiments safer and more efficient, now finally mastering them on the level that they both deemed most optimal and satisfactory.


    The process essentially started with Hinome mastering the critical techniques of spotting and selecting the most suitable cells from an individual. Using her Byakugan''s unique microscopic vision, she could observe and choose cells with unparalleled precision.


    This vision,bined with her adept use of Yang Release and meticulous chakra control, allowed her to nurture and then modify these cells from the ''inside''.


    She was able to strip them of any potentially harmful individual characteristics that could lead to adverse reactions upon transntation, while carefully preserving their inherent vitality and potential for enhancement if present, or other ''positive'' characteristics.


    This intricate procedure transitioned into actual transntation experiments on mice during the first year, and by the second year, the process had progressed to human trials, where Hinome refined and perfected her methods based on the learnings from the initial phase.


    The procedure was carried out in two critical steps: targeted injection and systematic injection. Targeted injection was the initial phase, where specific areas or systems within the body were addressed.


    For localized enhancement (e.g., an arm), chakra could be used to create a concentrated area where foreign cells were more densely integrated, providing specific enhancements like increased strength or durability in that limb.


    For systemic enhancement, a more distributed approach needed to be taken, with foreign cells being introduced at key points throughout the body. Over time, these cells would spread and multiply, aided by the host''s chakra to ensure a bnced enhancement across all physical and chakra systems.


    However, the true challenge¡ªand Hinome''s ultimate goal¡ªwas mastering that second method. This method, though significantly moreplex and demanding, promised a moreprehensive and effective integration of the new cells into the host body in a holistic way.


    Systematic injection required a further nuanced understanding of the human body''s immune response and the intricate bnce needed to introduce foreign cells without triggering adverse reactions.


    Hinome''s dedication to perfecting this method paid off, as she was able to achieve a seamless integration of cells, enhancing the body''s capabilities without the side effects that had gued their early attempts.


    "I never thought that we would have achieved the ability to transnt foreign cells into different bodies so easily, despite the supposed gic differences of said cells. It''s all thanks to the mysterious nature of chakra, and especially Yang Release, allowing us to directly bypass those differences...",


    Hikari analyzed thoughtfully and added mentally, ''It is truly a different world than myst life.''


    His admiration for Hinome''s skills was evident as he considered theplexity of her work, "Of course, this wouldn''t be possible without Hinome''s mastery over medical Yang Release and the surgical precision your Byakugan''s microscopic vision provides while you perform.",


    "This precision is critical not just during the extraction and cultivation of cells, but most importantly, during their introduction into a new body. To avoid potential overgrowth, incorrect cement, rejection, or any other form of biological chaos, extreme real-time observation and precision are indispensable...",


    Despite his limited knowledge of biology, Hikari found a way to grasp the essence of their breakthroughs, likening the cultivated cells to what would be known as stem cells in his previous life in his mind. However, in this world, the transformation process leaned heavily on manual techniques and chakra maniption, with advanced equipment ying a lesser role.


    "Yes, Hikari, but that''s also what limits its applicability on a broader scale. As I''m the only one who can carry out most of it, it directly inherently restricts how many people we can affect.",


    "We''re looking at a capacity of maybe 5-10 individuals a year withoutpromising the process and risking side effects...", Hinome exined, her tone pragmatic, devoid of much regret for the wider n. She was just a little regretful about the lost benefits they could''ve gained from introducing this procedure on a wider range and their standing within the n.


    "However, then I still wouldn''t be able to focus on anything else that we talked about before. Given these constraints, this procedure is destined for a select few. Do you have anyone in mind now...?", Hinome exined as objectively as possible and finally asked for his opinion.


    "I don''t have anyone specific in mind at the moment, the war is approaching fast and there is no time for performing it to anyone I might have. It is also best to keep these findings a secret for now within the n as well, I feel like it is not the right time to be fully open just yet... Maybe in the future, when we are more powerful, but not now, just keep it hidden...",


    "And as for us undergoing the procedure, I don''t see it as the best move just yet. Remember the ''more powerful material'' I mentioned before? It wouldn''t make sense to proceed with just the basic enhanced cells we''ve developed when there''s the potential for something much more impactful down the line...",


    "After all, we still don''t have any data on how a second procedure might affect someone who''s already been through it once. We need to be careful...", Hikari responded thoughtfully.


    Hinome had sessfully created a ''mini-bank'' of chakra-engineered ''stem cells,'' ready for transntation into others.


    The core benefit of these cellsy in their foundational attribute: they were a product of the physical energyponent of chakra, synthesized through meticulous processes through the chakra pathway system each cell was physically connected.


    In this world, the principle was straightforward¡ªthe more cells one possessed, therger the reservoir of chakra one could theoretically maintain.


    This hypothesis was proven through the oues seen in the five ''test subjects,'' although the increase in their chakra reserves was subtle enough to remain undetected by the n atrge.


    This discretion was intentional, as the volume of cells transnted was deliberately kept low to avoid drawing attention.


    The advantage of these cultivated cells went beyond just an increase in quantity. Hinome, utilizing her expertise in Yang Release, had structurally enhanced these cells to perform ''more work.''


    This meant that not only did these cells contribute to a greater chakra pool, but they were also inherently more efficient at generating and utilizing chakra than the ordinary cells found in most individuals.


    "Of course, I remember them. I''m actually quite excited to explore and experiment with that type of cellr material...", Hinome''s expression brightened into a subtle smile, her curiosity evidently piqued by the materials Hikari had mentioned.


    The cellr materials from the God of Shinobi himself, along with those from that distant n that Hikari spected might share an ancient gic connection with the Hyuga, held vast experimental promise.


    The prospect of integrating such extraordinary cellr material into their bodies was not just fascinating but tantalizing. Hinome mused over the potential abilities and enhancements that could emerge from such experiments.


    The thought of what sparks of innovation and power they might unlock together fueled her scientific passion and deepened her resolve to push the boundaries of their research further.


    "Well, I hope I won''t disappoint you. That step is crucial for enhancing our strength as shinobi further. For now, just concentrate on refining your microscopic vision, ensuring you canfortably observe details at the DNA level and prepare to step into that area gradually as well. But, please take a break first, you''ve earned it...", He spoke, his tone softer than usual.


    As Hikari mulled over their conversation, a new consideration suddenly dawned on him, ''But now that I think about it, I''m still uncertain about having those cells injected into myselfter, should I sessfully acquire them, or whether it''s better to wait until Hinome achieves proficiency with gic-level body maniption before opting for that procedure instead.'',


    ''Injecting cells from Hashirama or the Kaguya n, which I n to secure somehow soon, raises questions. Specifically, could their introductionplicate my potential to achieve Tenseiganter through gic maniption, due to the infusion of more diverse gic material into my body? My understanding of these intricacies is virtually nonexistent...'',


    ''If the material were from someone of Toneri''s n on the Moon, it might even be beneficial. But I''m uncertain about other cells...'', He continued to ponder, ''Given the significant progress I''ve made with natural energy, and the horizons that should be about to be unlocked there, I don''t feel a pressing need for power enhancement for now.'',


    ''I likely won''t face any major obstacles for personal strength improvement in the fewing years. However, for Hinome, gaining strength is absolutely critical right now. In a world that''s bing increasingly perilous, both within the walls of Konoha and beyond, ensuring she can defend herself is paramount.'',


    ''She is, without a doubt, my most valuable ally. Currently, herbat capabilities are essentially at a Jonin level, which is objectively insufficient... And she would be the Elite Jonin after mastering that newbined nature release that she was slow in mastering in thanks to this research taking her time.'',


    However, their contemtive silence was abruptly interrupted by the sound of hurried footsteps echoing through the residence.


    Instinctively, they activated their Byakugan, scanning the approaching presence with precision. Recognizing the figure as one of Hikari''s personal assistants, they deactivated their Byakugan and exchanged a knowing look before stepping outside to meet him.


    The assistant, a young male from the side branch, stood at attention, offering a respectful salute, "Third Elder-sama, Hinome-sama, I apologize for my intrusion...", He began, catching his breath from the rush.


    "However, an attendant has been sent from the Patriarch''s Estate. It seems an urgent Elder Council meeting has been announced, and all Elders are summoned to attend right now...",


    His words, delivered with a mix of urgency and deference, hinted at the gravity of the situation.


    Both Hikari and Hinome both turned serious as they understood the significance of such a summon; the Elder Council meeting dered on such short, even immediate notice, certainly pertained to matters of the utmost fundamental importance and urgency for the entire n.


    "Don''t worry, Hinome, if nothing out of the ordinary arose, then this is likely rted to what we''ve been discussing recently. It seems that the Third Great Ninja War is on the verge of officially starting...", Hikari stated, his gaze shifting from Hinome to the attendant, hints of soberness and resolves in his eyes.


    "Return to your residence for now. I''ll call you as soon as I return from the meeting; we have something else to discuss then.",


    With that said to the slightly worried Hinome, he nodded to both of them, signaling an end to the conversation through that way.


    Hikari then turned and walked towards the estate''s exit, his steps carrying a sense of urgency that was uncharacteristic of his usual, more stoic kind of state and demeanor.


    Unbeknownst to him, his fists were slightly clenched at his sides¡ªa subtle indication of the emotions brewing within him. Whether it was excitement or apprehension that tightened his grip, it remained unseen by the others. This small detail underscored the weight of the moment, reflecting the tension and uncertainty that came with the impending conflict.

 72. The Hyuga Council’s Wartime Deliberation

    72. The Hyuga Council¡¯s Wartime Deliberation


    A short whileter, inside the spacious traditional room, with tatami mats covering the floor and arge table set in the center, all of the Nine Elders and the Patriarch sat cross-legged. They were already in the Hyuga Council''s meeting room located inside the Patriarch''s Estate.


    Initial moments dedicated to etiquette and polite greetings gave way to a palpable tension, the air heavy with anticipation.


    All eyes turned towards the Patriarch, the room steeped in a respectful silence, awaiting themencement of discussions.


    "It is as you all anticipate, the information has been verified through multiple sources by this point already. The Third Great Ninja War is indeed on the brink of full-scale eruption...",


    Hirayoshi began, his voice steady yet imbued with the gravity of their circumstances. The room, already thick with anticipation, seemed to hold its breath as the Patriarch continued,


    "However, before I ry all the details, I have a personal request. I would like permission for Hiashi to join this meeting. Is that agreeable to you all?",


    His request hung in the air, inviting consideration from the council. Hiashi, as the next sessor to the Patriarch, asionally could have the privilege of attending crucial, once-in-a-lifetime meetings, such as this one, a practice designed to groom him for future leadership.


    Given the unprecedented nature of the impending conflict, his presence at this moment could provide invaluable experience.


    Moreover, at 25 years old, Hiashi was of sufficient maturity and acumen to contribute meaningfully to their deliberations.


    The elders nodded their agreement, understanding the importance of involving Hiashi in such critical discussions.


    Momentster, Hiashi entered the room. With aposed and dignified air, he moved to the center of the gathering. Offering a respectful bow, he greeted everyone present simultaneously,


    "I am grateful for this opportunity to join today''s council.", He also exchanged nces with Hikari at the time.


    His manner was impable, reflecting both his upbringing and his awareness of the solemnity of the asion.


    Each Elder acknowledged him in turn, some with nods, others with quiet words of wee, signaling his eptance into this significant meeting. Once the greetings were exchanged, Hiashi took his ce among the council members, ready to partake in the next discussions.


    "The Third Kazekage disappeared mysteriously some time ago, and this news got leaked and discovered by the other major viges just now. Sunagakure, having lost its leader, fell into a state of chaos since.",


    "Then their shinobi started scouring thends for any trace of the Third Kazekage, setting off a series of visible incidents and chain reactions among the neighboring smaller countries...", Hirayoshi detailed, his voice conveying the seriousness of the constantly unfolding events.


    "Iwagakure was the first to start mobilizing rapidly already, citing Sunagakure''s supposed ''transgressions'' as their pretext. Now, it''s clear that the rest of the major viges are preparing to mobilize as well, in the shortest time possible. At this juncture, it appears inevitable that another world war cannot be averted anymore, and there is no time left...",


    The room absorbed Hirayoshi''s words, the gravity of the situation settling heavily upon every individual present. The disappearance of such a pivotal figure as the Third Kazekage and the resultant geopolitical shifts underscored a bnce now tipping inexorably toward conflict.


    Hikari also pondered the unfolding events, connecting them with the information he remembered from his past life,


    ''This development aligns with the original series'' events. It was Sasori, who, at the young age of approximately 15, managed to assassinate the revered Third Kazekage. Contrary to all expectations, he aimed to transform the Kazekage''s body into one of his human puppets.'',


    ''Following this, Sasori seemingly even participated in the Third Ninja World War, for quite some time, without arousing suspicion, likely leveraging his grandparents'' status and the sheer improbability of such a young shinobi overpowering the Kazekage.'',


    ''It''s therefore likely that he exploited his familiarity with the Kazekage to deceive and probably poison him beforemitting the murder. Also due to the hostile geopolitical situation worldwide during thest few years, it is even more revtory why he could avoid the me like that...'',


    Hikari analyzed, recalling the intricate details of this period from his previous life''s knowledge.


    Meanwhile, after allowing a moment for the council members to digest the information and ponder their next steps, the Patriarch resumed, steering the conversation towards immediate and future actions.


    "The Hokage has scheduled the next erged, pre-wartime Konoha Council meeting for tomorrow.",


    "Fortunately, we have already internally formted and then coordinated our joint response, interests, and strategy to politically counter the Hokage''s Faction at that meeting, alongside our allies, a long time ago.",


    "What remains now is the standard pre-war n mobilization, and to see if anyone has any new inputs...",


    Following the Patriarch''s lead, the council members delved into a detailed rehearsal of their strategy for the uing Konoha Council meeting. They meticulously reviewed each point of their nned response, ensuring rity and unity in their stance.


    This preparation was crucial, as it would enable them to present a cohesive front against the Hokage''s Faction, thereby maximizing their influence and safeguarding their n''s interests.


    Amid their strategic deliberations, the meeting was momentarily interrupted by a soft knock on the door.


    The Patriarch excused himself and stepped outside, returning momentster with a piece of paper in hand.


    He resumed his seat and, after a brief scan of the document, shared its contents aloud for all to hear.


    "It appears that the Hokage has initiated a mobilization on a scale far beyond anticipated. This move aligns well with the Third Elder''s predictions discussed in previous meetings.",


    "ording to this intelligence, it''s expected that Konoha will face unprecedented joint targeting, to some extent, from all the other viges this time around. There''s even talk that Academy students might not be exempt from participation in the war possibly at some point...",


    He paused, allowing the gravity of the situation to sink in, then continued, "Given these developments, it was a good decision to allow the Third Elder to partake in the war this time around as well...",


    "This will not only offer him the opportunity to earn merits, and improve our n''s prestige but will also preempt any spection that the Hyuga Main Branch or its elders are shirking their responsibilities during times like these.",


    He concluded while looking at the youngest person in the room who was Hikari, the Third Elder.


    By this point, Hikari had firmly established his position and respect as the Third Elder, despite his young age.


    His eptance among the other Elders wasn''t merely due to some ''empty title'' but was rooted deeply in recognition of his unparalleled strength.


    Though it remained a closely guarded secret, the Elders, through the Patriarch, were privy to the fact that Hikari was, by all ounts, the most powerful individual within the n at this point.


    This knowledge underpinned their respect and the weight they gave to his insights and predictions regarding the uing war and the n''s strategies.


    Additionally, It was precisely this strength that also bolstered the Elders'' confidence in allowing such a valuable talent to participate on the battlefield during this war as agreed upon before as the best possible decision under the heavy fact-based kind of urging from Hikari himself.


    Not to mention how heavily protected he would be under their careful arrangements.


    This would also work nearly better than sending all of the other Main Branch membersbined in terms of showing Hyuga''s resolute stance.


    They would send their greatest genius in history there personally. What more could other people ask for?


    The elders also probably understood that true potential cannot fully develop in istion or under overly protective conditions after a certain point got reached.


    These previous decisions also positioned Takumi, the Fifth Elder, and Hiashi as the only figures from the Main Branch to engage directly on the battlefield in the uing conflict, but also the most notable ones from the entire n besides Hikari.


    The rationale was clear: if Uchiha Patriarch Fugaku saw fit to join the fray personally, there stood no argument against Hiashi, the designated sessor of the Hyuga Patriarch, doing the same.


    The elder Patriarch''s advanced age precluded his participation, thereby passing the mantle of leadership and representation on the battlefield to Hiashi.


    Moreover, it was decided that Hiashi would not merely join thebatants but would assume a pivotal role as the leader of the Hyuga forces, and lobby efforts were underway to secure for him a general front in the war effort for Konoha.


    Hiashi''s age, at 25, suggested he was at the zenith of his capabilities, making him an ideal candidate for such a leadership role.


    Hikari''s youth, despite his unparalleled wisdom and hidden strength, meanwhile, presented a challenge in garnering the necessary support for a position of highmand, which underscored the decision to nominate Hiashi.


    Takumi''s involvement, at 55 and a respected elder, was also strategic, intended to lend additional weight to Hiashi''smand and to further persuade the broadermunity of the wisdom of this choice.


    Eventually, as the meeting wound down and members began to disperse, Hikari exchanged a significant look with Takumi.


    Their nce was more than a mere acknowledgment; it was an exchange filled with unspoken understanding, born from the strongest personal rtionship Hikari had with the man still within the council.


    After sharing this moment with Takumi, Hikari turned his attention to the Patriarch and Hiashi, approaching them with a demeanor that matched the gravity of his intentions.


    "Patriarch-sama...", Hikari began, his voice carrying a blend of respect and earnestness, "May I request a moment of your time? I have a matter to discuss that warrants privacy. Could we convene in your quarterster? I intend to bring along a special guest...", He proposed politely yet with an underlying seriousness.

 73. Between War and Bonds: Hikari’s Resolution

    73. Between War and Bonds: Hikari¡¯s Resolution


    Upon leaving the Patriarch''s Estate, Hikari made his way back to his residence, the Third Estate, through the Main Branch living area atrge.


    Entering his house, he passed by guards and attendants, each offering him a respectful nod or salute.


    However, as soon as he stepped into the lobby of his estate, he noticed Hinome waiting for him, her presence there was patient and expectant.


    "It is as I predicted, Hinome, the Third Ninja World War is about to start...", Hikari announced right away as he approached her,


    "What I wanted to tell you earlier...", Hikari continued speaking, shifting to a more immediate concern next,


    "Is that I want to take you to meet the Patriarch alongside me, now. Go change your attire if you wish; I''m ready to leave immediately. He should be waiting for us already...",


    His tone conveyed the slight urgency of the meeting, underscoring the significance of Hinome''s presence there for some reason.


    Upon hearing Hikari''s words, Hinome''s initial reaction was a slight tightening of her fists, an involuntary response to the conclusive realization that Hikari would likely soon depart for the battlefield, as he had hinted to her earlier.


    However, her thoughts quickly shifted as she processed the second part of Hikari''s statement. The invitation to meet the Patriarch, especially at such a critical juncture, piqued her curiosity and introduced ayer of confusion.


    Why now, after all this time spent primarily within the confines of herboratory and other areas within the Third Estate, was she being brought into such a pivotal meeting?


    This was a significant deviation from her usual role, which had been focused on research and the internal affairs of the estate.


    "Don''t worry about me, I promise I will be fine. You know about my strength and how thoughtful I am. I''ll also be protected by all the other nsmen on the front at all times...", Hikari reassured Hinome, his voice softening as he addressed her instinctive concerns.


    Yet, his expression shifted to a more serious demeanor as he continued, addressing a different matter.


    "It''s you who are still very weak in terms of actual fighting capability. That''s why I need to speak with the Patriarch now¡ªto ensure you''re taken care of best in my absence... You should understand the implication we''ll have to present there...", He sighed, but allowed a slight smile to break through at the end for some reason, despite the gravity of his words.


    His statement essentially hinted at positioning Hinome in a manner that would secure her the utmost protection and care within the n¡ªby suggesting a partnership between them of a ''special'' kind of nature.


    This strategy was designed to afford Hinome a level of safety and status, inside the n, close to his own, reflecting Hikari''s deep concern for her well-being and his determination to see her safeguarded against the constantly heightening tensions and his near departure.


    This approach was the most strategic move Hikari could devise. Hinome''s unparalleled value to him through her research, almost on the existential levels for his dreams and purpose for living in this world,bined with the increasingly vtile politicalndscape within the vige, necessitated a robust protective measure.


    By suggesting a partnership of significant nature, Hikari aimed topel the Patriarch to ensure Hinome''s safety against any potential threats, employing whatever means necessary, once he was called to the battlefield and could no longer offer his protection to her directly.


    Moreover, Hikari''s insistence on involving the Patriarch specifically stemmed from the fact that he was subtly aware that the Patriarch harbored some kind of an ancient and hidden weapon unique to their n, a power that only he could probably wield, for a very long time.


    Hinome''s reaction was aplex mix of emotions upon grasping Hikari''s intentions. Initial surprise swiftly gave way to a subtle blush, a silent acknowledgment of the depth of his concern for her well-being.


    Mixed feelings swirled within her¡ªembarrassment, gratitude, joy, and a thrill of excitement. Despite her self-sufficiency and resilience, nurtured from a young age, Hinome couldn''t help but feel moved by Hikari''s protective gesture, especially since she had harbored feelings for him for quite some time.


    The implications of Hikari''s strategy were not lost on her. In the traditional and hierarchical society of the Hyuga n, Hikari''s decision to present her as his partner carried significant weight. It couldn''t be just a protective measure standalone; it was also a deration that could set the course for her future.


    In the eyes of the n, this act was tantamount to a promise of marriage, binding and irrevocable due to the weight of tradition.


    Hinome''s understanding of the n''s customs addedyers to her reaction¡ªknowing also that the Patriarch yed a pivotal role in managing the marriage unions within the n meant that Hikari''s request would virtually guarantee their eventual marriage, barring any unforeseen circumstances.


    "I understand... I will get ready right away, wait for me here...", Hinome managed to say, her voice betraying a hint of a stutter, revealing her inner turmoil and embarrassment.


    As she spoke, she turned quickly, perhaps a bit too eagerly, to hide the flush of her cheeks from Hikari''s observant eyes.


    With hurried steps that echoed her racing heart, she moved toward her own room to change her attire and gather her thoughts.


    Her swift departure was a silent dance of emotions¡ªembarrassment, anticipation, and a deep-seated respect for the gravity of the meeting ahead.


    Hikari watched Hinome''s hurried departure with a mixture of amusement and a slight shake of his head. He was acutely aware of the implications his decision to present Hinome as his partner would have on their futures.


    By initiating this step, he was essentially setting the path toward their inevitable marriage, whether it happened in five years or ten.


    He understood that the Patriarch and the Hyuga n elders would be more than supportive of this union, eager to see the continuation of his bloodline, especially given his unique talents and his status as thest member of his lineage.


    The current tense situation within Konoha and the looming threat of war had, until now, postponed any discussions regarding his marital future.


    However, Hikari recognized that by bringing Hinome into this context himself, he was opening the door to these conversations sooner than they might have naturally arisen.


    Despite the gravity of their external circumstances, Hikari''s decision to present Hinome in such a significant manner indicated his eptance, if not outright approval, of the idea of marrying her eventually.


    She was, after all, the closest person to him in this world, making her the best possible choice for a partner.


    Yet, Hikari''s primary focus remained on his long-term ambitions which were the guiding force of his life, and he was determined not to let anything, including his impending marriage, distract him from these goals.


    He was prepared to embrace his future with Hinome, but only after achieving the level of power he always sought.


    Until then, he viewed the formalization of their union as a distant milestone, one that he would reach only after fulfilling his ambitious quest for strength, thereby also ensuring their long-term safety and prosperity in this kind of truly dangerous and unpredictable world.

 74. Securing The Promise From The Patriarch

    74. Securing The Promise From The Patriarch


    Hinome soon made her way back into the lobby, but now also transformed in appearance. She had changed into elegant, mostly white robes, a traditional attire that highlighted her unmistakable Hyuga n affiliation.


    The refinement of her outfit marked the significance of the uing meeting with the Patriarch.


    And white was her favorite color, Hikari noted a long time ago, probably due to her profession.


    Hikari''s eyes met Hinome as she re-entered, offering her a nod of appreciation. This small gesture, seemingly insignificant, caused Hinome to blush and fidget slightly under his gaze, revealing her nervous anticipation.


    Despite the change in her clothing, some things remained constant¡ªher shoulder-length dark brown hair that always seemed a touch disheveled, her striking Hyuga n bright eyes, and her symmetrically pretty face that bore the youthful glow of cogen.


    Her physique had matured into a graceful ''S-shape,'' emblematic of her transition into young womanhood. The heavy bangs that framed her face still discreetly covered the Cursed Seal.


    "Let''s go, Hinome. Just be yourself. My rtionship with the Patriarch is quite strong; he''s always been friendly towards me, so I expect he''ll be the same with you...", Hikari said, signaling for them to head out.


    His words, confident and reassuring, seemed to ease some of Hinome''s apprehension. She nodded in response, her thoughts still swirling butforted by Hikari''s steady presence.


    As they made their way out of thepound, walking side by side, Hinome found herself observing Hikari with a sense of wonder.


    It was astonishing to see how much he had changed over the past year. Puberty had ushered in a rapid growth spurt, and now, despite being two years her junior, Hikari stood taller than Hinome.


    She spected about his eventual height, given his already impressive stature that belied his young age of only thirteen.


    Hikari''s appearance was distinguished by his traditional dark blue Hyuga robes, a color that matched the hue of his slightly unkempt, short hair¡ªan unusual trait for a member of the Hyuga n, known for their meticulousness.


    Overall his mature-like stature and demeanor, along with his elegant attire, added to the aura of maturity that surrounded him, making him seem at least a few years older than he was.


    Opting to leave any attendants behind, Hikari and Hinome made their way alone through the Main Branch area towards the Patriarch''s Estate. This journey was particrly significant for Hinome, marking her first venture along this path within the heart of the n''s territory.


    Her previous experiences within the Main Branch living area had been limited to visits with Hikari to see his sensei, Takumi, the Fifth Elder, and his family.


    Those visits, facilitated by Hikari''s close rtionship with Takumi, had, however, also unintentionally and subtly altered how the Main Branch perceived her even more, showing her as some kind of Hikari''spanion and thereby further elevating her status even more.


    As they moved through the estate, Hinome took the opportunity to observe her surroundings, taking in the elegant architecture.


    Meanwhile, all the Main Branch members they came across, greeted Hikari with deference, but they also addressed Hinome with a respectful "Hinome-san," acknowledging her presumed closeness to Hikari.


    This shift in their behavior brought a mix of embarrassment and pride to Hinome. It was a stark contrast to her earlier perceptions of the Main Branch, which had been colored by their usual slight ''looking down'' on the members of the Side Branch.


    Being with Hikari had transformed Hinome''s rtionship with the Main Branch in subtle yet profound ways both internally and externally.


    Although her prior scorn for the Main Branch had softened, thanks to her association with Hikari himself, she couldn''t help but feel a sense of satisfaction at the newfound respect. Those who would''ve probably secretly disdained her before had now to be very courteous.


    Arriving at the grandiose entrance of the Patriarch''s Estate, Hinome couldn''t help but gaze in awe. Then led by the Patriarch''s attendants, they made their way through the opulent corridors and soon entered an elegantly appointed reception room, where the Patriarch awaited their arrival.


    At the sight of them, the Patriarch rose from his seat at the dining table, greeting them with a warm, weing smile.


    "Hikari-kun, it seems that you really brought an interesting guest to me today...", The Patriarch remarked, his voice carrying a mixture of curiosity and amusement as he looked at Hikari in a slightly ''meaningful'' kind of way.


    His eyes, gentle yet prating, settled on Hinome, acknowledging her presence with an openness that belied the usual rigidities of n hierarchy.


    "Patriarch-sama, my name is Hinome. I''m honored to meet you.", Hinome said, her voice steady andposed but imbued with respect. She also executed a slight bow afterward.


    "Ha-ha, no need to be so formal, Hinome-chan. Hikari should have mentioned how close we are. And frankly, I''ve been wanting to meet you for quite some time as well, given your remarkable contributions to our n''s medical and scientific body of knowledge and ability.",


    "It''s just that you''ve always been so engrossed in your work at the Third Estate alongside Hikari-kun, and I didn''t want to interrupt you two. Hikari has often spoken of the different, crucial research you''re undertaking... But now that we''re here, please, let''s sit...", The Patriarch said with a warm and inviting tone.


    As she took her seat beside Hikari, with the Patriarch positioned across from them, Hinome felt a wave of satisfaction and relief upon hearing the Patriarch express respect for her abilities and contributions, recognizing her for not being merely someone close to Hikari.


    "So, Hikari-kun, what exactly is the nature of your rtionship with Hinome-chan? And why did you feel it necessary to bring her along today?", The Patriarch inquired, his voice carrying a teasing undertone, apanied by a knowing smile. He had already surmised the essence of the situation the moment he was informed of Hikari''s chosenpanion for the visit.


    "Ahem, our rtionship... It''s somewhat special as you probably guessed already...", Hikari began, his tone shifting to one that was not entirely natural for him. It was unclear whether this slight deviation from his usual demeanor was a strategic act to lend credibility to their rtionship in the eyes of the Patriarch or if it stemmed from genuine embarrassment.


    "And, if it''s not too much to ask, I''d appreciate it if you could keep an eye on her affairs while I''m away during this war...", He added, the request underscored by a subtle yet earnest concern for Hinome''s well-being during his absence.


    Beside him, Hinome''s reaction was even more visibly marked by embarrassment. At Hikari''s words, she instinctively lowered her head, allowing her bangs to fall further over her face.


    "Haha, I''m truly pleased for you, Hikari-kun. It''s a wonderful development, especially since you are both of a marriageable age. There''s no need for any embarrassment...", The Patriarch chuckled, his tone warm and filled with a genuine sense of joy. The atmosphere lightened considerably as he continued,


    "Well then, Hikari, you have my promise. I will take special care to look after Hinome-chan''s well-being in your absence. This way, you two can proceed with your marriage as soon as you return and the war is over...",


    His words,ced with encouragement and a hint of yful urging, visibly lifted the mood for Hikari then as he just wanted that promise whereas Hinome got even more embarrassed.


    Internally, the Patriarch was ted by this development. He had long considered the idea of Hikari entering into an early marriage, especially now that Hikari finally had reached an age considered appropriate for marriage realizations within the traditions of all major ns.


    However, understanding the nuances of timing and respect for Hikari''s priorities, he had refrained from broaching the subject directly in front of him. The fact that Hikari had initiated this conversation himself now was, hence, a truly wee turn of events for the Patriarch.


    Additionally, the prospect of specifically Hinome herself bing Hikari''s marriage partner was a highly favorable development in the eyes of the Patriarch considered since a long time ago. So, even if they didn''t bring this matter themselves, the Patriarch himself would''ve started promoting this kind of union between the two of them a few years into the future.


    From the standpoint of the entire n higher-ups, Hinome represented the most suitable match for Hikari. Her Byakugan was considered to have the highest level of ''purity'' next to Hikari''s, a trait the Patriarch held in highest esteem.


    Despite Hinome''s focus on leveraging her extraordinary gic gifts towards research and scientific pursuits, the inherent purity of her Byakugan remained undiminished in the Patriarch''s evaluation and it couldn''t be questioned. It was also a very rare and highly advanced special ability that didn''t appear many times in the past.


    The potential union between Hikari and Hinome, in the Patriarch''s view, therefore, promised to produce offspring with exceptionally strong gics, perhaps surpassing even Hikari''s.


    One of the Patriarch''s fundamental responsibilities, in every shinobi n, was to oversee the maintenance and enhancement of the n''s bloodline purity, as well as its overall prosperity and advancement. The union of two such gically endowed individuals as Hikari and Hinome aligned perfectly with these objectives, promising significant positive development.


    In the Patriarch''s, the n''s main matchmaker''s eyes, he saw no more fitting match for Hinome other than Hikari, and simrly, no one more deserving of Hikari than Hinome.


    As the meal progressed and the conversation flowed casually under the Patriarch''s improved mood, Hinome found herself reflecting on her fortunate circumstances.


    Her meeting with Hikari had not only been a turning point in her personal life but also a pivotal shift in her destiny within the n.


    With her sharp intellect, she fully grasped the implications of her unique position as a Side Branch member endowed with significant talent and Byakugan purity.


    In the Hyuga n, while Side Branch members typically had the freedom to choose their partners from within the Side Branch or even from outside the n, if the Patriarch approved it, such freedom came with its conditions. Those who did not disy notable talent or purity of Byakugan were granted this leniency.


    However, for those like Hinome, who possessed exceptional bloodline-based abilities and gic traits, their fate in the matters of marriage was traditionally not in their own hands.


    Within the order of the Hyuga n, the Main Branch consistently sought to maintain and enhance its supremacy, particrly through the strategic marriage ''acquisition'' of the most talented members from the Side Branch every generation. This practice was a calcted effort to preserve the Main Branch''s gic excellence and superiority up to indefinitely.


    As for the specific Main Branch, they were to marry, it was usually determined by whom the Patriarch deemed most fitting in the end and who could offer the most in the intricate political battles within the Main Branch itself between the different lineages at that time.


    This understanding was not lost on Hinome. She recognized that, in a world where Hikari didn''t exist or where she hadn''t met Hikari whom she also wanted to marry herself, whom she actually liked, and whom he liked to a certain extent back, her fate would have likely been sealed by the n''s elders, chosen to enhance the Main Branch''s gic pool rather than to secure her personal happiness.


    Realizing this, Hinome couldn''t help but view Hikari with an even deeper sense of gratitude and affection. His influence had not only hypothetically saved her entire personal freedom but also significantly altered her standing and future within the n dynamics upwards.


    Meanwhile, as the meal progressed, the conversation navigated effortlessly through various topics¡ªfrom Hinome''s various groundbreaking research in the past or the ongoing research to the broader preparations of the Hyuga n for the imminent conflict alongside Hikari''s expected significant role in it.


    Eventually, the time came for Hinome and Hikari to take their leave. The impending war lent a sense of urgency to their departure, as each member of the n, including the Patriarch, was deeply involved in the extensive preparations required for the challenges ahead.


    With respectful farewells exchanged, Hinome and Hikari left the Patriarch''s Estate, making their way back to their residence.

 75. The Successful Fusion of Chakra and Nature

    75. The Sessful Fusion of Chakra and Nature


    After Hinome and Hikari went their separate ways, Hikari delved into some of his assigned responsibilities regarding the uing conflict.


    Tasked with a certain role in the intra-n resource stockpiling for the uing war¡ªa directive from the Elder Council meeting earlier, he began his work like all the other elders.


    Hikari moved through various areas of thepound, inspecting the stockpile locations, assessing the inventory of supplies, and conferring with those directly under hismand.


    This task was not just about gathering material resources; it was a strategic endeavor to optimize the n''s logistics and support systems. With the onset of war, the entire Hyugapound also shifted into a heightened state of security.


    Their specialized border surveince division, adept at monitoring and patrolling the boundaries of Konoha, was now also operating at its full capacity.


    Their responsibilities were more critical than ever, extending their patrols deep into the Land of Fire, farther than they had in a long time on a war-time protocol.


    By the time Hikari concluded his inspection and management tasks, the evening had settled over the vige. Returning to his living quarters within the Third Estate, he didn''t pause for long. Hikari standardly made his way to the highest point of the Third Estate once again.


    Over the past two years, Hikari''s dedication to his training regimen never waned, although the focus of his training evolved with his progressing skill set.


    Having achieved mastery over all of the Wind Release-type jutsu he sought to learn, Hikari reached significant milestones in his development as a shinobi.


    His mastery culminated in perfecting his self-developed "Armor of the Heavenly Spin" and the "Celestial Rotation Sphere," advanced techniques that marked his expertise in both defense and offense. His Wind Release: Rotation strength also grew naturally with age too.


    Then after mastering them a few months ago he also soon faced the Patriarch in a pretty serious one-on-one fight and won. Following this milestone, Hikari shifted his training focus more toward natural energy in general.


    Hikari was aware that, by his own estimates, he was already at the level of an Early Kage. This meant he was pretty powerful, especially for his age.


    He also knew that if he kept improving at this rate, as his body and chakra naturally got stronger with age, he''d be around the Middle Kage level by the time he was 16.


    That''s a big deal because no one in the Hyuga n had ever reached that level of strength, at least ording to the n''s written records.


    But there was a catch. By the time he got to that point, his physical growth and chakra development would be about 80% done.


    In other words, he''d be close to his ceiling and that would be his highest level in general, with not much room to get stronger.


    For most, reaching such a level would be an incredible achievement. Yet, for Hikari, it was far from enough.


    Therefore, Hikari''s new approach to integrating natural energy more into his daily practice and life involved a significant shift in how he utilized his Byakugan during thosebined evening sessions.


    Previously, he had pushed his eyes to their limits, believing that the intense strain would reveal more of the elusive natural energy patterns and thus enhance his unique abilities. Essentially, to ''wake up'' that specific Byakugan''s ability further, and it worked for years.


    However, he came to understand that he had gradually reached a natural ceiling in terms of what his Byakugan could achieve in this specific domain.


    No amount of exertion, meaning exercise seemed to push his capabilities further since a while ago, leading him to the realization that further evolution of his eyes, in terms of capability, might require a change at the gic level, a step he was not yet ready to take.


    Recognizing this limitation, and understanding that over time the present vision level improved so much that it actually finally allowed for morefortable interaction with the natural energy, than before, Hikari adjusted his strategy.


    Instead of focusing on short, intense periods of training that heavily strained his Byakugan, he extended the duration of his sessions, opting for a more moderate use of his eyes.


    Previously, he might strain his Byakugan in one-hour bursts, hoping to catch glimpses of natural energy patterns better.


    Now, he found that by not overexerting his eyes and instead practicing for, say, four hours at a moderate intensity in thete afternoon and the evening, he could still maintain a more consistent observation and interaction with natural energy even with that kind of moderate, more ''baseline'' level of vision turned on.


    This change allowed Hikari to immerse himself in the practice of melding his chakra with the natural energy around him for longer periods, enhancing his understanding and control of this power without the physical toll his Byakugan brought forcing him to cut sessions short.


    Hikari settled into his training, perched on top of this high roof, with a sense of purpose and resolve.


    No matter how moreplex the situation in the outside world got recently, it was his inner world and peace there, and he still had toplete his daily practice regime with discipline.


    He began with a series of standard calming exercises, that always needed to be performed first, using a specialized breathing technique to stabilize his heart rate and clear his mind.


    This foundational step was crucial for the intricate work thaty ahead. With his thoughts centered and his body rxed, Hikari then slowly activated his Byakugan, transitioning it into the unique mode specifically attuned to detecting natural energy, the ''mode'' he learned how to do and separate from his usual Byakugan use, that other Hyuga possessed, perfectly.


    As he opened his Byakugan, the world transformed before his eyes. The ability to perceive natural energy, a skill he had honed over countless hours of dedicated practice, had evolved remarkably.


    Where once there were only faint outlines and elusive patterns, Hikari could now see clear, transparent waves and currents of natural energy enveloping the environment around him.


    It was as if he was submerged in an ocean of vibrant, almost alien-like energy, distinct yet integral to the nature surrounding him. This energy felt foreign yet familiar, revealingyers of the world previously hidden from sight.


    This enhanced perception was akin to essing another dimension¡ªa realm where the fundamental forces that animate the world were visible and palpable.


    Hikari''s training had not only expanded his physical capabilities but had also deepened his connection to the world in a way that few could imagine.


    As he engaged with this energy, manipting and blending it with his chakra, Hikari experienced a profound sense of unity with the environment.


    This practice was no longer just a part of his routine; it was a meditation, a spiritual improvement journey, a ''talk'' with the essence of the world itself.


    Hikari embarked on the next phase of his routine with a clear goal in mind: to harness the boundless natural energy surrounding him and blend it seamlessly with his own chakra.


    He began by projecting his chakra outward, envisioning it as a tether reaching into the vast ocean of natural energy.


    His aim was totch onto this energy, drawing it in and merging it with his own, effectively using his chakra as an outside conduit or ''hook'' to harness the other, more potent force.


    The process was intricate, demanding precise control and a deep understanding of both energies. Hikari was exploring uncharted territory, learning to mold his chakra and natural energy together into a cohesive force.


    Right now, his efforts overall yielded only basic results during these practice routines¡ªsimple movements of energy and minor, harmless shes.


    These early manifestations of his practice might have seemed trivial or even ineffective in abat scenario to most shinobi, but to Hikari, they represented significant progress he could''ve only dreamed of in the past, even just two years ago.


    He had really sessfully surmounted the most challenging hurdle some time ago: the initial fusion of his chakra with natural energy.


    This seemingly ''basic'' achievement was a testament to his perseverance and skill and the biggest hurdle he passed in this life so far on his training journey.


    He knew the best how much effort went there. So now whaty ahead was a path of continuous practice and refinement.


    Hikari understood that mastering this technique would require building muscle memory, enhancing his finesse, and discovering innovative ways to apply this merged energy in battle, over time. The realization that he had already opened the door to a new realm of power was both exhrating and daunting. But, Hikari, knew that this was his only chance.


    Hikari often pondered the sources of his recent advancements in harnessing natural energy during thest two years.


    He spected whether the recent stability and openness found in his rtionship with Hinome,bined with his elevated status within the n, and its status within the vige, had contributed to a more rxed and positive mindset, which in turn might have facilitated his sess with natural energy.


    However, he came to the conclusion that all these developments, he considered, might have simply normalized his mental state, to a baseline, providing a foundation conducive to focus and growth as opposed to the constant tense and close to a negative state of mind he was mostly in before after transmigration.


    Furthermore, Hikari understood from his extensive research that true mastery in this domain often required solitude and an unwavering, even extreme dedication to the natural world.


    His studies of ancient legends that were written as some folk stories¡ªtales of samurai and monks who wielded unexined, mythical extraordinary powers, something he attributed to the use of the natural energy in one way or another, mostly in the outward form like he attempted to do as well, suggested that these abilities were closely tied to their deep immersion in nature, for long periods of time, and constant meditative practices for the majority of their days.


    These stories highlighted a path to power that was steeped in istion and singr focus. However, Hikari also recognized a distinct advantage he held over them: his Byakugan and its unique ''mode''.


    Unlike the legendary figures in his studies, who presumablycked such a kekkei genkai, Hikari''s Byakugan provided him with the unique ability to see and interact with natural energy more directly than them.


    This ability allowed for a level of precision and efficiency in his training that was unparalleled, to everyone who attempted to interact with the natural energy in the same way as him now, cutting the need for prolonged istion or constant meditation in different natural settings.


    That was another reason why Hikari was, in his impression, able to achieve something it would take them decades to aplish on their journeys, only farter in life, in only a few short years, and that was just the beginning.


    Hikari didn''t know much about Sage Mode or the use of senjutsu through ''internal'' methods shinobi typically employed nowadays, taught at those 3 ces, but for the ''external'' natural energy use kind of methods that those strongest and renowned ancient, pre-shinobi monks and samurai also used like Hikari was wanting to use nowadays, his Byakugan''s special ability mode made him more qualified than all of thembined, in his opinion, and the most qualified ''external method'' natural energy user probably of the past, present and future too.


    After all, they were all just essentially ''sensing'' the natural energy, through decades of madman-like fusion with nature, whereas, he was the one who actually ''saw'' it directly.


    However, in thest two years, Hikari also used his status to reach out to people in the ck market, of various roles and geographies, looking for old texts from ninja monks or samurai.


    He hoped to find useful info on how to use natural energy in different ways, in terms of molding and ''techniques'', once the connection with it gets established first as he did, hoping to learn faster from those who had decades figuring it out and save himself some time.


    Nheless, he also wanted to make sure he wasn''t chasing after stories that weren''t true or just old tales tampered due to time. But at first, his search didn''t lead to anything helpful.


    However, the turning point in Hikari''s quest arrived when he decided to shift strategies, moving away from the unreliable ck market.


    With the Patriarch''s secret approval, he arranged for a Hyuga team to investigate ancient monk temple ruins scattered throughout the Land of Fire, as that was the biggest center of gravity for the monks then, just like it was today for shinobi, seeking any clues or artifacts that could be relevant to his studies on natural energy.


    This direct approach aimed to uncover genuine, tangible sources of ancient wisdom that the ck market had failed to provide.


    Over thest two years, this new strategy began to bear fruit. Several intriguing items and manuscripts gradually made their way to Hikari, each holding the potential to unlock the secrets he sought.


    Through meticulous analysis and deciphering, Hikari waster able to extract valuable insights from these findings.


    Among the scattered pieces of ancient lore, he discovered practical techniques and methods that promised to refine his ability to gather and shape natural energy in a useful kind of way.


    Armed with this newfound knowledge, Hikari integrated these ancient methods into his training regimen.


    This blend of old wisdom with his own innovative practices marked a significant advancement in his journey.


    Not only did these techniques offer a deeper understanding of natural energy and the past in general, but they also promised to elerate his learning process, saving him valuable time.

 76. The Journey to The Konoha Council Meeting

    76. The Journey to The Konoha Council Meeting


    As night transitioned into morning in Konoha, the dawn brought with it a palpable shift in the vige''s atmosphere. The usual tranquility was tinged with a sense of urgency and anxiety.


    By now, word had spread throughout the vige that Konoha was embarking on arge-scale mobilization in response to the looming threat of global war.


    The streets, once bustling with the daily routines of its inhabitants, now echoed with the sounds of military preparations.


    It wasn''t until the afternoon began to wane that the Hyuga n''s delegation made its prominent departure from theirpound, setting a course towards the crucial pre-war council.


    This assembly was designated for Konoha''s elite decision-makers to deliberate and define the vige''s involvement and strategy in the impending war.


    The delegation was led by Patriarch Hirayoshi himself, his sessor Hiashi, Takumi, the Fifth Elder, and Hikari as well, as the three of them would lead the Hyuga n forces on the battlefield.


    They were also walking closest to the center of the group, protected from all sides, and talking quietly about various matters regarding the uing meeting as they walked.


    Their entourageprised dozens of Hyuga n Jonin and Elite Jonin, apanying them were also selected highest intelligence assistants, tasked with providing analytical support to navigate the uing discussions and the intricatendscape of the vige shinobi politics and warfare.


    As the Hyuga delegation continued their march toward the council meeting, their ranks swelled with the addition of their closest allies first.


    The Inuzuka and Aburame ns, led by their respective heads¡ªTsume Inuzuka and Shibi Aburame¡ªconverged with the Hyuga group, from the other side, bringing with them thebined strength and strategies of their ns, although they led considerably less numerous groups.


    After brief, yet meaningful exchanges between the three n heads, the two groups seamlessly merged with the Hyuga at the helm. Everyone was a little uneasy and wanted to arrive at the destination as soon as possible.


    As thebined forces of the Hyuga, Inuzuka, and Aburame ns made their way across the Naka River towards the vige center, there, on the opposite side of the bridge, stood the delegation from the Uchiha n.


    Leading the Uchiha delegation was Fugaku Uchiha, the n''s current, young patriarch, known for his leadership of the Military Police Force within the vige and great strength.


    Beside him stood Great Elder Setsuna, a figure, of simr old age as the Hyuga n Patriarch, representing the more radical faction within the n, and his 15-year-old granddaughter Kiyomi Uchiha, marking the presence of both the n''s established authority and its future.


    The Uchiha''s numbers present there were on par with the Hyuga''s. As the groups from both sides of the Naka River merged, the anticipated tension between the Hyuga and Uchiha ns was noticeably absent. Instead, elite members from both ns exchanged looks of curiosity and mutual recognition.


    The old rivalry and animosity that might have clouded their interactions even two years ago seemed to have dissipated. Now, in the face of a greatermon challenge and the pressing need for unity against the external pressures of the impending war and the internal dynamics opposing the Hokage''s Faction both ns found themselves realigned as true informal allies.


    As the two groups approached each other on the other end of the bridge, the leading figures of both ns here¡ªFugaku and Setsuna from the Uchiha, alongside Kiyomi, and Hirayoshi, Takumi, Hikari, and Hiashi from the Hyuga positioned themselves at the front of the groups.


    Setsuna had short, but slightly spiky gray hair and a dark traditional Uchiha-like n kimono with the giant n symbol woven at its back.


    Meanwhile, Fugaku had short, brown hair that reached to his shoulders and onyx-colored eyes, with visible pronounced creases below them made.


    He wore a simple traditional Uchiha-like kimono with grey pants, however for some reason, he still wore his Police Force uniform on top of that for the asion today, with its symbol, at the back, as if to signal that he was both from the Uchiha and Konoha''s executive branch.


    Fugaku, with his calm and authoritative presence, first exchanged a nod with Hirayoshi, whose stature and demeanor mirrored the significance of the asion, and then with everyone else, just like Setsuna. Kiyomi meanwhile also did the same, although in a more respectful kind of manner, but she secretly made some kind of a casual expression at Hikari.


    Meanwhile, Hikari also observed Fugaku Uchiha, at this time, he couldn''t help but mentally assess the Uchiha patriarch''s capabilities and history. At 28, Fugaku was indeed at the peak of his strength as a shinobi, radiating the confidence and power that came with his prime.


    Hikari considered Fugaku''s present skill level, cing him in the realm of an above-average Elite Jonin, simr to Kiyomi Uchiha, making them the two strongest people in the n now. It was just that Kiyomi generally focused more on the Fire Release and Fugaku on genjutsu.


    The simrity in their power, alongside the obvious differences in their ages, often sparkedparisons and, at times,petitive tension within the Uchiha n, as it seemed that Kiyomi, the radical faction sessor, had truly better talent inparison to the Patriarch.


    However, the external pressures, on many levels, prevented this topic from causing any more significant rifts within their ns currently.


    But, Hikari knew that if he hadn''t been secretly assisting Kiyomi through various indirect means, in her shinobi journey, especially regarding her ''eyes'', during thest two years, then it would''ve been probablypletely different.


    Yet, what intrigued Hikari the most was precisely the status of Fugaku''s own Sharingan. Despite his rtively formidable abilities, there were no signs of Fugaku having activated the Mangekyo Sharingan as of today, in terms of his chakra potency or the reservoir in general.


    Hikari''s Byakugan could now be activated and deactivated almost instantly, thanks to his intense exercise of it, and talent, alongside chakra control and quick processing speed, allowing him to gauge many things about anyone he was in contact with without them realizing it at all. It was his analytical ability and the processing speed that also made it possible to gauge many different things in milliseconds.


    Additionally, that power necessitated profound emotional distress or a significant personal loss to unlock at this point in time. Given Fugaku''s steady leadership roles¡ªoverseeing the n and the Konoha Military Police Force¡ªit seemed he hadn''t been subjected to the kind of traumatic experiences that typically precipitated the awakening of the Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Hikari spected about the impending war''s potential to change this. The conflict might provide the conditions for Fugaku to unlock this deeper power, should he face extreme emotional turmoil. However, the uncertainty surrounding Fugaku''s Sharingan and the exact circumstances that might lead to the Mangekyo''s awakening remained aplex puzzle.


    Hikari''s thoughts drifted to Fugaku''s sons, particrly Itachi, born the previous year already. He also remembered how Shisui Uchiha should have been born three years earlier as well.


    He recalled how, during theter stages of this very war, Fugaku took a young Itachi to witness its horrors firsthand.


    This experience, Hikari considered, was pivotal in shaping Itachi into the figure he became¡ªa staunch ''pacifist'' and a betrayer, driven to make extreme decisions for what he was led to believe was the ''greater good''.


    So, Hikari pondered whether Itachi''s ''extraordinary'' eventual path could be attributed to Fugaku''s parenting, which he regarded clearly as a horrible failure, as seen from that example, or if Itachi''s brain was simply inherently different and programmed with some kind of a ''mistake'', from the beginning, due to the exceptional talent he possessed with the Sharingan, which was said to be able to influence one''s personality in significant ways.


    As for Fugaku himself, Hikari simply considered him indecisive and notpetent enough. He neglected his sons for the so-called n and vige responsibilities used as excuses, yet he simply failed in those areas as well, so what was the point?


    And he also let his older son, one of the biggest talents in Uchiha history, betray their n to Hokage''s faction, ''in front of his eyes''. He may or may not had the Mangekyo Sharingan, but he should''ve at least done something instead of always going with the flow, in the end even peacefully allowing his elder son to y him and his wife like animals. In Hikari''s mind, in his limited exposure, Fugaku didn''t seem like a very capable individual.


    However, despite Hikari''s bad opinion of him, he still had to cooperate with him as the leader of the Uchiha n in the future. Hikari could just hope that his ''Butterfly Effect'' makes him morepetent this time around in this timeline, as he didn''t need any substandard allies.

 77. The ‘Anti-Hokage’ Coalition Fully Assembled

    77. The ¡®Anti-Hokage¡¯ Coalition Fully Assembled


    Meanwhile, Fugaku looked at the Hyuga Patriarch, Hirayoshi, and said, "Patriarch Hirayoshi, sessor Hiashi, we must stand united today."


    Hirayoshi returned the nod, replying, "Indeed, Fugaku-san. Our alliance has never been more important than it is right now.", Meanwhile, Hiashi just politely nodded and remained silent.


    Turning to Setsuna, the Uchiha Great Elder, Hirayoshi added, "Elder Setsuna, your wisdom will be invaluable in the days toe. Let''s bring our cooperation to the next level during the times ahead inside of Konoha, as we will both contribute from ''home'' here instead of on the battlefield. Our ''old bones'' are better suited for that kind of role after all in this new era...",


    Setsuna, with a slightly friendly smile, responded, "Patriarch Hirayoshi, the challenges ahead demand our best, let''s hope our decades of experience and wisdom contribute something. I''m ready to contribute with everything I have left.", And he also just nodded toward Hiashi.


    Fugaku then shifted his attention to Takumi, the Fifth Elder of the Hyuga, "Elder Takumi, your strategies have alwaysmanded my respect, let''s cooperate and meet each other on the battlefield, to fight alongside each other, if we have a chance."


    "Patriarch Fugaku, your leadership will be a cornerstone for Konoha''s war efforts this time around, I''m sure of it. Together, we''ll navigate these times.",


    Takumi said politely and then turned to Setsuna, offering a nod of acknowledgment, "Great Elder Setsuna, your insights will be critical "back home". I look forward to our coboration."


    Setsuna, meanwhile, replied, "Elder Takumi, the respect is mutual. Let''s hope all goes well..."


    Fugaku observed curiously and then approached Hikari, his expression serious yet carrying a hint of wonder and even admiration, it was obvious that he paid more attention to him than to Hiashi, something which thetter didn''t find particrly strange or offensive at this time.


    "Elder Hikari, it''s truly rare to see someone as young as you achieve so much. Hope the good luck continues to follow you in the future on your journey as well.", Hikari, maintaining hisposure under Fugaku''s scrutinizing gaze, responded with a calm that belied his years.


    "Patriarch Fugaku, I''m grateful for the recognition and nice wishes. My efforts are for the n and Konoha''s welfare. The challenges ahead demand our best, and I hope my contributions will be worthy of the trust ced in me."


    Setsuna, observing the exchange, finally spoke, "Elder Hikari, tomand such respect and acknowledgment from your peers and even those older, including from members of our n, speaks volumes.",


    "Your mind and talent have set a new benchmark for all shinobi ns in Konoha. Kiyomi, my granddaughter, has often mentioned you and your spars in the past and spoke highly of you and your insights."


    Hikari offered a slight smile at Setsuna''s words, "Great Elder Setsuna, I am honored by your and Kiyomi''s regard for me. Your granddaughter is also a shinobi of great potential and value as well in my impression so far. As we stand on the brink of this conflict, my resolve is only strengthened. I''m ready to contribute to our shared goals and strategies...", He concluded.


    As Hikari''s gaze subtly shifted towards Kiyomi upon mentioning her, he caught a glimpse of the mischievous sparkle in her eyes, an expression incongruent with the gravity of the moment yet characteristic of her increasingly vibrant personality - at least only when he, himself was involved for some reason.


    Kiyomi''s demeanor in front of him was always a stark contrast to Hinome''s more reserved and passive nature. Kiyomi thrived on interaction and often sought to engage Hikari with a yful yet challenging spirit, especially now as he finally entered puberty for some reason.


    Despite thepetitive nature of their spars, in which Kiyomi had yet to im a single victory over Hikari, her confidence never waved and she still had no reservations during their interactions. Over the two years, this dynamic has evolved more and more as time passed.


    During these meetings, on the same secret mountainous location outside the vige, there would standardly be discussions on the vige politics and the matter regarding their ns'' alliance, but there would also be asional spars between them and Hikari giving her some insights in terms of her growth as a shinobi afterward as on their first meeting two years ago.


    "''Elder Hikari, I''m really happy about your kind words...", Kiyomi interjected, her voice tinged with a yful sarcasm that lightly punctuated the word ''Elder.'' Herment, made after hearing Hikari speak of her with respect in front of her grandfather, carried a different tone than the formality typically reserved for such gatherings.


    It reflected the more casual, candid nature of their interactions away from the official eyes, contrasting sharply with the current setting. Hikari, catching the subtle tease in her voice, offered a small, acknowledging smile.


    The subtle exchange between Kiyomi and Hikari did not go unnoticed by the ''seniors'' present on the scene, each reacting in their own way while maintaining a ''diplomatic'' and, ''curious'' and even ''surprised'' kind of silence.


    Fugaku''s eyebrows slightly furrowed, a visible sign of his intrigue and perhaps concern. His rivalry with Kiyomi and her grandfather within the Uchiha n made Kiyomi''s apparent familiarity with a Hyuga, especially one as prominent as Hikari, a point of intense wonder.


    Setsuna, on the other hand, maintained hisposure, his face adorned with a benign smile that revealed nothing of his thoughts. His ability to mask his reactions left others guessing about his stance on the matter for some reason.


    Takumi and Hirayoshi, representatives of the Hyuga n, were also taken aback. They had been under the impression that Hikari''s interactions with Kiyomi were strictly formal, a part of the coborative efforts mandated by the council for the betterment of n rtions.


    The warmth and familiarity disyed in this brief encounter suggested a depth to their rtionship that went beyond mere diplomatic necessity, truly surprising them both.


    However, despite the curiosity this interaction sparked among all of the elders, they understood that delving into the ''strange and special'' kind of personal dynamics between Hikari and Kiyomi was not the priority at the moment.


    The pressing concerns of the uing Konoha Council meeting and the looming war demanded their full attention, leaving little room for spection about anything else.


    Meanwhile, all of their focus was soon collectively redirected as thest piece of their own ''anti-Hokage'' coalition arrived at this meeting hotspot, led by Sakumo Hatake at the front who walked with a powerful presence, behind him his factionposed of n heads and jonins from smaller shinobi ns, the faction he created two years ago that now matured.


    Before making their way into the Konoha Council meeting, they made a strategic decision to gather, and enter as one cohesive unit, here yesterday.


    This collective entrance n was not just about physical presence; it was a carefully orchestrated show of force and unity in itself.


    By entering together, they aimed to visually underscore their solidarity and shared resolve in challenging the Hokage''s faction and fighting for their rights at this meeting, making a clear statement to all potential observers about the strength and cohesion of their young alliance.

 78. A ‘Talk’ With Kiyomi and Moving Underground

    78. A ¡®Talk¡¯ With Kiyomi and Moving Underground


    "Patriarch Hirayoshi, Patriarch Fugaku, Elder Setsuna, Elder Takumi, Hiashi-san, Kiyomi-san, Hikari-kun, my apologies for any dy. Since we are all assembled now and ready. Let''s proceed right away...",


    Sakumo stated with determination, his demeanor way sharper than two years ago, now appearing like a sword ready to unsheath at all times, his words signaling theplete assembly of their interest group''s representatives for this pivotal, Konoha''s Grand Council.


    Fugaku nodded in response, his expression serious but resolute, "You were just on time, Sakumo-san. Together, our voices will be heard. Let us proceed with unity...", He affirmed.


    Hirayoshi, equallyposed, added, "Indeed, Sakumo-san, let''s move forward and make our case clear and strong..."


    Sakumo also cast a brief, acknowledging nce at Hikari and the rest of the group then, a silent gesture of readiness.


    Without further dy, they then began their movement towards the meeting''s designed location. This wasn''t just any venue; it was a specially designated, vast, and secure chamber area situated underground, beneath the towering presence of the "Hokage''s Rock" mountain.


    Chosen for its discretion and security, this site was reserved for meetings of utmost importance, the kind that could define the course of the vige''s future for a long time.


    As the groupmenced their march toward the underground meeting location, their collective presence and disciplined stride exuded an air of intimidation and purpose.


    Civilians and shinobi of civilian origin who happened to be along their path couldn''t help but pause and stare, intrigued and somewhat awed by the sight.


    For many, it was the first time witnessing such a unified disy of power and solidarity among elite shinobi, not to mention from so many different factions.


    The sight of the legendary Sakumo Hatake leading the procession, nked by the prominent figures of the Hyuga and Uchiha ns, was particrly striking.


    Their close and familiar interaction, a tangible demonstration of the rumored alliances forming among them, left asting impression on the onlookers.


    Rumors of these factions drawing closer had circted, but witnessing it firsthand brought a new level of reality and significance to those whispers.


    To the civilians and those less involved in the shinobi world, this moment was more than a mere gathering of notable figures from distinct ns and backgrounds, of various traditional-like shinobi n attires and n heraldic symbols.


    It symbolized a significant shift within Konoha, hinting at the depth andplexity of the political and strategic machinations at y between the people of power within the vige.


    The unity disyed by these leaders and their factions suggested that the vige was on the cusp of significant changes, both internally and in its stance and sh against external threats.


    Observers were left with a mix of admiration, curiosity, and a hint of apprehension, understanding that such a disy foretold impactful developments for Konoha, that could be either positive, or negative, in nature, but were certainly very dangerous and chaotic for the near future.


    The exact nature of these impending changes remained uncertain, but the consensus among the civilians was clear: whatever was brewing within the vige''s leadership was bound to have far-reaching, and likely painful for them consequences.


    However, the Hokage''s longstanding influence on public perception, fortified by years of strategic propaganda and soft power, had cultivated a strong rapport with the civilian poption.


    His faction was perceived as more ''civilian-friendly,'' a narrative carefully crafted and disseminated through decades of meticulous positioning. In contrast, the ''anti-Hokage'' faction, despite its current show of unity and purpose, was often depicted as a harbinger of instability and chaos.


    This portrayal leveraged the underlying envy and resentment some civilians felt towards the shinobi ns, painting them as privileged elites disconnected from the concerns of the ordinary people.


    These perceptions were exaggerated under Hiruzen''s propaganda, creating a skewed view of the factions'' intentions and alignments.


    As they moved, Hikari shared his observations with Kiyomi, who walked closely beside him, slightly separated from the rest of their group.


    They discussed the civilians'' reactions and the broader implications of Konoha''s current politicalndscape, all while taking in the sights of the vige''s streets and central architecture.


    "It''s fascinating, isn''t it?", Hikari remarked starting some ''small talk'' with her, his voice low enough for only Kiyomi to hear,


    "How deeply ingrained the Hokage''s narrative is among the civilians. It shapes their entire lives and perceptions, dictating who they see as protectors and who they view as threats to their stability without any further critical thought or understanding of our own perspective or worries as well."


    Kiyomi nodded, her eyes scanning the faces of the civilians they passed, "True. The power of propaganda is not to be underestimated. It''s a potent tool in shaping public opinion, for better or worse.",


    "Our coalition has its work cut out for it if we''re to challenge the status quo and assume the leading position inside of this vige somehow in the future, or else our own supposed lead wouldn''t bode very well for use over the long term and we underperformed."


    "I thought you didn''t like and didn''t consider these civilians important before...?", Hikari inquired, genuinely curious about Kiyomi''s perspective.


    Kiyomi, understanding the depth of the question, responded with an honesty that reflected their shared background and the openness between them,


    "It''s not about liking them or not. My viewpoint is highly rational regarding our n''s inherent superiority inparison to them. That''s an objective reality. My issue arises when those less capable begin to disregard those of us with strength, fueled by artificial support that''s fleeting at best, you should know exactly from thates from and what I mean by this...",


    "Our Police Force and individual nsmen, from this vige''s founding Uchiha n, face increasing disrespect and less cooperation while performing our duties, from them, by each passing day. So, everyone needs to recognize and ept their ce in my opinion.",


    "And it''s not about whether the civilians are ''important''; it''s about establishing a form of control that, over time, could hypothetically lead to more stable governance of the vige, reducing future conflicts and ensuring a smoother leadership transition...",


    She exined, her tone indicating a blend of realism and a strategic view of social hierarchy.


    Hikari listened intently to Kiyomi''s exnation, finding himself in agreement and admiration of her viewpoint.


    His gaze unconsciously lingered on her with appreciation, not just for her intellect but also for her distinct appearance that diverged from the traditional Uchiha attire.


    Her choice of dark, less conventional robes hinted at her independent and spirited nature, attributes Hikari foundpelling.


    Kiyomi''s maturity into early womanhood was evident, her striking S-shaped figure and attractive features did not escape Hikari''s notice.


    These qualities,bined with her lively and teasing interactions, deepened the connection he felt towards her.


    Despite¡ªor perhaps because of¡ªher yful challenges and the spirited dynamic between them, Hikari found himself drawn to Kiyomi. His appreciation for beautiful women, paired with Kiyomi''s unique blend of simr outlook and allure, made their rtionship all the more significant to him.


    As time progressed, with Hikari gaining more influence and power as a shinobi in the world around him, he noticed a gradual, slight, shift and ''loosening'' of his own past ''restraints''.


    This change allowed him to more freely indulge in certain aspects of his nature that he had previously kept in check, such as a primal appreciation for female attractiveness in general.


    He pondered the reasons behind this shift. Was it simply the result of bing more secure in his position and abilities, granting him the confidence to express facets of his personality that he had previously always suppressed since his transmigration?


    Or, perhaps, it was the natural progression of entering early puberty, with hormones beginning to exert a stronger influence on his thoughts and behaviors. He didn''t know.


    Kiyomi, perceptive as always, caught Hikari''s lingering gaze, a look that had be increasingly frequent.


    She especially noticed when his eyes wandered to certain ''areas'' entuated by her tight, unconventional attire¡ªa departure from the traditional Uchiha style.


    Her response, tinged with the yful yet defensive nuance characteristic of a ''tsundere'', as Hikari internally dubbed her, was to feign her slight embarrassment.


    Then, in a mock-serious manner, she lightly punched Hikari on the shoulder, teasing him about his behavior,


    "Really, Hikari-kun, You''re not as subtle as you think...", She teased, her eyes sparkling with a mischievous light. She leaned in closer, her voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper


    "You know, for a Hyuga, your eyes have a hard time keeping their focus more and more recently...",


    She chided, half-jokingly, but she also smiled unconsciously, trying to downy the moment with humor while also attempting to assert a boundary, yfully reinforcing the notion that he was a Hyuga and that someone like her couldn''t possibly be ever interested in a Hyuga.


    She has always ''convinced'' herself of that fact inwardly, also constantly repeating to herself how he was just a ''brat'' in her eyes.


    "Why should I bother with being subtle when I''ve got nothing to hide? And after all the work I''ve put into helping you push your Sharingan to and beyond the typical third tomoe, don''t I deserve a little... ''acknowledgment''?",


    "You didn''t even have to go through any tough emotional stuff to get there. Even your Patriarch has started looking at you with envy because of your power boost. And it''s not like you actually mind my nces; your reactions say plenty, even if you act like they don''t.",


    "Just admit it, you probably feel a bit of pride knowing some prodigy from a totally different top rival n is paying you so much attention...", Hikari said, his smile yful as he leaned in closer, mirroring her previous action. His words were teasing yet carried an undercurrent.


    At Hikari''s words, a noticeable blush tinted Kiyomi''s cheeks for the first time, her usualposure wavering under the weight of his observations, actions and him being so direct.


    "You! You are not right... About... About thatst part. But, this isn''t the time or ce for such discussions, Hikari-kun, I thought you were more serious than this...", She murmured, her voice a mix of embarrassment and reprimand.


    ncing around, she noticed a few curious stares from those nearby, "We''re attracting strange looks already, please be more serious for the asion...", She added softly, pretty uncharacteristic for her.


    "Haha, looks like I''ve won this round then...", Hikari remarked, his teasing smile indicating his yful victory,


    "Next time, maybe keep your observations about me to yourself, you were the one who initiated this, remember? And just remember, if there''s a ''next time,'' I won''t hesitate to ''expose'' youpletely, audience or not...",


    He added quietly, ensuring only Kiyomi could hear. With that, he consciously increased the previously established distance between them, reestablishing the space that their roles and the public setting demanded.


    Then observing Kiyomi''s mix of slight annoyance and evident embarrassment through her subtle bodynguage, Hikari couldn''t help but smile again, reflecting on his earlier assertion.


    Hisments weren''t entirely made as teasing; he genuinely believed he had yed a significant role in Kiyomi''s development as a shinobi.


    Their growing closeness had provided Hikari an opportunity to utilize his Byakugan''s acute vision, his mastery over chakra precision, and his expertise in Yin Release to subtly ''operate'' on Kiyomi''s eyes during their private meetings.


    He intended to stimte her Sharingan, unlocking deeper reserves of power that had remained dormant beforehand.


    This innovative and ''secret'' approach then yielded remarkable results, significantly enhancing her capabilities in a rtively short amount of time by all Uchiha standards.


    Kiyomi, for her part, also mulled over Hikari''s words. Initially, her pride might have prevented her from epting such intimate assistance, but witnessing Hikari''s rapid advancement in strength¡ªa widening gap she couldn''t bridge on her own¡ªand her stagnation at the cusp of unlocking the third tomoe, just as this dangerous war was approaching, led her to reconsider.


    Recognizing the rising, genuine alliance between the two ns, at that time, and dismissing any notion that Hikari would act against her interests due to that, she consented to this unconventional method.


    As a result, the procedure not only catalyzed her growth but also marked a shift in their interpersonal, private dynamic.


    The regr, intimate nature of these sessions¡ªHikari''s hands mere inches from her face, focusing intently on her eyes¡ªgradually altered Kiyomi''s perception of him over time.


    She knew that allowing her to increase her bloodline dojutsu power in that short of a timeframe, otherwise pretty much considered impossible, greatly enhanced her chances to defend herself in the future, and probably also increased her survivability, during this war.


    So, what began as a partnership rooted in mutual benefit, between their ns, evolved into a deeper, albeit undefined, connection characterized by yful interactions and a silent acknowledgment, on her part, of Hikari''s crucial role in her journey as a shinobi, hence the dominant position in their rtionship. Although, she would never openly admit that fact.


    It was just that Hikari harbored a slight sense of regret, at this moment, that time constraints prevented him from attempting to elevate Kiyomi''s Sharingan to the legendary Mangekyo level. He couldn''t help but specte about the potential upheavals and shifts in power dynamics such an advancement would trigger within the Konoha and the world in general.


    However, achieving the Mangekyo Sharingan represented a quantum leap in difficultypared to their previous endeavors. Hikari understood that even with his innovative method, the process could potentially span decades, an investment of time they simply did not have given the imminent threats and the war on the horizon.


    Thus, while he had assisted Kiyomi in reaching new heights of strength, the journey to the Mangekyo Sharingan was a path she would need to navigate on her own, likely under the extreme conditions of battle.


    Hikari''s hope for her was not just about unlocking this formidable power but also about her survival. In the harsh realities of war, where life and death hung in the bnce, Hikari''s wish was for Kiyomi to find her way to the Mangekyo Sharingan, not just for the sake of power but as a means of ensuring her safety amidst the chaos.


    Hikari had considered the option of teaching Kiyomi specific Yin Release exercises that she could practice on her own, a method that, while effective, would undoubtedly be slower than the direct assistance he had been providing.


    However, he ultimately decided against it for strategic reasons. Despite their alliance and growing personal connection, Hikari remained acutely aware of the delicate bnce of power between the Hyuga and Uchiha ns.


    By keeping the methodology to himself and not handing over such a potent tool for dojutsu self-improvement, Hikari aimed to maintain the status quo in their inter-n dynamics.


    He recognized that empowering the Uchiha with the means to potentially unlock the Mangekyo Sharingan independently could tip the scales of power too heavily in their favor.


    This could disrupt the fragile equilibrium that allowed their alliance to function, transforming the Uchiha from allies into dominators in the political and martialndscape of Konoha.


    In Hikari''s strategic calculus, the benefits of their alliance were predicated on mutual respect and a sense of equality. Handing over a method that could significantly enhance the Uchiha''sbat capabilities risked undermining the Hyuga''s position and, by extension, his own too.


    Meanwhile, Hikari''s contemtive state was interrupted as their sizable entourage approached the entrance to the ndestine meeting location.


    The path leading to it was heavily guarded, a testament to the importance of the council they were about to attend.


    As they were ushered in by a guide, Hikari took note of the robust security measures in ce, a clear indication of the high stakes involved.


    ncing at Kiyomi, he noticed a hint of tension on her face, a rare sight for someone usually soposed. In response, Hikari offered her a reassuring look, a silent gesture of confidence that seemed to ease her concerns.


    Together, with the rest of the group, they descended into the depths of the secretbyrinth, making their way towards the expansive underground venue designated for the meeting.


    The scene that unfolded as they progressed through ancient-like hallways and chambers was remarkable. Security was tight, with members of the ordinary Shinobi, Anbu, the Police Force, and the Konoha Border Surveince positioned throughout theplex and outside.


    They were stationed above the ground, below, and on all sides, aprehensive security detail ensuring the safety of the venue and its attendees.

 79. The Unfair Distribution of Power Inside Konoha

    79. The Unfair Distribution of Power Inside Konoha


    As the group, led by notable figures like Sakumo Hatake and joined by leaders from Konoha''s famous ns, entered the venue, everyone could feel the importance of the assembly they were about to be part of.


    They walked into arge, spacious room designed with serious discussions in mind, yet it still looked elegant and rich.


    The room, while prepared for war-time talks, was decorated in a way that reflected Konoha''s pride and heritage. The room was very well lit despite it being deep underground through some kind of specialmps.


    Beautiful artwork that told stories of the vige''s past adorned the walls, serving as a reminder of what they were all fighting for.


    At the center of it all stood a huge circr table, meant for only the key yers in the meeting. This table was more than just furniture; it was a symbol, with its shiny surface and chairs that spoke of the significance of those who would sit there.


    Around the table, a giant symbol of Konoha was proudly disyed, connecting everyone there back to the heart of the vige.


    Around the edges of the room, there were spaces for assistants, bodyguards, and the rest of the attendees'' support teams. They could sit or stand in these areas, arranged so everyone could follow what was happening at the central table.


    Beyond the inner circle of the vige''s most influential leaders and the outer circleposed of their entourages, therey another significantyer to this assembly ¨C a third circleprising all the civilian Elite Jonins and some civilian Jonins of Konoha.


    This group yed a crucial role in the day''s proceedings. They were not just spectators but active participants whose presence ensured the integrity and implementation of the decisions made within the council.


    The ''Hokage''s'' faction had already taken their seats by the time the others arrived, showing that all sides of Konoha''s leadership were now present. The atmosphere was filled with a mix of anticipation and the understanding that the discussions here would have a big impact.


    Taking the most prominent spot in the room was the Third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi. His position at the top end of the table, a bit higher than the others, clearly showed his role as the leader of the vige.


    Meanwhile, even Hikari, who was usually so steady and almost robotic in his thinking, found himself taking a deep breath as he looked, for the first time, around at all these famous figures from the story he knew in his past life.


    Now seeing them in real life, they weren''t just ''cartoonish'' characters from a story anymore; they were real, living people of ''flesh and blood''.


    This moment made Hikari feel even more a part of this world he had ended up in. Everything seemed so vivid and real, yet it felt almost dreamlike at the same time, making him confused.


    As Hikari absorbed the gravity of the moment, the Hyuga Patriarch, Hirayoshi, caught his eye, signaling it was time to move to their designated seating area.


    The ce reserved for the Hyuga n was clearly marked, and together with their entourage, they approached the vast table, finding their names written next to ''Hyuga''.


    Only Takumi, Hikari, Hiashi, and Hirayoshi took their seats at the table, representing the Hyuga n, while their support team found ces behind them, outside the circle of the main table but within a close distance.


    Simrly, the Uchiha n, led by Fugaku, Sakumo Hatake, both the current Jonin Commander of Konoha and the leader of the Hatake n, along with representatives from the Aburame, Inuzuka, and various smaller ns, were guided to their respective spots by attending shinobi and Anbu members.


    Despite the diverse affiliations, all groups were strategically seated close to each other, a deliberate arrangement stemming from a prior agreement to maintain open lines ofmunication among these two general rival factions, allowing them to be designated to sit closer within their own interest groups.


    As Hikari and the other representatives of the Hyuga n settled into their seats, they found themselves in close proximity to key figures from the other ns of their broad coalition.


    Alongside the Hyuga, Fugaku, and Setsuna from the Uchiha n, Kiyomi, Sakumo Hatake, Shibi Aburame of the Aburame n, Tsume Inuzuka from the Inuzuka n, and the heads of smaller ns like the Yuhi, Gekko, and Sumi, all took their ces at the table near them.


    On the other side of the table, surrounding Hiruzen, sat the core members of his faction, a groupposed of his closest allies and the leaders of Konoha''s key departments and ns.


    Tsunade Senju, recently appointed as the head of Konoha''s Medical Department, Jiraiya, overseeing the vige''s expanded, though unofficial, Spy Network, and Orochimaru, at the helm of the newly established Scientific Research Department, were prominent figures, all disciples of Hiruzen.


    Danzo, the secretive leader of Root and the Shimura n Patriarch, along with Koharu Utatane and Homura Mitokado, Hiruzen''s principal advisors and influential leaders within the vige''s business and administrative spheres alongside their ns that they were also heads of, represented the strategic backbone of the Hokage''s support system. Shinsuke Sarutobi, Hiruzen''s son and the current Sarutobi n Patriarch, led the Anbu as its Commander.


    Strategic and advisory roles were also filled by notable n heads such as Shikaku Nara, serving as the Hokage''s main war-time advisor, and Yamanaka Inoichi, who spearheaded Konoha''s consolidated Intelligence Department. Choza Akimichi, now leading the vige''s Education Department, brought a new perspective to the development of future shinobi.


    Among these leaders, on the table, near Hiruzen, also sat other highly regarded and powerful individuals, including S-level Elite Jonins like Minato Namikaze, and his wife, Kushina Uzumaki, further bolstering the assembly''s validity.


    However, within the ''Anti-Hokage'' coalition, the only other notable administrative roles, besides Sakumo''s, were held by Fugaku Uchiha, leader of the Konoha''s Military Police Force, and Hirayoshi Hyuga, head of the Hyuga''s Border Surveince Division.


    This stark contrast in the distribution of leadership and administrative roles made the presence of nepotism within Konoha''s structure all the more evident in the eyes of many people who could reason objectively in Hikari''s opinion.


    Observers couldn''t help but notice how administrative power seemed tightly concentrated the most within a select group closely allied with Hiruzen highlighting a significant imbnce.


    The creation of numerous new consolidated divisions and administrative positions by Hiruzen in the past two years, with an excuse of the iing war often used, was a strategic move to strengthen his control over the vige and centralize power under pretext.

 80. The Hokage’s Faction Dominance and ‘Underdogs’

    80. The Hokage¡¯s Faction Dominance and ¡®Underdogs¡¯


    Once seated, amidst the low buzz of ongoing conversations and movements, Hikari took a moment for a quick but thorough assessment of the gathering.


    Leveraging the unique capabilities of his Byakugan, as soon as he approached the venue through those chambers beforehand, he subtly activated and then deactivated it, granting him a fleeting yetprehensive glimpse into the chakra signatures of everyone present.


    This brief survey allowed Hikari to gauge thendscape of shinobi strength in the room, providing him with a snapshot of the vige''s elite power dynamics.


    Using his observations and personal assessments, Hikari deduced that the Hokage''s Faction not only had numerical superiority but also a considerable edge in terms of elites'' power.


    For instance, despite Hiruzen Sarutobi''s advancing age which slightly diminished his capacities, he remained a formidable Late Kage-level shinobi, a testament to his enduring strength and experience.


    Simrly, Sakumo Hatake, also at the Late Kage level, might currently edge out Hiruzen slightly due to his renewed determination to enhance his abilities and perhaps lesser impact from age, as he was in his prime.


    Hiruzen''s three disciples¡ªTsunade, Jiraiya, and Orochimaru¡ªwere assessed by Hikari to be at the Middle Kage level. Their capabilities were significant, though Hikari spected that they had yet to reach the zenith of their powers, as depicted in the original series.


    This looming conflict could very well be the catalyst for their ascension to peak form, pushing them beyond their current limitations.


    Danzo Shimura was positioned between the Quasi-Kage to Early Kage level in Hikari''s estimation. Without the Senju cell and Sharingan enhancements and facing the decline associated with age even worse than Hiruzen for some reason, Danzo''s current strength was somewhatpromised, yet he remained a potent and cunning adversary.


    Surprisingly, Hiruzen''s son, Shinsuke Sarutobi, had achieved the status of a ''first-ss'' Elite Jonin, indicating a high degree of skill and potential beyond what many might expect.


    Kushina Uzumaki, was also currently most likely a ''first-ss'' Elite Jonin, but with vast untapped potential, primarily due to the unpredictable power of the Nine-Tails sealed within her¡ªa factor that could dramatically influence herbat effectiveness even further.


    Minato Namikaze, meanwhile, was evaluated by Hikari to be somewhere between the Early to Middle Kage level, at this point, possessing the potential for significant growth as the circumstances demanded, just like it happened in the original series by the end of the war.


    Shikaku, Inoichi, and Choza were Elite Jonin, but all showing surprising signs that they could go even much further, in the future, for some reason, unlike in the original, Hikari strangely contributed it to his own ''Butterfly Effect''. He noticed it from this observation and some previous rumors circting within the Konoha about their mission recordst two years.


    Meanwhile, within Hikari''s own coalition, he assessed the smaller n heads to be at the level of standard Elite Jonin on average, reflecting a solid foundation of skill and experience.


    His own Patriarch, Hirayoshi, despite the effects of aging, remained at the Elite Jonin level. Hikari spected that this was, however, only without tapping into any theorized secret power source that might elevate his abilities further.


    Takumi, despite being also well past his prime, was considered by Hikari to maintain a level of ''top-notch'' Elite Jonin. His reliance on spiritual power and proficiency in Yin Release had allowed him to preserve hisbat effectiveness, demonstrating the diverse sources of strength among shinobi.


    Hiashi''s advancement to the Quasi-Kage level earlier than expected, in Hikari''s view, was a direct consequence of the changes Hikari had influenced.


    This "Butterfly Effect," resulting from Hikari''s presence and actions within the n, had seemingly spurred Hiashi to push beyond the original trajectory of his development.


    Motivated by the need to not fall too far behind Hikari and fulfill his responsibilities as the sessor to the Patriarch, Hiashi''s efforts paid off significantly.


    On the Uchiha side, Kiyomi and Fugaku were both evaluated as ''top-notch'' Elite Jonin. Additionally, Setsuna, distinguished by his expertise in Lightning Release and the unique capability to summon a grizzly bear with Lightning Release abilities, was pegged by Hikari as a standard Elite Jonin despite his highly advanced age on the level of Hirayoshi his Patriarch.


    This rapid mental appraisal solidified Hikari''s concerns about theparative strength of their factions. His coalition was indeed at a disadvantage, particrly when it came to the top-tier shinobi¡ªthose who could sway the tide of conflict with their sheer power and skill.


    This gap was most pronounced at the Kage level, where Hiruzen''s faction held a clear upper hand, a realization that underscored the strategic challenges facing Hikari and his allies.


    Reflecting on this imbnce, Hikari felt validated in his efforts to enhance Kiyomi''s abilities. The necessity of bolstering their ranks with shinobi capable ofpeting at the highest levels had never been more apparent. Now, he found himself hoping for Fugaku to unlock the Mangekyo Sharingan soon, a development that could significantly level the ying field.


    Hikari also resolved to pay special attention to Shisui''s and Itachi''s matters in the future and never allow for Hiruzen''s faction to get even more S-level, Kage-tier shinobi through them.


    Witnessing the formidable array of administrative power and personal might assembled on Hiruzen''s side, Hikari recognized the precarious position his coalition would have been in had the war not presented an opportunity for them to consolidate and strengthen - buy time.


    The impending conflict, while a grave threat in its own right, ironically offered a break¡ªa chance to close the power gap and prepare for the internal struggles that loomed on the horizon. Hikari now also saw whom they were facing fully and who were the true ''underdogs''.


    With thisprehensive understanding of the power dynamics at y, Hikari came back to the reality of the moment, recognizing that the path ahead in these negotiations would be anything but straightforward today.


    The imbnce in strength, especially at the Kage level, underscored the uphill battle his coalition faced in advocating for their positions and interests this time around.

 81. Behind Closed Doors: Unseen Battles of Konoha

    81. Behind Closed Doors: Unseen Battles of Konoha


    As the room settled into a more subdued atmosphere, Hiruzen Sarutobi, adorned in his official Hokage robes, stood up to address the assembly.


    Casting a casual yet observant nce across the room, he took a moment to ensure he had the attention of every participant before beginning his opening remarks.


    "Esteemed leaders and shinobi of Konoha...", Hiruzen began, his voice carrying a mix of authority and warmth thatmanded respect,


    "We gather here today at a critical juncture in our vige''s history. The challenges we face are manifold, threatening not just the peace and security we''ve worked so hard to maintain but the very fabric of our society.",


    Pausing for effect, Hiruzen allowed his words to resonate with those assembled, ensuring his message was felt as much as it was heard.


    "Our discussions today are pivotal. They will require us to confront difficult truths, question the path we have walked thus far, and, most importantly, forge a new way forward¡ªtogether.",


    "This council is not about asserting dominance or revisiting old grievances. It is about unity, about findingmon ground amidst our differences, and about reaffirming ourmitment to the protection and prosperity of Konoha and its people.",


    Hiruzen''s gaze swept the room once more, his demeanor embodying the solemnity of the asion.


    "As we proceed, I urge you all to speak openly, to listen with empathy, and to consider not just the immediate implications of our decisions but their impact on generations toe.",


    "Let us engage with one another not as adversaries but as allies, united by a shared love for our vige and a shared responsibility for its future.",


    With that, Hiruzen nodded slightly, signaling the beginning of the council''s deliberations.


    As Hiruzen distributed the agenda for the day''s discussions through his attendants next, Hikari couldn''t help but critically assess the Hokage''s actions and words.


    ''What a master of maniption...'', He thought to himself, observing Hiruzen''s skilled oratory,


    ''He speaks of unity and empathy with such conviction, almost as if he truly believes in the facade of righteousness he projects. It''s no wonder so many are drawn to him, deceived by this "charm...",


    ''Using the war as a pretext, he''s already consolidated more power than ever, sidestepping any form of genuine consultation with those who oppose him. And yet, here he stands, ''projecting'' the virtues of unity and shared love for the vige...'', Hikari mused silently.


    As the meeting began, it was already understood that while everyone could share their opinions, the Third Hokage, Hiruzen, would make the final decisions.


    This setup meant Hiruzen had to listen to everyone''s ideas and interests and take them into ount, but in the end, what he said would go.


    This was a way to make sure all sides were heard, giving the feeling that the process was fair, even though Hiruzen had the most power.


    However, Hiruzen knew that ignoring important concerns could upset people and lead to bigger issues. So, even though he had the final say, he had to keep the vige''s peace of mind, especially during this time, and presumably make some concessions based on the bnce of power between him and his faction against the other main opposing faction.


    In times of war, the Hokage''s power bes even more important and unquestionable, something he would probably use very well. This is to make sure decisions can be made quickly and the vige can act fast without any confusion.


    But, when ites to leading the ninja army, the person in charge is Sakumo Hatake, who is the Jonin Council Commander. This means that for things to go smoothly, the Hokage and Sakumo need to work together very closely.


    This was made to have checks and bnces, since the vige''s founding, although Tobirama probably never expected someone in the cohorts with Hyuga and Ucihha for example to manage to climb into that important position.


    Therefore, right from the start, everyone was prepared for the meeting to be some kind of a ''tug of war'' between Sakumo Hatake and the Third Hokage.


    They weren''t just the most powerful figures politically in the vige; many also saw them as the strongest in terms of their own ninja abilities.


    Sakumo had be the face of the ''anti-Hokage'' faction, credited with bringing the Hyuga and Uchiha ns together, showcasing his leadership and influence.


    Sakumo was like the captain steering the ship of the opposition, even though he didn''t have the same level of total control that Hiruzen wielded over his group.


    This dynamic set the stage for aplex negotiation, with both leaders needing to navigate their differences. Although, the opposition group was generally ''weaker'', they still ''deserved'' a chunk of power.


    The consultation began with topics that werergely under Hiruzen''s control, such as the evaluation and management of the vige''s defenses.


    Even though the Uchiha''s Military Police Force and the Hyuga''s Border Surveince Division had some say in these matters, it was primarily the Hokage and his advisors who steered the conversation as this was during wartime circumstances.


    After a series of exchanges, where Fugaku and Hirayoshi presented their insights and concerns, a consensus was eventually reached hard.


    The discussions required a delicate bnce of give-and-take, with Hiruzen showing a willingness to incorporate some perspectives of the Uchiha and Hyuga leaders into the final decisions, and Fugaku and Hirayoshi taking a step back from their usual full autonomy regarding these kinds of matters.


    As the focus shifted to devising general grand strategies to counter potential threats from opposing factions or viges, Shikaku Nara took the lead. Known for his strategic mind, his contributions to the discussion were highly valued, and his proposals found widespread eptance among the assembly.


    Danzo, along with the Hokage''s advisors, Koharu and Homura, also yed significant roles, offering insights and suggestions that shaped the strategic direction.


    Many others, including Sakumo Hatake, contributed to the conversation, sharing their perspectives and suggestions based on their experiences and expertise.


    Despite Sakumo''s efforts and his standing within the vige, his inputs were ultimately not incorporated into the final decisions by the Hokage, highlighting a clear preference for the strategies put forth by Shikaku and the closer advisors of Hiruzen.


    But many people simply remained silent, Hikari for example, chose to remainpletely silent during this part of the discussion.


    When the discussion transitioned to the assessment and management of vige resources, it delved into specifics like food supplies, medical provisions, shinobi gear, weapons, explosive talismans, chakra pills, smoke bombs, and the like.


    It also covered broader themes such as strategic financial reserve management, the wartime economy, budget allocations for wartime efforts, and logistical support to sustain prolonged conflicts. Another crucial topic was ns for ensuring the stability and welfare of civilians during such turbulent times.


    This segment of the meeting was almost entirely dominated by Hiruzen''s faction. Theyid outprehensive ns and strategies, effectively taking charge of the conversation and the decisions being made.


    This control extended to the assignment of roles and responsibilities, with Hiruzen''s advisors and supporters securing the majority of key positions tasked with managing and deploying the vige''s resources.


    The dominance of the Hokage''s faction in these critical areas of vige administration underscored the centralized power structure Hiruzen had established.


    While it ensured a cohesive approach to resource management and conflict preparation, it also highlighted the limited influence of other factions, including the ''anti-Hokage'' coalition, in these essential domains.


    As the conversation shifted towards intelligence gathering on enemy movements and intentions, the dominance of the Hokage''s faction became evident once more.


    The ANBU, led by Shinsuke Sarutobi, alongside Danzo and his Root organization, was central to the discussions.


    Their roles in collecting and analyzing intelligence were recognized as pivotal in formting Konoha''s defensive and offensive strategies.


    Jiraiya, with his extensive and newly established spywork, specifically for this war''s unique circumstances and nature, also yed a significant role in these efforts as well.


    Jiraiya''s involvement went beyond mere intelligence gathering; he was designated as the primary and the only ''official''municator among Konoha''s forces and the main architect behind the war''swork ofmunication.


    This role was critical in ensuring that information flowed smoothly and securely between different units and leadership levels within Konoha and its allies.


    This focus on intelligence andmunication underscored the strategic importance of having urate, timely information on the enemy and maintaining robust lines ofmunication.


    Once again, the ''anti-Hokage'' coalition found itself on the periphery of these critical discussions, underscoring the centralization of power and decision-making within Hiruzen''s group.


    This centralization, while efficient, left little room for broader engagement or the incorporation of diverse viewpoints, further cementing the Hokage''s faction''s control over the vige''s strategic direction.


    However, as the discussion on intelligence-gathering wrapped up, a palpable sense of anticipation filled the room. It had be clear to all present that the ''anti-Hokage'' coalition had strategically chosen to remain silent and cooperative during the initial parts of the meeting.


    Their restraint was not without purpose; they were conserving their energy, arguments, and most importantly "negotiating capital" for the iing, crucial topic that was up next: the establishment of themand structure for wartime operations, including the roles and responsibilities of key leaders and decision-makers.


    This segment of the meeting was of paramount importance to the opposition. Decisions made here would directly impact the survival and effectiveness of their forces.


    Themand structure, determination of how many fronts to open, their locations and nature, leadership assignments for each front, and the cement of shinobi¡ªall these were criticalponents that would shape the course of the war.


    The opposition factions were particrly concerned about ensuring their shinobi were not misused as expendable assets but instead ced underpetent and friendlymand, where their chances of survival and making a meaningful contribution were maximized.


    Tension and apprehension hung heavy in the air as the meeting approached this topic. The ''anti-Hokage'' coalition was fully prepared to advocate vigorously for their interests, understanding that the oues of this discussion could very well determine the fate of their ns and the vige atrge.


    The stakes were high, and there was a shared recognition that failure to reach a consensus could lead to immediate internal conflict, threatening the unity and stability of Konoha at a time when external threats loomedrge. The room braced itself for what promised to be the most intense and consequential part of the meeting.

 82. The Konoha’s Wartime General Staff Formation

    82. The Konoha¡¯s Wartime General Staff Formation


    Hiruzen, fully aware of the tension and the stakes involved as they moved to discuss themand structure, took a deep, silent breath before addressing the assembly with a sense of resolve.


    "To begin, we must first define the role and participants of our General Staff. This team will primarily operate from within the vige, serving as a strategic reservemand unit.",


    "They''ll be our fallback if any division leaders face unexpected circumstances, ensuring continuity in leadership and decision-making...", He exined, setting the foundational strategy for wartime operations.


    "This general staff will have ess toprehensive data from all fronts, allowing them to analyze and integrate information from our various divisions. This will be crucial in shaping our overall strategy and directing the vige''s efforts efficiently.",


    "Furthermore, all intelligence gathered by ourworks will funnel through this group, ensuring we have a unified understanding of the battlefield situation.",


    Hiruzen continued, "They will also oversee logistical operations andmunications, facilitating seamless interaction between divisions and ensuring that support flows effectively from the vige to the fronts and vice versa. This setup is designed to maximize our strategic flexibility and responsiveness to the evolving situation.",


    By framing the general staff''s role in this manner, Hiruzen aimed to create a centralized hub ofmand and control that could adapt to the dynamic nature of wartime conditions.


    His proposal sought to bnce the need for authoritative leadership with the requirement forprehensive oversight and coordination among Konoha''s diverse military and intelligence assets.


    The leaders of the Anti-Hokage faction exchanged brief, thoughtful nces as Hiruzen outlined his proposal for the general staff''s role. Given the context of impending global warfare, there was nothing in the Hokage''s suggestion that raised immediate concerns.


    It was a standard approach to establishing a centralmand unit, a strategy that recognized theplexities and demands ofrge-scale conflict management.


    Recognizing the necessity of such a structure for efficient coordination and strategic nning, and finding no fault with the logic or intention behind Hiruzen''s proposal, the faction leaders collectively nodded their agreement.


    This silent consensus among them indicated an understanding of the importance of a unifiedmand system, especially in times of war where quick, cohesive decision-making could mean the difference between victory and defeat.


    "Seeing this unanimous agreement on the concept of a general staff, I will take the position of Chief of the General Staff, as in thest world war...", Hiruzen stated, confident in the role he was about to resume,


    "I also name Shikaku Nara for his undeniable strategic prowess and contributions in recent years, high intellect, and fresh perspective from the younger generation, alongside Koharu Utanane and Homura Mitokado for their extensive wisdom and experience, having served since the First Shinobi World War and leading Konoha victorious through the second one alongside me.",


    He paused for a moment, letting his words sink in among the assembly, "Does anyone have any other suggestions?", Hiruzen finished, his gaze sweeping across the room, inviting input.


    "Hokage-sama, given my role as the Jonin Commander during peacetime and my current position as the Supreme Military Commander of Konoha''s standard shinobi forces during wartime, I believe it would be appropriate for me to also hold a position within the General Staff...",


    Sakumo interjected, his voice calm yet firm, breaking his silence in theter parts of the meeting.


    His statement caught many in therge venue off guard, leading to a ripple of surprised murmurs throughout the room.


    Hiruzen turned to Sakumo, maintaining an expression of understanding andposure, yet internally he was taken aback by the request.


    He had anticipated that Sakumo would leverage this meeting to secure a more active role on the battlefield, potentially to amass military merits that could serve as a foundation for a future challenge to the Hokage''s position.


    The idea of Sakumo seeking a seemingly more passive role within the General Staff, and doing so with such confidence, was unexpected.


    However, Hiruzen quickly pieced together Sakumo''s rationale, understanding the strategic depth behind the request.


    It dawned on him that the Hyuga and Uchiha ns, possibly in consultation with Sakumo, or maybe Sakumo himself, had devised a n to keep their most powerful individual, and the only one who could go one-on-one against him, and perhaps even win, from their faction within the vige at all times.


    By having Sakumo stay, they essentially ensured a safeguard against any potential threats that he might pose to their families, assets, and npounds/residences while their main forces were deployed to fight.


    Sakumo''s presence in the vige acted as a deterrent, a powerful counterbnce to Hiruzen''s strength, ensuring the safety of the coalition''s interests, essentially making sure that he wouldn''t be able to "stab them in the back".


    This realization struck Hiruzen with a mix of respect for the strategy and a pang of sadness for the divisions within the vige.


    The thought that Konoha''s ns felt the need to protect themselves from the possibility of internal strife to this extent, was a far cry from the unity and brotherhood envisioned by the vige''s founders, his sensei, and his brother.


    ''Has it reached this point already...'', Hiruzen reflected, contemting the diverging paths between the idealsid down by his predecessors and theplex web of alliances and tensions that characterized the vige''s current state.


    Nevertheless, despite these reflections, Hiruzen quickly regained hisposure, "Very well...", Hiruzen consented, acknowledging Sakumo''s request to be part of the General Staff.


    Having Sakumo take on a stationary role within the vige, rather than umting merits on the battlefield, also presented a strategic advantage for Hiruzen himself so agreed easily.


    With both of them remaining in Konoha, neither would gain additional battlefield des that could shift the bnce of potential contention for the Hokage position after the war.


    In this way, Sakumo''s decision to assume a position in the General Staff, effectively sidelining him from activebat roles, inadvertently leveled the ying field between the two fully.


    This development, therefore, was subtly favorable for Hiruzen, ensuring that both he and his most formidable challenger remained in simr positions of influence without further tilting the dynamics of power.


    He then cast a nce around the room, seeking any further contributions or suggestions, "Is there anyone else with rmendations, candidatures, or requests regarding the structure of our General Staff?"


    In an interesting turn of events, the Uchiha Great Elder Setsuna and Hyuga Patriarch Hirayoshi Hyuga also stood up, at this time, volunteering themselves for roles within the General Staff, at the same time.


    This again raised some murmurs within the venue. Everyone waited to see how Hiruzen would respond this time.


    Hiruzen gave Setsuna and Hyuga a thoughtful kind of look. These two were not just leaders of their respective ns but also the oldest members present, decades older than himself.


    Just as Danzo, who was close by, seemed ready to interject with his own thoughts, Hiruzen decided to address the matter himself,


    "Your esteemed status and the depth of experience you both bring, as the most senior individuals here, undeniably qualify you for a position on the General Staff, so it is only fitting that you join and contribute to Konoha as well...", Hiruzen began, his tone respectful yet firm,


    "However, I must emphasize that theposition of the General Staff as it stands is nowpleted with you two joining, as thest members, as it is already quite extensive. Adding any more members could potentially hinder its functionality, hence, I believe our General Staff, with you two, is nowplete.",


    Hiruzen continued, addressing the entire room, "Additionally, it''s important to note that major decisions, as outlined in the documents provided, will be determined by a majority vote within this body.",


    His statement, while diplomatic, left an unspoken implication hanging in the air ¡ª with the currentposition, Hiruzen''s faction would hold a 4 to 3 advantage in any major vote, subtly ensuring that his faction retained a slight edge in decision-making.


    The leaders of the anti-Hokage coalition were not disheartened by that fact. They were keenly aware that, despite this apparent imbnce, the practical dynamics of wartime governance and militarymand were far moreplex.


    The foundational statutes of the vige had Sakumo, the Supreme Military Commander, be given significant powers that often ovepped with those of the General Staff.


    Recognizing this, the coalition leaders understood that for any major wartime decisions to be effectively implemented, there would need to be a tangible coboration between the General Staff and Sakumo.


    This requirement forpromise inherently meant that power was, in reality, more evenly distributed for them than the simple arithmetic of General Staff votes might''ve suggested.


    The strategic importance of Sakumo''s role provided the coalition with leverage to influence key decisions, ensuring their interests could not be easily sidelined. This scenario unfolded precisely as they had anticipated and what they considered to be their best-case scenario.


    This equilibrium of power within the highest echelons of themand structure represented a significant improvement for the anti-Hokage coalition, especially when contrasted with the dynamics of thest Shinobi World War.


    During that period, the Hokage''s faction held sway over the Jonin Council, and the Uchiha n,cking allies and sufficient influence, found itself unable to effectively challenge the prevailing power structure and their decisions.


    The Hyuga n, for its part, remained unassuming andrgely detached from these power struggles. The current situation, however, marked a stark departure from those days, with the Hyuga and Uchiha ns now presenting a united front alongside Sakumo Hatake.


    This shift towards a more bnced distribution of power was not without its detractors. Danzo, in particr, found this development frustrating. His clenched fists and the grim expression that briefly crossed his face as he nced at Sakumo, Hirayoshi, and Setsuna were telltale signs of his displeasure.


    Hikari meticulously pondered the operational dynamics of the General Staff and its implications for both factions.


    He was acutely aware that the flow of critical intelligence, especially high-impact information secured through Hiruzen''s extensiveworks like Jiraiya''s spywork, ANBU, or Danzo''s Root, was unlikely to be shared equitably with the oppositionmanders.


    The strategic advantage of possessing exclusive, actionable intelligence was too significant; thus, Hiruzen''s faction would naturally prioritize their battlefieldmanders with positive intelligence, potentially withholding detrimental intelligence to undermine themand reputation of the opposition.


    Conversely, Hikari recognized that the anti-Hokage coalition, despite having more modest intelligence-gathering capabilities, would likely adopt a simr stance.


    Sharing top-level intelligence with the General Staff, and by extension the rival faction, would be carefully weighed against the potential benefits and risks.


    The dissemination of such information would be highly strategic, aimed at preserving their own interests while navigating theplex intery of shared and opposing objectives within the vige''s leadership.


    Yet, Hikari understood that this calculus of information sharing was not entirely one-sided. There would be instances where the overarching well-being of the vige and the mutual interests of both factions necessitated transparency.


    In scenarios where withholding information could result in catastrophic oues for Konoha, or significantly harm both factions indirectly, the incentive to share intelligence through the General Staff becamepelling.


    This was not a simple zero-sum game; the survival and prosperity of Konoha transcended factional rivalries to some extent. In such circumstances, the well-being of the vige would serve as a unifying force, encouraging a degree of cooperation and information sharing between the factions.


    Therefore, in Hikari''s assessment, the real value of the General Staff in the context of the uing wary in its role in overseeing the management of supply chains and facilitating basicmunication between the Konoha''s two internally dividedrge, ''mega-factions''. These aspects were crucial for ensuring the vige''s preparedness and resilience in wartime.


    The joint management of supply chains, in particr, was identified by Hikari as a critical function that would likely remain untainted by internal rivalries. This was because the allocation and distribution of resources were governed by transparent, quantifiable needs that could be easily verified.


    Any attempt to skew resource distribution for factional advantage would not only be immediately noticeable but would also constitute a grave betrayal of the vige''s collective war effort.


    Such actions would result in severe reputational damage and potentially disastrous operational failures on the battlefield.


    Therefore, Hikari was confident that resources earmarked for both factions''manders would be distributed as intended, ensuring that allbat units had what they needed to seed.


    Moreover, Hikari saw the General Staff as a crucial tform for maintaining open lines ofmunication between the factions.


    Even minimal cooperation in this area could prove beneficial, facilitating the exchange of essential information and enabling coordinated efforts where vige-wide interests were concerned.


    While deep-seated mistrust might limit the depth of strategic sharing, the existence of a formalized channel formunication could avert misunderstandings and foster a minimum level of operational cohesion.


    The logistics and operational details of the General Staff meetings overall were also, thoroughly outlined in the documents provided.


    Beneath this imposing structure of the Hokage''s Rock, a secret chamber had also been designated exclusively for matters rted to the General Staff. This space was intended to serve as a strategic hub, facilitating the coordination of Konoha''s war efforts.


    Given the palpable tensions and mutual distrust among the vige''s leading figures, it was impractical to expect key members like Hiruzen, his advisors, and the leaders of the Hyuga and Uchiha ns, along with Sakumo, to coexist in this space continuously.


    The likelihood of these individuals, many of whom harbored deep-seated animosities or rivalries, working side by side daily was slim. As a workaround, most would delegate their assistants to upy the room permanently.


    These representatives would effectively stand watch over the operations, ensuring that their respective leaders'' interests were safeguarded and that duties were carried out faithfully.


    The primary members would only then make some periodic visits to this underground hub, overseeing the broader strategic direction without the need for constant physical presence.


    Hikari, observing these arrangements, surmised that the brunt of the operational workload¡ªand indeed the true leadership within the General Staff¡ªwould likely fall to Shikaku Nara. Known for his exceptional strategic mind and organizational skills, Shikaku would be the linchpin holding the General Staff''s efforts together.


    Despite Hiruzen''s nominal role as Chief of the General Staff, it was Shikaku who would be orchestrating the day-to-day management of Konoha''s wartime logistics and strategies.

 83. Assignment of Different Wartime Responsibilities

    83. Assignment of Different Wartime Responsibilities


    "With the General Staff now established, let''s move on to discuss the rest of ourmand structure, starting with the Logistical Support and Medical Division...",


    Hiruzen announced, shifting the focus to the next criticalponent of Konoha''s wartime strategy.


    "For this crucial role, I nominate Tsunade Senju. As the foremost medical ninjutsu practitioner and someone deeply connected to our vige''s medicalmunity, her expertise is unparalleled.",


    He then added, acknowledging the nuances of her situation, "Given Tsunade''s unique stance on front-linebat, her skills and knowledge can be best applied in this capacity...",


    Hiruzen nced at Tsunade, who sat nearby, her expression one of calm anticipation, having expected to be called upon for such a role already and agreed beforehand under heavy urging from her teacher.


    She disdained these kinds of politics, and the more she looked at this meeting, the more and more distant she felt from this entire ce, however, she still retained some deep love and respect for her teacher, so she agreed.


    Additionally, in the end, despite her aversion to frontline battles¡ªa stance influenced by personal loss¡ªhermitment to saving lives and enhancing Konoha''s medical response capabilities remained unwavering, so this kind of role wasn''t too hated by her in the end.


    Therefore, Tsunade, with her long, blonde hair framing her face and strength in her eyes belying her legendary healing abilities, nodded slightly in agreement.


    With the nomination of Tsunade for the Logistical Support and Medical Division met with unanimous approval and no objections raised, Hiruzen prepared to continue the meeting.


    At this moment, Hikari took the opportunity to internally recap the purpose and function of this newly discussed division.


    In essence, it was designed to operate as an emergency response unit, smaller in number than the primary frontline divisions but critically important.


    While the mainbat units would have their medical ninjas and logistical support, Tsunade''s division was envisioned as a highly mobile, versatile force capable of rapidly deploying to areas of the battlefield that experienced crises or where support was urgently needed.


    This division''s role as a mobile backup was strategic, allowing for swift reactions to unforeseenplications or heavy casualties along Konoha''s widespread frontlines.


    Its creation underscored the vige''s preparation for theplexities of wartime logistics and healthcare, ensuring that even in the heat of battle, support would never be too far from those in need.


    It was also an innovation of Konoha for this war, as it was the only way that Hiruzen managed to convince Tsunade to participate in this war, in hopes of maybe stimting herbat prowess to return back, but not many other people knew about that and Hikari only vaguely specte about that.


    "Next, for the Intelligence and Communication Division, I nominate Jiraiya...", Hiruzen announced, seamlessly moving on to the next criticalponent of their wartime strategy.


    "His extensivework of frog summons provides us with a unique advantage. Their ability to inhabit both our world and their own joint ''special ne'' to talk makes the transmission of information exceptionally efficient through his and their Summoning and Reverse Summoning Jutsu.


    This also enables Jiraiya to operate effectively in this role from virtually anywhere in the world...", Hiruzen''s statement carried an implicit suggestion that Jiraiya''s responsibilities in the war effort would extend beyond just managing intelligence andmunication only.


    The versatility of his summoning abilities,bined with his widespreadwork of contacts and informants, positioned Jiraiya as a key asset capable of contributing to multiple domains.


    Hikari, meanwhile, swiftly deduced the implications of Hiruzen''s decision to nominate Jiraiya, based on the reliance on summons formunication.


    ''So, I was right before...'', He thought to himself, "That advanced Chakra Transmission Communication Device that yed a crucial role during the Fourth Shinobi World War, in the original story, isn''t developed yet at this point in time. That means everyone has to rely on traditional methods like summons or ordinary messenger birds for conveying messages."


    The absence of such advancedmunication technology underscored the strategic value of individuals like Jiraiya, whose unique abilities could partially bridge the gap.


    Upon being nominated for the role, Jiraiya epted with a characteristic mix of humility and yful confidence. Despite the light-hearted kind of speech he made then, there was a clear acknowledgment in his eyes of the weight his new responsibilities carried.


    Jiraiya was no stranger to the burdens of war, and while he often masked his concern with humor, those who knew him understood his deepmitment to Konoha''s safety and sess always.


    Hiruzen shifted the discussion to highlight the pivotal role the Anbu would y across the various fronts in the uing conflict. He spoke of their expertise and the critical support they would provide to the vige''s efforts.


    However, Hikari couldn''t help but respond with an internal sneer to this portrayal. From his perspective, the Anbu hadrgely transformed under Hiruzen''s tenure, bing more akin to a private guard for the Hokage and a tool for internal surveince rather than the elite covert operatives they were originally envisioned as.


    To Hikari, it was evident that while the Anbu retained their prowess in assassination and espionage, their deployment had be increasingly inward-focused.


    Recent times had seen them more engaged in monitoring Hiruzen''s political rivals and ensuring his security than in undertaking external missions that could decisively impact the vige''s strategic interests, such as eliminating key enemy figures or conducting deep reconnaissance.


    It was still ''operating in shadows'', unlike ordinary Konoha shinobi were operating, but only in terms of protecting Hiruzen''s own closest associates, friends, family, secret locations, strategic assets, secrets, and other big-time figures within his faction, from the shadows, amongst other things that would help him personally stay in power as long as possible.


    In contrast, Danzo''s Root organization had taken up the mantle of conducting the more aggressive and risky operations outside the vige, operations that traditionally would have been within the Anbu''s purview.


    The Anbu''s attention also seemed diverted towards diminishing the Uchiha''s influence within Konoha, slowly usurping and performing their roles and responsibilities that once belonged to the Uchiha n, instead of their own.


    Hiruzen''s transition to the topic of Konoha''s main shinobi force cements and the structure of frontlines marked a pivotal moment in the meeting. He was well aware of the contentious nature of these discussions and the potential for disputes to arise. Choosing to start with a less controversial aspect, he introduced a significant development regarding Amegakure.


    "Now that we are finally about to talk about our main military shinobi forces cement and their frontlinemand structure...", Hiruzen announced, capturing the room''s attention, "I would first like to announce to you some connected news. It appears we may not have to engage with Amegakure in this conflict.",


    "Danzo and his ''Root'' have initiated sessful, ndestine dialogues with Hanzo. Our discussions have led to a tentative agreement where Hanzo has shown a willingness to cooperate with us during the war, in exchange for assistance against certain unstable factions within his vige using Root''s expertise.",


    Hiruzen continued, outlining the strategic implications of this alliance, "In light of this, Danzo and his Root will be deployed to Amegakure. Their mission will involve supporting Hanzo in stabilizing his control over the vige, ensuring the smooth facilitation of our logistical operations in the region, and keeping a close watch to ensure that Hanzo remains true to hismitments and to cultivate our unofficial alliance. I take it no one has any objections...?"


    The room remained silent after Hiruzen''s announcement, signaling a unanimous agreement with the proposed strategy for Amegakure. Danzo, seizing the moment, stood to formally ept the assignment.


    In a speech that was characteristic of him, filled with a fervent, albeit somewhat exaggerated, passion for Konoha, he vocalized hismitment to the mission. His words, while grandiose, underscored the gravity he ced on the task ahead, albeit with a demeanor that some might find overly theatrical.


    With Danzo''s eptance, the atmosphere in the room shifted, tensing in anticipation of the next agenda item. It was time to delve into the more contentious and potentially divisive discussion: the cement of Konoha''s shinobi forces across the various fronts and theirmand structure.


    This topic was not just politically charged, given the differing interests and strategic priorities among the vige''s factions, but it also carried the potential for direct physical consequences, as it directly impacted the lives of those who would be sent to war.

 84. The Commanders of the 4 War Divisons of Konoha

    84. The Commanders of the 4 War Divisons of Konoha


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Hiruzen''s tone, meanwhile became markedly more solemn as he addressed the assembly, underscoring the dire situation facing Konoha suddenly as the introduction to the matter.


    "As you are all already aware, the uing global conflict will probably be the most difficult one for Konoha in its entire history, as we will be targeted more than ever. Not only are we usually the standard culprits for everything simply due to our size and influence, and being in a country that has the best territory and resources in the world¡ªthose things making us the standard, biggest targets¡ªbut we were also pretty much the only ones to expand in territory and influence after thest shinobi world war at the expense of all the other big nations...",


    "So, although there aremon grievances, and there will be fighting between the other four big viges amongst themselves to an extent, we have intelligence that they reached some kind of a silent consensus for the bulk of their forces and capabilities to be focused on Konoha this time around...",


    Hiruzen spoke, his expression turning serious and grave for the first time during this meeting. Inwardly, he also cursed his fate that it was precisely because the external pressure was so hard that he had to put all centralization inside of Konoha''s ns and remove opposition on hold until that was resolved.


    And to make everything even more ironic, it was probably Konoha''s inner division that also put the biggest target on their backs at this time, prompting everyone to want to grab a chunk of their pie.


    "All of this is to say that we will effectively need to have four different long-term stationed divisions and fronts in general during this war for the first time in history...", Hiruzen concluded, emphasizing the unprecedented scale of the military strategy required to navigate the impending conflict.


    "As usual, we aim to keep the conflict as far from the Land of Fire''s borders as possible...", Hiruzen detailed, outlining Konoha''s defensive strategy, "Shinsuke, leading a mobile Anbu force, will continuously patrol the Land of Fire''s various strategic points, ensuring our homnd remains secure from terrorist threats or any form of foreign shinobi infiltration."


    Hiruzen''s n also highlighted the coborative nature of Konoha''s defense strategy, "Inoichi will y a crucial role, leading our newbined Intelligence Department. Our best of the best elite sensory shinobi there will bolster Shinsuke''s efforts, forming aprehensivework designed to detect and neutralize threats before they can enter our country''s territory or soon after they do so. This team will also extend their protective measures to the Daimyo and our esteemed nobles, ensuring their safety against any potential major threats."


    "We prefer to establish our general fronts beyond the Land of Fire, utilizing the territories of neighboring smaller nations or directly within enemy countries Remember, this is the most fundamental principle of any war.",


    By positioning the fronts outside the Land of Fire and ensuring a robust internal defense mechanism, Daimyo aimed to safeguard his territory and poption while actively engaging its adversaries on terms that minimized risks to himself.


    Observing the attentive and increasingly tense audience before him, Hiruzen moved on to detail the strategdscape further.


    "Before we delve into specific appointments, let''s discuss the nature of the four fronts we need to establish. It may be disheartening to hear, but our influence over the smaller shinobi nations bordering the Land of Fire, gained during thest shinobi world war may not hold strong in the face of an aggressive push from the other major viges.",


    "Simply put, these nations on their own may not withstand a direct assault from our adversaries. If we wish to maintain our influence and control in these areas, we must be prepared to defend them actively.",


    "Not to mention that some of those nations already either switched away to other big countries during thest two years or are currently also attempting to break away from our influence themselves, the same is true for the smaller nations that were usually under the control of the other four, so the situation is very chaotic and nothing could be said to be certain about this war, we will have to fight for every inch.",


    Hiruzen''s statement set a clear tone for the gravity of the situation and the necessity for strategic mobilization, "This means...", He continued, "That our efforts to safeguard these buffer zones are not just about protecting our borders but also about asserting Konoha''s strategic interests and presence in the region. Each front will require careful nning, adequate resources, andmitted shinobi to manage the challenges we will surely face.",


    "Therefore, let''s refer to them as the Western Front/Division against Iwagakure, the Northern Front/Division against Kumogakure, the Eastern Front/Division against Kirigakure, and the Southern Front/Division against Sunagakure...",


    Hiruzen articted, unfolding arge, scroble map he had retrieved from behind him at his position at the head of the table. As he spoke, his finger traced the hypothetical lines of engagement across the map, pointing to the specific areas where Konoha''s forces would potentially face off against each of the major shinobi viges.


    "Each of these four fronts or divisions will be led by their own Commanders, who will be granted significant autonomy in how they conduct warfare on their fronts. Their primary objective will be to keep the fighting and enemies away from the Land of Fire. If possible, they should also aim to extend the territory under our control, pushing far into those smaller shinobi countries or even into enemy territory... In the end, they should secure a capittion of their opponents if possible, but initially, just keeping them at bay would be enough.", Hiruzen concluded,ying out the broad strategic goals for themanders of each front.


    "Therefore, we now need to decide on thesemanders and theposition of their armies...", Hiruzen finally said, his gaze methodically sweeping across the room, locking eyes with members of his opposition.


    Danzo, Koharu, Homura, along with his disciples¡ªTsunade, Jiraiya, Orochimaru¡ªand other key figures such as Minato, Kushina, and Shikaku, all adopted a more serious demeanor, fully understanding the gravity of the conversation that was about to take ce.


    Sakumo, Hirayoshi, Fugaku, Takumi, Setsuna, Kiyomi, Hikari, and other n heads from their faction also mirrored the solemn atmosphere, their expressions hardening in anticipation of the discussions ahead.


    Hikari, in a moment of introspection, acknowledged the unique dynamics at y in this looming conflict, diverging significantly from the historical narratives he knew from the original story. The rifts within Konoha and the ripple effects of his actions had reshaped thendscape, diminishing the leverage he could have gained from his knowledge of future events. This underscored the importance of the decisions about to be made for him now.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .

 85. New Generation: Comparing Hikari versus Minato

    85. New Generation: Comparing Hikari versus Minato


    "As the Hokage, for the roles of these Commanders, I first propose Orochimaru and Jiraiya for obvious reasons. Both have not only yed critical roles in thest world war, leading multiple units and engaging in front-line battles themselves, but they have also continued to serve Konoha through various S-level missions and their recent administrative roles as well.",


    "Their reputations alone serve as a powerful deterrent against other viges. Known widely as the ''Legendary Sannin'', their prowess was proven inbat against Hanzo, earning them their titles. Their strengths and experiences make them ideal candidates tomand our forces...", He spoke convincingly as if he was truly speaking from an ''objective standpoint''.


    "I also firmly believe that following behind Orochimaru and Jiraiya in terms of both their contributions in recent years and their formidable strength shown in many S-level missions, Minato Namikaze, and Choza Akimichi, merit consideration as the other two Commanders...",


    Hiruzen continued, maintaining a demeanor that suggested he was guided purely by objective assessment and devoid of any personal bias as he observed everyone in the hall, who got increasingly restless at those words, as he continued to speak ''persuasively'',


    "Judging solely by merit, Konoha has no better alternatives. Those are the first four names currently that make the most sense objectively in terms of merit and likelihood of sess."


    "Please reconsider the implications of your selections, Lord Hokage...", However, Setsuna, the Great Elder of the Uchiha n, interjected with a toneden with indignation. Standing to address the assembly right away boldly, after Hiruzen finished, his voice conveyed a blend of ''concern'' as well as challenge.


    "Are we to understand that Konoha''s defense should only rely on shinobi who operate within the conventional ''mission framework''? What of those shinobi embedded in other specialized units then or those primarily serving their ns? It seems unjust to overlook, marginalize, and even could be said ''discriminate'' against such a significant portion of our shinobi overall corps¡ªshinobi who also harbor a deep love for Konoha and are equally eager to defend it in its hour of need.",


    "The criterion of mission aplishment, while noteworthy, should not be the sole measure of a shinobi''s suitability formand. Many shinobi undertake missions forpensation as much as for duty, which means that it does not inherently corrte to them having higher loyalty than everyone else.",


    "The nominations of Choza Akimichi and Minato Namikaze, while they are undoubtedly skilled, seem to neglect the broader spectrum of shinobi talent within our vige, We all understand the rationale behind nominating Orochimaru and Jiraiya, given their exceptional contributions indeed.",


    "However, extending the same logic unterally to Choza and Minato appears to exclude a wealth of talent from our n-based shinobi, who are no less capable or patriotic. As Hokage, your judgment should be more objective than that...", He finished and sat back.


    "I understand your concerns, Mr. Setsuna, and I appreciate your perspective," Hiruzen responded, his tone firm yet seemingly ''open'' to dialogue,


    "However, I must ask, do you have any shinobi in mind who you believe are stronger or more qualified than the ones I''ve proposed? Or, are we to consider candidates solely based on their n backgrounds and the privileges thate with such affiliations?", His question was direct, challenging Setsuna to provide concrete alternatives rather than general criticisms.


    "Yes, indeed, if we are discussing qualifications, we must consider Fugaku Uchiha, the leader of our Konoha''s Military Police Force. His leadership ensured Konoha''s internal stability every single day, for a decade, a responsibility that I believe is on par withmanding numerous S-level missions...", Setsuna asserted, rising to emphasize his point.


    "And when ites to sheer strength, we cannot overlook Hiashi and Hikari Hyuga. I am confident that in terms of capabilities, they would stand their ground against Choza and Minato, respectively.", His direct and louder tone this time signified the importance he ced on these nominations.


    However, therge hall then erupted with a mix of reactions at Setsuna''s assertion. Murmurs turned into outright discussions, peppered with gasps and even some bouts ofughter.


    The idea that Hikari Hyuga, a 13-year-old with no real-world mission experience, could match the strength of Minato Namikaze, a renowned 20-year-old S-level shinobi with a streak of close to a dozen high-stake, S-level missions under his belt, seemed far-fetched.


    While some attendees could believe the thought of Hiashi Hyuga, given his older age, around his prime, and lineage history within the Hyuga n, potentially standing up to Choza Akimichi, the suggestion that Hikari could be considered equal in strength to Minato was met with widespread skepticism.


    This skepticism persisted despite Hikari''s celebrated status as a historic prodigy within the Hyuga n, a testament to his extraordinary talents and abilities. Theparison between a famous shinobi with decades of heavy promotion from Hiruzen''s faction Minato and a young, elusive rarely seen outside hispound albeit highly talented Hikari was a stretch for many.


    Despite the initial disbelief and murmurs, Setsuna maintained a demeanor of unwavering confidence as he took his seat. A subtle exchange of looks between him and Hirayoshi, the Hyuga Patriarch, hinted that more was to be said on the matter by thetter himself now.


    Setsuna, aware of Hikari''s impressive victories over his granddaughter, he trusted, from her stories, a shinobi he considered on par with even Fugaku from actual intra-n ''friendly'' sparrings, felt no embarrassment in his ims. He, like Fugaku, recognized Hikari''s capabilities, silently asserting the young Hyuga''s potential as at least Early Kage level.


    Hirayoshi then took the floor, his voice carrying a mix of authority and calm, "Elder Setsuna''s observations are not without merit...", He began, "His granddaughter has sparred with Hikari, so he was privy of this information probably from there.",


    "But, I, and other Elders from our n too, believe that Hikari could indeed, at least, match Minato Namikaze in battle. Furthermore, Sakumo Hatake himself has recently tested Hikari and can attest to his strength. I doubt anyone here would question Sakumo''s judgment."


    As Sakumo then nodded in confirmation, the atmosphere shifted significantly. The collective skepticism and irony began to wane, reced by a burgeoning reassessment of Hikari''s capabilities. Sakumo''s endorsement, given his esteemed standing and reputation within the vige and his shinobi expertise and strength, added a new dimension to the discussion.


    This moment marked a turning point in the assembly''s deliberations. With the vocal support of both the Hyuga and Uchiha ns, coupled with Sakumo''s corroborative acknowledgment, the earlierughter and disbelief gave way to a more contemtive evaluation of Hikari now.


    Especially, given Sakumo''s esteemed status and his well-known personality throughout life in general, it was clear he wouldn''tpromise his reputation and inner moral code by making unfounded and false ims about Hikari, even though they had the same political alignment.


    Sakumo maintained hisposure, his nod a silent testament to his honesty. He hadn''t exaggerated Hikari''s capabilities; his assessment was based on personal experience, having sparred with the young Hyuga, and given him pointers as he observed his unique skill set firsthand.


    Additionally, Sakumo''s familiarity with Minato''s abilities came from their time on some S-level missions together, a few years ago, before his responsibilities as the Jonin Commander and head of the Hatake n took precedence for him, and he remained stationary, after shing with the Hokage''s faction at that time and his distancing of himself from the Hokage entirely.


    He understood that while Minato''s abilities and talents were widely recognized within Konoha and beyond, Hikari possessed his arsenal of unique techniques, many of which were unknown to Minato and the broader shinobi world.


    These abilities, with their peculiar and innovative mechanisms, led Sakumo to believe that Hikari could indeed match Minato inbat, due to the information asymmetry, probably leading to a stalemate between them.


    However, Sakumo also acknowledged that the oue could hinge on the advancements Minato had made with the Flying Raijin technique since theirst mission together. If Minato had fully developed this technique, it would certainly be a significant factor, yet theck of widespread acim or discussion about a fully realized Flying Raijin, from the Hokage''s faction in the vige, suggested to Sakumo that Minato''s mastery might not beplete.


    Meanwhile, Hikari, now thrust into the spotlight, but as he previously agreed to be put on before, and considering the possibility of facing Minato for real, pondered this potential match-up with serious attention mentally once again after today''s direct observation of him.


    Armed with his deep knowledge from the original series, he was aware that Minato had yet to master the Rasengan, Senjutsu, or fully develop the Flying Raijin technique at this stage. Some of that would probably happen onlyter during this war, even with his Buttefly Effect.


    However, the specific progress Minato had made with the Flying Raijin, potentially altered by Hikari''s own interventions in the timeline, remained unclear. An iplete Flying Raijin was still a formidable threat, capable of overwhelming most shinobi, also including Hikari himself.


    This uncertainty led him to ce Minato''s capabilities within the Early to Middle Kage level range, acknowledging the possibility that Minato might surpass him, an ''Early Kage'' in power.


    Yet, Hikari spected that Minato''sck of knowledge about his unique skillset could offer an advantage. Hikari believed his arsenal of unseen abilities might catch Minato off guard.


    Additionally, he considered how the use of ordinary chakra in Ninjutsu could indirectly alter the surrounding natural energy around as he experimented before and found out himself.


    Therefore, his unique Byakugan ability might allow him to detect early where Minato nned to teleport next using the Flying Raijin, offering opportunities for countermeasures or traps.


    From these reflections, Hikari understood that intelligence and the element of surprise y crucial roles in shinobi confrontations, alongside ''general power'' over a majority of shinobi over a lower ''general level'' of strength.


    The oue of battles often hinged not just on parative strength'' but on the strategic use of unique abilities and knowledge of the opponent''s weaknesses in some rare cases.


    Additionally, Hikari also began to consider why Choza Akimichi was nominatedst alongside Minato, but then he remembered those hidden and mysterious Akimichi n pills that could result in a fast boost of your baseline level of strength, which would indeed ce Choza as the strongest one among this current generation of ''Ino-Shika-Cho'' ofter generations, and around ''Quasi-Kage'' level of strength.


    As Hiruzen couldn''t nominate Tsunade for obvious reasons, Choza would be the only one left he could use to steal the opposition''s bid at the final Commander''s ce. However, Hikari still didn''t think that the current Hiashi of this timeline would be defeated by the Akimichi, they were probably equal at the end of the day.


    Meanwhile, Observing Hikari''s youthful yetposed demeanor, even as he faced the prospect of matching up against Minato, left a strong impression on the assembly.


    His calm eptance and confidence in potentially facing someone as formidable as Minato Namikaze shifted the room''s atmosphere even further.


    The sight of such poise in a young shinobi, thrust into a ring spotlight yet unfazed, prompted many present to reconsider the possibility of this matchup more seriously.


    Minato, meanwhile, also seated at the table amidst the unfolding discussions, found himself taken aback by the series of endorsements for Hikari.


    Initially surprised by the Hyuga and Uchiha ns'' confident support for such a young contender, indirectly also positioning the teen as the strongest individual within their ns currently, his shock deepened with Sakumo''s unexpected backing¡ªa figure for whom Minato held great respect.


    Hikari''s calm and assured presence amidst the spotlight also only added to Minato''s contemtion, prompting him to acknowledge the possibility that Hikari might indeed pose a credible challenge to him for some reason.


    However, despite this whirlwind of emotions, Minato''s external demeanor only shifted subtly, adopting a more serious expression. This turn of events was unforeseen, steering his thoughts towards the broader implications, yet he chose to maintain his silence, adhering to his characteristic restraint and humility, refraining from boasting or undermining others.


    Kushina, beside him, by contrast, however, disyed a more pronounced reaction. Her fiery nature made it difficult to ept that a teenager, seven years Minato''s junior and without any official mission experience, could be considered his equal, let alone potentially more talented.


    This notion was particrly jarring, challenging her belief in Minato''s unrivaled talent in their generation. Her immediate instinct was one of hostility towards Hikari, whoseposed demeanor seemed to her dismissive of Minato''s capabilities. Tension visible in her clenched fists and her expression clouding with anger, Kushina was on the verge of voicing her discontent.


    Nevertheless, sensing her rising agitation, Minato discreetly took her hand under the table, offering a calming nce.


    His silent plea for tranquility was a bid to prevent any outburst, prioritizing decorum in the charged atmosphere of the assembly.


    As the discussion about Hikari''s potential parity with Minato unfolded, Hiruzen and his two main advisors, Koharu and Homura, meanwhile maintained aposed silence, their expressions betraying no surprise at the ims of Hikari''s strength.


    This stoic response suggested they were already somehow privy to the rumors of Hikari''s true capabilities beforehand as well. Indeed, many heads of the smaller ns also aligned against the Hokage had learned of Hikari''s strength being of Early Kage level, for one reason or another, and it was inevitable that such significant intelligence would eventually reach Hiruzen and his advisors.


    Internally, the trio, however, also experienced a mix of regret and wonder at how a child''s personality could be so vastly different from his parents, who were known for their vige-centric ethos.


    They couldn''t help but feel a sense of loss that Hikari, unlike his parents, seemed more aligned with n interests, his demeanor was also often detached and too rationalistic and calctive, totallycking the ''warmth'' associated with the ''Will of Fire'' cherished by Konoha and his parents.


    Despite their previous efforts to sway Hikari towards a more vige-focused path, they recognized their attempts had been futile. In their view, the Hyuga Elders had effectively isted and molded Hikari to their liking, since the youngest age.


    This belief led them to conclude that despite their best attempts, the uniquebination of Hikari''s natural disposition and the influence of his n''s elders had rendered their efforts to integrate him more deeply into the vige''s fabric unsessful, so they didn''t me themselves for this ''failure'' too much.


    Orochimaru''s face was a mask of curiosity at this time, his serpentine-like eyes gleaming with a mix of interest and calction as he looked at the ''undisturbed'' and ''cold'' Hikari at the other end of the table with an area of ''coolness'' around his whole presence, in a same way as he, himself, was in the eyes of other people.


    His intuition immediately led him to believe that despite the vast difference in terms of age, background, and affiliation, the young teen was, for some reason, very close to himself in terms of his personality and demeanor.


    Always on the lookout for exceptional talent, and unique shinobi skillset frameworks, in the world, the notion of a young shinobi from the Hyuga n rivaling Minato piqued his interest.


    His mind likely raced with questions about Hikari''s abilities and how they could further his deep-seated ambitions and research into the limits of shinobi power as he nearly habitually licked his lips but managed to control himself.


    However, despite the appreciation, he still understood that the boy was destined to probably be his great enemy in the future, due to the difference in political and personal affiliations.


    Nevertheless, Danzo''s sudden interjection cut through the spective atmosphere overall, his voice carrying a mix of skepticism and challenge aimed at Hirayoshi''sst statements. He also stared at the Hyuga Patriarch with a sharp and even somewhat hostile look in his eyes.


    Rising to his feet, he pointedly addressed Hiashi and Hikari, his gesture andmanding tone leaving no room for ambiguity about his stance,


    "Let''s stop with these spections, please...", He began, his words sharp and his demeanor authoritative, "Even if those two individuals you mentioned theoretically somehow match the strength of Minato Namikaze and Choza Akimichi, when have theyst ventured beyond the confines of the Hyugapound to contribute to the vige''s needs?",


    "I question whether they have ever witnessed realbat and blood, let alone engaged in any significant missions for the sake of ourmunity. What have they done to earn such high-ranking positions? How can they inspire loyalty andmand respect from those they lead if they''ve remained sheltered and isted all their lives? What experience do they have in leadership, inmanding a unit on the field?", His words were direct and slightly impolite.

 86. Two Commanders As Anti-Hokage’s Faction Victory

    86. Two Commanders As Anti-Hokage¡¯s Faction Victory


    Hirayoshi''s response was swift and firm, directly addressing Danzo''s provocations, "No one is suggesting Hikari be appointed a Commander; indeed, his youth precludes such a responsibility.",


    "However, he will also contribute to the battlefield this time despite his age, talent, and background because he wants to contribute to Konoha with his high strength wholeheartedly.",


    "However, both Hiashi and Fugaku, our ns rmend as Commanders, are seasoned leaders, having spent decades being groomed for leadership within our respective ns.",


    "So, when ites tomanding experience, who is more qualified? Someone who has led a small unit, or those who have overseen the entirety of two of Konoha''srgest and most influential ns?",


    His tone conveyed a blend of ''disappointment'' and defiance, challenging Danzo''s assumptions about leadership and contribution to the vige, "To imply they''ve contributed nothing to Konoha overlooks their significant roles.",


    "Both Hiashi and Fugaku are not just to be counted as individuals, but as the speakers for the rights of their entire ns that, for example, oversee our vige''s entire internal and external imminent security currently.",


    Hirayoshi then turned the tables on Danzo, questioning the underpinnings of his argument, "Are you implying that leaders and representatives of Konoha''s shinobi ns that have continually served and sacrificed for the vige, don''t deserve a voice in its leadership?",


    "That we should merely ept orders without question, like subordinates without rights or opinions? This perspective is not only disrespectful but dangerously shortsighted, ignoring the essential contributions and sacrifices our ns have made for Konoha''s prosperity."


    Danzo quickly countered, broadening the scope of his critique, "What about the other shinobi ns then? Do they not get a say? Or do you really see your ns as superior to all others, including Konoha''s other shinobi families? Is this why you both missed the Ninja n Council meeting this morning?",


    His sharp response not only challenged their stance but also implied their absence at key vige meetings was indicative of their perceived elitism.


    Setsuna, seizing the moment to highlight the disparities within the vige''s n council, responded with a mix of irony and disdain this time around instead of Hirayoshi,


    "Haha, a ''Council'' where ns like your Shimura, or the Sarutobi, have the same say as the Uchiha or Hyuga, is fundamentally wed. How is that any fair, Danzo?",


    His rhetorical question underscored the inherent imbnce he perceived, pointing out the discrepancy in power and contributions between various ns, yet their equal representation in decision-making for ''some reason''.


    It was indeed a bit daring and impolite to say something like this in the face of leaders of Shimura and Sarutobi ns, especially since thetter was also the Hokage, but such were the ways of the radical faction leader and the Great Elder of the Uchiha n Setsuna Uchiha.


    However, Danzo didn''t get visibly agitated too much this time and seized the opportunity to reinforce his argument, addressing the assembly with a pointed observation, "Did everyone just hear that...?", He asked, capitalizing on Setsuna''s remarks, "This is the exact elitism of their two ns I was talking about...", He dered, using Setsuna''s direct words as evidence.


    Danzo''s retort aimed to rally the assembly''s sentiment against what he portrayed as an entrenched sense of entitlement, further stoking the mes of division within the council.


    Meanwhile, Homura, sensing the deadlock, proposed a different approach to break the impasse. Rising to his feet, he suggested, "It seems this discussion is clearly going nowhere. We are never going to be able to reach an agreement this way.",


    "Instead, why don''t we have the people at this table vote for the Commanders? No, better yet, let''s have those neutral Jonin observers we invited cast their votes on this matter and resolve it that way fairly."


    However, to members of the Anti-Hokage opposition, Homura''s proposal was transparent in its intent: to leverage the situation in favor of his faction.


    Given theposition of the table, with a significant presence from Hiruzen''s supporters, and the Jonin observers'' tendency to be of civilian origin¡ªthereby naturally inclined towards Hiruzen and less so towards the major shinobi ns like the Hyuga and Uchiha¡ªit was clear Homura aimed to use this method to secure all themand positions for his own faction.


    But, then Sakumo''s sudden intervention cut through the tension, asserting his position with confidence. Standing up to face Homura, he dered, "There is no need for a vote to discern the general will of the vige''s Jonin regarding this matter.",


    "As the vige''s Jonin Commander and the leader of the Jonin Council, elected fair and square, I am fully qualified to represent their collective will. And I state unequivocally that there is no need for a vote on this. We, the Jonin, also support Fugaku and Hiashi for the twomand positions this time."


    Sakumo''s assertive deration set off murmurs across the room, signaling a shift in the atmosphere once again.


    Homura, Koharu, Hiruzen, and Danzo, caught off guard by Sakumo''s confidence and the clear intent behind his words, realized the gravity of the situation.


    It dawned on them that the opposition, led by Sakumo, wasn''t merely negotiating for a singlemand position but was ''ambitiously'' aiming for two.


    This revtion marked a significant departure from what they had anticipated, challenging their expectations of a simplerpromise this time around.


    The realization that the opposition was not only more determined but also possibly had a stronger backing or rationale behind their confidence caused the four leaders to adopt a more serious demeanor. Previously, they all thought that they would need to ''sacrifice'' only one Commander position this time around in the most likely scenario, but not two instead.


    However, Hiruzen also found himself ruminating on the strategic implications of losing direct control over the essential Jonin Commander position once again andmented inwardly.


    Jonins in general naturally led teams of Chunin and Genin in all shinobi viges, therefore Sakumo, bymanding the Jonin force, as the current Jonin Commander, held de juremand over entire Konoha''s regr shinobi forces, a position that, by design, was meant to ensure a broad representation of shinobi interests within the vige''s military decisions.


    Hiruzen also dwelled on the heightened stature shinobi attained during war scenarios, their "social worth" escting, thereby enabling them to assert demands for autonomy in battlefield leadership.


    This dynamic underpinned Tobirama Senju''s rationale for establishing the Jonin Commander position and its ''de jure'' power.


    It was a strategic move designed to mitigate the Hokage''s potential overarching influence in wartime, ensuring that those most acquainted with the immediacies ofbat would guide military strategies.


    The essence of this role was to prevent the scenario of an "out-of-touch Hokage" making impractical or outdated decisions that could lead to discontent or rebellion among the ranks.


    Thus, the system of more frequent elections for the Jonin Commander was implemented, fostering a mechanism for change and responsiveness within Konoha''s military leadership, grounded in the evolving realities of shinobi warfare and tactics.


    This structure was a deliberate check and bnce established by Tobirama Senju to mitigate the risk of a Hokage''s potential disconnect from the front lines'' realities.


    It was intended to democratize the military leadership and safeguard against the risks of stagnation and unteral decision-making but now turned into what it turned in the end.


    Therefore, seeing Sakumo acting so ''strongly'', regarding this matter now, and then reflecting on the situation further, Hiruzen began to consider a strategic concession,


    ''Maybe yielding tactically on this matter could be advantageous...'' He pondered. The notion that Fugaku and Hiashi, despite assuming Commander roles, wouldn''t likely surpass the merits Orochimaru and Jiraiya could umte under his faction yed significantly in his deliberation. This realization led him to think, ''By granting them this, I could potentially leverage itter during the next critical discussions about shinobi cement on each front.''


    With this strategic calction in mind, Hiruzen internally solidified his decision. Despite Danzo''s evident disagreement and without further ado, Hiruzen nodded, signaling his acquiescence, and said, "Very well, Sakumo, I will listen to you this time...", He voiced aloud, marking his formal agreement to concede the Commander position to Fugaku and Hiashi.

 87. The Hyuga Clan Pressured And Suddenly Isolated

    87. The Hyuga n Pressured And Suddenly Isted


    Upon Hiruzen''s concession, Fugaku Uchiha seized the moment to assert his vision for the battlefield alignment further, speaking for the first time after a long silence during this meeting. Rising to his feet, his demeanor standardly stoic for him, his face in, as he addressed the assembly,


    "Thank you, Lord Hokage, for entrusting me with such a crucial leadership role...", Fugaku began, "However, I''d like to propose further considerations for the optimal deployment.",


    He continued,ying out his strategic rmendations with logical precision, "Given my position as the Uchiha n Patriarch, it would be most effective for the Uchiha nsmen to be assembled under mymand. Such an arrangement would ensure maximum operational cohesion and leverage our collective strengths.",


    Fugaku didn''t stop there. He delved deeper into tactical specifics, aligning natural elemental advantages with strategic positioning, "Additionally, I propose that my Division, I will lead, be assigned to the Southern Front, directly engaging Sunagakure''s forces. The rationale is straightforward¡ªthe Uchiha n''s mastery of Fire Release techniques provides us a natural advantage against the Wind Release techniques predominantly utilized by the Sunagakure.",


    "And the heat there also makes it easier for our jutsu to ignite and thrive in that kind of climate as opposed to some other environments for example.",


    However, immediately following Fugaku''s proposal, Hiashi Hyuga seamlessly took the floor, his timing impable, suggesting a premeditated coordination between the two leaders,


    "I extend my gratitude towards the Hokage for entrusting me with this pivotal role...", Hiashi began, echoing Fugaku''s sentiments of ''appreciation'' but quickly moving to outline his strategic propositions for the Hyuga n''s deployment.


    "Simr to the Uchiha Patriarch, I too propose that the majority of Hyuga nsmen deployed to the war front be ced under mymand for optimized effectiveness...", Hiashi stated firmly. His voice carried a blend of earnestness and strategic foresight, underscoring the importance of unit cohesion and the tactical application of the Hyuga''s unique abilities.


    He then detailed his vision for the Hyuga n''s deployment, aligning their unique capabilities with the demands of a specific front, "Our rmendation is for the Hyuga forces to be primarily assigned to the Eastern Front, opposing Kirigakure.",


    "The Byakugan offers unparalleled advantages in navigating and countering the misty environments characteristic of Kirigakure''s terrain, and their shinobi'' familiarity and home field advantages there, not to mention its efficacy against their Hiding in Mist Jutsu.",


    Hiashi''s proposal was not just a request formand but a strategic cement of the Hyuga n''s strengths against a key adversary, "Although we stand more than ready to support all fronts with our kekkei genkai''s versatile capabilities, we believe our skills will be most effectively utilized against Kirigakure...", He concluded, his statement reflecting a deep strategic understanding of the Hyuga n''s potential contributions to the joint war effort.


    However, upon hearing Hiashi''s proposals, the visages of Danzo, Hiruzen, Homura, and Koharu darkened significantly. The memory of the Uchiha n consolidating its forces during the previous shinobi world war, a move born from their deep-seated mistrust towards Konoha''s leadership, was still fresh, however, they were ready to ept that as a status quo during this war as well.


    But, now, with the Hyuga expressing a simr desire to centralize their n''s deployment, it crossed a line for the vige elders. This move not only broke from the past tradition but threatened the overturn some of the strategies they had considered.


    The utility of Hyuga''s supporting and auxiliary capabilities across various fronts, instead of centralization, was not only the most logical decision, in terms of what''s actually truly best for Konoha''s overall war efforts but had also been a cornerstone of their n to subtly "cut up" and dwindle their n''s numbers by dispersing them thinly across multiple battle lines where they could control how they were dispatched easier, sending them to their "doom" more easily, in the end resulting in a much weaker Hyuga n who recently defied them.


    Koharu Utanane, standing with an air of unequivocal authority, voiced her staunch opposition to the proposals, "This arrangement is entirely uneptable. The insistence on centralizing your forces, coupled with themand roles you''ve been given, raises serious concerns.",


    "Are the Uchiha and Hyuga ns attempting to form independent, local armies for future insurrections?", She questioned sharply, her voice echoing the suspicions of her faction.


    "While we might grasp the reasoning behind the Uchiha''s request, given theirbat prowess, the Hyuga n''s demand is perplexing. Your Side Branch members are renowned for their support capabilities. Concentrating such forces on a single front contradicts their inherent role as supporters, who should be enhancing the vige''s overall war effort across multiple fronts. We couldpromise on the Uchiha centralizing their forces like that this time again, but not for the Hyuga as well.", Koharu argued, her tone allowing no argument.


    Takumi Hyuga, the Fifth Elder of the Hyuga n, rose to address the concerns with a calm yet firm demeanor, "There''s no need for undue concern regarding the operations of our Divisions...", He stated, his voice steady amidst the escting tension,


    "In addition to our n members, we''ve nned to incorporate shinobi from the Aburame and Inuzuka ns, as well as from some other smaller ns within our Division. This diversification is intended to bnce out the specialized, auxiliary nature of our forces...", Takumi exined, presenting a united front alongside Hikari who had also risen in solidarity at this time, strangely the Patriarch was still sitting.


    The room''s atmosphere thickened with anticipation as the Hyuga representatives stood across from the Hokage and his three advisors, all now on their feet. The moment marked a pinnacle of tension, the likes of which hadn''t been seen since the council began.


    Danzo''s response cut through the tension first with a mix of sarcasm and outright challenge, "How amusing, to hear you speak as though this Division is already under your control. Let''s not jump to conclusions. Hiashi Hyuga''s appointment as one Division Commander was a decision made, but the finalposition of his Division is far from settled...", He remarked with a disdainfulugh.


    "And now, it seems the Hyuga n, with the Fifth Elder at the forefront, is making decisions for the Inuzuka and Aburame ns, not to mention assigning other smaller ns to their will. Have you started considering yourself the Hokage, dictating such allocations without consensus or authority?", Danzo''s voice dripped with mockery, his stance embodying the belief that he stood on the firmer ground, expecting to dictate terms rather than negotiate.


    Hiruzen, adopting a posture of finality and authority this time, also weighed in, fully echoing Danzo''s sentiments, "Danzo''s point holds merit. The amodations extended to your ns have been considerable today. We must draw a line.", He asserted, his voice carrying a tone of resolve. Standing with his hands sped behind him, he was speaking as if from a position of power.


    However, Hiashi''s ownposure in the face of such an overt attempt of intimidation was strangely totally negligent and not changed in the slightest. He was still standing firm against the heavy air of coercion that sought to bend his will, having the same kind of a ''poker'' face.


    His expression, as if carved from stone, radiated a sense of unwavering resolve, signaling that he was not ready to retreat from the position he had previously taken and that he was not in the slightest bit scared or pressured for some reason like the rest of the Hyuga n entourage behind him was at the moment and some other members of their broad coalition.


    On the other hand, Takumi disyed signs of the pressure the situation bore upon him. The emergence of sweat on his brow was a testament to the internal conflict he faced. He knew that they couldn''t back down from this matter, or they would pay greatlyter, but he also knew that they didn''t have sufficient power to get this matter through and convince others.


    A nce across the hall revealed Uchiha''s measured response to the unfolding standoff. Their faces, taut with tension, suggested a reluctance to further involve themselves in a dispute that had escted beyond the realm of easy resolution. They got what they wanted already from Hiruzen in terms of concessions.


    Therefore, they appeared to not want to help the Hyuga n further now and meddle into this, which was reasonable to many, after all, they were only allies of temporary mutual interests, at the end of the day, not the same n.


    The tension within the Uchiha faction was palpable. Setsuna''s expression, twisted into a grimace of frustration, suggested he was biting back words he deemed better left unsaid, perhaps out of a calcted decision to avoid escting the conflict further or risking the position his n had already secured.


    Fugaku, ever stoic, maintained his characteristic detachment, his demeanor unchanged as if to signal his non-involvement in the current dispute. This left Kiyomi visibly distressed, her concern not just for the immediate situation but also for ''visibly shaken'' Hikari, whom she regarded with a mix of worry and a plea for intervention that went unheeded by her grandfather Setsuna. Moreover, she understood that she had no right to potentially damage their n''s already secured position for her personal feelings or outlooks on the matter now.


    Meanwhile, Hikari himself, adept at masking his true feelings, projected a facade of surprise that mirrored the collective reaction of the Hyuga present, yet beneath this masky a calm assessment of the unfolding situation. His strategic mind was at work, piecing together the puzzle of the Hyuga n''s bold stance in the council.


    The unwavering demeanor of both the current Patriarch and Hiashi suggested a deeper confidence, one not easily shaken by the prospect of refusal from the Hokage''s faction. This was not merely a gamble on their part; it hinted at a premeditated strategy, likely underpinned by a significant ace up their sleeve.


    Observing the unusually tranquil demeanor of the Patriarch, who seemed almost unnaturally peaceful as he sat at the tables still, which was a strange thing in itself, and his gaze distant as if in some kind of a ''trance'', Hikari''s instincts told him that something significant was about to unfold. Something he would also need to watch attentively toter analyze very carefully.


    The Patriarch appeared to be in deep concentration, possibly channeling or preparing to unleash an ancient power unique to the Patriarch lineage, after a few moments to Hikari.


    Hikad spected instantly that it was what he caught the traces of during that meeting at that secret chamber back at the Patriarch''s residence and always had some intuition about.


    This, he spected, might be what they were so confident about, a secret power that could dramatically shift the current tense standoff in their favor, allowing them to ''speak from the position of strength'' instead and force the Hokage''s Faction to yield to all those demands.


    The unwavering confidence disyed by both Hiashi and the Patriarch previously, and Hiashi currently, suddenly all made sense to Hikari; they knew they had an unparalleled advantage, one that could potentially stun everyone present and decisively tip the scales for the Hyuga.


    Suddenly as Sakumo Hatake gathered his thoughts, preparing to intercede once more on behalf of the Hyuga, an extraordinary and unforeseen event unfolded that captured the attention of everyone present.


    Without warning, the hall was engulfed by a formidable chakra vortex, so powerful and overwhelming and yet it seemed to materialize as if from out of nowhere.


    The force of this chakra was such that it caused physical disturbances within the hall: debris began to fall from the ceiling fiercely, the grand table at which they were seated groaned under the strain, and nearby decorations and artworks sumbed to the pressure, showing cracks and signs of stress.


    Amidst the ensuing chaos and shock, all eyes were drawn to the origin of this unprecedented disy of power¡ªthe elderly Hyuga Patriarch.


    At that moment, the Patriarch rose to his feet, and what they saw was a man transformed. His eyes, once the calm, calcting windows of a seasoned elder, now zed with an intense white light, reminiscent of a voracious vortex that threatened to consume everything in its path.


    His entire form was shrouded in a mysterious white aura, ring with chakra so potent it seemed capable of reshaping the veryndscape.


    The frailty typically associated with his advanced age was nowhere to be seen; instead, he emanated a vitality, chakra, and power that suggested he could stand against the very forces of nature itself.

 88. The Awakening of the Hyuga Patriarch’s Hidden Power

    88. The Awakening of the Hyuga Patriarch¡¯s Hidden Power


    "The Hokage, Danzo, and others, it seems you''ve grossly misinterpreted our n''s strategic choice to maintain a low profile over decades, even centuries, and silently enduring and obeying all of your previous power grabs as a sign of weakness. This misunderstanding, however, ends now.",


    "The very idea that you could manipte the deployment of our n members in this war, intending to reduce our numbers through strategic ''sacrifices'', as if we''re merely named on a ''kill list'' to be checked off, is not only reprehensible but a betrayal of trust and agreements that we got from everyone once Konoha was founded.",


    "Therefore, we will not stand idly by while such ns are enacted against us anymore...", Hirayoshi dered, his voiceced with a newfound assertiveness, mirroring the slight disdain once shown to them.


    He continued, his tone turning sharply condescending like the tone previously used on them by Danzo and Hiruzen was, "Reflect on the absurdity of your strategy. Now, to ensure such a sinister ''n'' is avoidedpletely, I present a list of shinobi designated for Hiashi''s Eastern Division. This list is non-negotiable for me. I trust you understand that excluding even a single name from this list would certainly be a grave error on your part.",


    As Hirayoshi spoke these words, a scroll suddenly appeared in front of Hiruzen''s face, seemingly from thin air.


    As Hirayoshi concluded his deration, the dynamics within the council hall shifted dramatically.


    Members of Hiruzen''s faction, previously seated, now found themselves instinctively rising to their feet, rallying around the Hokage, and his Advisors, in a circle, in a protective stance.


    The sudden emergence of dozens of Anbu and Shinobi from the room''s concealedpartments added to the atmosphere of heightened alertness, their presence rapidly transforming the hall into a battlefield of tension.


    Yet, despite this mobilization, all eyes remained transfixed on the figure of Hirayoshi. The Hyuga Patriarch, once perceived as frail and unassuming, now stood enveloped in a radiant white light, at the epicenter of a chakra vortex that seemed to stretch and warp the very air around him.


    His presence was overwhelming, filling the hall with a palpable force that made it seem as though he was omnipresent, his spirit and power engulfing every inch of the space.


    The magnitude of chakra he disyed was unlike anything those present had ever witnessed before. It wasn''t just the quantity but also the sheer intensity of his chakra that left everyone in awe and fear.


    It seemed boundless as if tapping into an ancient, inexhaustible wellspring of power. And that chakra in its essence had entirely different characteristics from all the other kinds of chakra they ever encountered before, it was as if it were somehow "alien" in nature.


    Even to the more seasoned and powerful shinobi, many of whom had lived through countless battles and had seen the prowess of legendary figures, the spectacle before them was unparalleled.


    Hirayoshi''s chakra not only filled the hall but seemed to press against their very souls, at all times, a testament to a strength that defied thews of nature as they knew it.


    Meanwhile, in the wake of Hirayoshi''s awe-inspiring disy of power, the initial shock that gripped the Anti-Hokage faction quickly morphed into a calcted decision.


    Understanding the gravity of the moment, they moved with a unified purpose, rallying behind the Hyuga Patriarch - effectively ''splitting'' the hall up in two.


    They knew that the power dynamics between the two opposing political currents of Konoha changed once again right now, and it was considerably in their favor and for their cause.


    Their movements were swift, a clear indicator of their allegiance and a physical manifestation of their support.


    Each member of the coalition positioned themselves as a united front behind Hirayoshi, signaling a deep recognition of the newfound strength he brought to their joint cause.


    Despite their previous hesitation and indecision about supporting the Hyuga n against the pressures exerted by the Hokage''s Faction just now, the members of the Anti-Hokage coalition now recognized the strategic advantage in aligning themselves with Hirayoshi''s show of strength.


    The coalition''s sudden, swift pivot to stand unequivocally behind the Hyuga Patriarch was a testament to their understanding of the politicalndscape.


    They realized that the disy of formidable chakra was not just a demonstration of individual might but a symbolic assertion of the Hyuga, and by extension, the Anti-Hokage faction''s, rising influence within the vige.


    Although they didn''t know exactly what was the nature of that power, and why it was hidden by the Hyuga n until now for so long, seeing Hirayoshi being so confident to use it now openly, it didn''t matter.


    The Hyuga Patriarch wasn''t someone to make reckless decisions on gambling about this kind of open tearing of the face against the Hokage, like some teenager if he didn''t have such power for real backing him up.


    Sakumo, standing near the Hyuga Patriarch, had seamlessly transitioned into his full ''battle mode,'' his formidable presence subtly blending into the surroundings.


    This readiness to strike, almost shadow-like in its stealth and swiftness, served as a silent deration of his preparedness for any forting conflict.


    His demeanor was a clear sign that he, too, recognized the gravity of the moment and was prepared to defend their newfound stance at a moment''s notice.


    Fugaku, Setsuna, Kiyomi, and the rest of the Uchiha n members had simrly escted their readiness for battle, their Sharingan activated in a silent show of solidarity and preparedness.


    Simultaneously, all Hyuga n members positioned behind the Patriarch had their Byakugan activated, their pale, veined eyes scanning the hall with intense vignce.


    Amid this tense atmosphere, Hikari was a contrasting figure, his fists clenched not in anxiety but in excitement. The unfolding events seemed to stir a sense of anticipation within him.


    Conversely, Takumi appeared almost dazed, overwhelmed by the rapid esction and the sheer magnitude of chakra emanating from the Patriarch.


    Hiashi, with his calm demeanor, appeared as though he had been expecting this moment of confrontation.


    Meanwhile, on the other side, Hiruzen still held a look of true disbelief written all over his face, even though dozens of seconds already passed in silence since the outburst.


    His seasoned eyes, having witnessed countless battles and beheld numerous forms of chakra maniption throughout his storied life, now reflected an unparalleled level of astonishment.


    The sudden and overwhelming disy of power from the Hyuga Patriarch had caught him entirely off guard, presenting him with a form of strength and energy that was both enigmatic and profound.


    This wasn''t merely a demonstration of raw power; it was something more¡ªa manifestation of chakra that felt both ancient in its origin and yet extremely ''modern at the same time''. It was a paradox that defied his extensive knowledge and experience, leaving him grappling forprehension.


    As he watched, still trying to reconcile the reality before him with his understanding of the ninja world''s mechanics, Hiruzen couldn''t help but acknowledge the magnitude of what he was witnessing,


    ''This is already at a stable Peak Kage level of chakra, and it is still rising. This is super crazy...'', He thought to himself, a mixture of respect and fear threading through his realization.


    The revtion that the Hyuga n possessed such a monumental secret, a power that could very well redefine the dynamics of not just the vige but the entire shinobi world, was jarring.


    Even though he might''ve recently somewhat guessed that the Hyuga n harbored some big secrets, this still threw him out of his shoespletely as he didn''t nearly guess that this was the extent of it.


    This moment of revtion also spurred a deeper introspection within Hiruzen, ''What on Earth forced them toy low for so long then...?'', He pondered, the question echoing through his mind. It was a perplexing consideration.


    Such power could have easily ced the Hyuga at the forefront of the vige''s defense or its power structure, yet they had chosen a path of restraint, their true capabilities shrouded in secrecy until this pivotal, almost historic moment.


    Hiruzen, despite the shock of the moment, found his analytical mind engaging with the puzzle presented by Hirayoshi''s chakra. It was unlike anything he had felt before¡ªalien, foreign, and deeply unsettling in its unfamiliarity,


    ''Yet, why does it feel so alien and foreign-like inparison to Hirayoshi''s ordinary chakra? I guess this might be some kind of an ancient energy source then.'', He pondered, trying to make sense of the profound difference.


    With this realization, a sense of relief began to seep through the initial wave of shock, as Hiruzen thought, ''Perhaps, then this isn''t as bad as it seems now. As long as we manage to locate it in the future, or counter it somehow...'',


    This line of thinking allowed him to see a glimmer of hope amidst the upheaval. If this power stemmed from an ancient energy source, then there might be ways to understand it, prepare for its implications or even find means to counteract it in the future after some brainstorming.

 The Historic Moment And Victory For The Hyuga

    The Historic Moment And Victory For The Hyuga


    Meanwhile, Danzo''s thoughts twisted through aplexbyrinth of strategic calctions and darker intentions. As he observed the unparalleled disy of power from the Hyuga Patriarch, his mind, ever scheming, couldn''t help but reassess thendscape of power within Konoha.


    ''Damn, and here I thought that the Uchiha n was the biggest scourge. And here they are, the Hyuga, right under our noses the entire time...'', He mused internally, his gaze fixed on the radiant energy enveloping Hirayoshi.


    Danzo''s contemtion took a darker turn, reflective of his long-standing ambition to harness any means necessary to strengthen himself and, by extension, his vision for the vige.


    ''Damn, just where will be the end of theserge shinobi ns having so many advantages and strange mysteries in this shinobi world...'',


    He pondered, his thoughts tinged with a mixture of envy and resentment towards the natural gifts and secret powers harbored by the vige''s prominent ns.


    Yet, it was the spark of greed that also illuminated the depths of Danzo''s ambition. As he continued to watch the disy of power, a new possibility began to take shape in his mind,


    ''But, if I manage to get my hands on this source of power, then...'', He thought, allowing the sentence to trail off into the myriad of ns and machinations already forming in his mind.


    In the face of the immense chakra disyed by the Hyuga Patriarch, Homura, and Koharu, nearby despite their seasoned roles within the vige''s leadership, meanwhile, found themselvespletely overtaken by fear.


    Their usual confidence and strategic mindset were rendered useless against the raw power before them. The shock of witnessing such a force left them frozen, unable to think or react, as they were basically not even Jonin in terms of strength.


    Orochimaru, meantime, also on the scene beside Hiruzen, and ever the seeker of forbidden knowledge and power, especially recently of the ancient and big shinobi n-rted ones, watched the disy with an inscrutable gaze. His eyes, cold and calcting, gleamed with a mix of interest and anticipation.


    Where others felt fear or shock, he saw opportunity, ''Fascinating...'', His mind racing with the possibilities of harnessing such power for his experiments. The ancient and potent energy unleashed by the Hyuga Patriarch was, for Orochimaru, a great puzzle to be solved by him.


    Jiraiya, on the other hand, reacted with a blend of concern and awe. His adventurous spirit and vast experience as a shinobi made him no stranger to the extraordinary, yet the scale of this power was beyond what he had anticipated, even stranger than even everything he had seen in Mount Myoboku before.


    ''This is a serious shift in the power dynamics of Konoha right there...'', He pondered, worried about the implications for the vige and the ninja world from this level of internal division of Konoha, due to the chain reaction it could create indirectly, all stemming from this, and was also slightly worried about his sensei''s wellbeing and future fate within the vige as well.


    He never liked conflict, especially the ones that such a power could bring to the vige. In the end, in his mind, only the innocent would suffer, and it would be best if everyone could simply get along. But, observing these political bouts recently more and more, he was getting less and less optimistic, just hoping that a true ''Son of Prophecy'' would appear.


    Tsunade''s reaction to everything that transpired was marked by a blend of astonishment and concern, her sharp mind immediately calcting the potential consequences and dangers of such an unprecedented event.


    ''Is anyone hurt..? Could this power spiral out of control..?'', These questions shed through her mind, her eyes scanning the room for signs of injury or distress among those gathered.


    Her brow furrowed, as she was very skeptical about the origins and control of such power, how it seemingly appeared ''out of nothing,


    ''How has this been even hidden for so long, and what are the risks of its use..?'', She was also very worried about the political and social ramifications of this power''s revtion.


    Part of her marveled at the sheer scale of the chakra disyed, yet Tsunade''s primary focus was to be ready and try and mitigate the situation next if needed to safeguard the vige from potential fallout, that this situation might spiral into.


    Minato Namikaze, known for his calm demeanor and quick thinking inwardly approached the situation with a mixture of analytical curiosity and strategic concern.


    Observing the Hyuga Patriarch''s demonstration of power, Minato''s mind was racing, not just with the shock of the moment, but with the implications it held for the future.


    First, there was a sh of awe, in his mind, at the raw magnitude of chakra being disyed, a testament to the depth of power within Konoha that he had not grasped previously at all,


    ''Such interesting and overwhelming kind of power... And I never realized the Hyuga held something of this scale...", He thought, acknowledging the significance of this moment in understanding the vige''s ns and their capabilities.


    He also realized that as someone who aspired to be the next Hokage of this vige, he truly still didn''t know anything about this vige yet and had much more left to observe and learn and be very disciplined in it.


    The recent years of various political earthquakes and this now truly ''humbled'' him a little. He realized that most mildly put, his journey to bing the next vige leader, truly won''t be a ''walk in the park'' like he perhaps maybe too optimistically believed when he was younger and naive in the past under the encouragement and praise received from so many people.


    Yet, almost immediately, his thoughts pivoted to the safety of those present and the vige atrge, ''How can we ensure this power is not a threat to Konoha...?'', Minato wondered.


    His mind was already mapping out potential scenarios and responses, considering both the immediate aftermath, the next few minutes in the short-term, and the likely options that could hypothetically happen during those critical moments that urgently needed some de-esction, and the long-term ramifications of the Hyuga''s bold actions done just now.


    At the same time, Kushina, standing close to Minato, leaned in her expression a mix of concern and unease, "Minato, it seems that this power really woke up and agitated the Nine-Tails...", She whispered, her voice barely carrying over the charged atmosphere of the room.


    Therefore, before voicing his already nned ''pacifistic'' stance to Hokage, Minato focused on Kushina, offering her a reassuring touch or a calm look to mitigate the concern sparked by the Nine-Tails'' agitation, and it all convinced him, even more, it was way better to seek a ''peaceful'' resolution with the Hyuga Patriarch and their opposition in general right then.


    Furthermore, also some other key figures like Jiraiya and Tsunade, and some other shinobi, of their faction higher-ups prepared to support a ''diplomatic'' solution, prioritizing the vige''s unity and safety over prevailing tensions currently before it all escted out of the realm of possible salvation. In their minds, it was better to give some concession than face the true possibility of a broad vige extinction.


    Hiruzen, sensing the shift in the room and recognizing the critical juncture at which they stood, broke the tense silence, "I will agree to your terms, Hyuga Patriarch. For the overall survival of this vige, in its current form, it is best for us all to temporarily put away our differences, especially in times like these are... Fighting would do none of us any good...",


    He announced, his voice carrying a weight of solemnity and resolve. This concession was significant, signaling a willingness to bridge divides for the greater good of the Konoha.


    "I just want to say that some of your words were overly hurtful and neither, I, nor any of my associates wanted to do what you described to your nsmen just now. However, it is up to you to believe whatever you believe, and to lift those ''extreme'' concerns, we will even agree to those mobilization ns you gave me just now, I scanned over the list and there are no problems, we could work with it...", Hiruzen reflected in an attempt to smooth over past ''misunderstandings'' while also conceding to the demandsid out fully, his words careful.


    Yet, beneath Hiruzen''s outward disy of ''broad-minded'' leadership and the ''pain'', in terms of facial expressions,y a deeper, moreplex web of hostile thoughts and strategies. In the end, everything simply boiled down to him ''buying time'', and ''advancing by retreating''.


    The more power the Hyuga showed just now, the less likely he was to want to ''keep them'' in the future, in the vige, in the long term. They now even overtook Sakumo as his first and primary target for elimination.


    But, the more power they showed, it would also mean that it would be harder to move against them in the short term, resulting in this kind of apromise that could even bebeled as a tactical defeat this time around, not just a retreat.


    He was thoroughly disrespected as the Hokage this time around, under the eyes of everyone important in the vige, and he couldn''t do anything about it. If you asked him yesterday if he expected this oue today, for example, he would''ve told you that you were simply crazy.


    Hirayoshi, acknowledging Hiruzen''s concession, responded with a tone that blended resolution with a hint of regret,


    "If that is the case, and you keep to your promise made here in front of everyone, then there is no longer a cause for conflict between us during these trying times. Let''s proceed with the meeting then...",


    He stated, signaling a willingness to move beyond the confrontation for the greater good of the vige.


    He paused, reflecting on the necessity of his actions, "I''m sorry for the dramatics. However, as you were already aware, ''some people'' simply wouldn''t heed our rational concerns without a demonstration of significant strength. I feltpelled to take this measure...",


    Hirayoshi exined, his words conveying a mix of justification and a subtle ''apology'' for the tension his actions had caused.


    With a slight gesture, he deactivated his immense disy of power, and the oppressive aura of chakra that had filled the room dissipated.


    The return to normalcy was almost palpable as if a heavy weight had been lifted from everyone''s shoulders.


    The absence of chakra pressure allowed everyone to physically rx, though the implications of the disy would not be quickly forgotten.


    A whileter, Shikaku Nara, ever the astute observer, mulled over the revtions that just unfolded before him as the entire chamber building got fixed up now, by some swift shinobi and Anbu, before the meeting was supposed to proceed again ''as if nothing happened''.


    His analytical mind quickly pieced together the dynamics at y, realizing the exclusivity of the knowledge within the Hyuga n during the pause sitting at the table full of awkward silence and contemtion.


    ''It appears that only the Hyuga Patriarch and his son were privy to this formidable power, as evidenced by the surprise exhibited by everyone else. This information wasn''t just concealed from those outside the Hyuga n or the Anti-Hokage coalition; it seems it was a closely guarded secret within the Hyuga n itself, known only to the Patriarch''s Lineage for some reason...'', He deduced, his thoughts methodically categorizing this new piece of intelligence.


    Shikaku recognized the strategic implications of such a revtion, ''This historical exclusivity to the Patriarch''s Lineage regarding their n''s deepest secretsplicates our ability to gather further intelligence. It suggests a tradition of withholding even the most potent knowledge to a very select few within the n...'', He reasoned, acknowledging the barriers this posed to external understanding or oversight.


    With a sense of urgency underlying his thought process, Shikaku concluded, ''I need to share this observation with the Hokageter. The emergence of such an unexpected and powerful force within the vige is profoundly destabilizing. It''s as if dealing with one Sakumo Hatake, at the zenith of shinobi prowess, wasn''t challenging enough...'',


    ''This kind of retaliatory potential from them is truly overwhelming at this point as any action could lead to devastating consequences for us and the entire vige, making the situation extremely fragile...'',


    ''At this time, unless we get some good info on that power, or develop another extremely powerful shinobi on a peak, world-ss level of power, it would be best to keep the status quo going...'', He silentlymented, recognizing the gravity of the situation. But, as he thought of thest part he suddenly instinctively looked at Minato in the distance.

 89. The Historic Moment And Victory For The Hyuga

    89. The Historic Moment And Victory For The Hyuga


    Meanwhile, Danzo''s thoughts twisted through aplexbyrinth of strategic calctions and darker intentions. As he observed the unparalleled disy of power from the Hyuga Patriarch, his mind, ever scheming, couldn''t help but reassess thendscape of power within Konoha.


    ''Damn, and here I thought that the Uchiha n was the biggest scourge. And here they are, the Hyuga, right under our noses the entire time...'', He mused internally, his gaze fixed on the radiant energy enveloping Hirayoshi.


    Danzo''s contemtion took a darker turn, reflective of his long-standing ambition to harness any means necessary to strengthen himself and, by extension, his vision for the vige.


    ''Damn, just where will be the end of theserge shinobi ns having so many advantages and strange mysteries in this shinobi world...'',


    He pondered, his thoughts tinged with a mixture of envy and resentment towards the natural gifts and secret powers harbored by the vige''s prominent ns.


    Yet, it was the spark of greed that also illuminated the depths of Danzo''s ambition. As he continued to watch the disy of power, a new possibility began to take shape in his mind,


    ''But, if I manage to get my hands on this source of power, then...'', He thought, allowing the sentence to trail off into the myriad of ns and machinations already forming in his mind.


    In the face of the immense chakra disyed by the Hyuga Patriarch, Homura, and Koharu, nearby despite their seasoned roles within the vige''s leadership, meanwhile, found themselvespletely overtaken by fear.


    Their usual confidence and strategic mindset were rendered useless against the raw power before them. The shock of witnessing such a force left them frozen, unable to think or react, as they were basically not even Jonin in terms of strength.


    Orochimaru, meantime, also on the scene beside Hiruzen, and ever the seeker of forbidden knowledge and power, especially recently of the ancient and big shinobi n-rted ones, watched the disy with an inscrutable gaze. His eyes, cold and calcting, gleamed with a mix of interest and anticipation.


    Where others felt fear or shock, he saw opportunity, ''Fascinating...'', His mind racing with the possibilities of harnessing such power for his experiments. The ancient and potent energy unleashed by the Hyuga Patriarch was, for Orochimaru, a great puzzle to be solved by him.


    Jiraiya, on the other hand, reacted with a blend of concern and awe. His adventurous spirit and vast experience as a shinobi made him no stranger to the extraordinary, yet the scale of this power was beyond what he had anticipated, even stranger than even everything he had seen in Mount Myoboku before.


    ''This is a serious shift in the power dynamics of Konoha right there...'', He pondered, worried about the implications for the vige and the ninja world from this level of internal division of Konoha, due to the chain reaction it could create indirectly, all stemming from this, and was also slightly worried about his sensei''s wellbeing and future fate within the vige as well.


    He never liked conflict, especially the ones that such a power could bring to the vige. In the end, in his mind, only the innocent would suffer, and it would be best if everyone could simply get along. But, observing these political bouts recently more and more, he was getting less and less optimistic, just hoping that a true ''Son of Prophecy'' would appear.


    Tsunade''s reaction to everything that transpired was marked by a blend of astonishment and concern, her sharp mind immediately calcting the potential consequences and dangers of such an unprecedented event.


    ''Is anyone hurt..? Could this power spiral out of control..?'', These questions shed through her mind, her eyes scanning the room for signs of injury or distress among those gathered.


    Her brow furrowed, as she was very skeptical about the origins and control of such power, how it seemingly appeared ''out of nothing,


    ''How has this been even hidden for so long, and what are the risks of its use..?'', She was also very worried about the political and social ramifications of this power''s revtion.


    Part of her marveled at the sheer scale of the chakra disyed, yet Tsunade''s primary focus was to be ready and try and mitigate the situation next if needed to safeguard the vige from potential fallout, that this situation might spiral into.


    Minato Namikaze, known for his calm demeanor and quick thinking inwardly approached the situation with a mixture of analytical curiosity and strategic concern.


    Observing the Hyuga Patriarch''s demonstration of power, Minato''s mind was racing, not just with the shock of the moment, but with the implications it held for the future.


    First, there was a sh of awe, in his mind, at the raw magnitude of chakra being disyed, a testament to the depth of power within Konoha that he had not grasped previously at all,


    ''Such interesting and overwhelming kind of power... And I never realized the Hyuga held something of this scale...", He thought, acknowledging the significance of this moment in understanding the vige''s ns and their capabilities.


    He also realized that as someone who aspired to be the next Hokage of this vige, he truly still didn''t know anything about this vige yet and had much more left to observe and learn and be very disciplined in it.


    The recent years of various political earthquakes and this now truly ''humbled'' him a little. He realized that most mildly put, his journey to bing the next vige leader, truly won''t be a ''walk in the park'' like he perhaps maybe too optimistically believed when he was younger and naive in the past under the encouragement and praise received from so many people.


    Yet, almost immediately, his thoughts pivoted to the safety of those present and the vige atrge, ''How can we ensure this power is not a threat to Konoha...?'', Minato wondered.


    His mind was already mapping out potential scenarios and responses, considering both the immediate aftermath, the next few minutes in the short-term, and the likely options that could hypothetically happen during those critical moments that urgently needed some de-esction, and the long-term ramifications of the Hyuga''s bold actions done just now.


    At the same time, Kushina, standing close to Minato, leaned in her expression a mix of concern and unease, "Minato, it seems that this power really woke up and agitated the Nine-Tails...", She whispered, her voice barely carrying over the charged atmosphere of the room.


    Therefore, before voicing his already nned ''pacifistic'' stance to Hokage, Minato focused on Kushina, offering her a reassuring touch or a calm look to mitigate the concern sparked by the Nine-Tails'' agitation, and it all convinced him, even more, it was way better to seek a ''peaceful'' resolution with the Hyuga Patriarch and their opposition in general right then.


    Furthermore, also some other key figures like Jiraiya and Tsunade, and some other shinobi, of their faction higher-ups prepared to support a ''diplomatic'' solution, prioritizing the vige''s unity and safety over prevailing tensions currently before it all escted out of the realm of possible salvation. In their minds, it was better to give some concession than face the true possibility of a broad vige extinction.


    Hiruzen, sensing the shift in the room and recognizing the critical juncture at which they stood, broke the tense silence, "I will agree to your terms, Hyuga Patriarch. For the overall survival of this vige, in its current form, it is best for us all to temporarily put away our differences, especially in times like these are... Fighting would do none of us any good...",


    He announced, his voice carrying a weight of solemnity and resolve. This concession was significant, signaling a willingness to bridge divides for the greater good of the Konoha.


    "I just want to say that some of your words were overly hurtful and neither, I, nor any of my associates wanted to do what you described to your nsmen just now. However, it is up to you to believe whatever you believe, and to lift those ''extreme'' concerns, we will even agree to those mobilization ns you gave me just now, I scanned over the list and there are no problems, we could work with it...", Hiruzen reflected in an attempt to smooth over past ''misunderstandings'' while also conceding to the demandsid out fully, his words careful.


    Yet, beneath Hiruzen''s outward disy of ''broad-minded'' leadership and the ''pain'', in terms of facial expressions,y a deeper, moreplex web of hostile thoughts and strategies. In the end, everything simply boiled down to him ''buying time'', and ''advancing by retreating''.


    The more power the Hyuga showed just now, the less likely he was to want to ''keep them'' in the future, in the vige, in the long term. They now even overtook Sakumo as his first and primary target for elimination.


    But, the more power they showed, it would also mean that it would be harder to move against them in the short term, resulting in this kind of apromise that could even bebeled as a tactical defeat this time around, not just a retreat.


    He was thoroughly disrespected as the Hokage this time around, under the eyes of everyone important in the vige, and he couldn''t do anything about it. If you asked him yesterday if he expected this oue today, for example, he would''ve told you that you were simply crazy.


    Hirayoshi, acknowledging Hiruzen''s concession, responded with a tone that blended resolution with a hint of regret,


    "If that is the case, and you keep to your promise made here in front of everyone, then there is no longer a cause for conflict between us during these trying times. Let''s proceed with the meeting then...",


    He stated, signaling a willingness to move beyond the confrontation for the greater good of the vige.


    He paused, reflecting on the necessity of his actions, "I''m sorry for the dramatics. However, as you were already aware, ''some people'' simply wouldn''t heed our rational concerns without a demonstration of significant strength. I feltpelled to take this measure...",


    Hirayoshi exined, his words conveying a mix of justification and a subtle ''apology'' for the tension his actions had caused.


    With a slight gesture, he deactivated his immense disy of power, and the oppressive aura of chakra that had filled the room dissipated.


    The return to normalcy was almost palpable as if a heavy weight had been lifted from everyone''s shoulders.


    The absence of chakra pressure allowed everyone to physically rx, though the implications of the disy would not be quickly forgotten.


    A whileter, Shikaku Nara, ever the astute observer, mulled over the revtions that just unfolded before him as the entire chamber building got fixed up now, by some swift shinobi and Anbu, before the meeting was supposed to proceed again ''as if nothing happened''.


    His analytical mind quickly pieced together the dynamics at y, realizing the exclusivity of the knowledge within the Hyuga n during the pause sitting at the table full of awkward silence and contemtion.


    ''It appears that only the Hyuga Patriarch and his son were privy to this formidable power, as evidenced by the surprise exhibited by everyone else. This information wasn''t just concealed from those outside the Hyuga n or the Anti-Hokage coalition; it seems it was a closely guarded secret within the Hyuga n itself, known only to the Patriarch''s Lineage for some reason...'', He deduced, his thoughts methodically categorizing this new piece of intelligence.


    Shikaku recognized the strategic implications of such a revtion, ''This historical exclusivity to the Patriarch''s Lineage regarding their n''s deepest secretsplicates our ability to gather further intelligence. It suggests a tradition of withholding even the most potent knowledge to a very select few within the n...'', He reasoned, acknowledging the barriers this posed to external understanding or oversight.


    With a sense of urgency underlying his thought process, Shikaku concluded, ''I need to share this observation with the Hokageter. The emergence of such an unexpected and powerful force within the vige is profoundly destabilizing. It''s as if dealing with one Sakumo Hatake, at the zenith of shinobi prowess, wasn''t challenging enough...'',


    ''This kind of retaliatory potential from them is truly overwhelming at this point as any action could lead to devastating consequences for us and the entire vige, making the situation extremely fragile...'',


    ''At this time, unless we get some good info on that power, or develop another extremely powerful shinobi on a peak, world-ss level of power, it would be best to keep the status quo going...'', He silentlymented, recognizing the gravity of the situation. But, as he thought of thest part he suddenly instinctively looked at Minato in the distance.

 90. From Standoff to Synergy: The Assembly’s Shift

    90. From Standoff to Synergy: The Assembly¡¯s Shift


    Following the resolution of the tense standoff, the atmosphere within the assembly meeting shifted towards one of cooperation and productivity.


    With the disy of power by the Hyuga Patriarch catalyzingpromise, discussions moved forward more smoothly than before.


    The heightened emotions and political maneuvering gave way to a focused determination to finalize the ns for the vige''s defense.


    Decisions regarding the formation and leadership of the four Divisions were made with unexpected swiftness, reflecting a newfound sense of unity and purpose among the vige''s leadership,ing from a more bnced and harmonious ratio of rtive power between the two main factions, strangely resulting in more cohesion and less ''small political battles''.


    Jiraiya was assigned to lead the efforts against Kumogakure, meanwhile, Orochimaru tookmand over the efforts concerning Iwagakure.


    The Hyuga and Uchiha ns, central to the day''s earlier tensions, achieved their objectives regarding bothmand and mobilization.


    As the matter finally concluded, Hikari felt a mix of emotions about being assigned to face Kirigakure. He was wary about the involvement of Madara and Zetsu in Kirigakure, uncertain of when they started influencing it and the methods they used.


    Given the mystery surrounding these figures, especially the enigmatic ck Zetsu, Hikari''s apprehension was understandable.


    On the flip side, Hikari saw a positive angle to his assignment. Being against Kirigakure presented him with a unique opportunity to acquire Kaguya cells and DNA, as well as Hashirama''s cells from White Zetsu, for his experiments. While recognizing the risks, he also acknowledged the potential rewards.


    But, most importantly, Hikari understood that his input on the deployment was limited. The Byakugan''s effectiveness against Kirigakure''s mist and the strategic geographical positioning made the Hyuga n''s stationing there a tactical advantage.


    This positioning there would facilitate better coordination with Sunagakure, improvingmunication, logistics, and shinobi movement, with their only other friendly front and Division led by the Uchiha n, as it was also located generally in the South of the continent and ''linked''. This strategic importance made the Kirigakure front highly desirable for his n.


    However, just as the meeting seemed to be drawing to a close, Hiruzen introduced a new, unexpected topic, "There is another important issue I wish to address, involving the establishment of an additional Division: the Surprise Attack and Rescue Division...",


    He announced, capturing the attention of everyone present, "This will be a small, yet highly mobile unit, perfectly suited to swift interventions and critical missions.",


    He continued, "It will be led by Minato Namikaze. His expertise with the Flying Raijin Jutsu makes him the ideal candidate to spearhead this unit, leveraging his unparalleled mobility for surprise attacks and rapid rescues on all the other fronts and more...",


    Hiruzen''s proposal underscored a strategic initiative aimed at enhancing Konoha''s operational capabilities, with Minato at the helm to maximize its effectiveness.


    Hiruzen, seizing the moment to build on his strategic vision, borated further on theposition of the new division, "The Vice-Captain of this division will be Choza Akimichi...",


    He then addressed a matter of significant importance, acknowledging the heightened risks Konoha faced,


    "As you all understand, given our position, we are likely to be the prime target of the other major shinobi viges. In light of this, I''ve made a critical decision about Kushina Uzumaki as well...", Hiruzen continued, the weight of his words hanging in the air,


    "Given the circumstances, I may deploy Kushina as ast-resort measure on any front, should our situation demand it.",


    "While I recognize the concerns surrounding the use of a Jinchuriki''s power, the luxury of restraint we had in past conflicts is a luxury we can no longer afford...", Hiruzen''s tone conveyed the gravity of the decision, yet also confidence in Kushina''s capabilities.


    "However, let me assure you, Kushina''s adeptness and fitness as a Jinchuriki, alongside her exceptional control over the Nine-Tails, makes her uniquely qualified for this role. She will be part of this division, yet her deployment on missions will require my direct authorization..."


    The hall, filled with Konoha''s most esteemed leaders and shinobi, collectively agreed on the necessity of deploying Kushina, if needed, recognizing the dire circumstances they faced.


    The logic behind Hiruzen''s decision was clear given the vige''s precarious position, surrounded by threats on all sides. This consensus reflected a shared understanding of the stakes at hand and a willingness to utilize every avable asset to safeguard the vige.


    However, the reception to the announcement of Minato''s division among the members of the Anti-Hokage factions was markedly different. Skepticism and concern shadowed their faces, interpreting Hiruzen''s move as a strategic y within the vige''s internal power dynamics.


    To them, assigning Minato to lead such a crucial and potentially glory-gaining division wasn''t just about leveraging his abilities for the vige''s defense; it hinted at grooming him for a more significant role in the future.


    This perception stemmed from the belief that the formation of the Surprise Attack and Rescue Division, perfectly suited to Minato''s unique skills, was poised to earn widespread acim and war merits across all fronts.


    Such a prominent position could indeed bolster Minato''s standing within the vige, positioning him as a prime candidate to seed Hiruzen as Hokage.


    The Anti-Hokage factions viewed this prospect with unease, concerned that it signified an intent to solidify Hiruzen''s faction''s grip on the vige''s leadership, ensuring the continuation of their influence, even through the distant future, through Minato''s potential ascension.


    Hiruzen addressed the undercurrent of skepticism with a calm, yet firm demeanor, acknowledging the vige''s internal divisions openly for the first time during the meeting, after all, after Hirayoshi''s previous actions, it was now impossible to act like everything was fine and that there was no such a big division in the vige, at this stage, it was better to ept reality for everyone,


    "Don''t be so narrow-minded...", He began, his voice carrying a mix of authority and sincerity, "Minato''s mastery of the Flying Raijin technique has reached an exceptional level, particrly in terms of long-distance, longer-preparation time kind of teleportation.",


    "Consider the potential impact of this ability and the new division on the battlefield. It''s not just about gaining an advantage; it''s about saving lives and ensuring the sess of critical missions across all fronts.",


    He continued, "This includes lives within my political opposition as well...", Hiruzen''s words aimed to transcend the prevailing tensions, highlighting the broader implications of Minato''s division for Konoha as a whole, emphasizing that the benefits of the Surprise Attack and Rescue Division would extend beyond partisan lines, potentially safeguarding the lives of many, including those who doubted his intentions.


    Ultimately, the leaders of the Anti-Hokage Faction, including prominent figures like Sakumo, Hirayoshi, Fugaku, and Setsuna, found themselves in a position where the agreement was the most logical path forward.


    Hiruzen''s proposal was presented with somewhat rity and reason and made apelling case for the creation of Minato''s new division.


    Coupled with the fact that their own demands and conditions had been met earlier in the meeting, acknowledging the merit of Hiruzen''s suggestion became an exercise in diplomatic reciprocity.


    It was a moment of mutual concession, where both sides recognized the benefits of cooperation for the greater good of Konoha.


    However, the dynamics within the room had undeniably shifted. The leaders of the Anti-Hokage Faction, buoyed by Hirayoshi''s earlier demonstration of the Hyuga n''s hidden power, carried themselves with an air of newfound confidence.


    Their agreement to Hiruzen''s proposal, therefore, was not a sign of submission but a calcted decision, made from a more bnced power dynamics between the two factions.


    Hiruzen''s contemtive mood deepened as he observed the consensus forming around his proposal. The creation of Minato''s new division, a strategic decision prompted by the meeting''s earlier developments, reflected a swift adaptation to the unexpected show of power from the Hyuga Patriarch.


    Before this revtion, the n had been quite different, with only a single frontmand position intended for the Anti-Hokage Faction as apromise, the one he specifically highlighted for Choza Akimichi before. However, Minato was originally ted to lead a regr division, on his own, for real.


    The Hyuga Patriarch''s disy had forced Hiruzen and his advisors to quickly reconsider their approach, highlighting the need to position Minato in a way that would allow him to rue merits, fame, and a reputationmensurate with his abilities and potential leadership role.


    Yet, Hiruzen also saw an underlying benefit to this new arrangement. The Surprise Attack and Rescue Division, by its nature, would operate on a more flexible and dynamic basis than a regr division, being more stationary and not moving unless it was truly necessary.


    This would allow Minato to further hone his skills, refine his techniques, and train harder in general, as he would have more free time than every other key figure from his opposition.


    In Hiruzen''s eyes, Minato possessed the unique potential to exceed even his considerable capabilities and to stand as a formidable force against other key figures like Sakumo and the Hyuga Patriarch, the only young person with such a high potential from his faction currently.


    Recognizing the urgency of the situation, Hiruzen further considered the necessity of persuading Jiraiya to expedite Minato''s training with the Toad Sages on Mount Myogaku as soon as possible after this meeting.


    The sages had indicated that Minato possessed the requisite physical robustness and chakra control for the ''special mode'' they had described. In fact, their insights suggested Minato had significantly more potential for this than Jiraiya did.


    This extraordinary potential was partly attributed to Senju DNA present in Minato''s lineage, a powerful heritage of which he was unaware.


    Ideally, waiting until Minato''s body reached its prime would be preferable, allowing him to mature further and fully harness this power.


    However, the current threats from the Hyuga and Uchiha ns made dying Minato''s development untenable for his interests.


    Faced with the considerable pressure exerted by the Hyuga Patriarch today, Hiruzen felt apelling need to bolster Minato''s abilities swiftly, seeing him as a crucial asset in preventing the vige''s control from slipping into the hands of the Hyuga and Uchiha ns.

 91. Minato’s Renewed Purpose, The Uchiha Reflection

    91. Minato¡¯s Renewed Purpose, The Uchiha Reflection


    Hikari, always sharp and observant picked up on subtleties in Hiruzen''s introduction about Minato''s role and capabilities.


    He understood that Minato''s mastery of the Flying Raijin technique, while impressive, hadn''t yet reached the pinnacle of speed and versatility depicted in the original series.


    It was clear to Hikari that Minato''s current proficiency with the jutsu was primarily suited for long-distance transportation and in terms of briefbat scenarios was probably more constrained by its longer casting time.


    Hikari understood the nuances between Minato''s and Tobirama''s use of the Flying Raijin technique.


    While Minato''s forms were crafted for greater chakra efficiency,pensating for his smaller chakra poolpared to Tobirama, the real advantagey in Minato''s exceptional reaction speed and reflexes.


    These allowed him to deploy the technique effectively in rapid session, particrly useful in close-quartersbat where immediate response was crucial.


    Yet, Hikari observed that Minato hadn''t fully developed this legendary speed to its maximum potential, limiting his ability to utilize the Flying Raijin under intense battle conditions where split-second decisions were necessary.


    Nheless, for long-distance teleportation, where a dy of a second or more was inconsequential, Minato''s version of the jutsu was already highly effective, demonstrating its unique strengths despite the areas needing improvement.


    Hikari wasn''t surprised that Minato had achieved such proficiency with the Flying Raijin technique at the rtively young age of around 20. Being Jiraiya''s disciple, even while he was still in the Ninja Academy, had its advantages.


    It led Hikari to specte on how early Hiruzen might have, through Jiraiya, introduced Minato to the Flying Raijin technique for practice. This early start under the tutge of such skilled mentors provided Minato with a significant head start in mastering a jutsu that demanded exceptional precision and control.


    However, reflecting on Hiruzen''s ''present-day'' intentions, Hikari concluded mentally, ''He probably wants to allow him to train harder now in mastering the Flying Raijinpletely, amongst other things, that''s why he didn''t send them on the Fronts to help Jiraiya or Orochimaru, for example...'',


    ''The ''Sage Mode'', ''Flying Raijin'', ''Rasengan'', and possibly even more in this timeline; He is a truly worrisome problem... It would be best if I could somehow take him out before he reaches his full potential...'',


    With a cold glint recognizing the implications of Minato''s growth, Hikari considered him the most significant future challenge within Konoha from the Hokage''s Faction, due to his talent.


    Despite his reservations about Minato''s idealistic outlook, Hikari never underestimated his strength and shinobi talents. He recognized Minato''s exceptional potential, believing that had Minato not met an untimely end during his prime in the original series, his abilities could have developed even further.


    Like the other high-ranking members of the Anti-Hokage Faction, Hikari viewed Minato as the most significant future threat to their ns, a shinobi with the potential not only to match but to surpass Hiruzen.


    Additionally, Hikari considered the likelihood of Minato stepping out from under Hiruzen''s influence and ''shadow'' to be slim.


    Observing how swiftly Hiruzen reassumedmand during the Nine-Tails attack and following Minato''s demise, it appeared as though Hiruzen had never truly ceded the Hokage position to Minato.


    This seamless transition could be attributed to the brief duration of Minato''s leadership, possibly not allowing enough time for him to assert his independence fully. Alternatively, Hikari pondered whether Minato, with his less visionary approach, might not have seen the issue with remaining under Hiruzen''s sway.


    While Hikari remained uncertain about Minato''s perspectives on leadership and autonomy, one thing was crystal clear to him: Minato possessed immense potential as a shinobi. However, Hikari concluded, this potential was likely to stay within the sphere of Hiruzen''s influence, and it would be very foolish to assume otherwise.


    Hikari never let his guard down about the Hokage''s Faction, despite there being even much greater threats in this world in his knowledge. He understood that, more or less, it was still the Hokage''s Faction that had the dominant position within the Konoha framework currentlypared to his faction. It was just that the gap narrowed by the Patriarch''s outburst of mysterious power on another level.


    Meanwhile, in the hall, Kushina, upon hearing that she might be called upon to fight and lend her strength to the vige''s efforts, reacted with a fiery spirit and felt excited. While she understood the risks, especially as a Jinchuriki, her primary concern was the safety and well-being of Konoha.


    Kushina felt a deep pride in being considered a valuable asset in times of need, ready to do whatever it took to protect her home and loved ones. Until now, her mission assignments have been truly rare, not to mention going to a real battlefield.


    And what made it all the more better and positive was that the Minato didn''t need to go alone anywhere and that she could even apany him. Therefore, she looked at Hiruzen gratefully at this time.


    She vowed to try to understand and train even harder in her n''s unique heritage and abilities she was left with by herte grandmother from the Uzumaki n.


    Upon learning of his new position as the leader of the Surprise Attack and Rescue Division, Minato epted the role with a humble yet determined demeanor. Understanding the gravity of the responsibility ced upon him, he felt a renewed sense of purpose again.


    Minato reflected on the implications of his new role, seeing it as an invaluable chance to dedicate more time to his training,


    ''This position essentially grants me more time to prepare. I won''t let everyone down then. I''ll push myself harder than ever to support Konoha''s stability and unity, and to fulfill my goal of bing Hokage...'', He resolved, his determination evident as he clenched his fists.


    Catching Kushina''s excited nce, he acknowledged the added responsibility of protecting her, especially given her unique status as a Jinchuriki amidst the escting internal and external pressures. This realization spurred him to think beyond his current capabilities,


    ''I''ve beencent. It''s time to innovate, to refine my techniques, and develop new ones. I need to work smarter and harder than ever before...'', Minato''smitment to his growth and to Konoha''s defense was unwavering, driven by his deep sense of duty and love for Kushina.


    Following the decision regarding Minato''s new role and division, the assembly meeting moved swiftly toward the conclusion.


    The final steps involved the signing of important documents and transcripts that officially recorded the meeting''s oues.


    Each leader and participant methodically affixed their signatures, formalizing themitments and strategies that had been agreed upon. There were brief exchanges of farewell words, a mixture of formal acknowledgments, and more personal sentiments reflecting the gravity of the situation facing Konoha and the unity required to address it.


    As these formalities werepleted, the atmosphere in the room, though still charged with a sense of urgency, began to ease. The leaders and participants, having reached critical decisions for the vige''s future, prepared to leave the ndestine space that had hosted their deliberations.


    One by one, they exited the underground assembly hall, a secret chamber hidden beneath the iconic Hokage Rock. Stepping from the dimly lit confines into the brightness of Konoha''s streets marked a transition back to the everyday world, but each carried with them the weight of the decisions made and the tasks ahead.


    The light of the vige streets seemed to wee them back, a reminder of the home they had vowed to protect and serve, at the end of the day, bolstering their resolve as they departed to undertake their respective duties.


    As the Hyuga and Uchiha members exited the meeting side by side, with the rest of the Anti-Hokage Faction nearby, Hirayoshi spoke up, his demeanor unchanged before the meeting.


    "Sakumo-san, let''s connectter again, congrattions on this meeting''s results...", He strangely only addressed Sakumo by name, perhaps because of his status or because he was the only one about to speak for his n at that time when Hokage pressured them.


    "There is still much for us to process internally after returning to our ns. We will contact youter; for now, let''s part ways...", He stated, indicating a need for reflection and strategic nning within the confines of their own ns.


    Hikari, Takumi, Hiashi, and the other Hyuga nsmen nearby nodded in understanding, ready to deliberate on the meeting''s oues and their implications.


    Meanwhile, the rest of the Anti-Hokage faction experienced a moment of difort, reflecting on the earlier part of the meeting.


    Before Hirayoshi demonstrated power, there had been a noticeableck of support for the Hyuga n''s proposition, particrly from the Uchiha n, who had secured their demands first and then stopped advocating for the Hyuga''s interests.


    This prior inaction now cast a shadow of awkwardness, especially among the Uchiha, who recognized the potential rift their earlier stance might have caused.


    However, Hyuga''s decision not to dwell on these past tensions, instead focusing on future coordination and strategy, brought a sense of relief to the group.


    This gesture of looking forward, rather than holding onto grievances, signaled a willingness to maintain unity within the Anti-Hokage Faction, despite theplex dynamics andpeting interests that hade to light during the meeting.


    The Uchiha nsmen found themselves caught between conflicting feelings following Hirayoshi''s unexpected demonstration of power.


    On the one hand, there was a sense of satisfaction and relief. Having such a potent ally undoubtedly strengthened their position against the Hokage''s faction, offering more hope in their struggle to regain influence within Konoha.


    This new development promised a more robust defense and a strategic edge they had not anticipated, which could significantly alter the bnce of power in their favor.


    However, this positive outlook was somewhat overshadowed by a lessfortable realization.


    The Hyuga''s sudden assertion of dominance, spearheaded by Hirayoshi''s disy, had unexpected implications for the internal hierarchy of the Anti-Hokage Faction.


    The Uchiha, a n with deep-rooted pride and a long-standing sense of prominence within the vige, now faced the reality of another n ascending to a position of clear leadership within their coalition.


    In the face of these developments, the internal rivalries within the Uchiha n momentarily took a back seat as Great Elder Setsuna and Patriarch Fugaku shared a significant nce.


    This exchange wasden with unspoken understanding and concern over the escting situation in Konoha and beyond, recognizing that the dynamics of power were shifting rapidly and unpredictably.


    The revtion of the Hyuga n''s ancient and formidable power, juxtaposed with the Uchiha''sck of recent Mangekyo Sharingan awakenings, underscored a growing concern.


    The Uchiha had long prided themselves on their powerful kekkei genkai, yet the absence of new Mangekyo Sharingan users within their ranks, coupled with no equivalent secret power to the Hyuga''s, highlighted a pressing need for action.


    Fugaku and Setsuna realized the urgency of unlocking the Mangekyo Sharingan''s potential within their n.


    For Fugaku, this meant embracing the inevitable conflict of the uing war as an opportunity to push his limits and achieve the awakening.


    His resolve was clear, understanding the sacrifices and risks involved in pursuing such power.


    Setsuna, on the other hand, saw his granddaughter Kiyomi as another beacon of hope for the n''s resurgence.


    The expectation that she, too, might awaken the Mangekyo Sharingan ced a heavy burden on her shoulders, a burden Setsuna acknowledged with a mix of hope and apprehension.


    His concern for Kiyomi''s well-being added ayer ofplexity to his determination, reflecting the personal stakes involved in the n''s quest for power.


    Meanwhile, also as the meeting dispersed, Kiyomi found herself still grappling with the aftermath of the Hyuga Patriarch''s disy of power.


    She secretly waved goodbye to Hikari, her mind racing with thoughts of the chakra explosion that seemed like an ocean''s force unleashed by his Patriarch.


    This unexpected revtion had thoroughly shattered her preconceived notions of the Hyuga n, which she, like many in her n, had always considered to be a step behind the Uchiha in terms of sheer power.


    The reality that the Hyuga possessed such a profound secret strength, capable of bending the Hokage''s Faction to their will and intimidating them during such a broad assembly, was unprecedented.


    Kiyomi reflected on this moment as a historic shift in the dynamics of power within Konoha.


    For the first time, a major shinobi n leveraged their hidden power to such a dramatic effect, fundamentally altering the politicalndscape of the vige.


    This realization sparked a mix of emotions in Kiyomi: awe at Hyuga''s hidden capabilities, a reassessment of her understanding of her vige''s dynamics, and a newfound sense ofpetition.

 92. Warfare Wisdom: Planning for the Eastern Front (1)

    92. Warfare Wisdom: nning for the Eastern Front (1)


    Once back at the Hyuga npound, the urgency of the uing conflict shifted to the forefront of their activities.


    The Patriarch, understanding the significance of the Eastern Front and its challenges, assigned Hiashi, Hikari, and Takumi the task of delving into wartime strategies and preparations.


    He stressed the importance of these discussions happening in istion, to simte the decision-making processes they would face on the battlefield, thereby honing their tactical acumen in a more controlled environment.


    To facilitate these crucial discussions, the trio found themselves in a serene setting within the Patriarch''s residence. Surrounded by the tranquility of a spacious garden, they gathered around a fancy table, the calm atmosphere in stark contrast to the gravity of their task.


    This setting was chosen for its peaceful ambiance, providing a clear mind for theplex and weighty discussions ahead.


    The objective was clear: to thoroughly explore and debate various strategies, potential scenarios, and their implications for the Hyuga''s role on the Eastern Front. This initial istion would allow them to craft a solid foundational strategy, which they could then refine and adapt based on broader consultations during the next Hyuga Council meetings.


    The conversation deepened, touching upon the broader context of Konoha''s chances in the impending war. Hiashi brought a strategic perspective into the discussion, "Konoha is the vige with the strongest rtive power in the entire world. It controls approximately 40% of the world''s shinobi forces... Therefore it should be more than two times stronger than any other big shinobi vige on average...", He stated, outlining the vige''s formidable martial capabilities.


    He continued, drawing parallels with the vige''s economic position, "Simrly, its partner nation, the Land of Fire, is simrly positioned in terms of economic power and poption.",


    This statement highlighted the symbiotic rtionship between Konoha''s military strength and the Land of Fire''s economic robustness, suggesting that the vige''s war efforts were underpinned by significant resources and strategic depth.


    Hiashi''s voice carried a gravity that underscored the unprecedented challenges Konoha faced, "Typically, even in defeat, the sheer might of Konoha has shielded its very existence from threat.",


    "Our losses were confined to interests, never our survival. But thendscape has shifted dramatically this time...", He exined, hinting at the dire circumstances looming over their heads.


    He borated on the strategic predicament even further, "The other found great shinobi viges, without exceptions, are poised to mobilize the majority of their forces against us.",


    "We are leftpletely alone without allies among the great shinobi viges, and our customary strategy of divide and conquer has stumbled, as everyone was drawn by the scent of vulnerability amid our internal discord.",


    Hiashi''s gaze met those of Hiashi and Takumi, conveying the solemnity of his next words, "For us three, this war marks our debut on such a stage, but it bears the weight of possibly being our final act. We are on the precipice of what could be the most brutal world war in history."


    Takumi, the most experienced among them, then added a strategic insight to the discussion, offering a sliver of optimism in their dire outlook, "The only good thing is that our faction has managed to win the fight for the Suna and Kiri fronts, against the weakest and second weakest of the ninja viges.",


    "This should, in theory, present us with a somewhat less challenging battlefield...", He noted, acknowledging the strategic advantage their faction held in the overall war effort.


    However, Takumi was quick to temper this optimism with a dose of realism. "But, if the other faction suffers aplete defeat on their fronts, it would still spell disaster for us all. A loss on any front is a loss for Konoha as a whole, and could severely impact our overall position in the war...",


    "Therefore, we must hope for a bnce where they face setbacks but do not lose entirely. It''s a delicate bnce, but essential for maintaining our overall strength and position..."


    "I wouldn''t worry about them, I think they could hold on for a while. There is Minato''s unit, which will probably be heavily utilized on their fronts. And I also have a hunch that Minato himself will get considerably stronger during this war.",


    "Also, Shinsuke, Danzo, and their organizations probably won''t be dealing with those covert operations full-time; they could go in and help. We still don''t know the extent of Kushina''s power as a Jinchuriki, as she never went all out in the past...",


    "I think that they could hold on until we manage to secure victories against our opponents. That would be the ideal scenario. We win over our opponents, while they struggle with their opponents, and then we help them win too, getting all the merits for us...", Hikari chimed in.


    Hikari, with his extensive knowledge of warfare in this world, understood the strategic nuances that governed the deployment of shinobi forces during times of conflict like this.


    Having studied the dynamics of war from a young age, he was well aware that no hidden vige could afford tomit all its shinobi to the frontline. A significant portion of their forces always had to remain behind for defense, dispersed inside of their own countries.


    This strategy was crucial in a world where a single jonin could wreak havoc on civilian poptions, assassinate daimyos, and nobles, and cause widespread destruction.


    Despite existing agreements aimed at preventing such attacks, the reality of warfare often saw these rules bent or broken. As a result, viges had to maintain a delicate bnce, still keeping some shinobi shinobi back in their vige, and stationing shinobi across their entire countries and important locations to deter or respond to enemy infiltrations and assaults.


    Therefore, it was not that strange that Hiruzen kept some of his closest forces there, but it was strange that there were so many of them. That''s why Hikari theorized that it is a tactic used by him to say that they are inside the Land of Fire and Amegakure, but probably also moving and helping their own fronts entirely, which was better to not be so publicized, after all, Anbu''s and Root''s role is generally to not fight those frontal kinds of battles and generally should be more working for the collective interests of the entire vige not just two Divisions.


    What truly caught Hikari off guard whenparing the nature of warfare in this world to that of his previous life on Earth was the scale at which conflicts unfolded. In his past existence, wars were characterized by the mobilization of millions, leveraging technology and sheer numbers in vast, open battlefields.


    Here, however, the dynamics were starkly different. The conflicts in this shinobi world were defined by engagements involving rtively few¡ªyet exceedingly powerful¡ªindividuals.


    Learning that their own front would be manned by just over a thousand shinobi was a revtion to Hikari, contrasting sharply with the massive armies of his previous life.


    This world prioritized the skills of superhuman shinobi, who could alter the course of battles through their abilities alone. Warfare here leaned towards stealth and strategy, with guerri tactics, ambushes, and precise, targeted strikes being the norm.


    The emphasis was not on overwhelming numbers but on the strategic deployment of these skilled warriors, each capable of feats far beyond any ordinary soldier. This approach to conflict, favoring smaller scale but highly impactful engagements, underscored the unique nature of shinobi warfare and the critical role individual power yed in deciding oues.

 93. Warfare Wisdom: Planning for the Eastern Front (2)

    93. Warfare Wisdom: nning for the Eastern Front (2)


    After delving into discussions on broader themes of warfare, the geopoliticalndscape, and Konoha''s overall readiness for the impending conflict, the trio shifted their focus more directly to their immediate concern: the strategy for the Eastern Front they were tasked to lead.


    To facilitate this detailed strategic nning, they spread out a map across the table,plemented by various figures representing troops, terrain, and key locations. This visual aid was crucial for their nning, allowing them to conceptualize their strategies with precision.


    Hiashi, taking the lead in this segment of their meeting, turned to the Fifth Elder, Takumi, with a question that would set the foundation for their tactical discussions, "Fifth Elder, how do you think we should structure our front?",


    He inquired. This question was not just about troop deployment but epassed broader considerations of defensive positions, potential points of attack, and how best to leverage their unique strengths against the enemy.


    Takumi, drawing from his wealth of experience,id out aprehensive strategy for structuring their forces along the Eastern Front.


    "I believe it''s best to divide our forces into three primary groups, each responsible for a specific segment of our front: the southern, central, and northern areas. The northern group should position itself in the Land of Hot Water, utilizing it as a strategic buffer between the Land of Fire and the Land of Water.",


    "This location can serve as a critical point of defense and control...", He exined, pinpointing the geographical advantage they could leverage.


    Continuing, Takumi detailed the positioning of the central forces, "The central segment should be firmly established in the Land of Fire, specifically along the coastline facing the Land of Water, near the former Uzushiogakure. Given the sea''s separation, this area''s defense is crucial."


    Lastly, Takumi addressed the southern strategy, "The southern force should focus on contesting the Land of Water''s continental territory. This small but strategically important area represents a significant vulnerability for them, given its istion from their mainndmass.",


    "By intensifying our efforts here, we can exploit this weakness, leveraging our continental advantage to pressure them further."


    Hikari, weighing in with his tactical insight, supported Takumi''s framework with a strategic emphasis on the Southern Front, "Considering the geography and strategic value, our strongest force should be deployed to the Southern Front...",


    He suggested, analyzing the mapid out before them, "If we seed in infiltrating and seizing control of the Land of Water''s Continental territory, it would not only be a significant victory in itself but also serve as a pivotalunching point for future operations against their ind territories, including the main ind."


    His finger traced the critical points on the map as he spoke, highlighting the potential routes of advancement and areas of strategic interest.


    Hikari''s suggestion to prioritize the Southern Front was rooted in a long-term vision for the war, aiming to establish a foothold that could dramatically shift the bnce of power in Konoha''s favor.


    By focusing their most capable forces on this critical juncture, they could create a domino effect, opening up new opportunities for offensive maneuvers across the Land of Water''s territories.


    This strategic approach underscored the importance of not just winning battles but positioning themselves advantageously for the entirety of the war.


    Hikari''s analysisplemented Takumi''s initial structuring, together forming a cohesive strategy that leveraged geographical advantages for maximum impact.


    Hiashi, after listening to both Takumi and Hikari''s analyses, nodded in agreement, "Fifth Elder, Hikari, I agree with your takes. Then it seems that this Southern part of our front should be left to Hikari too, as he is the strongest one amongst us...", He concluded. This decision, while significant, was made with confidence, reflecting Hisashi''s trust in Hikari.


    Hiashi, with a clear sense ofmand and strategic oversight, continued to delineate responsibilities among them, "Fifth Elder, you should oversee the operations in the Land of Hot Water area. It''s important to note that we might face Kumogakure shinobi there, so preparedness for such encounters is also crucial...", He advised, additionally highlighting.


    "I will take on the responsibility for the central part of the front and also act as the central coordinator between your two groups...", Hiashi dered, affirming his role as the linchpin.


    As Hiashi outlined the distribution of their forces, Hikari reflected on the unique nature of warfare in this shinobi world once again, contemting what it means for him to actually ''lead'' a part of their front.


    He recognized a stark contrast between therge-scale, fixed battles of his previous world and the fluid, dynamic confrontations of the shinobindscape.


    In this world, where a few thousand shinobi, on average, could be engaged on each front, between the viges, the approach to warfare was fundamentally different.


    The absence of fixed positions or fortifications on the frontlines meant that the battle strategy relied heavily on mobility and adaptability.


    Understanding that the threat of enemy shinobi infiltrating one''s territory was a constant concern, Hikari appreciated the necessity of spreading forces out in a wide.


    This formation,posed of numerous smaller squadrons dispersed across the front, was designed to create oveppingyers of defense.


    Each team, particrly bolstered by sensory shinobi, yed a crucial role in maintaining the integrity of this defensivework. Without them, everything would fall apart quickly, so Hikari now understood that this was also another helpful role of civilian shinobi of this world.


    However, even though it was good for the vige, that shinobi specialization had the most casualties on the front then because they could barely fight, as they spent decades only developing their sensing of chakra.


    These sensory shinobi, with their ability to detect breaches in the formation, were indispensable for early warning and maintaining situational awareness, using special res andmunication scrolls to then notify everyone else, toe and help if needed, especially if it was contestion around some strategic objective.


    Hikari realized the vital importance of sensory, mostly civilian-origin, shinobi in this context. Their specialized training focused nearly entirely on enhancing their sensing capabilities, supporting their role in surveince and reconnaissance overbat.


    Despite their broader sensing rangepared to the precise but more limited scope of the Hyuga''s Byakugan, sensory shinobi served as the long-range eyes of the army. In contrast, the Hyuga, for example, with their Byakugan, excelled in closer-range reconnaissance, offering detailed intelligence within their line of sight right before actual engagements.


    Hikari further understood the critical importance of pursuit and counter-maneuvers in shinobi warfare. The nature ofbat in this world demanded not just readiness to fight but also agility in response¡ªboth in chasing down an enemy and evading pursuit.


    If an enemy managed to slip past the initial line of defense, it wasn''t merely a matter of defense but an immediate shift to offensive tracking.


    Scouts and sensory-type shinobi would be rapidly mobilized to locate the infiltrator, employing a blend of pursuit and strategic counter-maneuvers designed to either directly engage the enemy or cleverly guide them into prepared traps and ambushes.


    This approach underscored the shinobi forces'' training in adaptability; they were drilled in the art of constant movement, ensuring they were never static targets.


    The very structure of their deployment allowed for quick repositioning, ensuring that units could be redeployed based on thetest intelligence on enemy movements.


    Such fluidity in tactics ensured that avoiding a direct engagement didn''t trante to a tactical advantage for the enemy.


    Instead, it might lead them into a more disadvantageous position, caught in a meticulously nned counter-attack.


    Hikari''s realization highlighted the depth of strategic nning inherent to shinobi warfare, where every evasion and pursuit was a calcted move within arger game of deception and strategy.


    The emphasis on mobility, surveince, and the strategic use of terrain and sensory abilities painted a picture of a battlefield that was ever-changing, where victories were secured not just by brute strength but through cunning, agility, and the intelligent use of resources and terrain to one''s advantage. It was just like what was expected from the force called "ninjas".


    The unique capabilities of Minato''s teleportation jutsu, in Hikari''s analysis, yed a pivotal role in disrupting traditional shinobi warfare tactics.


    Minato''s mastery of the Flying Raijin made the conventional lines and strategies of engagement virtually irrelevant to him.


    With the ability to appear and strike anywhere at will, he could bypass enemy defenses and control the flow of battle, turning the tide in Konoha''s favor seemingly single-handedly during this Third Ninja World War in the original story.


    Recognizing this, Hikari saw an urgent need to establish and secure merits and glory for his faction before Minato could fully develop and utilize his teleportation to its utmost potential.


    "Then you two will also be the Vice Commanders of our Divisions...", Then Hiashi began further defining the roles within their strategic framework.


    He proceeded to detail the structure of other leadership roles within their front down the chain ofmand.


    He named Tsume Inuzuka, Shibi Aburame, Ryosuke Gekko, and Isamu Sumi as leaders within their respective areas, leveraging the strengths and unique abilities of their ns in the war. Meanwhile, the remaining small n shinobi, of their faction, went to the Uchiha''s Suna front.


    That was also why, for example, Hikari, Hiashi, and Takumi, all, secretly understood that theposition of their forces offered a strategic advantage over the Hokage''s Faction in this war for both their and Uchiha''s front.


    While the Hokage''s Faction could boast arger number of shinobi overall, their force was ''bottom-heavy,''prising more civilians and lower-ranking shinobi, with only n shinobi being from the Yamanaka, Nara, and Akimichi ns.


    This discrepancy in the distribution of power, especially in terms of the number of Jonin, was a critical factor that the trio believed could be used to tilt the odds in their favor during this war, fortunately, and why they nned to even try and influence the other frontster.

 94. Orochimaru and Danzo: A Clandestine Alliance (1)

    94. Orochimaru and Danzo: A ndestine Alliance (1)


    A few weekster, as Konoha ramped up its preparations for the world war in a mobilization effort of historic proportions, a ndestine meeting took ce deep within one of the vige''s most notorious locales.


    The Forty-Fourth Training Ground, better known as the Forest of Death, was infamous for its perilous terrain, teeming with gigantic and often venomous flora and fauna, making it an ideal location for keeping secrets hidden from prying eyes.


    Beneath the deceptive chaos of the Forest of Deathy abyrinth of dark, eerie hallways leading to a highly confidential research center.


    This facility, operated under themand of Orochimaru, was utilized for a range of secretive experiments, forming the core of his newly established ''semi-secret'' division.


    Theb was staffed with his trusted assistants, diligently working on advanced research projects far from the light of day.


    However, the secrecy of this facility extended even further. Unbeknownst to the Hokage and concealed from all official records, there was a hidden, underground passageway that connected Orochimaru''s hidden research center directly to Danzo''s Root headquarters located deep inside one of the parts of the Hokage Rock''s Mountain.


    Inside the Hokage''s Rock Mountain, a little closer to the vige was the more fancy Anbu HQ connected to the Hokage Building.


    It was within this shadowy corridor that Orochimaru and Danzo chose to meet, away from the watchful eyes of their allies and enemies alike.


    Danzo''s voice carried a hint of irony as he addressed Orochimaru in the dimly lit secrecy of their meeting room, "Pity, you just basically established this new facilitypletely and you have to go to war now right away without fully utilizing it..."


    Orochimaru, everposed and calcting, let a slight smile y across his lips in response to Danzo''sment,


    "Well, the facility isn''t entirely dependent on my presence. I''ve ensured it''s staffed withpetent researchers, and the teacher has also promised more support than ever before...", He said with a slight, knowing smirk.


    He then leaned slightly forward, lowering his voice, adding ayer of gravity to his words, "And to be honest, it is even better that some of the more dangerous parts of my research, like kidnapping and human experimentation, are conducted outside of Konoha, especially during such politically sensitive times...",


    Orochimaru''s expression then carried a hint of malevolence as he continued to outline his ns, his eyes glinting with the prospect of expanding his research under the cover of war,


    "And not only that, additionally, the teacher himself has covertly acquiesced to those kinds of experimentations, and will even help me, provided they are conducted outside of Konoha.",


    "Thus, I n to establish a simr secret research center in Kusagakure, which will also serve as themand center for the Western Front I am leading, If everything goes well for us...",


    He paused, the shadows of the room seeming to deepen around him as he spoke, "We already have Land of Rain nearly secured to be neutral to friendly during this war, which means that the neighboring ''Grass'' will be the whole center of our focus for my Division.",


    "So, If I can cement our control over Kusagakure during the war quickly, it would provide the perfect yground for the ''secret and ambiguous'' parts of my research alongside the bulk of research still being done here openly; It is something like simply a match made in heaven...", He said, his voice low andced with a sinister undertone.


    This revtion revealed not just his strategic mind but also his willingness to exploit wartime chaos for his ambitions, pushing the boundaries of ethics in pursuit of his inscrutable goals.


    Danzo responded then, his voice low and persuasive as he saw an opportunity to deepen his involvement in Orochimaru''s ndestine activities for some reason,


    "Establishing such a system inside a foreign territory definitely won''t be an easy task...", He acknowledged, his tone suggesting the gravity of the undertaking.


    "Why don''t you let me and my ''Root'' help you? We are perfect for that...", Danzo offered, his eyes narrowing slightly as he proposed his involvement, "Hiruzen can grant you permissions or funds, but we can truly help you with everything ''on the ground'' to get it up and running."


    Orochimaru''s gaze sharpened, his instinct for caution and calctioning to the forefront as he addressed Danzo''s previous offer. The faint, sinister smile faded into a more guarded expression, "And what do you want in return, Danzo...?",


    He asked slowly, his voice tinged with suspicion. His narrowed, snake-like eyes studied Danzo intently, seeking to discern the true intentions behind the ''generous'' proposal.


    Danzo''s posture opened up as he spoke, gesturing with open arms, aiming to convey sincerity and openness in his proposal,


    "I just want sincere cooperation with you...", He continued, his voice steady and seemingly honest, "I want to establish Root''s foreign research facility right where you also build your own. And I want us to sincerely cooperate going forward.",


    Heid out his vision for their coboration, speaking of mutual benefit and shared goals, "I will help you with the research you were tasked by Hiruzen, in terms of procuring everything you need and everything else.",


    "In return, you will assist me with some of my own research projects, mainly concerning that jutsu you''ve also previously explored and I finally managed to obtain info about from Hiruzen...",


    Danzo exined, referencing a specific technique that always piqued his interest¡ªone that Orochimaru had dabbled in before.


    "I just need some of your initial observations written down first of what you discovered, and then asional help in then Kusagakure for my researchers...", He added, specifying the nature of the help he expected from Orochimaru.


    Danzo''s tone was earnest, aiming to reassure Orochimaru that his intentions were focused on coboration rather than control. Danzo knew exactly how crucial Orochimaru''s help could be, not only due to his awesome intellect but also his long history with the technique.


    It would cut quite a big part of the learning curve for Danzo and his subordinates, as Orochimaru got that technique from Hiruzen, as a reward forpleting some S-level missions, and had it since decades ago already.


    Orochimaru''s tone took on a note of intrigue as he delved deeper into the specifics of the jutsu that Danzo was interested in,


    "Yeah, I understand you, Danzo... The Edo Tensei... Is truly a fascinating concept, full of potential. It was the most fascinating and ''broken'' jutsu concept I''ve encountered thus far...", He acknowledged, recognizing the potential power and the bizarre nature inherent to the technique in question.


    "However, that is precisely the problem¡ªit is more a ''concept'' than a fully developed jutsu. It requires heavy human experimentation to progress it a step further...", Orochimaru exined, highlighting the dark necessities that such research entailed.


    His gaze narrowed slightly as he continued, "It''s just that previously I never had the permission or resources to conduct something like that...", His voice trailed off for a moment, suggesting the frustrations and limitations he had previously faced.


    "But, it seems you really managed to convince the teacher to give it to you now finally? Is it due to all the sky-high pressure that has been mounting on our faction? And his position...?",


    Hemented with a ''knowing'' expression, it appears he used a simr tactic for his own research permissions and funds from the Hokage previously, just like Danzo hinted at too.


    Danzo responded with a nod, his voice carrying a tone of satisfaction from the recent developments, "Yes, Hiruzen has fully agreed and has already provided me with all the necessary information about it. So, are you on board?", He continued, reinforcing the benefits of their cooperation, "We will share all the findings about the jutsu with you as well...",


    His offer was strategically framed to appeal to Orochimaru''s thirst for knowledge and advancement in his forbidden arts, presenting it as a mutually beneficial arrangement.


    Orochimaru''s response came with a sly smile, also mentioning the deep roots of their past coborations, "Of course, how could I say no to that? And weren''t we old partners in Root already up until recently..?", He could be even seen as the vice-leaders there until recently as the Orochimaru''s ventured on his path as Hiruzen allowed him establish this department.


    As he considered Danzo''s proposal, Orochimaru''s mind also raced through the broader implications of the research on Edo Tensei. He recognized not only the inherent value of mastering such a jutsu but also its potential to significantly enhance his other ventures, particrly those involving the maniption of souls.


    This realization deepened his interest in the coboration, viewing it as a pivotal opportunity to advance his understanding and maniption of life and death, which could revolutionize his other experiments, goals, and broaden the scope of his influence in the shinobi world.


    "Then, it''s settled, Orochimaru. Let''s make great progress together. I will also provide you maximum help with your Hashirama''s cells research...", He dered, an edge of enthusiasm barely contained in his voice as he considered the vast potential of theirbined efforts.


    As the power of the Anti-Hokage coalition grew and the disy of the Hyuga Patriarch still lingered, Hiruzen recognized the vulnerabilities in his own position, to this extent, for the first time. Faced with this mounting pressure, he made strategic concessions, long-coveted, to both Danzo and Orochimaru, at the same time, aiming to fortify his faction''s capabilities.


    Despite his reservations and a lesser degree of trust, for the two in question, due to various reasons, mostly to do with their personality types,pared to other members of his faction like Jiraiya and others for example, Hiruzen still had a long-standing personal connection with both Danzo and Orochimaru, at the end of the day, which influenced his decision.


    Recognizing the necessity of bolstering their faction''s and interest group''s power to counter the growing threats, Hiruzen agreed to support their ambitions for advanced research¡ªventures he had previously been reluctant to authorize due to their ''ethical implications''.


    Danzo was given the green light to delve deeper into the secrets of Edo Tensei, while Orochimaru was allowed to pursue research involving Hashirama Senju''s gics.


    This marked a significant shift for Hiruzen, who, for the first time, set aside his usual ''principled stance'', or better said ''sanctimonious cover'', that was constantly ''turned on''to the outside world, even his closest associates, to engage in morally ambiguous activities.


    He authorized Orochimaru to exhume Hashirama''s grave to retrieve his DNA¡ªa move fraught with personal and ethical conflicts, considering Hashirama was not only the vige founder but also a rtive of his own disciple, Tsunade, and Hiruzen''s own mentor. This decision underscored the desperation Hiruzen felt to maintain his leadership and ''safeguard the vige'' amidst an increasingly hostile politicalndscape. He was willing to push the boundaries of conventional morality to enhance their strength and ensure their survival.


    This shift in strategy was a testament to the severe pressures he faced, driving him to secure any advantage possible to counteract the schemes of his rivals and solidify his position within the vige.


    Internally now, Danzo felt a surge of satisfaction. He was already nning to mobilize Root''s resources, intending to push his personnel to work tirelessly¡ªday and night¡ªto refine and enhance the Edo Tensei technique beyond its original, initial design by Tobirama as soon as possible to be useful on time before the Konoha perishes from their enemies in his opinion.


    Danzo was acutely aware and was familiar with the jutsu''s current limitations¡ªits slight impracticality in battle, the reduced strength of the summoned shinobi,pared to when they were actually alive, and the restriction of only being able to summon one shinobi.


    Yet, he envisioned a future where these shorings were ovee, transforming Edo Tensei into a formidable tool of war and control,


    ''If mastered sessfully, this jutsu could be my ticket to unparalleled power...'', Danzo thought, his strategic mind already plotting the applications of such a powerful tool.


    Unlike theplex biological maniptions involved with Hashirama''s cells, Edo Tensei was a jutsu¡ªa technique rooted in the mystical and martial aspects of the shinobi world, areas where Danzo felt a confident mastery.


    This confidence bolstered hismitment to the project, driven by the belief that mastering this jutsu would not only cement his personnel power, help him defeat all of the internal ''enemies'' of the vige, but also secure a significant advantage for their vige in terms of the global positioning, preparing it for his grand goal of conquering all the other viges.


    Danzo was well aware that Hiruzen had not fully grasped the vast potential of the Edo Tensei jutsu. If Hiruzen had truly understood its capabilities, he likely would have taken a more active role in its development rather than delegating the research almost exclusively to him. This oversight presented him with a strategic opportunity.


    By the time Danzo mastered the technique, even if Hiruzenter pressured him to share the research findings and secrets, after realizing how valuable it was, it would be toote for that as Danzo thought that he would be even stronger than Hiruzen at that time.


    But, even if not and Hiruzen pressures him sessfully, it would then take considerable time for Hiruzen himself, or anyone else, to learn and apply theplex jutsu effectively, and also gauge right from wrong from the information provided to them.


    During this period, Danzo nned to leverage his newfound knowledge to significantly enhance his standing within the vige, potentially shifting the bnce of power in his favor more than ever before. This strategic advantage could enable him to solidify his influence.


    Danzo''s mind was already racing ahead to future possibilities as he considered the broader implications of his coboration with Orochimaru, ''If everything goes to n, I might even obtain some of those Senju cells transnted into me, at ater date, after the research and technological breakthroughs get finished... That would truly make me ''untouchable'' then...'',


    He mused inwardly, his thoughts tinged with optimism and a hint of cunning. That would also go quite well with and allow him to summon more shinobi under hismand during fights with the Edo Tensei.


    However, Danzo''s brief moment of satisfaction was swiftly undercut by Orochimaru''s intense scrutiny and direct proposition.


    Leaning forward, his demeanor a calcted blend of sincerity and strategic foresight, Orochimaru addressed him directly,


    "Danzo, could you perhaps start looking into acquiring the Byakugan or Sharingan kekkei genkai as soon as possible with your organization? Or better said just when are you nning to do that? You''re an expert in such matters, unlike me, and besides, my role in this war constrains me...",

 95. Orochimaru and Danzo: A Clandestine Alliance (2)

    95. Orochimaru and Danzo: A ndestine Alliance (2)


    He stated, his voice low yetpelling, "And I presume I don''t need to exin the urgency of this request to someone of your understanding... Knowing you, you are probably already onto it... Not that you had any ''reservations'' about those two ns ever before, but now you have even more reasons than ever to act boldly...",


    He continued, his words underscored with a serious tone, "It''s evident by this point that these bloodlines are not just powerful but hold the keys to unimaginable strength, they are full of strange and seemingly endless mysteries the more I think about everything I thought I knew so far recently. In this shinobi world, everything is about bloodlines... There are clear limits that can''t be crossed no matter your intellect level or unique technique you possess.",


    "Everything else, all the jutsu I have ever learned, pales inparison to the raw power exhibited by the Hyuga patriarch, not to mention the legendary might of Hashirama and Madara recorded in historical records. This is the new understanding that I arrived at...",


    Orochimaru paused briefly, ensuring his next words were clearly understood, "Therefore, If you expect me to share the fruits of my hard-won research on Senju cells discreetly, without the teacher''s authorization, since you probably wouldn''t get it from him, you''ll need to offer something ofparable worth to me in return, such as either of those unique eyes...",


    "Keep in mind, I''m confident that at this point there are not many people up to my level of scientific literacy, not to mention now that I focus on that full time. So, I know my worth.",


    "Powerful bloodline powers for powerful bloodline powers, that''s a fair exchange. This is non-negotiable...", His gaze prating, cutting through any pretense as heid it out.


    His expression was particrly greedy and envious the entire time he mentioned thoserge shinobi ns'' bloodline matters.


    Danzo responded with a tone of pragmatic understanding, acknowledging theplexities involved in fulfilling Orochimaru''s request, "Even I recognize the formidable challenge of acquiring Byakugan, particrly now.",


    The Main Branch of the Hyuga isrgely staying out of the war, with only three members participating, and the Hyuga Patriarch remains in Konoha now to protect the others. It''s nearly an impossible task...", He exined, setting realistic expectations.


    However, Danzo''s expression shifted slightly as he continued, revealing a glimmer of strategic intent, "As for the Uchiha, the situation might be more favorable. I''ve long had an interest in the Sharingan and have been preparing for an opportunity such as this war to explore it further. I already have some ideas on how to proceed...", He revealed, hinting at ns already in motion.


    Danzo then made a specific offer, aligning closely with Orochimaru''s interests, "If you sessfully master those Hashirama cells for transntation and are willing to transnt them onto me, I could provide you with a pair of Sharingan If I get one...", He proposed.


    Danzo''s offer reflected a calcted risk and a deep investment in the power dynamics shaped by kekkei genkai, positioning both him and Orochimaru at a potential advantage in the broader shinobindscape.


    Danzo''s tone turned earnest as he continued,ying out a broader strategic vision that went beyond mere transactional exchanges, "However, there is no need for such a conditional rtionship between us. We are, after all, on the same boat.",


    "You should already know that Hiruzen recently decided to finally position Minato fully as his sessor, believing he has more potential than you. At this point, personal rtionships and personalities are useless, only the strength matters for our overall interest faction''s well-being and that''s why he chose him in the end, as the next Hokage instead of you seemingly.",


    "It''s pretty evident, that he had met him many times during these war preparations, almost every day, and has even convinced Jiraiya to take Minato to Mount Myoboku to train in Sage Mode, and Minato''s mastery of the Flying Raijin also increases by the day. Soon, he mightpletely overshadow you without a possibility of aeback in allpetitive areas...",


    He leaned in closer, his voice lowering to a conspiratorial whisper, "If you aim to grow stronger, both in terms of your strength and your influence, we need to unite. Moreover, I would prefer you as the next Hokage, not Minato.",


    "His idealism and leniency towards the major ns, and potential external threats, make him too ''nice'' for such aplex role. We need someone with a more ''pragmatic'' outlook, someone cold and calcting, like you.",


    Danzo''s words were carefully chosen, designed to appeal to Orochimaru''s ambitions and fears, forging a deeper alliance based on shared goals and mutual concerns about the future leadership of Konoha.


    Danzo''s strategic considerations were also deeply influenced by his personal standing within the vige hierarchy.


    He was acutely aware that Minato''s ascension to Hokage could jeopardize his position, given Minato''s less-than-favorable view of him at worst, and neutral at best, impression of him, not anything like the close, life-long personal rtionship he shared with Hiruzen for example.


    This made the young shinobi''s potential leadership a direct threat to his influence and operations within Konoha.


    "Minato''s ideals and his perception of my methods do not align. If he ascends to Hokage, it would significantly weaken my position within the vige...", Danzo confessed, his toneden with concern over the future politicalndscape.


    "Therefore, I see you, Orochimaru, as a more suitable candidate for Hokage. However, for you to be a viable candidate, you must grow significantly in strength and gather more merits, and I will do my best to help you in return for you increasing my standing once you be the next Hokage many years in the future thanks to my help.", Danzo stated, outlining the necessity for Orochimaru to enhance his public and political profile within the vige first.


    Danzo''s n involved more than just supporting Orochimaru''s present research endeavors; it required elevating his status to that of a war hero of his front, capable of wielding both power and influence¡ªa leader who could eventually be seen as a legitimate contender for Hokage after Hiruzen steps down. This involved orchestrating situations where Orochimaru could demonstrate his capabilities and loyalty to the vige, thereby increasing his appeal.


    This proposal showcased that even within a single faction like Hiruzen''s broad faction, there were deeper, vagueyers of internal divisions and sub-factions. Each member had their own goals and strategies, which often led to conflicting agendas under the surface.


    Danzo''s efforts to position Orochimaru as Hokage, contrary to Hiruzen''s current support for Minato, highlighted theseplex internal politics. It showed that alliances within the vige were not just about shared goals but also about individual ambitions and tactical maneuvers.


    "Very well, Danzo...", Orochimaru finally said, his voice tinged with a calcted calm, "I agree to this proposal as well but on an equal basis. We shall advance together in this venture. If Hiruzen sees more potential in Minato for now, then let him.",


    "He will be in for a great surpriseter. But, you, if you bet right at this time, may achieve even more power than currently in the vige.", However, after saying that Orochimaru sighed in disappointment at his teacher''s choice.


    Orochimaru also felt a sting of indignation about Hiruzen''s recent more subtle preference for Minato, after the Hyuga''s Patriarch''s great show of power back there and hence the indirect suggestion that Minato held more potential in terms of personal power for these ''hard times'', as Hiruzen started getting closer and closer to him right after that meeting ended back then.


    In an era where power determined both status and survival, Orochimaru was acutely aware that appearing weak was not an option now.


    He recognized that his ambitions¡ªparticrly his research into immortality and ascending the hierarchy of the shinobi world¡ªdepended heavily on having both funding and autonomy.


    To secure these, bing the next Hokage of Konoha was essential; without that position, he risked being marginalized, and forced to live on the fringes of the ninja world like a stray.


    Orochimaru also understood the political dynamics at y, that''s why he agreed so easily to join hands with Danzo. Even if Hiruzen''s faction were to triumph over adversaries like the Hyuga and Uchiha, the victory would be hollow for him if Minato were to assume leadership.


    Under Minato''s likely more stringent oversight, Orochimaru''s controversial research could be halted entirely, forcing him to rebel next and live like a rebel shinobi for the rest of his life.


    And for now, Danzo appeared as the most logical and even avable partner for himself, as everyone else, Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, and other Advisors, were already on Minato''s boat entirely or supported Minato simply because he was Hiruzen''s choice like the two Advisors.


    This contemtion drove Orochimaru to delve deeper into the specifics of his uing research. He knew that this was crucial for all of his goals and even survival in this kind of ''external'' situation, whereas pressure mounted from both inside and outside the vige.


    The allure of researching Hashirama Senju''s cells and DNAy in the potential to harness the legendary shinobi''s remarkable physical traits, his extraordinary regenerative abilities, vast chakra reserves, and even the unique Wood Release theoretically.


    Yet, after having procured such valuable gic material from Hashirama''s grave, under approval from his teacher, and already conducted preliminary observations, Orochimaru realized that awakening Hashirama''s Wood Release through transntation was aplex challenge, potentially requiring the alignment of multiple, still mysterious to him, factors.


    Given theseplexities, Orochimaru had already begun to consider alternative applications for the Senju cells. His body, though powerful, was not naturally suited to withstand the rigors of Sage Mode, from the Ryuchi Cave, a state he aspired to achieve to amplify his power, but was recently told that he was unqualified in terms of his general physique.


    Now that Minato was about to learn the Toad Sage Mode, possibly even the perfect version unlike Jiraiya, the pressure was mounting on him.


    And that was also the only power he considered could now rival those exceptional bloodline-type abilities and essentially help him fight his ''pre-programmed fate'' as a shinobi that many civilian-origin shinobi like him got stuck at and then get ''eaten'' in this kind of world over time.


    Thus, he nned to use the Senju cells to try and enhance his physiological resilience andpatibility with natural energy, thereby paving the way for him to master the perfect Snake Sage Mode as soon as possible to give him the qualifications to fight for his standing. But, Orochimaru''s ambitions extended beyond just the enhancement of his physical abilities.


    He also nned to continue to refine his formidable, unique jutsu, the ''Living Corpse Reincarnation'', for his immortality efforts, as well as the ''Edo Tensei'', in coboration with Danzo, for his further understanding of souls.


    Moreover, he was keen on exploring the secrets of the Sharingan, and bloodline powers in general, should Danzo seed in acquiring a pair for him.


    His curiosity was piqued by the potential to unlock new levels of power by integrating these diverse branches of research¡ªspanning souls, gics, cells, natural energy, and more.


    Orochimaru was further intrigued recently by the possibility of creating a synergistic ''fusion'' of these various elements which could lead to unprecedented advancements in his overall capabilities and influence.


    However, on the outside, after formalizing their cooperation, Danzo and Orochimaru continued their strategic nning, talking with a calctive precision, being on the same ''wavelength''pletely, simr in personality, now focusing on how to position Orochimaru as the next Hokage sessfully.


    They discussed strengthening Orochimaru''s power base, particrly through hismand of the Western Front during the war.


    They envisioned building a loyal cadre of shinobi under his leadership, a force that could support his bid for Hokage even after the conflict ended and the time for new Hokage elections approached potentially.


    Danzo and Orochimaru then spent considerable time more in the shadowy confines of their underground meeting ce, meticulously nning each step of this ambitious endeavor.

 96. Final Farewells with Everyone and Sakumo’s Wisdom

    96. Final Farewells with Everyone and Sakumo¡¯s Wisdom


    On the day of his deployment, Hikari''s morning was filled with farewells as Konoha''s mobilization nearedpletion and he was set to go alongside the rest of his division soon.


    At the Hyuga npound, he shared a particrly emotional goodbye with Hinome after also parting with everyone else he knew well there.


    Her worry was palpable, leading to their first and prolonged hug¡ªa gesture that spoke volumes about their ever-evolving rtionship.


    Hikari assured her that they would stay in constantmunication, updating each other about their research and personal well-being through letters throughout the war.


    Next, Hikari met secretly with Kiyomi at their usual spot. She was also about to be deployed to the Southern Front, and her demeanor was unusually subdued,cking her typical yfulness, and was very serious and perhaps even slightly anxious.


    Hikari did his best to lift her spirits, first saying that he was confident in her abilities and that she would perform well and had nothing to worry about, and then managing to draw a blush and a mumbled response from her before she hastily departed.


    He also promised her that he might find a way to visit her front too if the opportunity arose,and everything went well with his own front''s operations, as she was running away, hinting at a desire to ensure their paths would cross again soon.


    Finally, Hikari now visited the Hatake residence to bid farewell to Sakumo and young Kakashi.


    "Hikari, listen carefully...", After some casual talk, Sakumo sighed slightly and then began imparting some wisdom from his experience from participating in the previous shinobi world war, for Hikari, who was leaving for one now as well, so his voice, turning low and serious,


    "Hikari, I know how strong you''ve gotten, but please remember, during the war, leverage your allies as well. Shinobi warfare is not just about individual prowess; it''s about how effectively you can work as part of a team. Combined tactics, where you synchronize your jutsu with others, can increase your overall odds of survival and sess more than you can believe...",


    Sakumo continued, "Remember, always conserve your strength at all times. Do not waste chakra onrge-scale techniques unless absolutely necessary, as you could have literally hundreds of opponents at the same timeing against you, one after another, so no matter how strong you are, could falter simply due to attrition, I also have experience of this first hand. Precision strikes to vital points are often more effective than the shiest jutsu.",


    "Never let your guard down. Even when the battle seems won, that''s when enemies often be most dangerous. Always be prepared for a counterattack.",


    Finally, he offered ast piece of tactical advice, "And when you strike, strike hard and fast. End the battle before the enemy can fully react or recover. Protracted fights drain resources and morale. Swift victories often save more lives than prolonged skirmishes."


    Sakumo sped Hikari''s shoulder, giving it a firm squeeze, "Use these principles wisely. They''re not just tactics; they''re your lifeline. Stay sharp out there, and stay safe, Hikari-kun, I expect to see youe back alive and bring further achievements for our joint ambitions."


    Hikari nodded resolutely, deeply absorbing the tactical wisdom imparted by Sakumo, "Thank you, Sakumo-san...", He said firmly, "I''ll keep every one of these principles at the forefront of my mind. Your advice will guide my actions on the battlefield. I will also remain alert, alive and well, during all times, and work hard for our goals toe back with positive news for the overall cause..."


    Meanwhile, young Kakashi stood to the side, his attention fixed intently on the conversation. His father''s words of wisdom resonated deeply with him, each principle embedding itself in his young, keen mind.


    Though just a boy, Kakashi''s experience and skills were beyond his years, already marked by the vige as a Jonin-level shinobi.


    Despite his formidable abilities, Sakumo had decided against allowing Kakashi to participate in the war, citing his young age as the primary concern. This decision left Kakashi feeling a mix of frustration and indignation.


    He clenched his fists, feeling sidelined at a time when he believed he could make a significant difference. After all, Hikari was just three to four years older than him and was already one of the designated leadingmanders of this war on his front.


    After nodding to Hikari, Sakumo noticed Kakashi''s tense demeanor and addressed him with a stern, serious tone, "Kakashi, you don''t yet grasp the true, brutal nature of war. Your current strength, impressive as it may be, especially for your age group and even the first of its kind in history, to be honest, would still make you only cannon fodder on those battlefields.",


    "Even seasoned jonins, far more experienced and older, fall in droves during wars of this magnitude. And this war, set to be the grandest in scale in our history, is far more than mere one-on-one battles. It involves deceit, ambushes, and often battles where you are outnumbered ten to one for example.",


    Sakumo''s voice softened slightly, but his message remained firm, "You should be thankful that you are not being mobilized like some other Academy kids your age. Instead, use this time to grow stronger.",


    He then made a promise, adding a condition to his words, "If you can reach Elite Jonin level strength and I deem you ready in theing years, and if this war still rages, then I will allow you to join the fight...",


    Sakumo''s expression was serious, emphasizing the importance of readiness and maturity in the face of suchrge-scale conflict, hoping his words would guide Kakashi to appreciate his current position and focus on his growth.


    However, noticing Kakashi''s subtle envious nce toward Hikari, Sakumo addressed his son''s unspoken concern directly, "Don''tpare yourself to Hikari. His strength already ces him among the top ten shinobi in this vige, which more than qualifies him for the front lines. Moreover, he will be surrounded and protected by his nsmen, an advantage you wouldn''t have...", Sakumo exined.


    His tone was firm, intended to both rify the situation and temper Kakashi''s frustration, "Each shinobi''s path is different, Kakashi. Your time wille, but it is not now. Focus on your training and growth with me here. That''s how you can truly prepare for what lies ahead...", He added, hoping to steer Kakashi''s ambition towards preparation and self-improvement rather than resentment or impatience.


    As Hikari watched Sakumo interact with Kakashi, he sensed a deeper reluctance in Sakumo''s demeanor towards the war, likely stemming from past experiences or the less-than-favorable treatment he had received from Konoha''s leadership in the past. This made Sakumo''sck of enthusiasm for returning to battle understandable, even predictable.


    In Hikari''s view, Sakumo seemed genuinely more content to stay behind in the safety of his n''s estate, dedicating himself to training young Kakashi and preparing him for the increasing challenges of the shinobi world.


    It appeared that nurturing Kakashi''s potential and safeguarding his growth was a source of fulfillment for Sakumo, perhaps offering him a sense of redemption and purpose that the battlefield no longer provided.


    As to why the two of them didn''t need to participate in this war, it was clear. Even the smaller shinobi ns needed to maintain a certain number of their members within the npound to preserve the n''s lineage and ensure its survival, something Konoha''s leadership could not override, and Sakumo, as the Hatake n head, decided who were they.


    Meanwhile, in the living area, after sensing Kakashi''s further lingering doubts and the need for a tangible demonstration, Sakumo decided on a more direct approach to resolve the matter,


    "If you''re still not convinced, Kakashi, let''s step outside and see Hikari''s abilities for ourselves, hence the differences between the two of you...", Sakumo suggested, then leading the way with a tone of finality.


    Soon after, they moved to the courtyard, where they would have enough space for a safe and clear demonstration. This impromptu spar was not just to showcase Hikari''sbat skills but also to provide a practical lesson for Kakashi on the level of expertise required for war leadership.

 97. Hikari Contemplates the Altered Paths of Team Minato

    97. Hikari Contemtes the Altered Paths of Team Minato


    Kakashi and Hikari positioned themselves opposite each other in the courtyard. Kakashi''s expression was serious, and he told Hikari to not hold back. Clutching his White Light Chakra Sabre, he readied himself, his eyes focused and sharp.


    At this moment, Hikari noted the White Light Chakra Sabres held by Kakashi, but also simrly on Sakumo''s back at all times.


    Therefore it became clear to Hikari that these revered weapons were obviously more numerous than that single item depicted in the original series; after all, a single weapon could hardly serve the needs of an entire shinobi n.


    As the spar began, Kakashi moved with impressive speed, showcasing his proficiency in the basic Body Flicker techniquebined with the Samurai Step for enhanced mobility.


    His movements and swordsmanship were fluid, reflecting his training in the Hatake n''s basic kenjutsu, which he executed with precision and skill.


    As Kakashi darted around him, Hikari admired the young Hatake''s current level reached, ''He is truly around a basic Jonin-level of strength, even earlier than in the original series...'',


    ''It seems that Sakumo''s decision to stay alive and dedicate himself to training Kakashi has been incredibly beneficial. After all, constant personal guidance from such a legendary shinobi certainly has its perks...'', Hikari mused internally, watching Kakashi''s attempts to mask his attack direction with agile movements.


    Noticing a subtle nod from Sakumo, Hikari interpreted it as a cue to escte the intensity of the spar, ''It seems that Sakumo-san wants me to not hold back during this spar and in fact, teach him a lesson then...'' Hikari thought, sensing that it was time to teach Kakashi a valuable lesson about the realities ofbat at higher levels.


    During their previous spars, Hikari was always extremely lenient with Kakashi due to Sakumo which might''ve given the young Kakashi a wrong impression of their differences in power.


    With a quick shift in his stance, Hikari activated his Wind Release: Rotation in its fullest potency. The powerful jutsu created a giant fierce whirlwind around him, taking a huge chunk of this courtyard''s space, designed to repel and disarm opponents. As the force of the wind hit Kakashi, it blew him back with such intensity that he nearly collided with a nearby wall.


    Reacting swiftly, as he was already alert, Sakumo leapt into action, moving with the speed and precision that marked his legendary status. He caught Kakashi in his arms just in time, preventing a harsh impact against the wall and potentially serious injury.


    This intervention served not only as a rescue but also as a stark lesson for Kakashi: the gap between his current abilities and the demands and unpredictability of high-levelbat.


    Kakashi was visibly shaken as he regained his footing, his wide eyes reflecting a mix of shock, amazement, and realization.


    The giant force and extent of Hikari''s technique, coupled with his father''s swift intervention, drove home the intensity and danger of realbat situations.


    He now truly realized that Hikari held back greatly during their ''spars'' before, as he had never seen this kind ofrge area-of-effect kind of jutsu from him until now for the first time.


    Sakumo, still holding Kakashi steady, turned this into a teachable moment, "Kakashi, you must understand that the strength of an opponent can be overwhelming, and sometimes, unexpected...", Sakumo began, his tone both stern and instructive,


    "Today you experienced firsthand how quickly a battle can turn. It''s not just about the techniques you know, but how you adapt and react when faced with superior power.",


    Kakashi nodded slowly, absorbing his father''s words, "This is why you need to continue to train and why you''re not ready for the war front...", Sakumo continued, "You have great skill for your age, but the battlefield demands more than skill alone. It requires awareness, experience, and the wisdom to know when to fight and when to retreat."


    "Thank you, Father, Hikari-senpai. I... I understand better now...", Kakashi managed, his voice a mix of humility and renewed determination. Sakumo nodded, satisfied that the lesson had made its mark, knowing that these experiences would forge Kakashi into a shinobi worthy of the Hatake name.


    Meanwhile, Aas Hikari observed the lesson between Sakumo and Kakashi, his thoughts drifted to the broader implications of the current shinobi alignments in Konoha.


    As Kakashi was not part of the regr shinobi force, it was obvious that he was not on the same team with Obito and Rin, under Minato, during this time, as he was in the original.


    This alteration piqued his curiosity about the fates of Obito and Rin, who were now navigating the shinobi world without Kakashi''s direct involvement.


    They were both only genin now and would probably participate in the war, just like the rest of Konoha''s shinobi of this generation.


    As Rin and Obito never visited the Hatake residence due to political differences, between Minato and Sakumo, for example, during this time, Hikari, therefore, never had a chance to personallye across them.


    Hikari recalled from his past interactions with Kakashi that although there was still a semnce of friendship between him, Obito, and Rin, their meetings were infrequent, and overall slowed down over the years, and strained due to the current factional tensions.


    Obito and Rin, still only genin, were under Minato''s mentorship alone, which left Hikari wondering how this change would impact their development and roles in the impending war.


    Particrly, he was concerned about Obito, whose fate in the original timeline was dramatically shaped by the war and his encounters during it.


    Given the current political climate and the separation of the original Team Minato, Hikari spected about the possibilities, ''Would Obito still end up under Madara''s influence?...''


    He thought to himself. The alterations in their team structure and the absence of Kakashi could lead to vastly different experiences for both Obito and Rin in the war.


    These thoughts led Hikari to consider the "Butterfly Effect" his actions and the altered team dynamics might have on the broader narrative of the future of this world.


    Without the presence of Kakashi, and with the war''s scale and intensity, the paths of Obito and Rin could diverge significantly from what history originally recorded.


    Given the heightened tensions between the Uchiha n and the vige¡ªmore so than in the original series¡ªMinato''s decision to take Obito under his wing was not merely a matter of chance or preference.


    Hikari spected that there were strategic calctions at y, likely orchestrated by Hiruzen. From his discussions with Kiyomi, Hikari understood that Obito, much like Shisui, came from an extremely same, specific ''dovish'' lineage within the Uchiha.


    Hiruzen, recognizing the potential to mold Obito into an influential figure within the Uchiha, might have seen an opportunity to subtly steer the n''s future directions. This would make Obito a valuable asset, a potential agent of influence who could be used in various ways.


    As for why the Uchiha n consented to Obito training under Minato, it was because their n, just like all the other shinobi ns, was obligated to contribute some percentage of their overall, shinobi to Konoha''s regr shinobi forces, for missions, on a permanent basis.


    Giving a ''dove'' to him then didn''t mean anything, as they were suspicious of him, due to his heritage, probably in the first ce. And that meant that they wouldn''t need to worry about Minato brainwashing ''one of their own'' then as, nowadays, they already didn''t consider him ''their own'', as the ''dove'' faction got sidelined from all n matters during thest few years after the Uchica n formed the ''Anti-Hokage'' coalition, or simply switched to other factions.


    Hikari also had some other considerations regarding Obito. Theck of a strong friendship with Kakashi, this time around, in this universe,bined with increased ostracism and bullying likely faced from his own n every day, due to Hikari''s own Butterfly Effects creating a much more divisive vige-Uchiha dynamic than it already was in the original series, probably now having other nsmen considering Obito something akin to ''traitor'' as well, not just as some funny-looking, talentless weakling within the Uchiha n, had probably all, in Hikari''s opinion, made Obito even more emotionally reliant on Rin than ever before. That heightened dependency created a precarious situation where Obito was even more susceptible to maniption than in the original series as an unintended consequence.


    In Hikari''s assessment, these circumstances could make it easier for someone like Madara to exploit Obito''s emotional vulnerabilities, as he knew that Obito was probably Madara''s perfect target.


    After all, theoretically, the more love a Uchiha n member had, the more emotional disturbance it could generate if it is transformed into another negative emotion, creating way more powerful eyes in the process.


    Madara''s penchant for manipting Uchiha n members who felt marginalized or wronged was well-documented, and Obito''s growing istion within his n and reliance on Rin for emotional support presented a perfect storm for such influence.


    Adding to theplexity, Obito and Rin''s alignment with the Hokage''s Faction meant that they were likely to be deployed to fronts away from the Uchiha-controlled Suna''s or his own Front for example, once the decision to send such young genins fresh off Academy gets made. Or maybe they would even only follow Minato inside of his newly created Division.


    This geographical and operational separation from the Uchiha n''s influence ced Obito and Rin entirely out of Hikari''s reach, making it challenging, if not impossible, for Hikari to intervene or protect Obito from potential maniption by Madara.


    Hikari was deeply concerned about this setup. With Obito and Rin dispatched far from any protective oversight and deeply embedded in environments controlled by the Hokage''s Faction, the opportunity for Madara to step in and manipte Obito unchecked increased dramatically.


    And Hikari dreaded having such a powerful individual on the opposing side, after all, due to Madara''s and ck Zetsu''s fundamental goals, they would certainly have to sh sometime.

 98. Planning for The Future Beyond The Current Hokage

    98. nning for The Future Beyond The Current Hokage


    After saying his goodbyes to Sakumo and Kakashi, Hikari made his way through the iconic Hokage Rock, heading towards the outskirts of Konoha to rendezvous with his team. As he walked, a sense of regret washed over him; he wished there had been time for onest serious spar with Sakumo.


    Over the years, their training sessions had evolved significantly, reaching a point where Sakumo deemed Hikari skilled enough to face him when he wielded his legendary short sword¡ªa mark of high respect and acknowledgment of Hikari''s abilities.


    Hikari had always found these intense sparring sessions and instructions both challenging and incredibly rewarding. They pushed him to the limits of his skills and allowed him to gauge his progress against one of Konoha''s legendary shinobi. Recently, he had even ''felt'' a further remarkable increase in Sakumo''s power.


    Despite already being one of the vige''s most formidable ninjas, Sakumo seemed to have found a new reservoir of strength, likely driven by a mix of resolve and the abundance of time he now dedicated to refining his techniques.


    This growth in Sakumo''s abilities made Hikari all the more regretful that they couldn''t have one final duel before his departure. Such a spar would have been the perfect way to test his readiness for the battles toe and to gain further insights from one of the best alive.


    Nheless, with the pressing demands of the war and his responsibilities to his team, Hikari knew that such personal desires had to be set aside today.


    With a deep breath, he focused on the path ahead, steeling himself for the challenges he would face as he approached the assembly point where his team awaited.


    The entire Eastern Division wouldn''t travel uniformly to their destination, instead, they would move into many smaller teams, one of which, Hikari was the leader of.


    As Hikari moved toward the meeting point of his team, his mind was busy strategizing about the broader implications of the war and his faction''s long-term objectives within Konoha.


    He was well aware that the Anti-Hokage coalition, despite its strength and determination, faced significant obstacles in its quest for power due to Hiruzen''s firm control over the vige''s administrative andmercial interests.


    Not to mention control over the Konoha''s budget, collected from both taxes and other internal revenue sources in addition to the Daimyo''s financial allocation for Konoha, and then the further allocations of finance to various ns.


    That was also another strong advantage ns in Hiruzen''s factions got over the other ns, they simply got allocated more of that money through various channels secretly on top of what was supposed to be the equal percentage for every shinobi n based on their size.


    Therefore, with all those inherent ''top-down'' advantages, the fact that Sakumo had managed to secure the position of Jonin Commander was an exception rather than the rule, a rare victory in andscape dominated by the current Hokage''s faction.


    Understanding this, Hikari recognized that their current tactics of confrontation and attempting to wrest control incrementally were inadequate and inefficient.


    The coalition needed a more decisive approach: a top-down strategy that would involve overthrowing Hiruzen and installing a leader from within their ranks as the next Hokage, and then making easy adjustments on the lower level of positions and finance.


    Everything came down from top to bottom in terms of the executive, legitive, and judiciary powers of Konoha, as the Konoha itself was some kind of a city-state led by a collective shinobi dictatorship in Hikari''s impression.


    It would be a futile job to try and wrestle influence from the bottom-up. You instead needed to defeat the existing dictator with preferably kic force if you wanted to shake things up and change the status quo at the end of the day.


    This new leader would be crucial in realigning Konoha''s policies and power structures to favor their coalition. Every higher-up leader of their faction already understood that more or less, it was just that the point of contention was about who that would be at this time.


    Once they seeded in cing one of their own at the helm, they could begin the process of regaining lost ground and expanding their influence, potentially reversing the losses they had suffered and even usurping interests from Hiruzen''s faction instead this time around.


    For now, the public perception among many in the Anti-Hokage faction was that Sakumo Hatake would be the next logical choice for Hokage after Hiruzen.


    However, Hikari was privy to more confidential aspirations within his circle. His n, the Hyuga, had quietly thrown their support behind him as a future candidate for Hokage.


    They believed that through his experiences and growth in power and reputation during the war he would mature into a leader capable of running for that office.


    Meanwhile, Hikari also spected that the Uchiha n, for example, also likely harbored simr aspirations for one of their members. It even wouldn''t be surprising for Hikari if Kiyomi was that person, as she had simr characteristics as he himself had within the Hyuga n.


    Additionally, Hikari was well aware of theplexities involved in changing leadership, especially considering Hiruzen''s current position and vigor. In his mid-forties and still close to his prime, without much gray hair, Hiruzen was unlikely to step down without significant cause.


    Hikari understood that in the original series, Hiruzen''s resignation was influenced not just by the negative oues of the Third Ninja World War but also by his confidence in his ability to exert influence even after stepping down as Hokage. However, the current circumstances were different.


    In this altered timeline, Hikari recognized that for Hiruzen to consider resignation, it would take again there to be unfavorable oues during the ongoing war, therefore, a clear demonstration that a change in leadership was in the best interest of Konoha''s future, to the general shinobi and civilian poption.


    However, there was something additional, recing Hiruzen would require more than just political maneuvering; it would necessitate substantial kic force. The anti-Hokage faction would need to amass enough powerful elites to decisively ovee Hiruzen and his core supporters.


    This wasn''t just about winning a political argument but about having the kic force to back their ims andpel Hiruzen''s faction to ept a new leadership paradigm.

 99. Hikari And His Forces Breaching Into The Land of Water

    99. Hikari And His Forces Breaching Into The Land of Water


    A week had swiftly passed since Hikari left Konoha to join the warfare against Kirigakure on the Eastern Front, marking his first time away from the vige for such an extended period.


    Leading arge, dispersed formation, he had already maneuvered his troops out of the Land of Fire.


    He was now navigating through the dense jungles in the southern parts of the main continent that belonged to the official territory of the Land of Water.


    The terrain was challenging, with thick vegetation and unpredictable weather patterns that made the march arduous and slow.


    As they moved deeper into enemy territory, Hikari was constantly aware of the need for vignce.


    The possibility of ambushes was high, and the dense jungle could hide Kirigakure shinobi just as effectively as it concealed his forces.


    Every step forward was taken with caution, and every order was given with the consideration of potential threats.


    As Hikari moved alone through the dense jungle, he consistently used his Byakugan to scan the terrain ahead.


    With its 50 km range, it allowed him to oversee a vast area, providing a critical advantage in these hostile surroundings.


    Despite his vignce, the scans revealed no immediate threats, just endless stretches of thick foliage and the asional wildlife disturbance.


    Reflecting on the situation, Hikari reasoned, ''It seems that there will probably be Kiri shinobi only when wee across some inhabited viges.''


    ''This part is only jungle; only closer to the shores are people likely living¡ªthat''s probably where they are stationed...'',


    His assessment was based on typical military strategies that positioned forces near civilian poptions for logistical support and strategic control, particrly in coastal areas which were more essible and economically vital.


    He nned to maintain a high level of alertness while moving through the jungle but prepared for a potential increase in enemy contact as they approached more popted areas near the coast.


    Despite the inherent dangers of their mission, Hikari was confident in the defensive capabilities of his forces, particrly against ambushes, which were a specialty of the Kirigakure shinobi.


    His force was well-equipped with sensors capable of detecting enemies at great distances, and Byakugan provided short-range, precise observation.


    Hikari surmised that the Kirigakure shinobi were likely aware of their enhanced sensory capabilities.


    This awareness might exin the absence of attempts to ambush his forces. The dense jungle, while a perfect setting for stealth and surprise attacks, was rendered less effective.


    Hikari then halted for a while and unrolled his specially designed mastermunication scroll, an intricate tool that connected him to all the squadrons under hismand.


    This scroll was essential for maintaining coordination across the dispersed formation, especially in the dense and unpredictable terrain of the jungle.


    He carefully reviewed the pre-recorded verbal updates from each squadron leader, ensuring that there were no reports of enemy contact, logistical issues, or troop disarray.


    Each entry on the scroll reassured him that his forces were maintaining their intended formation and adhering to the operational protocols he had set.


    Satisfied that everything was in order, Hikari ryed a brief message of encouragement and a reminder to stay vignt. He emphasized the importance of maintainingmunication and reporting any anomalies immediately, no matter how insignificant they might seem.


    Resuming his march then, Hikari kept his focus on the broader strategic objective of the campaign: to push the front line as far away from the Land of Fire and deeper into the Land of Water. This strategic movement was designed to minimize the risk to Konoha and exert pressure on enemy resources and morale by bringing the conflict closer to their territory.


    Then Hikari started moving once again; He knew that their goal this time was to ''move'' the front as much as possible away from the Land of Fire and into the Land of Water''s territory, so if nothing, like enemy formations, stopped them, they would all be moving ahead still.


    As Hikari led his troops through the Land of Water, his mind was upied with strategic considerations about therger forces at y, particrly Madara and his use of Zetsu.


    During thest week, on his journey toward here, in his free time, he revisited his knowledge from his previous life, which was buried deeply, examining every potential hidden detail there,bining it with his real-time experiences of this life, and re-evaluating the extent of Madara''s potential influence over Kirigakure, during this period, important for determining the prospects of encountering something rted to him during this time, and rethinking widely epted theories by the fans of his previous life''s story depicting this universe.


    In the end, Hikari realized that he wouldn''t likely have to deal with anything rted to Madara and Zetsu, this time around, as he initially thought and was a bit worried at the beginning.


    He began to suspect that Madara''s involvement with Kirigakure was not as deep or longstanding as many had believed. Instead, it seemed more likely that Madara had orchestrated a one-time maniption involving Rin Nohara, to use her as a ''time bomb'' instead of secretly controlling Kirigakure from the shadows on a more permanent basis like most fans spected before. Moreover, Hikari truly failed to see any other clue that pointed to Madara having the entire Kirigakure under his control, nor any reason for him to do so.


    So, in Hikari''s impression, it was only Obito whoter took control of Kirigakure secretly in order to use it as the cradle for Akatsuki, as it was the most istedrge shinobi vige, alongside, of course, ''taking revenge'' on them for Rin, by intensifying the extremist policies and differences between various factions in the vige, to make it even more ''bloody''.


    ording to Hikari''s new theory, Madara, possibly with the help of Zetsu, as he couldn''t move at that time, had manipted events to ensure Rin was made the jinchuriki of Isobu, the Three-Tails. He stole the Isobu, and sealed it into Rin, likely through some individual Kiri shinobi, on the ground, ''under his control'', either through Zetsu and his transformation ability, or him bringing them to him to use his genjutsu them, as opposed to being in cohorts with the Kirigakure''s leaders and the vige overall being under his control like many spected.


    This setup was intended not as a permanent alliance with Kirigakure but as a strategic move to create a crisis. The reaction of Kirigakure shinobi, who pursued Rin to recover Isobu, suggested they were unaware of Madara''s deeper motives and were simply reacting to the situation at hand. Madara essentially wanted to use them only as some kind of sacrificial pawns for killing Rin alongside the Konoha''s shinobi in order to descend Obito into darkness.


    However, all of this didn''t discourage Hikari about his chances of obtaining the White Zetsu''s cells. He understood that during this phase, Madara would probably be attuned to all of the major Konoha and world happenings in general, rted to finding his potential carrier of ns once he passed away and for other reasons.


    Therefore, if Hikari found himself in the vortex of some future big-time developments, it was very likely that White Zetsu could try and observe that matter as well, offering him a chance to catch his body then and seal it inside a special scroll he always carried with himself now.


    ***


    A few days into their march through the dense jungle of the Land of Water, Hikari and his forces finally detected the presence of hidden Kirigakure shinobi ahead, just before reaching the first inhabited area. This discovery marked the beginning of a critical phase of the battle.


    Over the next few weeks, an intense "sensing war" ensued between the Konoha and Kirigakure forces.


    Both sides engaged in a cautious dance of reconnaissance and counter-reconnaissance, each trying to gauge the other''s strength and strategic positions.


    Given Kirigakure''s reputation as the most istionist shinobi vige, reliable intelligence on their capabilities and troop movements was scarce, however, it also meant that their intelligence on other viges was also weak, making the sensory battle even more pivotal for both sides.


    The engagement wasn''t just about gathering intelligence; it involved several small skirmishes as well.


    Both sides deployed small teams to probe defenses and test the enemy''s reactions, which provided vital insights into the opposing side''s tactics and preparedness.


    These encounters, though minor, were crucial in shaping the strategic decisions of both camps.


    Strategically, both Konoha and Kirigakure had simrly deployed their forces. Both sides had shinobi spread out along a front that stretched approximately 1000 kilometers.


    The forces were dispersed in small squadrons to cover the entire distance effectively, with empty spaces between each unit.


    However, these gaps did not pose a significant risk due to the advanced sensory abilities of the shinobi in each squadron, which allowed them to monitorrge areas and detect iing threats.


    Over the past few weeks, Hikari saw firsthand that they were not encountering the full strength of Kirigakure''s forces.


    His assessment was based on the strategic distribution of Kirigakure''s military resources; a portion of their shinobi had been deployed to another front to face Kumogakure, albeit in smaller numbers.


    Additionally, like themselves, Kirigakure had divided their main division facing Konoha into three smaller contingents, spreading their forces across multiple fronts.


    This meant that Hikari and his forces were engaging only a segment of Kirigakure''s overall military might.


    Despite the ongoing strategic maneuvers and engagements, Hikari determined that it was finally time for him to take a more direct role in the conflict.


    Up until this point, he had maintained a low profile, carefully staying at a safe distance behind the front lines and outside the sensory range of Kirigakure''s ninja.


    This careful positioning,bined with the fact that his identity and capabilities were not well-known even inside Konoha, left the enemy without operational intelligence on him.


    With this advantage of anonymity and after weeks of meticulous observation and intelligence gathering, Hikari had sessfully deciphered the positions and movements of Kirigakure''s forces.


    A recent surge in intelligence allowed him to identify a key target¡ªan enemy elite from Kirigakure whose elimination could potentially shift the bnce of power in their favor, as there were only a handful of them on both sides of this front.


    Prepared for the task, Hikari nned his approach with precision. He would utilize his stealth and speed to close in on that elite undetected and strike at an opportune moment when the target was least expecting an attack.


    This direct involvement was a calcted risk, but one that Hikari was ready to take to gain a significant advantage and potentially demoralize the enemy forces.


    Thanks to his amazing chakra control allowing for keeping his chakra from leaking out of his body exceptionally well, and his speed, and his Early Kage strength, he would pick him up.

 100. Through the Eyes of the Byakugan: Tracing The Enemy

    100. Through the Eyes of the Byakugan: Tracing The Enemy


    Hikari soon set out toward the target''sst known location, utilizing his finely honed, probably even world-leading chakra control to mask his presencepletely. This skill was crucial, as any leakage of chakra could alert enemy sensors to his approach, and he didn''t want that in any way shape, or form. His movement then turned very swift and silent.


    As he moved, Hikari reflected on the limited information he had about his target. He knew only that this Kirigakure shinobi possessed chakra reserves indicative of an Elite Jonin and that he operated somewhat independently within their forces, serving as some kind of a sub-leader, simr to Hikari''s own role.


    Despite the scant details, Hikari was confident in his ability to adapt on the fly as he was overall more advanced shinobi in general. He nned to close the distance quickly and then try to find his precise location with his Byakugan and observe his target discreetly, gathering any additional intelligence that might inform hister approach or reveal any vulnerabilities.


    After several hours of meticulous movement and consistent scanning with his Byakugan, of 50km long-range, ''telescopic'' current peak limit, Hikari finally located his target somewhere near thest reported coordinates.


    Intriguingly, the jonin seemed to maintain a consistent proximity to nearby rivers, a pattern that caught Hikari''s attention. He knew that while water bodies could enhance Water Release techniques, Kirigakure ninjas were required to remain mobile to effectively cover all the blind spots present on their front lines.


    ''This is strange...'', Hikari mused internally, ''Ordinary Kiri shinobi shouldn''t need to stay so close to water bodies just to strengthen their Water Release jutsu, especially when mobility is crucial. Wait! Close to rivers...'',


    He recalled a piece of intelligence warning them to be cautious around bodies of water, particrly because members of the Hozuki n could utilize their famous Hydrification techniques to formidable effect in such environments. It was also a n that produced the Second Mizukage and some other famous shinobiter in the original story''s trajectory.


    Piecing together these observations, Hikari hypothesized that his target might be a member of the famous Hozuki n, known for their ability to liquefy their bodies, making them exceptionally dangerous near various water sources, and probably a leading member at that due to hismanding position.


    It was possible that he remained close to this river always as he had the most strength there and because possibly he even used himself as bait to catch some enemy elite off-guard, like Hikari, there with his overcharged Hydrification and nearby reinforcementing soon too.


    But, despite this realization adding ayer ofplexity and potential danger to his mission, on top of already existing concerns about having to ''finish his target off'' very quickly, before the nearby reinforcements came, Hikari''s confidence in his own abilities remained unshaken.


    Hikari stealthily closed the distance between himself and the target, moving with such finesse that his presence remained unnoticed until he was almost upon the Kirigakure jonin.


    However, the target, a seasoned male ninja in his mid-forties, eventually, sensed the approaching threat at thest moment. With practiced agility, he then positioned himself strategically in the center of a meandering jungle river, clearly choosing this spot for its tactical advantages.


    The river, bordered by dense foliage and thick undergrowth, flowed gently through the lush jungle, providing a natural barrier and a fluid medium that could be manipted by a skilled Water Release user.


    The target stood on the shimmering water with chakra, his stance firm and alert, ready to harness the river''s potential. The sunlight filtered through the dense canopy above, casting dappled patterns on the water''s surface and creating a serene yet charged atmosphere.


    The setting not only provided the ninja with unlimited resources to fuel his Water Release techniques but also offered numerous escape and attack routes, making him a formidable opponent in this terrain.


    With the river burbling softly in the background and the asional call of a distant bird piercing the quiet, the scene was deceptively peaceful. Yet, bothbatants were acutely aware of the deadly dance about to unfold, each calcting the best moment to strike.


    Hikariunched himself forward with incredible speed next, using his Wind Release, on his legs externally to propel himself more, to enhance the velocity of his current full-on Body Flicker technique, something he learned from Sakumo to do well recently, aiming to close the distance between himself and the target in the blink of an eye.


    Meanwhile, the target, a distinguished older man with grayish-blue hair, watched as the young boy made his advance. Despite the initial surprise of Hikari''s youthful appearance and theck of explicit Konoha-style military attire¡ªexcept for the forehead protector¡ªhis attire was unmistakably that of the Hyuga n, traditional-style kimono, although marked by a dark blue, just like his hair, and his pure white eyes also further confirmed his Hyuga status.


    As Hikari soared across the river''s surface, the man assessed him with a critical eye, ''Great speed, probably even exceeding mine, despite his young age, should be very rare for his n...'', He mused internally, a hint of respect flickering in his expression,


    ''This must be some kind of prodigy from the Hyuga n. But is he underestimating me so much as to engage me directly in this body of water? Is he crazy?'',


    His thoughts wereced with both astonishment and a tactical recalibration, preparing himself for an encounter that could prove to be more challenging than he initially expected.


    As the enemy surged toward him, the Hozuki n patriarch knew that his first priority was to contain this young and formidable opponent.


    With practiced ease, he quickly formed hand signs, channeling his chakra into the surrounding water. Drawing deeply from the river itself, he executed the B-rank "Water Release: Water Formation Wall" technique.


    The water beneath him churned and surged upward, creating a massive, towering wall of swirling, turbulent water. This defensive maneuver was designed not only to block iing attacks but also to disrupt the momentum of his assant, potentially opening up opportunities for counterstrikes.


    The patriarch''s precise control over the water ensured that the barrier was both swift and substantial, rising with a forceful roar that resonated through the jungle air.


    The patriarch stood ready behind his watery shield, his eyes fixed on Hikari, gauging his reaction and preparing for the next move in their high-stakes duel.


    Despite the impressive Water Formation Wall rising before him, Hikari, still in mid-air, remained unfazed. With a swift rotating motion, he unleashed a more casual version of his Wind Release: Rotation.


    The technique generated a powerful gust of wind that spiraled towards the towering wall of water, effectively dispersing it with its sheer force. The water droplets scattered into a mist around him as he continued his advance, undeterred.


    The Hozuki patriarch, witnessing the effortless dismantling of his defensive technique, was taken aback by Hikari''s prowess.


    Realizing that defensive measures alone would not suffice against such a formidable opponent, he knew he needed to escte his approach. Without hesitation, he swiftly transitioned to a more aggressive tactic.


    Rapidly forming another series of hand signs, the patriarch channeled a significant amount of chakra, drawing more vigorously from the water around him. He executed the "Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique," a more offensive and powerful B-level jutsu.


    A massive, serpentine dragon made entirely of water emerged from the river, roaring and twisting as it surged toward Hikari with tremendous force and speed.


    The dragon''s scales glistened under the sunlight, and its eyes seemed to ze with a life of their own as it aimed to strike Hikari with lethal precision.


    However, as the water dragon barreled towards him with daunting speed and force, Hikari just prepared his counterattack with calm precision. He quickly molded his chakra into a small, dense sphere.


    With expert timing, Hikariunched the chakra-filled sphere towards the oing water dragon. The sphere cut through the air with a whistling sound, a blur of deadly energy aimed directly at the heart of the liquid beast.


    As it collided with the dragon, the sphere exploded on impact, unleashing a devastating burst of wind energy.


    The explosion expanded into a full-sized Rotation, resembling a tempest in its ferocity. The powerful winds spun outwards with such intensity that they not only sliced through the water dragon, dissipating it back into the river from which it came but also cleared a wide radius around Hikari, repelling anything in its vicinity.


    Leaves and debris caught in the tumultuous wind were flung away, and the surface of the river rippled violently under the force of the st.


    By the time the Water Dragon had been dispersed, Hikari had already closed the distance between himself and the Hozuki patriarch at an astonishing speed.


    The patriarch barely had time to process the young Hyuga''s previous technique before Hikari was already upon him.


    Realizing the imminent threat, the patriarch''s mind raced, and he instinctively thought, "Not good!", He understood all too well the peril of allowing a Hyuga, especially one as skilled as this one, to get too close.


    In a desperate move to defend himself and create distance, the Hozuki patriarch resorted to a unique technique of his n.


    Positioning his hand to mimic a gun, he utilized the Hydrification Technique topress a drop of water in his index finger.


    This technique, known for its lethality, allowed him to fire thepressed water with a force and speed akin to a gunshot.


    Rapidly, he executed multiple shots in quick session, directing them toward Hikari with deadly precision.

 101. Jungle Fighting The Hozuki Clan Patriarch to Death

    101. Jungle Fighting The Hozuki n Patriarch to Death


    Hikari, everposed even in the face of rapidly approaching water bullets, did not waver. Recognizing the immediate threat, he quickly activated his Twin Lion Fists technique.


    As he ran towards his adversary, now moving agilely across the surface of the water, his chakra-infused hands glowed with intense energy, manifesting as two massive, roaring lion heads made entirely of chakra.


    With precision and control, Hikari used these chakra lions to intercept and neutralize the high-speed water bullets. Each bullet was effectively stopped by the lion heads, dissipating upon impact without causing any harm.


    The bullets were approaching at speeds not visible to the naked eye of most shinobi and were fired from such a close range, and yet, Hikari''s reaction time, thanks to his unique Byakugan''s ''processing speed'', outperformed them with ease.


    This defensive action not only protected Hikari but also allowed him to maintain his momentum as he continued to close the distance between himself and the Hozuki patriarch.


    Now only a few meters away, Hikari advanced with increased intensity, his Twin Lion Fists still active and ready to strike. The air crackled with the energy of his approach, signaling the impending confrontation.


    As Hikari advanced with his Twin Lion Fists ready to strike, the Hozuki patriarch quickly realized the futility of trying to counter such a formidable opponent using conventional tactics or lower-to-medium-level jutsu.


    Hikari''s prowess exceeded any expectations the patriarch had previously held regarding the capabilities of a Hyuga ninja. Faced with this unexpected level of threat, the patriarch decided that evasion first was his best recourse.


    In a desperate move to escape and create a diversion, the patriarch employed the Hyozuki n''s signature Hydrification Technique.


    This unique ability allows members of the Hozuki n to liquefy their bodies at will, turning themselves into water to avoid physical attacks and move swiftly without restraint.


    It''s a defensive technique that also enables quick repositioning or escape, making it invaluable inbat situations, especially for a n that excels in water-based environments.


    Activating the Hydrification Technique, the patriarch merged his now liquid form with the river beneath him, effectively bing one with the water.


    This rapid transformation was hisst-ditch effort to evade Hikari''s imminent assault.


    Once submerged and integrated with the water, he executed his most powerful jutsu¡ªWater Release: Tate Eboshi, right away.


    From his position within the river, the patriarch manipted the water around him to form a towering wave that took on the menacing appearance of a demon-like fish.


    This giant wave surged forward, embodying the force and ferocity of the river''s current, aimed at overwhelming Hikari and creating an opportunity for the patriarch to retreat or reposition for a counterattack.


    The water took on a life of its own, a formidable barrier meant to fend off Hikari''s relentless advance and reset the dynamics of their confrontation.


    As the giant wave in the form of a demon-like fish crashed toward him, Hikari quickly assessed his options more seriously and analytically for the first time during the short sh.


    The sheer mass and momentum of the water created by the Hozuki patriarch''s jutsu presented a significant challenge,


    ''Huh, it is a little tricky now that I can''t locate where his real, transformed body is located in all this giant mass of water... His level of strength, near a huge water body, is not just a ''first ss'' Elite Jonin, it seems, but more likely even a Quasi-Kage level...'',


    Hikari pondered, recognizing the difficulty in pinpointing the patriarch''s position within the vast liquid form.


    The options before him were limited: he could attempt to destroy the entire mass of water with brute force somehow, a feat that seemed inefficient and nearly impossible given the patriarch''s terrain advantage.


    The alternative required precision and timing, ''Then I should try and locate somehow and then target his real body...'', Hikari concluded, formting a strategy amidst the chaos of the surging water.


    Faced with the near impossibility of detecting the Hozuki patriarch through conventional means, even with his Byakugan pushed to its limits, Hikari recognized that a different method of observation was necessary.


    The Hydrification Technique, a sophisticated hijutsu refined over centuries, allowed its user to seamlessly blend into water, making it exceedingly difficult to distinguish the transformed body from the surrounding environment.


    And Hozuki n nearly reached the limit of possible power for ns that didn''t have any kekkei genkai, and instead relied on special techniques, called hijutsu. Not to mention that the individual he was facing now looked to be among the current top brass of that n.


    Understanding theplexities of this technique, Hikari decided to tap into a deeper aspect of his unique Byakugan capabilities ¡ª the ability to perceive natural energy.


    Hikari knew that natural energy almost certainly always interacted with chakra in some kind of way, no matter if masked or transformed like now.


    Activating this special mode, Hikari sought out disturbances and patterns in the flow of natural energy within the massive water construct.


    This method provided a differentyer of sensory perception, one that could potentially reveal the patriarch''s true location despite theprehensive blending of his chakra with the water.


    As the battle continued and Hikari was tossed through the air by the force of the watery monster, he concentrated deeply, filtering through the chaos to detect any anomaly and ''signal'' in the natural energy currents.


    After a tense and focused search, Hikari''s unique vision paid off ¡ª he finally pinpointed a subtle anomaly that marked the patriarch''s location.


    With the location of the Hozuki patriarch finally pinpointed within the massive water construct, Hikari prepared to close in for a direct, finishing strike.


    Knowing he needed both protection and force to prate the watery defense, he activated a unique technique: Wind Release: Armor of the Heavenly Spin.


    By creating a continuous, protectiveyer of spinning wind chakra around his body, Hikari formed a barrier that not only shielded him but also enhanced his mobility and offensive potential.


    Though this version of the Armor was slightly less powerful than the traditional Rotation in terms of sheer defensive strength, its advantagey in its sustainability and lower chakra consumption, allowing Hikari to maintain it for extended periods.


    This made it ideal for the current situation, where a prolonged engagement within the hostile environment of the water monster was necessary.


    With the Armor of the Heavenly Spin activated, Hikari surged forward, his form a blur of spinning wind as he moved directly toward the heart of the watery sphere-like behemoth.


    His approach was calcted to reach the patriarch with minimal interference from the surrounding water, relying on the armor to deflect any residual attacks and navigate through the dense, liquid mass.


    As he neared his target, Hikari readied himself for a decisive confrontation, prepared to strike directly at the real body of the Hozuki patriarch hidden within the tumultuous water.


    His strategybined finesse with brute force, aimed at ending the battle swiftly and effectively.


    Inside the colossal watery construct, Hikari''s strategic approach was clear and calcted.


    He understood that while the Hozuki patriarch''s body was transformed into water using the Hydrification Technique, the transformation itself was still fundamentally sustained by chakra with some kind of a mechanism.


    Disrupting this chakra flow could potentially force the technique to unravel, reverting the patriarch to his original form.


    Navigating through the heart of the water giant with his Wind Release: Armor of the Heavenly Spin still active, Hikari reached the core where he sensed the concentrated chakra that maintained the patriarch''s transformed state.


    Without hesitation, heunched into a precise and deadly execution of the Hyuga n''s famous technique, the Gentle Fist Art Eight Trigrams: 64 Palms, but not acting on the opponent''s chakra pathway system, as it wasn''t visible now, but on that chakra outline of his enemy that allowed this transformation to keep going, Hikari just used that Eight Trigrams stance to aplish that goal.


    As Hikari delivered the sessive strikes, disrupting and dispersing the chakra everywhere, the opponent''s real body began to materialize within the water.


    The look of shock and fear in the Hozuki patriarch''s eyes was palpable as he realized the impending defeat.


    He was now vulnerable, his body reappearing, unable to shield himself against the precise and deadly blows of the Hyuga prodigy.


    Hikari then delivered the final strikes of the sequence, this time to his real body. Thest two palms targeted directly at all the critical internal organs simultaneously, delivering a fatal blow.


    The force and precision of these final strikes disrupted all vital functions, effectively ending the life of the Hozuki patriarch.


    As the patriarch''s lifeless body sank into the water, the giant watery construct around them began to copse, the chakra that sustained it dissipating into the environment. Hikari stood solemn and resolute, his technique wless and his mission aplished.


    Reflecting on his first real battle as a shinobi, Hikari found hisposure throughout the confrontation to be unsurprising.


    His demeanor had always been exceedingly calm and ''mechanical'', a result of both his natural inclination and rigorous training.


    He could also utilize his chakra to calm the various bodily processes that could affect him negatively in battle, thanks to his amazing vision and chakra control.


    He had mentally prepared for moments like this throughout his life, repeatedly visualizing variousbat scenarios and strategizing his responses. Such preparation allowed him to remain grounded and focused when the actual moment of engagement arrived the first time.


    As he analyzed this battle, Hikari recognized that his victory was not solely obtained ''so easy'' due to his skill or even the element of surprise but also significantly because his specific abilities effectively countered those of his opponent on a fundamental level.


    The patriarch''s use of the Hydrification Technique, which rendered him nearly invisible and intangible, was a formidable skill set that would typicallyplicate any engagement.


    However, Hikari''s unique enhancements to his Byakugan allowed him to detect disturbances in natural energy, which made it possible to identify and target the real body of his opponent despite the transformation.


    Moreover, his mastery of the Gentle Fist technique yed a crucial role. This technique, which could target chakra directly, proved ideal against an opponent whose main defense was based on chakra maniption and ''masking'' with it.


    His ability to manipte and attack chakra as if it were a tangible substance turned what might have been an elusive and resilient foe into a manageable target at close contact.


    Just as Hikari was assessing this victory, his still-activated sharp Byakugan caught sight of six other Kirigakure shinobi rapidly approaching his position.


    Each disyed the formidable aura of Jonin-level strength, clearly leaders of their respective squadrons that were nearby and were first to realize something.


    Hikari surmised that these shinobi had likely been alerted to the battle by their sensory teammates and had hurried to support their fallen leader, it was just that they were the fastest ones due to their overall Jonin level, so only they came alone.


    ''I lost a quarter of my chakra already in this battle to finish it quickly...'', Hikari thought, preparing to make his next move, ''I need to fight to retreat now, not to win or kill them.''

 102. Combat by the River: Hikari’s Escape Maneuvers

    102. Combat by the River: Hikari¡¯s Escape Maneuvers


    Before making his escape, Hikari swiftly employed a special sealing scroll to secure the body of the Hozuki Patriarch.


    He nned to hand it over to intelligence specialists within his divisionter, as extracting information from the patriarch''s brain was a primary objective of the mission.


    Given the patriarch''s high-ranking position within Kirigakure, his knowledge could provide critical insights into enemy operations and strategies, alongside Kirigakure''s overall top-secret information possibly.


    However, realizing that by now a clean escape was no longer an option as the enemy rapidly closed in, Hikari assessed his situation with a calm urgency.


    Three Kirigakure jonins had positioned themselves on one side of the river, effectively cutting off several potential exit routes and cornering him.


    Another trio appeared on the opposite bank, starting to weave hand signs and vocally demanding the whereabouts of their Hozuki Patriarch, their tone aggressive and demanding.


    Faced with encirclement, Hikari quickly formted a strategy. He understood that focusing his efforts on one group could create a necessary opening for his escape.


    With a swift decision made, he surged towards the selected trio which were on the side of his escape route back to their part of the frontline. His n was not just to engage but to swiftly overpower and decapitate this group to break through.


    As Hikari made his move towards one side of the river, the three Kirigakure shinobi on that nk were quick to respond. They immediately capitalized on their environmental advantage, the abundant water providing a perfect medium for their Water Release techniques.


    The first Jonin executed the Water Release: Water Fang Bullet. He skillfully manipted the river water, forming several tightlypressed projectiles beneath the surface. These water fangs, highly pressurized due to theirpactness, wereunched with deadly precision and speed, spinning as they hurtled toward Hikari.


    Simultaneously, the second Jonin used Water Release: Rising Water Slicer. With a swift hand gesture, he summoned a sharp, linear wave of water that surged from the riverbed. This de of water shot forward with tremendous force, capable of slicing through solid rock, aimed directly at cutting Hikari off from his intended path.


    The third Jonin opted for Water Release: Water Whip. Molding his chakra, he created arge, flexible whip made of water, which he wielded with expert control. The whip cracked through the air, designed to entangle or severely strike Hikari, furtherplicating his escape efforts.


    These coordinated attacks showcased the tactical synergy of the Kirigakure shinobi, each using their mastery of Water Release to create a multifaceted assault.


    Thebination of high-speed projectiles, slicing waves, and entangling whips created a lethal barrier, severely restricting Hikari''s movement and increasing the difficulty of his nned breakout.


    In the face of the intense and coordinated Water Release attacks, Hikari knew he had to respond with equal force. Drawing deeply from his chakra reserves, he executed the most potent possible version technique, the Wind Release: Rotation, but with 15 meters in radius.


    The powerful gusts of wind he conjured formed a protective barrier around him, spinning at high velocity to effectively deflect the iing water jutsu.


    With the immediate threats neutralized, Hikari quickly adapted his strategy to take the offensive. He dived into the river, using the water to mask his movements, alongside his tenketsu chakra control masking his chakra aura, and repositioned himself unexpectedly.


    In a swift, fluid motion, he emerged from the water right in front of one of the Kirigakure jonins. Without hesitation, Hikari unleashed a barrage of Gentle Fist strikes, targeting the shinobi''s chakra points with pinpoint uracy.


    As he delivered the strikes, he simultaneously applied micro Juinjutsu symbols that immobilized his opponent''s chakra flow, effectively rendering him defenseless in mere moments.


    Seizing the opportunity, Hikari enhanced his hand with Wind Release chakra, transforming it into a sharp, de-like weapon. With a swift chopping motion, he decapitated the immobilized Jonin, eliminating him from the fight in a decisive, lethal blow.


    Not wasting a moment, Hikari then turned his attention to another nearby enemy. Combining his Vacuum sts with Yin Release to weave a tai-genjutsu, he cast a binding illusion over the second Jonin, from the distance immobilizing him with a powerful force that disrupted his ability to perceive and react.


    Springing forward with enhanced speed, Hikari closed the distance to the second immobilized Jonin. With another precise, Wind Release-enhanced chop, he swiftly executed the second opponent, mirroring the fate of the first.


    With only one remaining opponent visibly rattled by the swift demise of hisrades, on this side, Hikari was determined to clear his path for escape.


    He swiftly conjured two Celestial Rotation spheres, one in each hand. These spheres, dense with chakra and potent in their destructive capacity, were hurled simultaneously to both sides of the remaining Kirigakure jonin.


    Upon impact with the ground near the shocked opponent, the spheres expanded dramatically, unfolding into full-blown Rotations. The powerful, spinning force of the Wind Release technique enveloped the area, shredding thest Joninpletely to pieces.


    With the immediate threats neutralized, Hikari wasted no time. He activated his Byakugan to gauge the situation, spotting the remaining three jonins from the opposing bankunching their jutsu in a desperate attempt to stop him.


    Despite the escting danger, Hikari turned and sprinted towards Konoha''s front lines. His chakra reserves were significantly depleted; by his estimate, only 30-40% remained.


    This limited reserve meant he had just enough energy to make a narrow escape if he managed his resources wisely and avoided further confrontations.


    Pushing his physical and chakra limits, Hikari used his fastest speed, weaving through the terrain with practiced ease, sounds of Kiri shinobi techniques and shouting eventually fading.


    His mind was focused, calcting each step and breath, ensuring that every ounce of his remaining chakra was spent judiciously to maximize his speed and distance.


    As Hikari raced towards the safety of Konoha''s front lines, he mentally reviewed his performance in the skirmish with the three Jonins, in the end, ''grading'' himself well.


    His approach was methodical and calcted, reflecting his robotic efficiency and discipline inbat situations, alongside lightning logical thinking and movement speed and agility.


    He critically assessed each decision made during the encounter, considering how he had managed his resources and tactics under pressure, did he chose the most optimal route.


    Hikari acknowledged that he had expended a significant amount of chakra, opting for powerful, but high-cost attacks to resolve the confrontation as swiftly as possible.


    This strategic choice, while draining, was based on a logical assessment of the situation: quick resolution minimized the risk of additional enemy reinforcements and lessened the overall duration of his exposure to danger and unforeseen circumstances in enemy territory.


    He also reflected on his use of a diverse arsenal of abilities, which yed a crucial role in securing his victory in his assessment. Hikari''sbat style incorporated a broad range of techniques, from advanced taijutsu toplex ninjutsu and even elements of genjutsu.


    This versatility was instrumental in outmaneuvering his opponents, who also had zero knowledge of the breadth of his skills, nor knew that they were even ''possible'' in general probably, and thus could not even begin to anticipate his next moves. His first war, or even shinobi mission at all, in this life, was therefore generally considered a sess in his opinion.


    The only downside was that the enemy forces in general would now somewhat learn about his identity and skillset and could deduce many things about that if they were smart.


    And it was not like he had any time to spare with dealing against the other three shinobi present there, nor disposing of the bodies of the shinobi he killed at that time, to prevent leaking info. But, Hikari knew that it was eventually bound to happen simply due to his strength as a shinobi. That was the fate that also followed nearly all the powerful shinobi.

 103. Recent Socio-Political Climate Of The Kirigakure

    103. Recent Socio-Political Climate Of The Kirigakure


    A few days after his sessful escape, Hikari finally received theplete analysis from the intelligence personnel, he just met with covertly behind the generally established front line of Konoha, concerning the elite Jonin he had captured and sealed during his mission from a squadron specialized in these kinds of post-mortem brain inspections of hostile shinobi.


    The results turned out to be even more significant than he had anticipated. The individual he had defeated was none other than the patriarch of the Hozuki n, a figure of considerable influence within Kirigakure and a close associate of the Third Mizukage currently in power.


    This revtion underscored the strategic value of his mission''s sess. The patriarch''s high-ranking position meant that he was privy to confidential information not only about Kirigakure''s current military campaigns but also about the internal political dynamics of it.


    Such information was exceedingly rare and valuable, especially given that vige''s overall secretive nature, making it the most isted and the least-known vige in the shinobi world.


    After deciphering the intelligence from the captured Hozuki patriarch, Hikari now gained deep insights into Kirigakure and the Land of Water, in general, and theirplexities, and with his own logical thinking skills he further managed to deduce many things from that.


    The Land of Water, an archipgo, was marked by rugged terrain and diverse, fiercely maintained local traditions, which had big federal levels of autonomy, making the Kirigakure something more akin to a ''confederation'' of many smaller ind territories, managed by their nobles, than a truly unified country as the other four main countries of this world were.


    Additionally, even that level of unification was pretty hard to achieve for the Land of Water, and it was only recently that all of the territories truly united in that kind of fragile union.


    Kirigakure itself, located on the Main Ind of the country, was also established over time simrly to other hidden viges, ''following the trend of times'', and ''peer-pressure'' but still struggled with unifying the diverse ns, from the country, under its rule - many of them now still living outside of the Kirigakure in other parts of the Land of Water overall territory.


    Therefore, throughout its history, the Land of Water has been gued by numerous civil wars, more so than any other nation. This strife was primarily fueled by conflicts among the lords and nobles of the local inds, a situation possibly exacerbated by the archipgo''s divisive and dispersed geography, which naturally encouraged separatism and regionalism, in Hikari''s analysis.


    Furthermore, the most significant overarching conflict involved the various local factions battling against the most powerful noble family from the Main Ind. This family, which eventually rose to be the official Daimyo family, managed to secure a precarious victory that led to the unification of the country to some extent.


    Additionally, the civil wars in the Land of Water frequently involved ns with bloodline limits, who were often hired as mercenaries by various political factions due to their formidable strength.


    Even after establishing the one-country-one-hidden-vige system, many of these ns, along with the Kirigakure vige administration, found themselves entangled in conflicts initiated by different civilian leaders within the Land of Water. This urred during peacetime, with the vige only presenting a united front against foreign enemies during the ninja world wars, like the current one.


    This persistent internal strife is a key reason why Kirigakure and the Land of Water adopted such an istionist stance. Consumed by internal conflicts and deep-seated divisions, they simply could not afford to extend their focus beyond their borders, dedicating most of their resources and attention to managing and resolving their numerous issues.


    However, over time, thoserge ns with special bloodlines were scapegoated for the ongoing strife, leading to widespread persecution of them.


    After all, like everywhere else, people naturally, especially, civilians, are pretty simple-minded so they feared, hated, and envied those more powerful than them, who often also possessed those "strange" abilities, in Hikari''s opinion.


    This me and the subsequent treatment cast them as bringers of misfortune, turning public sentiment against them everywhere they would go inside the Land of Water from civilians.


    However, as the civil wars subsided over time, as the external pressure increased, some kekkei-genkai ns like one with a Boiling Release, or another one with Lava Release, for example, and many others, were already fully decimated, other ns were badly damaged, thanks to the decades-long persecution from the Kirigakure and the entire general public.


    Hikari surmised that this war might temporarily dy the demise of the Yuki and Kaguya ns, drawing on his knowledge of future events from the original story he knew from his previous life on Earth. He was aware that both the Yuki and Kaguya ns would eventually be decimated by Kirigakure, leaving very few descendants.


    Only those ns that aligned with Kirigakure''s political future¡ªbacked by the Daimyo from the Main Ind¡ªand chose to reside within the vige, like the Hozuki and Hoshigaki, managed to avoid severe persecution.


    By integrating into Kirigakure''s structure, these ns not only survived but also thrived. They became, alongside the Seven Swordsmen, central to the military might of the Third Mizukage, who was notably antagonistic towards ns with those bloodline limits.


    Hikari now had a nearlyplete understanding of Kirigakure''splex socio-politicalndscape.


    He realized that while the vige''s internal situation was fraught with strife due to the massacre of valuable bloodline-holding ns¡ªviewed by many as harbingers of doom¡ªit hadn''t yet reached the extreme state it would under Obito''s secretive control.


    Obito, driven by a vendetta to avenge Rin, wouldter intensify the vige''s already extremist policies, further fueling the fear and discrimination that gued Kirigakure.


    The notorious "kill another student" graduation exam, a grim marker of Kirigakure''s brutal culture, was already in ce before Obito''s influence but became even more rigorous under his regime.


    This policy not only underscored the vige''s moniker, "the Vige of the Bloody Mist," but also highlighted the harsh realities of its shinobi training.


    However, Hikari understood that these severe practices and the pervasive discrimination against Kekkei Genkai holders were not new developments brought about by Obito alone.


    Even before his time, such extremist exams and widespread killings of bloodline holders by civilians and fellow shinobi weremon.


    These actions reflected deep-seated fears and prejudices that had been part of Kirigakure''s culture for generations, contributing to the vige''s notorious reputation long before it was officially led by Obito.


    With this historical context in mind, Hikari could see that the roots of Kirigakure''s issues were deep and multifaceted, involving more than just the influence of any single individual, even one as impactful as Obito.


    This understanding provided him with valuable insights into the underlying tensions and conflicts within Kirigakure, which could be strategically significant in navigating the ongoing war and nning future interactions with the vige.


    Hikari''s newfound knowledge of the deep divisions within Kirigakure gave him a clearer perspective on the fragile state of its internal politics, even surpassing the divisions he knew within Konoha.


    Unlike the more integrated ns of Konoha like the Hyuga and Uchiha, major ns such as the Kaguya and Yuki in Kirigakure lived on the fringes of the vige''s direct control, often outside its borders.


    The politicalndscape of Kirigakure was split between two primary factions. One was led by the Third Mizukage, who allied with therger ns that did not possess kekkei genkai, such as the Hozuki and Hoshigaki.


    These ns were well-integrated into the vige''s structure and held significant influence within its governing bodies.


    In stark contrast, the other faction was led by the Kaguya n, known for their formidable bone-maniption abilities and recognized as the strongest n in the Land of Water. They were joined by the Yuki n, masters of the Ice Release kekkei genkai.


    This faction was characterized by their independence from Kirigakure''s central authority and their distinct bloodline abilities, which set them apart both culturally and politically from the main vige.


    This schism created aplex web of loyalties and conflicts that often erupted into open hostility, affecting not only the ninjas themselves but also the broader political strategies of Kirigakure.


    Understanding these dynamics, Hikari recognized potential leverage points for his war campaign and next political goals. Notably, the Kaguya and Yuki ns, along with their vassal forces, were not just distant from Kirigakure''s central authority¡ªthey were actively hostile towards it, having engaged in open conflict with the vige on multiple asions.


    This was a big contrast to the internal but more restrained tensions between ns like the Uchiha and Hyuga with Konoha. Moreover, the Kaguya and Yuki ns were in a significantly more precarious position, giving Hikari a unique opportunity that excited him more and more.


    He nned to explore ways to align with these disenfranchised groups, potentially using their grievances and ambitions to his advantage in the ongoing conflict with Kirigakure, or better said against the extremist, strict, hardline, unitarist, and even possibly discriminatory Third Mizukage and his Faction spearheaded by the ''7 Swordsmen'', Hozuki and Hoshigaki.


    However, it was not like the hijutsu major ns got well against the major Kekkei Genkai ns, even without the Mizukage''s influence, as also seen in Konoha, between the Uchiha and Hyuga against the Yamanaka, Nara, and Akimichi. That''s why the Hozuki n Patriarch was one of the leading figures in the persecution of the other Kekkei Genkai big ns.


    For example, also in the Kirigakure, only the ice-wielders of the Yuki n were willing to challenge the Hozuki n, historically, many times, even during the Warring ns Era, because they naturally ''countered them'' and the animosity between these two was huge.


    In Hikari''s analysis, the Kaguya and Yuki ns stood out as exceptionally powerful, second only to the Uchiha and Hyuga ns in the ninja world. They were worthy allies to have.


    It was just that the Kaguya and Yuki ns were partially positioned on a sub-front inside Yugakure, on the Land of Water''s side, directly opposing Takumi''s sub-division of Konoha''s Eastern Front, not Hikari''s sub-division, which was led by some of the ''7 Swordsmen'' from the Kirigakure''s side, as submanders, Hikari learned that also from that man''s brain.


    Meanwhile, the Kaguya and Yuki ns were not only active on the front against Takumi''s subdivision but also engaged on a separate for the Land of Water, where they were assigned by the Land of Water political consensus, positioned to counter threats from Kumogakure.


    From the intelligence extracted from the Hozuki n patriarch''s brain, Hikari gleaned some intriguing insights. It appeared that the Third Mizukage may have negotiated a covert deal with Kumogakure.


    The nature of this deal seemed to involve Kirigakure using Kumogakure to strategically eliminate some of those shinobi from the two ns before the Mizukage finished the two ns off after this war.


    In return, Kirigakure would assist Kumogakure in their conflicts against Iwagakure, providing support that could shift regional power bnces. After all, Kumogakure was already at war with both Iwagakure and Konoha, so even though they were the second most powerful vige, they didn''t want another full-on enemy in the Kirigakure who mostly remained passive in the past and they didn''t have many negative developments between them.


    This all meant that shinobi from those tworge ns were not on the same sub-front as Hikari and his current forces presently were on the southern sub-front on the outskirts of this continent, meaning that he had no direct means of contacting them at the moment.


    ''No! Wait, maybe I should ry all of this information to Takumi-sensei next instead and then let him discreetly set everything up with them if viable and they agree. After all, they are all probably already full of engagements, between them, therefore, with a full possibility of establishing some form of contact... By the looks of it, that frontline remained very passive, almost as if the two ns already understood the Third Mizukage''s n to use Kumogakure against them in the future, so they concentrated all of their efforts on that front. So all of this means that we have a great chance of sess in getting an alliance with them, after all, they are in a very deadly position currently....'', Hikari thought and quickly decided his next steps.

 104. Flight and Fight: Disabling Kirigakure’s Supply Chains

    104. Flight and Fight: Disabling Kirigakure¡¯s Supply Chains


    Over the following days, Hikari utilized the sensitive intelligence extracted from the Hozuki Patriarch''s brain to orchestrate a set of strategic moves against Kirigakure with his forces.


    Recognizing that the enemy also knew about the loss of the Hozuki Patriarch and might change some of their tactics, he acted swiftly to capitalize on the information before Kirigakure could adjust its defenses.


    For example, one thing was taking advantage of some of their operational maneuvers and locating ''weak points'' on the battlefield to gain advantage through concentrated force.


    The biggest approach with that was figuring out where there were enemy ''sensors'' missing broadly to target those areas and damage the enemy with the element of surprise as well.


    So, the war generally turned more ''bloody'' and serious as the ''testing each other'' phase got over, and Kirigakure also began to respond more aggressively to try and avenge their losses, albeit with limited sess.


    However, leveraging the detailed intelligence obtained from the Hozuki Patriarch, Hikari also identified the most crucial opportunity: striking directly at Kirigakure''s shinobi supply chains deep behind enemy lines.


    He had pinpointed the exact locations of these supply depots, which were critical for supporting Kirigakure''s operations on the continental front. Given theplexity and scale of these supplyworks, they were not easily movable or receable, making them perfect targets for a disruptive strike.


    However, the operation posed significant risks. Prating deep into enemy territory required stealth and careful maneuvering, especially since Hikari would need to mask his chakra continuously to avoid detection¡ªa challenging feat over great distances and prolonged durations even for him.


    Recognizing the risks of ground infiltration, as he didn''t want to risk his life even in the slightest for this object, and the need for a stealthy approach, Hikari devised an alternative n involving Isamu Sumi, the Sumi n head, and his Super Beast Imitating Drawing.


    Hikari was well aware of the strategic advantages that Isamu Sumi''s unique jutsu could offer, particrly the ability to create ink creatures capable of flight by utilizing Yang Release in reality along with some ''secret sauce''.


    This capability was crucial for their current operation, as it provided a method to bypass the treacherous and heavily monitored terrain between the front lines and Kirigakure''s supply chains rtively quickly.


    Hikari had been aware of Isamu''s capabilities even before their deployment to the front, understanding the immense value of aerial mobility in ninja operations¡ªespecially for covert insertions and extractions.


    Given the significance of this advantage, they had taken meticulous steps to keep Isamu''s identity and abilities hidden from the enemy. This secrecy was maintained to ensure that when the time came, they could leverage the element of surprise to its fullest extent.


    Flying, after all, was not just a rare skill but a game-changer in the realm of ninja warfare, where speed and the element of surprise could decisively shift the oues of skirmishes and major battles alike.


    Therefore, presently, in the dense undergrowth of the jungle terrain, Hikari arranged a covert meeting with Isamu Sumi, the head of the small but historically significant Sumi n, known for their mastery of ink-based jutsus.


    Like the Hatake n, the Sumi n was rtively small,prising a tight-knit group of shinobi who specialized in their unique hijutsu, which had been passed down through generations. Isamu, at the age of 45, carried the weight of his n''s legacy visibly.


    Isamu had a schrly appearance, marked by his slightly graying hair tied back neatly to keep it out of his face while he worked with his inks and scrolls.


    His eyes, often narrowed in concentration, reflected a lifetime of meticulous skill and an acute attention to detail that was crucial for his art.


    His attire was practical, consisting of a dark robe that was sttered with flecks of ink, a testament to his frequent use of his n''s techniques.


    As Hikari approached the designated meeting spot, Isamu greeted him with a respectful bow and an earnest, "Vice-Commander-sama!", His voice held a tone of deference mixed with readiness, indicating his preparedness to engage in whatever missiony ahead.


    As Hikari observed Isamu next, his thoughts wandered, ''This is probably another unfortunate individual that fell in this war dubiously due to Danzo or Hiruzen, in order to gobble up his small nter as well into Root or Konoha regr shinobi force and essentially destroy their autonomy for unitary Konoha, just like Hatake n also suffered in the original series too...'',


    ''However, this time, I inadvertently saved all those small ns by bringing them into our grand coalition to fight back. Does that make me some kind of a ''good guy'' and their ''savior'' then...'', Hikari mused internally, a hint of irony and joking in his thought.


    Clearing his thoughts and focusing on the immediate mission, Hikari addressed Isamu with a sharp, purposeful tone, "Isamu-san, are you fully aware of the mission''s objectives? Are you really prepared and capable of executing it?", His eyes searched Isamu''s for certainty and readiness, critical for the sess of their sensitive operation.


    After all, Hikari was always primarily concerned with his own life''s safety, and he didn''t want to endanger it for anything in this world. And he just saw a few days ago that having a bunch of individually weaker enemies on him could still push him to run for his life. And having the entire enemy frontline against him, on the ground, was the worst possible oue for him.


    "Yes, Vice-Commander-sama, I am fully aware of our mission objectives...", Isamu responded with a calm resolve, "I am prepared and fully capable of executing it. The technique I will use can transport us stealthily and swiftly to the target location. We can avoid detection and aplish our objectives with precision.",


    He was ready to prove himself to their Faction and Hikari who was definitely one of the unofficial leaders of it despite him being more than 30 years younger than Isamu himself.


    Isamu continued, delving into the tactical aspects of their n, "Enemy sensory ninjas are generally more proficient at detecting movements across the ground, utilizing the earth as a conduit for their chakra.",


    "They''re not as adept at sensing at higher altitudes, especially if they are not focused or expecting the threat toe from that direction...", He exined, outlining the strategic advantage of their aerial approach.


    "Our flying bird will move swiftly, far above the typical sensory baseline vertical range, which will help us evade detection even more...", Isamu borated, "With your Byakugan, you''ll also be able to scout the best routes for us to take increasing our chances of sess even more."


    He then addressed the potential scenario of enemy detection, "However, even if we are spotted and the enemy bes alerted, they won''t be able to reach us easily. If needed, I can increase our altitude quickly and pull us out of their range.",


    "But, in general, once we''re behind enemy lines, we''ll destroy their logistical depots rapidly and then retreat before they have time to mount a significant response."


    Hikari nodded in agreement, his eyes reflecting a strategic understanding of their n. "Excellent analysis, Isamu-san. Let''s proceed immediately...", He said concisely, his voice imbued with determination. Ready to execute their mission without further dy, he stood by as Isamu prepared the jutsu.


    Isamu unrolled arge scroll and carefully dipped his brush into a pot of chakra-infused ink. With precise strokes, he drew the outline of a medium-sized eagle. The lines flowed seamlessly, filled with his expert knowledge and chakra. Once the drawing wasplete, Isamu lifted his brush from the scroll, and the ink began to shimmer with life-like energy.


    In moments, the eagle illustration lifted off the paper, expanding and taking on a life-size, three-dimensional form.


    It pped its wings gracefully, hovering just above the ground, ready to obey Isamu''smands. With a nod from Isamu, the ink eagle lowered itself to the ground, poised for them to mount next.


    "Let''s go, Isamu-San...", Hikari dered, stepping forward to climb onto the back of the ink-created eagle. Once securely aboard, Isamu also joined him, and with a final check of their equipment, Isamu directed the eagle to ascend swiftly into the sky. They moved silently and quickly, blending into the sky as they headed toward their targets deep behind enemy lines.


    Aloft on the back of the ink eagle, Hikari, and Isamu soared through the sky, their forms mere shadows against the vast expanse above. As they flew, Hikari continuously scanned the terrain below with his Byakugan, ensuring their path remained clear of enemy detection.


    Thendscape rolled by beneath them¡ªa tapestry of dense jungle and the asional clearing, a testament to the rugged terrain of the Land of Water''s continental regions.


    After a swift and uneventful flight, they reached their primary target: a series of covert logistical depots used by Kirigakure to support their forward operations.


    These were strategically ced to be out of sight, deep within the jungle, but no match for Hikari''s prating vision. Isamu steadied the eagle above each depot in turn, allowing Hikari to execute their mission.


    Using abination of explosive tags and precise chakra strikes, Hikari systematically destroyed the supply caches. Each explosion sent up plumes of smoke and debris, marking the destruction of vital enemy resources. With each sessful strike, the potential for Kirigakure to sustain its front-line troops dwindled significantly.


    Once the depots were neutralized, they swiftly turned back toward their lines. As they retraced their flight path, Hikari kept vignt, his Byakugan sweeping thendscape below and the airspace around them.


    It was during this return journey that he noticed a sudden shift in the chakrandscape¡ªarge group of Kirigakure shinobi had realized their presence and mobilized to intercept.


    "Isamu-san, increase our altitude just in case. They''ve finally sensed us somehow...", Hikari instructed calmly. Without hesitation, Isamumanded the ink eagle to ascend sharply.


    The higher they flew, the thinner the air became, and the less effective the sensory techniques of the pursuers.


    Their swift ascent allowed them to evade any further detection or confrontation. As they climbed higher and sped away, the risk of engagement dropped off rapidly.


    Soon, they were nothing more than a speck in the sky, out of reach and heading safely back toward their own territory.


    The mission was a resounding sess. Not only had they struck a critical blow to the enemy''s supply lines, but they had also demonstrated the efficacy of using unconventional tactics and the element of surprise in warfare.


    As they neared their own lines, both Hikari and Isamu knew they had significantly weakened Kirigakure''s operational capabilities in their sector, all without a direct confrontation as well.

 105. Hikari’s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (1)

    105. Hikari¡¯s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (1)


    Several days after the sessful operation against the Kirigakure''s supply depots, the dynamics on the battlefield began to shift.


    Kirigakure, reeling from the loss of critical resources and mounting casualties, stemming from the loss of the Hozuki n Patriarch and the information his brain provided to their enemies, thanks to Hikari, adopted a seemingly more aggressive and ''desperate'' strategy of warfare.


    Their tactics grew bolder, fueled by abination of necessity and also the emotional toll of their setbacks in the eyes of Konoha''s side leaders.


    Therefore, today, a significant,rgest Kirigakure force so far, including two members of the revered Seven Swordsmen of the Mist, that were on this sub-front,unched another concentrated attack on a section of Konoha''s frontlines.


    Recognizing the severity of the threat, Hikari quickly gathered a substantial group of Konoha shinobi to form a quick response unit, as he was also close to the breakthrough at that time, whereas Isamu Sumi and Ryosuke Gekko stayed back to keep their own front lines stable.


    Hikari led hisrge contingent of Konoha shinobi through the dense jungle, moving strategically toward the location where Kirigakure''s forces were reported to be advancing.


    The thick foliage provided both cover and challenge, demanding careful navigation and vignt sensing to avoid ambushes or getting separated.


    As they pushed forward, the sounds of the jungle were gradually overtaken by the distant echoes of battle¡ªshing metal, shouts, and the unique sounds of various jutsu being deployed.


    Hikari maintained a brisk pace, understanding that timing was critical to intercept Kirigakure''s group effectively and prevent them from gaining further ground.


    The Konoha shinobi were a mix of veterans and younger fighters, all drawn together by the urgency of the situation and Hikari''s leadership.


    As they neared the anticipated point of contact, Hikari issuedmands, positioning his forces for optimal impact.


    He organized them into several nks, designed to envelop the enemy and create multiple fronts,plicating the Kirigakure shinobi''s ability to maintain a cohesive defense.


    Finally, the dense greenery gave way to a clearer area where the Kirigakure forces were momentarily regrouping. Hikari, spotting the enemy, signaled his troops to prepare.


    With a deep breath, he led the charge, initiating the confrontation with a well-coordinated assault.


    The Konoha ninjas burst through the underbrush,unching a surprise attack that capitalized on the momentary disarray among the Kirigakure troops.


    As the battle ensued, Hikari found himself in the thick ofbat, directly engaging the Kirigakure shinobi. His movements were precise and calcted, designed to push through the enemy lines and reach the two Swordsmen of the Mist.


    Each step forward was contested fiercely, but Hikari''s strategic approach and his shinobi''smitment kept the momentum in their favor.


    As the battle raged on, Hikari scanned the chaos with his Byakugan, its enhanced vision cutting through the melee to identify key targets.


    His eyes locked onto two figures, he recognized vaguely from his knowledge of the original story, wieldingrge, distinctive swords¡ªRaiga Kurosuki and Jinin Akebino, members of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist.


    They were cutting a swath through the Konoha forces, their prowess as Swordsmen evident in the efficiency and brutality of their attacks.


    With a grim determination, Hikari maneuvered through the battlefield, dodging iing attacks and countering with precise strikes. His focus was singr: confront these more powerful foes and turn the tide of the battle.


    As he approached, the sounds of battle seemed to fade into the background, his concentration honing in on Raiga and Jinin.


    Raiga, known for his unpredictable fighting style and the use of his sword, Kiba ¨C the Thunder Swords, was a dangerous foe. His ability to generate electricity made him particrly lethal in closebat.


    On the other side, Jinin wielded the Kabutowari, a blunt de paired with a massive hammer, capable of breaking through any defense.


    As Hikari stepped into the clearing where the two Swordsmen were engaged with Konoha shinobi, his arrival drew their attention.


    Raiga''s eyes lit up with wild glee, while Jinin assessed Hikari with a more calcted gaze. The air around them crackled with the tension of imminent battle.


    They had heard confirmations about the young shinobi who had taken down the Hozuki n patriarch, but seeing him in person¡ªa mere 13-year-old from the Hyuga n¡ªwas startling.


    Raiga, with his wild and reckless demeanor, couldn''t help butugh, a sharp, mocking sound that echoed slightly over the din of battle,


    "So, you''re the kid who took down that guy? Konoha really has changed, huh? Sending kids out to do a man''s work...", He taunted, his voiceced with disbelief and amusement.


    Jinin, moreposed but equally skeptical, eyed Hikari critically, "Never thought I''d see a Hyuga leading the charge like this. You folks are usually in the back, lending a hand. What''s going on, kid? Konoha running out of real fighters?"


    Hikari met their stares unflinchingly, his face an impassive mask that gave nothing away. His voice, when he spoke, was cold and precise, "Underestimating your opponent based on age or n is a fatal error...", He stated tly, "You''ll find that out soon enough. You''ll end up just like the Hozuki n Patriarch. The two of you are nowhere near my opponents even jointly."


    And he truly wasn''t particrly overwhelmed by their individual prowess at his current level of skill, and he felt like even only two of them couldn''t possibly threaten him at all right now.


    However, thebined might of all these 7 Swordsmen, renowned for their coordination and their legendary status within Kirigakure, might pose a formidable challenge to him indeed.


    Yet, it was their mystical des that captured Hikari''s interest even more than the Swordsmen themselves.


    For example, Raiga''s Thunder Swords, crackling with raw electrical energy, and Jinin''s Kabutowari, known for its ability to smash through defenses deemed imprable, were not just tools of war but relics of shinobi history.


    Their origins were pretty much shrouded in mystery, and the extent of their full capabilities was something that Hikari was always keen to explore in the past.


    However, Hikari, equipped with knowledge extracted from the Hozuki Patriarch''s memories, now also gained unprecedented insights into the origins of Kirigakure''s legendary Seven Swords. These details were previously unknown even in the original story of his past life.


    For example, Hikari learned that the First Mizukage, Byakuren, was not only a formidable vige founder, the reason the Kirigakure existed at all, and a great fighter, who could wield all 7 swords at the same time but also an exceptional craftsman who personally forged them in the first ce.


    ording to the memories Hikari essed, Byakuren was a very intelligent individual and used advanced, possibly ancient technologybined with unique materials and minerals avable only in the Land of Water to create them.


    Theseponents were likely processed using sophisticated techniques that could manipte their inherent properties to enhance their lethality and durability.


    Furthermore, Byakuren used the Yin Release, allowing him to infuse the swords with unique capabilities that transcended ordinary weapon crafting.


    He used it to imbue the swords with various special properties and to glue them together and make them into finished products.


    Additionally, Hikari thought that for multiple models it could be that even fuinjutsu was used, and for the most famous Samehada, even the Yang Release was probably used.


    Hikari then learned that historically Byakuren was already an old man by the time he became Mizukage. So, he needed to pass his swords on to someone worthy.


    When no other swordsman was skilled enough to wield all seven swords like himself, Byakuren selected seven disciples with the greatest talent that his country had to offer.


    Even those who weren''t ninja turned from their lives as samurai or mercenaries to be given the chance to learn from him. He taught them to each master one of the des that would be their inheritance and would, however, take the secrets of their creation to his grave.


    It was during the First Shinobi World War that they made their presence known. They sharpened their teeth in honor of their master and terrified their enemies, were brutal and merciless to their enemies and their swordsmanship put even most samurai to shame.


    By the war''s end, they were recognized worldwide as the infamous Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist.


    Just as the seven swords fell to them, it became tradition for the swords to be passed from one generation to the next as their wielders died in battle.


    The Swordsmen never retired from their service and weremitted to only knowing a life of battle.


    Those who aspired to be one of Swordsmen would sharpen their teeth themselves to symbolize their ambition andmitment to that cause.


    The Seven Ninja Swordsmen continued to gue the other hidden viges in each war and the sight of them together on the battlefield was often synonymous with Kirigakure''s victory.


    Meanwhile, with Byakugan active, Hikari didn''t just see the two swordsmen in front of him; he analyzed their chakra flow, their stance, and the slight twitches in their muscles that preceded movement.


    However, as the tension between Hikari and the two Swordsmen reached its peak, and the sh seemed imminent, a sudden twist urred that rarely took Hikaripletely by surprise.


    Both Raiga and Jinin, with swift, almost imperceptible gestures, activated hidden mechanisms within their swords.


    These were not merely ornate or traditional features but intricatemand systems embedded within the weapons themselves.


    To Hikari''s astonishment, the activation of thesemands summoned two additional figures to the battlefield, one done by each of them.


    One ''arrival'' was Kushimaru Kuriarare, known for his merciless use of the long, needle-like sword "Nuibari," which could sew enemies together in a grotesque tapestry of death.


    The other was a wielder of "Shibuki", the predecessor of Jinpachi Munashi from the original story. He understood from the Hozuki Patriarch''s intelligence that he was called "Fumetsu".


    Raiga''s smirk widened as he observed Hikari''s reactions, the young Hyuga''s poised readiness contrasting sharply with the casual demeanor of the Mist Swordsmen.


    "Yes, we the ''Seven Swordsman'' are known to be quite brazen and bold, but make no mistake, when ites to the strategic interest of our vige, we don''t take chances...", Raiga dered, his voiceced with a hint of respect and intrigue.


    "We''ve seen what you''re capable of, boy. Taking down the Hozuki n patriarch by a river, that''s no small feat, there are not many people in our vige who could do that...", Raiga continued, his eyes gleaming with a mixture of amusement and seriousness, "Jinin and I alone indeed might not cut it against someone of your caliber. That''s why we set up this little... weemittee. You''ve just walked into our trap, Hyuga-boy, time for payback."

 106. Hikari’s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (2)

    106. Hikari¡¯s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (2)


    ''These swords have embedded jutsu forms enabling them to transport fellow swordsmen, though it seems this function requires proximity, as they''ve only summoned two others that were nearby also on this South battle heated of ours, instead of all seven. This indicates a limited range for their summoning ability.'',


    Internally, Hikari pieced together the implications of this first, ''This meeting was a deliberate ambush from the start, aimed at avenging the Hozuki n patriarch.'',


    ''They''re specifically targeting me, themander of this front, both to neutralize a major threat and to extract potentially valuable intelligence¡ªmuch like what we aplished with the patriarch. A well-conceived n...'',


    ''Their aggressive behavior these days also probably weren''t entirely due to emotions or desperation but as a part of this objective...'',


    Nevertheless, Hikari, meanwhile stood poised and unshaken as he faced the four elite Mist Swordsmen outwardly, his expression betraying none of the strategic calctions whirling through his mind as he assessed his present chances and prospects regarding this battle.


    His voice was cool and even as he responded to their unveiled intentions, "Who is to say that you haven''t just walked into your own trap instead?",


    Hikari''s gaze swept across the four warriors arrayed before him, "If I were to eliminate a few more of Kirigakure''s elites today, what would be left of your forces on this front?"


    The Mist Swordsmen exchanged quick nces, each understanding the gravity of Hikari''s threat and the need for a coordinated assault. Raiga was the first to vocalize their collective resolve.


    "You think too highly of yourself, Hyuga...", Raiga sneered, his hand tightening around the hilt of his Thunder Swords, "But we are not so easily cowed. And we''ve prepared ordingly."


    Subsequently, the Mist Swordsmen nodded toward one another and executed their strategy with precision and practiced ease, taking full advantage of their unique weapons andbat styles to coordinate their attack on Hikari.


    Kushimaru and Raiga took the lead in setting the pace of the battle, leveraging their abilities to control the field from a distance in order to allow Jinin and Fumetsu to finish him off close distance more safely, after all, they were well aware of how this seemingly strongest Hyuga was dangerous in close quarterbat.


    Therefore, Kushimaru, with his Nuibari,unched a series of deadly, precise attacks aimed at pinning Hikari down or limiting his movement.


    The long needle-like sword thrummed through the air, alongside Kushimaru himself, from multiple directions, its silken thread aiming to ensnare Hikari''s limbs, constraining or distracting him enough to make him an easier target for others.


    Simultaneously, Raiga also started moving around extremely quickly in circles while utilizing his ''Kiba'' to generate electrical attacks that zigzagged across the battlefield, traveling through both the ground and air toward Hikari.


    His focus was on disruption, creating a dynamic field of electrical energy that not only aimed to harm or constrain Hikari but also to disorient him at worst, making it difficult for the Hyuga to focus or counter effectively all the more.


    With Hikari distracted by the ranged assaults, Fumetsu and Jinin prepared to close in for the decisive blow. Fumetsu, wielding the explosive Shibuki, stayed slightly behind Jinin, ready to use the explosive capabilities of his de to either create openings for Jinin or to deliver a devastating final strike should Jinin''s initial attack falter.


    Jinin, armed with the Kabutowari, was the primary closebat threat. Known as the Helmet Splitter, his weapon was capable of breaking through and crashing anything.


    He moved with deliberate power, aiming to get close enough to use the massive weight and sheer force of Kabutowari to smash through any defensive technique Hikari might deploy.


    Their formation was a blend of long-range harassment and close-range brute force, a tactic designed to overwhelm Hikari''s defensive capabilities and prevent him from effectively using his Byakugan and Gentle Fist techniques.


    As the Swordsmen converged all around Hikari like he was prey, the air was tense with the anticipation of a fierce sh, each warrior acutely aware of the stakes involved in this battle.


    As the Mist Swordsmen advanced in their meticulously coordinated attack, Hikari''s mind raced, analyzing and adapting to the unfolding battle. His Byakugan afforded him an unparalleled field of vision, allowing him to perceive everything as if in "slow-motion".


    The onught from Kushimaru and Raiga was intense, their long-range attacks were designed not just to injure but to manipte his movements and control the battlefield.


    ''They''re using their ranged capabilities to funnel me toward Jinin and Fumetsu...'', Hikari soon noted internally, his eyes tracking the trajectory of each attack with phenomenal precision,


    ''They''re very fast... So, even though they are only kenjutsu masters, their overall average body stats on the level of Elite Jonin at least, and special sword abilities, certainly make them exceptional shinobi...'',


    The jungle around them provided both cover andplexity to the battlefield, offering Hikari brief moments of respite.


    With a swift decision, Hikari feigned a momentarypse under the barrage from Raiga and Kushimaru, appearing to stumble and momentarily exposing himself to a close-range attack.


    This bait was designed to draw Jinin and Fumetsu intomitting to a dual strike, which would ce them exactly where he wanted them.


    As he predicted, Jinin, seeing an opportunity, charged forward with the Kabutowari, aiming to break through Hikari''s defenses with a single, devastating blow.


    Fumetsu followed closely, ready to use the explosive power of Shibuki to capitalize on any breach Jinin created or cover his advance.


    However, just as the two Swordsmen closed in, Hikari''s feint ended. He rapidly shifted his stance, activating a powerful burst of chakra through his legs to propel himself sideways with explosive speed, dodging the iing assault and positioning himself perfectly between Jinin and Fumetsu.


    As Hikari lunged forward to execute his n, his acute ''360 degrees vision'' and ''X-ray vision'' caught the glint of Kushimaru''s Nuibari, emerging from the ground and now weaving a deadly dance of threaded steel through the underbrush towards him.


    Simultaneously, Raiga''s electrically charged shes, the strongest so far, cut through the air, converging on Hikari''s intended path.


    It became clear that his opponents had anticipated his tactics, adapting swiftly to counter his maneuvers.


    "He was trying to bait and split us up, his tactics aren''t bad...", Jinin remarked gruffly, his voice carrying a note of grudging respect.


    Raiga, with a sharp grin, added from the distance, "Not bad, Hyuga. But we''re not so easily outyed."


    As Hikari engaged his Wind Release: Rotation next, a protective cyclone of chakra whirled around him.


    He aimed to clear the immediate area and regain control of the fight, as he realized that it was the best course of action.


    The high-speed winds were designed to push his opponents back and disrupt their coordinated attack pattern.


    It was also an attempt to confuse his enemies with its wide and chaotic radius, and then strike them from a surprising direction afterward, which was his standard battle tactic.


    However, his hope was short-lived as Jinin, with calcted ferocity, leaped directly into the eye of the storm with a grunting sound.


    The image of the burly swordsman descending from above with his formidable Kabutowari¡ªa uniquebination of an axe and a hammer¡ªwas startling.


    Jinin''s timing was impable; he struck at the precise moment, his axe cleaving through the turbulent whirlwind of chakra, followed by a devastating smash from his hammer.


    The axe made the initial contact, slicing with unyielding force, while the hammer followed in a seamless, fluid motion, falling downward.


    This technique, leveraging the axe''s cut to create a weak point and then using the hammer to exponentially increase the force at that exact spot, shattered Hikari''s Rotation defense.


    The force was so immense that it seemed to carry some weight-based enhancement, in Hikari''s observation, possibly some form of fuinjutsu that magnified its mass upon impact.


    Caught off guard by the sheer power and the unique mechanics behind Jinin''s attack, Hikari felt the first threat of danger and a huge surprise.


    The shock of seeing his strongest defensive technique neutralized, so easily, for the first time, sent a clear message: the stakes of this confrontation were higher than he anticipated.


    He didn''t expect Jinin''s ''Sword'' to work even on pure chakra and Wind Release. That''s why he immediately, after instantaneous observation with his Byakugan, attributed it to some unique jutsu forms present inside of that hammer to increase the Jinin attack''s weight, after he ced it down and he jumped above it all himself, to utilize the force of gravity safely.


    Realizing his vulnerability, Hikari knew he had to quickly reassess and adapt. The broken Rotation left him exposed, and with Jinin''s attack disrupting his momentum, he had to make another split-second decision.


    His only viable option was to retreat toward where the other three Swordsmen awaited, potentially leading him into further danger, but it was a necessary risk to reposition next.


    As he disengaged, dodging back with an agile leap, Hikari''s mind raced with new strategies.

 107. Hikari’s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (3)

    107. Hikari¡¯s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (3)


    As Hikari''s Rotation dwindled and he attempted to retreat, he found himself ensnared in another wellid trap, and another wave of attacks from all sides, just after dispelling the previous one barely.


    Kushimaru, wielding his infamous Nuibari, and controlling it with his chakra from great distances, while also moving his body from one side of the battlefield to another, at great speed, had skillfully cast an extensivework of the sword''s sharp wire around him that would be invisible for him had Hikari not had Byakugan.


    The metallic wire, known for its ability to pierce and stitch enemies together, glinted menacingly as it closed in, threatening to bind Hikari in a deadly embrace. Its sharpness was so refined it could slice through the chakra itself, making it a formidable tool for capturing or disabling an opponent.


    Hikari''s heart raced as he realized the precariousness of his situation. Kushimaru''s control over the wire was masterful, manipting it like a puppeteer with deadly intent. The wire''s ability to extend indefinitely posed a significant challenge, as it allowed Kushimaru to maintain a safe distance while still wielding effective control over the battlefield and the more time passed on the greater threat its length, hence the threat it exhibits could be.


    Then, in a quick bid for freedom again, Hikari activated his "Rotation Armor," a less intensive version of his full Rotation technique, which he could sustain longer but offered a weaker defense, as his full-on Rotation would still be ''on a cooldown'' for a few more of seconds after the previous use.


    This barrier of swirling chakra was his best immediate defense, a shield meant to repel physical attacks as he sought to extricate himself physically from the wire''s tightening grip.


    However, the exceptional properties of Nuibari proved challenging even for Hikari''s chakra-infused defense.


    The sword''s wire was unexpectedly resilient, its thin yet extraordinarily hard material resisting the shearing force of Hikari''s chakra armor.


    Struggling, Hikari exerted more power, pushing his chakra to its limits to create enough force to propel himself forward through the constricting wire.


    Just as Hikari began to make headway, he caught sight of Fumetsu and Kiba rapidly approaching, ready to capitalize on hispromised position.


    The timing left him little room to maneuver, and his focus on escaping Kushimaru''s trap meant he had scant moments to prepare for the new threat converging on him quickly.


    Hikari''s mind raced with calctions and strategic adjustment, ''The basic Gentle Fist techniques I mastered as a child are ineffective at this level ofbat against such elite opponents. I must rely on my specialized and advanced arsenal fully...'', Hikari concluded.


    Currently faced with the immediate threat of Raiga, who was rapidly spinning toward him in a mid-air whirlwind created by his twin Thunderswords, and with a small but sharp radius, at extreme speeds, appearing like a blinding light of fierce, thunderous chakra, Hikari acted.


    Despite his Hyuga advantage, Raiga''s twin Thunderswords posed a unique threat, in closebat, even for him. Known as the sharpest des in the world, these weapons could potentially ''cut'' through and ''defeat'' chakra itself with ease, much like Jinin''s Kabutowari had proven capable. With this in mind, Hikari was cautious.


    These ''Kiba'' twin swords, known for their unmatched sharpness, could channel and amplify lightning chakra, making them a lethal weapon in skilled hands. Raiga''s maneuver, a horizontal tornado of lightning chakra, was not only a defensive barrier but also a deadly attack. It used not only Raiga''s own Lighting Release but also the sword as an amplifier.


    Hikari had already witnessed the unexpected capabilities of Jinin''s weapon; making the same mistake with Raiga''s swords could prove disastrous. Determined not to confront the spinning vortex of lightning head-on, Hikari, therefore, executed his next strategy swiftly.


    He firstunched the two "Celestial Rotation Spheres" toward Raiga in mid-air, who was rapidly approaching in a deadly, spinning descent. The spheres, designed to expand into full Rotations upon impact, were aimed to intercept and disrupt the swordsman''s charged attack.


    As Raiga spun, attempting to fend off iing attacks with his chakra-charged tornado, and then tried to maneuver mid-air to dodge, Hikari''s ''Rotation Spheres'' closed the distance swiftly, premeditatedly elerated to the maximum with Hikari''s Wind Release mastery.


    Despite Raiga''s attempts to pivot and counter the iing threat, the spheres struck true, expanding explosively into Rotations that disrupted the flow of his technique and halted him.


    The impact of the spheres forced Raiga to cease his attack, momentarily throwing him off bnce and neutralizing one of the key threats from a distance temporarily. With Raiga momentarily neutralized Hikari then quickly readied himself for the next nned move.


    As the battle unfolded, Hikari recognized a crucial moment to shift the tide. Fumetsu, momentarily isted from hisrades, became the perfect target for a decisive strike. Hikari''s smirk barely flickered across his face as he prepared to exploit this opening.


    Fumetsu, wielding the formidable Shibuki, attacked with vigor. The stsword, notorious for its ability to generate relentless explosions, was a terrifying weapon in close quarters.


    Each swing of Fumetsu''s sword was apanied by a burst of explosive energy, designed to devastate an opponent upon contact.


    The sword''s unique mechanism re-applied explosive tags automatically, ensuring continuous destruction with each strike.


    However, Hikari, leveraging his Byakugan''s enhanced perception, dodged with an agility that betrayed his calm demeanor.


    As Fumetsu''s de came crashing down, Hikari ducked low, narrowly avoiding the explosive onught.


    In the same fluid motion, he tapped into his deep reservoir of chakra tounch a precise counter.


    From several unexpected points across his body, Hikari projected chakra projectiles, targeting Fumetsu''s legs.


    These projectiles, aimed with pinpoint uracy, hit their mark, temporarily sealing the movement in Fumetsu''s legs.


    With his opponent immobilized, Hikari seized the moment to end the confrontation decisively.


    Swiftly circling to Fumetsu''s back, Hikari prepared his final move¡ªa technique he had honed over recent months, using of course his special vision of natural energy.


    Channeling natural energy along with his chakra externally, he pressed his palm against Fumetsu''s back.


    The energy mixture, carefully bnced, was designed not just to incapacitate but to transform.


    As the chakra and natural energy permeated Fumetsu''s chakra pathway system and circted alongside it everywhere in a recycling motion, it began to react with his physical form, calcifying his tissues and turning him into stone gradually.


    The swordsman, known for his explosive assaults, had not anticipated being so thoroughly outmaneuvered and immobilized.


    His expression twisted into one of shock and horror as he felt the unusual surge of chakra and natural energy envelop his body.


    As the chakra infused with natural energy began its work, Fumetsu''s eyes widened in helpless terror. The transformative energy that Hikarimanded seeped deep, turning muscle and bone to stone from the inside out.


    Fumetsu''s attempt to move or counter was futile; his body stiffened unnaturally, his features setting into a permanent, petrified scream as he was calcifiedpletely.


    Hikari wasted no time as he approached Fumetsu''s petrified form. He swiftly retrieved the valuable sword, Shibuki, from the stone grip of his opponent. Recognizing the strategic and material value of the weapon, he carefully wrapped the sword in a sealing scroll, executing precise hand signs to ensure it was securely stored within the scroll''s chakra matrix.


    As Fumetsu''s stone form stood as a silent, morbid statue amidst the chaos of battle, Hikari turned his attention back to the remaining swordsmen, ready to continue the fight with a clear message sent about his capabilities.


    Hikari stepped away from the petrified form of Fumetsu, and a flicker of satisfaction crossed hisposed facade, ''It seems that this technique also works perfectly in real battle. Excellent.'', He thought, acknowledging his sess in adapting the move tobat conditions.


    He had deployed this particr move under immense pressure, knowing that the brief window before the arrival of the other swordsmen was his only chance to ''secure a kill''.


    The usual arsenal of Gentle Fist techniques, effective though for incapacitation and chakra maniption, would not have sufficiently neutralized an opponent of this caliber.


    His methods of sealing tenketsu, injecting Yin Release genjutsu, or employing juinjutsu micro-markings were excellent for disrupting an enemy''s chakra flow butcked the immediacy of lethal force required in this situation.


    This new technique, whichbined his chakra control and mastery of natural energy to induce rapid petrification, significantly escted hisbat repertoire. It allowed Hikari not just to incapacitate but to eliminate a high-threat target within seconds decisively.


    Pleased with the effectiveness of his adaptation under real-world conditions, Hikari prepared himself for the continuation of the fight, now with a proven and potent weapon in his arsenal.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari was quickly securing the Shibuki within the scroll, Raiga, Kushimaru, and Jinin watched from a distance, their expressions apprehensive and with a mixture of shock and rage as they exchanged nces.


    Huddled together, the remaining swordsmen quickly conferred in hushed tones, their expressions grave as they discussed their next steps.


    "Did you see that? Just one touch and Fumetsu was... turned to stone. What kind of technique was that?", Raiga asked, his expression full of surprise and filled with anger.


    "It must be some advanced Hyuga n technique, or something even rarer. We can''t let him get close enough to use it again if we engage in any way...", Kushimaru tightened his grip on Nuibari, his mind racing to devise a strategy that could exploit any potential weakness. However, his blood-lust skyrocketed and was already seeping out from beneath his mask.


    "We can''t back down now that he also took one of our prided swords and humiliated us again in such a way, killing one of us in front of our eyes when facing four of us together at the same time.",


    "It will be really bad for our morale if this leeks out. We need to somehow salvage this situation by killing him, or at least try to do that.",


    "However, if we drag this out into a ''war of attrition'', then we might win. While we rely on our special swords and kenjutsu which don''t drain our chakra as much. He uses dense chakra techniques. If we y it long, he might deplete his reserves before we do...", Jinin analyzed.

 108. Hikari’s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (4)

    108. Hikari¡¯s Stand Against The Hidden Mist Swordsmen (4)


    As the distance between them crackled with tension, Raiga shouted across to Hikari with a threatening and hostile tone of voice, his stance was aggressive, his eyes fixed on Hikari,


    "Hyuga brat! You think you''ve seen our full strength? Think again! We''ve just started!", His swords, the infamous Kiba, hummed with fierce and thunderous energy, more intense than before, now finally fully ''charged up'' from his chakra over time. The twin des glowed ominously, the quantity of lighting energy increasing all around Raiga and the entire scene.


    Kushimaru chimed in, his tone sounding menacing from behind his mask, "Your little tricks won''t save you forever. We''re ready for a long fight, kid, and let you ''bleed out''. Let''s see how much chakra you really have!", His words carried a promise of a drawn-out fight to the death.


    Jinin nodded, his voice loud and clear, "You took down one of us, but you won''t get past all!", He stood ready, his posture firm, signaling readiness for the next phase of their strategy. He nced a little at Raiga nearby and his skyrocketing thunderous aura, feeling more assured.


    As if without a trace of fear and with a cold look on his face, Hikari scanned his opponents with a calcting gaze, standingposed amidst the growing storm of threats. He shifted into a defensive stance, ready to meet their next onught, his eyes narrowed.


    Internally, however, Hikari fully acknowledged the gravity of the situation, these were not just any shinobi, these were real-world renowned elites. He understood their strategy: to wear him down with their unique weapons and superior numbers, exploiting any drop in his guard.


    As he prepared mentally, Hikari analyzed their approach, ''They n to use their range and the unique abilities of their swords to keep me on the defensive...'', He thought, ''They want to stretch the battle, drain my chakra and exploit my moments of weakness. This will be tough.''


    The battle erupted with renewed intensity as all four Swordsmenunched their attacks simultaneously. Raiga, harnessing the full power of his amplified Kiba swords, unleashed a torrent of thunderous energy. The lightning surged from the ground like a living conduit, tracking Hikari''s movements relentlessly, forcing him to continuously dodge and weave.


    Kushimaru, wielding his Nuibari with lethal precision, sent the sword slicing through the air like a guided missile, its deadly thread weaving a of death around Hikari. He expertly manipted the thread, attempting to hit or ensnare Hikari and restrict his movements.


    Jinin, all the more cautious of getting too close to Hikari due to his newly-shown deadly mysterious attack that took down Fumetsu, maintained a medium distance this time.


    He hovered, looking for the perfect moment to dive down with his Kabutowari, aiming to break through Hikari''s defenses in a single, devastating blow.


    Pressed on all sides, Hikari was forced to repeatedly activate his Wind Release: Rotation to escape traps and block the barrage of attacks multiple times.


    Each escape cost him valuable chakra, and as dozens of minutes passed, he felt the drain intensifying.


    Despite his strategic mind racing for solutions, he recognized the grim reality: if the battle continued like this, he would inevitably lose in a war of attrition.


    He needed to find a way to shift the momentum quickly or find an opening to exploit, as his reserves dwindled under the unrelenting assault of his opponents.


    Over time, as Hikari carefully observed his opponents and evaluated his remaining jutsu options, he recognized a strategic opportunity.


    While his throwable Rotation Spheres were ineffective against the swift movements of Kushimaru and Raiga, Jinin presented a more viable target due to his slower speed, burdened by the heavy Kabutowari and his body frame.


    Therefore, as the battle waged, Hikari always looked for, patiently waited, and then finally noticed that Jinin was momentarily disadvantaged by the dense jungle terrain and the positioning of hisrades'' short-term attacks.


    Seizing this critical moment, Hikari executed a calcted move. He threw one of his Rotation Spheres behind Jinin, effectively cutting off his retreat paths by creating a barrier of swirling chakra. But, the distance was still a little too far away for him to cross on time now quickly and effectively, he noticed.


    However, then another sh of inspiration struck him, ''This could work...'', Hikari mused, a rare smirk crossing his usually impassive face, ''It''s risky, but it might just turn the tide...'',


    Empowered by this ingenious n, Hikari quickly set it into motion. With tactical ingenuity, Hikari ced another Rotation Sphere directly beneath his own feet on the jungle floor.


    When it expanded, it catapulted him forward at an unprecedented speed directly toward Jinin, turning the sphere''s defensive properties into an aggressiveunch pad for mobility.


    This sudden burst of speed and surprise maneuver aimed to close the distance instantly and catch Jinin off-guard, before he could try to escape, positioning Hikari for a direct assault.


    Hikari swiftly found himself face-to-face with Jinin, the critical seconds ticking by as he predicted the impending reactions from Kushimaru and Raiga.


    Jinin caught off guard, grunted apprehensively as he scrambled to defend himself. He attempted to leverage the weight of his weapon for an aerial attack, but Hikari, using precise Wind Release: Vacuum sts, countered him mid-air, thwarting any upward movement.


    Once on the ground, Jinin swung his axe and hammer with desperate expertise, trying to fend off the young Hyuga.


    Hikari''s movements were a blur, his Byakugan predicting each swing, each motion with uncanny uracy.


    He feinted an attack with his Twin Lion fists, which Jinin narrowly dodged,mitting to a defensive posture that left him vulnerable.


    In that fleeting moment, Hikari executed a seamless transition; instead of pursuing the Twin Lions, he expelled chakra projectiles from his lower body tenketsu points, effectively immobilizing Jinin''s arms and forcing the melee fighter to drop his formidable weapon.


    With Jinin now defenseless and his weapons ttering to the jungle floor, Hikari ced a palm on his back. He channeled natural energy through his chakra, initiating a rapid petrification process.


    Under Jinin''s horrified gaze, his body began to turn to stone, immobilizing him permanently. Hikari had not only neutralized another formidable opponent but had done so with strategic brilliance and lethal efficiency.


    However, the strain of the battle was beginning to tell on Hikari. Subtle signs of fatigue flickered across his otherwiseposed demeanor, all over his body, though he masked them expertly. Standing before the now petrified body of Jinin, he took a quick breath.


    Then with precise movements, he drew forth another scroll and once again sealed the fallen swordsman''s formidable weapon within it.


    Each action was calcted, and his breathing was carefully controlled to conserve energy and maintain his readiness for the continuing challenges.


    The loss of another esteemedrade sent a wave of shock through Raiga and Kushimaru. Their expressions, tight with anger and fear, betrayed their apprehension. The fall of two of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist, along with the loss of two legendary swords, was a blow not only to their personal pride but also to Kirigakure''s esteemed martial reputation.


    They knew the stories of their defeats, at the hands of such a young opponent, would eventually ripple through their vige, sowing doubt and fear, and possibly even beyond.


    Standing across from Hikari, whose face remained an unreadable mask of calm, they realized the gravity of their situation.


    Despite their desire to charge forward, avenge their fallenrades, and reim their vige''s honor, they recognized the risk of adding their own names to the list of casualties.


    Hikari''s countenance and the mysterious and deadly ability to petrify with a touch made them reconsider their next move carefully.


    Raiga and Kushimaru, grappling with the weight of their losses, exchanged a brief, intense nce, ''understanding'' everything instantly, before turning their attention back to Hikari.


    "Hyuga...", Raiga began seriously, after calming down a little, his voice firm, his posture rigid with the resolve of a seasoned warrior, "Your strength is undeniable. But this battle has cost you enough, although you mask it that well.",


    "There is no way that someone of your age, and a Hyuga at that, has that much chakra to spare, no matter the talent, we''ve seen your expenditure throughout with our own eyes..."


    Kushimaru, his expression hard, added, "We offer you a pause in hostilities¡ªnot out of weakness, but from a position of prudence. Kirigakure values its warriors too highly to lose more in a skirmish when there are greater wars to fight.",


    Their words were carefully chosen, projecting strength and strategic foresight rather than surrender, framing their proposal not as a defeat but as a tactical decision to conserve strength for future confrontations.


    Hikari contemted their words for a moment, his expression unreadable as he weighed his options. Inside, his thoughts were clear and strategic,


    ''I''ve already expended half of my chakra reserves, and while my forces are engaging the enemy throughout this region, victory isn''t guaranteed. Lingering here with dwindling resources only esctes the risk to my safety.


    Securing two of the legendary swords and defeating two of the Swordsmen already marks a significant triumph for me. It''s prudent to withdraw now and preserve my strength for future confrontations utilizing these victories.'',


    Therefore, with a calm nod, Hikari eventually responded outwardly, but maintained hisposure and still appeared ''strong'',


    "Your proposal is eptable. Let us end this conflict here. It''s a wise decision for all involved, call your men back...", He said, his voice even and controlled, giving no hint of his internal calctions.


    His agreement was framed not as a concession but as an acknowledgment of mutual respect and the tactical acumen to recognize when a battle had served its purpose.


    As Hikari and the two Swordsmen called for their respective forces to retreat, the groups parted ways, disappearing into the dense foliage of the jungle.


    Throughout the withdrawal, Raiga and Kushimaru wore expressions of deep introspection and disbelief.


    The defeat, particrly at the hands of someone so young, weighed heavily on them. They had entered the battle as four of the feared Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist, only for two of their number to fall so decisively.


    Their shame was palpable. Losing two of the legendary swords, symbols of Kirigakure''s might and prestige, as well as standing within the wider ninja world from the beginning to a 13-year-old prodigy from Konoha, challenged everything they believed about their own strength and the invincibility of the Mist Swordsmen.


    This was not just a physical defeat but a profound psychological blow that called into question their status and the very legacy they carried.


    As they made their way back to their own lines, Raiga and Kushimaru remainedrgely silent, each lost in his own thoughts about the implications of the day''s events for themselves and for Kirigakure''s future.


    This was a loss that would resonate deeply within them, shaping their actions and possibly their strategies in the war toe.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari himself also guided his depleted forces back, his mind reyed the scenes of the intense confrontation.


    He assessed the events critically, noting the increasing difficulty of each encounter as he faced more formidable opponents from Kirigakure.


    ''This encounter was significantly more challenging than my battle with the Hozuki n patriarch...'', Hikari mused internally, ''So, even though I''ve also grown slightly stronger since then, confronting these four was a near-overwhelming task.'',


    ''Had the battle drawn out longer, even a victory might have cost me dearly, possibly leading to severe injuries or a fatal depletion of my chakra.'',


    ''It''s one thing to face an elite opponent, quite another to face four¡ªespecially when two of them, Raiga and Kushimaru, are among the strongest Elite Jonin.'',


    ''Their ability to synchronize so effectively really amplified their threat level. It wasn''t just their individual skills that made them formidable, but how well they worked together, the entire time, from the beginning, topound their strengths.'',


    As he navigated the jungle terrain, leading his remaining troops to safety, Hikari''s thoughts lingered on the implications of the battle, ''Such experiences are truly invaluable for my path as a shinobi... Battle strategy and intelligence helped me greatly this time...'', He concluded.

 109. Hikari’s Confrontation with the Kirigakure’s Jinchuriki (1)

    109. Hikari¡¯s Confrontation with the Kirigakure¡¯s Jinchuriki (1)


    After Hikari''s pivotal victory over two of the Swordsmen of the Mist, the morale among Konoha''s forces on that part of the front surged dramatically.


    Hikari''s reputation soared both among his own troops and in the eyes of his enemies.


    The loss dealt a severe blow to the morale of the Kirigakure forces, visibly shifting the momentum of the conflict.


    In the following months, bolstered by their newfound confidence, Konoha''s shinobi pressed forward, steadily pushing the frontline deeper into the continental territory of the Land of Water.


    Hikari, now a figure of significant renown and fear, exploited the enemy''s disarray, catching numerous Kirigakure squadrons off guard.


    His tactics were ruthless and effective, decimating entire enemy units single-handedly and cementing his fearsome reputation.


    This relentless advance continued, with Konoha gaining ground and putting the Kirigakure forces on a persistent backfoot.


    However, despite these sesses, the tide of war was about to take an unexpected turn.


    Everything shifted dramatically when Kirigakure, feeling the sting of their earlier defeats, decided to deploy their two Jinchuriki to this area of the front.


    The presence of these formidable forces changed the dynamics of the conflict. These Jinchuriki, utilizing their partial transformations, exhibited remarkable speed and agility, swiftly breaking through Konoha''s formations.


    They targeted and annihted entire squadrons with devastating efficiency, retreating before Konoha could muster sufficient forces to encircle and counter them.


    Despite being easily detectable due to their immense chakra signatures, their incredible speed meant theypleted their destructive tasks and withdrew long before Konoha could effectively respond.


    This new strategy by Kirigakure began to push back against Konoha''s advances, causing significant disruption to their previously gained momentum,pletely returning everything to the previous state after a few more months, effectively erasing all of Konoha''s gains so far.


    As the Jinchuriki wreaked havoc on Konoha''s forces over time, Hikari initially refrained from confronting them directly, recognizing the disadvantage of facing the two together. He still valued his own life above everything else, including the war campaign sess of his side.


    Instead, he experimented with tactics at first¡ªsetting traps and organizing ambushes¡ªbut all attempts proved futile against the Jinchuriki''s swift and destructive assaults over time.


    During this period, Hikari, eventually turning 14 years of age during that time, continued to refine his mastery over external control of natural energy, making significant strides in his training while managing his forces from a distance.


    Months passed, and with the relentless damage inflicted by the Jinchuriki threatening to tilt the war in Kirigakure''s favor way too much, beyond the point of return, and Hikari''s own strength growing as the massive training paid off, Hikari realized he could no longer remain on the sidelines.


    Although not yet confident in his ability to match a Mid-Kage level, he estimated needed to win over the two of them, at the same time, as they were both around Early-Kage level individually, in his estimates, his continuous training had brought him close to that level.


    Therefore, saw engaging the Jinchuriki as a necessary risk, potentially even as the catalyst needed for his breakthrough to that level during the battle.


    With the situation growing dire, Hikari decided it was time to act. Sealing his chakra points to minimize his presence, he nowy in wait in the dense jungle.


    Alongside him, selected squadrons acted as bait, drawing the Jinchuriki into his meticulously nned ambush.


    This moment was the culmination of months of preparation and growth, a calcted risk Hikari was now ready to take to turn the tide of the war.


    Hidden in the dense undergrowth, Hikari currently braced himself and mentally prepared for the uing battle, recognizing the gravity of the challenge ahead.


    The confrontation with the Jinchuriki represented not just a crucial moment in the war but the biggest test of his growth and capabilities so far, his hardest battle up until this point.


    Facing even the two "imperfect" Jinchuriki¡ªbeings whose power dwarfed that of even the most elite shinobi¡ªunderscored both how much he had evolved and the lengths he still needed to go to handle potential threats, in the future, that he was perfectly aware existed both external and internal kinds.


    Hikari''s relentless training regimen, still continuing even while being mobilized on this front, had been fueled by more than just ambition; it was driven by a deep-seated fear of defeat that haunted him even in his sleep.


    Nightmares of potential defeat turned into motivation, pushing him to train with even greater intensity each day, no matter how far he already got as a shinobi, and no matter the location.


    The dense jungle suddenly resonated with the approach of formidable chakra signatures. Hikari''s Byakugan sharpened as he saw two figures break through the tree line, their bodies cloaked in the eerie chakra of their respective tailed beasts.


    The first was the Three-Tails Jinchuriki, his form surrounded by a bubbling, aqueous chakra cloak that hinted at the beast''s aquatic nature.


    Beside him, the Six-Tails Jinchuriki emitted a noxious, pale chakra cloud, reflective of the slug-like beast sealed within him.


    Both Jinchuriki had already transformed into their partial Version 1 forms, showcasing their readiness for battle.


    Their chakra cloaks pulsed rhythmically, a visual testament to the raw power at theirmand.


    As they surveyed their surroundings, their eyes were sharp and calcting, ready to engage at the slightest hint of an enemy.


    Hikari, hidden in his ambush position, watched them closely, analyzing their movements and preparing for the right moment to strike.


    As Hikari then released his chakra points swiftly and expertly, a burst of energy surged through him, enhancing his reflexes and strength to their peak.


    With a swift motion, heunched two of his Rotation Spheres,pact orbs of spinning chakra that flew with lethal precision toward Isobu and Saiken.


    By this point, the rest of the ''bait'' shinobi that were present on the scene, also tactically moved back to observe and wait for the right moment to maybe try and help Hikariter as they were instructed.


    Simultaneously, Hikari propelled himself forward with a burst of Wind Release under his feet, enhancing his already impressive speed.


    His form blurred as he dashed through the jungle terrain, leaves and debris swirling in the wake of his rapid movement.


    His eyes, sharp with the rity of the Byakugan, focused intently on the Jinchuriki, calcting the best angles and timings for his strikes.


    Additionally, the previously thrown Rotation Spheres erupted into full-blown Wind Rotations,on the ground, throwing debris and disorienting his targets, Hikari capitalized on that precise moment of confusion.


    His form blurred into action, surrounded by a whirling aura of chakra ¡ª his Rotation Armor, a necessary shield against the overwhelming chakra of the Jinchuriki.


    Hikari knew that he had to leave this ''Armor'' constantly on him for protection, from the beginning, or else risk being physically destroyed with their overwhelming tangible Tailed Beast''s potent, and boiling-hot kind of chakra even in their Version 1.


    Without hesitation, Hikariunched his newest and most potent ''ordinary'' technique so far that didn''t involve natural energy maniption in any way, ''Wind Release: Rotation Drill''.


    His arm transformed into a deadly drill, spiraling with intense speed andpact wind chakra.


    The technique was not just a testament to his mastery of the Wind Release but also a fusion with the Hyuga''s Gentle Fist, aimed to prate defenses that were impervious to conventional chakra disruption techniques.


    This was Hikari''s answer to the overwhelming chakra of the Jinchuriki ¡ª a direct, piercing strike designed to bypass the monstrous energy that made sealing their chakra points an impossibility.


    His Twin Lion Fist, though formidable, was inadequate against foes of this caliber, he couldn''t possibly try to seal or steal chakra of that level of potency, he knew that from the beginning.


    Thus, he had developed the Rotation Drill, fine-tuning it over months of relentless training and preparation, specifically for this confrontation.


    As he closed the distance, the drill whirred with lethal intent, aiming to bore through the defenses of the nearest Jinchuriki.


    The sharp, rotating chakra was like a beacon of his resolve, cutting through the air and aiming to end the battle with a decisive blow quickly.


    However, Hikari was taken aback as his attack halted against the sudden, formidable defense of Isobu''s host, who purposefully ced himself in front of hisrade due to this precise reason which was his better defense capability.


    The Jinchuriki had ''partially transformed'' himself and formed a gray, shell-like barrier from a giant tail, robust enough to slow down the piercing motion of his attack considerably, so Hikari found his drill was still gaining ground, and piercing the hard shell-like material, albeit very slowly.


    Moreover, the Isobu''s host, now in his full three-tailed Version 1 form, threatened withrge, elongated, translucent chakra ws swiping at him from the other side.


    The Saiken''s host nearby also in his full Version 1 form mirrored this aggression, extending formidable chakra ws toward him, creating a pincer attack that left little room for evasion.


    With a burst of speed, Hikari retreated, as he realized his situation, using his Byakugan to navigate through the dense jungle. His mind raced as he understood the challenge ahead.


    ''Damn, the coordination between them is impable. Their timing is wless¡ªit''s almost like they''ve trained for this scenario too... The way they switched ces to position Isobu''s Jinchuriki in front of my strike... And their ''base speed'' even in Version 1 is exceptional...'',


    He thought, frustration momentarily clouding his usual calm, ''That first ''surprise strike'' was supposed to at least dent their morale or chip away some of their vitality and damage them in some way for the rest of the battle.'',


    ''But that shell¡ªit''s like striking a mountain. I guess it is because essentially this could be seen as some kind of a projection of Isobu''s true body in a much smaller form, making it simrly sturdy to a certain extent.'',


    ''It seems that I must be ready to retreat at a moment''s notice during this battle. The various cooperation and barrier jutsu prepared by my ''bait'' team here should at least buy me some time If I choose to escape next.'',


    He nced around, noting the positions of his forces hidden within the foliage, each ready to enact their part of the escape n.


    He was, from the beginning, ready to sacrifice them first if needed to escape or else he wouldn''t havee here in the first ce without that confidence.


    With this same assurance, he now also chose to remain in the fray to assess his capabilities against such formidable opponents, gain further valuablebat experience, and refine his newly developed skills in manipting natural energy in realbat for the first time ever.


    This encounter also presented a chance to possibly ascend to a new level of shinobi power.

 110. Hikari’s Confrontation with the Kirigakure’s Jinchuriki (2)

    110. Hikari¡¯s Confrontation with the Kirigakure¡¯s Jinchuriki (2)


    As the dust settled and the shattered jungley bare around them thanks to their chakra cloak projections, and as they were still enshrouded in their full Version 1 forms, Kaito, with his heightened senses from the Three Tails'' chakra, spotted Hikari exiting and now standing calmly amidst the chaos in the more open kind of field.


    His voice, carrying the guttural undertones of Isobu, echoed through the clearing, "You''re tough to pin down, Hikari Hyuga. And you have great vision and reaction speed. However, you''re outmatched here now that we cleared everything down."


    Riku, pulsing with the acidic chakra of the Six Tails, added with a menacing grin, "It seems that you thought you could take us on your own. Let''s see how long youst against us then."


    Their voices, tinged with the raw energy of their tailed beasts, filled the clearing, challenging Hikari not just with their words but with the sheer intensity of their presence, trying to intimidate and unnerve him.


    ''It''s truly fascinating. Even with my full capabilities for speed, including Wind Release and heightened processing speed, I''m just keeping pace with them in this form. Their Version 2 could be out of my reach...'', Hikari contemted.


    But, out loud, he taunted, "It seems Kirigakure isn''t as formidable as it pretends, having to deploy both Jinchuriki away from the vige during such critical times.",


    "Even the Hozuki Patriarch and those Swordsmen believed their own hype before they faced reality against me...", He retorted sharply, his voiceced with provocation.


    However, internally, his mind raced as he meticulously watched every minute movement of the Jinchuriki, preparing to react in an instant if needed.


    He understood well that the Jinchuriki, thanks to their Tailed Beasts sealed inside of them, possessed not only a vastly superior chakra reserve but also enhanced physical abilities and regenerative powers, even in their normal states, not to mention enhanced states like now.


    Kaito, the Three-Tails Jinchuriki, spoke first, his voice tinged with annoyance, "The past is the past, Hikari. Even you know well that you''re no match for the two of us now. So, what were you trying to aplish by openly setting such a little ''trap''?",


    "Do you think those fodders you ced around will manage to help you? You should have just continued hiding as you did these past months instead. Then maybe you would''ve lived through this war as the little mouse you are ."


    Riku, the Six-Tails Jinchuriki, added with a menacing tone, "We''ve been searching for you tirelessly. The Lord Mizukage has marked you as Kirigakure''s number one public enemy, after the humiliation you caused.",


    "And now that we''re here to stabilize this front, which we are doing, we''ll return to the vige with your head as a trophy. It''s only a matter of time."


    As Kaito and Riku faced Hikari, their internal fury simmered. This young, proud-looking teen was the primary reason this section of the front had started to falter, forcing them to intervene directly to salvage the situation during thest few months.


    Furthermore, this diversion meant abandoning the Mizukage''s critical n to deliver a final blow to the rival political factions led by the Kaguya and Yuki ns.


    Just when everything was aligning for their Mizukage to perfectly consolidate power and eliminate those prominent bloodline ns, which was his greatest dream and wish in life, this unexpected challenge arose.


    The Third Mizukage, who had treated them with all the respect and provided them autonomy, power, fame, and care¡ªunlike the treatment of Jinchuriki in other viges¡ªnow had his greatest ambitions thwarted.


    This failure to fulfill their leader''s greatest aspiration, even only temporarily, weighed heavily on their minds, fueling their resentment and eagerness to exact vengeance on Hikari next.


    As the fight soon intensified, and the two Jinchuriki managed to clear the field which was to their advantage for obvious reasons, Hikari found himself dodging and weaving through a barrage of attacks.


    Kaito, utilizing his ability to manipte coral,unched jagged structures from the ground, aiming to trap or impale Hikari.


    At the same time, Riku employed his Soap Bubble Ninjutsu, creating bubbles that exploded upon contact, releasing corrosive substances that sizzled menacingly as they burst near Hikari.


    Amid this chaos, Hikari was forced to deploy a series of his Wind Release techniques. His swift and sharp Rotations sliced through the iing coral structures, turning them into harmless debris.


    The Rotation Spheres he hurled disrupted Riku''s bubbles, causing them to pop at a safe distance.


    Yet, his Wind Release: Rotation Drill was the most energy-draining of all. Hikari spun it furiously, creating a powerful vortex that repelled all the attacks that breached closer.


    With the battlefield cleared of obstacles and every dodge costing him precious chakra, he had way less than his opponents, Hikari felt the pressure mounting.


    He knew he couldn''t sustain this defensive onught for much longer and started nning his next move, aware that his window to turn the tide was closing fast.


    Therefore, in a pivotal moment, Hikari honed his focus to an unprecedented degree, pushing his cognitive capabilities to their limit as he prepared to deploy the most potent weapon in his arsenal: his unique ability to perceive and manipte natural energy.


    With his Byakugan strained to its utmost, he activated its special mode that allowed him to see natural energy, a rare talent unique to his vision.


    Simultaneously, Hikari began to finely control the chakra coursing through his body, osciting it intensely to prepare for various external projections needed to control that natural energy he was now ''seeing'' everywhere outside.


    This preparation was crucial for interacting with the natural energy he now visualized outside his body, blending it with his own chakra to amplify his power. Thisplex technique demanded a profound ''flow state,'' which Hikari had diligently honed over recent months.


    With everything set, Hikari propelled himself forward at astonishing speed by channeling his chakra into his legs and feet, using the natural energy around him to boost his velocity alongside the wind release as he always did before.


    As he moved, he also enveloped one of his palms externally with a mix of controlled and distanced natural energy and wind chakra, careful to ensure it didn''t directly contact his skin to avoid harm.


    He nned to use it to ''push'' the natural energy into his enemy and kill him quickly, utilizing the advantage of this surprise attack they didn''t know he had in his arsenal.


    This sudden burst of speed and power caught Kaito off guard. To him, it was as though Hikari had vanished, reappearing with an enhanced velocity that was nearly impossible to track with the naked eye. He was now at least a level faster than before.


    The natural energy, invisible to them, left Kaito and hispanion momentarily bewildered, unsure of the source of Hikari''s newfound speed and strength.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari closed in on Kaito, he simultaneouslyunched a Rotation Sphere from his free palm towards Riku. This time, the sphere was not only faster but significantly more potent, enhanced by a surge of natural energy that Hikari had skillfully woven into its core.


    The added natural energy intensified the sphere''s rotational force, making it a more formidable projectile than ever before.


    The natural energy not only amplified the sphere''s destructive power but also its autonomy. Once released, the sphere moved with an unprecedented velocity, propelled by the natural energy that coursed through and around it.


    Hikari found that he no longer needed to guide it with his Wind Release; the natural energy itself dictated its trajectory, carrying it towards Riku with lethal precision.


    This strategic deployment allowed Hikari to focus his full attention on Kaito, attempting to capitalize on the momentary distraction his attack provided.


    As Hikari closed the distance between himself and Kaito, ready to deliver his potent attack with a palm infused with natural energy, he was taken aback.


    Kaito''s chakra cloak reacted instinctively, the dense chakra converging at the point of impact to form a robust barrier against the natural energy.


    Realizing the natural energy alone wouldn''t prate, Hikari quickly adapted.


    "Not enough time, I need to use the drill then!", Hikari eximed, surprised by the resilience of the chakra cloak.


    He swiftly began forming his Wind Release: Rotation Drill, now attempting to integrate natural energy into the technique for the first time to enhance its prating power.


    This integration required precise control and additional time to stabilize the vtile energies involved.


    Not to mention that he still didn''t master it quite well like all the other ''integrations'', because he learned that technique even in its ordinary form, and was familiar with it, only recently.


    However, as Hikari focused on refining his technique, Kaito seized the moment to escte the battle further.


    With a surge of power, he transitioned into his more formidable Version 2 Jinchuriki form, his silhouette expanding and distorting with even more intense and wild chakra.


    This sudden transformation meant that Kaito was now enveloped in a much thicker and more aggressive chakra cloak, presenting an even greater challenge to Hikari''s attack.


    As Kaito''s transformation into his Version 2 form waspleted, a massive surge of energy erupted from him.


    The ground beneath his feet cratered under the immense force, a testament to the formidable power now at hismand.


    His body was now encased in a dark red, nearly ck chakra cloak that took on a humanoid shape, acting as an endoskeleton that magnified his physical capabilities.


    The chakra shroud, thick and pulsating with violent energy, formed a formidable defense that could repel even the most robust attacks.


    In addition to the sheer increase in strength, speed, and chakra, Kaito could still use chakra arms to extend his reach and manipte his surroundings aggressively.


    Moreover, the advanced form allowed him to generate chakra bones around his body, providing additional defensive mechanisms and offensive options.


    As Hikari''s new ''Senjutsu: Wind Rotation Drill'' spiraled towards Kaito, the jinchuriki used the enhanced chakra arms granted by his Version 2 transformation to parry the attack.


    The energy was so dense and potent that it stopped Hikari''s drill in its tracks, demonstrating the formidable defense of the Version 2 cloak.


    At that moment, Riku, having also transformed into his Version 2, moved with startling speed and power. He surged forward and delivered a powerful punch to Hikari. The impact was fierce, sending Hikari hurtling backward through the air.


    The force of the blow was a clear testament to the increased strength and speed provided by the Six Tails'' chakra.

 111. Hikari’s Confrontation with the Kirigakure’s Jinchuriki (3)

    111. Hikari¡¯s Confrontation with the Kirigakure¡¯s Jinchuriki (3)


    Despite the intense power of Riku''s punch, Hikari was well-prepared with his defensive strategy.


    His body was enveloped in a swirling coat of natural energy, safely distanced from his skin and interwoven with his Wind Release: Rotation Armor.


    This unique blend of techniques effectively absorbed and dispersed the impact of Version 2 Jinchuriki''s attack.


    The collision resulted in a massive release of energy, kicking up debris and dust around them, yet Hikari remained rtively unscathed.


    His defense not only thwarted the physical damage but also allowed him to maintain his footing and readiness to continue the fight.


    This momentary pause gave Hikari a crucial opportunity to reassess his strategy and prepare for the next phase of the battle, recognizing the formidable challenge posed by the Jinchuriki''s enhanced forms.


    At his current mastery level, Hikari could only manipte natural energy close to his body or integrate it into his existing techniques.


    This limitation meant he was far from the more advanced applications he envisioned and aspired to achieve one day.


    Nheless, even this preliminary mastery provided a significant boost to his physical capabilities, enhancing his defense, offense, and speed to an entire level above what he had just moments ago, allowing him to go toe-to-toe even with Version 2 Jinchuriki forms like these.


    However, Hikari was acutely aware of the limitations imposed by the duration of his Byakugan''s special mode for seeing natural energy.


    This mode was crucial for maintaining his enhanced state, allowing him to see natural energy to a required level, alongside enemies'' moves in great detail, and almost like it was ''precognition'', from natural energy oscitions, all around the field, but the rtively short active period meant he had to conclude his battles swiftly.


    He remained hopeful that with more practice and experience, and his body and chakra still growing even naturally, due to his young age, he could extend the duration of this mode, but for now, he had to make every moment count while it was active.


    Despite the unstable mental states induced by their transformations, which left Kaito and Riku grappling with their Tailed Beasts'' interference and surging negative emotions, they were keenly aware that something extraordinary had urred with their opponent.


    They couldn''t discern the exact cause of the sudden increase in Hikari''s physical prowess or the enhanced potency of his techniques, as no visible clues hinted at the transformation. Yet, the physical evidence of his augmented capabilities was undeniable.


    Reacting instinctively to the heightened threat, both Kaito and Riku pushed their transformations to the maximum limits, reaching thest stage beforeplete loss of control to their Tailed Beasts.


    This precarious brinkmanship granted them ess to their most formidable powers, including the ability to materialize chakra bones for offense and defense.


    Theyunched into a fierce onught, aiming to overpower Hikari with sheer force before their ability to think and strategize was fully overwhelmed by their Beasts'' raw power.


    As Kaito and Riku closed in, the air around them crackled with the intense heat and power radiating from their molten-like chakra forms, altering the very atmosphere of the jungle.


    Hikari, sensing the immense energy and the rising temperature, remained asposed as possible despite the imminent threat.


    ''It seems they''ve lost a considerable part of their rationality...'', Hikari thought to himself, seeing this as a tactical advantage.


    The jinchuriki''s overwhelming power was palpable, but so was the decline in their strategic thinking, making them more predictable and impulsive in their attacks.


    As the battle intensified, Hikari met the two jinchuriki head-on, his rotational wind and natural energy swirling around him, forming a formidable barrier against their overwhelming beastly powers.


    The sh between their forces was titanic, with each movement shifting the terrain around them and sending reverberations through the air.


    They moved at such speed, that they were mere blurs against the jungle backdrop, a dance of immense power and speed.


    Nearby, the Konoha shinobi could only watch in awe and fear, the sheer intensity of the battle forcing them to retreat even further.


    The shockwaves of the confrontation sent leaves swirling and debris flying, emphasizing the danger of being too close to such unfathomable power.


    Hikari''s technique was pushed to its limits, matching the raw strength of the jinchuriki''s Version 2 forms.


    Every strike, every evasion was a test of his ability to control and harness the natural energy around him, using it not just defensively but also weaving it into his offensive maneuvers.


    As the battle raged, the jungle around them bore witness,pletely transforming under the duress of their epic showdown.


    As the battle wore on, Kaito and Riku''s grasp on their sanity wavered under the strain of their immense power, yet their physical capabilities continued to increase.


    Meanwhile, Hikari, in the heat ofbat, grew increasingly skilled at integrating natural energy into his fighting, a skill he had only practiced in the months leading up to this confrontation and never under such dire circumstances, and practice was very different from the real thing, so that was very valuable for him.


    With every sh, Hikari adapted and improved, his understanding of his newfound abilities deepening with each moment.


    He experimented with various attacks,unching chakra ejections from multiple tenketsu points, each fused with natural energy, attempting to break through the formidable defenses of his foes.


    Yet, time and again, he found his efforts thwarted either by the sheer density of their chakra cloaks or their rapid, almost instinctual ability to regroup and fortify their defenses against his strikes.


    As the battle reached a critical intensity, Hikari knew he couldn''t sustain the fight much longer.


    His unique Byakugan''s ''special mode'' was nearing its limit, and the monstrous chakra of the two Jinchuriki before him showed no signs of waning.


    Recognizing the dire situation, he understood the necessity of either concluding the battle swiftly or setting the stage for a strategic retreat.


    The potential emergence of two full-blown Tailed Beasts was also a risk that he couldn''t afford, especially as Kaito and Riku''s transformations became increasingly bestial.


    Amidst the chaos, a sh of insight struck Hikari. He decided to leverage his mastery over natural energy in a daring attempt to strip away the formidable chakra cloaks shielding the Jinchuriki and exposing their vulnerable human forms underneath, in order to be able to actually ''do something'' to them.


    It was a risky maneuver, requiring precision and immense control, qualities that Hikari had honed through relentless training.


    Hikari knew that the longer he remained engaged here, the slimmer his chances of a safe retreatter became.


    Every moment spent in this high-stakesbat escted his risk of severe injury or death.


    Yet, the potential reward¡ªcapturing two Jinchuriki¡ªwas an opportunity too significant to dismiss.


    The idea of not only defeating but capturing Kaito and Riku sparked an audacious n in Hikari''s mind.


    Therefore, presently driven by this bold strategy, he pushed his limits, channeling his understanding of natural energy and chakra control with unprecedented focus and precision.


    So, with intense focus, he adjusted his tactics. While dodging and weaving through their relentless assaults, Hikari began a meticulous process of practicing isting small sections of their chakra cloaks, without them even noticing due to their current mental states.


    His Byakugan pushed to its limits, helping him discern the subtle fluctuations in their defenses - preparing for when he attempted to do that kind of ''operation'' for real next.


    The ''countdown'' was tense; His eyesight was getting worse and worse, signaling that ''mode'' nearing its end, and if it happened before Hikari finished his ''operation'', he would surely die.


    However, fortunately for him, one by one, he managed to siphon off fragments of their dense chakra shields when he actually put that short practice into action as he deemed it was time.


    Once he had created these minute vulnerabilities, Hikari acted swiftly. With the precision of a skilled surgeon, he injected slender threads of natural energy into their exposed flesh.


    This energy, invisible and potent, began to interact with their biological systems through their chakra pathway system.


    The Jinchuriki, caught off guard by the sudden intrusion of this foreign energy, found themselves unable to react effectively.


    As the natural energy took hold, it began to petrify their bodies, starting from the points of contact and spreading rapidly.


    The transformation was swift and irreversible. Within moments, both Kaito and Riku were renderedpletely immobile, their bodies turning to stone from the inside out, their ''humanoid beast'' forms ending.


    As Hikari surveyed the petrified forms of Kaito and Riku, he moved swiftly, understanding the critical importance of securing them before their transformations could fullyplete and potentially release their Tailed Beasts.


    Therefore, with practiced motions, heid out the scroll beside each Jinchuriki, carefully positioning it to capture them at the precise moment before their transformation into stone concluded.


    He initiated the seal, channeling his remaining chakra into the intricate patterns of the scroll. As he activated the technique, ethereal chains of energy emerged from the scroll, wrapping around Kaito and Riku.


    The chains tightened, pulling them towards the paper, which glowed with a soft, otherworldly light.


    The process was tense, with the potential for catastrophic failure loomingrge. However, Hikari''s precision paid off.


    Slowly, the bodies of the Jinchuriki were absorbed into the scroll, their forms shrinking and distorting as they were converted into aplex series of seals.


    With a final flicker of chakra, the sealing wasplete, and the scroll snapped shut, its surface now marked with new, intricate seals that contained the formidable power of the two Jinchuriki.


    Hikari exhaled deeply, the weight of the immediate threat lifted, though he was acutely aware of the potential dangers still posed by the sealed Tailed Beasts.


    He secured the scroll carefully, knowing that it held not just two powerful shinobi but also the vtile forces of nature that could wreak havoc if released improperly.


    He was tired, his resources nearly depleted, but the sess of his n gave him a momentary sense of relief as he prepared to rejoin his forces and assess the broader situation on the battlefield.


    Despite the victory, his relief was tinged with the awareness of the close call he had just survived. He knew that the battle could have ended very differently if not for his strategic ingenuity and his mastery over natural energy.


    Eventually, as the dust settled on the ravaged battlefield, Hikari''s subordinates cautiously approached the epicenter of destruction.


    Their eyes widened in disbelief at the sheer devastation that surrounded them¡ªtrees uprooted, the ground cratered, and the air still crackling with residual chakra.


    "Are you alright, Hikari-sama?", One of the shinobi called out, his voice echoing with concern as they navigated through the debris.


    "What happened to the targets?", Another added urgently, scanning the area for any sign of the formidable Jinchuriki they had been briefed about.


    Hikari, standing amid the chaos, his traditional clothes torn and his face marked with the intensity of battle, turned towards the team.


    "I''ve sealed them already - we won this time...", He responded calmly, his tone carrying a weight of subdued triumph.


    The group fell silent for a moment, processing the gravity of his words. Their expressions shifted from concern to awe, and then to something akin to reverence.


    Murmurs of disbelief and respect rippled through the group as they looked at Hikari not just as theirmander but as something more¡ªan almost mythical figure who had single-handedly turned the tide of the war for their side once again and was perhaps the only person in history so far to now have a recorded victory over two Jinchuriki at the same time.


    Their awe was palpable, and their gazes held a new kind of esteem. Hikari had not only survived but had triumphed in what was undoubtedly one of the most harrowing challenges a shinobi could face.


    His ability to capture and seal away two powerful Jinchuriki elevated his status in their eyes to that of a legendary hero, reshaping their perception of what was possible.


    Hikari acknowledged their reverence and awe with a simple nod, his expressionposed and serene despite the recent ferocity of battle.


    With no further ado, he gestured for the group to follow him as he turned back toward their lines. Silently, they fell into step behind him, moving through the jungle with a newfound respect and a touch of fear at the power theirmander had just disyed.


    The journey back to their own front lines was quiet, each member of the squad deep in thought, processing the events they had witnessed and the monumental victory achieved.

 112. Hikari’s Confrontation with the Kirigakure’s Jinchuriki (4)

    112. Hikari¡¯s Confrontation with the Kirigakure¡¯s Jinchuriki (4)


    As they continued their run through the jungle, Hikari''s mind wandered to the implications of his recent victories.


    The scale of his aplishments dawned on him¡ªdefeating five of Kirigakure''s most elite shinobi, in session, sealing two of their legendary swords, and not to mention now capturing their two Jinchuriki.


    He was aware that his name would soon echo not just along the front lines but potentially across the ninja world, likely marking him as the biggest enemy in the Kirigakure''s history.


    The realization brought a mix of pride and a sobering sense of the spotlight that would now follow him unlike ever before.


    He contemted the target that he might be for other powerful entities seeking to test their strength against his or to avenge Kirigakure''s losses.


    With the weight of his recent sesses pressing on his mind, Hikari also started to formte his next moves.


    The staggering losses Kirigakure had suffered, particrly among their elite ranks, offered him a unique strategic opportunity.


    ''Soon, it will be time to end the war on this front entirely...'', He mused, thinking about the overwhelming disadvantage Kirigakure now faced. Over the next few months, Hikari nned to capitalize on the morale advantage his victories had secured.


    His goal was ambitious: leveraging his newfound Mid-Kage level capabilities, he intended to also use it, amongst other things, to conquer the entire continental territory of the Land of Water and push Kirigakure''s shinobi forces all the way back across the sea.


    Once established, this territory would serve as a strategicunchpad for an eventual invasion of Kirigakure itself to secure a victory against them and on this Hyuga-led front entirely.


    However, despite the monumental victories he had achieved, Hikari maintained a clear and cautious perspective.


    He understood that the Jinchuriki he had subdued were not the epitome of what such beings could represent in battle.


    These were what he considered ''low-tier Jinchuriki''¡ªcapable of controlling their various forms and partial transformations, butcking the ability to fully ''transform'' into their tailed beasts or utilize the devastatingly powerful Tailed Beast Bomb.


    In his analysis, Hikari recognized that even the Jinchuriki from Iwagakure, who were not considered ''perfect Jinchuriki'' by any standard, held capabilities far surpassing those of Kaito and Riku.


    They had ess to the full range of their beasts'' powers, including the ability to perform full-beast transformations and Tailed Beast Bombs.


    Even, the Yugito from Kumogakure had those abilities, although her Tailed Beast was only Two-Tails so she was also on that ''low-tier Jinchuriki'' level in his impression.


    Hikari further contemted the concept of ''perfect Jinchuriki'', the ''highest tier'' of Jinchuriki in his opinion, those who had either befriended their Tailed Beast or found a way topletely dominate it.


    This level of symbiosis between the host and the beast allowed for an unprecedented level of control and power.


    Unlike the lower tiers, a perfect Jinchuriki wouldn''t have to contend with their beast''s resistance in giving chakra or its attempts to overpower their will by giving too much chakra and other subtle maniptions and internal chakra system and mental inefficiencies.


    This harmony freed them to utilize the full spectrum of the beast''s abilities without fear of losing control of their seals, at their weakest moments, allowing for the full unleashing of the Tailed Beast''s chakra.


    In his studies and observations, Killer B and Naruto were prime examples of perfect Jinchuriki who achieved this through friendship and building a bond with their beasts that facilitated mutual respect and cooperation.


    On the ''darker side'' of this spectrum was Yagura¡ªwhom Hikari believed to have been controlled by Obito through genjutsu, manipting both the host and the Tailed Beast Isobu to create the illusion of a perfect Jinchuriki.


    These reflections underscored theplexity of the Jinchuriki phenomenon and the varying levels of mastery over such immense power.


    Hikari knew that understanding these dynamics was crucial, not just forprehending the strength of his enemies, but also for nning his strategies in the ongoing and future conflicts.


    By the time Hikaripleted his assessment of the day''s events, he acknowledged that the previous battle allowed him to truly break through the unofficial, solid Mid-Kage level which was a very positive development in terms of his personal power and at the level of stealing two-tailed beast effectively in political and geopolitical terms.


    As Hikari and his forces moved swiftly further through the jungle, he mulled over theplex situation the sealed Jinchuriki, now basically entirely in his possession, through those two half-dead, half-alive bodies, posed precisely. Therefore, he thought about that after sighing,


    ''Having these Tailed Beasts in my personal possession is kind of a double-edged sword. It is not an entirely positive thing to current me. There''s the obvious risk of others attacking to seize this immense power, and the Hokage''s Faction will certainly demand I hand them over "to the vige", meaning to them as they control the vige administration nearlypletely'',


    ''Effectively strengthening the biggest internal adversary, close to me, while weakening Kirigakure¡ªa nation I have no inherent quarrel with, across the sea. In that case, I have actually shot myself in the foot by going through with this, and I can''t allow that to happen...'',


    ''Our Anti-Hokage Faction isn''t yet strong enough to openly defy the Hokage''s Faction if they press the issue... Moreover...'',


    He continued in his thoughts, ''My skills in fuinjutsu aren''t advanced enough, right now still, to try and attempt sealing the Tailed Beasts within myself or an ally, which could have offered a significant boost in our direct confrontations against the Hokage''s Faction for the matter...'',


    ''This truly is like holding a hot potato¡ªdangerous yet potentially worthless if mishandled. The best course might be to leverage these beasts for a strategic advantage in other ways.'',


    ''Hypothetically, If I could negotiate their return to Kirigakure in exchange for them ending the war, favorably and under the Land of Fire''s and Konoha''s interests and terms, submitting toward our main demands, it would have to be under a new, more amenable Mizukage¡ªperhaps someone from the Kaguya or Yuki ns currently opposing the current leadership.'',


    ''This move could not only earn me significant military merit but also forge a powerful new set of allies in Kirigakure,pletely transformed under a leadership sympathetic to our cause.'',


    ''While the Hokage''s Faction could demand the beasts'' transfer to Konoha, they''re unaware of my ns to return them. I might manage to stall for time, maintaining the status quo long enough to execute my strategy. By that time, they couldn''t do anything, as we, and mostly me personally, would have be war heroes who ended this bloody war, and freed Konoha''s hands to fight against the other four great shinobi viges more. This could truly reshape the power dynamics in our favor, turning a precarious situation into a pivotal victory.'',


    Hikari''s n crystallized as he navigated the dense foliage, each step forward mirroring the progress in his strategic thinking. This deep game of political and military maneuvering was exactly the kind of challenge that spurred him on, a chance to use his wit and resources.

 113. Planning the Assault on Kirigakure’s Stronghold

    113. nning the Assault on Kirigakure¡¯s Stronghold


    A few weekster, atop a small hill along the coastline of the Land of Fire, across the Land of Water, Hikari, Hiashi, and Takumi convened for a strategic meeting.


    As the trio assembled on the hilltop, the air was filled with a mix of admiration and strategic calction. Hiashi, with a nod of respect toward Hikari, and a smile, broke the silence,


    "Hikari, it is really nice to see you again. Your recent achievements have not only turned the tides on our front but have resonated across all battle lines.",


    "Capturing two Jinchuriki, oveing their most elite shinobi, one by one, and decisively crippling Kirigakure''s forces¡ªyour actions have sent shockwaves through their ranks."


    Takumi, examining a map with a thoughtful expression, added in a voice with a hint of pride, "Hikari-kun, you did very well, your name is now uttered with both fear and respect among the enemies.",


    "It''s a significant morale boost for our forces and a stark warning to theirs. I can''t even imagine how far has your strength progressed now. As your sensei, I couldn''t be more proud."


    Their eyes met Hikari''s, reflecting a mix of awe and the heavy burden of expectations. The mood was familiar and warm for a while, yet charged with a sense of impending action, acknowledging the pivotal role Hikari now yed in the broader scheme of the war.


    After Hiukari thanked them both, for their kind words, and some more small talk ensued, the breeze off the sea brought a chill that contrasted sharply with the next following heated discussions about the ongoing war efforts.


    After a while, as the discussion deepened, Hikari borated on his recent military sesses, "Over the past few weeks, I''ve managed to secure the entire continental territory of the Land of Water as you know.",


    "But, it wasn''t just our efforts; the Kirigakure forces have been pulling back, perhaps to cut their losses."


    Hiashi nodded thoughtfully before adding his own observations from the central front along the shores of the Land of Fire, "It''s the same on my front. Kirigakure shinobi, who were previously infiltrating from the sea, have suddenly stopped their operations a few days ago."


    Takumi, always keen on understanding broader implications, spected, "This could indicate a shift in their strategy or logistical pressures.",


    "Maybe the losses they''ve suffered are forcing them to reconsider their position in this war. Or they are preparing for something new."


    Hikari weighed the possibilities, his gaze shifting toward the horizon where the distant waters met the sky, before speaking thoughtfully, "It could indeed be both, Takumi-sensei.",


    "They might have retreated across the sea to their hearnd, waiting for a more favorable moment to challenge Konoha again amidst our other conflicts.",


    "Or, they might be regrouping for an earlier strike. We can''t disregard any scenario. That''s why I believe we must take decisive action now, cross the sea, push for a formal surrender, and truly secure our victory.",


    "It would prevent any further uncertainties and strengthen our position, allowing us to move on other fronts and garner more influence as we nned."


    Hiashi acknowledged Hikari''s strategy, adding a note of caution, "Indeed, that''s a given, Hikari. However, an attack of this scale won''t be straightforward.",


    "We''re talking about crossing the sea to assault their main ind¡ªa ce that''s not only heavily fortified but also closely monitored, including the location of Kirigakure itself.",


    "We''ll need meticulous nning and coordination, especially with our allies from the Kaguya and Yuki ns, to ensure sess."


    Takumi weighed in thoughtfully, "That''s true, but the same challenges apply to what was once their continental territory across the sea. It would be equally difficult for them to reim thosends now.",


    "So, if we decide tounch an attack, we could allocate a significant portion of our forces. However, to maintain the element of surprise, it might be wiser to deploy a smaller, more elite groupprised primarily of us three, for example, and then some Elite Jonin and Jonin..."


    "So, sensei, have all the arrangements been made with our allies on the other side?", Hikari inquired, referencing the anti-Mizukage faction within the Land of Water.


    "Yes, I''ve arranged it, Hikari-kun. We''re meeting in a few days within the Land of Hot Water to finalize our ns for the assault. It wasn''t difficult to reach an agreement; your early intelligence from the Hozuki Patriarch''s mind was invaluable.",


    "I''ve been in contact with them for some time now, and my front has seen rtively little conflict as a result. So, everything has proceeded smoothly...", Takumi exined.


    The three of them continued their discussion for a considerable time, delving into the nuances of their strategy for the uing meeting and the information they were receiving from Konoha and other fronts in general that was important.


    As the conversation waned, they began final preparations for their journey. With a shared understanding of the task ahead, they set off in silence towards the Land of Hot Water, apanied by a select group of their most trusted shinobi.


    ***


    A few dayster, somewhere inside the Land of Water, inside the dimly lit room of the abandoned hot spring building, amidst a forest, the air was heavy with anticipation.


    The table at which they sat was old and worn, bearing marks from countless previous meetings, perhaps not all friendly.


    Toru Kaguya, the formidable leader of the Kaguya n, carried an air of barely restrained aggression, his eyes sharp and calcting, his long, pale white hair scatered widely giving some otherworldly and ancient kind of vibes.


    Across from him sat Arata Yuki, the young but impressivelyposed patriarch of the Yuki n, whose maturity belied his age.


    As Hikari, Takumi, and Hiashi entered the abandoned hot spring building, they were greeted by the distinct presence of the two n patriarchs already seated at the table.


    Toru Kaguya, the imposing figure of the Kaguya n, stood up first, his imposing stature and fierce demeanor filling the room with a palpable intensity.


    "Greetings, members of the Hyuga n...", He said, his voice resonant and slightly gruff, "I''ve heard much about your exploits, Hikari-san."


    Beside him, Arata Yuki, the young patriarch of the Yuki n, rose with a calm grace that contrasted sharply with Toru''s imposing presence. Despite his youth, his demeanor was one of serene confidence.


    "It''s an honor to meet the minds behind Konoha''s recent sesses...", Arata said, offering a polite nod, particrly to Hikari, whose reputation had reached even the secluded corners of their territories.


    Takumi responded warmly, "Thank you both for agreeing to this meeting. The future could be shaped by what we decide here today."


    Hiashi, ever the pragmatist, added, "Let''s not waste time then. We have amon enemy and a rare opportunity."


    With introductions and pleasantries swiftly exchanged, they all retook their seats, ready to dive into the strategic nning that would hopefully end in overthrowing the current Mizukage.


    Toru began, his voice steady yet tinged with an underlying intensity, "As we''ve convened here, it''s clear we all grasp the n ahead. ''Strike the shepherd, and the sheep will scatter'', or so they say.",


    "Eliminating the Third Mizukage is paramount¡ªhis assassination is our primary objective. And then the elite inner circle around him should be our next targets we need to finish off...", His tone hardened with the mention of the Mizukage, revealing his deep-seated resentment.


    Hiashi nodded thoughtfully before replying, "That approach makes sense. However, are you truly confident you can secure the allegiance of Kirigakure, in general, once their current ''shepherd'' is eliminated?",


    "Given your contentious history with the vige broadly, it''s vital we know if you can indeed unite them afterward. If there''s any doubt, we must consider alternative strategies now to avoid any costly miscalctions."


    Arata responded confidently, "It''s not so much about our past rtions; it''s about theck of alternatives. Once the Mizukage and his core elite supporters are out of the picture, we''re the most powerful force left.",


    "Patriarch Toru-san, especially if he survives and the Mizukage does not, will be unmatched in strength within the vige. They''ll have no choice but to follow us, and in doing so, your interests will be safeguarded as well."


    "Kage-tier strength isn''t the sole determinant of sess in the end...", Takumi stated, maintaining a measured tone.


    "While the Kaguya Patriarch, with his mid-Kage level strength, might be the strongest individual left in the vige if he survives, there will still be many shinobi fiercely loyal to the Mizukage at the jonin level and below.",


    "Thebined forces of the Kaguya and Yuki ns might not be sufficient in numbers to counter them. I foresee a necessity forpromise. Additionally, this means nearly all of your ns'' fighting power must bemitted to this battle if we are to stand a chance."


    Toru clenched his fists tightly, his features taut with frustration yet resolute, "We understand the necessity...", He said, his voice tinged with a bitter edge, "For years, we''ve been cornered, fighting not just for power but for the very survival of our ns. Ifmitting all our forces is what it takes to ensure a future free from persecution, then so be it. We''ll coordinate the attack with your elites and ensure our people are ready to move at the signal."


    Arata, younger and visibly tense, nodded in agreement, though his youthful face hardened with the weight of the decision, "It''s a harsh reality, but our ns have faced worse...",


    "If sending our entire strength to the Main Ind, to fight alongside you, secures our position and ends this prolonged agony, we''ll take the risk..."


    Hikari''s expression remained unreadable, a mask of calm that belied the critical nature of their ns. He nodded in understanding, addressing both patriarchs with a tone of assurance, "Your willingness tomit fully is what will increase the tides in our favor...",


    "I hope that you understand that we must ensure that those ordinary Kirigakure forces are also engaged elsewhere while we execute the pivotal strike against the Mizukage and his elites, with our smaller group, and your nsmen are the best fit for that as they can strike quickly from the nearby inds, and catch them off-guard, at the moment that we also arrive from the other direction."


    "Your nsmen will need to hold the line during this critical phase, preventing them from acting, until all the key yers have been eliminated. It''s a daunting task, but essential for the chance of a smooth transition of power afterward that we all desire as the oue. Rest assured, I will be on the ground, doing everything within my power to ensure our sess."


    "I''ve arranged the necessary logistics and ships for our attack. Everything is set on our side. As soon as we agree on every detail and intricacy of our n here and as you finalize your preparations, we can proceed.",


    "Timing is crucial, and we must act swiftly and decisively to ensure sess. The sooner we canunch our coordinated assault, the better our chances of catching the Mizukage and his forces off guard.", Hikari outlined the following right away.


    After Hikari''s words, and as the meeting progressed more and more, they delved deeper into the specifics of their n. Each leader discussed target assignments, deciding which members from their respective forces would engage key figures in the Mizukage''s camp.


    They mapped out operational tactics, ensuring everyone understood their, and their subordinates'' roles once they all arrived at Kirigakure. Communication strategies were refined to ensure seamless coordination across the different units during the assault.


    The Kaguya and Yuki patriarchs also personally provided Hiashi, Takumi, and Hikari with detailed insights into Kirigakure''s internal dynamics and defenses¡ªvaluable intelligence that could give them an edge in the uing conflict in addition to providing real-time feedback.


    After thoroughly discussing these details and ensuring every angle was covered, they concluded the meeting. The leaders rose from their seats, their expressions a mix of determination and the weight of the task ahead. They exited the abandoned hot spring building slowly, each lost in thought about the challenging mission thaty before them.

 114. Converging Paths: The Hyuga and Kaguya Pact

    114. Converging Paths: The Hyuga and Kaguya Pact


    As they all stepped out of the dpidated hot spring building into the forest and walked amongst its outer ruins, Hikari turned to Toru Kaguya,


    "Toru-san, can we talk for a minute? There''s something important I want to discuss with you, regarding some historical matters, if it is okay...", Hikari said, his voice serious but respectful.


    Toru''s eyes, sharp and assessing, shifted towards Hikari. He nodded politely and stepped to the side with Hikari, away from the others, who looked at this shortly and then went on their ways, "What''s on your mind, Hikari-san?", He asked.


    As they walked through the forest next, Hikari nced at Toru, gathering his thoughts before speaking, "Some time ago, before I left for this front, I learned from the Patriarch that our two ns used to be quite close in ancient history.",


    "There was something akin to a n alliance between us back then. Takumi-sensei also mentioned that you should know about this too judging from your exchanges with him.",


    "I''m wondering, why didn''t you try to contact us over the years after you found yourself in this tough spot, especially recently? And how did you end up in Kirigakure in the first ce, and not in Konoha like us Hyuga...?",


    "With your strength, and standing in the most prosperous, nowadays known as the Land of Fire, central territory during the end of the Warring States era, it shouldn''t have been a problem for you to find your ce there too as well I feel...", Hikari asked, his tone curious yet polite.


    He also understood already at this time, from Takumi, that their ability to establish such a quick working rtionship, with the other side, despite having no recent contact, before the war started, was also rooted in their shared ancient history. So, he wasfortable with Toru more or less now and felt that the man also held very positive feelings for himself too.


    Toru slowed his pace, looking thoughtful, "It''s true...", He began, his voice deep and reflective, "Our ns share a long history together since ancient times, one of mutual respect and cooperation. But as you know, history can be forgotten and ties can fade.",


    "We didn''t join Konoha, at that time alongside you, mainly because we felt it was "too crowded" for us to be honest; we''re more of a free-spirited kind of a n...", Toru exined.


    "That''s why we settled on one of the inds in the Land of Water¡ªto have our own territory and peace of mind, where we wouldn''t have to bow down or amodate anyone else.",


    "Many other kekkei genkai ns felt the same and simrly took over various neighboring inds too. However, who could have expected that a bloodthirsty power like Kirigakure would emerge sessfully, thus bing hostile towards the ns with the support of the Daimyo of the Main Ind as well? Thus this "promisednd" became the bloodiest one.",


    "We thought no Hidden Viges would form in that distant, isted, and scattered kind of archipgo, giving us eternal peace away from the wars of the other four new shinobi nations, but we greatly miscalcted.",


    "In hindsight, it might have been better to join Konoha with you, but there''s no use regretting the past. Now, we just hope to survive this battle and rebuild a safer future.", Toru concluded.


    "As for reaching out, it wasn''t easy. Kirigakure kept a tight leash on us. Contacts outside were restricted, and there were always eyes watching.",


    "The risk of making a move was too great, especially without knowing if the Hyuga still held any memory of us or motive and methods to affect the situation so far away from them."


    After hearing this, Hikari nodded, having already guessed much of the matter correctly. He thought more about the mysterious and intriguing Kaguya n. His fascination was one reason he sought out its current Patriarch for this conversation.


    Hikari was also previously surprised to deduce that theprehensive power of the current Kaguya n, of this world, alongside the Yuki n, in his assessment, was somewhere in between the powers of Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, to the lower end, and the Uchiha, and Hyuga ns in present-day Konoha, to the higher end¡ªcing them somewhere in the middle of the two groups, and among the peak most powerful shinobi ns of this world.


    He felt a tinge of regret for their tragic fate in the original world, where they were portrayed merely as mindless brutes. However, in this world, they were different; they were not foolish.


    They didn''t initiate a futile fight with Kirigakure but were instead cornered into conflict. Their seemingly brutish nature and conflicts with Kirigakure appeared to be a defense mechanism developed over generations, a response to the bloody and harsh climate of the Land of Water. This realization deepened Hikari''s understanding of the Kaguya''splex legacy and how this world was a "real world", and considerably different from the story of his past life.


    "It''smendable that you''ve managed to lead your n through these tough times and have now reached a point where we can potentially overturn the current situation together...", Hikari responded in the meantime, his voice filled with respect.


    "If you agree, I''d like to propose that we reinvigorate the ancient alliance between our two ns as we move forward. After all, mere borders cannot stand between our shared ancient history and our newly foundmon interests in this tumultuous world. As the Alliance Coordinator of the Hyuga n, I assure you of our sincerity andmitment to this partnership...", Hikari continued, extending a hand in a gesture of trust and cooperation.


    Toru looked at Hikari''s extended hand, his expression unreadable for a moment before a slow nod affirmed his agreement, "Your words hold great weight, Hikari, and I appreciate the sincerity behind them...", He began, his voice steady and deliberate,


    "To think that our ns coulde together again after all this time is something I did not anticipate, yet it feels right given our current circumstances.",


    He firmly grasped Hikari''s hand, the gesture signaling more than just eptance¡ªit was amitment, "I ept your proposal to reinvigorate our alliance. The Kaguya n has always valued strength and resilience, and I see these qualities in your proposal. Together, we stand a better chance against not just Kirigakure but any who threaten our future."


    From that point on, the rtionship between Hikari and Toru warmed slightly, and they engaged in light conversation before Hikari steered the discussion back to the main reason he had approached the Kaguya Patriarch.


    Hikari wanted to test the waters to see how deeply Toru understood the ancient history of their two ns and why they had been so closely connected.


    "So, Toru-san, I wonder, do you know why our ns were historically so close?", Hikari asked, watching Toru''s face closely for any hint of deceit or uncertainty.


    Toru furrowed his brow slightly, a sign of confusion, and after a moment of thought, he replied, "It''s really strange... I also don''t know. Our records from those times are fragmented at best. It seems much of our deeper history was lost over the generations. I also always felt curious about that, after all, you could say that our fighting styles and cultures couldn''t been more distant."


    Hikari noted Toru''s genuine confusion and mentally concluded that the current Kaguya n likely didn''t know about their shared lineage originating from Hamura and other deeper historical ties¡ªa realization that was somewhat disappointing for Hikari.


    He had hoped to use this conversation to learn more, possibly even information that the Hyuga Patriarch had withheld from him.


    So, Hikari nodded politely and replied, "I see. Thank you for sharing what you know."


    With that, the conversation soon drew to a close. They agreed to continue this dialogue in the future, hoping to uncover more about their intertwined histories.


    After exchanging a few final words and acknowledging their new-found partnership, they went their separate ways¡ªeach to prepare for the challenges ahead, but now with the reassurance of an alliance that promised a stronger stand against their adversaries.


    ***


    As Hikari made his way through the forest back to the Hyuga n camp, he sensed another presence drawing near, so he stopped.


    Emerging into an open field within the forest, he spotted the figure of Arata Yuki, the young Patriarch of the Yuki n.


    At only 16 years old, Arata carried himself with a maturity that belied his youth.


    Arata was of medium height with a slender build that hinted at agility rather than brute strength.


    His blue hair, a distinctive trait of the Yuki n, fell just past his shoulders and partially obscured his pale blue eyes, which contrasted sharply with his fair skin.


    He wore the traditional attire of his n¡ªa light blue kimono tied with a darker blue obi.


    The fabric moved gracefully with each step he took, and despite the simplicity of the design, it carried an air of elegance.


    His face was calm andposed, disying a serene confidence as he approached Hikari.


    The young leader''s presence was marked by a quiet strength and an aura of thoughtful deliberation, making him seem wise beyond his years.


    Arata approached and, with a polite bow, apologized for intruding on Hikari''s time, "I identally noticed your previous discussion with the Kaguya Patriarch...",


    Arata said, his voice measured and calm, "I wanted to take the opportunity to introduce myself personally and perhaps get to know each other better. Hope I''m not bothering you."


    Internally, Arata was closely observing and analyzing Hikari. He had previously noticed that Hikari and the Kaguya patriarch had stayed behind to talk, prompting him to linger nearby on this route, hoping to also meet with Hikariter.


    Arata had recently begun to suspect that the Hyuga and Kaguya ns might have some kind of secretive ties unknown to others. He didn''t want his n to be left out of any potential alliances for the future.


    After all, although the Kaguya and Yuki ns were also very close allies, they were still distinct ns with their interests and strategies.


    Arata understood that the shifting dynamics between the Hyuga and Kaguya could affect the bnce of power, and he wanted to ensure that the Yuki n maintained a strong position in any new political configuration.


    His approach to Hikari was calcted to glean insights and possibly secure a stronger alliance with the Hyuga n on his own, strengthening his n''s influence and security.


    Hikari, perceptive to the nuances of his surroundings, noticed Arata''s thoughtful approach and understood the implications right away.


    He greeted Arata with a warm smile and a respectful nod, signaling his openness to the conversation, "Arata-san, it''s good to meet you so in such a calm setting as well...", Hikari began, acknowledging the young patriarch''s proactive step.


    "I appreciate you taking the time to introduce yourself. Our ns must get to know each other better, especially in these times."


    Relieved by Hikari''s openness, Arata decided to avoid probing into the potential secret ties between the Hyuga and Kaguya ns.


    Even Toru Kaguya, with whom he shared a much closer rtionship, had been reservedabout the topic.


    Instead, Arata focused on the potential oues of their n to overthrow the current Mizukage.


    "So, assuming our joint efforts against the Mizukage seed...", Arata began, his tone thoughtful, "What are the Hyuga n''s, no, what are your visions for the aftermath?"


    Arata''s question was strategic, aimed at uncovering the Hyuga''s long-term intentions withoutmitting to specifics. He knew that Hikari was the true shot-caller there.


    Arata was aware that even with a sessful ousting of the Mizukage, they would still need the support of Konoha afterward, for some period, to get back on their feet, or more specifically, the Anti-Hokage faction led by the Hyuga n.


    Kirigakure would undoubtedly be weakened from the battle, and with Kumogakure''s close ties to the Third Mizukage, the geopoliticalndscape would be precarious, so his n would theoretically still be in some danger.


    Recognizing the significance of Konoha''s ''Anti-Hokage faction'' involvement there, Arata knew that Hikari, standing before him, was pivotal to the entire operation and its aftermath.


    "You''ve been instrumental in coordinating this alliance and leading the efforts...", Arata continued, measuring his words carefully.


    "Given the potential for regional instability post-Mizukage, and considering Kumogakure''s position, how do you see our rtionship with Konoha evolving?"


    Arata wanted to understand Hikari''s vision for the future¡ªknowing well that the young Hyuga''s pivotal perspective would likely steer the course of events in that direction.


    Hikari meanwhile took a moment to collect his thoughts, and then responded calmly, "Assuming we achieve victory in the uing battle, I envision us continuing this partnership going forward as well.",


    "However, it''s important to always understand that you are aligning not with Konoha as a whole, but with the main opposition faction of its current leadership.",


    "Moving forward, this could mean your support might be needed in our internal conflicts within Konoha or against external threats, much like we''re coborating now. I hope we can count on each other without reservation.",


    "In exchange, we would stand by you against any external adversaries you face. Our alliance would be based on mutual support and trust. I also want to assure you that the Hyuga n, and myself personally, do not favor the Kaguya over the Yuki.",


    "Despite our historical ties with the Kaguya, you probably observed by now, we see great value in our partnership with you and aremitted to maintaining bnce and fairness."


    Soon, after their conversation, with a final exchange of respectful bows, Hikari and Arata went their separate ways, returning to their respective camps to continue preparations.

 115. Dawn Assault: The Siege of Kirigakure Begins (1)

    115. Dawn Assault: The Siege of Kirigakure Begins (1)


    A few dayster, Hikari, Hiashi, and Takumi led arge group of their best fighters on boats, heading toward the main ind of the Land of Water where Kirigakure was located, to start their operation.


    The journey across the sea was tense, with everyone aware of the importance of their mission.


    They traveled quietly under the cover of night to avoid being spotted by Kirigakure''s lookouts.


    The moonlight shone on the water, mirroring the serious expressions on the shinobis'' faces.


    As they got closer to the ind, the leaders double-checked their ns. Hikari made sure everyone knew where to go and what to do when theynded.


    Hiashi took care of keeping everyone in touch, setting up a system so messages could be passed quickly and secretly between the groups. Takumi checked the backup ns, ready for any surprises.


    Their team was ready to fight hard and change quickly if needed. They nned to attack at dawn, hoping to surprise Kirigakure and change who was in charge in the Land of Water once and for all.


    As they sailed toward Kirigakure, the fleet of boats maneuvered skillfully through the archipgo, navigating between inds shrouded in darkness.


    The elite Hyuga members aboard used their Byakugan to scan the surroundings, ensuring they avoided any patrols or early detection by Kirigakure''s forces.


    Their keen eyesight was crucial in guiding the fleet safely through the tricky waters and keeping a vignt watch over any movement on the nearby inds.


    As they approached the main ind, a dense mist began to envelop them, reducing visibility and nketing the sea in a ghostly fog. The cool air became chillier, a stark reminder of the looming confrontation.


    The mist seemed to rise from the sea itself, mingling with the salty spray as the boats cut through the water.


    The main ind, a ruggedndscape dominated by mountains, loomed ahead through the fog. Its peaks were jagged, cutting into the sky with an imposing presence.


    These mountains made Kirigakure a naturally fortified stronghold, difficult to assault due to its elevated and uneven terrain.


    The looming mountains,bined with the thick mist, gave the ind an almost mystical quality as if it were disconnected from the rest of the world.


    Therefore, theirck of some kind of advanced sensing barrier that Konoha possessed didn''t bring down their overall defense game in the slightest and in fact, made them even more enclosed and protected.


    The cool, damp air, high and sharp mountain ranges, and the mist swirling around them added to the tension among the troops.


    However, despite these challenges, the shinobi remained focused, their determination hardened by the anticipation of the battle ahead.


    The strategic use of their Byakugan and their familiarity with naval maneuvers allowed them to reach the shores of Kirigakure undetected, ready tounch their carefully nned assault at the break of dawn that was about tomence.


    Standing on the deck of the lead boat, Hikari, Takumi, and Hiashi concentrated deeply, pushing their Byakugan to its limits to scout theyout and defenses of Kirigakure ahead.


    After a thorough examination, they exchanged a knowing nod, confirming their readiness. Hiashi then turned to Hizashi, who was standing slightly behind the group, his eyes also intensely focused.


    "How is it, Hizashi? Can you manage something from here?", Hiashi asked, his voice tinged with anticipation.


    Hizashi, after a moment of final assessment, nodded toward the trio before responding, feeling quite confident and yearning to prove himself,


    "Yes, even though the vige is well-protected by these mountains, it''s within my range. I can see through the rock formations and target urately. However, I need a few minutes to finalize my attack n and trajectory."


    Hikari responded with a supportive tone, "That''s great, Hizashi-kun. Your attack will be invaluable for creating an initial distraction and inflicting early damage. Let''s make sure it''s well-coordinated with our main assault."


    Takumi added his admiration, "Hizashi-kun, your contributions will be remembered. I never imagined you would develop such a jutsu on your own, especially as a member of the side branch, I was quite stunned when I saw it for the first time. You might just be the strongest side branch member there ever was..."


    Hikari nodded, recalling his past encouragements to Hizashi to follow his unique path, which now seemed profoundly fruitful. Hizashi had developed what could be considered the strongest long-range jutsu in the history of the Hyuga n and became the strongest supporting and auxiliary type shinobi inside of their n on an Elite Jonin level of strength.


    The jutsu, named "Hyuga''s Piercing Arrows", allowed Hizashi to create sharp, arrow-like constructs from his chakra.


    Utilizing his Byakugan''s vast range and precise targeting, he couldunch these arrows over great distances with pinpoint uracy.


    Each arrow was capable of prating deep into enemy defenses, making them especially effective for initiatingbat and softening enemy positions before a full-scale assault.


    As the dawn''s first light began to breach the horizon, Hizashi focused deeply, channeling as much chakra as he could possibly muster at this singr instance, into the unique technique he had developed.


    With his Byakugan''s vision enhancing his perception, he visualized the energy coalescing in his palms, forming into multiple sharp, luminous arrows.


    These arrows glowed a brilliant white, pulsing with the potent Hyuga chakra, their tips pointed and deadly, ready to beunched at a moment''s notice.


    Standing firmly, Hizashi extended his arms, his palms facing the distant mountains where Kirigakurey hidden.


    With a deep breath, he released the arrows, which shot through the air with a faint, whistling sound, almost invisible against the dawn sky except for their glowing trails.


    The arrows traveled at incredible speeds, cutting through the mist and distance with precision, directed at key defensive points and high-value targets they had identified within the vige.


    As the arrows reached their targets, explosions of light and energy marked their impact, creating chaos and confusion among the Kirigakure defenders.


    The precisely struck points suffered significant damage, effectively softening the enemy''s outer defenses and causing disarray.


    Simultaneously, Hikari, Hiashi, Takumi, and the rest of their elite forcesunched their assault.


    Jumping out of their boats and running on the water, squads of ninjas dashed forward, using the cover of the early morning light and the confusion caused by Hizashi''s attack.


    They moved quickly and silently, exploiting the openings created by the arrows. The element of surprise was on their side, and they pressed it to its fullest advantage.


    The main force split into designated teams, each tasked with different objectives¡ªsecuring strategic points, engaging key enemy units, and pushing deeper into Kirigakure territory to assassinate all the key personnel and groups on their list.


    Meanwhile, Hikari and his teammenced their assault, the Yuki and Kaguya n forces simultaneously initiated their attack from the opposite side of the main ind.


    Coordinated to perfection, their timing was synchronized with the Hyuga''s offensive, maximizing the confusion and disarray among Kirigakure''s defenders.

 116. Dawn Assault: The Siege of Kirigakure Begins (2)

    116. Dawn Assault: The Siege of Kirigakure Begins (2)


    After a while, as the Hyuga-led forces prated deeper into Kirigakure''s main ind, the intensity of the battle escted.


    The vige''s defenders, though surprised, were quick to organize a robust resistance. Many shinobi came from behind the mountains to defend the vige''s outermost parameter area.


    The preparedness of the Kiri forces suggested that they had anticipated some form of attack recently, leading to a swift and coordinated response.


    Meanwhile, they were also taken aback by the sudden unexpected arrival of some additional forces. The presence of Kumogakure shinobi among the Kirigakure ranks was a significant esction, altering the dynamics of the battlefield in a way that they didn''t fully anticipate.


    Hikari''s eyes narrowed as he observed the new arrivals, their distinctive uniforms mingling with those of Kirigakure''s defenders,


    "It seems we have more than just Kirigakure shinobi to contend with...", He noted with a hint of urgency in his voice,


    "Kumogakure has joined the fray indeed as reinforcements to the Mizukage. Thankfully they are not all that numerous."


    Takumi, his expression grave, added, "This alliance could be more entrenched than we anticipated. We need to be even more cautious now. We need to aplish the overthrow fast, or our shinobi here are simply not numerous enough to handle them for very long."


    Amidst the unfolding chaos, with shes erupting all around, Hikari quickly assessed the situation objectively once again. Then turning to Hiashi, Takumi, and Hizashi, he rmended with a strategic calm.


    "Hizashi, stay back and support the team. Use your arrows for surprise attacks from afar. Your ability to strike without being seen will be crucial...", He instructed, recognizing the tactical advantage Hizashi''s unique jutsu provided.


    He then focused on Takumi and Hiashi, "Takumi-sensei, Hiashi-san, we need to take this opportunity to somehow infiltrate deeper and target the key figures in the Mizukage''s faction alone it seems. They were way more prepared than we thought.",


    His eyes briefly scanned the battlefield, witnessing the fierce engagements between their forces and the Kiri troops.


    "We also need to join with Toru-san and Arata-san and them on the inside...", Hikari continued, plotting their next move, "Let''s form an elite squad, like we initially discussed back then, and push forward."


    Acknowledging Hikari''s n, Hiashi and Takumi nodded in agreement. They quickly gathered Shibi Aburame, Tsume Inuzuka, Ryosuke Gekko, and Isamu Sumi.


    These Elite Jonin and n leaders, each formidable in their own right, formed a formidable group that could adapt to anybat scenario and was closest to them in terms of strength.


    Then, after finalizing their ns with a brief but intense discussion, Hikari''s elite group moved decisively through the battlefield.


    Theirbined skills and strength resulted in significant losses for Kirigakure''s forces, allowing them to slowly break through defensive lines with lethal efficiency over time.


    Each member of the team utilized their unique abilities to great effect, navigating through the chaos of battle and diminishing the enemy''s numbers.


    As they advanced, the terrain itself posed its own challenges. The vige was nestled among steep, mountainousndscapes that were shrouded in a persistent, dense mist.


    The mist curled around the mountains'' rugged outlines, asionally clearing just enough to reveal glimpses of Kirigakure''s distinct architecture.


    The buildings of Kirigakure were unusual in their design, reflecting the vige''s adaptation to its mountainous environment.


    Structures were built to be high and narrow, often perched on elevated tforms to maximize space and provide defensive advantages.


    The roofs were steeply pitched, designed to handle the heavy rainfallmon in the region, and constructed with materials that blended into the natural foggy backdrop, making them difficult to spot from a distance.


    From time to time, as the mist shifted, these high-rise buildings loomed ghostly over the skirmishes below, their silhouettes eerie and imposing through the fog.


    The environment was a maze of shadows and sounds, with the echo ofbat reverberating off the stone and water.


    Navigating this misty, mountainous terrain required constant vignce and adaptability. The group moved with purpose, their path asionally obstructed by sudden rocky drops.


    However, just as they were closing in on the Kirigakure, amidst the chaos, an unexpected development brought their progress to a halt.


    From the direction of Kirigakure, six figures emerged through the mist, moving with determined speed towards Hikari''s group.


    Leading the group were Raiga and Kushimaru, two formidable swordsmen of the Mist whom Hikari had previously encountered and knew well.


    However, apanying them were four other current generation swordsmen of the Mist: Juzo Biwa, known for his ruthless tactics; Fuguki Suikazan, a giant of a man wielding the infamous Samehada before it eventually passed to Kisame; and Katashi, the current wielder of Hiramekarei, renowned for its ability to change forms based on the user''s chakra.


    Completing the group was a young Kisame Hoshigaki, who, though not yet armed with the legendary Samehada, was already a formidable shinobi and an Elite Jonin in his own right.


    Hikari quickly assessed the situation and spoke in a low tone, "I believe I can break through and continue toward the vige to hit our targets. I need you all to engage them and keep them from following me.",


    "Once I create an opening and slip past, I''ll make my way into the vige alone. I''m quick and alert, and I''m confident in my ability to assassinate the Mizukage and the other key leaders.",


    "It seems most of their forces are either here or upied with the Yuki and Kaguya. I''ll have a window of opportunity¡ªjust hold these six here for me and help me evade them now."


    Hiashi, always the strategist, nodded in agreement but his concern was evident, "It''s risky, Hikari, but it might be our best chance right now. We''ll handle them here. Make sure you''re not seen, and use the mist to your advantage."


    Takumi, known for his wisdom and experience, added his thoughts, "Be cautious, Hikari. Your speed and perception are unmatched, but so is the cunning of the enemy. Also, make sure to not underestimate the Mizukage in any way."


    Shibi Aburame, ever the tactician, chimed in, "I will release my insects to provide you further help in obtaining intelligence. They''ll also keep you informed of any changes everywhere."


    Tsume Inuzuka, fierce and fearless, cracked her knuckles, ready for the fight, "Don''t worry about us. We''ll keep them busy. Focus on your mission, and get in and out quickly."


    Ryosuke Gekko and Isamu Sumi nodded solemnly, understanding the gravity of their task as he looked at the six figures approaching them closer and closer and knowing of their reputation,


    "We''ll hold the line...", Isamu stated firmly, "Focus on the mission. We trust in your abilities, Hikari-san."


    Hikari looked at them with focus and discipline in his eyes, "Thank you...", He said simply. "I''ll try to make this quick and clean. Keep safe."

 117. Chakra Clash in The Skies: Hikari vs. Kisame

    117. Chakra sh in The Skies: Hikari vs. Kisame


    As they rapidly closed the distance between themselves and the opposing group of swordsmen, Hikari and his team exchanged a series of quick, secret hand signals.


    Hikari''s group approached a steep hill that provided a strategic vantage point and used the terrain to their advantage.


    The incline slightly elevated them over the approaching swordsmen, an opportunity they were ready to exploit.


    Meanwhile, on the other side, the six Mist swordsmen also acted swiftly, capitalizing on their environment.


    They silently executed a joint Hidden Mist jutsu, further thickening the fog that enveloped the area.


    While they were aware that this tactic would be ineffective against the Hyuga members, due to their Byakugan, they recognized that not all of their opponents possessed this ability, and they looked to exploit any opening they could potentially get, even if it was minuscule.


    As the mist thickened around them, visibility dropped significantly for those without Byakugan. Tsume and her caninepanion relied more on their acute hearing and sense of smell.


    Shibi''s insects became even more crucial, buzzing closer to the ground, trying to detect vibrations and movements.


    Ryosuke Gekko gripped his sword tighter, relying on hisbat instincts to react to any sounds or shifts in the dense fog.


    The Kiri''s shinobi moved with calcted stealth, using the cover of increased mist to advance and position themselves advantageously.


    They were looking for anypse in defense, any momentary confusion they could exploit to gain the upper hand in the looming confrontation.


    This strategic use of their environment was designed to disorient these three and create opportunities for quick strikes and ambushes.


    However, the Mist swordsmen quickly realized that their attempt to leverage the Hidden Mist jutsu was futile due to the high level of coordination between their enemies and the special abilities of the Aburame and Inuzuka n members. They were still moving ahead without revealing any openings.


    Realizing that their enhanced mist had little effect on the keen senses of the Aburame and Inuzuka, the Mist swordsmen felt a surge of frustration.


    Their strategy to disorient and divide had failed, and in a fit of anger, they had a short outburst.


    "You think your little tricks can save you?", Raiga shouted, his voice cutting through the mist with venom, "You all will regret ever setting foot here! None of you will leave Kirigakure alive!"


    Juzo Biwa chimed in, his tone dripping with contempt, "This is the greatest humiliation in our vige''s history, and you are the cause, Hikari! You''ve in many of our best, but today, you''ll pay for those lives with your own!"


    Their words were charged with hatred, particrly towards Hikari, who had be a symbol of their disgrace.


    This was the first time Kirigakure had been invaded in this manner, and not even by Konoha''s main force, but by some of its private peripheral forces led by the Hyuga n in their impression.


    The insult to their pride and the threat to their security and the Mizukage''s regime stung deeply.


    "We didn''te here to trade insults or for me to confiscate even more of your swords today. We have objectives that far exceed the importance of dealing with, frankly, small fries like yourselves."


    Without waiting for a response, Hikari turned back to his team, signaling them to continue moving forward.


    His group, maintaining their formation and focus, advanced steadily, undeterred by the threats or the thickening mist.


    However, as Hikari''s group advanced, the six Kirigakure shinobi swiftly coordinated their counterattack, each leveraging their unique abilities to create a multifaceted defense.


    Kushimaru stayed hidden within the shadows. He wielded his long, needle-like sword with precision, sending out slicing threads that crisscrossed the battlefield, aiming to entangle and cut his opponents. His movements were fluid and deceptive, making him a ghostly figure in the foggy terrain.


    Raiga, harnessing his ability to channel electricity, electrified the area around him. Bolts of lightning arced from his des, creating a dangerous field of electric energy that threatened to shock anyone who ventured too close. His attacks added a crackling energy to the air.


    Fuguki Suikazan, utilizing his unique hair spike attack, transformed his flowing hair into sharp, needle-like weapons.


    These spikes thrust out in rapid session, aiming to pierce his adversaries from a distance. His imposing figure dominated the area he defended.


    Meanwhile, Juzo Biwa and Katashi, each skilled in close-rangebat, remained highly mobile and reactive.


    Juzo, with his menacing presence and quick strikes, darted around the battlefield, looking for openings to exploit with his brutal tactics.


    At the same time, Tsume Inuzuka readied herself to go all in right away. With her trusted canine partner by her side, sheunched into her strongest jutsu, Fang Passing Fang.


    Together, they became a spinning whirlwind of teeth and ws, darting toward the enemy with such speed that they seemed to blur into continuous motion, creating multiple damaging impacts.


    Simultaneously, Shibi Aburame orchestrated a massive assault using his kikaich¨± insects. He released a literal wave of dangerous bugs that swarmed toward the enemy from hidden angles, while secretly deploying even more poisonous insects aimed to incapacitate his foes quietly and efficiently.


    The swarm was dense and relentless, covering the enemies and the surrounding air, leaving little room for escape.


    Isamu Sumi, not to be outdone, summoned his n''s most potent technique onto the battlefield right away, the Super God Imitating Drawing. They all knew what kind of enemies they were facing currently.


    So, with swift, precise brush strokes, Isamu conjured powerful and vivid illusions of fearsome deities, each attack designed to distract and destabilize the Mist swordsmen, making them vulnerable to physical strikes.


    Ryosuke Gekko, meanwhile, showcased his mastery of kenjutsu by performing the Dance of the Crescent Moon.


    He and three shadow clones synchronized in a deadly ballet of swordy, their movements so harmonized they appeared as one, cutting through the battlefield with sweeping, graceful strikes that were lethal in their precision.


    Each member of Hikari''s breakthrough elite team utilized their strongest abilities, creating a multi-faceted offensive that was as varied as it was devastating.


    This coordinated assault ensured that the Mist swordsmen were not only overwhelmed by the sheer force but also by theplexity and unpredictability of the techniques employed against them.


    As the sh raged on, thebined efforts of Hikari''s team allowed Takumi and Hiashi to break through slightly ahead, moving at incredible speeds toward the Mist swordsmen.


    While Hikari held back for strategic reasons, hispanions understood the n without needing furthermunication. They nodded to each other, each aware of the roles they were about to y.


    Takumi, leveraging his extensive knowledge and the mastery inherent to his Hyuga Elder Lineage, prepared to unleash aplex and disorienting attack.


    He executed the Eight Trigrams: Phantom Mirage Strike Barrage, his strongest technique that epitomized the innovative spirit of his lineage.


    With swift, fluid movements, Takumi delivered precise palm strikes aimed at the chakra pathway systems of each swordsman in range. His Byakugan provided a crystal-clear view of their internal chakraworks, allowing him to inject a subtle burst of his own chakra.


    This chakra, intertwined with the enemy''s, carried with it a potent genjutsu that could disorient, trap, or even terrify the victim with illusions.


    And just at that moment, with the Mist swordsmen temporarily distracted and dodging Takumi''s Phantom Mirage Strike, Hiashi seized the opportunity tounch his formidable attack. His focus was absolute as he channeled a massive amount of chakra throughout his body, focusing it into his palms.


    His mastery over chakra control, a hallmark of the Hyuga''s Gentle Fist technique, allowed him to manipte his chakra into the form of an enormous dragon made entirely of dense, white chakra, just like his father, and other distinguished previous Patraichs of their n.


    As Hiashi thrust his palms forward, the celestial dragon burst forth, moving at high speeds toward the target with lifelike agility.


    It soared across the battlefield, its presence a brilliant white contrast against the misty backdrop of thebat zone.


    However, amidst the shock induced by the giant white dragon conjured by Hiashi, only Katashi, the wielder of Hiramekarei, managed to react swiftly.


    Understanding the dire situation, he rapidly generated a massive surge of chakra within Hiramekarei, preparing for a counterattack.


    His weapon, known for its ability to morph and amplify chakra, became the perfect tool in this critical moment.


    With a determined yell, Katashi swung Hiramekarei with all his might, channeling the weapon''s built-up chakra into a massive, cleaving wave aimed directly at the oing dragon.


    The air crackled as two formidable chakra constructs collided in a dazzling disy of power.


    The collision resulted in a tremendous explosion of light and energy, temporarily illuminating the battlefield and pushing back the dense mist.


    The force of Katashi''s attack effectively sliced through the celestial dragon, dispersing Hiashi''s technique and saving hisrades from imminent danger.


    The spectacle left both sides momentarily stunned, underscoring the intensity and desperation of the confrontation.


    This act of bravery and quick thinking by Katashi not only neutralized the immediate threat but also bolstered the morale of the Mist swordsmen, reminding them of their strength and the protective power of their unique weapons.


    As the remnants of the dragon faded into wisps of chakra, both groups regained theirposure, ready to continue the fierce battle that was far from over.


    However, unbeknownst to the Mist shinobi focused on the immediate aftermath, Hikari, who had strategically stayed behind during themotion, seized the opportunity to advance towards Kirigakure just as he nned.


    Isamu, the patriarch of the Sumi n, had already sneakily conjured him a massive ink eagle, whereas Hikari swiftly mounted it and then attempted to soar high into the air, carrying him closer to his ultimate goal of getting inside the Kirigakure as soon as possible.


    As the Mist shinobi realized the shift in the battle, Fuguki Suikazan shouted, "Not good, he''s getting away!", His voice was filled with urgency, realizing the critical oversight.


    The other Mist shinobi echoed his rm, but it was already toote. Hikari was ascending rapidly, almost out of reach.


    But, at this critical juncture, Kisame Hoshigaki, who had been silent up until now, suddenly stepped forward. With a calm yet determined look, he dered, "Don''t worry, I''ve got this.",


    Quickly forming a series of hand seals, and moving closer to the top of one hill, young Kisame unleashed his most potent technique currently, the Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave, using a bunch of his chakra.


    The jutsu created a massive surge of water that not only disrupted the battlefield below but also propelled Kisame high into the air.


    As Hikari neared his objective on the back of the ink eagle, Kisame''s figure burst through the spray of water, skillfully maneuvering himself to intercept.


    He positioned himself directly in front of Hikari, effectively blocking his path and setting the stage for an aerial confrontation.


    The sudden appearance of Kisame in the sky was a dramatic twist, showcasing his abilities and determination to protect Kirigakure from any intrusion.


    As Kisame positioned himself in front of Hikari, still riding the high winds on his ink-eagle, he wasted no time escting the confrontation.


    With a fierce battle cry, he also executed another powerful technique, Water Release: A Thousand Feeding Sharks.


    From the massive surge of water he had already created, a swarm of water-formed sharks emerged, each one crafted from chakra-infused water, racing towards Hikari.


    "You think you''ve outmaneuvered us, Hikari? I''m just where I need to be. Caught in the open, it seems you''ve flown right into the trap. I''m the wall you won''t breach...", Kisame, with a smirk, couldn''t resist the opportunity to taunt Hikari amidst their high-stakes duel.


    Hikari, facing the formidable disy of Kisame''s chakra potency, couldn''t help but slightly acknowledge the young shinobi''s prowess internally, especially his huge chakra reserves and physical characteristics observable with his Byakugan.


    "Impressive heavy chakra-loaded output for someone so young. Probably some kind of a gic freak. But, to current me, this is very much a child''s y...", Hikari responded coolly.


    His eyes lingered on the twelve-year-old Kisame, during this specific point in the timeline, assessing him not just as an opponent but as a notable potential future threat perhaps.


    Without waiting for Kisame''s reaction, under his stunned eyes, Hikari urged his ink-eagle forward, straight into the maelstrom of sharks and towering waves.


    The entire nearby widespread battlefield watched in shocked silence as Hikari activated his Senjutsu: Wind Rotation, a powerful technique that created a swirling vortex of wind with a 20-meter radius around him.


    Simultaneously, he deployed multiple Senjutsu: Celestial Rotation Spheres, each with a 10-meter radius, hurling them into the chaos below as well.


    Thebination of these techniques was a spectacle of destructive power. The Wind Rotation tore through the water, dissipating the giant waves and obliterating the chakra-formed sharks.


    The Celestial Rotation Spheres exploded on impact, sending shockwaves across therge battlefield that shattered nearby mountain outcrops and obliterated anything in their vicinity.


    Meanwhile, unsure whether his powerful techniques had fatally wounded Kisame or merely incapacitated him, Hikari recognized that lingering to confirm the oue could jeopardize the overarching current objective.


    The urgency to breach Kirigakure''s inner defenses and carry out his objectives was paramount. Thus, he chose not to dwell on the aftermath of the confrontation.


    With a focused determination, he spurred his ink-eagle onward, piercing through the dissipating mist and debris of the battlefield.


    Thendscape of Kirigakure loomed ahead, its defenses rattled by the preceding chaos but still formidable. Hikari knew that entering the vige would bring him a real challenge and much fiercer adversaries.


    However, equipped with his keen strategies and the significant power of his newly empowered techniques, he was prepared to face whatever awaited him inside the vige.

 118. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (1)

    118. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (1)


    As Hikari quickly approached the heart of Kirigakure next, his mind briefly wandered to the enigmatic Hoshigaki n, spurred by his recent encounter with Kisame.


    He spected about the origins of their unique abilities, pondering if an ancient founder of the Hoshigaki might have employed a secret Yang Release technique to merge his essence with that of a shark.


    Such a transformation would have been advantageous in the aquatic terrain that defined their region, possibly leading to gic adaptations that were passed down through generations.


    Hikari theorized that this mystical union might not only exin the shark-like features evident in Kisame but also the substantial chakra reserves he had witnessed.


    Perhaps, he mused, there was an additional mutation triggered by the Yang Release technique that enhanced their chakra capacity, making members of the Hoshigaki n formidable warriors uniquely adapted to their environment.


    With these thoughts in mind, Hikari refocused on the mission at hand. Using his Byakugan, he scanned ahead, surveying theyout of Kirigakure and assessing the ongoing battles.


    He was particrly concerned about the status of the Kaguya and Yuki ns, wondering how effective they had been in massacring the entire Hoshigaki and Hozuki ns, who were staunch supporters of the current Mizukage.


    His eyes pierced through the architecture and the flurry of activity, trying to gauge the extent of their progress. Were they managing to suppress these key yers effectively?


    However, just as Hikari was adjusting his strategy based on his observations of the present, already chaotic and evolving situation inside of Kirigakure, thanks to Kaguya and Yuhi group intrusion there, from the other side, his Byakugan caught a sudden and unusual movement.


    A high-pressure stream of water was shooting through the air, heading directly toward his position on the ink eagle. Riding atop this liquid torrent was an old man dressed in the official robes of the Mizukage.


    He appeared to be around the age of the Hyuga Patriarch, with long, ck hair flowing down to his back. Notably, his eyescked visible pupils, giving the impression of blindness, yet his mastery over the water stream suggested otherwise for some reason.


    Hikari instantly recognized that this was the Mizukage himself, intent on intercepting him before he could reach the heart of the vige.


    The Mizukage''s expression was one of fierce determination and anger, clearly prepared to do whatever was necessary to protect his domain.


    As the Mizukage drew closer, the power of his jutsu became evident. The water stream he manipted was both a weapon and a mode of transport, showcasing his profound chakra control and expertise in water-based techniques.


    This was no ordinary opponent; his ability to fight effectively despite his apparent blindness hinted at extraordinary sensory skills or alternative methods of perception, likely enhanced by his vast experience, Hikari immediately noted.


    As the distance closed between them, Hikari braced for impact, his focus sharp as he prepared to counter the imminent threat head-on. The battle that was about to unfold would undoubtedly be a pivotal moment in their campaign.


    As the distance between them rapidly closed, the Third Mizukage intensified his approach. His demeanor was one of utter resolve, a clear testament to hismitment to defending Kirigakure at all costs.


    Concentrating his power, the water around his arm coalesced into a spiraling, drill-like structure. The water, driven by his formidable chakra control, became dense and sharp, resembling a giant, piercing drill.


    It was not onlyrge but crafted with such precision that its tip seemed capable of cutting through the toughest materials ¡ª a deadly weapon of water made solid by sheer will and chakra maniption.


    As he prepared tounch this fearsome attack, the Mizukage''s voice boomed across the distance, carried by the wind and the spray of the water, "You didn''t stop messing with us over and over again. You even dare to lead an invasion into Kirigakure and challenge its very heart and authority right now!",


    He thundered, his voice filled with a menacing calm, "I will personally see to your end now, kekkei-genkai ''spoiled'' brat. Feel honored. Prepare to face the depth of Kirigakure''s resolve!"


    With those words, the Mizukage thrust his arm forward, and the water drill surged with incredible speed toward Hikari.


    As the Third Mizukage surged toward him, Hikari''s Byakugan afforded him a crystal-clear view not just of the attack but of the Mizukage himself.


    His keen eyes pierced through the outer facade, analyzing the elder''s internal chakra system and physical condition.


    Despite the powerful disy, Hikari noted signs of age and decay that typically afflicted even the most formidable shinobi in theirter years.


    ''How on Earth did this old man garner such respect and remain Mizukage even during this age? He''s around Setsuna and Hirayoshi''s age, and not even a proper Kage-level shinobi judging by all of this. He''s practically one foot in the grave...'',


    Hikari mused internally. He also noted that the Mizukage''s body and chakra pathways showed signs of significant wear, and yet, the control he exhibited over his jutsu was nothing short of masterful for some reason.


    Hikari responded aloud with a mix of disdain and genuine curiosity, "Geezer, you should go back to your slumber. This vige is in worse shape than I thought if they consider a fossil like you the strongest here. Move out of my way!",


    Even as he spoke, Hikari was gathering his own chakra, a wind element swirling around his arm to form a counteracting drill.


    "But your chakra control is truly amazing, the best I''ve ever seen after myself...", Hikari continued, his tone shifting slightly to acknowledge the skill before him, "To swirl the water to such an extent that it bes sharp, hard, and dangerous to the majority of shinobi...",


    "How do you manage that without Byakugan? No, despitecking both of your eyes altogether. Don''t tell me you have spent your entire life perfecting just this one technique, or something along those lines.",


    "You should also be quite an expert in the Water Release conceptually and intimately.", Hikari added as he noticed the quite long trail of water that brought the old man up there near him.


    As the distance closed between Hikari and the Mizukage, the old man remained stoically silent, his focus entirely on the impending sh. Just as their techniques were about to collide, Hikari tensed, a sudden realization dawning on him,


    ''How could this be... Not good!'', He thought, noticing an unexpected surge in the power of the Mizukage''s water drill. It intensified rapidly, gaining a formidable edge that looked set to overpower his wind drill.


    Reacting swiftly, Hikari activated his Byakugan''s special mode that allowed him to perceive natural energy.


    To his astonishment, he discovered that the Mizukage was also incorporating natural energy into his attack during this time somehow.


    With no time to ponder the implications of this revtion, Hikari quickly channeled natural energy into his wind drill, of his own, enhancing its power to match the escting threat.


    The air around them crackled with the collision of these two massive forces, each infused with natural energy, creating a spectacle of swirling winds and spiraling water in the sky.


    The impact of their sh was explosive, sending shockwaves rippling through the air. Both techniques met with such force that the surrounding mist was blown away, revealing a clear sky for a brief moment.


    The collision created a blinding light that enveloped both Hikari and the Mizukage, obscuring them from view.


    When the light dissipated, both shinobi were seen falling towards the ground, their energy temporarily spent from the monumental sh.


    They hit the ground with tremendous force, each rolling away from the impact site to regain their footing.


    The earth around them was scarred and upheaved, bearing witness to the intensity of their short, almost instant sh.


    But, in a remarkable disy of skill and resilience, and to make the matter even more strange, both Hikari and the Mizukage mitigated the impact of their crashnding in weirdly simr ways using their mastery over their respective elements and chakra control skills.


    Hikari surrounded himself with an armor of swirling wind, a protective vortex that cushioned his fall by dispersing the kic energy around him.


    Simultaneously, the Mizukage conjured an armor of spiraling water, creating a fluid barrier that absorbed the shock and minimized the physical repercussions of their descent.


    This parallel use of chakra not only fully demonstrated their high-level mastery but also underscored the simrities in their abilities to control chakra with world-leading precision.


    The armors of wind and water still shimmered around their forms, highlighting the intense yet controlled nature of their power.


    As they regained theirposure, the air around them tingled with the residual energy of their sh.

 119. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (2)

    119. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (2)


    Both Hikari and the Mizukage evaluated each other once again now. Hikari was as serious as ever before, and the Mizukage strangely calmed down his previous anger toward Hikari.


    "It''s really as I thought. You have managed to learn how to incorporate natural energy into your attacks for some reason. And you did it while so young... You might be the youngest in history to do that, Hyuga brat...",


    The Third Mizukage remarked the first to break the tense silence following their dramatic, fast, sh. Surprisingly, his tone had shifted from the fierce anger previously disyed to a strategic calm, as if the earlier disy of rage had been nothing more than a ruse.


    Indeed, the change in his demeanor revealed a deeperyer of tactical acumen. He had initially nned to conceal his true capabilities and intentions, hoping to catch Hikari off guard with the previous surprise maneuver.


    That was because he had more or less already partially guessed the true extent of Hikari''s overall power, from earlier reports, as he himself also basically was involved quite heavily with natural energy-rted matters, so he never underestimated him due to his young age.


    This strategy had almost worked, as his feigned fury and aggressive front, alongside his objectively quite old age, nearly led to a decisive blow against the young Hyuga during their initial encounter in the sky.


    "How did you do it? Does it perhaps have anything to do with your eyes? It is, after all, impossible to do it that fast using the ''ordinary method''...", The Third Mizukage mused, his eyes narrowing as he intently studied Hikari''s.


    He was searching for clues, for something beyond the ordinary that might exin the young Hyuga''s rapid mastery of natural energy.


    The Mizukage knew all too well the arduous journey he had undergone to harness such power. Decades of continuous meditation, day and night, had been required, during which he had even sacrificed his sight to enhance his ability to perceive and interact with natural energy. This level of dedication was not just arduous; it was life-altering.


    And from historical ounts, he knew he wasn''t an exception. Samurai and monks of the past who sought to manipte natural energy like that had faced simr grueling paths.


    "So, you''ve found some kind of shortcut, haven''t you, boy?", He continued, a mix of usation and wonder in his voice.


    "Sure enough, you cursed, bloody, kekkei genkai bloodline holders are the luckiest ss in this world, not having to work even one-tenth as hard as us, the rest mere mortals...",


    There was a hint of bitterness and resentment in his tone, revealing a deep-seated animosity towards those born with inherent abilities.


    His experiences and struggles had evidently shaped a negative view of kekkei genkai holders, whom he saw as having an unfair advantage in the shinobi world, just like that.


    His expression darkened, hissed words betraying a history of conflict and perhaps envy, marking the stark difference in their paths to power.


    As the Third Mizukage''s words lingered in the air, filled with bitterness and resentment, Hikari''s mind raced with its own thoughts and realizations,


    ''I was a bit careless..'', He admitted to himself silently, analyzing the unexpected depth of his abilities, ''It was too unlikely that he didn''t also possess some kind of power of this level...'',


    ''Sure enough, he went blind, at that time, not only to better practice the chakra control and connection with the Water Release, but also this application of the natural energy. We''re truly one of a kind then...'',


    Hikari''s contemtion deepened as he considered the broader implications of their encounter. It was indeed always strange to him how no contemporary famous and eminent shinobi had managed to master such a potent use of natural energy in the original story.


    ''And this is the truth, this Kiri individual clearly did¡ªit''s just that he was never shown much in the original...'', Hikari thought, reflecting on the unique and ancient external application of natural energy that both he and the Mizukage possessed.


    "It is quite strange how we both possess a simr set of abilities, geezer. It''s almost as if fate brought us together here, for one of us to die, and the other to potentially be thest possessor of such abilities in the world...",


    Hikari spoke, his voice tinged with a hint of respect after a slight uncharacteristic sigh for him. The gravity of their encounter seemed to weigh on him more heavily than usual, marking a rare moment of reflection for the typically stoic Hyuga.


    He continued, his tone blending understanding with a calmer rity that had defined his approach so far, referring to the man''s previous hostile words directed toward him, "I understand your grudge against Kekkei Genkai shinobi and the subsequent hatred you harbor for them. However, it''s precisely that disdain that has allowed me and my n to be so sessful on this front, at least partially. So, I guess in a way, I''m thankful for that."


    Hikari paused, his expression growing colder as he delivered his next words, "Also, I''m sorry that after I kill you now, I''m afraid to say that I''ve already designated those bloodline holders, from the Kaguya and Yuki ns, to seed you and take over this vige, aligning with a broader n I have for it.",


    "So, I guess I''m sorry for that too, knowing how much you hate them that is.", With a slight chuckle that didn''t quite reach his eyes, Hikari added,


    "But if it makes it any easier for you, I suppose you can curse me a little now as much as you want like that. After all, this will be yourst chance to spite one of us...", Hisposure and confidence fully returned, his stance firm and his eyes clear with the cold resolve and intent.


    The Third Mizukage, his usually calm demeanor reced by a re of deep-seated emotions, responded to Hikari''s words with a mixture of disdain and introspection.


    His history with bloodline holders and his personal tragedies had forged his views, making him particrly sensitive to Hikari''s provocations.


    "You think you understand the weight of these decisions, Hyuga brat?", The Mizukage began, his voice heavy with the burden of years of conflict, "You speak of ns and session as if you grasp the fullplexity of what drives a man to protect his vige and the length I would go to never allow your words to materialize today in front of me now."


    He paused, the memories of his lost family haunting his expression for a moment, "I did what I believed necessary to safeguard Kirigakure from those who would tear it apart from within.",


    "My actions, however severe, were meant to cleanse ournd of instability. Those bloodline holders you so proudly bring up¡ªthey were used as weapons against my own family, leading to the ughter of my wife and children.",


    "How could I not act against such threats? This didn''t make the vige weaker as you probably think, but stronger. We don''t need such crazy and selfish people in our vige. Just like the Konoha would probably do better without you.",


    The Third Mizukage, known for his steelyposure, had not felt such a surge of emotions in many years. Typically, he remained detached, his demeanor calm and controlled even in the face of adversity.


    Yet, there was one issue that could ignite a fire within him¡ªbloodline holders. His antipathy towards them was not merely a personal vendetta; it was deeply entwined with the darkest chapters of his life and the history of Kirigakure.


    Decades ago, before he rose to the mantle of Mizukage, the treatment of bloodline holders in the Land of Water was inconsistent andrgely driven by societal fears and prejudices.


    They were ostracized, sometimes violently, by ordinary civilians rather than through any organized effort by shinobi.


    This unstructured discrimination was chaotic andrgely unchecked, leading to sporadic but brutal violence.


    However, when he assumed leadership, the Third Mizukage transformed this scattered persecution into a systematic purge.


    He believed that only through controlling and molding these powerful individuals from a young age could the vige harness their abilities for the greater good.


    Under his rule, bloodline holders had only one pathway to survival: enrollment in Kirigakure''s shinobi academy as children, where they could be shaped to serve the vige''s needs.


    The catalyst for this drastic policy was a tragedy that marked Mizukage''s life with sorrow and irrevocable change.


    A faction of political dissenters from within the Land of Water, from another ind, driven by separatist ideologies and desperate to overthrow the existing order, employed rogue bloodline holders as assassins.


    Their target was the Mizukage himself, but the mission went awry, resulting in the death of his wife and young children instead.


    This loss did not just deepen his resolve; it hardened his heart. From that point forward,he destroyed his own eyes in order to make progress in his chakra control and natural energy connection, as fast as possible, and he immediately Mizukage decreed that bloodline holders would be controlled or eliminated.


    This policy reshaped Kirigakure, embedding a deep-seated mistrust and fear of bloodline abilities within the vige''s culture and governance.


    It was a decision born of personal anguish but executed with the cold precision of a leader determined to prevent any future threats to his rule and his vige, even if it meant sacrificing the freedom and lives of a powerful minority.


    In this current confrontation with Hikari Hyuga, all the old wounds and the stringent policies he had implemented were being challenged. The battle was not just physical but symbolic, a fight over the future direction of Kirigakure and the legacy of its current leader. He would never allow someone like Toru Kaguya or Arata Yukki to rece him, in a ''humiliating'' turn.

 120. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (3)

    120. Duel with the Mizukage: Battle for Supremacy (3)


    As the confrontation intensified, the Third Mizukage''s emotions surged with a palpable, dark energy. His voice,ced with venom, echoed across the battlefield, articting a fierce resolve, his old face contorting,


    "I would rather be shredded to pieces now than allow those two cursed ns to usurp my longstanding rule. I will kill you, Hikari Hyuga, and all your invading kin...",


    "Be sure of that now...", He snarled, his wrinkled expression twisted in disdain, "And in doing so, I will be doing Konoha a massive favor by ridding them of your meddlesome presence.",


    His words were not just threats; they were a deration of his deep-seated animosity, "You think you can just march into Kirigakure and dictate the future? You and your ilk are nothing but a blight on the shinobi world¡ªa gue that needs to be eradicated...", He spat out, each word dripping with hatred.


    The Mizukage''s prejudice against kekkei genkai holders wasn''t a mere political stance; it was a deeply ingrained loathing that had shaped his entire leadership philosophy, "Your bloodlines, your cursed powers...",


    "They''ve done nothing but bring chaos and destruction wherever they exist. My life has taught me that much. And now, you dare to bring that curse to my doorstep? I will bury you and your ambitions beneath the very waters of this vige!"


    However, at that time, Hikari''s response finally came as a cold, calcted rebuke, his voice cutting through the tense air with precision.


    "Huh, a sparrow, wanting to kill a swan? Some things are fixed from the moment you are born, there are certain limits to everything you might try and do.",


    "As you also probably understand deep inside, and that''s why you hate us, out of sheer jealousy. Your entire life has been a futile cope.",


    "There were some limits that you cannot cross no matter how hard you try. Just how you didn''t manage to deal with Kaguya and others in all these decades, collectively with your faction, no matter how despicable methods you used.",


    His gaze hardened, reflecting a deep-seated pride in his heritage, "Let me show you the superiority of the kekkei genkai right now in a personal battle too.",


    "Although Imend your 50+ years of constant, day-and-night, almost passive, as often as breathing, probably, training to pass your natural limits, I will show you it was all useless.",


    "You will also regret insulting me and my n. There are some limits that ordinary ''average shinobi mortals'' like you can''t cross... And don''t worry about our ce in Konoha, the rest of Konoha will learn that too over time.",


    Hikari''s words were not just a defense of his abilities but an assertion of his disdain for the Mizukage''s life-long vendetta against people like him.


    It was a deration of his intent to demonstrate the inherent power of his bloodline, not to avenge past wrongs inflicted on kekkei genkai holders, at the hands of this Mizukage, but to assert his dominance and put the Mizukage in his ce simply because he felt it was necessary¡ªbecause he felt like it at that moment.


    With his Byakugan glowing fiercely, Hikari prepared for what he hoped would be the definitive sh, one that would not only silence the Mizukage''s continuous disdain but also cement the strength and standing of the Hyuga n in a way.


    As he readied himself, the air around them crackled with the impending burst of chakra and power, signaling the culmination of their confrontation.


    The standoff between Hikari and the Third Mizukage then escted rapidly as both unleashed the full extent of their natural energy-infused techniques instantly in the next second following his promation.


    The battlefield quickly became a spectacle of raw power and ''charged-up'' elemental fury once again, with eachbatant drawing deeply from their surroundings to amplify their attacks with natural energy and senjutsu.


    Hikari initiated the renewed assault,unching his Senjutsu: Wind Release Celestial Rotation Spheres. These spheres, formed of condensed, swirling wind, hurtled through the air towards the Mizukage.


    In response, the Mizukage demonstrated his mastery over water and senjutsu by conjuring a series of some kind of water orbs on his own. These orbs, infused with natural energy, mirrored Hikari''s technique in form but not in element.


    As each water ball soared through the air, it detonated mid-flight, not merely exploding but transforming into a barrage of water projectiles.


    These projectiles fanned out in all directions, creating a rain of high-velocity water shards, each one capable of piercing through stone and steel.


    The technique was not only a testament to the Mizukage''s chakra control but also to his strategic acumen, countering Hikari''s explosive force with a widespread area attack.


    The initial exchange culminated in a spectacr series of mid-air collisions. Wind spheres and water orbs met with explosive force, creating a symphony of elemental chaos.


    The impacts generated shockwaves that reverberated through the air, distorting the surrounding mist and sending vibrations through the ground beneath their feet.


    Almost instantly after the mid-air explosions, Hikari and the Mizukage closed the distance between them with breathtaking speed. They appeared like specters, their movements so fast they seemed to teleport from one spot to another.


    As they approached each other, both activated their defensive techniques¡ªHikari with his armor of swirling wind and the Mizukage with his shield of spiraling water.


    When they shed, it was with the force of a tempest meeting a tsunami. Their drills, one of wind and the other of water collided with such intensity that the surrounding mountains seemed to tremble, over and over again.


    The potency of the natural energy around them was palpable, almost visible as ripples in the air. Each strike and maneuver was amplified by their deep connection to the natural forces, turning the battle into a cataclysmic event that reshaped the veryndscape around them.


    However, as the battle raged on, Hikari couldn''t help but acknowledge the Mizukage''s formidable mastery of natural energy techniques,


    ''He is at least a Middle Kage level shinobi just like me now. However, he is much more experienced in using those natural energy external application techniques above all else.",


    "In fact, had he been younger biologically, this would''ve probably been over for me rtively quickly. But now I still have a chance...'', Hikari thought, reassessing his opponent''s strengths and vulnerabilities.


    The realization that the Mizukage''s age might be his Achilles'' heel spurred Hikari to adapt his strategy. Despite the Mizukage''s impressive skill set, his older physique couldn''t possibly sustain high-intensitybat indefinitely.


    ''I need to exploit that to my advantage. If I manage to hold on for long enough, then my way superior and younger body stats due to biological age would help me win. I also learned more and more about those natural energy applications through his moves inadvertently, so I think I can also quite progress during this battle itself, which is a very beneficial development for me unexpectedly as Ick the most experience in that uncharted territory that natural energy is in this shinobi world during this time...'', He analyzed, thinking several moves ahead.


    With each exchange, Hikari absorbed crucial insights into the application of natural energy, inadvertently gaining a crash course in advanced techniques from one of the most skilled practitioners he had ever faced specializing and having spent decades researching that area. This would also be very useful to himter in life if he managed to live through this ordeal.


    ''I need to try to also bring this battle closer into Kirigakure, to use this to my advantage, to have him put in tough spots more there, have him more ''between a rock and hard ce, in a way, and use his allies against him... I''m already almost there, he didn''t expect me to get past the swordsmen group so fast so he intercepted me rtivelyte...'', He nned additionally.


    Therefore, with this set of new tactics in mind, Hikari began subtly steering the direction of theirbat, aiming to push their battle toward the heart of the Kirigakure more and more.


    Meanwhile, as Hikari and the Third Mizukage continued their ferocious duel, moving closer to the heart of Kirigakure, Hikari''s keen Byakugan picked up the chaotic scenes of intense fighting throughout the vige itself as well as obviously caused by the Kaguya and Yuki nned intrusion in the vige from the other direction.


    Despite the ferocity elsewhere, he noticed how the entire battle inside Kirigakure seemed to pause for a second when he and the Mizukage shed anew, their surges of chakra emitting waves of power that could be felt across the battlefield.


    Thebatants and bystanders alike were momentarily transfixed by the magnitude of their confrontation Hikari barely caught on in one pause between his shes with the Mizukage.


    ''Hold on, hold on, just push a little bit first with myrger chakra reservoir, use it up a little bit, to force him inside... Lose something first to gain something and win in the end...'',


    Hikari mentally strategized, recognizing the need to leverage his younger, more resilient body andrger chakra capacity to his advantage.


    With each calcted strike and maneuver, Hikari sought not only to physically overpower the Mizukage but also to drive him back, step by step, into the vige. He was burning through his chakra like crazy, but he knew that it was the tactic that made the most sense overall.


    The fight continued a blur of motion and energy, with Hikari constantly pushing, always with the goal of drawing the Mizukage deeper into a tactical trap within the heart of Kirigakure.

 121. The Fury of Bone: Kaguya Clan’s Assault Begins

    121. The Fury of Bone: Kaguya n¡¯s Assault Begins


    Simultaneously, in another direction inside the Kirigakure, an intense battle unfolded as the Kaguya and Yuki ns already shed with Kirigakure''s forces, bolstered by reinforcements from Kumogakure, summoned by the Mizukage earlier.


    The Kaguya n, known for their brutalbat skills, focused their efforts on taking down members of the Hozuki n, intent on ending their influence within Kirigakure ''permanently''.


    Meanwhile, the Yuki n directed their ice-manipting powers against the Hoshigaki n to try and aplish the same goal.


    But, smaller skirmishes also broke out throughout the vige as some elites from both the Kaguya and Yuki ns pursued the assassination of other targets among the Mizukage''s key supporters that were scattered all around the vige, now that it was left somewhat depleted of many shinobi who went to fight with Hyuga''s team that was still outside of it at this time.


    The remaining Kirigakure and Kumogakure shinobi worked desperately to protect these vital figures, forming protective details and counter-assault units in response to all the threats.


    However, the chaotic tide of battle momentarily paused as all participants sensed a massive surge of chakra rapidly approaching.


    The source was Hikari, who, after a strenuous expenditure of his reserves, had sessfully maneuvered the Mizukage toward a strategic location within Kirigakure¡ªa steep hill surrounded by many important buildings of the Kirigakure and a bunch of their shinobi and civilians, and finally took a deeper breath of relief.


    The impact of their arrival also sent a shockwave throughout the nearby areas, drawing the attention of both friend and foe everywhere.


    As the dust settled around the crash site, it became clear that Hikari''s tactical decision was about gaining the upper hand inbat and cing the Mizukage in a position where he had to fight cautiously.


    Now, the Mizukage was not only facing Hikari''s relentless assault but also had to be mindful of the battle''s proximity to his own side.


    As Hikari''s Byakugan''s long-distance type vision and ultra-processing speed power quickly scanned and analyzed the tumultuous broad battlefield, his gaze temporarily extended to an area near the Kaguya patriarch, Toru.


    What he saw was a scene of true carnage. The mist was thick with the blood of countless fighters, a vivid testament to the ferocity of the battle, there were rivers of blood already flowing down these steep vicious hills of the vige.


    The Kaguya n, known for their fierce and often recklessbat style, had thrown themselves into the fray with abandon, suffering heavy casualties but inflicting significant damage on the Kirigakure forces as well.


    Amidst this chaos, the figure of Toru stood out starkly. His actions on the battlefield were nothing short of horrifying in their intensity and effectiveness.


    Toru wielded his Shikotsumyaku kekkei genkai with a skill and power that surpassed even the Kimimaro, from the original story, in Hikari''s opinion.


    Toru''s bones sliced through the air, cutting down enemy after enemy, his body moving with a deadly grace that was both awe-inspiring and terrifying.


    Hikari, observing this, couldn''t help but be taken aback by the sheer level of destruction Toru was capable of unleashing in his seemingly angered and blood-thirsty kind of battle state.


    The Kaguya patriarch was not just fighting; he was a whirlwind of death, his every move dictated by an instinctual drive to decimate his foes.


    As Hikari continued to monitor the battlefield with his Byakugan, his attention was drawn to the dramatic transformation of the terrain.


    Tens of thousands of bone spikes, a testament to Toru''s incredible mastery of the Shikotsumyaku kekkei genkai, had erupted from the earth, radically altering thendscape of Kirigakure''s steep interior.


    The spikes jutted out like a forest of white daggers, creating a lethal barrier that disrupted enemy movements and strategies.


    "Truly amazing...", Hikari murmured to himself, his usual stoicism giving way to a rare moment of admiration.


    The scale of Toru''s power was breathtaking, his ability to manipte his kekkei genkai so extensively that it could reshape the battlefield was a feat that demanded respect.


    As the fight still raged on, Toru continued to summon more bone spikes from the ground, each new wave strategically ced to decimate his enemies and provide tactical advantages to his n members.


    The sight was both awe-inspiring and horrifying, as the spikes emerged amidst the chaos, skewering or decapitating unprepared and unlucky foes right away.


    However, despite the impressive disy of power, the casualties among the Kaguya n were mounting rmingly, just like those of the Yuki n as well.


    Hikari could see that the numerical superiority of the Kirigakure and Kumogakure forces was taking its toll. The Kaguya n, though fierce and resilient, was significantly outnumbered, leading to a grim tally of losses.


    ''It''s no wonder Toru is this mad and reckless...'', Hikari concluded internally, understanding the desperate ferocity behind Toru''s actions after seeing so many of his nsmen die.


    The man was so bloodthirsty and in a frenzy now that he didn''t seemingly register his and Mizukage''s arrival and continued using the nearby confusion to kill more and more enemies.


    As Hikari observed Toru''sbat style and technique executions, he noted the significant enhancements in the Kaguya patriarch''s abilitiespared to Kimimaro''s.


    Toru''s mastery of the Kaguya n''s kekkei genkai was not only impressive in its scope but also in its lethal efficiency and scale.


    The man''s inner bone armor was notably more robust and extensive, offering greater protection and resilience amidbat.


    His Dance of the Clematis: Vine, a technique that extended bone material to entrap or impale opponents, was executed with a reach and thickness that dwarfed the versions Hikari had now seen from the select few nearby elite Kaguya n fighters, and even previous read about in his past life in the case of Kimimaro once again.


    Simrly, the Dance of the Clematis: Flower, which formed arge, sharp bone weapon, was also significantlyrger and more formidable, capable of cutting through multiple enemies with a single swipe.


    Moreover, Toru''s seemingly basic ''low-level'' Ten-Finger Drilling Bullets, which many Kaguya nsmen here could also do, was a sight of rapid-fire devastation.


    Each projectile was not only faster but alsounched in greater numbers, turning Toru''s hands into a blur as he unleashed a barrage of bone bullets that tore through the ranks of his foes with terrifying precision.


    As Hikari watched Toru adapt his techniques to the flow of battle, it became clear that the Kaguya patriarch was a master of his craft, capable of tailoring his formidable abilities to the specific challenges presented by each opponent.


    Whether it was adapting his bone armor to withstand the heaviest of blows or using his more destructive techniques to clear areas of multiple enemies, Toru exhibited a level of skill and tactical acumen that made him a singr force on the battlefield despite his ''crazed'' state, perhaps that was the instinct of their n members Hikari noted, and the man relied on that.


    As Hikari''s gaze remained fixed on Toru''s dynamic battlefield maneuvers, he witnessed the unleashing of several unprecedented techniques that even Kimimaro seemingly also didn''t have during the original timeline.


    One particrly devastating attack involvedunching hundreds of bone needles into the air, which then cascaded down like a deadly rain upon his opponents.


    Thisrge-scale attack created a zone of peril around Toru, where the dense barrage of bone needles made it nearly impossible for enemies to avoid injury without retreating or finding substantial cover.


    Another innovative technique Hikari observed was even more subtle and maniptive. Toru conjured thin, flexible bone threads¡ªalmost invisible against the chaos of the battlefield¡ªthat he used totch onto opponents or allies.


    With these threads, Toru could control their movements remotely, through their bones, effectively puppeteering his enemies to expose themselves to further attacks or positioning his allies to strategic advantage.


    This technique allowed for orchestrated attacks andplex battlefield maniptions that could turn the tide in a fluidbat scenario.


    Perhaps the most chilling technique was the "Ossification Wave", which Hikari heard about already as it was a fairly standard technique within the Kaguya n.


    With just a touch or a focused nce, Toru and others could trigger an uncontrolled growth of bones in his opponent''s body.


    This horrifying ability could immobilize an enemy by causing their own skeletal structure to grow and protrude at odd angles, effectively using the body''s own anatomy against itself.


    The precision required for such a technique spoke volumes about Toru''s mastery of chakra control and his intimate knowledge of human anatomy.


    Hikari watched as Toru seamlessly integrated these techniques, using the bone needle barrage as a conduit for the Ossification Wave, creating a scenario where enemies were not only pelted by needles but also found themselves suddenly ensnared and immobilized by their mutated skeletons. That was something that Hikari saw only Toru being able to do now.


    Witnessing these techniques in real-time, Hikari couldn''t help but be amazed at the level of innovation and sheer power Toru brought to the battlefield.

 122. Arata Yuki’s Triumph Over Kumogakure’s Might

    122. Arata Yuki¡¯s Triumph Over Kumogakure¡¯s Might


    In another quarter of Kirigakure, Arata Yuki led his forces amidst andscape transformed into a wintry battlefield. The area was nearly entirely nketed in ice, a testament to the Yuki n''s mastery of Ice Release techniques.


    However, despite the strategic advantage this provided, the Yuki n faced overwhelming odds. Kirigakure''s forces vastly outnumbered them, and the intensebat had inflicted heavy casualties on Arata''s nsmen, stirring a deep indignation within him.


    As the battle raged, Arata caught sight of a distant but intense skirmish¡ªthe unmistakable figures of Hikari Hyuga and the Third Mizukage locked inbat. The sight of the Mizukage being pushed back by Hikari was a spark of hope amidst the desperate struggle.


    Inspired by this turn of events, Arata saw an opportunity to motivate his weary troops and invigorate their spirits with the possibility of a significant victory.


    "That''s the Mizukage there, you see it? The Third Mizukage!", Arata yelled, pointing towards the distant fight on a hill in the distance, ensuring his voice carried over the mor of battle.


    "Hikari Hyuga managed to push him so far. It means we all have to win this time and finally change this rotten vige!"


    His words echoed across the icy fields, resonating with the tired but resolute warriors of the Yuki n, "Fight harder, fight harder! Our victory is in sight!", He shouted, his tone infused with a fierce determination.


    His message was clear: the struggle they endured was not just for survival but for a transformative victory that could reshape their futures.


    Emboldened by Arata''s rallying cry, the Yuki nsmen renewed their efforts. The ice around them seemed to thrum with renewed energy as they channeled their resolve into their techniques, fighting with a reinvigorated spirit.


    After Arata''s words reinvigorated the Yuki nsmen, the battlefield surged with a new wave of Ice Release techniques. The elite warriors of the Yuki n unleashed a barrage of their basic yet potent abilities.


    Ice spears and needles shot through the air with lethal precision, targeting the advancing Kirigakure forces, while massive walls of ice sprang up to shield the Yuki fighters from counterattacks.


    The icy projectiles embedded themselves into the ground and enemy shields, creating a jaggedndscape of frozen hazards that impeded the enemy''s movements.


    Meanwhile, Arata himself contributed significantly to the strategic offensive. He conjured a series of Ice Release Shadow Clones, a ninjutsu that not only multiplied his presence on the battlefield but also added a deadlyyer to theirbat strategy.


    These clones, imbued with ice chakra, moved swiftly through the ranks of his troops, charging into the fray.


    Each clone was a ticking time bomb of frost, designed to freeze anything upon contact. As the clones engaged the enemy and were destroyed inbat, they exploded into bursts of intense cold, freezing nearby Kirigakure shinobi and turning them into statues of ice.


    This tactic caused chaos and hesitation among the enemy ranks, as the fear of triggering these frozen traps made them think twice before striking down the advancing clones.


    As the Yuki n pressed their advantage, the forces of Kirigakure were pushed into a defensive posture.


    However, this shift was short-lived as the newly arrived reinforcements from Kumogakure, led by a skilled shinobi named Toroi, were finally ready to execute their counter-strategy.


    Utilizing the humid and misty climate of the area, they prepared a tactical surprise that would tilt the battlefield in their favor.


    Under Toroi''smand, the Kumogakure shinobibined their expertise in Water and Lightning Release to create the "Electrified Mist Jutsu."


    This technique involved generating a dense, electrified mist that enveloped the area where the Yuki n forces were concentrated.


    The mist, saturated with electrical energy, turned into a deadly trap. As it spread, the air itself became a conductor of electricity, creating a hazardous environment for anyone caught within it.


    When the Yuki nsmen, engaged in their offensive, encountered the mist, they found themselves suddenly besieged by electric shocks.


    The shocks were not merely painful but debilitating, paralyzing some and disorienting others, and were even deadly for the lesser experienced fighters inrge numbers.


    The ability to move waspromised, and utilizing chakra became a risky endeavor, as each attempt could trigger further electrocution.


    This jutsu was not only offensive but also served defensive purposes. It effectively halted the Yuki n''s advance, protected the retreats of Kirigakure''s shinobi, and trapped the enemy within a zone where moving forward or escaping carried the risk of intense electrocution.


    The effectiveness of the Electrified Mist Jutsuy in its strategicbination of the obscuring properties of the mist and the lethality of the lightning, turning the environment itself into a weapon.


    The integration of Water Release to create or enhance the existing mist and Lightning Release to infuse it with electrical energy was a testament to the skill and coordination of the Kumogakure shinobi.


    This tactical move forced the Yuki n to reconsider their strategies and find new ways to counter the electrified barrier that now hindered their previously unstoppable advance.


    Seeing the devastating effect of the Electrified Mist Jutsu and the dire predicament of his nsmen, Arata''s frustration and anger boiled over.


    The sight of Yuki nsmen trapped and vulnerable, with Kirigakure shinobi moving in for the kill, was too much to bear.


    His expression hardened with resolve, his eyes narrowing with lethal intent as he spotted the Kumogakure shinobi still actively sustaining the electric mist.


    Without hesitation, Arata leaped into action, his movements swift and decisive. He targeted the group of Kumogakure shinobi responsible for the electrified barrier, knowing that neutralizing them was critical to breaking the deadly trap ensnaring his n.


    As he approached his targets, Arata unleashed one of his most powerful techniques, Ice Release: Hundred Flying Ice Daggers. This advanced version of the Ice Release: Thousand Flying Ice Needles was far more deadly and precise.


    He rapidly shaped water into several dozen sharp, thick ice daggers, freezing them in mid-air. With a flick of his wrist and a focused burst of chakra, the daggers converged on the Kumogakure shinobi from multiple directions.


    The ice daggers sliced through the air with deadly uracy, attempting to skewer the targets with such force and precision that there was no possibility of survival. Each dagger was aimed to incapacitate and neutralize right away.


    However, in the next second, just as Arata''s attack seemed destined to seed, a formidable counter challenged his efforts.


    From the ranks of the Kumogakure shinobi, a powerful voice rang out, "Not so fast." It was Dodai, the second-inmand of the Kumogakure forces here, stepping forward to intervene.


    "Think you can break through? Not while I''m here!", Dodai, known for his mastery of the Lava Release kekkei genkai, swiftly acted to protect his fellow shinobi.


    Combining both fire and earth-natured chakra, he summoned his unique ability to create an extremely durable, rubber-like substance.


    This material was not only resistant to physical impacts but also possessed remarkable properties that made it an ideal defense against a variety of jutsu.


    With swift, practiced movements, Dodai shaped the rubber-like substance into a massive wall that rose in front of the oing ice daggers.


    The wall''s bouncy and absorbent nature caught and neutralized the momentum of the ice daggers, effectively stopping them in their tracks.


    The daggers, designed for pration and damage, were thwarted by the rubber''s resilience, their lethal points harmlessly embedded in the thick, stic barrier.


    Not stopping there, Dodai manipted additional rubber to formrge balls, which he hurled towards the Yuki n fighters.


    These balls served as crafty distractions, bouncing unpredictably and forcing Arata''s fighters to divide their attention.


    Some tried to dodge the cumbersome projectiles, while others attempted to destroy them, only to find their efforts wasting valuable chakra on the resilient material.


    This all contributed to further casualties among their ranks in such a rtively short period.


    However, as the battle escted with Dodai''s intervention, and Arata was just about to focus his attention on him, Toroi, the first inmand of the Kumogakure forces, didn''t allow him that, as he also took his turn to strike and exploit this opportunity, now targeting Arata and his troubled Yuki nsmen.


    Known for his tactical acumen and unique weaponry, Toroi was ready to deploy his formidable arsenal.


    Toroi wielded several distinctive square-shaped shuriken, varying in size and designed for maximum damage.


    These shuriken were typically sealed within a scroll for convenience and rapid deployment. In the heat of battle, Toroi cleverly held the scroll between his teeth, freeing both hands forbat maneuvers and allowing for a swift and relentless attack.


    To maximize the impact of his assault, Toroi used a technique involving threading a substantial number of these shuriken along a length of rope.


    This setup enabled him tounch a devastating barrage of shuriken with a single swing, creating a deadly rain of metal that was difficult to anticipate and nearly impossible to fully evade.


    Adding to the lethality of his attack, Toroi utilized his signature, legendary Ma Release kekkei genkai. As the shuriken made contact with any surface or were near their targets, he maized them.


    This allowed him to manipte a powerful maic field that extended beyond the initial point of impact.


    Any other metallic objects¡ªor subsequent shuriken thrown into the fray¡ªwere also pulled toward the maized spots, chaining attacks together and increasing the area of effect.


    This strategic use of Ma Release turned the battlefield into an even more perilous zone, for the Yuki, where the simple act of carrying a weapon could make one a ma for further attacks.


    As the battle raged on, the toll on the Yuki n became increasingly severe, particrly after the devastating effects of the maic and rubber-like attacks orchestrated by Dodai and Toroi in a very short period of time.


    Arata watched, after freezing all of the iing attacks toward himself next, with a heart heavy with despair, as more of his nsmen fell or were incapacitated, their numbers dwindling under the relentless assault.


    His face a mask of resolve tinged with grief, Arata surveyed the battlefield, his eyes reflecting the pain of each loss.


    Despite the overwhelming situation, his voice rang clear and strong, carrying bothmand and a deep, resonant fury as he addressed his remaining fighters and his adversaries:


    "To all Yuki warriors, listen to me!", Arata shouted, his pained voice cutting through the chaos resolutely and loudly, "We are facing a cunning and brutal enemy, but we will not yield!",


    "Encase all of your metallic weapons with your Ice Release so hard as to make thempletely useless, and rely only on your ninjutsu from now on.",


    "Regroup and focus¡ªuse tactics that bypass their traps. We fight not just for victory, but for survival and the honor of our fallen!",


    Meanwhile, Toroi and Dodai, now observing the effectiveness of their tactics, from their vantage point, could see the disarray among the Yuki n and the heavy toll their strategies had exacted.


    "Well, they say hope freezesst. But in this case, it seems their tactics froze first! Let''s keep the pressure; it looks like our little diversion is chilling their spirits as well as their bodies."


    "Indeed, Toroi. It''s almost sad. You''d think with all that ice, they''d have figured out something cooler than just throwing themselves at us."


    In response to the mocking taunts from Toroi and Dodai, a deep, chilling change overtook Arata. The atmosphere around him tensed as if the very air was bracing itself.


    His chakra surged visibly, a raw, powerful icy, chilling aura emanating from him, signaling a near-breaking point fueled by rising anger and a fierce protective instinct for his n.


    As his Kekkei Genkai seemed to pulsate, ready to break free from its chains, Arata''s voice cut through the noise of the battlefield, cold and unforgiving:


    "There will not be one Kumogakure shinobi escaping alive today, and that obviously includes you two. Kumogakure will regret this interference, helping this cursed Mizukage in a war that does not concern you.",


    Then, without giving them time to react or reply, Arata unleashed one of his most formidable jutsus. Gathering his chakra, he molded it with precision and intent, crafting an enormous, menacing dragon made entirely of flowing ice.


    The Ice Release: Ice Dragon Bullet, a testament to his mastery and the depth of his fury, roared to life, its crystalline form glinting dangerously.


    With a forceful motion, Arata propelled the ice dragon towards Toroi and Dodai while riding on top of it. The dragon moved with incredible speed and ferocity, its body twisting and writhing as it bore down on the two Kumogakure shinobi.


    As Arata''s formidable Ice Dragon Bullet surged toward them, Toroi and Dodai reacted with swift precision, each utilizing their unique abilities to escape the massive icy onught.


    However, upon impact, on the nearby hill and mauling a dozen of Kumogakure''s shinobi on its trajectory, who weren''t so lucky as theirmanders, the dragon didn''t just break passively; instead, it started actively exploding into a cascade of icy shards, the severe cold and sharp ice designed to pierce everything in its vicinity.


    Although some were deflected or absorbed, many broke through, maintaining their lethal trajectory, killing many nearby Kumogakure shinobi on the scene although Dodai and Toroi dodged it all once again sessfully thanks to their mastery.


    Amidst this chaos, Arata, who had been riding atop the ice dragon, now found himself propelled forward, closer than ever to his two main targets now.


    Seizing the opportunity, he quickly initiated another powerful jutsu, Ice Release: Ice Golem. From the frost and mist of the exploded dragon, arge humanoid construct of ice formed around Arata.


    The golem, towering and formidable, featured limbs that could transform into razor-sharp ice des and ws at Arata''smand.


    With the Kumogakure shinobi now preupied and unable to sustain their Electrified Mist Jutsu, thanks to Arata''s onught, the battlefield dynamics shifted significantly once again.


    The Yuki n members, relieved of the paralyzing electric threat, found themselves better positioned tobat the Kirigakure shinobi alone.


    The tide of the battle began to turn as the remaining Yuki fighters exploited this advantage, pushing back with renewed vigor against their opponents.


    Meanwhile, Arata, having created a strategic opening with his Ice Golem, capitalized on the distraction among the Kumogakure ranks.


    He maneuvered the massive ice construct with deadly precision, using its capabilities tounch razor-sharp ice shards at the enemy.


    The golem, a formidable force under Arata''s control, tore through the Kumogakure lines, dispatching shinobi after shinobi with its morphing icy appendages.


    Dodai and Toroi, realizing the direness of their situation, faced the golem with a mix of determination and frustration.


    The rubber-like barriers and maic fields they had relied on earlier were now under severe strain as Arata continually adapted his attacks to ovee their defenses.


    The golem, being a versatile and relentless adversary, required them to use every bit of their tactical acumen and kekkei genkai abilities.


    However, amid the sh, over time, Dodai and Toroi, both being top-notch Elite Jonin, began to break down the golem''s structure bit by bit.


    Dodai reshaped his rubber-like substance into hardened spikes that attempted to pierce the golem''s icy exterior, while Toroi intensified his maic fields to increase the force of his huge metallic elements, to the maximum possible, trying to tear therge icy golem open.


    As they fought, Toroi shouted towards Arata, his voice filled with challenge and frustration, "You think this ice monstrosity can end us? Think again, Yuki! We''ll shatter every shard you throw at us!", Dodai, equally determined, added, "Your ice age ends here, the Yuki Patriarch!"


    As the battle reached its peak, Arata sensed the structural integrity of his Ice Golem waning under the relentless attacks from Toroi and Dodai over time.


    Realizing that the golem was nearing its end, Arata decided it was time to deploy a technique he had never sessfully used in battle before if he wanted to win this fight.


    Fueled by the previous strange, silent breakthrough in his kekkei genkai, he channeled a vast reservoir of chakra, preparing for a decisive move.


    Just as the golem shattered into countless fragments, and Toroi and Dodai briefly rejoiced at their apparent victory, Arata unleashed his new, formidable jutsu.


    From the remnants of the golem''s icy structure, a massive tsunami of chakra surged forth, enveloping the area in a bitter cold that hinted at the power about to be unleashed.


    "Ice Release: Grand Ice Prison" ¨C this advanced version of the Ice Release: Ice Prison technique was Arata''s gambit.


    He created a gigantic cier that rapidly expanded to fill the designated space, capturing everything and everyone caught within its reach.


    The cier was not just a barrier but a tomb, designed to immobilize and preserve whatever it encased. The victims trapped inside remained conscious but utterly unable to move, their bodies slowly sumbing to the creeping frost that threatened to freeze them to death or leave them so brittle that they would shatter upon release and contact.


    As the cier solidified, Arata, with a forceful gesture, shatteredrge sections of the ice, causing the many nearby trapped Kumogakure shinobi, including Toroi and Dodai, to break apart with it. The sound of cracking ice echoed ominously across the battlefield, marking the end of Kumogakure''smand structure in the area.


    The effect of Arata''s technique was not localized; even Hikari, engaged in his own fierce battle on the other side of the battlefield, sensed the enormous surge of chakra. It was clear that Arata had achieved a monumental breakthrough, pushing past his limits to turn the tide.


    Meanwhile, wow heavily drained of chakra, Arata did not allow himself to rest. With the main threat neutralized, he continued to employ lesser, but still effective, Ice Release techniques against the remaining Kumogakure forces.


    The moral backbone of these forces was broken; they had witnessed their leaders'' defeat and the terrifying power of Arata''s ice. Their fighting spirit dampened, and they struggled to mount any significant defense.


    Determined to clear the field and then assist the remnants of his n against the Kirigakure shinobi behind him, Arata moved systematically. Each step, each spell he cast, was with the intent of finishing the battle quickly.


    As he fought, his mind was also with his nsmen, nning his next moves to support them and ensure that the sacrifices made were not in vain.


    The battle for Kirigakure was far from over, but Arata had just delivered a critical blow that would echo through the ranks of their enemies and bolster the spirits of his allies for now.

 123. Caught in the Crossfire: Mei’s Unexpected Savior

    123. Caught in the Crossfire: Mei¡¯s Unexpected Savior


    Meanwhile, as the battle between Hikari and the Third Mizukage also continued, at the same time, they moved swiftly across different parts of Kirigakure.


    Hikari cleverly used the fact that they were fighting in the Mizukage''s own vige to his advantage, constantly forcing the Mizukage to hold back to avoid destroying his home to buy himself as much time as possible to build some experience during this battle and turn the tides and bridge the gap of experience in utilizing this specific fighting style they knew.


    Despite this, the damage to Kirigakure was bing significant. Buildings were falling apart and thendscape was getting scarred as the intensity of their fight increased.


    The Mizukage''s attacks grew more reckless over time. Initially more cautious about preserving the vige, his rage towards Hikari now drove him to care less about the destruction he was causing.


    Hikari noticed that the Mizukage was getting lost in his anger and hate toward him, attacking wildly and caring less about the damage to his surroundings.


    The Mizukage was not just trying to defend his position or beat an enemy anymore; he was overwhelmed by his emotions,shing out without considering the consequences.


    As the battle between Hikari and the Third Mizukage intensified, they found themselves once again on a hill within Kirigakure.


    This time, however, the Mizukage''s reckless abandon reached new heights. Surrounding him were Kirigakure shinobi who had previously been assisting him against Hikari from a distance, but now they too were at risk.


    Unconcerned by their presence, the Mizukage gathered a massive bubble of water mixed with natural energy, preparing to release it in a devastating explosion.


    Hikari, sensing the imminent danger, prepared to use his Rotation Sphere as aunchpad to escape once again right away.


    But as he activated his Byakugan''s 360-degree vision, he caught sight of a young girl among the frightened Kirigakure shinobi behind him next.


    Something about her struck him ¡ª her face was oddly familiar. In that brief moment of recognition, Hikari''s instincts kicked in, and rather than leaping to safety alone, he propelled himself backward to scoop up the girl as well.


    The two of them flew backward just as the Mizukage unleashed his attack. The hill where they had just stood was obliterated in a high-pressure explosion of water and energy, leaving nothing but devastation in its wake. Other Kirigakure shinobi who had been unable to escape were caught in the st and perished.


    Safely away from the immediate danger, Hikari took a moment to look at the girl he had saved to try and confirm his guess.


    Now, away from the chaos, he could see her more clearly ¡ª her fair skin, green eyes, and auburn hair with distinctive bangs.


    Though she wore a Kirigakure jonin uniform, different from her usual attire known to him from the original story, he quickly recognized her: Mei Terumi.


    A young version, around only 12 years old, not yet the powerful kunoichi and future Mizukage she was destined to be.


    Mei''s expression, a mix of shock and confusion, shifted to one of cautious relief as theynded safely on a more distant building rooftop.


    Mei Terumi, still reeling from the shock, tried to process the rapid shift in her reality. Her role during this "invasion" had been pretty clear: support the Third Mizukage in subduing the intruder, Hikari Hyuga, alongside the other shinobi who were tasked with a simr task.


    From a distance, she had done exactly that, from the beginning, utilizing her unique twin kekkei genkai to try and assist in the battle once the target, Hikari Hyuga, had been locked.


    The Mizukage was a figure of authority and reverence for her, a leader she had looked up to as the epitome of wisdom and strength.


    However, the previous events shattered her perception. The man she idolized had turned his lethal power against his own troops, including her, with a terrifying disregard for their lives, just for some single, meager chance to finish their enemy off who could''ve easily dodged it all again as he was doing the entire time more or less.


    The image of his face, twisted into a demon-like expression of rage, was starkly different from theposed leader she had known.


    It was a sight that would haunt her, marking a dramatic departure from the man she thought she was fighting for.


    Caught in those terrifying moments, Mei had been certain of her impending death. She had whispered prayers, her mind racing with images of her end.


    And then, in an unexpected twist, Hikari Hyuga, the very target of their mission, had diverted his path to save her for some reason.


    The irony of her situation was not lost on her; the man they were sent to capture had be her savior.


    Now, as theynded safely away from the explosion, Mei''s initial shock gave way to a whirlwind of emotions.


    Gratitude for her unexpected rescue mixed with confusion and a deep sense of betrayal by the Mizukage.


    Her allegiance to Kirigakure was unwavering, but she now found herself questioning the motivations and decisions of the "legendary" leader she had once unconditionally admired.


    "Thank you...", Mei managed to say, her voice a mix of awe and confusion, as she looked up at Hikari, "But, I don''t get why you changed your direction and saved me... I don''t get it...?",


    Her question was genuine, seeking to understand the motives of this enigmatic figure who was often touted as the biggest enemy in the Kirigakure''s history already despite his very young age, only slightly older than her, and his short contact against them during the war.


    Meanwhile, Hikari''s thoughts raced as he assessed the situation with Mei Terumi. His tactical mind quickly parsed through the possible oues and political maneuvers necessary in the wake of the Third Mizukage''s potential downfall.


    He understood theplexities of Kirigakure''s politicalndscape well enough to know that neither Toru Kaguya nor Arata Yuki would be readily epted as Mizukage by the broader factions within the vige even if the Mizukage and his key supporters got defeated next.


    His initial n to foster a Hyuga-friendly Kirigakure needed a figure who could bridge the divisions, someone who could be seen as a unifier rather than a conqueror from this day.


    Mei Terumi represented an ideal candidate in Hikari''s strategic calculus. As a dual kekkei genkai holder, she sharedmon ground with the Kaguya and Yuki ns, potentially easing their integration and eptance.


    Moreover, her upbringing within the Kirigakure system, under the tutge of the very academy led by the Mizukage, lent her a legitimate im and familiarity with the vige''s core values and operations.


    He had her in his mind from the beginning, it was just that he couldn''t focus on her whereabouts amid his battle with the Mizukage until the previous opportunity came.


    This crisis provided Hikari with the perfect opportunity not only to save Mei but also to start forging a beneficial rtionship.


    By rescuing her, he positioned himself as a protector and an ally, allowing Mei to witness first-hand the dangerous and unstable tendencies of the current Mizukage.


    This act of ''heroism'' was calcted¡ªHikari was no saint; his actions were driven by practical objectives and the broader goal of manipting future events to his and the Hyuga n''s advantage.


    As they stood momentarily safe from the battlefield chaos, Hikari spoke to Mei in a tone that mixed sincerity with the underlying strategic intent,


    "You have the potential to lead and heal this vige...", He began, gauging her reaction to nt the seeds of an ambitious idea,


    "Kirigakure needs a leader who understands both its strengths and its deep wounds. The answer is never ck and white, but somewhere in between. Yuki and Kaguya, fighting for their existence around us now, also have a point. They are also human beings like others.",


    "You''ve also seen the truth of what leadership can be just now...", Hikari continued, subtly weaving a narrative of opportunity and necessity,


    "Think about your future, not just as a shinobi tool of other hypocrites, but as someone who could truly make a difference next."


    As the Third Mizukageunched himself towards them with a forceful jet of water, Hikari''s demeanor remained calm and focused, his eyes sharp and assessing the trajectory of the iing attack.


    Turning slightly to Mei, he instructed firmly, "Here hees again... Stand behind me, I will protect you. We will talk about everythingter after this is over.",


    "I also know a bit about your real parents and your real background, just be patient, and allow me to deal with this old madman now...",


    Mei, still reeling from the recent revtions and her rescue, found herself instinctively obeying Hikari''s directive.


    She stepped behind him, her eyes wide with a mix of fear, gratitude, and growing curiosity about her rescuer.


    Despite the chaos swirling around them, Mei''s thoughts briefly drifted to what Hikari had hinted about her origins¡ªsecrets she hadn''t been fully aware of herself.


    She intuitively now felt like she didn''t know the full story judging from everything that happened just now to her.


    As Hikari faced the Mizukage''s aggressive approach, Mei watched in awe. His posture was resolute, a stark contrast to the destructive frenzy of the Mizukage.


    Hikari''s dark blue traditional kimono fluttered with the harsh winds stirred up by the battle, lending him an almost ethereal quality amid the harsh reality of their situation.


    Mei found herself wondering about this young shinobi, just slightly older than her, who now stood so confidently against one of the most powerful and experienced figures in the shinobi world¡ªa man who had been a cornerstone in the establishment of the major ninja viges.


    As the battle with the Third Mizukage resumed, Hikari''s confidence grew. Throughout the previous confrontations, he had not only been defending himself but also adapting heavily.


    Feeling a surge of newfound understanding, Hikari began to channel the natural energy surrounding him with increased proficiency in ways that he learned only just this morning.


    He drew upon the life force from thend, the air, and even the small nts that clung to the ravaged battlefield more, weaving this energy into his jutsu to create a huge potent force.


    His movements became even more fluid and seasoned, and his chakra more vibrant, as he harmonized his own abilities with the natural energy coursing through the environment.


    He created barriers of pulsing energy, deflecting torrents of water, and countering with precise strikes designed to disrupt the Mizukage''s flow of chakra and bnce himself.

 124. Mei’s Awakening and the Fall of the Third Mizukage

    124. Mei¡¯s Awakening and the Fall of the Third Mizukage


    As the battle reached its peak intensity, Hikari and the Third Mizukage pushed each other to the limits of their endurance and abilities.


    The relentless pace and the sheer power expended in the duel took their toll, especially on the older Mizukage, whose reserves were not as robust as Hikari''s.


    Despite Mizukage''s formidable experience and mastery of natural energy, his aging body could not sustain the prolonged exertion required to counter Hikari''s youthful vigor and newly enhanced skills.


    In the final moments of their confrontation, as they darted across the shatteredndscape of Kirigakure, moving from hill to building with blinding speed, the Mizukage''s attacks became increasingly desperate and his movements slower, his body visibly gging under the strain. Hikari, sensing the opportunity, intensified his assaults, pushing the Mizukage to the brink.


    Ultimately, it was not a decisive blow that ended the battle but the cruel reality of physical limits. The Mizukage''s body pushed beyond its capacity to handle the intense expenditure of chakra and sumbed to exhaustion.


    He faltered mid-assault, his energy dissipating into the air as he copsed, unable to sustain the fight any longer.


    The Mizukagey motionless, his life fading as chakra exhaustion imed his final breath, just inches from delivering what might have been a finishing strike to Hikari.


    Mei Terumi, who had been observing from a safe distance under Hikari''s earlier instruction, watched in awe and horror. The speed and ferocity of the fight were unlike anything she had ever witnessed.


    Their movements were a blur, their techniques a cascade of energy that she could barely follow with her eyes.


    The sudden end of the Mizukage, a figure of immense power and authority, shocked her to her core.


    As she processed the scene before her, Mei felt aplex mix of emotions. Relief that the battle was over mingled with a deep uncertainty about the future. With the Mizukage gone, Kirigakure was now leaderless, its future uncertain.


    Hikari''s role in the Mizukage''s downfall and his earlier words to her hinted at a new path that might lie ahead, not just for her but for the entire vige.


    Hikari, standing amidst the ruins of the battlefield, turned to Mei with a solemn expression while breathing heavily.


    With his energy severely depleted and his body pushed to the brink, Hikari nevertheless recognized the urgent need to continue his efforts.


    The battlefields of Kirigakure still raged, and his n and allies still engaged in desperate skirmishes against a numerically superior foe.


    The death of the Mizukage, while a significant blow to the enemy''s morale, was not enough to secure victory.


    Hikari knew that the leadership vacuum could lead to chaos or a rallying of forces against them, once again, if not quickly controlled. He needed to cement this overthrowpletely.


    Steadying himself, Hikari focused on gathering the remnants of his chakra, preparing for the critical tasks ahead.


    He knew that there was no time for rest; every moment he dyed could mean more lives lost among his nsmen.


    His mind ran through the next steps: assassinate or pressure personally the remaining high-level figures of Kirigakure and solidify the takeover, leveraging the demoralization caused by the Mizukage''s sudden, unexpected death to their advantage, while also trying to still act ''tough and energized'' like this was nothing to him.


    Turning to Mei Terumi, recognizing her importance in the following ns, Hikari decided to bring her along, both to shield her, just in case, and to start molding her understanding of the new realities shaping their world and brief her openly of his goals so potential misunderstandings don''t ariseter when the timees for her to y her part.


    "Let''s go, we will talk on our way...", Hikari said to Mei, his tone conveying urgency as he managed to take hold of his inner chakra pathway system and mask his well-being again.


    Mei nodded hesitantly after a few seconds, her face now looking and his stoic face and analyzing him carefully once again.


    She also noticed how he assumed the ''position of strength'' once again right away after looking so tired from his fight just a moment ago. She didn''t know how he managed to mask his internal chakra pathway system cirction so well.


    She didn''t know how much strength he still had left, nor his purpose, but her instincts told her to follow him for some reason, both for his previous words and her vige, knowing that this young teen close to her age would now be the most important in terms of determining Kirigakure''s fate, as the leader of the invading troops, now that the Mizukage had been lost.


    As they moved swiftly toward the heart of the vige next, and she looked at him curiously and slightly apprehensively the entire time, Hikari opened his mouth again and began to slowly share his insights and ns, exining the strategic importance of their next actions.


    This conversation was crucial; it was not just about briefing Mei on the situation but also about assessing her capabilities and willingness to step into a role that might very well define her destiny and that of Kirigakure, making it more likely for his ns for the future of this vige to seed and for the overthrow to flowpletely seamlessly shortly after.


    As they navigated through the damaged streets and avoided ongoing conflicts, Hikari slowly detailed the necessity of removing the remaining key figures of the old regime next as well, "The structure of power here needs to change if you want to progress as a vige. The current regime had obviously been way too divisive and overboard on nearly all issues...",


    "We must hurry. We are now going toward the vige center to take control of the situationpletely after Mizukage''s fall. That is the key to every sessful takeover. You must be fast and decisive and utilize moments with the utmost urgency and precision as the first few minutes are crucial...", He exined, "With the Mizukage gone, those loyal to him might still try to retain control. We need to ensure that doesn''t happen and prevent further bloodshed."


    "Mei Terumi, what you''ve been told your entire life... it''s been mostly a lie and carefully woven brainwashing program. I happened to identally pick up on this all after extracting the memory from the brain of the Hozuki Patriarch after defeating him previously. That''s why I recognized you so easily and know your name. He was one of the key figures among the Mizukage''s faction and obviously knew about such ''policies'' he and Mizukage dealt with.",


    "That can''t be true! Are you saying that my entire life... everything I believed... was crafted by them until now? For what? Just to use me? Do you have some proof?", Mei''s voice cracked slightly under the weight of her emotions. The realization that her life was not her own¡ªthat she had been a pawn in a muchrger game¡ªstirred a deep sense of betrayal within her.


    "I''m sad to inform you that it''s the truth. Additionally, you are also the one they focused on the most on due to your unique dual abilities and that''s why they treated you the best, and let you live rtively normally inparison to other more brutal methods they could''ve used for brainwashing as they did on some other bloodline-holding kids, especially from Kaguya and Yuki ns... It''s just that they are in their Anbu, never to be seen in the light of the day, always working for them in the dark like a ve, and only you were allowed to live in the open as the ordinary shinobi. Your entire life story was therefore carefully fabricated.",


    As Hikari nodded affirmatively previously, Mei''s gaze hardened, "And my parents... they were just casualties in this war against kekkei genkai holders... Not "heroes", not even members of this vige at all?", She asked, the pieces of her fragmented past beginning to form a clearer image. Her voice grew steadier fueled by a rising anger towards those who orchestrated this.


    Hikari continued, his voice steady, ensuring each word sank in, "Yes, your parents were not Kirigakure shinobi at all nor have they fallen in the battle for the sake of it as you were always told by everyone who probably looked strangely at you from the beginning, I''m sure you noticed something strange. They were victims of a broader scheme by the Mizukage and the central ind''s Daimyo to control or eliminate kekkei genkai holders, gone as a part of their overall genocidal policy against such people. They were probably killed by them instead."


    "Just consider this: how likely is it that damn nearly every single kekkei genkai holder would either betray this vige or ''fall in battle for it''?Why are there not more adult kekkei-genkai holders filling the ranks of this vige''s shinobi force in the open?",


    "The current Kirigakure and the Daimyo are not sacred or eternal. They haven''t always been part of the world. Kekkei Genkai ns have every right to choose not to join them and be a part of it after the vige''s recent formation; they aren''t the property of the central Daimyo.",


    "Therefore, it''s unjust to persecute them, to hunt them down and steal their children like you, raising them as indoctrinated servants in some special "programs". Everything will be clearer to you even more once we interrogate key figures next and uncover more definitive evidence you might want at this point. Just stay open-minded...",


    Hikari continued, "You were taken to be raised as loyal soldiers of Kirigakure, indoctrinated to forget their origins and to serve without question. Your parents were strong practitioners ofva and boil releases respectively, part of ancient ns, of thesends, nearly wiped out in various organized massacres by them. Their remnants now fight alongside Kaguya and the Yuki here, funnily enough...", He added, linking her past to her potential allies in the present.


    Mei''s mind reeled, but she clung to the thread of Hikari''s narrative, "So, the people I was fighting against previously... They could even know of my parents...?", She asked, her voice tinged with a mix of hope and sorrow, "All this time... I thought I was serving my vige, protecting it. To hear that it was all a lie, that my life was just a tool... It''s a lot to take in. How do you just ept that everything you believed was crafted for someone else''s agenda?"


    "Yes, and once this battle is over, you could talk to them. And once you''ve gained more influence and experience as a Mizukage, I advise you to also try and look for the remaining survivors, of the two ns, dispersed all over the world living in hiding in fear all day, and bring them a better life here instead. That could be part of your new purpose now that you know everything. There is no use inmenting now, this is the shinobi world, it''s very cruel. You can only move ahead. Because, as soon as you stop moving, you will die, and I''m sure your parents wouldn''t want you to do that. They would want you to fight and stay strong.",


    Hikari suggested firmly, "Your unique position bridges two worlds¡ªthe ordinary civilians and the kekkei genkai users. Raised by the Mizukage''s regime but born of persecuted ns, you have the potential to transform Kirigakure from the Bloody Mist to a ce of fairness and strength, and slowly mitigate all the bad blood that happened between these two groups. I''m talking about ordinary civilians here, but key supporters of Mizukage would still have to die."


    He paused, letting his words sink in before concluding, "Bing the next Mizukage could enable you to enact real change, to lead this vige into a new era where no child suffers as you did, and where kekkei genkai holders are no longer feared but respected in this nation."


    Mei listened to it all, her resolve hardening with each step, her eyes opening. The revtion of her origins, the true nature of her upbringing, and the potential path forward as a leader¡ªwas overwhelming but also rifying. Hikari''s proposal painted a vision of a future where she could make a huge difference, not just in avenging the wrongs of the past but in shaping a more just and inclusive Kirigakure and finding her remaining kin, creating them a new home.


    "I will do it...", She said, her voice now firm with newfound purpose, as they neared their next point of engagement, "I''ll fight for those who can''t, and I''ll seek the truth about my parents. And one day, I''ll lead this vige to be better than it ever was. I still don''t want to abandon it!"


    Mei''s expression shifted from confusion and sorrow to determination, she clenched her fists, "Then I have a lot to do. Not just for myself, but for everyone in this vige who''s been lied to, used, or hurt like I was...", She dered, her new purpose giving her a sense of direction.


    Hikari smiled slightly, approving of her resolve, inwardly noting that she truly was a ''natural born'' leader and that that''s why he convinced her so easily, "That''s the spirit, Mei Terumi, the new Mizukage. I will make sure that you get elected as soon as possible. With your unique position and abilities, you can bridge the divide between bloodline holders and civilians. You can transform Kirigakure into a ce where fear and prejudice no longer dictate any policy."

 125. Art of War and Diplomacy: Hikari’s Dual Approach

    125. Art of War and Diplomacy: Hikari¡¯s Dual Approach


    After their conversation, Hikari and Mei quickly went to where the Hyuga n was still in a tough fight with Kirigakure shinobi outside the vige under the urging of Hikari himself.


    The fight was intense there, with the Hyuga ordinary nsmen side obviously suffering heavier casualties, due to their numerical disengage, which made Hikari very angry at first, after they eventually arrived, however, the tide also turned with his arrival greatly as well.


    His tactical prowess and renewed vigor, bolstered by his sessful confrontation with the Third Mizukage, infused new energy into the fray and he joined in the fight right after.


    He joined forces with Takumi, Hiashi, Shibi Aburame, Tsume Inuzuka, Isamu Sumi, and Ryosuke Gekko, helping them fight against the remaining 5 Mist Swordsmen and Kisame.


    He helped orchestrate a series of attacks that systematically dismantled their opponents turning the previous stalemate between them into a massacre of these enemy Kiri elites.


    However, in the chaos, Kisame Hoshigaki seized a moment of opportunity. Witnessing the death of Suzuki, one of the Mist Swordsmen, Kisame quickly imed the legendary sword, Samehada, from the fallen shinobi covertly.


    With the powerful de, Kisame made a daring escape, diving into the sea. His unique physique was born for swimming and underwaterbat and Samehada''s power allowed him to disappear into the depths, evading capture somehow.


    Hikari, witnessing the escape, felt a mix of amusement and resignation, also feeling a little strange at the entire situation, he felt like it was almost this was akin to a concept of "fate".


    He knew Kisame could somewhat pose a threat in the future, but at that moment, therger battle for Kirigakure''s future took precedence.


    With the Mist Swordsmen dealt with, Hikari led his elite group towards the vige center. Their objective was clear: to secure the heart of Kirigakure and cement their control following the Mizukage''s downfall.


    The remaining Hyuga nsmen and other allies, less mobile but fiercely determined, held their positions against therger numbers of Kirigakure shinobi.


    The enemy''s morale was visibly crumbling, shaken by the loss of their Mizukage and the swift, unrelenting assaults by Hikari and his team.


    Meanwhile, As Hikari, Mei, and these Konoha elites swiftly moved toward the center of Kirigakure, the presence of Mei Terumi among them drew curious nces from the rest of the small group, but Hikari remained silent.


    It was an unusual sight¡ªa young girl, a native of Kirigakure, now moving in step with those who had technicallye to "invade" her home, seemingly under the eptance of Hikari.


    For Mei, the experience was also very surreal. Just hours before, these same individuals were adversaries, part of an invasion force her higher-ups had been tasked with defeating.


    Aligning herself with them now, even temporarily was disorienting yetpelling for her. She was stepping into a new role that felt both alien and inevitable.


    Among the Konoha team, only Hiashi and Takumi were fully aware of Hikari''s intentions regarding Mei''s potential leadership.


    They already saw her as one of the strongest candidates to lead Kirigakure after the dust settled previously due to her background.


    As they moved forward, Hiashi nodded at Hikari, silently praising him for how quickly he had managed to get Mei on their side.


    This nod showed he understood how important it was to have her join them when they did.


    Hikari gave a quick look back, hinting that while they had nned to recruit Mei, the way it happened¡ªHikari saving her during the Mizukage''s attack¡ªwas lucky.


    Mei, sensing the silentmunications about her, understood the weight of the expectations ced upon her. She felt a mix of pressure and empowerment.


    This was her chance not only to redefine her identity away from the maniptions of the previous Mizukage but also to guide Kirigakure toward a new, much more hopeful direction.


    Hikari then assessed the group, their energy visibly depleted from the relentlessbat, yet aware that they remained the most capable force within Kirigakure at this crucial juncture. He quickly formted a n, his voice carrying a quiet authority as he addressed the team.


    "Even though we''re all pretty drained from our battles, we''re technically still the highest-level elites left inside Kirigakure. Let''s split up for now. Everyone else, go and help eliminate the remaining die-hardmanders of the Mizukage faction. Hizashi-kun and Takumi-sensei, let''s use your Byakugan to locate them...", He instructed, ensuring everyone knew their role.


    He then turned to Hiashi and Mei, setting the course for a more diplomatic approach as well, "Terumi-san, Hiashi, and I will head toward the Mizukage''s building. We need to pressure the civilian and more neutral leaders of the vige toe forward and discuss apromise."


    Everyone nodded in agreement, understanding the importance of these tasks. The group quickly split, with Hizashi and Takumi heading off to pinpoint the key hostile figures, while Hikari, Hiashi, and Mei made their way toward the center of power in Kirigakure. This strategic split was designed to ensure that while the remaining military threats were being addressed, a foundation for negotiation and transition of power was also being set in ce.


    This dual approachbining tactical force with strategic diplomacy¡ªwas critical to stabilizing Kirigakure and steering it away from further chaos into a period of negotiation.


    Hikari, Hiashi, and Mei quickly approached the Mizukage''s building, their movements swift and silent thanks to Hikari''s newfound maniption ability of natural energy around them.


    He could not only conceal his presence and enhance the speed of himself but also of others near him slightly now as well.


    Both Mei and Hiashi were taken aback by this and felt strange, especially Hiashi who experienced something like this for the first time in person from Hikari and knew that this wasn''t in any way shape, or form an official teaching of their Hyuga n.


    During the entire short-term levitating motion, he couldn''t discern the origin and concept of the mysterious energy powering that move, and it all felt mysterious and otherworldly.


    He realized that Hikari was still getting farther and farther from him, both in mind, but also in strength. And It all made him contemte for a bit before he realized that now it wasn''t the time to be thinking about matters like these.


    Meanwhile, the Mizukage''s building stood imposingly at the heart of Kirigakure, its architecture a symbol of the vige''s power and authority.


    The structure was traditional in design, with sturdy grey stone that spoke to its defensive purpose. It was designed to be the safest building in the entire vige.


    Towering walls surrounded it, topped with sharp, angled roof tiles that were typical of shinobi vige aesthetics, whilst designed to repel and intimidate.


    As they neared, the grandeur of the building cast a solemn shadow over them, its silence a stark contrast to the chaos that had gripped other parts of the vige.


    It stood almost untouched, a relic of the order that the Third Mizukage had maintained before the day''s upheavals.


    Upon reaching the vicinity of the building, Hikari, Hiashi, and Mei paused, taking a moment to survey their final approach.


    Hikari''s use of natural energy not only expedited their arrival but also ensured they remained undetected by any guards or surveince jutsu that might still be active.


    This element of surprise was crucial for their next steps¡ªengaging with the remaining civilian and neutral leadership of Kirigakure.


    Utilizing Hikari''s mastery of natural energy, they quickly leaped onto the roof of the Mizukage''s building covertly.


    This stealthy ascent allowed them to reach a strategic vantage point, positioning them directly above the centralmand areas.


    From this height, they surveyed the area to ensure it was secure before they moved again.


    However, before they managed to enter the building, the quiet tension was suddenly broken by the sound of hurried footsteps echoing from the corridors below.


    A group of individuals d in Kirigakure shinobi uniforms, some in Anbu masks and others in standard attire, approached rapidly.


    Leading them was a middle-aged man dressed distinctly in a brown kimono, his shoulders draped with a yellow scarf, marking him as someone of importance.


    "Elder, Genji...", Mei whispered, recognition flickering in her eyes as she identified the man as they fully emerged. Her voice carried a mix of surprise and caution, hinting at her familiarity with him but also the uncertainty of the moment.


    Hiashi, sensing the potential for conflict, shifted into a defensive stance. His eyes narrowed, prepared for any sign of aggression, as he still wasn''t sure but was hopeful that a diplomatic solution might still be possible.


    Hikari, on the other hand, maintained hisposure, his expression unreadable. Using his Byakugan, he carefully observed Elder Genji''s micro-expressions and bodynguage, seeking clues about his intentions and state of mind.


    He also immediately realized who this was, as it wasn''t just any vige''s higher-up that could basically barracked himself safely into the most important and secure building in the whole vige during times like these, he had to be one of the most, if not the most important individual after the Mizukage.


    A tense silence filled the air, each party evaluating the other, weighing their next words carefully. The moment was fraught with the potential for both peace and conflict, and the decisions made in the next few minutes would significantly impact the fate of Kirigakure.

 126. Strategy, Strength, and the Future of Kirigakure (1)

    126. Strategy, Strength, and the Future of Kirigakure (1)


    Genji''s deep sigh broke the silence, carrying a weight of resignation and authority. His eyes briefly met Mei''s before returning to Hikari and Hiashi.


    "You must be Hikari Hyuga, right? And this is Hiashi Hyuga, the future patriarch of your n?", His tone was calm yet carried an undertone of firmness.


    He continued, his gaze steady and assessing, "Although you are strong, perhaps the strongest young man I''ve ever encountered, we have observed your battle with the Mizukage even though we couldn''t intervene directly.",


    "You might be nearing the end of your vitality and merely masking your fatigue quite well now. Understand, despite your abilities, we still have the advantage in numbers, particrly among our Anbu. It would be possible to track you, wear you down, and ultimately, eliminate you through sheer force even outside of this vige even if you try to run away afterward."


    Genji paused, letting his words sink in to gauge the reaction of his young adversaries. He then offered a resolution, "I rmend that you withdraw voluntarily from this vige, along with your people. Disappear, and I will call off any further pursuit.",


    His proposal was not just an ultimatum but a strategic positioning, meant to assert control over the situation and to test Hikari''s resolve and real condition.


    Hikari stood calm and collected, unfazed by Genji''s warning. His strategy had been to make Genji speak first, a subtle move to shift the power dynamics in his favor.


    Genji''s prompt to speak first revealed more about his position and confidence than any physical disy or words could.


    Hikari had read the elder''s uncertainty hidden behind a facade of control, and it was time to leverage this in the negotiations.


    "Yes, I''m Hikari Hyuga, and this is Hiashi Hyuga...", Hikari responded courteously yet firmly, acknowledging Genji''s assessment of their physical state.


    "Nice to meet you. And yes, while I am certainly quite fatigued now, I am not nearly as depleted as you might hope and presented it as.",


    "I still have enough energy left to cause significant ''damage'' here, all around your vige, and you know my capabilities well. You''ve seen my speed; no one here can match it once I''m in motion. That chaos would be unbearable for you."


    Hikari paused, his gaze steady and prating as he continued, "And yes, you have numbers, but with the Mizukage''s fall by my hand¡ªa sight all your troops witnessed¡ªmorale on your side has plummeted, whereas ours is only bolstered.",


    "It''s uncertain who would prevail if this conflict continued, but one thing is clear: further fighting would only lead to the destruction of Kirigakure. It would only be a matter of time before other viges take advantage of its weakened state.",


    Hikari''s words were deliberate, designed to strike at the core of Genji''s fears¡ªfurther chaos and the potential copse of Kirigakure.


    He was positioning himself not just as a formidable adversary, but as a rational actor who recognized the broader implications of continued conflict.


    This approach aimed to shift the conversation from threats to potential cooperation, suggesting that apromise might indeed be the only path forward that preserved Kirigakure''s future.


    Mei watched Hikari with a mixture of awe and introspection. His youthful face, calm andposed, belied the weight of his words as he engaged in this subtle duel of diplomacy with Elder Genji.


    It was almost surreal to see someone so close to her own age disy such maturity andmand, standing toe-to-toe with an elder who had decades more experience. She couldn''t help but feel a deep respect for his ability to navigate these treacherous waters with such finesse.


    As Hikari spoke, Mei''s thoughts turned inward. She clenched her slender fists, her nails lightly pressing into her palms, a silent, physical manifestation of her internal hopes.


    She found herself silently rooting for Hikari''s sess, understanding intuitively that a peacefulpromise was undoubtedly the best oue for Kirigakure.


    Even though the revtions about the vige''s dark maniptions under the previous Mizukage had left her feeling betrayed, her feelings toward the vige itself wereplex.


    She hated the regime that had deceived her, but she held no ill will toward the ordinary people of Kirigakure.


    They, like her, were products of their environment, mostly unaware of the deeper machinations at y.


    Despite the bitter truth about her past, Mei felt a profound connection to Kirigakure. It was the only home she had ever known, a ce imbued with memories both sweet and painful.


    This attachment wasn''t merely about the location but themunity and the everyday lives intertwined with hers.


    ''Even if my heritage lies elsewhere...'', She thought to herself, ''This vige is part of who I am. It shaped me, for better or worse. And now, perhaps, I can help shape it for the better...''


    Meanwhile, Hiashi also observed Hikari''s interactions with a mixture of respect and surprise the entire time.


    The younger Hyuga''s poise under pressure was remarkable, and Hiashi found himself deferring to Hikari''s judgment throughout this passive confrontation.


    This deference was not borne out of obligation but from a genuine belief in Hikari''s leadership.


    It was an unusual position for Hiashi, who was older and more experienced¡ªtraditionally the qualities revered in a leader within shinobi culture. Yet, here he was, instinctively looking to Hikari for guidance.


    The fact that Hikari had single-handedly defeated the Mizukage added to Hiashi''s respect for him.


    That victory wasn''t just a demonstration of Hikari''sbat prowess but a testament to his strategic acumen and ability to endure under extreme stress.


    It was these qualities that had earned Hiashi''splete silent endorsement from now on.


    Hiashi recognized that Hikari''s blend of strength and tactical thinking made him exceptionally fit to navigate theplexities of their current mission.


    Moreover, Hiashi was also aware of the subtle shifts in their interaction¡ªhow Hikari had begun to address him simply as "Hiashi" rather than with any honorific that might denote seniority, and how he had taken the initiative to lead discussions and make decisions.


    These changes might have bruised the ego of a less secure leader, but Hiashi saw them as positive. He appreciated the efficiency and directness they brought to their operations.


    In his heart, Hiashi felt no envy. As the future patriarch of the Hyuga n, his primary concern was the welfare and strength of his n, and he saw Hikari''s emerging leadership as a boon to their collective sess.


    His realism about the n''s needs and his own capabilities allowed him to embrace Hikari''s ascent not just with eptance but with optimism.


    He understood that Hikari was a vital asset and that supporting him was not just sensible¡ªit was necessary for their survival and prosperity at this point.

 127. Strategy, Strength, and the Future of Kirigakure (2)

    127. Strategy, Strength, and the Future of Kirigakure (2)


    Elder Genji listened intently to Hikari''s words, his stern expression giving way slightly to show his contemtive mood.


    After a moment, he responded, his voice mixing caution with a measure of respect that had not been there before.


    "You raise a valid point, young Hyuga...", Genji started, his authoritative tone softened by a dose of pragmatism,


    "Your skill and determination are clear, and the fall of our Mizukage at your hands speaks volumes. You''re capable of wreaking havoc next if you so choose.",


    He paused, his eyes narrowing slightly as he leaned slightly forward, emphasizing his next words with careful deliberation,


    "However, you can''t trick someone with my level of experience. I watched your battle with the Mizukage closely.",


    "You''re running on gas, despite your efforts to conceal it. You might not even have a quarter of your former vitality left.",


    "Even if your fighting style relies mostly on using the same external energy source as our fallen Mizukage also did, you saw his end, right? It still needs to be controlled and parried with your own body and internal chakra reserves first to be employed in the first ce...",


    He then paused, weighing his next words carefully, "However, your acknowledgment of the potential destruction that continued fight could bring to Kirigakure didn''t fall on deaf ears.",


    "I am tasked with the safety and continuity of our vige, and I must consider all paths that lead to peace,


    "Although, your own cream of the crop of the Hyuga n elites would also probably perish here if this continued, so don''t make it seem like this is a one-sided thing...",


    Genji''s demeanor softened slightly as he continued, "If you are suggesting another kind of apromise, then I am willing to entertain this discussion slightly at least.",


    "Kirigakure has suffered enough, and if there is a way to end this with diplomacy rather than further bloodshed, it is worth exploring...",


    This response marked a significant turn in the encounter, moving it from the brink of further conflict to at least the possibility of a peaceful resolution.


    Hikari nodded, absorbing Genji''s words, but ready to counter with his own leverage. His expression hardened and turned colder as he prepared to reveal his most important ace.


    "Thank you for your assessment, Elder Genji...", Hikari began, his voice calm but with an underlying sharpness,


    "While I appreciate your call for pragmatism, I must correct your perspective on our situation. It''s not just about my remaining strength or the Hyuga nsmen still fighting over there."


    He took a moment, ensuring his next words carried the full weight of their implications, "As we speak, I have two of your Tailed Beasts, still inside of their Jinchuriki, sealed within special scrolls on my body.",


    "I can also release them at any moment here, over your vige. The havoc they would wreak could effectively end Kirigakure, while me and my people evacuated easily. I suppose those beats must''ve built quite a grudge against your vige.",


    Hikari''s gaze was steady and piercing as he continued, "This isn''t a threat; it''s a fact of our current standoff. My preference is for a diplomatic resolution, not destruction. However, this means you don''t have the luxury of considering whether to negotiate.",


    "We need to find a solution now, one that ensures the survival and stability of Kirigakure. You''re not in a position to ''explore'' options; you need to act on them as soon as possible or face total annihtion.",


    As Hikari issued his ultimatum, he was keenly aware of theplexities behind his position. Internally, he grappled with the limitations of his threat.


    The truth was, releasing the Tailed Beasts wasn''t as straightforward or as appealing an option as he made it seem.


    Hecked a reliable method to reseal them once unleashed, and they could also pose a significant risk not only to Kirigakure but to himself and his forces as well despite him stating otherwise, at least to some extent.


    The beasts'' unpredictable and destructive nature could easily spiral out of control, turning a tactical advantage into a catastrophic blunder.


    Moreover, Hikari''s strategic goals extended beyond mere destruction. His vision for Kirigakure was not toy it to waste but to integrate it into his broader ns against the current Hokage and Konoha''s leadership.


    Destroying Kirigakure would serve Konoha by eliminating a potential rival, whereas securing its allegiance would significantly bolster his own faction''s standing and resources in the loomingrger conflicts he anticipated.


    Genji''s reaction to Hikari''s revtion was immediate and intense. The elder''sposure faltered, betraying his shock as he processed the unexpected news about the Tailed Beasts.


    Genji had been certain those powerful entities were securely under Konoha''s control, now potentially being integrated into new hosts after Hikari stole them.


    The thought that Hikari had managed to intercept and keep them was startling, suggesting a level of audacity and strategic depth that Genji had not anticipated.


    This revtion forced Genji to reassess his understanding of the politicalndscape within Konoha. He cursed the inadequacy of Kirigakure''s intelligence, which had failed to grasp the extent of the internal divisions guing their rival vige.


    As Genji processed this information, he realized the strategic restraint Hikari had shown. The fact that Hikari hadn''t unleashed the beasts immediately upon their arrival suggested that his intentions extended beyond mere destruction.


    Hikari was seeking leverage, aiming to bring Kirigakure into some form of alliance or get them into the ''orbit'' that served his broader goals.


    This insight shifted Genji''s perspective, highlighting the necessity of navigating this negotiation with great care.


    Furthermore, the knowledge that Hikari possessed not only the Tailed Beasts but also all seven of Kirigakure''s prized swords nowpounded the gravity of the situation.


    It became clear to Genji that Hikari held most of the cards, and if Kirigakure was to salvage anything from this confrontation, concessions were inevitable.


    With a heavy heart and a mind burdened by the weight of his vige''s future, Genji acknowledged internally that he would need to offer more than he had nned.


    His goal now was to secure the best possible oue for Kirigakure under the current circumstances.


    "Very well, Hikari Hyuga...", Genji said, his voice steady despite the turmoil within, "It seems you''ve outmaneuvered us at every turn. Let''s discuss your terms for this... alliance.",


    "What exactly are you proposing, and how do you envision Kirigakure''s role in your ns...?",


    His question, while conceding the negotiation''s direction to Hikari, also sought to rify the specifics of what Hikari expected in return for peace and cooperation.


    Even the Kirigakure shinobi nearby couldn''t hide their reaction to Hikari''s bold deration.


    They flinched, their previous aggression melting into a more defensive stance, a subtle but clear sign of their growing apprehension.


    The weight of Hikari''s threat had clearly shaken them, introducing ayer of fear and uncertainty into their demeanor.

 128. A New Order: Reimagining Kirigakure’s Future (1)

    128. A New Order: Reimagining Kirigakure¡¯s Future (1)


    Hikari nodded slightly at Genji''s invitation to finally discuss terms, maintaining hisposed demeanor,


    "If we are to discuss true peace and a sustainable future for Kirigakure, then it''s essential we include all relevant parties in this negotiation...", Hikari stated clearly, as if there was no room for objection on this matter.


    "I propose we bring Arata Yuki and Toru Kaguya, the patriarchs of their respective ns, to the table as well. Their involvement is crucial if we are to reach aprehensive agreement that respects the interests of all sides."


    Genji''s slight flinch did not escape Hikari''s notice. Despite Genji''s constant, more neutral, and reasonable stancepared to thete Mizukage, Hikari understood theplexities of the elder''s position.


    Genji had navigated the politicalndscape of Kirigakure with a pragmatic approach, often aligning with the Mizukage''s harsh policies against kekkei genkai users to maintain his influence and power base, particrly within the civilian sector.


    Realizing the delicate nature of these proposed talks right away, Genji took a moment to process Hikari''s suggestion.


    He was aware that integrating the Yuki and Kaguya ns into the vige''s governance would require significant concessions.


    These ns had suffered a great deal under the previous regime, and their official inclusion into Kirigakure would not only shift the power dynamics within Kirigakure but also potentially open old wounds.


    "Your point is well taken, Hikari Hyuga...", Genji finally responded, his voice measured but resolute, "Bringing the Yuki and Kaguya patriarchs into this discussion is a step that, while challenging, may indeed be necessary for genuine reconciliation and rebuilding. Let''s do it."


    Genji quickly motioned to the Kirigakure shinobi nearby, whispering urgent instructions. He tasked them with spreading across the battlefield to convey a critical message: hostilities were to cease immediately in anticipation of peace talks, and they were to start assessing the damage, tending the wounded, and helping civilians entrapped in rubble all over the vige.


    His demeanor was one of urgency, underscoring the importance of halting the fighting to prevent further casualties and chaos.


    "Wait!", However, Hikari suddenly interjected sharply, halting Genji just as he was about to issue his finalmands. All eyes present turned towards him as he spoke with a chilling detachment,


    "The entire Hozuki and Hoshigaki ns have to go. Tell your official Kirigakure troops to stop protecting them anymore from the shinobi going after them and to turn a blind eye to their elimination.",


    "The same is true for other higher-ups, besides yourself, who supported the Third Mizukage the most. Kaguya and Yuki Patriarchs have already said to me that there would be no talks unless you allow them to do that.",


    "Maybe that will pacify them for all the injustices they suffered. Do what you want, deal with the damage as soon as possible, but this is also the order that you must also make right now if you know what''s in your best interest.",


    Hikari''s tone was very dispassionate, treating the directive with a cold pragmatism as if discussing a mundane chore rather than the orchestrated removal of entire ns, with probably even many civilians and women and children implicated.


    He knew that without at least some "blood", there would be no way that Toru and Arata would agree to his ns.


    Also, Hikari was very realistic, realizing that if those figures still survived, who were the ones at the sh with the two ns the most during many decades, true inner peace in this vige would never be possible. This was all done with the goal of long-term stabilization.


    Meanwhile, Genji''s expression tightened at Hikari''s cold directive, the gravity of the demand weighing visibly on him for a while.


    Nevertheless, after a moment of contemtion marked by a deep, almost imperceptible sigh, he responded, his voice strained but very resolute,


    "Your conditions are harsh, Hikari Hyuga, but I understand the logic behind it. Therefore, I willmunicate your terms to our remaining forces, or at least ones I can control well now. It will be done as you have requested, albeit this is a very bitter pill for Kirigakure to swallow...",


    Genji''s eptance, though seemingly extremely hesitant, clearly recognized the need for concessions to foster a broader peace and reconciliation within this post-war Kirigakure.


    However, he also made sure to note this move as one of his concessions for the uing negotiation by sighing and saying such words in such a ''depressing'' kind of way at the end.


    Yet, beneath his reluctant agreementy another deeper, but this time quite personal, and greedy strategic calction.


    By consenting to the removal of other key elder andmanding figures in the vige next, he acknowledged that his own position of power would consequently greatly strengthen.


    With the likely elimination of these figures, he would emerge as one of the few remaining leaders in the vige, apart from probably the Kaguya and Yuki patriarchs, and possibly, as he noted with a nce, the young girl Mei Terumi now also awkwardly standing right there.


    At the same time, Hiashi, understanding the significance of the moment and recognizing the need for a clear and visible signal to his forces, prepared a re. Heunched it into the sky, a bright burst of light that soared above the vige.


    This re was prearranged as a signal indicating that the enemy had submitted to some extent¡ªa sign for the Hyuga and their allied forces to stand down and regroup after finishing the remaining opposition and the die-hards of the previous Mizukage.


    This signal, understood by all involved, helped to quickly disseminate the message of some kind of ceasefire throughout the ranks, curbing the violence and bringing an immediate sense of calm over many areas of the battlefield.


    Then, following the directives from their leaders, a steady stream of shinobi slowly began to converge toward the vige''s center, particrly around the Mizukage''srge building.


    Just moments before, these same shinobi were locked in a fierce battle, each side fighting with lethal intent.


    Now, as they approached the central meeting point, the air was tinged with tiredness and high tension but also with a yearning for peace.


    The shift frombat to ceasefire was palpable. The sound of battle had been reced by the quieter, cautious steps of shinobi, who had just been adversaries.


    Eyes that had red with hostility now nced around with a mix of suspicion and curiosity.


    The close proximity of former enemies, now gathering to discuss peace, was a stark contrast to the previous violence.


    This uneasy peace highlighted the strange duality of the shinobi world¡ªhow quickly the tides of war could turn towards diplomacy.


    As they moved closer to the building, each warrior carried the weight of the day''s conflicts, the memory of fallenrades fresh in their minds, yet each step they took was a move towards a potentially more stable and united future.


    As the hours passed, this influx only grew and now included nearly all the remaining Kirigakure shinobi. Weary of the prolonged conflict, they were no longer inclined to fight and had aligned themselves with Genji''s directives. At this point, the others perished, fighting against their opponents.


    Additionally, from the other side arrived the remaining forces of the Kaguya and Yuki ns, led by their respective patriarchs, Toru and Arata, as well as the remaining Hyuga nsmen under Takumi''s arrangements.


    Preparations were made on the rooftop of the Mizukage''s building for the follow-up of crucial peace negotiations. Arge table had been set up, signifying the transition from battle to diplomacy.


    This setup was intended for the key figures involved in the talks, ensuring the privacy necessary for such high-stakes discussions.


    The most important leaders gathered around this table, each representing their faction''s interests, while a significant space was maintained to keep the negotiation area uncluttered.


    Ordinary shinobi were strategically positioned throughout the building to form circles of protection, but they were notably absent from the rooftop, maintaining the exclusivity and focus required for the negotiations.


    The main table now hosted only the most crucial participants: Hikari, Hiashi, Arata, Toru, Mei, and Genji. As they took their seats, a silent acknowledgment passed among them of the critical work thaty ahead.


    However, Toru Kaguya, d in his traditional white robes, now looking entirely red as they were stained with a huge amount of blood from his enemies, maintained a distinctly tense demeanor at the negotiation table.


    Unlike the other leaders who showed signs of cautious optimism, Toru''s face still held a slightly ''maddened'' look of battle.


    His intense eyes and rigid posture revealed his deep-seated resentment toward Kirigakure''s leadership.


    As the only one visibly indignant about the cooperation, Toru''s every clenched fist and stern nce underscored his protective instincts, fierce loyalty to his n, and hatred toward Genji sitting not far away.


    Arata Yuki, the young patriarch of the Yuki n, meanwhile presented a stark contrast to Toru at the negotiation table.


    Despite his youth, his demeanor wasposed and serene, reflecting a maturity beyond his years as usual.


    He also addressed Toru with a steady, calming voice, "Please, Kaguya Patriarch, let''s focus on whates next. The battle has ended, and it''s time for us to navigate the politics here.",


    "I share your pain; our ns have both suffered greatly just now, but this is our chance to ensure the survival and revival of our people. We must be willing topromise a bit too.",


    He then turned slightly towards Genji, continuing in hisposed manner, "And let''s not overlook the role Genji-san has yed just now.",


    "He also wasn''t directly involved in the assaults on our ns; his focus was on internal and civilian affairs within Kirigakure under the previous Mizukage.",


    "It''srgely due to his efforts that we''ve reached this point of ceasefire now so fast, opening the door for these peace negotiations...",


    Toru listened intently to Arata''s reasoned words as he respected his opinion quite a bit. The tension in his expression gradually eased.


    After a moment of contemtion, he gave a slow nod, signaling his agreement and readiness to shift his approach.


    His silent acknowledgment of Arata''s perspective helped to further lighten the mood around the table, effectively opening the door for a more constructive and open conversation among all parties involved.


    Genji, now feeling a palpable sense of relief, sighed internally. Despite his leadership position, he was mainly a civilian administrator and not abatant, and the intense killing intent Toru exhibited on the table and his memory of the previous conflict¡ªwhere he single-handedly decimated hundreds of Kirigakure shinobi alone, at least¡ªhad left him deeply unsettled.


    On the other side of the table, Hikari observed the dynamics with a keen eye. He caught the subtle exchange and appreciated the role Toru was ying in this negotiation kind of game.


    Understanding the strategic advantage of having Toru y the ''bad cop,'' Hikari discreetly nodded, acknowledging his effective role in adding pressure, which in turn facilitated the opening for diplomatic engagements.


    Toru also surprisingly signaled back in understanding toward Hikari. His previous approach at the negotiation table truly was strategic, not just a reflection of his typical Kaguya''s intensity.


    Aware that the main perpetrators against his n, including the entire Hozuki and Hoshigaki ns for example, were already neutralized, he recognized the value of securing a stable peace next to start renewing their numbers and strengthening the n''s position within the shinobi world with this move of joining the Kirigakure officially as one of the de facto rulers of it next being the first one. As a seasoned n patriarch, he was far from being such a brutish figure.


    From that point onward, the negotiations officially began, with Hikari firstying out his vision for Kirigakure''s future. He proposed a unified governance structure that would integrate the Kaguya and Yuki ns with the existing Kirigakure shinobi under Genji''s present leadership.


    "The Kaguya and Yuki ns will relocate inside Kirigakure, sharing power over all vige affairs and the civilian popce...", Hikari exined, "They would, therefore, not just reside here but hold substantial authority and responsibility on an equal basis as the other faction."


    He further detailed the strategic alliance: "This reformed Kirigakure will also then be a steadfast ally of the Hyuga n first and the broader Anti-Hokage faction of Konoha. This partnership will enhance our collective strength and influence within the shinobi world and ensure mutual support and protection against external threats and internal disputes too.",


    Hikari''s proposal aimed to transform Kirigakure into a cohesive and powerful new entity, ensuring a bnced distribution of power and fostering a strong alliance with his faction.


    Hikari''s proposal continued with a promise of stability: "I can guarantee not only a temporary ceasefire but also a longsting peace with Konoha for this reformed Kirigakure.",


    However, to achieve this and for me to be able to convince the rest of Konoha to end hostilities, Kirigakure must agree to several conditions."


    Genji listened intently, his expression a mix of curiosity and caution, prompting him to ask, "What kind of conditions are you proposing?"


    Hikari outlined the terms right away, "Firstly, Kirigakure must relinquish all ims and influence over Yugakure, allowing Konohaplete governance of this area in the future.",


    "Additionally, Kirigakure must sign formal agreements acknowledging the Land of Fire''s sovereignty over some of your territories in the Land of Water. I''m talking about your continental territory that we already upied during this war."


    Genji''s response was hesitant, "But how can we convince our Daimyo to ept such terms? His approval is crucial, and he might not see the benefit of losing territorial ims. After all, that is all officially a part of the Land of Water''s territory, as a country, not our Kirigakure''s."


    Hikari addressed the concern with strategic insight, "Your Daimyo''s power is derived from the unity and support of Kirigakure. If the current vige collectively agrees to these terms, it diminishes his capacity to oppose them. He doesn''t have any real power; after all, any army that he could send to reim them would be finished quickly by our shinobi and soldiers.",


    "Moreover, without the fear of retaliation from the now-deceased Third Mizukage present anymore, due to their own more vulnerable members'' security, the Kaguya and Yuki ns have less to fear from making bold moves against him or his extended family if needed.",


    Turning to Toru, who was visibly agitated and filled with intent, Hikari added to Genji once more, "Perhaps you could remind your Daimyo of this new reality. Inform him that he should be grateful that someone from the Kaguya or Yuki ns simply does not decide to visit his main ind to exact vengeance for all the grievances he''s caused over the years to them."


    Toru''s response was fierce, his voiceden with threat, "Yes, let''s make sure the Daimyo understands that he''s fortunate. Otherwise, I will personally ensure that he grasps the gravity of our new stance if he starts some problems next. From now on, he is the one who should feel apprehensive in his life."


    The Land of Water was isted, and unlike any other nation, Toru Kaguya and their faction didn''t fear potential blowback from the rest of the world, even for going against the Daimyo.

 129. A New Order: Reimagining Kirigakure’s Future (2)

    129. A New Order: Reimagining Kirigakure¡¯s Future (2)


    A few momentster, Hikari continued to outline the terms of the alliance, his tone earnest but firm,


    "Additionally, as a sign of goodwill towards this alliance between my n and your vige, we are willing to gradually return all of your famed Seven Swords over time, under an agreement.",


    "Please understand, given that we were adversaries just a few hours ago, trust will need to be built gradually.",


    "But I am confident that, over time, we wille to see each other as true allies, which is why we will eventually return all of your swords.",


    He then addressed Elder Genji directly: "Elder Genji, you will y a key role in all these processes. Just as wemit to returning your shinobi cultural heritage, we expect that you will assist us as needed, and we will be ready to support Kirigakure in any future conflicts with other viges."


    Genji listened intently, the gravity of Hikari''s proposal clear on his face. After a moment of reflection, he responded, "Your proposal is generous, Hikari Hyuga, and it demonstrates amitment to forging a deep andsting bond between our people. I ept these terms.",


    "We will work on our side to ensure that Kirigakure upholds its part of the agreement, and I trust you will do the same."


    Genji''s response to the promise of the Seven Swords'' return was one of quiet tion. The swords were powerful weapons and symbols of Kirigakure''s unique martial heritage and pride.


    Their loss significantly affected the vige''s morale and prestige. Knowing that these cherished artifacts would eventually be restored to Kirigakure filled him with relief and optimism for the future.


    He also felt that his position would be quite stable now after this among the remaining Kiri''s shinobi force,ing mostly from ordinary civilians who respected those swords and the history behind them the most.


    He could also use it to motivate elites among them, on an individual level, to follow his ns much easier and be more loyal to him.


    This would also make it easier to convince others to support this kind of new vige architecture.


    However, Genji''s momentary tion over the swords sparked a glimmer of further ambition. He began hesitantly, "Then about...", But before he could finish, Hikari, anticipating his next request, interjected sharply.


    "The two Tailed Beasts I have in my possession will also be returned..." Hikari dered firmly, to the surprise of both Toru and Arata, who previously seemingly didn''t know about that.


    "However, unlike the swords, which you, along with the Kaguya and Yuki ns, may decide how to distribute or manage in the future, using the pre-determined process that would be agreed upon by yourselvester, the Tailed Beasts will be entrusted only to two individuals I selected from within your vige.",


    "On this matter, there will be no negotiation or bargain; this is already the maximum concession I am prepared to offer. This is already as if you hit a jackpot as a vige."


    As if noticing the expectation for his answer, on who they would be given to, building up on the table, Hikari also prepared to continue speaking while ncing slightly at Mei first,


    Who also sat at the table the entire time, feeling a bit out of ce and still feeling slightly awkward but happy that the vige was "saved" this time and thatprise was reached between Hikari''s forces and the remnants of her vige in the end.


    "This matter is also connected to Mei Terumi and her future position...", Hikari finally announced, causing all eyes to shift towards Mei,


    "If you haven''t guessed yet, Elder Genji, we''ve decided to push for her as the next Mizukage. She possesses a unique heritage, being both a lifelong citizen of Kirigakure and the inheritor of two distinct kekkei genkai from almost extinct bloodline-based ns of the Land of Waters. Her unique background makes her an ideal candidate to bridge the divisions within the vige forever, eptable to both the Kaguya, Yuki, and the regr Kirigakure shinobi."


    As he spoke, Mei looked around, the weight of her new role settling upon her. Hikari continued, addressing the concerns about her capabilities: "And for those who doubt her present strength, there will be no need to worry. I n to have the Six-Tails sealed into her..."


    After Hikari dropped this "bombshell" news, while Hiashi remainedposed, having been the only one here beside Hikari already privy to the entire n, others showed visible shock.


    Genji visibly processed the gravity of the situation first, his initial shock slowly morphing into contemtion and then agreement. After a brief pause, he cleared his throat and responded,


    "This is a significant decision, one that could indeed unite our vige under a new vision.",


    "Her heritage and potential role as a bridge between shinobi of different backgrounds make her a promising leader.",


    "If she is to be equipped with such power as the Six-Tails, it reassures us of her capacity to govern effectively. We will support her ascension and ensure a smooth transition.",


    "I see no problem with this arrangement. I feel like I would be able to convince everyone to follow her in the future, and as the next Mizukage, you can have peace of mind."


    Genji was already aware of Mei Terumi''s potential due to her unique gics and her reputation as a promising talent in Kirigakure. Her hosting the Six-Tails only solidified her suitability for Mizukage.


    But Genji was curious about the quick development of her rapport with Hikari. Observing their interactions, he noted a surprising, subtle ''ease'' that had formed rapidly between them.


    He wondered how Hikari had managed to quickly ''convince'' Mei to listen and follow him so fast. The dynamic between them suggested more than just a quick strategic alliance; there seemed to be a deeper connection or understanding that had influenced Mei''s eptance.


    Genji considered what talks might have taken ce before the announcement, reflecting on the nature of the promises or assurances Hikari offered to the young girl to secure such a pivotal agreement.


    Initially taken aback by the sudden shift in ns, Toru Kaguya soon showed a grudging respect for the strategy.


    His hardened features softened slightly as he realized the tactical advantage of finally having a Mizukage who could empathize with the struggles of the kekkei genkai ns like theirs.


    "If this youngdy can truly understand and represent the needs of ns like mine...", He said slowly, "Then perhaps this is the fresh start Kirigakure needs. We will watch closely and hope she honors the promises made today."


    Arata Yuki nodded thoughtfully, his youthful face betraying a flicker of optimism, "This youngdy''s unique position and new powers could indeed herald a new era for Kirigakure...", He mused aloud,


    "Her leadership could mend old wounds and forge a path toward a more inclusive vige. The Yuki n will fully support her Mizukage tenure, hopeful for a future where all ns can coexist peacefully."


    Mei Terumi listened intently, absorbing every detail of the conversation about her future. The news of bing Mizukage was something she had been prepared for, a role she had mentally braced herself to ept.


    However, the revtion about the Six-Tails, the Tailed Beast, being sealed within her was entirely unexpected. For a moment, a wave of anxiety washed over her as she considered the implications¡ªJinchuriki were often viewed with fear and suspicion within their viges.


    But as she sat there, surrounded by leaders discussing her fate, a different kind of realization dawned on her. Mei wouldn''t just be any Jinchuriki; she would be the Mizukage, a leader supported by all factions within Kirigakure, envisioned as a unifying figure.


    Hikari''s backing and endorsement from the table painted a picture of a role far removed from the istion typically experienced by Jinchuriki.


    Mei''s thoughts quickly shifted from apprehension to determination: ''If I am to lead Kirigakure into a new era, then I need every advantage I can get...''


    The power of a Tailed Beast could be a formidable tool, not just for enforcing her authority but for protecting the vige and driving its development forward.


    She looked around the table, meeting the eyes of those who discussed her future, and felt a surge of resolve, "I understand the concerns and the potential stigma attached to being a Jinchuriki...",


    Mei finally spoke, her voice steady and more confident, "But I also see the opportunity it presents. As Mizukage, I will ensure that this power is used for the betterment of Kirigakure, to protect and to lead. I am not afraid of the responsibility thates with the Six-Tails; rather, I am ready to embrace it to fulfill our shared vision for a stronger, united Kirigakure."


    Her deration reassured those around her of her capability and readiness to assume the dual mantle of Mizukage and Jinchuriki and marked hermitment to transcending the traditional boundaries and limitations ced on those in her position.


    As Mei articted her eptance and vision for her role, Hikari watched intently, gauging her reaction with keen interest.


    Her response to the sudden revtion about the Six-Tails was in itself a test of her resilience and adaptability. He decided purposefully not to disclose that information to her beforehand.


    Hikari was inwardly pleased with her reaction; Mei''s bravery and readiness to embrace such a monumental responsibility affirmed his decision.


    Choosing Mei was strategic, influenced by how well the Six-Tails''s powersplemented her inherent twin kekkei genkai and by a desire to fortify her position as Mizukage.


    Hikari aimed to solidify her as a formidable ally in his broader ns for the shinobi world by making her more powerful than in the original story.


    Her dual kekkei genkai and the added power of a Tailed Beast would make her an undeniable force in Kirigakure and beyond. Trusting her with the Six-Tails was a calcted risk but one that he believed would pay off.


    With Mei as Mizukage, empowered by one of the Tailed Beasts, Hikari was confident that Kirigakure would remain a steadfast ally, preventing any potential future betrayals and ensuring that the vige moved in a direction aligned with his interests for a very long time.


    This move was about more than just influencing Kirigakure; it was about creating awork of power, with Mei as a central figure, that would extend his influence and control far beyond his n''s borders.


    By positioning Mei as a powerful, capable, and supported Mizukage, Hikari was securing an essential pir in his strategic framework for the shinobi world.


    He also had quite a bit of trust in her despite the early stages of their familiarity.


    However, beyond the strategic positioning within Kirigakure, Hikari had another crucial motive for returning the Tailed Beasts.


    He needed a legitimate reason to ''retain control'', at least to some extent, of the beasts rather than handing them over to the Hokage and his faction of Konoha, his enemies, which was expected given the usual protocols regarding such powerful entities and this was the way.


    By framing the return of the Tailed Beasts to them as a necessary step to secure peace with Kirigakure, Hikari ingeniously crafted a scenario that could be somewhat ''justified'' and hard to verify or to use as a pretext to move against him, as he would be a peace-creating hero, in the vige, after everything that transpired here during all these months gets to be known.


    As the negotiations progressed, Hikari shifted the focus slightly, addressing everyone gathered around the negotiation table.


    With a supportive nod to Mei, he praised her readiness to take on the role of Mizukage and the responsibility of hosting the Six-Tails.


    "The host for the Three Tails has not yet been decided...", Hikari announced to the group, "We will finalize this decision in theing days as we continue our matters here in Kirigakure.",


    With this strategic announcement made, Hikari finally stepped back, allowing Hiashi to take over the finer details of their alliances.


    Hiashi, experienced in such matters, began working through the mechanics of the alliance, discussing terms and responsibilities that would define the rtionship between Kirigakure and their Hyuga-led Anti-Hokage faction.


    Following Hiashi''s detailed discussions, Toru and Arata took the floor. The two n patriarchs began to negotiate the intricate details of Kirigakure''s internal restructuring and power distribution.


    Their conversation focused on ensuring that the Kaguya and Yuki ns integrated into the vige''s governance and received fair representation and influence in the new administrative framework.


    This part of the negotiations was crucial as it determined how the newly united Kirigakure would function as a cohesive entity, bncing the power between the existing Kirigakure forces and the newly incorporated ns.

 130. The Ascension of Mei Terumi as Mizukage (1)

    130. The Ascension of Mei Terumi as Mizukage (1)


    A few dayster, after the negotiations concluded, an important ceremony secretly took ce in Kirigakure.


    Under the watchful eyes of Toru, Arata, and Hikari, Mei Terumi underwent the delicate process of re-sealing the Six-Tails within her, utilizing Kirigakure''s secret sealing techniques.


    Once the procedure was sessfullypleted and Mei had sufficiently recovered, a modest inauguration ceremony was held to officially appoint her as the next Mizukage.


    The eptance of Mei as Mizukage was swift among the shinobi of Kirigakure. Already recognized as one of the vige''s most promising young talents alongside Kisame Hoshigaki, who was now a "rebel-nin", her new status as a Jinchuriki only cemented her position.


    The ordinary shinobi, aware of her prowess even before she acquired the Six-Tails, readily endorsed her leadership.


    On the other hand, civilians were primarily relieved that the recent turmoil had ended. They had suffered the most during the instability and were grateful for the return to peace.


    The general popce wasrgely unaware of the specifics of the political maneuvering and alliances that had taken ce.


    They understood only that the bloodline ns hadunched an attack alongside some Konoha shinobi, leading to a significant reshuffling within Kirigakure.


    The consensus reached had seen the bloodline holders officially integrated into the vige and be the official shinobi of the Land of Water, gaining substantial influence as well.


    Furthermore, while the civilians were informed that Konoha had secured significant territorial and geopolitical concessions, they were oblivious to the deeper, unofficial alliance with Konoha''s anti-Hokage faction. At this point, they even had no idea that Hikari and some other Hyuga still stayed in their vige.


    To them, the total cessation of hostilities with Konoha was enough, and they were content knowing that the vige was no longer in a state of war.


    As in every other shinobi vige, the civilians understood that they had no say in who the next vige would be; they could just ept the oue. It was all an internal matter of the shinobi forces and vige higher-ups.


    On the roof of the Mizukage building, as thest touches of sunset painted the vige in golden hues, Hikari and Mei, now d in her Mizukage uniform, stood looking over the bustling activity below.


    The vige was alive with the sounds of reconstruction and the movements of civilians eagerly rebuilding their lives.


    Though only twelve and looking somewhatical in the oversized uniform, Mei now carried a demeanor of more seriousness and maturity that suited her new position.


    As they continued to watch the vige below, Mei shifted slightly, an indication of her adjusting to the new presence within her. She nced at Hikari, her expression a mix of awe and uncertainty,


    "It feels... different, having the Six-Tails inside me. More powerful, but also more responsible. How did you think the sealing ceremony went?"


    Hikari considered her question for a moment before answering, "It went as smoothly as one could hope. The Kirigakure sealers are skilled, and their techniques are tailor-made for those two beasts. With oversight from others and me, we ensured everything was done correctly with our chakra. You handled it very well, especially given the circumstances."


    She nodded and turned to Hikari again. After a while, her expression was thoughtful, "It''s almost surreal, isn''t it? Just a few days ago, this ce was a battlefield, and now look at them¡ªall these people, just relieved to have peace.",


    She continued, her gaze falling on the horizon, "And now I''m suddenly the Mizukage... It''s a lot to take in, almost like everything had been a dream.",


    "One moment, I''m a shinobi among many, a slightly younger, ordinary Jonin, and the next, I''m expected to lead them all. Given how young I am, do you think they''ll truly ept me? And with the Six-Tails...",


    Hikari turned to her, his tone appearing earnest, "Mei, your age might make some skeptical at first, but your strength and the way you conduct yourself will win them over eventually",


    "You''ve been given a rare opportunity to lead Kirigakure into a new era¡ªan era of peace and unity. As for the Six-Tails, being a Jinchuriki makes you uniquely powerful, not just physically, but as a symbol of the vige''s strength and resurgence."


    Hikari''s voice carried a note of conviction as he outlined Mei''s path forward, "Moreover, once you fully recover from the sealing and adjust to the Six-Tails, you''re likely to hit what we consider Early Kage level strength.",


    "As your training continues and your mastery over your dual kekkei genkai and Jinchuriki powers deepens, I see you advancing to Late Kage level within a few years. It''s a level of power akin to what the Hokage of Konoha holds and the one even I presently don''t have.",


    He paused, ensuring Mei absorbed the gravity of his words, "You''ve got all the resources you could need right here in Kirigakure. It''s simply a matter of dedication and hard work on your part. Achieving such strength will naturallymand respect from everyone around."


    Hikari continued, his tone serious yet encouraging, "With that kind of power, you''ll be more than capable of leading both the bloodline ns and the ordinary shinobi here. It will unify the vige under your leadership, aligning everyone towards amon goal. That''s power that doesn''t justmand authority¡ªit fosters loyalty and respect across all factions."


    Mei listened intently to Hikari''s words the entire time, feeling a whirlwind of emotions stir within her all of a sudden.


    As she processed the weight of his expectations and the potential of her future, her thoughts drifted back to the chaotic scenes of the battle, to the moments when Hikari had not only saved her life but had also unveiled the truth about her past¡ªtruths that shook the foundation of her identity yet gave her a clear path forward.


    She recalled how Hikari had protected her amidst the ruins and chaos and how his voice had offered rity and hope.


    Now, as the newly appointed Mizukage,rgely thanks to him as well, and having verified the truths about her parents and the vige''s dark policies from Genji and other trusted sources, she felt an overwhelming sense of validation and purpose. Hikari had not only rescued her physically but had also been instrumental in reshaping her destiny.


    The weight of the Six Tails within her, a daunting and powerful force, now felt like a profound gift rather than a burden.


    Hikari''s assurance that she could rise to Early and then Late Kage level strength wasn''t just motivational¡ªit was a blueprint for the great things expected of her.


    His faith in her ability to unify and lead Kirigakure resonated deeply, reinforcing her resolve to live up to the role of a leader who could bridge divides and heal her vige.


    Mei felt a deep gratitude toward Hikari, not just for his rescue or for revealing her origins but also for his belief in her potential.


    His strategic genius and prowess in battle, which she had witnessed firsthand, left her in awe. Such capabilities in someone so young were not just impressive; they were inspiring and worth admiration from her.


    That''s why his words meant so much to her now. Not to mention that she also already saw him as maybe the only person she could confide in at such a great length.


    Finally addressing Hikari, Mei''s voice was firm, imbued with newfound confidence and a solemn promise, "Hikari-san, I cannot begin to express my gratitude for all that you''ve done for me. I promise you that as long as I lead Kirigakure, we will stand as your unwavering allies. You can have my word on that; I''mmitted."


    "Whatever your ns for the future, consider Kirigakure an extension of your will. I will make sure of that. We will support you, assist you, and ensure that your strategic vision is met."


    Hermitment was not just spoken; it was a vow, reflecting her admiration for Hikari and her dedication to the alliance he envisioned.


    Mei was ready to lead Kirigakure to peace and prosperity as a pivotal ally in theplex shinobi world, directly aligned with Hikari''s and his faction''s broader objectives.

 131. The Ascension of Mei Terumi as Mizukage (2)

    131. The Ascension of Mei Terumi as Mizukage (2)


    However, as Mei poured her true feelings out, the entire time Hikari masked his inner satisfaction as Mei affirmed hermitment, his thoughts ran cold and sharp, ''Perfect...,''


    He thought a word that encapsted the fruition of his meticulous nning. His interactions with Mei over the past few days weren''t spur-of-the-moment gestures of goodwill; they were calcted moves in a strategic game he was determined to win.


    Each step was deliberately crafted to bind Mei to him, not through coercion but through calcted all-around ''goodness'' toward her, ensuring her loyalty would be unwavering.


    It was true that his actions had also significantly benefited Mei as an individual and ''opened her eyes'', in a sense, but his motivations were far from altruistic from the start.


    They were driven by a calcted intent to solidify his influence over Kirigakure through her, to use her ascendancy to further his own goals and keep the entire situation here in control for a long time.


    Giving someone control over Saiken and positioning them as Mizukage were not decisions to be made lightly.


    If he had not been confident in his ability to gain her trust, he would never have given her such immense power.


    Internally, Hikari felt a surge of triumph. His ability to manipte this situation, converting a potential threat into a formidable ally, was a testament to his strategic acumen.


    Yet, he maintained aposed exterior, perfectly ying the role of a benevolent benefactor.


    Having listened carefully to Mei''s expressions of gratitude andmitment, his outward demeanor remained calm and slightly stoic, as always, somewhat embodying the role of a wise older brother or even a mentor.


    His response was measured to reinforce her sense of independence while subtly guiding her toward his long-term objectives.


    "Mei, for now, there''s nothing specific you need to do for me. Your focus should be on Kirigakure. Work on unifying the vige further to the maximum and establishing your authority across all factions. Your strength as a leader will be crucial in this effort...",


    Hikari began, his tone encouraging and softer than usual yet serious, "I already consider you an ally and a friend, Mei. The trust we''ve built is foundational to our rtionship. If you wish to assist me in the future, your strength will be vital. The stronger you are, the more you can contribute to our shared goals.",


    "For now, it''s crucial that our alliance between Kirigakure and my n remains confidential for the time being. Until Kirigakure has fully recovered and grown stronger under your leadership, we should keep our cooperation an utmost secret.",


    "There won''t be any immediate need for your vige''s intervention in my ns anyway; the priority is your consolidation of power here.",


    His advice carefully bnced his strategic interests with her further development as a leader. He portrayed his calcted nning as mentorship while ensuring Mei felt both supported and empowered in her new role.


    Mei nodded softly, her gaze steady and assured as she responded to Hikari''s directives, "You don''t have to worry, Hikari-san. The true nature of our rtionship and your presence and overstay here now are closely guarded secrets. I made sure of it...", She affirmed, her voice carrying a tone of solemnmitment.


    "Only a handful of us within Kirigakure, you know of, are aware of the depth of our alliance¡ªGenji, who now manages all of our civilian and administrative affairs; Toru Kaguya, who has taken up the role of Jonin Commander, and Arata Yuki, the new head of our Anbu.",


    She then continued, her voice imbued with a mix of passion and determination, "Our geographical istion and the traditional secrecy of Kirigakure''s operations y to our advantage. I doubt any other vige suspects the true extent of what we''ve agreed here.",


    "At most, they might assume what the civilians of this vige also probably all assumed, if they managed to get the same information from them somehow: That there''s been a one-time peace deal between Konoha and Kirigakure and also a separate reintegration of the bloodline holders, and nothing else, especially not concerning you and your Hyuga n.",


    Looking up at Hikari, Mei''s expression held a mix of devotion and an unexpected hint of closeness, which seemed to surprise even her as she spoke, "This vige has always been a fortress. Maintaining the secrecy of our deeper coboration won''t be an issue. I want to show you that I can handle this, that I''m capable of leading Kirigakure in a way that supports our goals and follow through on all of your valuable advice and directions.",


    Her assurance was a promise to keep their secrets and a deration of her dedication to her new role as Mizukage and as a pivotal ally to Hikari and his causes.


    Her gaze, with its subtle warmth and attachment, reflected her deep gratitude and burgeoning respect for him. She recognized him as a ''helper'' and a crucial life figure.


    Then her demeanor unexpectedly further softened as she continued, her movements and gestures bing more graceful and her voice carrying a slightly cheerful and more light-hearted tone as well, adding a more personal touch to their conversation than before,


    "Ah yes, I also forgot to tell you about this, but I''ve just issued several orders aimed at the recovery and reintegration of all lost Kekkei Genkai holders from the Land of Water after the inauguration ceremony finished right away.",


    "We will leverage our intelligence personnel and the connections that the Kaguya and Yuki ns have maintained with some of them, to an extent, to try and locate them and establishmunication first.",


    "But, I''m confident that with our sincere efforts, we can also bring some of them rtively quickly inside the vige, especially the ones that are already inside of the Land of Water and the ones that are from the same two bloodline heritages that I belong to originally.",


    Her eyes sparkled with a proactive zeal as she continued, "I believe that with my genuine approach, we''ll be able to persuade them to return and join our vige rtively quickly.",


    Leaning slightly forward, Mei''s expression seemed to seek validation or perhaps a hint of approval, her gaze flickering up to Hikari as if looking for a sign ofpliment or approval from him almost instinctually,


    "The discriminatory ''killing decrees'' from the previous Mizukage era are also now null and void effectively. It''s a new beginning for Kirigakure, one that respects and integrates the strength of every individual, regardless of their heritage.",


    Her approach, clearly aimed at impressing him and demonstrating hermitment to her new role as Mizukage, was also subtly geared towards solidifying her affinity with Hikari.


    It seemed she was not only asserting her administrative prowess but perhaps also subtly, unknowingly highlighting the unique bond that she felt was forming between them.


    Hikari acknowledged Mei''s efforts with a nod, his tone conveying both approval and encouragement, "That''s excellent work, Mei. Bing adept in your role so quickly is trulymendable.",


    It''s crucial for Kirigakure''s future that you sessfully bring back as many of the bloodline holders as possible. Their exclusion has been a significant misstep in the vige''s history, one that contributed to its current weaknessespared to the other great viges.",


    He continued, his voice sincere, "If Kirigakure is to regain its stature andpete on equal footing with the other major viges, it must embrace and utilize the immense potential of these bloodline holders. But I''m confident in your ability to lead this change and rectify past mistakes.",


    Hikari previously also observed Mei''s subtle changes in demeanor, noting the gentle and almost coy-like femininity directed toward him that seemed to emerge more prominently.


    So after finishing speaking, he internally mused for a bit, ''It''s as if bing Mizukage has brought out the personality traits she was known for in the original series¡ªthough she''s much younger now... As for the strength, her main weakness there, it would all be solved.'',


    He looked at her with some amusement and a tinge of personal fondness, too, appreciating how seamlessly she had epted his rhetoric and aligned with his strategies, saving him a tremendous amount of time in terms of setting everything up here.


    Thereafter, as the conversation eventually slowly neared its end, Hikari shifted his tone slightly, indicating a return to his broader outside responsibilities,


    "I must return to my main Eastern Front''s military outpost across the sea and manage our next wartime strategies from there and carefully assess the situation inside the world now.",


    "If you encounter any issues or if Kirigakure needs assistance, don''t hesitate to reach out. We''ve established secure lines ofmunication, and I''ll be ready to help however I can."


    "I understand. And please, stay safe, Hikari-san...", Mei immediately said, her voice tinged with genuine concern, "Your well-being is important to many, not least of all to me. You''ve changed the fate of this vige, and I... we need you to continue guiding us in the future."


    As they parted ways afterward, Mei lingered a moment longer, watching him with a mixture of admiration and a subtle softness that was more pronounced than before. His departure marked a significant moment, leaving Mei empowered yet poignantly aware of his absence.

 132. The Kirigakure Concluded: The Sealing of Ties

    132. The Kirigakure Concluded: The Sealing of Ties


    After he parted ways with Mei, Hikari was returning to his temporary quarters. His path took him through thebyrinth of hidden trails leading to one of the secretplexes located in the high, steep hills surrounding Kirigakure.


    The location was strategically chosen for its seclusion and the natural defense provided by the terrain.


    As he moved silently, blending with the shadows cast by thete afternoon sun, Arata Yuki suddenly appeared beside him.


    The young Yuki patriarch''s presence was unexpected, and his approach was marked by a respectful demeanor.


    "I apologize for interrupting your journey, Hikari-san...", Arata began, his voice carrying a hint of urgency mixed with respect, "Could we perhaps talk for a moment?"


    "Of course, we can talk.", Hikari responded, gesturing towards the summit of the nearby hill, which offered a panoramic view of the vige and a degree of privacy from potential eavesdroppers.


    Together, they ascended the hill, the quiet around them only broken by the asional rustle of leaves underfoot.


    As they stood overlooking Kirigakure, Arata thoughtfully asked Hikari, "Are you and your remaining nsmen nning to leave soon?"


    Hikari nodded affirmatively, his gaze lingering on the distant horizon. "Yes, we will be departing shortly," he confirmed, his voice carrying a note of finality.


    Arata nodded, then continued, "The global situation is indeedplex with the ongoing world war. I suppose you''ll seek to build further merits elsewhere, as you''ve already achieved your objectives against Kirigakure on behalf of Konoha on this frontline."


    "Indeed, there are other fronts where we need to assert our efforts. The situation requires us to be adaptable and strategic...", He stated, confirming his ongoing role in the war.


    As they continued their conversation from there, it was clear that something else was on Arata''s mind. After a pause filled with small talk, he finally voiced his deeper concern, his expression earnest.


    "Hikari-san, have you decided who you will have the Three-Tails sealed into? Or are you considering taking it back to Konoha now, and you changed your mind?"


    His tone and urgency in his question indicated that he was personally interested in the matter, likely seeing it as a means to augment his own strength.


    Many days passed, and the Six-Tails was already sealed into Mei Terumi, yet there was still no word about the Three-Tails from Hikari, leading Arata to specte.


    Hikari offered a slight smile, recognizing the opportunity to assert a strategic upper hand. He had anticipated this conversation before and decided to y it to his advantage, so he waited so long regarding the Three-Tails matter.


    However, he and the rest of the vige''s higher-ups were truly busy and focused more on Mei''s matters.


    "Well, I haven''t settled on a specific individual yet..." he replied, maintaining an air of casual deliberation. I''m still inclined to find someone from within this vige to host it, though."


    Arata, feeling the need to formalize his request, pressed further, revealing the depth of his ambition and desperation, "If I may be so bold, I''d like to offer myself as the host for the Three-Tails...",


    "If granted this strength, I assure you that my loyalty and that of my n will be solid as a rock. We would be at your call, ready to assist with any challenges you face, be it here or even within Konoha''s internal matters, should you require.",


    His plea was a clear indication of his concern for the survival and future influence of his n, especially now that they had lost so many of their members in the previous fight and were part of a weakened Kirigakure, more vulnerable to external threats from other great shinobi viges than ever before.


    Hikari then appeared to deliberate next for quite a while; however, internally, his mind was already set on giving Arata that power for quite a while.


    He also long recognized that Kirigakure, in its current state, was extremely vulnerable to the ambitions of therger shinobi viges.


    In such a precarious position, only a ninja with an existing foundation of considerable power, like Arata, could truly benefit from¡ªand maximize¡ªthe formidable force of a tailed beast.


    Sealing the Three-Tails in an ordinary jonin might not yield the desired results; it was uncertain if such a host could manage the beast''s power or attain Kage-level strength.


    The Three-Tails, with its vast reservoirs of chakra, would perfectlyplement Arata''s already impressive capabilities.


    Unlike an ordinary jonin, for whom controlling such a beast might prove overwhelming or futile, Arata possessed the necessary kekkei genkai, an innate bloodline gift, and an array of jutsu to harness this power effectively.


    His primary limitation had always been ack of sufficient chakra to scale his Ice Release techniques to their fullest potential.


    The tailed beast could bridge this gap, transforming his strategic disadvantage into a formidable asset, thus fortifying Kirigakure and his own status as a peerless elite.


    Hikari recognized the potential lineup of allies that could emerge from this arrangement. By incorporating Arata with the Three-Tails, he would likely ascend to a Middle Kage level of strength, simr to Toru Kaguya.


    Combined with Mei, who was poised to reach the Late Kage level of strength within a few years, Hikari would possess a formidable trio of Kage-level allies outside his home vige.


    Such a rare strategic advantage would significantly bolster his faction''s position against the Hokage''s faction in Konoha.


    Beyond the increase in power, Hikari foresaw the goodwill this gesture would generate with Arata. Even if Aratater considered betrayal, the dynamics within Kirigakure would deter him. Hikari''s influence over Mei and the historical bonds between his own Hyuga and Kaguya ns provided a safeguard.


    This intricate web of alliances and dependencies ensured that even if Arata harbored any thoughts of defection, the existing rtionships and mutual interests within Kirigakure would likely discourage such actions.


    While Hikari valued his current closeness with Toru Kaguya, he decided against giving him the Three-Tails. Toru was already at the Middle Kage level of strength, and boosting him further might make him too formidable.


    Hikari''s strategy required maintaining a bnce of power that favored his interests. By elevating Arata instead, he avoided creating an overpowering figure within Kirigakure who could challenge his ns or overshadow Mei Terumi, whom he now considered his primary ally within the vige.


    In Hikari''s calctions, Mei needed to be the undisputed leader in Kirigakure to ensure his influence remained strong and uncontested. Ensuring that no one within the vige could rival her was crucial for preserving his control.


    Hikari nodded thoughtfully as if his decision was finally made. He turned to Arata with a firm expression, "Well, I''ve indeed decided to entrust the Three-Tails to you. We''ll have a sealing ceremony tonight.",


    "I''ll make all the necessary arrangements with Mei. Kirigakure needs elites of the highest caliber like yourself. Grow strong, and help lead this vige to a safe and better future."


    Arata''s face lit up with gratitude, his voice earnest as he responded, "Thank you, Hikari-san. You won''t regret this. I swear my loyalty to you and your cause. Whatever you need, wherever, I''ll be there for you."


    Hikari raised his hand, signaling a pause. "There''s no need for formal oaths, Arata. Let''s be friends instead. If I help you now, you can help me in the future. It''s a cycle of mutual support, not just a transaction of power..." he exined softly.


    Arata was initially surprised by the offer of friendship, but his expression soon also softened into a warm smile, "I''d like that very much. It''s an honor to call you a friend, Hikari..."


    Hikari responded sincerely, "We''re quite alike as individuals. So, let''s look out for each other in the future."


    Although his actions were often calcted and strategic, there was a genuine element to Hikari''s statement.


    He truly believed that their personalities werepatible. Arata was reasonable, measured, and stoic¡ªqualities Hikari respected and found simr to his own.


    He admired Arata''s intelligence and his ability to know when to advance or retreat, who to respect, and whom to tter.


    These observations had been made quietly over the short time they had known each other, and Hikari felt a sincere connection.


    It wasn''t entirely just about alliance and power but also about respect and mutual understanding between two like-minded individuals. However, it was obvious which one was greater.


    Shortly after that, they parted ways. Finally, in a good mood, Hikari made his way back to his residence, his thoughts shifting toward the next steps.


    As Hikari made his way there, his mind was upied with the broader strategdscape of the ongoing world conflict.


    Despite the progress made here, a significant presence of their Hyuga-led forces and elites would still be required near the Land of Water to deter any potential retaliation from Kumogakure, the only possible and most likely threat to Kirigakure at this moment.


    It was quite reasonable for Konoha to maintain a military presence in newly acquired territories from the Land of Water like their previous only continental part or their former proxy, the Yugakure, considering the Hokage''s Faction likely underestimated the extent of the agreements Hikari had secured in Kirigakure.


    They probably viewed the ceasefire as tentative and fragile. Consequently, maintaining some forces in the region wouldn''t raise eyebrows¡ªit would align perfectly with Hikari''s intentions to safeguard it until it stabilized more.


    The main challenge next for Hikari was deploying his forces to other conflict zones to umte more strategic victories, particrly after his significant achievements in Kirigakure.


    While official permission to reassign his troops might be difficult to obtain, Hikari considered moving a select group of elite units without formal approval.


    Such actions, although bold, were unlikely to draw public criticism if they resulted in saved lives and strategic advantages.


    Nevertheless, the groups he intended to assist would need to wee his involvement. Given the circumstances, the Sunagakure''s Southern Front, managed by his Uchiha allies and beyond the direct influence of the Hokage''s faction, presented a strategic opportunity for further engagement.


    This front was the most logical next step for Hikari and his team. It aligned with their broader objectives while operating outside the immediate control of Konoha''s central leadership.


    Not to mention that, by the looks of it, Konoha kept losing the most there, and Hikari urgently needed to try to help his allies from the Uchiha n.


    As Hikari reflected on his recent actions, he also acknowledged the potential repercussions of his newfound visibility in the shinobi world.


    His direct defeat of the Mizukage, a significant and unmistakable disy of power, was bound to ripple across the global shinobimunity.


    Previously, he had operated more covertly, but now he anticipated that various factions and powerful individuals might be aware of his capabilities, potentially leading to increased scrutiny or even direct opposition.


    Despite these concerns, Hikari considered the numerous advantages his actions had secured, which far outweighed any potential drawbacks.


    Among the less obvious benefits was the sessful acquisition of critical resources during the chaos of battle.


    A covert group of Hyuga n members, most loyal to him, from his Third Lineage, had been tasked with and managed to obtain cell samples from Toru Kaguya during the previous chaos sessfully.


    Additionally, they had captured one of the elusive White Zetsu, who had spied on the entire happening from afar, as Hikari urately predicted, and whom those members were tasked to be always on the lookout for during the entire chaos as well, all around the Kirigakure, both of which were now a route to his mainboratory in Konoha to Hinome.


    With a hint of anticipation, Hikari thought about the potential future breakthroughs these samples could facilitate.


    They represented the keyponents needed to propel their experiments on bloodline enhancement to unprecedented levels. So, they now had all the ''ingredients'' secured.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    A/N: Sunagakure part starting!

 133. Moving To The Southern Sunagakure Front (1)

    133. Moving To The Southern Sunagakure Front (1)


    By the time Hikari left Kirigakure, he discovered that news of his victory over the Mizukage, along with detailed ounts of his unique abilities, had spread far beyond the vige''s borders somehow despite the utmost secrecy that Mei promised, especially concerning his shinobi abilities that were used that day.


    The precision with which his tactics and powers were described, particrly his ability to manipte natural energy with his taijutsu, came as an unwee surprise.


    Hikari felt a surge of anger upon learning that such critical details of his capabilities were exposed, potentiallypromising his tactical advantage.


    However, as he considered the situation further, Hikari realized that the exposure of his skills might have been inevitable.


    Even if his enemies were aware of his ability to manipte natural energy and use it in fights, they would struggle to counter it unless they could harness and interact with it themselves and possess some other ability that would allow them to ''see'' it like himself. But those are extremely rare possibilities.


    So they could, at most, attempt to dodge or repel his attacks, but they would''ve done that anyway.


    So, the only significant loss was perhaps his ability to use this skill for surprise petrification attacks, which relied on the element of secrecy. They now knew that it could happen.


    Suspecting who might be responsible for this leak, Hikari considered two likely sources. One possibility was Madara Uchiha and Zetsu, who might have spread the information to undermine him.


    White Zetsu clone had observed part of the battle before being apprehended by his team, making it prime suspect.


    Before it was fully taken, there was no way to know if it could''ve used his extensive undergroundwork of roots to pass all the information it knew to other more distant clones.


    Alternatively, the remnants of the previous Mizukage''s loyalists, in a final act of defiance and seeking revenge, could have disclosed his fighting style either right before the Kirigakure fight ended or in the days after - before they were 100% rooted permanently and managed to hide or mask their previous affiliation in various ways.


    Given their familiarity with simr techniques used by their leader, they were well-equipped to provide such detailed information to the outside world.


    In the days that followed, as Hikari''s name and exploits became increasingly recognized worldwide, he began to hear reports of his growing reputation.


    He was now considered an S-ss war elite figure, a prominent and formidable presence acknowledged globally, on the level of other prominent figures that always existed in all five great ninja viges.


    His renown was such that he even earned the shinobi nickname "Byakugan Sage," reflecting both his prowess and the widespread knowledge of his unique abilities.


    This acknowledgment, while unintended, marked him as a key yer on the international stage, altering his strategdscape significantly.


    So, a weekter, after finalizing their operations on Kirigakure and Konoha''s Eastern Front, Hikari, Hiashi, Takumi, Hizashi, and a contingent of the Hyuga n set out on a journey, in a hurry, through the Land of Fire.


    Their destination was near the Land of Rivers, spurred by urgent news from Kiyomi regarding Konoha''s Southern Front.


    There, the Uchiha allies were facing a threatening situation as Sunagakure appeared to be initiating a major invasion into the Land of Fire.


    That meant that Hikari didn''t have time to rest there for a while to hone in on his newly established advancements in natural energy; he had to move right away.


    As they advanced towards the Land of Rivers, Hikari mentally reviewed the strategic dynamics that shaped the looming conflict with Sunagakure.


    He was aware that Land of Wind''s and, hence, Sunagakure''s inherent geographical and climatic challenges had always positioned it as the economically weakest among the shinobi viges.


    The scarcity of water and arablend restricted its poption growth and development, making it difficult to sustain arge and well-equipped shinobi force.


    The harsh climate further exacerbated the costs of maintaining and constructing durable architecture.


    In contrast, Kirigakure benefited from its rich maritime resources. The abundance of sea products and the convenience of trade facilitated by oceanic routes underscored its robust economy.


    Moreover, the sea provided a cost-effective method for shipping goods, enhancing Kirigakure''s economic stability.


    While the Land of Water''s geographical fragmentation led to some cultural divisions, its arablend supported arger, more diverse poption.


    However, the very terrain that economically disadvantaged Sunagakure also fortified it against invasions.


    The vige was strategically nestled in a valley shielded by imposing rock cliffs, making any direct assault perilous.


    Beyond the mere challenge of traversing the harsh desert, invaders had to contend with perilous sandworms and navigate the formidable natural defenses of thendscape.


    Navigating the harsh environment of the Land of Wind presented formidable challenges to any shinobi unustomed to desert warfare.


    The perilous climate, scarcity of water, treacherous terrain, and the presence of poisonous creatures were just the beginning.


    Sunagakure shinobi held a significant tactical advantage due to their familiarity with these harsh conditions.


    They were adept at exploiting thendscape to their benefit, creating traps in the sand that were virtually undetectable to outsiders, making the desert a barrier and a lethal weapon in its own right.


    These environmental hazards, coupled with the ingenious defensive strategies developed by Sunagakure, rendered conventional warfare tactics nearly obsolete on their territory.


    This intrinsic defensive strength, born out of necessity and honed through generations of survival, empowered Sunagakure to assert itself boldly on the geopolitical stage despite its smaller poption and economic disadvantages and maintain its status as one of the Five Great Ninja Viges - albeit still the weakest one ''offensively'' outside of their own domains.


    This fact was also partially why Konoha, led by the Uchiha n, sent the fewest troops there. It stemmed from the understanding that Sunagakure, while formidable in defense,cked the economic and numerical strength to mount arge-scale offensive.


    Not to mention that Sunagakure is also partially involved in a war with the Iwagakure nowadays, albeit one of far lesser intensity than was the case with their war against Konoha.


    However, this underestimation soon proved problematic. The initial absence of elite and Kage-level shinobi in the Uchiha-led force left a gap that Sunagakure''s elite units exploited.


    Over time, these elite units of Sunagakure began to assert themselves more aggressively, not only holding their ground but also advancing offensively in a rtively short period.


    They eventually expanded their control fully beyond their borders into the nearby, previously contested zone of the Land of Rivers and its hidden vige, Tanigakure.


    This expansion was a disy of military strength and a strategic move to gain territorial control and influence in the region.


    The Uchiha, faced with increasing pressure and a growing disadvantage due to theck of high-level shinobi, found themselves in a precarious position.


    However, Sunagakure''s advancements halted after they established control over Tanigakure two months ago because two Kage-level elite fighters had finally'' emerged'' amongst the Uchiha ranks by then.


    Nevertheless, their offensive resumed a few days ago with renewed vigor and fiercer intensity for some unknown reason.


    This time, their target was the actual territory of the Land of Fire. This sudden esction was the reason Hikari and the others rushed to the area so urgently.


    It would be pretty disastrous for one of their dual anti-Hokage coalition-led fronts to allow that to happen.


    Soon enough, a few dayster, after a relentless journey across the Land of Fire, Hikari and his group finally reached their destination¡ªa predetermined meeting point positioned on the opposite side of the country, directly facing Sunagakure and the recently conquered Tanigakure.


    The specific coordinates were chosen for their proximity to one of Konoha''s main secret barracks on this side of the front, which would serve as the venue for a crucial meeting.


    Here, Hikari, Hiashi, and Takumi were set to meet with Kiyomi and Fugaku, the key figures in coordinating the defense efforts against Sunagakure''s renewed offensive.


    This gathering was crucial for strategizing a robust response to protect Land of Fire''s territories and counteract Sunagakure''s aggressive maneuvers as effectively as possible.


    The cave they met was located on the edge of the Land of Fire, close to where it meets the Land of Rivers.


    This strategic positioning was crucial, as the Land of Rivers then bordered the Land of Wind, forming a buffer zone that was now of significant tactical interest.


    The geography here was marked by a transition from the lush, forested areas typical of the Land of Fire to the more varied terrains of the Land of Rivers, which featured patches of woonds and sprawling river systems.


    This diversendscape provided natural barriers and multiple routes, offering both concealment and rapid ess to different regions, making it an ideal spot for a strategic meeting regarding the defense of their territory.


    The proximity to the Land of Rivers also allowed them to monitor any movements towards the Land of Wind and respond swiftly to shifts in the delicate bnce of regional power.

 134. Moving To The Southern Sunagakure Front (2)

    134. Moving To The Southern Sunagakure Front (2)


    As they convened in the cave, Hikari''s eyes quickly assessed the figures before him. Fugaku stood as he had during theirst meeting, still in his prime years, robust and authoritative, his presence enhanced by the Konoha Division Commander uniform that adorned his usual, more traditional, Uchiha garb, symbolizing his enduring prowess and leadership within the n, now perhaps even exhibiting a way more confident aura, unlike his previous, slightly indecisive self back then either due to the war or dojutsu upgrade, or both, in Hikari''s view.


    Kiyomi, on the other hand, presented an even more noticeable change to him. Though still rtively young, passing only her seventeenth birthday, she had an unmistakable maturity about her that transcended time since theirst encounter, only adding to her overall charm.


    Her transformation into a young woman was underscored not only by her physical appearance, which bnced both grace and strength but also by an air of confidence that seemed to radiate from her constantly.


    As Hikari managed a rare smile, his usual stoic demeanor softened momentarily, "Uchiha Patriarch, Kiyomi, nice to meet you again...", He began, extending the customary formalities.


    However, before he could continue, be greeted back by Fugaku, or hear others on his side speak, Kiyomi suddenly closed the distance with surprising boldness and a warm and happy look on her face. She immediately embraced him in full view of the others without saying anything first, letting her actions speak.


    Hikari was caught slightly off guard but not entirely displeased. She noted the contrasting softness of her frame against his taller, leaner figure. Now, he was also 15 and much taller than her very petite frame, way more than before.


    ''This girl seemingly not only failed to be more reserved in the slightest, but she grew even bolder after awakening her Mangekyo, heh...'', Hikari thought as he felt her shorter but way ''cushier'' body pressing on his own.


    Kiyomi''s choice of attire was as striking as her entrance. She wore a sleek, sleeveless ck shinobi uniform that clung to her form, entuating her silhouette. The outfit was tactically chosen for mobility yet did not shy away from making a statement with its bold design. It included visible mesh armor on her arms, which added ayer of both protection and style.


    "It''s okay, Kiyomi. Weren''t we constantly inmunication during all these months like I promised before we partedst time? Stop this. Everyone is looking. Let''s get down to business...", Hikari maintained an expressionless face as he whispered to her, aware of the slightly awkward atmosphere exhibited by the other three males in the room at this time.


    Kiyomi, realizing the eyes on them, paused for a few seconds before responding positively and stepping back, "Seeing you in person is much different from writing. I''m sorry, I just missed you so much and went through a lot on this front...", Her mood seemed to dip as she recalled the challenges she faced all these months leading to her awakening of Mangekyo.


    Hikari, observing her change in demeanor, reassured her right away: "Everything will be alright now that I''m here. Don''t worry from now on. I will make sure to force the enemy into the wall and make them stop going against us, just like I did in Kirigakure...", His firm voice aimed to bolster her spirits and refocus on the strategic tasks at hand.


    After hearing Hikari''s reassurances, a spark of her usual fiery spirit returned to Kiyomi''s eyes. She smiled slightly, a mix of challenge and amusement crossing her features as she looked at Hikari,


    "Huh, like I would need your help, Hikari. We are, at worst, equal in strength now. I have a Mangekyo Sharingan fully awakened today, the pinnacle of our Uchiha n''s power!",


    "Don''t get ahead of yourself just because you defeated the Mizukage, cleared the Eastern Front, and brought down Kirigakure.",


    "The situation here is much moreplex. We justcked some numbers, that''s it...", She retorted in her characteristic tsundere manner.


    However, despite her outward bravado, Kiyomi internally felt a deeper sense of relief and security with Hikari''s arrival, as if a stone had been lifted from her heart as if he were her pir.


    Internally, she was profoundly grateful and happy for his presence, not only as a protector but also as a confidant truly this time around.


    She also admired and respected his strategic acumen, which had be renowned everywhere, and his strength, which had increased following his sesses at the Kirigakure front.


    Even though she teased him and asserted her independence, his presence bolstered her confidence in facing the looming challenges. She knew she was nowhere near him in terms of his schemes and brains.


    However, Kiyomi''s yful tone still carried a hint of teasing as she continued her response to Hikari, her eyes twinkling with a mixture of pride and challenge,


    "And besides, everyone''s been talking about the ''Byakugan Sage''tely. It''s hard not to hear about your newfound fame. It seems you''ve be quite the legend while you were away...", She said, her voiceced with sarcasm but not without a genuine undertone of admiration.


    Hikari, momentarily caught off guard by the mention of his new nickname for the first time today, allowed a small, almost imperceptible smile to y on his lips before retorting smoothly,


    "And what should I say about the ''Uchiha Princess''? It seems your own legend is growing just as rapidly, if not more...", He replied with a light, teasing tone, reflecting her own yful challenge.


    Kiyomi''s cheeks tinged with a slight blush, caught between embarrassment and amusement, "That title is more about ir than function...", She quipped back, herpetitive spirit shing in her eyes.


    "Well, ''Byakugan Sage'' or not, I''m d you''re here. With your strategy and my Mangekyo Sharingan, we make a formidable team...", She added, clearly wanting to change topics now due to embarrassment, to which Hikari just nodded inly next.


    Additionally, when Kiyomi mentioned her Mangekyo Sharingan, Hikari then, however, reflected on its significance a bit more internally.


    The Mangekyo represented an advanced evolution of the Sharingan, featuring unique, intricate patterns that reced the basic tomoe and enhanced the doujutsu''s abilities.


    This included sharper pattern recognition insight and more realistic illusions, along with two potent, ''hax-like'' new abilities for each eye¡ªabilities that remained secret to him for now.


    Fugaku and Kiyomi had kept these powers closely guarded, known only to the highest elites of their n, maintaining a strategic advantage by ensuring no one outside their closest circle, not even Hikari, was aware of their specific capabilities.


    The secrecy was crucial, as it protected them from potential threats and strategic nning by their adversaries, including the Hokage''s faction and Sunagakure.


    Hikari hadn''t pressed Kiyomi for details so far, trusting she would share in due time. He was also surprised by their awakenings; Fugaku had the gic potential for it, as seen from his awakening in the original, and Kiyomi had been doing his Yin Release practice already for years, providing the necessary foundation for this powerful evolution to suddenly ur one day as it did.


    They both needed just the right ''catalyst'' to happen, and they clearly got it soon after this war started.


    However, even though he didn''t know their unique abilities in detail, judging by his memory of the original series and some sparse reports he got on their actions, they were probably both around the Middle Kage level of strength presently, around his own.


    Just the Susanoo awakening they both unlocked was a big factor of their power on its own.


    Meanwhile, Takumi and Hiashi, who had observed the entire exchange between Hikari and Kiyomi with slight amusement and pride in their eyes, obviously happy for the potential pairing, also stepped forward to greet Fugaku and Kiyomi at this time.


    They offered respectful nods and brief smiles, acknowledging the importance of unity and cooperation in the face of the impending challenges.


    "It''s Good to see you both in good health, Uchiha Patriarch, Kiyomi-san...", Hiashimented warmly, his voice carrying the weight of his experience and his unspoken understanding of the stakes involved.


    Takumi, always more reserved, simply nodded in agreement, his eyes scanning the group, reinforcing the silent vow of support and vignce that the Hyuga n was known for.


    Fugaku, in response, returned the greeting with a nod, his expression serious but with a hint of appreciation for the gathered allies,


    "The situation requires all our focus...", He said, his tone businesslike as he gestured towards the maps and documentsid out, ready to dive into the strategic nning that awaited them.


    Fugaku had obviously also noticed the small disy of affection between Hikari and Kiyomi right upon their reunion, yet he chose to ignore it, deliberately turning a blind eye.


    In these challenging times, he recognized his own helplessness in influencing their rtionship, whether he liked that rtionship or not, for various reasons beforehand.


    It was true that he and Kiyomi had both awakened their Mangekyo Sharingan recently, a few months after this war started. This development was triggered by the profound losses they had endured since the onset of the war.


    The deaths of their fellow nsmen, many of whom were personally known to them, had not only been a painful experience but also a necessary condition for the awakening of their powerful Sharingan abilities under extreme grief after being helpless and watching that happening day over a day and that due to their perceived powerlessness as the leaders of the n and that front against Sunagakure in general.


    However, the stark contrast in the oues of their respective war fronts was precisely what forced him to turn a blind eye just now.


    The Hyuga-led Eastern Front, under Hikari''s astute leadership, had consistently achieved victories with minimal casualties from the beginning of their deployment, a stark contrast to the experiences of Fugaku''s own Uchiha-led division, which now also needed to be helped by Hikari and his Hyuga forces if they wanted to survive.


    From the beginning, the Uchiha division faced severe setbacks against Sunagakure, suffering significant losses among both seasoned and newly awakened Sharingan users in far greater and unimaginable numbers.


    This continual defeat had also skewed the power bnce significantly towards the Hyuga n more than ever, who emerged as victors in seemingly impossible scenarios, and finally securing a rare and first victory for Konoha against a major vige amidst the broader turmoil of the Third Shinobi World War.


    This shift solidified the Hyuga n''s preeminence within the Anti-Hokage coalition, with Hikari''s strategies and leadership elevating his n to a position of undisputed leadership.


    The Hyuga n was stronger now, even with various Uchihas'' high self-esteem; they all admitted that same fact nowadays, even the most arrogant of them all.


    Meanwhile, Hikari''s personal renown had also grown not just within the confines of the Konoha shinobi broad shinobi force but on other fronts as well, across the world, marking him as a war hero and a figure of significant influence.


    Acknowledging these dynamics, Fugaku, as the Uchiha Patriarch, found himself in a position where asserting his views on Kiyomi and Hikari''s matters now seemed both futile and potentially harmful to their interests for various reasons.


    This does not exclude Kiyomi herself, who, due to their simr awakenings, has the same position as him in the n nowadays.


    But most of all, he recognized the importance of maintaining a strong alliance with Hikari and the Hyuga n, which now held more leverage within the coalition.


    In light of these realities, Fugaku concluded that preserving a harmonious rtionship with Hikari to perfection was far more beneficial than intervening in personal affairs.


    Reflecting on the evolving rtionship between Hikari and Kiyomi more, Fugaku suddenly realized his previous instinctive negativity might have been misced,


    ''Why have I always viewed this development with such trepidation? If Kiyomi marries Hikari, wouldn''t that enhance my status as n head and stabilize it considerably? Her marriage to someone from another prominent n would essentially remove her and her descendants from contention for leadership within our n...'', He reasoned.


    ''Moreover, considering the Hyuga n''s current dominance within our faction, it seems highly unlikely that Kiyomi could pursue, much less secure, the Hokage position as we had once hoped...'',


    Fugaku contemted further, thinking out of the box, ''Isn''t it more preferable for us that she marries the clearly more likely next Hokage, Hikari, then, instead of holding out for such a diminishing prospect for herself? Better to secure a significant alliance than nothing...'',


    With this realization, Fugaku felt a sense of relief wash over him. As they gathered around the strategy table to focus on the maps and the pressing matters at hand, he found himself internally reconciled with the situation, feeling more content than before in front of Hikari.

 135. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (1)

    135. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (1)


    As everyone settled around the table,rge and smaller, local and global, maps and documents spread out everywhere, Fugaku took the initiative to speak first, focusing on the broader strategic context they were facing.


    He addressed the ongoing developments with the enemy Hokage Faction and the handling of their two main fronts¡ªagainst Iwagakure and Kumogakure.


    "Both fronts led by the Hokage Faction are performing rtively better nowpared to our current situation against Sunagakure, which is not good...", Fugaku began, his voice steady despite the grim content of his briefing.


    "While they are not decisively winning, they''ve managed to avoid the severe setbacks we''ve experienced here in the Southern Front presently and even reversed some of the losses they took during the beginning stages of the war for various reasons.",


    "But, here we''re at a critical point where enemy shinobi are on the verge of breaching even into the Land of Fire territory itself, and we''re hopeless to stop it so far.",


    "The only silver lining we have is the victory on the Eastern Front, thanks to Hikari''s efforts, which has given us a strategic advantage we cannot afford to waste and bought us some reputation back for some time ahead. This makes it all the more crucial for us to reverse our fortunes here quickly.",


    "Given these pressures, our focus must be on fortifying our defenses and strategizing counterattacks that can leverage our strengths effectively...", Fugaku''s tone underscored the urgency of their task.


    Hiashi, after Fugaku finished, leaned forward, his expression turned serious and his voice carrying the weight of his experience and the gravity of their situation, "We aremitted to doing as much as possible to help reverse the situation here, even though this division is essentially led by your n, the Uchiha.",


    "At this point, we can''t afford to see this as a separate issue. Given the rapid rise in strength of the Hokage''s Faction and the improving conditions on their fronts, we are in the same boat now more than ever...", He emphasized.


    Hikari nodded in agreement with Hiashi, his tone determined, "Indeed, I''ve even postponed some of my own training, which was intended to consolidate the battle experience I gained from fighting the Mizukage in our shared discipline you probably heard about in rumors.",


    "Rather than refining those skills in istion, I rushed here as soon as possible alongside others and n to adapt and enhance those skills here now, amidbat, demonstrating ourmitment to this cause.",


    "This shows just how seriously we, the Hyuga n, take the well-being and sess of our closest allies...", He exined.


    Takumi, with a hint of frustration evident in his tone, suddenly interjected too, "Whereas I personally, and likely all of us here, anticipated the total copse of the Hokage Faction''s led two fronts over time, they''ve somehow managed to turn things around over time.",


    "Their elites are not only growing in power, but some are even acquiring new abilities, and we''re seeing entirely new elites emerging in their ranks. Miraculously, they''ve managed to hold on...", He exined, his voice tinged with annoyance, reluctance, and deep concern.


    Kiyomi, her face etched with displeasure and her toneced with indignation, began detailing the developments on the Northern Front next,


    "Yes, initially, Shinsuke Sarutobi took a significant contingent of Anbu to assist Jiraiya in holding off Kumogakure''s intense onught around Shimogakure.",


    "This move was in line with our predictions even before the first troops were dispatched for this war..." she exined, her voice steady despite her obvious frustration.


    "However, the unexpected turn of events began when Tsunade, who was identally there with her medical unit, saved Jiraiya from a particrly deadly ambush led by the Raikage and managed to ''ovee'' her phobia of blood.",


    "In a critical moment, she saved his life, and from that point on, she assumed the role of Vice Commander on the Northern Front...", Kiyomi continued, her annoyance apparent.


    Kiyomi''s voice grew more intense as she continued to recount the events, her irritation palpable, "However, the most shocking development, on that front, involved a previously unremarkable genin named ''Might Duy''...",


    "In a desperate battle to protect his son, who had just graduated from the academy and was thrust onto the front lines along with other children, Might Duy unleashed an ancient, somewhat forgotten taijutsu technique to everyone, known as the ''Eight Gates'' opening...",


    She paused, her disdain for the unexpected shift in the war''s dynamics evident in her tone, "He opened the Seventh Gate, a part of that technique, showcasing what can only be described as Middle Kage level strength next right away. His actions not only saved his son, on that day, sessfully, but turned the tide of several battles almost single-handedly.",


    Kiyomi''s expression darkened further as she added, "From then on, he was deployed across the Northern Front, reversing many losses for the Hokage Faction, who have since been treating him with high regard, courting him as a major asset and promoting him as a hero."


    Hikari, meanwhile, absorbed Kiyomi''s words, reflecting internally, ''Yeah, Might Duy''s matter was unexpected, but somewhat anticipated given what I know from the original timeline...'',


    ''Also, thankfully, he seems like he is a level below Might Guy in every gate opening level for some reason, eitherck of umted experience Guy had from himter or a slightly weaker physique.'',


    ''After all, any skilled Strong First external taijutsu practitioner could discover the reason why opening your Inner Gates like that could be beneficial, but few get any guidance or training in doing so.'',


    ''As seen from Hokage''s Faction''sck of knowledge about him, it seems that Duy did itpletely on his own, unlike his son, who got Duy''s own decades of experience to use for assistance.'',


    Hikari''s unique knowledge of the original events gave him insights into potential oues, yet the unpredictable nature of his interventions reminded him continuously of theplex and often unforeseen consequences they could cause, just like the ones Kiyomi mentioned.


    Eventually, Hikari responded to Kiyomi''s concerns with a calm and analytical tone, aiming to provide a broader perspective on the strategic situation,


    "Don''t worry, Kiyomi. Even with that individual named Might Guy now emerging as a significant force on the Hokage''s side, it will still be a considerable challenge for them to contain Kumogakure''s elites on that front.",


    "This includes the Third Raikage and his two sons, their other Jinchuriki of the Two Tails, and other elite shinobi, not to mention their substantial ordinary standing shinobi army. Kumogakure is often considered the second strongest great shinobi vige after Konoha for good reason.",


    He paused to ensure his point was clear, then continued, "However, we also have to remember the recent truce I negotiated between Konoha and Kirigakure, who were previously allies of the Raikage.",


    "This means Kumogakure now needs to be cautious and may need to divert some of its forces to watch over their border with Kirigakure, potentially weakening their main front against Jiraiya''s forces.",


    Hikari concluded with a strategic forecast, "This redistribution of Kumogakure''s resources is beneficial for Jiraiya''s front, leading me to expect that particr conflict might be more passive for the time being in the best case scenario for Jiraiya and his Division.",


    "What personally worries me more is everything that has been happening on the Western Front..." Hikari''s voice trailed off as he sped his hands near his face.


    He leaned over the table in an uncharacteristic gesture of contemtion and concern for someone usually soposed; this departure in his demeanor indicated the depth of his unease.


    This worry stemmedrgely from Minato''s continuous rapid improvements, which deeply troubled Hikari.


    He couldn''t pinpoint exactly why, but his intuition had been signaling rm about Minato for a long time.


    There was an underlying feeling, an inexplicable sense that Minato could be a significant obstacle to him in the future¡ªperhaps even one of the greatest he would face.


    Hikari''s thoughts deepened, reflecting on Minato''s recent achievements that furtherpounded his concerns,


    ''Mastering the perfect Sage Mode already in the meantime after this war started, and showing it recently for the first time in battle, utilizing it together with many senjutsu techniques mastered too.'',


    ''Rasengan, too, showcased frequently by him, as expected¡ªprobably after observing Kushina''s or some enemy Jinchuriki''s Tailed Beast Bombs, so developing it like in the original, maybe even earlier than there.",


    He paused, considering the possibilities of Minato''s capabilities expanding even further, ''And who knows if he even stumbled upon the Rasenshuriken by now in this timeline too, and is just not showing it for some reason, or is close to stumbling upon it... Flying Raijin constantly improving as always in terms of capability, speed, and utility. There''s no doubt that he is even stronger than me now and is probably around Late Kage level of strength.'',


    Hikari''s expression darkened slightly as he contemted the broader implications, ''What''s even scarier is that it''s probably not even his full potential... I need to get stronger as soon as possible... The weight of power is shifting toward the Hokage''s Faction significantly once again, and he is the biggest example of that...'' He felt full of wariness and urgency internally.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 136. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (2)

    136. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (2)


    Fugaku''s voice carried a mix of apprehension and even respect as he suddenly began discussing Minato''s rising influence,


    "That guy Minato is quite a misfortune for us... I never expected his strength to escte so rapidly and significantly by this point.",


    "He''s already reached the level of the Hokage and likely matches Sakumo-san in prowess too. What''s more, he''s be the most renowned figure to emerge in the shinobi world during this war and is now one of the most famous ones globally - on par with the Kages.",


    He sighed, his expression darkening with concern just like Hikari''s, "However, the most troubling aspect, the one that poses a significant challenge to us and everyone else, even more than his power in total, is his unparalleled ability to teleport anywhere essentially.",


    "He can appear virtually anywhere in the world, across all fronts and locations, which allows him to shift the tide of many conflicts on a global scale and force all of our enemies to always be on guard and on the defensive nowadays. And I hate to say it but I suspect that this will also be quite arge obstacle to our own faction''s goals in the future as well..."


    Hikari nodded somberly, absorbing Fugaku''s observations before adding, "Minato''s Flying Raijin technique is also uniquely problematic for us because it allows him to be omnipresent, ''cover more ground'', and personally aid countless shinobi across countless battlefields...",


    "This direct involvement and ''story'' has greatly enhanced his reputation and regard within the vige''s lower and civilian ordinary shinobi ranks and many people in the Land of Fire.",


    "It''s no coincidence that the ''Yellow sh'' is so highly acimed now and held in such high moral esteem by the majority of our shinobi. His hero-like high strength also resonates quite well with that narrative...",


    He paused, a hint of bitterness in his tone as he continued, "And let''s not forget how Hiruzen initially always promoted him through his media maniption tactics, though I believe he has since pulled back.",


    "Minato''s poprity has soared to the extent that it even threatens Hiruzen''s position, which is no small feat considering it''s not yet time for a new Hokage. However, knowing Hiruzen''s personality, he wouldn''t let that pass without intervention.",


    "As a result of everything, Minato''s imagepletely overshadows mine right now, by a notch, without a shadow of a doubt, despite my previous achievements in the Kirigakure in effectively securing the first truce and a victory for Konoha in this great ninja world war.",


    Hikari''s gaze hardened as he considered the strategic implications for his standing, "That''s because my battle and victory over the Mizukage in the ''distant'' Kirigakure wasn''t directly witnessed by many, and our front was predominantly led by the Hyuga, so it didn''t resonate as directly with the civilians. I''ve also never assisted anyone directly in the manner he did...",


    His voice grew more determined, outlining a path forward, "If we want to boost our reputation to match his, we need significant achievements here on the Suna front too, and I must be at the forefront.",


    "If I can manage to push back and secure peace with two great ninja viges, everyone will have to acknowledge my capabilities, regardless of my reserved demeanor and Minato''s charismatic presence. The results will speak for themselves. So, we all must work diligently here for quite a while..."


    |However, Takumi chimed in at this time, adding anotheryer to the discussion with a hint of relief in his tone, "You''re right, Hikari-kun, and we get it. Thankfully, it seems like there has been a silent conflict of interests on the Western Front after Minato was established as the Vice Commander there by Hiruzen, and he and his team were more permanently stationed there in order to help.",


    "Between Minato''s newfound faction and Orochimaru''s die-hard loyalists, there hasn''t been a seamless integration of efforts. This internal discord has prevented them from fully utilizing all of Minato''s individual gifts to secure a definitive victory on that front. They''ve managed only to reverse some of the previous losses and stabilize the situation, nothing more, which is good news."


    "Initially, that front was entirely managed by Orochimaru, as decided during the pre-war convention.", Hiashi noted, adding depth to the discussion,


    "However, it was performing very poorly, so eventually Hiruzen had to station Minato and his team there full-time to try and turn things around.",


    He paused before adding, "But, despite this, Minato and his team still find opportunities to teleport and assist on Jiraiya''s front from time to time, when needed, judging from our intel."


    Hikari''s voice meanwhile carried a note of intrigue as he joined in the discussion of the shifting dynamics on the Western Front, again focusing on Takumi''s words especially,


    "Orochimaru is quite dissatisfied with Minato Namikaze now too, trust me. He might even harbor more resentment towards him than towards us.",


    "Since the start of the war, Orochimaru had transformed that segment of the front into what seemed more like a personal army of almost servile followers to help his personal power.",


    "Yet, despite his control, he often neglected to directly engage in leadership and war-rted activities, opting instead to treat those under him harshly and coldly in his usual manner.",


    "He probably didn''t think anyone could challenge his leadership position there due to pride, and he couldn''t fight his nature of always being disconnected from people weaker or less important than him and his secret ambitions; I''m sure he had nned to realize there.",


    He continued, detailing the growing discontent among the ranks, "Ordinary shinobi there grew quite indignant over time. It was as if Orochimaru didn''t care about them or the war effort at all.",


    "Instead, he left most of the strategic nning and leadership to his more capable subordinates, disappearing for months into what I suspect were secret locations around Kusagakure¡ªlikely creating a personal stronghold, or perhaps some kind of secret base orboratory.",


    Hikari paused, reflecting on the implications while everyone listened to him intently with interest, "This was gauged by me from a lot of strange urrences that our intelligence barely managed to gather from Kusagakure ever since he took it over and isted the poor vige from the rest of the world.",


    "God knows what happened there ever since. Anyways, naturally, he didn''t leave a good impression on the shinobi there, not to mention his overall cold, and some might even say evil, a persona that looked like it was unleashed over time as soon as he got that great power, whatever he wanted basically, from Hiruzen, as it was all chaos and wartime.",


    He then shifted to the impact of Minato''s arrival, "So, by the time Minato was stationed there, it was no wonder he managed to win over the hearts of many.",


    "Those who were once under Orochimaru''smand turned to pretty ''maic'' Minato for leadership and protection, moving under his umbre rapidly over time.",


    "Leading to now, the majority of the Konoha shinobi, on that front, being in the Takigakure with him, which Minato also recently reimed from Iwagakure, and looked up to him as a hero who actually has many war achievements, a stark contrast to Orochimaru.",


    "Only a few die-hard loyalists or those who were forced, due to war maneuvering, remained with Orochimaru in the Kusagakure, a significant change from the beginning of the war when he controlled the entire Division single-handedly to do his bidding like their king.",


    "Not to mention how isted Kusagakure''s position has be now from a strategic and military standpoint, so he also has to constantly worry about some attacking from the Iwagakure''s direction as well. He barracked himself in that vige now, basically, and is not evening out to meet or talk with Minato. His current actions inside are unknown...",


    Hikari''s analysis painted a clear picture of a front undergoing significant transformation, influenced heavily by leadership styles and the personal charisma of those inmand.


    Kiyomi, who had listened intently to Hikari''s thorough analysis the entire time, full of interest, seized a moment of pause to voice her insights and queries,


    "Orochimaru''s behavior regarding Kusagakure has indeed been peculiar the entire time... There were multiple instances where the leadership of Kusagakure covertlyined to the Hokage out of fear of Orochimaru.",


    "We managed to catch wind of thoseints, but Hiruzen seemingly consistently ignored them. After all, vassals traditionally have little say.",


    She leaned forward, her focus sharp as she connected the dotsid out by Hikari, "But now that you''ve mentioned it, some of Orochimaru''s actions also do seem consistent with him building a personal stronghold, possibly for research purposes.",


    "Do you think that Hiruzen finally grew weary of tolerating Orochimaru''s antics and hisckluster performance in the war then? Is that why he sent Minato there?",


    "That is a part of it, Kiyomi...", Hikari responded, acknowledging her observations, "But I also suspect that it''s only recently that Hiruzen felt Minato had reached a level of strength sufficient to handle such an extensivebat and wartime participation.",


    "Now dispatched there alongside his team, which includes Kushina, Choza Akimichi, and others, Minato has developed to the point where he doesn''t need as much training as before.",


    Hikari paused, his thoughts briefly turning inward as he considered another significant development.


    Internally, he mulled over how Kushina had also made strides in her abilities, learning to tap into and better control the Nine Tails'' powers within her during recent battles.


    Kushina''s battles against the Iwagakure jinchurikis, in particr, have been a crucial learning ground for her.


    She''s been able to observe and adapt their behaviors, enhancing her own control over the Nine Tails.


    This revtion was another concern for Hikari, addingplexity to the already intricate web of strategic calctions he continuously made.


    Kiyomi''s brow suddenly furrowed in confusion as she considered Orochimaru''s perplexing priorities for some reason,


    "I just don''t understand why Orochimaru would behave so carelessly and indifferently over time, before, and what kind of experiments he is conducting that seem more important to him than maintaining control over his Division and his influence...",


    "It''s unsettling to think that his secretive activities could have consequences we are not yet aware of..." she said, her voice tinged with curiosity and frustration.


    Her eyes scanned Hikari and the room, seeking insights or theories that might exin Orochimaru''s enigmatic actions, which had seemingly jeopardized not only his leadership position but potentially also the broader strategic interests of their coalition in the future.


    Hearing that, Hikari shared his insights once again, painting aplex picture of Orochimaru''s character and motivations.


    "Orochimaru''s personality tends to be a bit detached, and unlike his former teammates Jiraiya and Tsunade, he prefers istion and relies mostly on himself. This can lead him to ''slip up'' in maintaining strategic interests because of his ego and his personality type.",


    "However, his capabilities in intellectual pursuits, shinobi arts, and scientific research are undeniable. Whatever he''s working on must be of significant importance, believe me...",


    He leaned forward, his expression serious, "We need to be very cautious regarding Orochimaru. I consider him to be as much a threat to our future goals as Minato...",


    "Additionally, I suspect he has been coborating with Danzo, this entire time, from the beginning of the war, whose main sphere of influence includes the nearby Amegakure.",


    "It''s unlikely that research operations and infrastructure on such a scale and also effectively isting a shinobi vige and taking full control of it soprehensively, so quickly, could ur without substantial external support, possibly from an organization like Danzo''s Root."


    Hikari''s analysis deepened as he considered the broader implications, "This adds anotheryer ofplexity and requires even more heightened vignce from us regarding their activities and any joint research they might be conducting.


    "Also, let''s not be naive enough to think that Hiruzen wasn''t aware of this from the start. It''s probable that he not only tolerated their actions but may have actively facilitated them, especially given the threat our Anti-Hokage faction poses to his leadership.",


    Pausing to let his words sink in once again, Hikari finally concluded his assessment, "It''s possible that their actions just became too extreme or they grew way too powerful even for Hiruzen somehow, prompting him to ''trim'' their power to manage the situation better slightly, which is his usual ''modus operandi''."


    Kiyomi nodded thoughtfully in response to Hikari, "That internal conflict and their overreach could indeed be something we could exploit in the future...", To which everyone agreed.


    As Kiyomi and Hikari''s discussion wound down, the focus of the meeting shifted back to the immediate concerns at hand.


    The group focused on more practical decisions regarding their stance against Sunagakure.


    Each member brought forward their insights and proposals, weaving together a tapestry of tactics and strategies designed to strengthen their position and exploit any vulnerabilities in their adversaries'' ranks.


    The meeting deepened inplexity as they mapped out their next moves, each decision critical to shaping the oues of the ongoing conflicts and ensuring their strategic objectives were met on the Southern Front.

 137. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (3)

    137. The Southern Front: A Critical Turning Point (3)


    "So, no matter what, it seems like leveraging the surprise factor of you and your team''s arrival on this front is our best option to try and turn the situation around here in our favor, Hikari...",


    Fugaku eventually concluded with a resigned sigh. His eyes scanned the gathered allies, seeking affirmation or further input on this strategic gambit.


    "Yeah, Sunagakure has carefully eroded your numbers and positions in recent months, now initiating what they likely consider a final push to secure victory on this front once they thought were finally ready.",


    "Youck both the elite forces and the ordinary numbers required to withstand a conventional war right now..", Hikari observed, his tone serious as he assessed the dire situation objectively,


    "It seems I will need to join the battle immediately and conduct somerge surprise attacks or target their elite units.",


    "They aren''t expecting me to appear here, so my first move will be crucial¡ªit can''t be squandered. We need to think this through deeply now...", Hikari added.


    The room fell into a contemtive silence as the gravity of Hikari''s words settled. Everyone understood that the element of surprise was a fleeting advantage, and how effectively Hikari used his initial engagement could very well determine the fate of their efforts.


    ns began to form, focusing on maximizing the impact of Hikari''s entrance to the battlefield, ensuring it would disrupt Sunagakure''s strategies and provide a much-needed advantage to their forces.


    Meanwhile, Hikari mentally reviewed everything he had learned about the developments on this front since the onset of the war.


    He understood that Sunagakure had taken a decisive lead early on, capturing Tanigakure¡ªthe main vige that served as a buffer between the Land of Wind and the Land of Fire.


    From the beginning months of the war, Sunagakure also used Tanigakure as a strategic hotspot andunchpad for operations against Konoha''s forces in the area.


    However, the situation for Konoha''s Uchiha-led Division, under Fugaku''s leadership, would have been even more dire had it not been for significant developments within their ranks.


    Hikari noted that Fugaku and Kiyomi had awakened their Mangekyo Sharingan in response to their nsmen''s heavy losses.


    This newfound power had been crucial, allowing them to halt and temporarily create a stalemate against Sunagakure''s advances.


    It was only a temporary solution, and despite their efforts, Fugaku and Kiyomi failed to pay back Sungakure significantly to reverse the course, let alone take control of Tanigakure.


    After all, they were only two individuals. Additionally, the use of the Mangekyo Sharingan, while powerful, came with severe drawbacks.


    Each use drained them significantly and quickly, temporarily blinding them and leaving them vulnerable in the aftermath. The technique, though formidable, was also extremely taxing on the user''s body and eyesight.


    More rmingly, Hikari knew that the repeated use of the Mangekyo Sharingan could lead to permanent blindness if overused, a side effect that both Kiyomi and Fugaku were likely beginning to experience.


    He suspected they had seen the first signs of this troubling development but had chosen to keep it hidden from him for reasons unknown.


    Hikari resolved to address this issue directly, ''It doesn''t matter; I will still initiate a conversation regarding this with Kiyomiter...''


    Hikari also knew that the Mangekyo Sharingan was a formidable tool designed to deliver powerful yet swiftly depleting bursts of strength. It was based on amazing chakra potency capability but not chakra endurance and vitality.


    This inherent limitation meant that while Fugaku and Kiyomi could cause substantial havoc with their Susanoo and other potent abilities, their effectiveness was inherently time-bound.


    Engaging entire armies meant that despite the initial disruption they could cause, they would quickly exhaust the Mangekyo Sharingan''s energy reserves.


    This vulnerability made them susceptible to being overwhelmed by sheer numbers once their power waned.


    Consequently, their use of the Mangekyo Sharingan was previously strategically reserved only for disrupting smaller enemy squadrons and targeting elite units through ambushes.


    This tactical application ensured they could maximize the impact of their abilities without necessarily overextending themselves into situations where they could be surrounded and outnumbered once their powers ebbed. It also allowed them to keep Suna at bay for a while.


    This tactical limitation also exined why they never attempted a direct assault on Tanigakure, let alone Sunagakure itself.


    The risk of depleting their crucial resources in a prolonged engagement, especially one on the scale of an assault on a fortified vige or against arge army, was too great.


    Their strategy had to focus on gueri tactics and targeted strikes, aiming to destabilize the enemy and create openings forrger strategic gains rather than outright conquest.


    However, over the course of the war, a formidable shinobi from Sunagakure named Pakura had risen dramatically in power.


    Her ascent had shifted the bnce, gradually putting Konoha''s forces on the defensive once again, over time, with her presence and ability to face off against Kiyomi and Fugaku when they were alone.


    Now, it seemed she was also the one personally spearheading Sunagakure''s final push for a decisive invasion into the Land of Fire.


    Hikari assessed her capabilities with a mix of surprising respect and concern, ''Pakura is currently the strongest person in Sunagakure, surpassing even their current Kazekage, Rasa, and by a considerable margin at that. It''s no wonder Rasa wanted to eliminate her like that in the original series...'',


    He mused internally, ''There''s no way he would tolerate her as the current Kage if he cherished his position. After all, he is quite weak; I feel¡ªaround the Quasi-Kage level of strength at most¡ªwhereas she has already probably reached the Middle Kage level...'',


    ''The fact that both were approximately the same age, around 20, only heightened the stakes and the rivalry...'', Hikari recognized that Pakura''s strength and her leadership in the current offensive posed a significant threat.


    Meanwhile, Fugaku nodded in agreement with Hikari''s assessment. He then turned to Hikari for tactical advice, seeking guidance on their next move.


    "What do you rmend, Hikari? Will you set an ambush here?" he asked, looking for a strategic approach to leveraging their current position.


    "Yes, a simple ambush seems to be our best option under the circumstances since they don''t expect us here. We should coordinate with your division to strike from a different angle. When they enter the Land of Fire territory, that''s when we make our move...", He suggested, outlining a n that would use the element of surprise to their advantage.


    By attacking from unexpected directions, they could potentially throw the enemy into disarray, capitalize on the confusion to inflict significant damage, and increase their chances of sessfully winning the fight and ejecting the enemy.


    "We''ll need to position our forces strategically and ensure that everyone is synchronized for the assault. Timing and precision will be crucial... We are lucky we have a reconnaissance advantage on our side now that we have arrived; we could pinpoint where they would being from exactly to position our ambush sessfully in the best way possible..." Hikari added, emphasizing the need for meticulous nning and execution to make the ambush effective.


    After a while of finalizing their strategy, the group swiftly moved to make the necessary preparations for the ambush. Despite their decisiveness and speed of nning, the atmosphere among them remained heavy.


    Each member present was acutely aware of the high stakes and uncertainty ahead. They understood that while their well-nned ambush could significantly increase their chances of sess, it did not guarantee victory.


    As they made their final checks and prepared to move out, there was a silent agreement that they would give their all to secure a favorable oue, understanding the crucial need to protect their territory and weaken their opponent''s momentum.

 138. Puppets and Poison: The Deception of Sunagakure

    138. Puppets and Poison: The Deception of Sunagakure


    Around half a dayter, sometime after the afternoon, a vast army from Sunagakure mobilized, excluding only the forces that had been stationed in the vige and those who were on guard against Iwagakure, their secondary enemy in this Third Shinobi World War, the majority of Sunagakure''s forces boldly left their vige and their main foreign base in Tanigakure. They moved toward the Land of Fire''s territory tounch a crucial invasion.


    Under the meticulous strategy of their Commander in Chief, Pakura¡ªalso known globally to some extent as the "Heat Haze" of Sunagakure, thanks to her renowned strength and aplishments, and locally among civilians and ordinary shinobi as the "Hero of the Hidden Sand"¡ªthey had recently managed to diminish Fugaku''s Uchiha forces significantly.


    This strategic weakening allowed them to venture into foreign territory confidently. It was almost as if they were inviting the enemy''s forces to engage them; otherwise, they would start seizing many civilian territories inside the Land of Fire. Emboldened by their recent sesses and strategic position, they exhibited no fear as they advanced.


    As the Sunagakure forces formally crossed into the borders of the Land of Fire, they moved through andscape that starkly contrasted with their arid homnd. The lush, verdant forests and rolling hills of the Land of Fire stood in sharp contrast to the deserts they had left behind, offering both strategic challenges and opportunities for the invading force.


    Pakura''s strategy was clear and audacious: by initiating this direct invasion and esction, Sunagakure not only demonstrated their military strength but also tested the resolve and preparedness of the Land of Fire''s defenders and forced them to act as soon as possible, not leaving them any chances for strategizing or maneuvering or they would lose too much.


    Pakura, the formidablemander known as "Heat Haze," moved slightly apart from the main army, leading a smaller, more agile group through the terrain of the Land of Fire. But they were all moving in smaller squadrons to maximize mobility and the element of surprise.


    Beside her was Sasori, the second strongest shinobi of their army, also nicknamed the "Sasori of the Red Sand" recently by his enemies and other viges as his masterful use of his shinobi puppets was greatly feared throughout the Third Shinobi World War as he turned the sand red with blood everyone he had gone on missions. But he, known for his puppet mastery rather than his leadership capabilities,cked significantmand experience.


    Consequently, he was not tasked with leading other shinobi but was designated to stay close to Pakura, supporting her directly inbat. Their partnership was strategic; as the strongest and second strongest in their group, their joint appearance from unexpected directions was intended to disorient the enemy and decisively sway the course of battle.


    And soon, the tworge armies shed. The verdantndscape of the Land of Fire, with its dense forests and numerous waterways, became the backdrop for a fierce and tumultuous battle.


    The sh was intense, with both sides deploying a mix of ninjutsu, taijutsu, and strategic maneuvering.


    The sounds of battle echoed through the forest, blending with the natural sounds of rustling leaves and rushing streams.


    Every shadow and thicket potentially hid dangers, making the environment a criticalponent of both sides''bat strategies.


    Meanwhile, Sasori, Pakura, and their small elite unit were still positioned covertly, surveying the battlefield to determine the optimal moment for their own initial strike.


    Engrossed in a close discussion about their strategy, Pakura was caught off guard when Sasoriunched a flurry of threads without warning.


    The suddenness of the attack surprised her; she managed to dodge most of them, but one thread shot up from the ground, grazing her skin barely.


    Pakura''s eyes widened in shock as she initially questioned Sasori, shouting at him in confusion and disbelief.


    But within seconds, a sharp, burning sensation spread through her body, and she realized with horror that she had been poisoned, "Why would you do this..?", She eximed, her voice tinged with betrayal and pain.


    The realization hit her hard¡ªSasori, the famed genius of Sunagakure, a younger shinobi whom she had mentored and trusted, someone she had known for years andpleted many missions with, had turned on her.


    The betrayal was not just personal but strategic, throwing their ns into disarray and jeopardizing their operation.


    Pakura struggled toprehend the reasons behind Sasori''s drastic and treacherous action as she felt the poison''s effects slowly begin to take hold.


    Meanwhile, as Pakura grappled with the sudden betrayal, the dynamics among the Sunagakure shinobi shifted dramatically.


    Shock rippled through the group, but not all were surprised for the same reasons. One of them caught off guard, instinctively murmured,


    "Lord Sasori, why did you do it so soon? We still needed her to deal with Konoha, at least a little bit more, and expend more energy before we agreed to act!",


    Thisment revealed that a faction within the group had been aware of the nned betrayal, suggesting a deeper conspiracy than Pakura had initially realized.


    The realization that they had divided loyalties led to immediate tension. Some of the shinobi looked just as stunned as Pakura, clearly unaware of the plot, while others seemed resigned or evenplicit.


    The atmosphere turned vtile, with those in the dark feeling betrayed and those in the know defensive. Kunai were drawn as former allies turned on each other, unsure of whom to trust.


    Amidst this chaos, Pakura''s shock deepened into heartbreak and fury as she pieced together the implications of Sasori''s actions.


    It became clear that this betrayal was not just the work of a rogue shinobi acting on personal vendetta or ambition.


    The orchestration of such a n¡ªespecially the timing and the specific shinobi involved in her squadron¡ªpointed to amand from someone withprehensive control over strategic decisions and personnel cements. The only person with that level of authority was the current Kazekage, Rasa.


    Pakura felt a surge of betrayal wash over her as she realized that Rasa himself must have sanctioned this attack, possibly viewing her growing power and poprity as a threat to his position.


    This realization poisoned her body and her trust in the leadership she had served under, leaving her to confront the harsh realities of political intrigue and power ys within her own vige.


    As the tension escted among the Sunagakure shinobi, Sasori continued to defend his actions with a chilling calmness,


    "Imagine waiting to defeat Konohapletely next before dealing with her first here. By then, if her endless loyalist shinobi, everywhere around us, found out I was responsible for her demise because it leaked out in some way, not even Rasa could protect me from their retribution - no, maybe he even nned to kill two birds with one stone with that way...",


    "There would be no chance for a clean escape. Instead, the best opportunity for a clean escape is right during this chaos. I''m not an idiot. Besides, with the poison now coursing through her body and this thing...",


    He paused, summoning something with a sly grin, "I have all the confidence I need, haha... So, I feel like I don''t need to wait for her to expend more energy and tire out...",He said, his voiceced with a sinister confidence.


    Then, with a flourish, Sasori revealed his trump card¡ªthe puppet form of the Third Kazekage, a creation shrouded in secrecy and dark arts.


    He had engineered this puppet after eliminating the Third Kazekage himself, a feat unknown to those around him. This puppet, capable of manipting Iron Sand, wasSasori''s deadliest weapon presently.


    The appearance of the Third Kazekage puppet and Sasori''s cold admission sent shockwaves through the ranks.


    It became clear that Sasori had meticulously nned this betrayal, not just executing a fellow shinobi but preparing tobat any immediate bacsh with formidable weaponry.


    It also unmasked him as the perpetrator behind the assassination and desecration of the Third Kazekage.


    The Sunagakure shinobi, including those covertly aligned with Sasori under Rasa''s orders to target Pakura, were stunned.


    None had suspected that Sasori''s betrayal ran so deep or that he dared to turn the Third Kazekage into one of his puppet creations.


    Pakura, despite the poison weakening her, reacted with fury, "You monster!", She yelled, her voiceced with disbelief and outrage.


    "To kill your own Kazekage and manipte us all this entire time! How could you desecrate the leader of our vige and plot against yourrades so casually?!", Her words echoed the shock and horror that rippled through the ranks.


    Even those who had been part of the n to remove her were appalled by the depth of Sasori''s ruthlessness and scheming.


    As he faced the horrified Sunagakure shinobi, Sasori''s voice was eerily calm, revealing his chilling detachment,


    "To bepletely honest, the deaths of my parents years ago left my heart cold, not just towards this vige, but towards everything. Now, the only passion I feel is for my ''art''¡ªthe pursuit of power through puppetry.",


    "For my next masterpiece, I need your formidable abilities and unique kekkei genkai, Pakura. You, alongside the Kazekage, will be eternal works of art.", He dered, a twisted smile ying on his lips as he savored the thought.


    At this revtion, even those aligned with Rasa on the scene understood the grave miscalction they had made, alongside their leader, in trusting Sasori for this mission.


    It became clear that his ambitions were boundless, threatening Pakura, the entire vige, and even Rasa himself.


    Sasori was clearly plotting to turn against them all, too, aiming to be some kind of rebel shinobi powered by his dark pursuits after today.


    Meanwhile, Pakura, though weakened, responded with vehement fury, "You''re a traitor to everything we stand for in Sunagakure! To use your gifts for such morbid ''art''¡ªyou''re not just a monster, Sasori, you''re a scourge on the shinobi world!"


    Sasori''s response was chilling, devoid of any remorse, "Art is eternal, Pakura. Your anger only proves that you cannotprehend the true beauty of my work.", He sneered, his gaze cold and calcting.


    Without further hesitation, Sasori directed the Third Kazekage puppet into action. Armed with its deadly Iron Sand, the infamous puppet moved swiftly and with lethal precision towards Pakura.


    At the same time, it prepared to engage anyone else who dared interfere. The Iron Sand, controlled with meticulous skill, swirled dangerously around, ready to strike at Sasori''smand.


    The Sunagakure shinobi on the scene were now starkly divided into two factions: those who remained loyal to Pakura and what they thought was right, and those who were working directly for the current Kazekage, Rasa, who orchestrated this whole attack from shadows and even provided Sasori with all the rare and valuable ingredients needed to concoct such a poison which in small doses could do so much damage to a shinobi of Pakura''s caliber.


    As the Third Kazekage puppet advanced, the groups eyed each other warily, unsure if their next battle would be with Sasori or amongst themselves.


    The air was thick with tension, each shinobi poised for a fight that had just taken an unexpected and treacherous turn.

 139. Echoes of Betrayal: Pakura’s Fiery Resolve (1)

    139. Echoes of Betrayal: Pakura¡¯s Fiery Resolve (1)


    As the betrayal sunk in, Pakura''s resolve hardened. Overwhelmed by anger toward Sasori, Rasa''s treachery, and her vige''srades'' desertion, she felt a significant shift within herself.


    Setting aside her long-held admiration for the Third Kazekage¡ªan individual she revered since her early days as a shinobi¡ªPakura focused solely on the dire need to defend herself and counterattack against his ''puppet form''.


    Channeling her signature bloodline jutsu of Scorch Release, Pakura summoned the Scorch Style: Scorching Wave.


    With deft movements, she conjured several ming orbs that glowed intensely, resembling small suns.


    These orbs began to orbit around her, creating a formidable barrier of heat and me.


    Determined and precise, Pakura directed the orbs toward the Third Kazekage puppet. Under her skilled control, the orbs moved with lethal intent, ready to strike upon contact.


    As Pakura unleashed her Scorch Style: Scorching Wave, Sasori, unfazed by the disy of power, countered with a chilling deration.


    "All resistance is futile, woman! Bing my human puppet is your only inevitable fate!", He shouted, his voice echoing through the chaotic battlefield as he manipted the Third Kazekage puppet tounch a counterattack.


    Sasori''s favorite human puppet, the Third Kazekage, retained its Kekkei Genkai: Ma Release. This ability allowed Sasori ess to the formidable Iron Sand techniques, which he had enhanced further with his deadly poison.


    Iron Sand, the most feared weapon in Sunagakure''s history and developed by the Third Kazekage himself, consisted of refined iron powder that could be shaped into various weapons and controlled through electromaic fields.


    With precise and calcted movements, Sasorimanded the Iron Sand to swirl around Pakura, forming an array of lethal forms.


    The sand morphed intorge, sweeping structures and smaller, bullet-like particles aimed directly at her, each grain potentiated with poison for maximum lethality.


    Sasori utilized the Iron Sand''s versatility to its fullest, creating multiple striking branches designed to corner Pakura and cut off her avenues of escape.


    His intention was clear: to overwhelm Pakura''s defenses and capture her for his most valuable, human-type puppets collection.


    Sasori regarded his human puppets as the pinnacle of his art, embodying the most potent form of his craft.


    These puppets, uniquely crafted from human bodies, were the product of a technique he developed¡ªa technique he had mastered after years of relentless practice and refinement in puppetry.


    The process of creating a human puppet was meticulous and gruesome. Sasori first began by surgically removing the body''s organs and thoroughly cleansing it of any blood.


    He then treated the corpse with a special preservative, theposition of which remained a closely guarded secret, ensuring the body would not decay over time.


    The final step involved outfitting the preserved body with an array of weapons and defenses, transforming it into a formidable tool of warfare.


    These human puppets were distinct in their ability to retain the use of chakra and any kekkei genkai the original person possessed, making them incredibly valuable on the battlefield, especially if they were made of bloodline-holder bodies like Pakura''s.


    This ability not only made them lethalbatants but also allowed Sasori to wield the unique powers of his defeated enemies against other prospective enemies in the future.


    Refusing to sumb to despair, Pakura channeled a surge of chakra into her Scorch Style: Scorching Wave. The ming orbs that had previously been small and manageable now grew exponentially in size.


    With fierce determination, she pushed more chakra into her technique, expanding the orbs until they resembledrger suns, radiating intense heat.


    As these enhanced orbs spun rapidly around her, they encountered the iing Iron Sand.


    The intense heat from the Scorching Wave began to interact with the metallic onught, causing the iron particles to heat up to a melting point.


    The formidable Iron Sand that Sasori wielded gradually started to lose its form, disintegrating under the overwhelming heat of Pakura''s attack.


    The battlefield lit up with the glow of melting iron, showcasing a desperate yet spectacr sh of techniques.


    Sasori watched, slightly taken aback by Pakura''s resurgence of power. He hadn''t anticipated such a formidable disy of strength, especially after she had been poisoned by what he considered his most powerful poison yet.


    ''It must be because I only managed to catch her with one thread initially, so the dose she received was minimal. It will take more time for the poison to incapacitate her fully...'',


    He reasoned internally, his eyes fixed on the scene that now resembled a giant smelting furnace, with intense heat melting away his Iron Sand.


    Amidst the chaos, the Sunagakure shinobi on the battlefield reacted swiftly to the escting danger.


    The intense heat and the potential threat of being caught in the crossfire prompted them to scatter, retreating from the immediate area of effect.


    As they moved to safer distances, the divisions within their ranks became more pronounced.


    The battlefield split into two distinct camps, each side ready to continue the fight under the looming specter of internal conflict and mistrust.


    Back at the heart of the conflict, Sasori wasted no time escting his tactics. With a series of swift hand seals, he summoned an array of additional ''ordinary'' puppets from his extensive collection.


    Each puppet, a masterwork of his craft, moved with lethal precision, orchestrated to exploit any potential gap in Pakura''s defenses.


    Sasori skillfully maneuvered his puppets tounch a multi-directional assault. Some attacked from the air, diving down like birds of prey, while others surged forward across the ground, their movements stealthy and unpredictable.


    These puppets weren''t just weapons of brute force but also carriers of Sasori''s potent poison, designed to further debilitate Pakura.


    Each strike, whether connected or not, disoriented her and eroded her reserves of strength and focus.


    Simultaneously, Sasori was a flurry of motion on the battlefield, darting and weaving with the agility that belied his usual puppeteer''s stance.


    He was ying a waiting game¡ªdodging attacks and maintaining distance, confident in the knowledge that time was on his side.


    As long as he could keep Pakura engaged and avoid her deadly scorching attacks, the poison already coursing through her veins would continue to weaken her.


    Every moment that passed was a moment closer to victory for Sasori. His eyes, ever calcting, watched Pakura''s every move, looking for signs of the poison''s progression, knowing that once it fully took hold, the battle would decisively turn in his favor.


    However, as Pakura unleashed her Scorch Release to its current limits, Sasori found that his usual attacks were less effective than ever against her.


    The basic materials used in many of his puppets and projectiles were vulnerable to the intense heat generated by her jutsu, which melted them away effortlessly even without touching it directly, just due to the sheer heat her jutsu was generating in therge area, forcing even Sasori to constantly move back and avoid being melted alive from a distance.


    Yet, despite her external sess in neutralizing his attacks and pushing him back, Pakura battled internal despair, acutely aware of the poison weakening her with every passing second and Sasori''s true game n.


    She leveraged the terrain to her advantage, vaporizing the moisture within the soil to disrupt the battlefield, turning it into a cloud of steam that added chaos to the melee.


    Her scorching attacks¡ªbolts, streams, and waves of intense heat¡ªwere hurled towards Sasori. However, as her strength waned, her aim faltered; her attacks, though powerful, started missing Sasori by mere inches as her consciousness also blurred.


    "Art is eternal, Pakura. Your mes may melt metal, but they cannot extinguish the legacy I will create. Bing a masterpiece is your destiny...", Sasori rejoiced, seeing her stumble more and more.


    "I am no one''s puppet! You''ve twisted your talent into something grotesque, but I will not fall victim to your delusions!", Pakura retorted while sweating hard and catching a short breath.


    "Delusions? This is the ultimate form of art¡ªpreserving strength forever. You should feel honored to be part of something greater than yourself.",


    He shouted from a distance, getting increasingly excited as he felt that the moment of adding her to his ''collection'' was nearing, and he could envision it.


    "Honor? There''s no honor in your methods. You betray your vige, yourrades... You betray everything a shinobi stands for! I will kill you, Sasori!", Pakura gritted her teeth in indignation, her ordinarily youthful and attractive face growing tired, her eyesight blurry.


    Scorch Release, an advanced nature transformation thatbines fire and wind chakra, was notably effective due to its enhanced mobility over traditional fire.


    Its brighter mes, with a slightly reddish tinge, were designed for precision and devastation.


    Under normal circumstances, Pakura''s control over this jutsu was impable, but the poison''s effect increasingly impaired her abilities.


    Recognizing the need topensate for her diminishing precision, Pakura began to focus on creating attacks with a wider area of effect.


    These explosive techniques burst intorge mes, designed to vaporize everything within reach, leaving little room for Sasori to escape.


    In response, Sasori quickly adapted. Utilizing the Third Kazekage''s Ma Release, he ingeniously used spare metal debris to create a makeshift tform, propelling himself high into the air to avoid the deadly heat below.


    However, this maneuver also posed a significant risk. Elevating himself made him more visible to other Sunagakure shinobi engaged in nearby battles against Konoha forces.


    Sasori was forced to hover lower than he would have preferred to minimize this exposure, inadvertently giving Pakura a chance to still target him, albeit with less precision than before.


    This ongoing cat-and-mouse game showcased their prowess and the high stakes of their duel as each strived to outmaneuver the other amidst the wider chaos of the battlefield.

 140. Echoes of Betrayal: Pakura’s Fiery Resolve (2)

    140. Echoes of Betrayal: Pakura¡¯s Fiery Resolve (2)


    "Sasori! Are you so afraid to face me on equal ground? Or does the great ''artist'' hide behind his creations because he knows he''s no match for a true shinobi?",


    Her words were calcted, designed to prick at Sasori''s pride and goad him into lowering his altitude.


    Pakura hoped that by provoking his ego, she mightpel him toe close enough for her tounch one final, decisive attack.


    As she spoke, she steadied herself, gathering what remained of her chakra, ready to unleash it the moment her adversary made the mistake ofing within range.


    Visible signs of her deteriorating condition manifested on her body by this time; her skin, normally vibrant and flushed with the heat of battle, paled and grew mmy.


    Sweat beaded on her forehead, not just from the exertion but also from the toxin coursing through her veins, undermining her strength.


    Hovering high above the scorched battlefield, Sasori heard Pakura''s taunt but was not swayed by her provocation. His voice, tinged with a cold, mocking undertone, drifted down to her from above,


    "You mistake caution for fear, Pakura. An artist must not rush; every stroke must be deliberate, every cement precise.",


    "Why should I descend when I have the perfect vantage point to observe¡ªand manipte¡ªthe unfolding of my masterpiece?",


    He maneuvered the Third Kazekage puppet with renewed focus, the Iron Sand swirling dangerously as he prepared another attack slowly.


    This time, it would be an endless barrage of maically manipted and elerated iron projectiles, extremely fast and sharp, using the naturalws of physics and chakra.


    It was the Third Kazekage''s strongest move once he was alive. However, this kind of human puppet couldn''t reach the levels of execution that the real owners of those bodies had when they were alive, and even Sasori had to admit that.


    His eyes gleamed with a calcted coldness as he observed Pakura''s weakened state. "Your end will be a testament to my art, Pakura. You will be immortalized not as a victor but as a permanent reminder of my superiority and best piece so far."


    Meanwhile, Pakura''s frustration mounted as she watched Sasori''s distant, smug expression. Gritting her teeth in anger, she cursed her limitations.


    In this crucial moment, theck of a long-range attack within her repertoire of kekkei genkai techniques felt like a ring omission.


    She regretted not having developed or mastered any techniques that could reach Sasori at his current altitude, which would have allowed her to strike effectively from a distance.


    However, despite her current predicament, Pakura also understood deep down that her limitations weren''t entirely her fault, including this one.


    She felt like she had already done everything she could, trained hard, and given herst atoms of strength in developing this kekkei genkai to the utmost that she could, especially recently after Third Shinobi started.


    As thest known inheritor of the Scorch Release, she had no mentors or family from whom she could learn more about her bloodline and potential new techniques externally as she was just an orphan born and raised in the Sunagakure Orphanage, and her unique abilities emerged from a long-dormant gene of some of her unknown ancestors as she was told.


    The more ''official'' bearers of this kekkei genkai, including the n that this bloodline was mainly associated with, had long since perished, leaving her with no surname and also leaving her to navigate those powers, whether they were a gift or a curse, all alone from the very beginning without any help.


    The Scorch Release was formidable, one of the strongest powers in the Land of Wind and the Sunagakure; its users could vaporize virtually anything.


    Its chakra was so intense that it could easily dry up the human body, leaving nothing but withered husks or charred bones.


    In warfare, her abilities had been leveraged to alterndscapes, turning fertile fields into tinder ready for the mes.


    Such devastating applications earned Scorch Release users a fearsome reputation marked by a blend of awe and dread.


    In the Land of Wind, where this kekkei genkai originated, old superstitions med these bloodline holders for the omnipresent desert''s endless expansion and the harshness of the desert sun people experienced.


    This legacy of fear and power led to eventual persecution from the vigers of Sunagakure, who either feared or coveted her abilities.


    However, despite her challenging background, Pakura had felt a sense of belonging in Sunagakure after graduating from the ninja academy.


    Recognized early for her talents and potential, she was seemingly fully integrated into the vigemunity, receiving the same rights and privileges as her fellow shinobi, at least in her impression, nowadays even respected by many vigers and shinobi as their new "hero" and hope for changing their fate.


    And she was naively basking in all of that glory, not realizing what was happening behind the curtains.


    This eptance at face value also only fueled her dedication to the vige''s cause, as she often ced its needs above her own.


    She was even prepared toy down her life for Sunagakure, believing deeply in their support and eptance of her, even up until a few minutes ago.


    However, the recent revtions shook her to the core. Learning that the vige leadership still viewed her as just another disposable weapon, much like her predecessors, was a profound betrayal.


    It cast a stark new light on her life, revealing that the eptance she cherished might have been conditional, based solely on her usefulness rather than genuine respect for her as an individual.


    The fact that she was targeted for elimination the moment she was perceived as a threat, despite having no ambitions for leadership, underscored this cruel reality.


    As she confronted Sasori, these painful truths ignited a fierce determination within her. The despair mingled with a resolute desire to demonstrate her value beyond mere utility.


    She was more than a weapon; she was a formidable shinobi with her own will and identity.


    Pakura''s resolve hardened as she prepared to unleash the full might of her kekkei genkai. This wasn''t just about survival anymore¡ªit was about defiance.


    She was ready to stand against those who sought to use her and avenge the betrayal of those she had once trusted.


    At this moment, Pakura was not just fighting Sasori; she was battling for her dignity and the right to be seen as more than just a tool of war and a pawn of the vige''s nobility like Rasa.


    However, just as Pakura tapped into that deeper, more furious power from her bloodline, feeling it awaken and surge within her like never before, her body began to betray her.


    The profound breakthrough in her bloodline''s innate limits, which should have been her ultimate weapon, arrived at a cruel time.


    The poison in her veins reacted violently, all of that fateful transformation,ing straight from her blood and soul now weakened her temporarily further instead of empowering her and allowing her to achieve victory right away.


    Her eyelids grew heavy, and she was wracked with pain that seemed to echo through her very being. Despite the agony, Pakura''s spirit refused to yield.


    She sensed the potential for a devastating ranged attack burgeoning within her, a power that could potentially obliterate Sasori if she could only harness it for a few more seconds.


    Yet, as her strength surged, it paradoxically rendered her even more vulnerable, a side effect of the poison exacerbating her body''s rebellion against her will.


    Sasori, ever observant and ruthlessly efficient, saw his opportunity in her moment of weakness and the extraordinary danger that threatened his own life at that moment.


    So, he urgentlyunched a blindingly fast electromaicallyunched attack using those iron projectiles.


    The projectiles tore through the wind, their speed so great that not even the residual heat from Pakura''s earlier attacks could melt them in time.


    As the deadly shards closed in, Pakura''s thoughts raced, ''Is this really the end now? Damn, why like this... I don''t want to die yet... Not while Sunagakure is still led by such people...'',


    Her indignation at the betrayal mixed with a crushing sense of inevitability. She had fought to reshape her destiny, attempt to change the Sunagakure next, and prove her worth beyond being a weapon, yet as the iron shards approached, she felt a profound despair.


    Pakura braced for the impact, her resolve unwavering even in the face of death. She clung to her determination, hoping against all odds for a chance to turn the tide, to strike back against the injustice that had marred her life and the vige she had once proudly served.


    Sasori''s voice, tinged with an unusual hint of respect at this time, carried clearly across the battlefield as he addressed Pakura,


    "Even I must concede, Pakura, you are truly remarkable. A female shinobi of your caliber appears but once in a generation. Your strength rivals the Third Kazekage''s, yet you are much younger than he was when I ended him. Given your potential, I have no doubt you could have even surpassed him in power eventually, especially after seeing this right now."


    He paused, his tone shifting back to his usual cold, calcting demeanor, "It would have been interesting to see the changes you might have brought to Sunagakure. But turning you into my personal puppet... that intrigues me more.",


    "And honestly, with your previous personality, dealing with Rasa and his circle of nobles was never in your cards. You''ve always been too naive, Pakura. Only those like me, who truly realize the only truth that nothing really matters outside of your own desires, in my case, my art, truly thrive in this world."


    However, Sasori''s final words fell into deft areas, as Pakura felt the imminent approach of death. The projectiles were already piercing the space before her, ready to strike, muting all the other sounds with the wind-howling buzzing in her ears.


    In this fleeting moment, her life seemed to hang delicately in bnce. Fear of the unknown crept in, mixed with a surge of regret for the future she would never see and the changes she could have brought to Sunagakure with this newfound rising power and her personal revtions at thisst moment,


    She could''ve brought sanctuary to all of the civilian shinobi of this vige who always respected her greatly and were in the same plight as her, constantly used as tools by the Kazekage n mainly and of all the other minor nobles.


    Yet, amidst this fear, Pakura felt a stubborn spark of defiance. She had lived as a devoted shinobi and would face her end with the same unyielding spirit.


    There was bitterness, too, at the betrayal of her vige¡ªa ce she had served with loyalty, now ''turned against her'' figuratively.


    As the cold iron neared, her resolve hardened. If this was her end, she would meet it head-on, her gaze steady and her heart steadfast, embodying the strength of her kekkei genkai to thest. Yet, her final thoughts wereced with anguish at her vige and the world.


    However, as the deadly shards hovered mere inches away from Pakura, ready to deliver their fatal blow, an unexpected turn of events unfolded.


    A sudden presence materialized right behind her, and inexplicably, the iron projectiles lost all momentum and dropped harmlessly to the ground like discarded scrap metal in the next second.


    Startled and confused, Pakura instinctively turned her head to identify her unexpected savior.


    Standing there was a male teen, his presence both calm and imposing. He wore a simple, unusual, dark blue traditional kimono, contrasting sharply with the chaos around them.


    A Konoha headband was loosely attached to his waist. His hair was as dark as his attire, but his eyes caught her attention¡ªthey were an uncharacteristic, stark white, a notable trait of a certain bloodline-holding n in another great shinobi vige they were at war with now.


    In a moment of stunned realization, Pakura gasped, her voice a mix of strange hope and disbelief, "H-Hikari Hyuga!"


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 141. The Crucial Save: Hikari and Pakura’s Encounter

    141. The Crucial Save: Hikari and Pakura¡¯s Encounter


    Hikari took a moment to assess Pakura''s condition, noting the severe toll the poison had taken on her.


    Externally, her appearance was disheveled from the intensebat; beads of sweat mingled with dirt on her face, highlighting her physical strain.


    Her usually vibrant green hair, tied neatly in a bun atop her head and ented with a hair needle, was now slightly unraveled, with strands escaping to frame her face.


    The orange tips of her hair, which usually added a fiery contrast, now seemed dim under the battlefield''s harsh light.


    Despite the evident fatigue and the pallor setting into her skin as the poison sapped her strength, there was still a striking resilience in her hazel eyes.


    They burned with determination and a flicker of hope at his sudden arrival. Herbat attire, a sleeveless, backless top paired with short, tight pants, was practical yet revealed the scars and wear of battle, each mark telling a story of survival and defiance.


    Hikari couldn''t help but notice that even in this dire, chaotic moment, Pakura''s grace and attractiveness were undeniable, perhaps even more so in this state.


    The way she held herself, the unwavering strength in her gaze, and even her battle-worn appearance only added to her captivating presence on the battlefield.


    This acknowledgment was brief, as his focus was immediately required to address her critical condition and counter the ongoing threat.


    However, his recognition of her resilience and striking appearance despite the circumstances left a deep impression on him as he prepared to intervene further.


    With a swift activation of his Byakugan, Hikari quickly then gauged the internal state of Pakura''s body up close.


    His eyes, capable of seeing the intricate details of the chakra pathway system, revealed the extent of the damage inflicted by the poison already.


    He observed casually for a few moments, his expression serious, before addressing her condition directly.


    "You''re in much worse shape than I anticipated and than it is to be expected from your outward appearance...",


    Hikari began his tone even but filled with a slightly respectful acknowledgment of her resilience.


    "It''s very miraculous that you''ve managed to withstand this pain without sumbing to unconsciousness many times over by now. Your willpower is trulymendable.",


    "Your entire chakra pathway system is very jeopardized already, and it appears there''s also been atent bloodline awakening, likely triggered by the extreme stimtion of this situation here. This has introduced more power into an alreadypromised system.",


    "Saving you will be quite challenging... not to mention that I''m not quite a medical ninja myself, and you have at most a few minutes left to live by this point..." he admitted, his expression calm.


    "I can''t make any promises, but I''m willing to try if you''ll ept my help. First, however, let me deal with this clown and think of your answer until then.",


    "You should be able to guess my intentions probably, so I don''t think I need to say anymore...",


    He added, shifting his gaze towards Sasori, ready to take action against the puppet master who had caused so much chaos.


    Sasori reacted to Hikari''s intervention immediately and was filled with venomous anger.


    His ns to im Pakura as his ultimate puppet¡ªa masterpiece that would crown his collection¡ªhad been abruptly disrupted, and the realization sparked a fierce outburst.


    "Interfering bastard!", Sasori snapped, his voiceced with frustration and malice, "Do you realize what you''ve done?",


    "Pakura was to be the pinnacle of my collection, the most powerful human puppet I would have ever created, and the one I''ve desired most in my career as an artist so far!",


    His eyes narrowed as he recognized the neer, and his tone shifted from anger to begrudging respect as he came closer, mixed with annoyance, "So, you are Hikari Hyuga, the recently famous prodigy. I''ve heard of your exploits...",


    Sasori continued, his gaze menacing, "But you''re foolish if you think you can simply step in and undo my work. I''ve invested too much in this and won''t let you or anyone else stand in the way of my art." ,


    This disruption thwarted his immediate ns and challenged his identity and life''s work as a master puppeteer.


    "Don''t think that I''m afraid of you just because you killed that ancient fossil of the Third Mizukage no one heard from in decades. Step back right now!", Sasori''s voice was tinged with defiance as he readied himself for another attack.


    His posture stiffened, and his fingers twitched near the chakra threads that controlled his puppet arsenal, signaling his readiness to escte the confrontation.


    The puppet master''s eyes burned with a cold intensity, his gaze fixed on Hikari. Each word was punctuated by the subtle movements of his puppets, which shifted menacingly in the background, preparing to spring into action at hismand.


    Hikari''s response to Sasori''s outburst was cool and dismissive, a stark contrast to the puppet master''s heated words,


    "You overestimate your importance," Hikari retorted calmly, his expression betraying none of the tension of the moment. His clear and focused eyes conveyed a quiet confidence.


    With that, Hikari took a deep breath, grounding himself with the precision of a seasoned fighter. He adopted the Gentle Fist stance from a surprisingly long distance in a move that was atypical for the Hyuga style.


    As he settled into his stance, more fluid than usual, the air around him seemed to thrum with potential energy, a quiet warning of the controlled power he was about to unleash.


    His demeanor reflected someone who calcted every move and was ready to dismantle Sasori''s threats with minimal effort.


    Meanwhile, Pakura also watched Hikari assume his stance and this entire development, with curiosity mixed with a critical evaluation of his capabilities.


    Known as the "Byakugan Sage" and often touted as the strongest in the history of the Hyuga n, Hikari''s reputation had reached even the ears of his enemies around the globe by this point.


    They even had quite a simr level of reputation globally at this point. So, Pakura found herself wondering if he truly lived up to these formidable titles and to what extent, especially now as he prepared to confront Sasori.


    Additionally, epting Hikari''s earlier offer to try and save her somehow from this poison came easily to Pakura.


    In the face of death, her desire to survive had intensified more than ever before, driving her to grasp any lifeline thrown her way, even if it came from a prominent figure of their current main adversary, Konoha.


    She understood that Hikari''s intervention likely wasn''t without self-interest¡ªperhaps tied to strategic goals regarding Sunagakure itself.


    But Pakura was no fool; she recognized theyers of shinobi politics and was prepared to navigate them for her survival.


    Her recent betrayal had profoundly shifted her perspective on loyalty and ethics. The willingness to negotiateter with Hikari, a key figure from a rival vige, significantly changed her worldview.


    This openness directly resulted from the deceit she had experienced, which had turned her moral code and allegiances upside down.


    Yet, Pakura maintained a clear boundary. She was ready to discuss terms for her cooperation, but she resolved not to act against the broader interests of Sunagakure''s people.


    However, the current vige leadership was a different matter. Having orchestrated an attempt on her life, they were no longer within her circle of loyalty.


    If Hikari proposed actions that might undermine those leaders, Pakura was more than willing to consider them.


    As Pakura watched Hikari finalizing his move, her mind suddenly raced with more questions about his sudden arrival,


    ''How did he even appear here so suddenly? Could it mean he brought reinforcements from his previous front to aid their called Uchiha n in repelling our invasion?'', She pondered, trying to piece together the strategic implications of his presence.


    Hikari had recently been instrumental in defeating Kirigakure, which raised further questions for Pakura,


    ''How did he manage to stabilize the situation there so quickly that he could leave without concern?'', She wondered.


    Securing a defeated front typically required time to build trust, formalize agreements, and establish logistical frameworks. The swift transition suggested something more than a simple military victory.


    Pakura''s thoughts drifted to the rumors of a new, young female Mizukage in Kirigakure. This piece of information seemed to connect some dots,


    ''Is it possible that Hikari reached a deeper, perhaps personal agreement with the new leadership in Kirigakure? And now, is he attempting a simr operation here with me and Sunagakure?'' She spected, wondering how she would respond if that were the case.


    However, she then remembered that it was questionable whether he would be able to save her next.


    She understood her current body''s hopeless situations more than anyone else. She didn''t need to hear his previous grim words to understand that.


    But, as these thoughts coalesced, Pakura''s understanding of the situation deepened.


    She recognized that Hikari''s presence might signify a significant shift in the immediate battle and therger geopoliticalndscape involving Sunagakure and potentially other hidden viges.


    This realization sharpened her focus on the negotiations toe, aware that the stakes might be higher than she initially anticipated.


    It all hinted at a broader, moreplex n involving military might and political maniption.


    Initially, she considered that these tactics might align with a broader Konoha strategy aimed at discreetly controlling other viges. However, a sudden realization struck her, shifting her perspective dramatically.


    ''No...'', She thought abruptly, her instincts reacting to the recent memory of Hikari''s cold, calcting gaze.


    This wasn''t just a Konoha-wide strategy; this was probably Hikari''s personal scheme, crafted for his own gain.


    The realization that his ns could be independent of, or even contrary to, official Konoha policies made him all the more enigmatic and daunting in her mind despite his younger age.

 142. Against the Wind: Sasori’s Desperate Escape

    142. Against the Wind: Sasori¡¯s Desperate Escape


    "I''m sorry it took this long, but it will be over in an instant now...", Hikari suddenly said calmly to Pakura behind him, who was still experiencing an increasing amount of pain.


    "It''s because I''m using this move for the first time against someone today. This guy thinks that distance can give him some advantage against me, despite me being so much more powerful than him, just due to me being a Hyuga, but I''m obviously not an average one...",


    With a deep exhale, Hikari shifted into a fluid and sharply precise stance. His feet nted firmly on the ground, and he channeled his chakra with meticulous control.


    His hands moved with deliberate grace and rhythm, signaling the unleashing of a new and slightly more powerful technique in his vast arsenal: utilizing Wind and natural energy, which was also especially fit for this asion.


    Hikari''s stance only intensified as he prepared to unleash his formidable technique, one specifically crafted to leverage the vast power disparity between him and impress Pakura further for his uing ns. "Senjutsu: Infinite Serpent Gale..." he announced quietly.


    Thus, thousands of wind currents burst forth from his outstretched arms, each swirling and undting like serpents.


    These were not literal snakes but currents of wind shaped by chakra, designed to mimic serpents'' sinuous, relentless motion as they raced toward their target.


    The currents grewrger and more forceful with distance, a deliberate feature of the jutsu to maximize impact upon reaching Sasori.


    As the thousands of wind ''serpents'' converged on their target, their collective forcebined to create a massive, enveloping storm.


    This storm was relentless and all-consuming, designed to obliterate Sasori in an instant, leaving no room for escape or defense.


    As the relentless wave of wind currents surged toward him, Sasori''s face registered a mix of shock and desperation.


    The sheer scale and intensity of Hikari''s attack¡ªthousands of wind currents expanding and strengthening as they traveled¡ªleft him momentarily stunned.


    The realization that he was facing a potentially fatal onught jolted him into action before he thought about anything else.


    Scrambling to counter the imminent threat, Sasori channeled everyst reserve of his chakra to propel himself upward, attempting to gain altitude and evade the deadly wind serpents. He did not care if anyone saw him anymore.


    Simultaneously, he summoned a massive wall of Iron Sand, manipting it into a thick shield behind him in a desperate bid to block the attack.


    However, the wind currents unleashed by Hikari were no ordinary gusts. They tore through the Iron Sand barrier with terrifying ease, disintegrating the metal as if it were mere paper.


    The wind''s eerie, almost supernatural appearance and ability to shred through his defenses struck Sasori with deep fear.


    As the winds howled closer, carrying with them the inevitability of death, Sasori felt a chill that went beyond physical danger.


    It was the chilling realization of his mortality, the stark understanding of what it might feel like to face one''s end.


    So, in a final, desperate bid to survive, Sasori tapped into thest vestiges of his energy. With grim determination, he coated his entire body in a thickyer of iron, transforming himself into a metallic fortress, the Third Kazge''s puppet body hanging closely to him.


    This was more than just a defensive maneuver¡ªit was a testament to his resolve to live and continue pursuing what he considered an eternal art.


    Channeling his remaining chakra, Sasori used the maic properties of the Iron Sand to catapult himself far into the distance, as far away as possible, hurtling through the air like a human cannonball.


    His body was battered and bruised, a testament to the ferocity of Hikari''s attack, and uncertainty clouded his mind as he flew.


    He didn''t know if he would survive thending or the injuries he had sustained, but his will to live pushed him to escape.


    As he sailed through the sky, Sasori''s emotions churned tumultuously. He felt defeated, having been overpowered and outmatched in a way he had never experienced before. But alongside the sting of defeat was a burning indignation.


    Hatred toward Hikari simmered within him, fueling a deep-seated desire for revenge. In Sasori''s view, Hikari hadn''t just thwarted his ns¡ªhe had stolen what Sasori considered his ultimate art, the pinnacle of his life''s work.


    This mix of defeat and hatred solidified Hikari as his primary nemesis. Even in the midst of escape and survival, Sasori''s mind began to plot and n.


    If he lived through this, he would need to rethink his strategies to reim his art and exact vengeance on the Hyuga prodigy who had dared to challenge and surpass him.


    Hikari, meanwhile, still standing on the ground next to Pakura, surveyed the aftermath of his devastating attack.


    Thendscape around them bore the scars of his power: trees uprooted, rocks disced, and even sections of mountains altered.


    Despite the destruction, his focus remained sharp as he used his Byakugan to track Sasori''s retreat with pinpoint uracy.


    Yet, his gaze was clearly dismissive¡ªas if Sasori were nothing more than an insignificant insect escaping his notice.


    "I don''t have time to chase him now...", Hikari murmured, his voice calm and analytical. His eyes, still peering through the vastndscape with their enhanced vision, followed Sasori''s trajectory until he made a decision.


    ''I need to start the operation on Pakura''s body as soon as possible if I want to save her. She is far more critical of my ns than mindlessly chasing after a character of such little importance...'',


    He nced once more in the direction Sasori had fled, a final thought crossing his mind: "If he survives this, then I guess it''s his good luck."


    In Hikari''s overall casual assessment, Sasori''s current level of power didn''t even quite reach the heights of a Kage-level shinobi, or it was somewhere on the edges of it.


    He noted that Sasoricked his own transformed humanoid puppet body, the "core," and the array of additional tricks and puppets that had defined him in the original series.


    However, Hikari briefly mentally acknowledged that Sasori had managed to enhance the Third Kazekage''s maic abilities beyond what was previously demonstrated in the original work for some reason.


    Perhaps a consequence of some unforeseen ripple effect from Hikari''s own interventions in this timeline. A distant butterfly effect altered events subtly yet significantly in this part of the world too, as in many other ces.


    Yet, despite these enhancements, Hikari remainedrgely unimpressed by Sasori''s threat level for the future.


    Meanwhile, Pakura also silently watched Hikari''s adept handling of his technique the entire time. Sasori''s subsequent humiliating defeat deepened her respect for his abilities.


    The realization that the rumors about his prowess were indeed urate affirmed her initial impressions and added ayer of admiration.


    However, despite this newfound additional respect, Pakura''s seasoned shinobi instincts kicked in, prompting her topare her capabilities to Hikari''s disy immediately.


    She acknowledged that while she could execute moves of simr potency, her techniques were more effective at close range¡ªa limitation she had always recognized in herbat.


    So, the fact that Hikari, a member of the Hyuga n, which was traditionally known for close-rangebat, had demonstrated such a powerful long-range attack and overtook her in that regard was both surprising and impressive to her.


    Additionally, her current vulnerability due to Sasori''s sneaking poisoning frustrated her; on any ordinary day, she was confident in her ability to neutralize Sasori with minimal effort, using just the residual heat effects of her typical techniques to melt him alive even before he managed to try and fly high in the air, thanks to the vast difference in power between them on the same level that Hikari also wielded over him.


    The poisoning had curbed her abilities, preventing her from demonstrating her full power, which she felt had also evolved significantly thanks to those strange new sensations pulsing through her bloodline at this time.


    She presently felt a profound connection with her bloodline abilities, which seemed to be evolving in response to the extreme stress and danger she faced.


    The sensations pulsing through her suggested that she was on the cusp of essing even more formidable powers than those Hikari had disyed.


    Unfortunately, the debilitating effects of Sasori''s poisonplicated this transformation, impeding her ability to harness or even understand these emerging capabilities fully.


    Nheless, what truly stood out to Pakura during Hikari''s disy was not just the raw power of his technique but its remarkable flexibility.


    Hikari''s mastery and intimate connection over the Wind Release element impressed her deeply, especially considering that he seemed to surpass even the most skilled shinobi from her homnd, the Land of Wind, known for their wind elemental affinity and prowess.


    The way Hikari integrated the Hyuga n''s taijutsu with the wind element¡ªand possibly that mysterious natural energy rumored to enhance his abilities¡ªsuggested a deeper, more innovative level of skill.


    The sheer potency of his attack hinted that it was fueled by more than mere wind; an additional, potent force, such as that kind of rumored elusive energy, was at y.


    This level of skill indicated that what she had witnessed was likely just a fraction of Hikari''s true capabilities.


    So, her respect for Hikari transformed into a more profound regard, and she recognized him as a potentially vital part of her recovery process.


    The hope that he could assist in curing her condition became intertwined with her admiration for his innovative approach to ninjutsu.


    Hikari''s Byakugan diligently monitored the battlefield, capturing every movement as Konoha and Sunagakure''s forces shed.


    The significant disruption caused by his powerful technique had inevitably drawn attention.


    He noticed multiple shinobi converging toward their location, clearly alerted by the massive disy of his jutsu.


    Understanding the immediate need for discretion with Pakura in her fragile state, Hikari quickly made a decision.


    He turned to Pakura, his tone softer and more reassuring than before, signaling his protective intent.


    "Pakura-san, there are many shinobiing our way. The next few minutes will be crucial if you want to survive this ordeal. We need to move to a more secluded location right away if that''s fine with you. "


    Pakura''s expression paused momentarily as if realizing only now the inevitable attention their presence would draw due to the scale of Hikari''s previous jutsu.


    As Hikari suggested moving to a more secluded location, she began to speak confusedly, aware of her inability to move that quickly now, if at all,


    "But I can''t mo¡ª" she started, but her voice trailed off quickly as she caught the implication in Hikari''s words.


    A slight widening of her eyes conveyed her realization that he intended to physically carry her on himself next to a more secure location.


    Noticing her understanding, Hikari offered a small, knowing, and reassuring smile for some reason first whilst his gaze then briefly and covertly admired her petite and enchanting, battle-worn figure below, at the same time, before he crouched down to lift her up quickly.


    He then moved with efficiency, understanding the urgency of their situation above all else.


    As Hikari scooped her up, Pakura opened her mouth instinctively as if to object, likely out of a mix of woman''s modesty and her pride as a shinobi.


    However, seeing the determination in Hikari''s eyes and recognizing the urgency of their situation, she restrained herself well.


    Instead of speaking, she silently acquiesced, understanding that the practicality of their swift evacuation far outweighed any personal barrier or hesitation that she might feel.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 143. A Delicate Balance: Pakura’s Trust in Hikari

    143. A Delicate Bnce: Pakura¡¯s Trust in Hikari


    As Pakura settled securely onto Hikari''s broad back, the two of them moved swiftly through the woods and the uneven terrain.


    The smooth fabric of his traditional robes brushed against her skin, offering an unexpected sense of calm amidst the storm raging within her.


    The gentle touch of the material provided a rare reprieve, a fleetingfort against the backdrop of her internal chaos and the harrowing events that had unfolded.


    She couldn''t help but notice something surprising: despite being at least five years her junior, Hikari''s physique was that of a fully grown adult.


    His steady frame provided stability and an unexpected ease, allowing her to adjust to his back without difort.


    Having just endured profound betrayals at the hands of her own vige, Pakura could never have imagined finding even a shred of sce with someone from Konoha¡ªa vige she had long considered a sworn enemy.


    And yet, here she was, feeling an unanticipated sense of safety and trust in the presence of Hikari Hyuga, a figure she had been taught to see as a threat.


    As he carried her, Hikari was equally aware of her presence. The contours of her body¡ªher surprising softness juxtaposed with her lean, warrior''s build¡ªdid not escape his notice.


    The faint tremors running through her spoke volumes about the pain and strain she was enduring, something he acknowledged silently but fully.


    Sensing her unease, perhaps even doubts about his medical expertise, he spoke up, his voice steady and calm as they pressed on.


    "Don''t worry," he began, navigating the terrain with practiced ease. "I may not be a formal medical shinobi, but I''ve been training in those arts for years. My mother was one of the best medical ninja, and she passed much of her knowledge on to me."


    He paused briefly, then added with a hint of candor, "I also know a technique that''s particrly useful against poisons like this one. I just haven''t had the opportunity to perform it on a living patient before."


    Pakura listened carefully, her sharp shinobi instincts weighing the sincerity in his words. There was reassurance in his tone, but the gravity of her situation kept her on edge. She allowed herself a moment of vulnerability, her voice softer than usual but stillced with the strength of a seasoned kunoichi.


    "Thank you, Hikari-san," she said, the faintest crack in her otherwiseposed demeanor. "Your words mean more than you might realize right now. I¡­ I was ready to die back there." She paused, gathering her thoughts before continuing. "Even if this technique of yours is untested, I''ll take the risk. It''s better than the alternative."


    Her gaze, though tired, remained sharp as she looked ahead. "That said, trusting someone from Konoha¡ªespecially in a situation like this¡ªis something I never imagined myself doing. But here we are. Just do your best; that''s all I ask."


    Her gratitude, however, quickly gave way to pragmatism. Her voice firmed, her shinobi instincts surfacing. "But Hikari-san," she continued, her tone now steady and resolute, "I understand nothinges without a price. You''re a shinobi of Konoha, and I know there must be something you expect in return for saving me."


    Her eyes narrowed slightly, her words carrying weight. "I''m prepared to negotiate. But let me be clear: if your terms jeopardize Sunagakure''s interests, I won''t agree to them, even if it means my life ends here and now."


    Letting her words settle, she softened her tone slightly, a gesture that acknowledged the delicate situation. "However, if your conditions are reasonable and don''tpromise my vige''s core values, I will honor them. If you manage to save me, you will have my lifelong gratitude¡ªand I''ll repay that debt with honor as long as it aligns with my principles and my people''s welfare."


    Hikari responded calmly and sincerely. "Let''s focus on your recovery first, Pakura-san," he said. What I want from you isn''t material. I hope we can build asting friendship and alliance through these turbulent times."


    His tone grew more serious. "I couldn''t stand knowing you were betrayed by your vige, all because of your strength. After everything you''ve done for them¡ªmissions, sacrifices¡ªthey turned on you. It''s not unlike what happens in Konoha. Those in power fear us, fear those of us with real gifts, and they act out of envy. You''ve seen it, haven''t you?"


    His words sharpened as he added, "It''s not just Konoha. Kirigakure is the same. The powerful are treated as threats instead of allies. That''s why I saved you. I see a kindred spirit in you, Pakura. If we stand together, we can challenge these injustices and grow stronger for ourselves and what we believe in."


    Pakura absorbed his words in silence, her sharp mind processing the weight of what he was saying. While his proposal carried a strategic undertone, she couldn''t deny the validation it offered. Hikari''s acknowledgment of her experiences touched something deep within her¡ªa sense of recognition she hadn''t felt in years.


    "Thank you, Hikari," she said finally, using his first name without hesitation. It felt natural, given the circumstances. "Your understanding of what I''ve been through¡­ it means something to me."


    She paused, her voice steady but reflective. "It''s rare to find someone who recognizes potential and wants to fight against the injustices thate with it. Your offer of an alliance¡ªbased on mutual strength and support¡ªseems promising. I''ll consider it."


    However, Pakura''s thoughts were swirling internally. While she was moved by Hikari''s understanding and open acknowledgment of their simr plights, she also remained skeptical.


    His words, though persuasive and seemingly heartfelt, at least to a certain extent, in her impression, also hinted to her at his open strategic positioning that she couldn''t ignore.


    She recognized the potential benefits of aligning with Hikari but was acutely aware that his ultimate goal might be to leverage her position within Sunagakure for broader influence.


    Nevertheless, despite her reservations, Pakura saw some truth in Hikari''s assertions. She understood that any alliance would inherently involve some level of influence, but Hikari''s emphasis on partnership over control suggested a more cooperative rtionship than a maniptive one.


    This realization provided a degree offort, reinforcing her willingness to consider his proposal seriously.


    Pakura also spected that Hikari might be positioning her to lead Sunagakure, perhaps even as the next Mizukage.


    This idea aligned surprisingly well with ensuring her vige''s safety and prosperity under her leadership, which would naturally extend her ability to protect her people''s interests in this hypothetical rtionship with Hikari and his faction.


    As she considered these thoughts, Pakura knew that formal negotiations and precise terms would need to wait.


    Physically and cognitively weakened, she was still processing the full scope of Hikari''s strategy, so she was not ready tomit to any specific actions yet.


    Yet, she recognized the potential for a partnership that could empower both her ambitions and her vige''s standing. For now, she chose to maintain a cautiously optimistic approach, ready to explore the possibilities that this new alliance and their rtionship could manifest.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 144. Pakura’s Treatment Beyond the Battlefield (1)

    144. Pakura¡¯s Treatment Beyond the Battlefield (1)


    Hikari''s Byakugan led them to a quiet spot away from the battlefield of two armies, well-hidden by dense foliage.


    It was a small clearing surrounded by tall trees, whose thick branches and leaves created a natural canopy overhead, giving them a good cover.


    Nearby, a small stream flowed, its soft gurgling adding to the calm of the secluded spot. The water was clear, running over smooth stones, and could be useful for cleaning or as part of Pakura''s treatment.


    The ground was soft, covered in moss and scattered leaves, making itfortable for Pakura to lie down while Hikari prepared to treat her.


    Light from the sun peeked through the tree branches, lighting up the area with spots of brightness.


    Even though they were not far from the conflict, this hidden spot felt peaceful and removed from the rest of the world, allowing them to focus on Pakura''s recovery without interruption.


    Settling into the quiet clearing, Hikari prepared to initiate the medical procedure on Pakura. He exined the steps he would take, ensuring she understood the nature and intensity of the treatment given its urgency and potential difort.


    "This medical technique I''ll be using is specialized against poisons; it is the best in Konoha...", Hikari started, maintaining eye contact to gauge her reaction and ensure herfort with the process,


    "It''s designed to draw out toxins and heal the damage they''ve caused. First, I''ll use my Byakugan to locate the disturbances in your chakra caused by the poison. Thanks to my Byakugan, it will also be rtively easier for me to perform it than it is for ordinary people."


    Hikari continued, "I''ll make a small incision using a chakra scalpel near the affected area. Then, I''ll introduce a medicinal fluid through the incision, which will encapste the poison and draw it out from your body. It''s effective but can be quite painful, so I need you to be as still as possible.",


    However, as Hikari prepared to begin, he noted the location of Pakura''s initial wound¡ªthe creamy skin of her exposed naturally thick thigh, where the poison had entered her system.


    Nheless, Hikari''s expression remainedposed outwardly as he addressed the necessary procedure,


    "The poison entered through your left thigh, I see...", He informed Pakura, his voice neutral to maintain ''professionalism'', "I''ll need to start the work from there to extract it effectively."


    Pakura, understanding the necessity, nheless felt a flush of shyness at the intimate nature of the treatment.


    Despite the urgency, her cheeks colored slightly, and she shifted a bit, trying to position herself in a way that offered him ess while maintaining her modesty.


    Hikari noticed her difort and nodded reassuringly, aiming to ease her unease. "I''ll be as quick and as careful as possible," he assured her, his tone gentle enough to calm her nerves.


    As he positioned himself to make the incision, Hikari couldn''t help but appreciate the contrast of her warrior-like strength against the vulnerability and grace she disyed at the moment. It was also a reminder of her humanity beneath the hardened shinobi exterior.


    Using a chakra scalpel, Hikari made a precise incision near the site where the poison had first entered from the ground.


    As he administered the medicinal fluid, he was acutely aware of Pakura''s tensed muscles and the effort she made to remain still through the difort.


    The dark tissue on her previously quite proportionally muscr and athletic thigh looked especially atrophied and full of convulsions. It was probably the most painful area.


    Following the injection, Hikari then manipted the medicinal fluid, now in the shape of a translucent orb, which immediately began its work, binding with the poison everywhere Hikari''s hand moved it, but mostly in the immediate surroundings of the initial wound.


    The process was intense, and Pakura''s breaths came in short gasps as she felt the fluid interact with the poison, drawing it out with a painful but necessary force. She gritted her teeth against the pain, her fists clenching.


    Hikari remained focused, watching closely through his Byakugan to monitor the progress and ensure the poison was thoroughly removed.


    The entire process was taxing for both Pakura and Hikari, but there was a palpable sense of relief as it concluded.


    Once the extraction nearedpletion, he applied a gentle flow of healing Yang Release type, precise chakra to soothe the area, help her body''s natural recovery systems, and aid the healing of the incision. "It''s almost over, Pakura..." he murmured, almost as much tofort her as to inform her.


    As the final traces of poison were removed, Pakura let out a long, slow breath, the relief palpable in her exhale.


    She nced down at her thigh, then up at Hikari, aplex mix of gratitude and newfound respect in her gaze.


    Despite the awkwardness of the situation, his professionalism and the sessful treatment forged a bond of trust that might have been impossible under any other circumstances.


    "Thank you, Hikari...", She said, her voice softer, the initial shyness reced by a quiet strength, "I wasn''t sure what to expect, but you handled that... well...",


    Her smile was tentative but genuine, acknowledging both the physical and emotional ordeal they had just navigated together.


    Hikari, meanwhile, observed her as she thanked him and smiled beautifully, in his impression, and as she regained some color in her face, her appearance clearly showing signs of relief and recovery already.


    Despite their clinical interaction, he couldn''t help but notice her resilience and the striking, attractive way she presented herself¡ªeven in a state of exhaustion and vulnerability.


    Pakura''s stunning face, glistening from sweat, though marked by the ordeal, carried a beauty that was enhanced rather than diminished by her evident fatigue in his mind.


    The wet, bruised contours of her worn-out, exhausted, fair-skinned body contrasted sharply with her delicate, harmonious facial features, framed by her damp hair sticking to her forehead and cheeks.


    Now that the procedure had passed already, Hikari noticed for the first time just how seductive she looked overall.


    She wore a smaller and more form-fitting ck tank top than usual shinobi attire, which seemed to entuate her warrior''s physique further. Hikari found himself momentarily distracted by her appearance.


    Despite his usual stoic and unfazed demeanor, a brief, involuntary swallow betrayed a sh of human reaction¡ªsurprise mixed with an uncharacteristic flicker of human male desire.


    At 20, she was indeed the oldest and one of the most captivating women he had ever been this close to, and her minor role in the original story he knew did nothing to diminish the impression she made in person.


    But, Hikari masked these thoughts well, maintaining aposed exterior as he spoke, "The procedure seems to have been effective, Pakura. You should feel significant relief soon...",


    He said, his voice calm and devoid of the internal conflict he had just experienced, "We''ll need to keep a close eye on your recovery for a bit more, but the worst should be behind."


    Hikari''s mind processed the sess of the medical intervention, acknowledging the practical application of years of theoretical study and training.


    As he watched Pakura begin to stabilize slowly, a strategic thought crossed his mind: ''All those years of medical mastery finally paid off, but surprisingly not for my benefit but by potentially securing a powerful ally like Pakura in Sunagakure.''


    He recalled that Sakura had used a simr technique to treat Kankuro in the original story of his previous life.


    The circumstances were different¡ªKankuro had been suffering for days under the influence of a slow-acting, torturous poison, making the treatment moreplex and demanding.


    In contrast, Pakura had been affected only briefly by a poison designed for rapid lethality, which simplified the extraction process somewhat.


    Hikari acknowledged that while Sakura was undoubtedly a more proficient medical ninja, the poison''s nature and the treatment''s timing yed crucial roles in the oues.


    Sasori''s poison used on Kankuro was crafted to debilitate over time, drawing out the victim''s agony.


    The quick-acting poison used on Pakura, while potentially deadly in the short term, didn''t integrate as deeply into the system, allowing for a quicker and more straightforward intervention.


    Reflecting on these differences, Hikari understood that his sess was not just a testament to his medical skill but also a consequence of the specific circumstances and the nature of the poison.


    Therefore, he knew he was not necessarily a better medical shinobi than Sakura.


    Nheless, he was pleased with the oue and the strategic advantage it could represent.


    Securing Pakura''s trust and cooperation could be invaluable, and he was prepared to leverage this incident to build asting alliance.

 145. Pakura’s Treatment Beyond the Battlefield (2)

    145. Pakura¡¯s Treatment Beyond the Battlefield (2)


    Hikari''s decision to save Pakura was strategic and deeply considered. It primarily presented an opportunity to align with such a highly capable, genius shinobi, fostering a rtionship that would help him navigate theplex dynamics of the shinobi world in the future.


    Moreover, by aiding Pakura, he saw a potential pathway to bring Sunagakure into his sphere of influence, mirroring his previous sesses with Kirigakure.


    If Pakura were to ascend to a leadership position such as the Kazekage, her alliance with him could significantly enhance his strategic positioning as well.


    Yet, the circumstances of their encounter held an element of coincidence that even Hikari hadn''t anticipated.


    As the sh between Konoha''s and Suna''s forces erupted around this strategic location, Hikari remained concealed within his tactically chosen ambush position, poised to strike at the most advantageous moment to benefit his forces.


    Utilizing his Byakugan, which boasted a superior rangepared to any other Hyuga on this front, he soon detected the unexpected development involving Pakura and Sasori and that whole stabbing in the back scene.


    The unfolding scenario captured his immediate attention, prompting him to intervene directly. Consequently, he swiftly moved to assist, foregoing his initial n to join the battle.


    This decision meant that he missed the opportunity to leverage his formidable strength in a surprise attack that could have given Konoha a significant advantage.


    Other hidden Hyuga members basically acted without him, but he got something way more important.


    Nheless, it was true that Pakura had been on his radar long before this moment¡ªnot just for her tactical value but also because she had struck a chord with him during his previous life experiences with the original story.


    Despite her minor role, Pakura''s unique blend of tragic backstory, loyalty, and striking beauty had left asting impression on him.


    She was one of the characters he remembered most vividly, admired not only for her potential as an ally but also for her personal qualities that resonated with his sense of aesthetics and narrative.


    A deeper part of him even somewhat respected people like her, a people fundamentally different from someone like him.


    The chance to connect with Pakura had always been a goal for Hikari, albeit one he expected to pursue gradually and carefully.


    That fate would bring them together so suddenly¡ªand under such circumstances¡ªwas unexpected.


    Therefore, this "easy" opportunity to save her life and potentially secure her loyalty was something he had hoped for but not expected.


    The serendipity of the situation was not lost on Hikari. It was a stroke of extraordinary luck, almost as if the universe had conspired to ce him at the right ce at the right time.


    Given the entrenched hostilities between their viges and even their personal positions, the likelihood of forging a connection with Pakura under normal circumstances was slim.


    So, from the beginning, Hikari recognized that a simr betrayal, from the Sunagakure to the one happening in the original series, in this reality, might be the only opening for a connection, but such an event was impossible for him to predict or "time."


    Therefore, his hopes of forging a bond under such specific and dire circumstances were minimal; before today, it was more of a thought experiment than aplete n.


    Yet, fate had yed into his hands in an almost miraculous fashion. Just as Pakura was betrayed, Hikari was conveniently nearby and able to intervene at the critical moment.


    It was an alignment of circumstances so perfect that it seemed like a gift from fate itself.


    He hadn''t expected to be presented with such an opportunity where he could step in as the "hero saving a beauty" at just the right moment, yet it yed out exactly like that.


    Nevertheless, from another angle, the events surrounding Pakura today made logical sense when considered within the broader context of the ongoing Third Great Shinobi War and the specific dynamics of this timeline inparison to the original one.


    Hikari knew from the original story that Pakura''s betrayal and assassination happened during this same WW3, but the timing and circumstances had shifted significantly here.


    With Konoha''s power posing a persistent, heightened threat, this time around, it seemed unlikely that Rasa, the Kazekage, would consider weakening his vige by eliminating its most capable shinobi before achieving a decisive victory over their biggest current enemy, Konohagakure.


    Additionally, today was meant to be a crucial moment for ¡ªan aggressive push into the Land of Fire aimed at securing a strategic and possibly final triumph that could force Konoha into signing severely disadvantageous treaties, signaling a clear, conclusive victory for the Sunagakure.


    In this altered reality, Rasa''s decision to order Pakura''s assassination on this particr day suggested he no longer deemed herpletely necessary beyond this precise moment.


    Hikari also spected that Rasa could not wait even a second longer after this point in time, perhaps stemming from the unintended consequences of his own actions and what he considered another Butterfly Effect he had inadvertently triggered in this world regarding the Sunagakure.


    In this alternate timeline, Pakura had grown significantly stronger than in the original series, possibly due to the ripple effects of changes Hikari had influenced everywhere globally and geopolitically.


    All of this caused Rasa to act probably earlier than in the original series and not even wait until the end of WW3. He probably didn''t want to give her a second more time to develop her strength anymore.


    Also, by choosing to eliminate Pakura during the chaos of this critical battle, Rasa had the perfect cover to mask her assassination.


    The tumult of war would easily obscure the true nature of her demise, making it appear as just another casualty in the heat of conflict.


    However, Rasa hadn''t anticipated Sasoriunching his attack prematurely, nor could he have predicted Hikari''s timely intervention and sessful rescue of Pakura. These unexpected factors disrupted his carefullyid ns.


    Hikari already understood that he had indeed be one of the key figures globally, not only in terms of personal strength but also in terms of political power and influence.


    Therefore, he was always acutely aware of the various Butterfly Effects his actions had likely triggered in this timeline.


    These included unexpected developments like Might Duy demonstrating his formidable power earlier than expected and surviving the aftermath, Tsunade oveing her phobia decades sooner than in the original timeline, and other significant changes.


    Hikari recognized that these were just a few examples, and he anticipated encountering many more ripple effects that would continue to shape the future in unforeseen ways.


    As Hikari refocused on the immediate situation, he realized it was time to shift the conversation with Pakura towards more strategic discussions.


    With her initial medical needs addressed and her condition stabilized, the opportunity toy the groundwork for their future coboration was at hand.

 146. Pakura’s Alliance and Aspirations with Hikari (1)

    146. Pakura¡¯s Alliance and Aspirations with Hikari (1)


    "Now that you are slowly recovering, can you fully think clearly again, Pakura?", Hikari began.


    Pakura took a deep breath, feeling the fog of pain and disorientation beginning to lift, thanksrgely to Hikari''s intervention,


    "Yes, I''m bing clearer...", She replied, her voice steadier than before.


    "How do you n to proceed from here?", Hikari nodded and asked again as he tested the waters, eager to better understand Pakura''s mindset and vision for the future after the recent upheaval.


    Pakura considered the question carefully, aware of the weight her decisions carried not only for her but potentially for her vige and the delicate bnce of power in the shinobi world,


    "Firstly, I need to ensure my recovery isplete and that I''m back at full strength...", She began, her tone pragmatic,


    "After that, I need to reassess my position within the Sunagakure. If Rasa and others see me as a threat or a tool to be discarded, my current presence there might be untenable for me."


    "How exactly do you n to deal with him next?", He asked again, keen to understand the full scope of her intentions.


    He then observed Pakura''s face as it transformed, and she mentioned dealing with the betrayal she had suffered.


    Her expression became hard and unforgiving, mirroring the depth of her emotions. His question had clearly touched a nerve, and her response was fierce.


    Pakura''s eyes zed with a cold fire, her voice steady but filled with a resolute venom. "I''m nning to deal with him in the same way that he nned to deal with me!" she dered.


    Her tone left no room for doubt about her resolve or the extent of her nning.


    "I see. I agree with your approach; I would''ve done the same, if not more. Retribution is a powerful motivator...", Hikarimented carefully.


    "However, if that is the path you choose, it will be critical to n meticulously. Rash actions could lead to unwanted consequences, not just for you but for all involved.",


    He paused, considering his next words, "If you aim to take on the Kazekage and his faction, you''ll need more than just the element of surprise or the righteousness of your cause.",


    "You''ll need allies, resources, and perhaps most importantly, a strategic n that ounts for all possible responses from your adversaries.",


    "I am willing to assist you in this endeavor, Pakura. Together, we can ensure that your actions lead to the oues you desire, securing your position and possibly transforming the power structure within Sunagakure to favor a more just and stable leadership from now."


    After a moment of reflection, turning her head upwards to face him directly and look him right in the eyes with her own hazel eyes, Pakura responded, not yetmitting to any specific course of action but as if seeking further guidance from him first or testing him,


    "Your perspective is valuable, Hikari. Before I make any decisions, I would appreciate your advice on my current situation. How do you currently assess the dynamics within Sunagakure, and where do you think I stand? How do you think I could aplish my goal?"


    Hikari paused briefly, considering Pakura''s situation with a strategic eye before responding to her inquiry,


    "I''m sure you know the answers to those questions better than me, Pakura; after all, I''m not from Sunagakure like you are.


    But usingmon sense, seeing what happened to you just now, and how far they were willing to go to get rid of you, it''s obvious that negotiations are out of the question...", Hikari began,ying out the stark realities of her position.


    "And I doubt that you would want peace with him now, considering his treachery and stabbing in the back. So, it looks like some form of a violent showdown is the only possible approach in general.", He finished.


    "You are right...", She began, her voice carrying a new depth of determination, "It is time for the wretched Rasa, his entire n, and all those nobles and core supporters to step aside and for me to attempt reform within my birth vige.",


    "This isn''t just about personal revenge. It''s about using my strength and reputation to bring positive change...", She continued, her tone firm and unwavering, "I have no qualms about using some level of violence to remove him and those who blindly support him to the end.",


    "I will begin to raise my own forces while we are still on this front. I''ll share my story, reveal what was done to me, and see who is willing to join me in this endeavor among our shinobi."


    Hikari nodded as if in agreement with her choice and resolution and asked casually, "I guess that you will probably have more support among the ordinary and civilian-origin shinobi then?", He asked, his voice carrying a hint of curiosity about the inner workings of the Suna.


    "Yes, that''s exactly it, as all of the nobles and higher-ups are already aligned with Rasa and his n for generations, including the affiliated shinobi...", Pakura confirmed, her voice tinged with a mix of revtion and bitterness,


    "Rasa and his n, known for their Ma Release kekkei genkai, have historically monopolized the Kazekage position, as only male leaders of that n could be one and everyone epted it as fact for some reason...",


    "But I know what the reason is now - As I have experienced it firsthand on my own skin... It certainly wasn''t through honorable means, to put it mildly...",


    "It turned out that they even call themselves the ''Kazekage n'' nowadays, simply because they''ve systematically eliminated anypetition over the generations, including my ancestors who were also Scorch Release users. My lineage has effectively been erased...",


    Her expression hardened as she continued, "I always sensed a certain coldness from Rasa and members of that n, probably stemming from envy and resentment towards my abilities and respect I gathered with ordinary shinobi and vigers...",


    "Thought they managed to mask their true feelings well, probably needing my strength to achieve their goals against Konoha and to garner more favors from the Wind Daimyo. From the start, they nned to dispose of me once I was no longer useful during this war fast...",


    Pakura''s fists clenched tightly as she pieced together the betrayal, "So, my entire life was a fabrication, a tool for their ambitions.",


    "I can''t believe I was so blind, so loyal to those who would eventually try to butcher me like that. I never questioned them, never harbored a single doubt about their intentions, let alone sought to challenge their authority.",


    Her face was a portrait of fury mixed with painful rity as she recognized the full extent of the maniption she had been subjected to from a very young age.


    "Now, free from their influence and propaganda, I see everything clearly. The truth was right before my eyes, and I''m finally awake to it.",


    Pakura''s realization was a turning point, fueling her resolve to take action against the very forces that had shaped her life under pretenses.


    But, then, Pakura shifted the conversation to a crucial point, reflecting on the immediate future and what exactly Hikari expected from her in return for saving her life.


    Her gaze fixed intently on him, searching for clues in his expression as she formted her question.


    "You''ve indeed saved my life in the end, Hikari, and for that, I''m deeply grateful...", Pakura began, her tone serious,


    "But now, I need to understand what you expect from me moving forward. You''ve spoken of alliances and support, but what exactly do you envision as my role in this? How do I fit into your ns, especially considering theplex dynamics at y?",


    Her question was direct, seeking rity on her position and the expectations set by Hikari.


    This was crucial for her to navigate her next steps wisely and to understand the potentialmitments and challenges she might face in aligning with him.


    Hikari responded with a true sincerity that seemed to soften his usual calcted demeanor, "I understand it might be difficult to fully trust my intentions right now, but I want you to know that when I said those words back there, it was with genuine sincerity...",


    He began, meeting Pakura''s gaze steadily, "Building asting friendship with you, based on mutual respect and support, between us, is truly what I aim for over the long term.",


    He paused for a moment before continuing, "In the immediate term, however, I see an opportunity to also support you in taking your rightful ce within Sunagakure.",


    "If bing the new Kazekage is part of your next n, then it aligns well with my goal of supporting a friend in need. I''m prepared to assist you in avenging the wrongs done to you and iming the leadership position you deserve based on all merit andmon sense.",


    "Therefore, as soon as we return to the battlefield here, I canmand Konoha''s forces to strategically target only Rasa''s loyalists after also giving you some time to form and rally a new faction within Sunagakure''s shinobi there, after exining to them the truth about what Rasa and Sasori did against you. So, once you''ve secured your faction in peace, I will help you eliminate those who continue to stand against you and don''t join your rightful cause...",


    He concluded with a nod toward future peace and stability, "Afterwards, we can work together to negotiate peace between our factions and viges. This would then allow you to return to the Sunagakure not just as a survivor but as a leader ready to bring change..."


    Pakura gazed at Hikari''s handsome face the entire time, with her own expression also softening as he spoke with a sincerity she hadn''t anticipated.


    The tone of his voice, his choice of words, and his readiness to support her so significantly¡ªit was all strikingly different from what she had expected from someone from a rival vige. Especially a person she had just met amidst such turmoil.


    Deep down, her woman''s social instincts told her that he was being mostly sincere, a realization that caught her off guard.


    For a moment, Pakura allowed herself to acknowledge how touched she was by his actions and words.


    Though she knew Hikari''s reputation as a calcted and somewhat ruthless individual shaped by the relentless political strife within Konoha, his current approach seemed to transcend mere strategic interest. Could there be an element of genuine regard in his motivations?


    As she processed these thoughts, her bodynguage unconsciously mirrored her internal shift; she leaned slightly closer to Hikari, drawn by a mix of gratitude and a burgeoning trust.


    Her voice carried a hint of curiosity and vulnerability as she asked, "So you don''t desire anything from Sunagakure once I manage to take over the Kazekage title and eliminate Rasa?",


    This question was crucial. It wasn''t just about confirming his intentions¡ªit was also about understanding the future dynamics of their potential alliance.


    Would his supporte with strings attached, or was he truly offering help without expecting significant concessions from Sunagakure under her leadership?


    Hikari responded with a yful tone, feigning offense at her skepticism first, "I''m a little hurt that you still don''t believe me, Pakura...",


    He joked, lightening the mood with a smile, "No, there really are no hidden strings attached." he assured her, his tone still tinged with humor.


    "And even if I did have some grand n, how could I possibly ensure that you''d still listen to me once you be the new ''mighty'' Kazekage of Sunagakure? I have no way of assuring that...", He continued, his words highlighting the practical limits of his influence and tease.


    "So, ''charming'' you over here might indeed be my best strategy...", Hikari added with a chuckle, teasing her again.


    Then, his expression turned a bit more serious, "But honestly, you know the situation in Konoha. We''re at war with all the great shinobi viges. So, simply achieving a peace agreement with Sunagakure would be a significant victory for me and my faction and greatly enhance our standing within the vige, simr to what I achieved in Kirigakure.",


    While Hikari maintained a jovial and supportive demeanor with Pakura, internally, his strategic calctions ran deep.


    The situation in Sunagakure was markedly different and more ''difficult'' from what he had navigated in Kirigakure, where he wielded a more significant leverage.


    In the Sunagakure, instead, without Pakura''s cooperation, his ability to influence vige affairs was virtually non-existent.


    His primary tactic, therefore, was to genuinely win Pakura over as an ally in the long run.


    Pakura, significantly older and more experienced than Mei from Kirigakure, also presented a different kind of challenge.


    Unlike Mei, Pakura''s seasoned perspective and depth of experience meant that simplistic overtures would be insufficient.


    Promising a genuine long-term alliance while simultaneously expecting concessions right away could be seen as maniptive, potentially jeopardizing the trust he sought to build.


    Hence, adopting a hands-off approach and genuinely supporting her without immediate expectations seemed the most prudent strategy in Hikari''s view.


    As for whether there was ''sincerity'' in his previous words toward her, well, there was some ''sincerity'' indeed.


    At this point, Hikari couldn''t help but look at Pakura as his future ''woman''.


    So how could he not empathize and not want to support her then? It was perfectly logical.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!